4 30345 03 Unidades Extrangeiras Da Construcao

03.
Unidades extrangeiras da construção

para
MG900, Equipamento de soldagem
Tipo: MG900
N.o: 4109.30345

Ano: 2008

Cliente: Metalfrio Solutions Ltda.
Av. Abrahão Gonçalves Braga
412 Vila Liviero
04186-220 São Paulo
Brazil
product news
Flow sensor in robust

Fluid sensors and diagnostic systems
stainless steel housing.

Increased sensitivity across
the measuring range.
Increased repeatability
across the measuring range.
Simplified setting mode
for quick set-up.
Variable process connection
using adapters.
Reliable monitoring of gaseous
and liquid media.
Electronic locking of the
setting values.
Simple, fast and flexible mounting.

The flow sensors of the SI5 series can be integrated into
almost every application by means of a wide selection
of process adapters. The robust stainless steel housing
provides high reliability even in cases of harsh environ-
mental conditions.
The unit is unaffected by the orientation of the sensing
face with respect to the direction of flow, providing
increased flexibility of installation.
Easy handling and high functionality
Adjustment to the flow and setting of the switch points
are carried out using pushbuttons. Current flow and
switch point are indicated with the local multi-coloured
LEDs.
Electronic locking of the settings and factory reset of the
parameters provide additional safety.
fluid sensors
and diagnostic
systems
position
Type SI flow sensor in a cooling water monitoring appli-
sensors
and object
cation.
recognition
bus,
identification
and control systems
Flow sensors
Fluid sensors and diagnostic systems

Setting range Greatest Medium Response Repeatability Ub IB Order
liquid / gas sensitivity temperature time [% of the no.
[cm/s] [cm/s] [°C] [s] measured value] [V] [mA]
M12 connector · output function

3...300 / 200...3000 3...100 / 200...1200 -25...80 1...10 5 (0...100 cm /s) 19...36 DC 250 SI5000
Dimensions Further technical data

Type
1 2 SI5000
50 63
Pressure resistance [bar] 30

25
M12 x1
Power-on delay time [s] 15

Short circuit / reverse polarity protection •/•
Protection IP 67, III
113
14
Operating temperature [°C] -25...80

65
22 via
60
Switch point setting

45
pushbuttons
Optical function indication LED 10
7,7
high-grade stainless steel
Sensor material / housing
(316S12) / stainless steel
1) LED function indication
2) Setting buttons
Connectors and splitter boxes
Wiring diagram
Type Accessories Order
1 no.
L+
2
n.c.
ifm article no. 7511128 · Printed in Germany on non - chlorine paper. · We reserve the right to make technical alterations without prior notice. · 03.2006
4
Socket, M12,
3 E10900
L 2 m black, PUR cable
Socket, M12,
E10901
Accessories 5 m black, PUR cable
Socket, M12,
Type Description Order E10906
2 m black, PUR cable
no.
Socket, M12,
E10907
Adapter M18 x 1.5 - L18 for mounting in Socket, M12,
E40104 E10909
T pieces 2 m black, PUR cable
Socket, M12,
E10910
Adapter, M18 x M1.5 - G1/2 E40096 Socket, M12,

E10915
Socket, M12,
E10916
Welding adapter,
E40124
M18 x 1.5 - Ø 24 mm
Flow adapter (for low

E40129
flow rates), M12 x 1 - G 1/8
For further technical data please go to: www.ifm-electronic.com

Flow sensors
SI5000
SID10ABBFPKG/US
Flow monitor
Compact type for adapter
Quick disconnect
Process connection:
internal thread M18 x 1.5 for adapter
1: LED display 2: setting pushbutton

Application liquids and gases
Electrical design DC PNP
Output normally open / closed programmable
Operating voltage [V] 19...36 DC

Current rating [mA] 250
Short-circuit protection Yes (non-latching)
Reverse polarity protection yes
overload protection yes
Voltage drop [V] < 2.5
Current consumption [mA] < 60
Max. temperature gradient of

medium [K/min] 300
Pressure rating [bar] 30
Liquids
Medium temperature [°C] -25...80
Setting range [cm/s] 3...300
Greatest sensitivity [cm/s] 3...100
Gases
Medium temperature [°C] -25...80
Setting range [cm/s] 200...3000
Greatest sensitivity [cm/s] 200...800
ifm efector, inc. 782 Springdale Drive, Exton, PA We reserve the right to make technical alterations without prior notice. — US - SI5000 - 1/2 — 23.01.2007
19341
SI5000
Adjustment of the switch point pushbuttons
Accuracy of switch point [cm/s] ± 2...± 10 *)
Hysteresis [cm/s] 2...5 *)
Repeatability [cm/s] 1...5 *)
Power-on delay time [s] 10
Response time [s] 1...10
Temperature drift [cm/s x 1/K] 0.1 **)
Operating temperature [°C] -25...80
Protection IP 67, III
Shock resistance [g] 50 (DIN / IEC 68-2-27, 11 ms)
Vibration resistance [g] 20 (DIN / IEC 68-2-6, 55-2000 Hz)
EMC EN 61000-4-2 ESD: 4 kV CD / 8 kV AD
EN 61000-4-3 HF radiated: 10 V/m
EN 61000-4-4 Burst: 2 kV
EN 61000-4-6 HF conducted: 10 V
Housing material stainless steel (304S15); PC (Macrolon); PBT-GF 20; EPDM/X (Santoprene)
Sensor material stainless steel (316S12); O-ring: FPM 8 x 1.5 gr 80° Shore A
Function display
Function LED 10 LEDs, three-colour
Connection M12 connector
Wiring
Remarks *) for water; 5...100 cm/s; 25°C (factory setting)

**) for water; 5...100 cm/s; 10...70°C
ifm efector, inc. 782 Springdale Drive, Exton, PA — We reserve the right to make technical alterations without prior notice. — US — SI5000 - 2/2 — 23.01.2007
19341
Bedienungsanleitung
Operating instructions
Notice pour utilisateurs
Strömungswächter
Flow monitor
Capteurs de débit
DEUTSCH
SI5000
SI5001
ENGLISH
09/06
704056/01
FRANÇAIS
Inhalt
Bestimmungsgemäße Verwendung . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....3
Montage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....4
Elektrischer Anschluss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....6
Inbetriebnahme und Einstellungen für Wasser . . . . . . . . . . . ....7
High Flow-Abgleich (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Schaltpunkt verändern (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Zusätzliche Einstellungen (optional)
Low Flow-Abgleich . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Schaltausgang konfigurieren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Werkseinstellung wieder herstellen (Reset) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Gerät verriegeln / entriegeln . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Fehler beim Abgleich . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Betrieb / Wartung . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Maßzeichnung . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Technische Daten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Sicherheitshinweise
• Das Gerät entspricht den einschlägigen Vorschriften und EG-
Richtlinien.
• Unsachgemäßer oder nicht bestimmungsgemäßer Gebrauch kön-
nen zu Funktionsstörungen des Gerätes oder zu unerwünschten
Auswirkungen in Ihrer Applikation führen.
• Deshalb dürfen Montage, elektrischer Anschluss, Inbetriebnahme,
Bedienung und Wartung des Gerätes nur durchgeführt werden
durch ausgebildetes, vom Anlagenbetreiber autorisiertes
Fachpersonal.
2
Bestimmungsgemäße Verwendung
Einsatzbereich
Das Gerät überwacht die Strömung flüssiger und gasförmiger Medien.
Funktionsweise
• Das Gerät erfasst nach dem kalorimetrischen Messprinzip die
Strömungsgeschwindigkeit
• und schaltet den Ausgang: Ausgang geschlossen, wenn das
Medium strömt / Ausgang offen, wenn kein Medium strömt.
Dies gilt für das Gerät im Auslieferungszustand: Ausgang = Schließer. Bei
Bedarf können Sie den Ausgang auf Öffnerfunktion umstellen (→ Seite 9).
Danach gilt: Ausgang offen, wenn das Medium strömt.
• Steigt die Strömungsgeschwindigkeit, ändert sich der Schaltzustand

bei Erreichen des Schaltpunkts.
• Sinkt die Strömungsgeschwindigkeit wieder, ändert sich der
Schaltzustand, wenn der Wert “SP minus Hysterese” erreicht ist.
Die Hysterese verändert sich mit der Strömungsgeschwindigkeit und sie wird
wesentlich beeinflusst vom eingestellten Erfassungsbereich.
Sie beträgt 2...5 cm/s bei Einstellung 5...100 cm/s (= Werkseinstellung), sie
vergrößert sich bei höheren Strömungsgeschwindigkeiten.
DEUTSCH
Die typische Ansprechzeit des Geräts beträgt 1...10 s. Sie kann durch
Einstellung des Schaltpunkts beeinflusst werden:
• Niedriger Schaltpunkt = schnelle Reaktion bei Strömungsanstieg.
• Hoher Schaltpunkt = schnelle Reaktion bei Strömungsabfall.
3
Montage
Durch Prozessadapter ist das Gerät adaptierbar an unterschiedliche
Prozessanschlüsse.
• Adapter sind gesondert als Zubehör zu bestellen.
Korrekter Sitz des Geräts und Dichtigkeit des Anschlusses sind nur
mit ifm-Adaptern gewährleistet.
• Für kleine Durchflussmengen sind ifm-Adapterblöcke lieferbar.
Montageort
Generell
• Die Sensorspitze soll vollständig
vom Medium umflossen werden.
• Eintauchtiefe des Messfühlers:
mindestens 12 mm.
12mm
Empfohlen
• Bei waagerecht verlaufenden
Rohren: Montage seitlich.
• Bei senkrecht verlaufenden
Rohren: Montage in der
Steigleitung.
Bedingt möglich
• Rohr waagerecht / Montage von
unten: Wenn Rohrleitung frei
von Ablagerungen ist.
• Rohr waagerecht / Montage von
oben: Wenn Rohrleitung voll-
ständig mit Medium gefüllt ist.
Zu vermeiden
• Die Sensorspitze darf die
Rohrwand nicht berühren.
• Montage nicht in nach unten
offenen Fallrohren!
4
Störeinflüsse im Leitungssystem: Einbauten in der Rohrleitung,
Krümmungen, Ventile, Reduzierungen u. ä. führen zu Verwirbelungen
des Mediums. Dies beeinträchtigt die Funktion des Geräts.
Empfehlung: Abstände einhalten zwischen Sensor und Stör-
einflüssen:
5...10 x D 3...5 x D
S Low Flow High
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Setpoint
Low Flow High
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Setpoint
S
D = Rohrdurchmesser; S = Störeinflüsse
Montagevorgang
Stellen Sie sicher, dass die Anlage während der
Montagearbeiten druckfrei ist.
Stellen Sie sicher, dass während der Montagearbeiten keine
Medien am Montageort auslaufen können.
1. Schmieren Sie die Gewinde von Prozessanschluss (1), Adapter (2)
und Überwurfmutter (3).
Achtung: Es darf kein Schmiermittel auf die Sensorspitze (A) gelan-
DEUTSCH
gen.
2. Schrauben Sie den passenden Adapter auf den Prozessanschluss.
3. Setzen Sie den Strömungswächter auf den Adapter und ziehen Sie
die Überwurfmutter an; (Anzugsdrehmoment max. 50 Nm). Halten
Sie dabei das Gerät in seiner Ausrichtung.
1 2 3
A
í
ì
î
5
Elektrischer Anschluss
Das Gerät darf nur von einer Elektrofachkraft installiert werden.
Befolgen Sie die nationalen und internationalen Vorschriften zur
Errichtung elektrotechnischer Anlagen.
Spannungsversorgung nach EN50178, SELV, PELV.
Schalten Sie die Anlage spannungsfrei und schließen Sie das Gerät
folgendermaßen an:
SI5000 SI5001
Steckeransicht
(am Gerät) (p-schaltend) (n-schaltend)
1 BN 1 BN
2 L+ L+
4 BK 4 BK
3 1
3 BU 3 BU
4 L L
Adernfarben bei ifm-Kabeldosen:

1 = BN (braun), 3 = BU (blau), 4 = BK (schwarz)
Störanzeige:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Kurzschluss am Schaltausgang
Betriebsanzeige und rote LEDs leuchten im
Wechsel.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
LED = grün LED = orange LED = rot
6
Inbetriebnahme und Einstellungen für Wasser
(Für andere Medien als Wasser → Seite 9: Low Flow-Abgleich).
1. Schalten Sie die Versorgungsspannung ein.
Alle LEDs leuchten auf und verlöschen wieder schrittweise.
Während dieser Zeit ist der Ausgang geschlossen (wenn der
Ausgang als Schließer konfiguriert ist). Damit befindet sich das
Gerät im Betriebsmodus.
2. Lassen Sie die Normalströmung in der Anlage fließen.
3. Schauen Sie auf die Anzeige.
Beispiel 1 • Die grünen LEDs zeigen die aktuel-
le Strömung (die LEDs 0 bis 9 reprä-
Low Flow High sentieren den Bereich zwischen
Strömungsstillstand und Maximal-
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 strömung).
Setpoint • Eine leuchtende LED zeigt die
Position des Schaltpunkts (orange
= Ausgang geschlossen, rot =
Ausgang offen.
Das Gerät wird mit folgender Werkseinstellung ausgeliefert:
Erfassungsbereich = 5...100 cm/s in Wasser; Position des Schaltpunkts
ist LED 7.
• Ist die Werkseinstellung für Ihre Applikation geeignet, zeigt das
Display Beispiel 1. In diesem Fall ist keine weitere Einstellung nötig.
DEUTSCH
• Unterschreitet Ihre Normalströmung den Darstellungsbereich des
Displays (Beispiel 2), haben Sie 2 Möglichkeiten: Verschieben Sie den
Schaltpunkt oder führen Sie einen High Flow-Abgleich durch.
• Überschreitet Ihre Normalströmung den Darstellungsbereich des
Displays (Beispiel 3, LED 9 blinkt), sollten Sie einen High Flow-
Abgleich durchführen.
Beispiel 2 Beispiel 3
Low Flow High Low Flow High
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Setpoint Setpoint
Sie können die Werkseinstellung jederzeit wieder herstellen (→ Seite 9).

7
Schaltpunkt verändern (optional)
Bei Werkseinstellung liegt der Schaltpunkt auf LED 7. Eine Änderung
ist sinnvoll,
• wenn das Display Beispiel 2 zeigt,
• wenn die Strömung stark schwankt oder pulsiert,
• oder wenn eine schnellere Ansprechzeit des Geräts gewünscht ist
(Niedriger Schaltpunkt = schnelle Reaktion bei Strömungsanstieg,
Hoher Schaltpunkt = schnelle Reaktion bei Strömungsabfall).
Führen Sie folgende Schritte aus:

1. Kurz die Taste oder drücken.
Schaltpunkt-LED blinkt.
2. Taste oder drücken so oft erforderlich. Jeder Tastendruck
verschiebt die LED um eine Position in die angezeigte Richtung.
Hinweis: Wird 2 s lang keine Taste gedrückt, geht das Gerät mit dem neu
eingestellten Wert in den Betriebsmodus.
High Flow-Abgleich (optional)

Das Gerät legt die vorhandene Strömung als Normalströmung fest
und passt die Displaydarstellung an (alle LEDs außer der Schaltpunkt-
LED leuchten grün).

1. Normalströmung in der Anlage fließen lassen.
2. Taste drücken und festhalten.
LED 9 leuchtet, nach ca. 5 s blinkt sie.
3. Taste loslassen.
Damit ist das Gerät an Ihre Strömungsverhältnisse angepasst. Es geht
in den Betriebsmodus, das Display sollte nun Beispiel 1 zeigen.
Hinweis: Der Abgleich beeinflusst den Schaltpunkt: Er wird proportional
erhöht (maximal bis auf LED 7).
8
Zusätzliche Einstellungen (optional)
Low Flow-Abgleich
Wird das Gerät in anderen Medien als Wasser eingesetzt (z. B. in Luft),
sollten Sie das Gerät zusätzlich an die Minimalströmung anpassen.
Achtung: Der folgende Abgleich darf nur nach dem High Flow-
Abgleich durchgeführt werden.

1. Minimalströmung in der Anlage fließen lassen oder für Strömungs-
stillstand sorgen.
2. Taste drücken und festhalten.
3. Taste loslassen. Das Gerät übernimmt den neuen Wert und geht in
den Betriebsmodus.
Schaltausgang konfigurieren
Das Gerät wird als Schließer ausgeliefert. Bei Bedarf können Sie den
Ausgang auf Öffnerfunktion umstellen:
Taste mindestens 15 s lang drücken.
Nach 10 s wird die aktuelle Einstellung angezeigt: LEDs 5...9
DEUTSCH
leuchten orange (= Ausgang in Schließerfunktion).
Nach ca. 15 s blinken LEDs 0...4 orange. Lassen Sie die Taste jetzt
los. Der Ausgang ist umgestellt auf Öffnerfunktion.
Für erneute Umstellung wiederholen Sie den Vorgang.
Werkseinstellung wieder herstellen (Reset)
Taste mindestens 15 s lang drücken.
Nach ca. 15 s blinken LEDs 0...9 orange. Lassen Sie die Taste jetzt
los.
Alle Einstellungen werden auf Werkseinstellung zurückgesetzt:
- Arbeitsbereich: 5 ...100 cm/s für Wasser
- Schaltpunkt: LED 7
- Ausgangsfunktion: Schließer
- Nicht verriegelt.
9
Gerät verriegeln / entriegeln
Das Gerät läßt sich elektronisch verriegeln, so dass unbeabsichtigte
Fehleingaben verhindert werden: Drücken Sie im Betriebsmodus 10 s
lang gleichzeitig beide Einstelltasten. Sobald die Anzeige verlischt, ist
das Gerät verriegelt oder entriegelt.
Auslieferungszustand: Nicht verriegelt.
Fehler beim Abgleich

Ist der Abgleich nicht möglich, blinken alle LEDs rot. Danach geht das
Gerät mit unveränderten Werten in den Betriebsmodus.
Mögliche Ursachen / Abhilfe:
• Fehler bei der Montage.
Lesen Sie das Kapitel Montage (Seite 4, 5). Prüfen Sie, ob alle
Vorgaben erfüllt worden sind.
• Der Abstand zwischen Maximalströmung und Minimalströmung ist
zu gering.
Erhöhen Sie die Strömungsdifferenz und führen Sie den Abgleich
erneut durch.
• Reihenfolge High Flow- / Low Flow-Abgleich nicht eingehalten.
Führen Sie die beiden Abgleichvorgänge erneut in der richtigen
Reihenfolge durch.
10
Betrieb / Wartung
• Nach jedem Einschalten der Versorgungsspannung leuchten alle
LEDs auf und verlöschen wieder schrittweise (während dieser Zeit
ist der Ausgang geschlossen, wenn der Ausgang als Schließer kon-
figuriert ist). Danach ist das Gerät betriebsbereit.
• Bei Ausfall oder Unterbrechung der Betriebsspannung bleiben alle
Einstellungen erhalten.
Betriebsanzeigen
Grüner LED-Balken: Aktuelle Strömung
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
innerhalb des Darstellungssbereichs.
Anzeige des Schaltpunkts (SP):
- LED orange: Ausgang geschlossen.
- LED rot: Ausgang offen.
LED 9 blinkt: Aktuelle Strömung oberhalb des
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Darstellungsbereichs.
LED 0 blinkt: Aktuelle Strömung weit unterhalb

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
des Darstellungsbereichs.
Störanzeigen
DEUTSCH
Kurzschluss am Schaltausgang:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Betriebsanzeige und rote LEDs leuchten im
Wechsel.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Ist der Kurzschluss behoben, geht das Gerät
sofort wieder in den normalen Betriebszustand.
Im Display erscheint die aktuelle
Betriebsanzeige.
Anzeige AUS Betriebsspannung zu gering (< 19 V) oder
(keine LED leuchtet): ausgefallen.
Sorgen Sie für eine korrekte
Spannungsversorgung.
LED = grün LED = orange LED = rot
11
Wartungsempfehlung: Überprüfen Sie die Sensorspitze von Zeit zu
Zeit auf Ablagerungen.
Reinigen Sie sie gegebenenfalls mit einem weichen Tuch. Fest anhaf-
tende Ablagerungen (z. B. Kalk) lassen sich mit handelsüblichem
Essigreiniger entfernen.
Maßzeichnung
1 2
50 63
25
M12 x1
113
14
22
65
60
45
7,7
1: LED-Balkenanzeige
2: Einstelltaste
12
Technische Daten
Betriebsspannung [V] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 ... 36 DC1)
Strombelastbarkeit [mA] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250; Kurzschlussschutz, getaktet;
verpolungssicher / überlastfest
Spannungsabfall [V] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . < 2,5
Stromaufnahme [mA] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . < 60
Flüssige Medien
Mediumtemperatur [°C]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -25 ... +80
Einstellbereich [cm/s]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 ... 300
Größte Empfindlichkeit [cm/s] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 ... 100
Temperaturgradient [K/min] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Gasförmige Medien
Mediumtemperatur [°C]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -25 ... +80
Einstellbereich [cm/s] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 ... 3000
Größte Empfindlichkeit [cm/s] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 ... 800
Schaltpunktgenauigkeit [cm/s]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ± 2...± 102)
Hysterese [cm/s] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2...52)
Reproduzierbarkeit [cm/s] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1...52)
Temperaturdrift [cm/s x 1/K] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0,13)
Ansprechzeit [s] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 ... 10
Bereitschaftsverzögerungszeit [s] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10, optisch signalisiert
Druckfestigkeit [bar] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Umgebungstemperatur [°C] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -25 ... +80
Schutzart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IP 67
Schutzklasse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III
DEUTSCH
Schockfestigkeit [g] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 (DIN / IEC 68-2-27, 11 ms)
Vibrationsfestigkeit [g] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 (DIN / IEC 68-2-6, 55-2000 Hz)
Gehäusewerkstoffe . . . . . . . . . . . . V2A (1.4301); PC (Macrolon); PBT-GF 20
Sensorwerkstoff . . . . . . . . V4A (1.4404); O-Ring: FPM 8x1,5 gr 80° Shore A
EMV
EN 61000-4-2 ESD: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 kV CD / 8 kV AD
EN 61000-4-3 HF gestrahlt: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 V/m
EN 61000-4-4 Burst: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 kV
EN 61000-4-6 HF leitungsgebunden: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 V
1) nach EN50178, SELV, PELV;
2) für Wasser; 5...100 cm/s; 25°C (Werkseinstellung)
3) für Wasser; 5...100 cm/s; 10...70°C
Das Gerät entspricht der Norm EN 61000-6-2
13
Contents
Function and features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Set-up and settings for water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
High flow adjustment (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Change the switch point (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Additional settings (optional)
Low flow adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Configure the switching output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Restore factory setting (reset) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Lock / unlock the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Error during adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Operation / maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Scale drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Safety instructions
• The unit conforms to the relevant regulations and EC directives.
• Improper or non-intended use may lead to malfunctions of the
unit or to unwanted effects in your application.
• That is why installation, electrical connection, set-up, operation
and maintenance of the unit must be carried out by qualified per-
sonnel authorised by the plant operator.
14
Functions and features
Application area
The unit monitors the flow of liquid and gaseous media.
Operating principle
• The unit detects the flow speed to the calorimetric measuring prin-
ciple
• and switches the output: output closed if medium is flowing,
output open if no medium is flowing.
This applies to the unit on delivery: output = normally open. In case of need
you can change the output to normally closed (→ page 21). It then applies:
output open if medium is flowing.
• If the flow speed increases, the switching status changes when the
switch point is reached.
• If the flow speed falls again, the switching status changes if the
value “SP minus hysteresis” is reached.
The hysteresis changes with the flow speed and it is essentially influenced by
the set monitoring range.
It is 2...5 cm/s for the setting 5...100cm/s (= factory setting), it increases with
higher flow speeds.
The typical response time of the unit is 1...10 s. The setting can be
influenced by the switch point.
• Low switch point = quick reaction with rising flow.
• High switch point = quick reaction with falling flow.
ENGLISH
15
Mounting
Using process adapters the unit can be adapted to different process
connections.
• The adapters must be ordered separately as accessories.
A correct fit of the unit and ingress resistance of the connection are
only ensured using ifm adapters.
• For small flow rates ifm adapter blocks are available.
Mounting location
General
• The sensor tip is to be complete-
ly surrounded by the media.
• Insertion depth of the sensor:
minimum 12 mm.
12mm
Recommended
• For horizontal pipes: mounting
from the side.
• For vertical pipes: mounting in
the rising pipe.
Conditional
• Horizontal pipe / mounting from
the bottom: if the pipe is free
from build-up.
• Horizontal pipe / mounting from
the top: if the pipe is completely
filled with medium.
To avoid
• The sensor tip must not be in
contact with the pipe wall.
• Do not mount in downpipes that
are open at the bottom!
16
Sources of interference in the pipe system: Components integrat-
ed in the pipes, bends, valves, reductions, etc. lead to turbulence of
the medium. This affects the function of the unit.
Recommendation: Distances between sensor and sources of inter-
ference:
5...10 x D 3...5 x D
S Low Flow High
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Setpoint
Low Flow High
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Setpoint
S
D = pipe diameter; S = sources of interference
Mounting operation
Ensure that no pressure is applied to the installation during
mounting.
Ensure that no media can leak at the mounting location during
mounting.
1. Grease the threads of the process connection (1), adapter (2) and
nut (3).
Note: The sensor tip (A) must not be in contact with grease.
2. Screw the suitable adapter onto the process connection.
3. Place the flow monitor onto the adapter and tighten the nut, (tight-
ening torque max. 50 Nm). Ensure that the unit is correctly orient-
ed.
1 2 3
ENGLISH
A
í
ì
î
17
Electrical connection
The unit must be connected by a qualified electrician.
The national and international regulations for the installation of
electrical equipment must be adhered to.
Voltage supply to EN50178, SELV, PELV.
Disconnect power before connecting the unit :

SI5000 SI5001
Connector view
(at the unit) (p-switching) (n-switching)
1 BN 1 BN
2 L+ L+
4 BK 4 BK
3 1
3 BU 3 BU
4 L L
Core colours of ifm sockets:

1 = BN (brown), 3 = BU (blue), 4 = BK (black)
Interference display:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Short circuit at the switching output

The operating indicator and red LEDs light
alternately.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
LED = green LED = orange LED = red
18
Set-up and settings for water
(For media other than water → page 21: low flow adjustment).
1. Apply the supply voltage.
All LEDs light and go out again step by step. During this time the
output is closed (if configured as normally open). The unit is in the
operating mode.
2. Let the normal flow circulate in the installation.
3. Look at the display.
• The green LEDs indicate the cur-
Example 1 rent flow (the LEDs 0 to 9 represent
Flow
the range between no flow and
Low High
maximum flow).
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
• A lighting LED indicates the position
Setpoint of the switch point (orange = out-
put closed, red = output open).
The unit is delivered with the following factory setting: monitoring

range = 5...100cm/s in water; the switch point position is LED 7.
• If the factory setting is suited for your application, the display shows
example 1. In this case no further setting is required.
• If your normal flow is below the representation range of the display
(example 2), you have two options: Shift the switch point or carry
out a high flow adjustment.
• If your normal flow exceeds the representation range of the display
(example 3, LED 9 flashes), you should carry out a high flow
adjustment.
Example 2 Example 3
ENGLISH
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Setpoint Setpoint
You can restore the factory setting any time. (→ page 21).
19
Change the switch point (optional)
For the factory setting the switch point is at LED 7. A change makes sense
• if the display shows example 2
• if the flow fluctuates much or pulsates
• or if a faster response time of the unit is requested (low switch point
= fast response with rising flow, high switch point = fast response
with falling flow).
Proceed as follows:
1. Briefly press the pushbutton or .
The switch point LED flashes.
2. Press the pushbutton or as often as required. Each press of
the pushbutton shifts the LED by one position in the indicated direc-
tion.
Note: If no pushbutton is pressed for 2 s, the unit returns to the operating
mode with the newly set value.
High flow adjustment (optional)

The unit determines the existing flow as normal flow and adapts the
display representation (all LEDs except the switch point LED light
green).
Proceed as follows:
1. Let the normal flow circulate in the installation.
2. Press the pushbutton and keep it pressed.
LED 9 lights, after approx. 5 s it flashes.
3. Release the pushbutton.
The unit is now adapted to your flow conditions. It passes into the
operating mode, the display should now show example 1.
Note: The adjustment affects the switch point: It is increased proportionally
(maximum up to LED 7).
20
Additional settings (optional)
Low flow adjustment
If the unit is used in media other than water (e.g. in air), you should
additionally adapt the unit to the minimum flow.
Note: The following adjustment must only be carried out after the
high flow adjustment.
Proceed as follows:
1. Let the minimum flow circulate in the installation or ensure flow
standstill.
2. Press the pushbutton and keep it pressed.
3. Release the pushbutton. The unit adopts the new value and passes
into the operating mode.
Configure the switching output
The unit is delivered as normally open. In case of need you can change
the output to normally closed:
Press the pushbutton for at least 15 s.
After 10 s the current setting is displayed: LEDs 5...9 light orange
(= output normally open).
After approx. 15 s LEDs 0...4 flash orange. Now release the push-
button. The output is changed to normally closed operation.
For a new changeover repeat the operation.
Restore the factory setting (reset)
Press the pushbutton for at least 15 s.
ENGLISH

After approx. 15s LEDs 0...9 flash orange. Now release the push-
button.
All settings are reset to the factory setting:
- Operating range: 5...100 cm/s for water
- Switch point: LED 7
- Output function: normally open
- Unlocked
21
Lock / unlock the unit
The unit can be electronically locked to prevent unintended set-
tings: Press both setting pushbuttons simultaneously for at least 10 s
in the operating mode. As soon as the indication goes out the unit is
locked or unlocked.
On delivery: unlocked.
Error during adjustment

If no adjustment is possible, all LEDs flash red. The unit then passes
into the operating mode with unchanged values.
Possible cause / aid:
• Error during mounting.
Read the section mounting (pages 16, 17). Check whether all
requirements have been met.
• The difference between maximum flow and minimum flow is too
small.
Increase the flow difference and carry out the adjustment again.
• The sequence high flow / low flow adjustment was not adhered to.
Carry out the two adjustment operations again in the right
sequence.
22
Operation / maintenance
• After every power on all LEDs light and go out again step by step
(during this time the output is closed if configured as normally
open). The unit is then ready for operation.
• In case of power failure or interruption all settings remain.
Operating indicators
Green LED bar: current flow
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
within the representation range.
Indication of the switch point (SP):
- LED orange: output closed.
- LED red: output open.
LED 9 flashes: current flow above the represen-
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
tation range.
LED 0 flashes: current flow much below the

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
representation area.
Interference indicators
Short circuit at the switching output:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Operating indicator and red LEDs light
alternately.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 If the short circuit has been rectified, the unit
immediately passes into the normal state. The
current operating state is displayed.
Display OFF Operating voltage too low (<19 V) or

(no LED lights): failed.
ENGLISH
Ensure a correct voltage supply.
LED = green LED = orange LED = red
23
Recommended maintenance: Check the sensor tip for build-up
from time to time.
If necessary, clean it using a soft cloth. Stubborn build-up (e.g. lime)
can be removed using a common vinegar cleaning agent.
Scale drawing
1 2
50 63
25
M12 x1
113
14
22
65
60
45
7,7
1: LED display
2: setting pushbutton
24
Technical data
Operating voltage [V] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 ... 36 DC 1)
Current rating [mA] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250; short-circuit protection, pulsed;
reverse polarity / overload protection
Voltage drop [V] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . < 2.5
Current consumption [mA] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . < 60
Liquids
Medium temperature [°C] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -25 ... +80
Setting range (cm/s] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 ... 300
Greatest sensitivity [cm/s] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 ... 100
Temperature gradient [K/min]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Gases
Medium temperature [°C] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -25 ... +80
Setting range [cm/s] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 ... 3000
Greatest sensitivity [cm/s] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 ... 800
Accuracy of switch point [cm/s]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ± 2...± 102)
Hysteresis [cm/s] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2...52)
Repeatability [cm/s]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1...52)
Temperature drift [cm/s x 1/K] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0,13)
Response time [s] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 ... 10
Power-on delay time [s] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10, optically indicated
Pressure resistance [bar]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Operating temperature [°C] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -25 ... +80
Protection rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IP 67
Protection class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III
Shock resistance [g] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 (DIN / IEC 68-2-27, 11 ms)
Vibration resistance [g] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 (DIN / EN 68-2-6, 55 - 2000 Hz)
Housing materials . . . . . . stainless steel (304S15); PC (Macrolon); PBT-GF 20
Sensor material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . high-grade stainless steel (316S12);
O-ring: FPM 8x1.5 gr 80° Shore A
EMC
EN 61000-4-2 ESD: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 kV CD / 8 kV AD
EN 61000-4-3 HF radiated: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 V/m
ENGLISH
EN 61000-4-4 Burst: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 kV
EN 61000-4-6 HF conducted: 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 V
1) according to EN50178, SELV, PELV
2) for water; 5...100 cm/s; 25°C (factory setting)
3) for water; 5...100 cm/s; 10...70°C
The sensor conforms to the standard EN 61000-6-2
25
Sommaire
Fonctionnement et caractéristiques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Montage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Raccordement électrique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Mise en service et réglages à l’eau . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Réglage du débit maximum (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Modifier le seuil de commutation (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Réglages supplémentaires (option)
Réglage du débit minimum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Configurer la sortie de commutation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Récupérer les réglages de base effectués en usine (Reset) . . . . . . . . . 33
Verrouiller/déverrouiller l’appareil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Défaut lors du réglage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Fonctionnement/entretien . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Données techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Remarques sur la sécurité

L'appareil est conforme aux dispositions et directives de l'UE en
vigueur.
• L'emploi non approprié ou incorrect peut mener à des défauts de
fonctionnement de l'appareil ou à des effets non désirés dans
votre application.
• C'est pourquoi le montage, le raccordement électrique, la mise en
service, le fonctionnement et l'entretien de l'appareil ne doivent
être effectués que par du personnel qualifié et autorisé par le res-
ponsable de l'installation.
26
Fonctionnement et caractéristiques
Applications
L'appareil surveille le débit de liquides et de gaz.
Fonctionnement
• L'appareil détecte la vitesse du débit selon le principe de mesure
calorimétrique
• et commute la sortie : sortie fermée si le fluide est en débit / sor-
tie ouverte si le fluide n’est pas en débit.
A la livraison, l'appareil se trouve dans l'état suivant : sortie = normalement
ouvert. Si nécessaire, la sortie peut être configurée en fonction : normale-
ment fermé (→ page 31). Cela signifie : sortie ouverte si le fluide est en
débit.
• Si le débit augmente, l'état de commutation change quand le seuil

est atteint.
• Si le débit diminue de nouveau, l'état de commutation change
quand la valeur "SP moins l'hystérésis" est atteinte.
L'hystérésis change en fonction de la vitesse et dépend considérablement de
la zone de détection réglée.
Elle est 2 à 5 cm/s pour le réglage 5...100 cm/s (= réglage en usine), elle aug-
mente en cas de vitesses plus élevées.
Le temps de réponse typique de l’appareil est de 1...10 s. Il peut être

influencé par le réglage du seuil de commutation :
• Seuil de commutation bas = réponse rapide en cas d’augmentation
de débit.
• Seuil de commutation haut = réponse rapide en cas de diminution
du débit.
FRANÇAIS
27
Montage
L'adaptateur process permet le raccordement de l'appareil à différents
raccords process.
• Les adaptateurs sont à commander séparément comme accessoires.
Seuls les adaptateurs ifm garantissent un positionnement correct de
l'appareil et l'étanchéité du raccord.
• Pour des débits faibles, des blocs adaptateurs ifm sont disponibles.
Position de montage
En général
• Le bout de la sonde doit être
complètement couvert par le
fluide.
• Profondeur d’installation de la
sonde : min. 12 mm. 12mm
Recommandé
• Pour des tuyaux horizontaux :
Montage latéral.
• Pour des tuyaux verticaux :
Montage dans le tuyau qui
monte.
Possible dans certaines applications

• Tuyau horizontal / Montage par le
bas : si le tuyau est libre de
dépôts.
• Tuyau horizontal / montage par le
haut : si le tuyau est complète-
ment rempli de fluide.
A éviter
• Le bout de la sonde ne doit pas
toucher la paroi du tuyau.
• Ne pas monter dans des tuyaux
descendants et ouverts vers le
bas!
28
Parasites dans la conduite : Des éléments qui s'étendent présents
dans le tube, des coudes, des vannes, des réductions de diamètre et
d'autres choses semblables mènent à des perturbations du fluide. Ceci
affecte le fonctionnement de l'appareil.
Recommandation : Respecter des distances entre le capteur et les
perturbations :
5...10 x D 3...5 x D
S Low Flow High
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Setpoint
Low Flow High
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Setpoint
S
D = diamètre du tuyau ; S = parasites
Montage
S'assurer que la pression n'est pas appliquée au circuit avant
d'effectuer des travaux de montage.
S'assurer que pendant les travaux de montage, des fluides ne
peuvent pas s'écouler à l'endroit du montage.
1. Graisser les filetages du raccord process (1), de l'adaptateur (2) et
de l'écrou (3).
Attention : Des lubrifiants ne doivent pas être en contact avec le
bout de la sonde (A).
2. Visser l'adaptateur approprié sur le raccord process.
3. Mettre le capteur de débit sur l'adaptateur et serrer l'écrou; (Couple
de serrage max. 5 Nm). Maintenir l'orientation de l'appareil.
1 2 3
A
í
ì
î
FRANÇAIS
29
Raccordement électrique
L'appareil doit être monté par un électricien qualifié.
Les règlements nationaux et internationaux relatifs à l'installa-
tion de matériel électrique doivent être respectés.
Alimentation selon EN50178, TBTS, TBTP.
Mettre l'installation hors tension avant le raccordement de l'appareil :

Vue du SI5000 SI5001
connecteur (pnp) (npn)
(sur l’appareil)
1 BN 1 BN
2 L+ L+
4 BK 4 BK
3 1
3 BU 3 BU
4 L L
couleurs des connecteurs femelles ifm :

1 = BN (brun), 3 = BU (bleu), 4 = BK (noir)
Signalisation de défauts :
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Court-circuit sur la sortie de commutation.

L'affichage de fonctionnement et les LED
rouges s'allument en alternance.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
LED = verte LED = orange LED = rouge
30
Mise en service et réglages à l'eau
(Pour des fluides autres que l'eau → page 33 : Réglage du débit mimimum).
1. Mettre l’appareil sous tension d’alimentation.
Toutes les LED s'allument et s'éteignent de nouveau pas à pas.
Pendant ce temps, la sortie est fermée (si la sortie est configurée en
normalement ouvert). L'appareil se trouve donc en mode de fonc-
tionnement.
2. Activer le débit normal dans l’installation.
3. Regarder l’affichage.
Exemple 1 • Les LED vertes indiquent le débit
actuel (les LED 0 à 9 représentent la
Low Flow High gamme entre l'arrêt du débit et le
débit maximal).
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 • Une LED allumée indique la position
Setpoint du seuil de commutation (orange
= sortie fermée, rouge = sortie
ouverte.
L’appareil est fourni avec les valeurs suivantes réglées en usine :

zone de détection = 5...100 cm/s dans l’eau; la position du seuil de
commutation est la LED 7.
• Si les valeurs réglées en usine sont appropriées pour votre applica-
tion, l'afficheur indique l'exemple 1. Dans ce cas, aucun autre régla-
ge n'est nécessaire.
• Si votre débit normal est en dessous de la zone d'affichage
(exemple 2), il existe 2 options: Déplacer le seuil de commutation
ou effectuer un réglage de débit maximum.
• Si votre débit normal est au dessus de la zone d'affichage (exemple
3, LED 9 clignote), vous devriez effectuer un réglage de débit
maximum.
Exemple 2 Exemple 3
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Setpoint Setpoint
FRANÇAIS
Vous pouvez récupérer les réglages effectués en usine à tout moment (→ page 33).
31
Modifier le seuil de commutation (option)
En usine, le seuil de commutation est réglé à la LED 7. Une modifica-
tion est utile
• si l’afficheur indique l’exemple 2,
• en cas de fluctuations fortes ou pulsations du débit,
• ou si un temps de réponse plus rapide de l'appareil est souhaité
(seuil de commutation bas = réponse rapide en cas d'augmentation
du débit, seuil de commutation haut = réponse rapide en cas de
diminution du débit).
Procéder comme suit :

1. Appuyer brièvement sur le bouton ou .
La LED du seuil de commutation clignote.
2. Appuyer sur le bouton ou aussi souvent que nécessaire.
Chaque fois le bouton est appuyé, la LED se décale d'une position
dans la direction indiquée.
Note : Si aucun bouton n'est appuyé pendant 2 s, l'appareil redevient opé-
rationnel avec la nouvelle valeur réglée.
Réglage du débit maximum (option)

L'appareil définit le débit présent comme débit normal et adapte
l'affichage (toutes les LED sauf la LED du seuil de commutation sont
allumées en vert).

1. Activer le débit normal dans l'installation.
2. Appuyer sur le bouton et le maintenir appuyé.
LED 9 s’allume, après env. 5 s elle clignote.
3. Relâcher le bouton.
Ceci est l'adaptation optimale de l'appareil à vos conditions de débit.
Il passe en mode de fonctionnement, l'afficheur devrait maintenant
indiquer l'exemple 1.
Note : Le réglage influence le seuil de commutation : Il est augmenté propor-
tionnellement (au maximum jusqu'à la LED 7).
32
Réglages supplémentaires (option)
Réglage du débit minimum
Si l'appareil est utilisé pour d'autres fluides que l'eau (p.ex. dans l'air),
l'appareil devrait également être adapté au débit minimum.
Attention : Le réglage suivant ne doit être effectué qu'après le régla-
ge du débit maximum.

1. Activer le débit minimum dans l’installation ou arrêter le débit.
2. Appuyer sur le bouton et le maintenir appuyé.
3. Relâcher le bouton. L'appareil adopte la nouvelle valeur et passe en
mode de fonctionnement.
Configurer la sortie de commutation
L'appareil est livré en fonction de sortie normalement ouvert. Si néces-
saire, la sortie peut être configurée en fonction normalement fermé :
Appuyer sur le bouton pour au moins 15 s.
Après 10 s le réglage actuel est affiché : LED 5...9 allumées en oran-
ge (= sortie en fonction normalement ouvert).
Après env. 15s les LED 0...4 clignotent en orange. Maintenant relâ-
cher le bouton. La sortie est configurée en fonction normalement
fermé.
Pour une nouvelle modification, répéter la procédure.
Récupérer les réglages de base effectués en usine (Reset)
Appuyer sur le bouton pour au moins 15 s.
Après env. 15s les LED 0...9 clignotent en orange. Maintenant relâ-
cher le bouton.
Tous les réglages effectués en usine sont récupérés :
- plage de fonctionnement : 5...100cm/s pour l’eau
- seuil de commutation : LED 7
FRANÇAIS
- fonction de sortie : normalement ouvert

- non verrouillé.
33
Verrouiller / déverrouiller l’appareil
L’appareil peut être verrouillé électroniquement afin d'éviter une
fausse programmation non intentionnelle : En mode de fonctionne-
ment, appuyer simultanément sur les deux boutons-poussoir pendant
10 s. Dès que l'affichage s'éteint, l'appareil est verrouillé ou non ver-
rouillé.
A la livraison : non verrouillé.
Défaut lors du réglage

Si le réglage n'est pas possible, toutes les LED clignotent en rouge.
Ensuite, l'appareil redevient opérationnel sans aucune modification
des valeurs.
Causes possibles / remèdes :
• Erreur lors du montage.
Lire le chapitre montage (page 28, 29). Vérifier si toutes les exi-
gences sont remplies.
• L'écart entre le débit maximum et le débit minimum est trop petit.
Augmenter la différence de débit et effectuer ensuite un nouveau
réglage.
• Ordre réglage du débit maximum / débit minimum non respecté.
Effectuer les deux opérations de réglage de nouveau dans l'ordre
correct.
34
Fonctionnement / entretien
• Après chaque mise sous tension, toutes les LED s'allument et s'é-
teignent de nouveau pas à pas; (pendant ce temps, la sortie est
fermée si la sortie est configurée en fonction normalement ouvert).
Ensuite, l'appareil est opérationnel.
• En cas de coupure ou interruption de la tension d'alimentation,
tous les réglages restent actifs.
Affichages de fonctionnement
Rampe de LED vertes : Débit actuel au sein de la
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
zone d'affichage.
Affichage du seuil de commutation (SP) :
- LED orange : sortie fermée.
- LED rouge : sortie ouverte.
LED 9 clignote : débit actuel au-dessus de la
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
zone d'affichage.
LED 0 clignote : débit actuel bien en-dessous de

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
la zone d’affichage.
Indication de défauts
Court-circuit sur la sortie de commutation.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 L'affichage de fonctionnement et les LED
rouges s'allument en alternance.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Si le court-circuit est réparé, l'appareil redevient
opérationnel immédiatement. L'affichage de
fonctionnement actuel est indiqué.
Affichage inactif Tension d’alimentation trop faible (< 19 V) ou

(aucune LED n’est coupée.
allumée) : Veiller à avoir une alimentation en tension
correcte.
LED = verte LED = orange LED = rouge

FRANÇAIS
35
Entretien recommandé : Vérifier périodiquement la présence éven-
tuelle de dépôts en bout de sonde.
Le cas échéant, les nettoyer avec un chiffon doux. Des dépôts adhé-
rents (p.ex. chaux) peuvent être enlevés avec un produit acétique de
nettoyage usuel.
Dimensions
1 2
50 63
25
M12 x1
113
14
22
65
60
45
7,7
1: LED de visualisation
2: bouton-poussoir de réglage
36
Données techniques
Tension d’alimentation [V] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 ...36 DC 1)
Courant de sortie [mA] . . . 250; protection contre les courts-circuits, pulsée ;
protection inversion de polarité / protection surcharges
Chute de tension [V] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . < 2,5
Consommation [mA] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . < 60
Liquides
Température du fluide [°C] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -25...+80
Plage de réglage [cm/s] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 ... 300
Sensibilité max. [cm/s]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 ... 100
Gradient de température [K/min] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Gaz
Température du fluide [°C] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -25...+80
Plage de réglage [cm/s] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 ... 3000
Sensibilité max. [cm/s] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 ... 800
Exactitude du seuil [cm/s] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ± 2...± 102)
Hystérésis [cm/s] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2...52)
Répétabilité du seuil [cm/s] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1...52)
Evolution de la température [cm/s x 1/K] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0,13)
Temps de réponse [s] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 ... 10
Retard à la disponibilité [s] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10, signalisé visuellement
Tenue en pression [bar] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Température ambiante [°C]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . –25...+80
Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IP 67
Classe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III
Tenue aux chocs [g]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 (DIN / IEC 68-2-27, 11 ms)
Tenue aux vibrations [g] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 (DIN / IEC 68-2-6, 55-2000 Hz)
Matières du boîtier . . . . . . . . . . . acier inox (304); PC (Macrolon); PBT-GF 20
Matière de la sonde . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . acier inox (316L)
joint torique : FPM 8x1,5 gr 80° Shore A
CEM
EN 61000-4-2 ESD (décharges électro.): . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 kV CD / 8 kV AD
EN 61000-4-3 HF (champs électro.): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 V/m
EN 61000-4-4 Burst: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 kV
EN 61000-4-6 HF (perturb. conduite): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 V
1) selon EN50178, TBTS, TBTP;
2) dans l’eau; 5...100 cm/s; 25°C (réglage en usine)
3) dans l’eau; 5...100 cm/s; 10...70°C
L'appareil est conforme à la norme EN 61000-6-2

FRANÇAIS
37
1 EN Instruction Manual DC Power Supply
2 DE Bedienungsanleitung DC Stromversorgung
3 FR Manual d'instructions DC Alimentation d'Énergie
4 ES Manual de instrucciones DC Fuente De Alimentación
5 IT Manuale di Istruzione DC Gruppo di alimentazione
6 PT Manual de Instruções DC Fonte De Alimentação
QT20 Series
Read first ! English 1

Before operating this unit please read this manual thoroughly. Retain this manual for future reference! The power supply may only installed and put into operation by qualified personnel.
Intended Use:
This device is designed for installation in an enclosure and is intended for the general use such as in industrial control, office, communication, and instrumentation equipment. Do not use this device in
aircrafts, trains and nuclear equipment where malfunction of the power supply may cause severe personal injury or threaten human life.
WARNING ! CAUTION !
Risk of electrical shock, fire, personal injury or death. Reduction of output power may be necessary when:
(1) Do not use the unit without proper grounding (Protective earth) (1) Minimum installation clearance can not be met
(2) Turn power off before working on the power supply. Protect against inadvertent (2) Altitudes higher than 2000m
repowering. (3) Power supply is used above 60°C ambient
(3) Make sure of the wiring is correct by following all local and national codes. (4) Mounting orientation is other than input terminal located at the bottom and output at the top.
(4) Do not modify or repair the unit. (5) Airflow for convection cooling is obstructed
(5) Do not open the unit as high voltages are present inside. Details for de-rating can be found in this manual.
(6) Use caution to prevent any foreign objects from entering into the housing. Do not touch during power-on, and immediately after power-off. Hot surface may cause heat injury.
(7) Do not use in wet locations. The unit does not contain a service parts. The tripping of an internal fuse is caused by an internal
(8) Do not use the unit in area where moisture or condensation can be expected defect. If damage or malfunction should occur during operation, immediately turn power off and send
unit for inspection to the factory!
The information presented in this document is believed to be accurate and reliable and may change without notice. The English text applies in cases of doubt.
Notes for use in WARNING EXPLOSION HAZARDS
hazardous locations Units which are marked with "Class I Div 2" are suitable for use in non-hazardous or Class I Division 2 Groups A, B, C, D locations only.
Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class I Division 2 environment. Do not disconnect equipment unless power has been switched off.
Wiring must be in accordance with Class I, Division 2 wiring methods of the National Electrical Code, NFPA 70, and in accordance with other local or national codes.
Vor Inbetriebnahme lesen ! Deutsch 2

Bitte lesen Sie diese Warnungen und Hinweise sorgfältig durch bevor Sie die Stromversorgung in Betrieb nehmen. Bewahren Sie die Anleitung zum Nachlesen auf. Die Stromversorgung darf nur
durch fachkundiges und qualifiziertes Personal installiert werden.
Bestimmungsgemäßer Gebrauch:
Dieses Gerät ist für den Einbau in ein Gehäuse konzipiert und zur Verwendung für allgemeine elektronische Geräte, wie z.B. Industriesteuerungen, Bürogeräte, Kommunikationsgeräte oder
Messgeräte geeignet. Benutzen Sie dieses Gerät nicht in Steuerungsanlagen von Flugzeugen, Zügen oder atomaren Einrichtungen, in denen eine Funktionsstörung zu schweren Verletzungen führen
oder Lebensgefahr bedeuten kann.
WARNUNG ! VORSICHT !
Missachtung nachfolgender Punkte kann einen elektrischen Schlag, Brände, schwere Unfälle Rücknahme der Ausgangsleistung kann erforderlich sein:
oder Tod zur Folge haben. (1) wenn die minimalen Einbauabstände nicht eingehalten werden können.
(1) Betreiben Sie die Stromversorgung nie ohne Schutzleiter! (2) bei Aufstellhöhen über 2000m.
(2) Schalten Sie die Netzspannung vor Installations-, Wartungs- oder Änderungsarbeiten ab (3) Betrieb bei Umgebungstemperaturen über 60°C.
und sichern Sie gegen unbeabsichtigtes Wiedereinschalten. (4) bei Einbaulagen abweichend von der Standardeinbaulage (Eingang unten, Ausgang oben).
(3) Sorgen Sie für eine ordnungsgemäße und fachgerechte Verdrahtung. (5) bei behinderter Luftzirkulation.
(4) Führen Sie keine Änderungen oder Reparaturversuche am Gerät durch. Weitere Informationen zur Leistungsrücknahme befinden sich in dieser Betriebsanleitung.
(5) Gerät niemals öffnen. Im Inneren befinden sich gefährliche Spannungen.
(6) Verhindern Sie das Eindringen von Fremdkörpern, wie z.B. Büroklammern und anderen Gehäuse nicht während des Betriebes oder kurz nach dem Abschalten berühren. Heiße Oberflächen
Metallteilen. können Verletzungen verursachen.
(7) Betreiben Sie das Gerät nicht in feuchter Umgebung. Das Gerät beinhaltet keine Servicebauteile. Interne Sicherungen lösen nur bei Gerätedefekt aus. Bei
(8) Betreiben Sie das Gerät nicht in einer Umgebung, bei der mit Betauung oder Funktionsstörungen oder Beschädigungen schalten Sie sofort die Versorgungsspannung ab und
Kondensation zu rechnen ist. senden das Gerät zur Überprüfung ins Werk.
Die angegebenen Daten dienen allein der Produktbeschreibung und sind nicht als zugesicherte Eigenschaften im Rechtssinne aufzufassen. Im Zweifelsfall gilt der englische Text
Hinweise für den ACHTUNG EXPLOSIONSGEFAHR !
Betrieb in Geräte die am Leistungsschild mit "Class I Div 2" gekennzeichnet sind, sind für den Einsatz in Klasse I Division 2 Gruppen A,B,C,D oder für explosions-ungefährliche
explosionsgefährdeter Aufstellorte geeignet. Veränderungen an Bauteilen können die Tauglichkeit für Klasse I Division 2 beeinträchtigen. Anschlüsse nicht trennen solange Spannung anliegt.
Umgebung Anschluss muss unter Berücksichtigung der Anforderungen nach Klasse I Division 2 Artikel 501-4(b) des National Electrical Code, NFPA 70 erfolgen.
A lire avant mise sous tension ! Français 3

Merci de lire ces instructions de montage et d'entretien avant de mettre l'alimentation sous tension. Conservez ce manuel qui vous sera toujours utile. Cette alimentation doit être installée par du
personnel qualifié et compétent.
Utilisation:
Cet appareil est conçu pour être installé dans une armoire et pour tous les équipements électroniques, tel que l'équipement industriel de commande, l'équipement de bureau, le matériel de
communication et les instruments de mesures. N'utilisez pas cet appareil pour l'équipement de commandes dans les avions, les trains et l'équipement atomique où un problème de fonctionnement
de l'alimentation pourrait causer des blessures graves ou menacer la vie humaine.
ATTENTION ! ATTENTION !
Prendre en compte les points suivants, afin d'éviter toute détérioration électrique, incendie, Des limitations de puissance de sortie peuvent apparaïtre si :
dommage aux personnes ou mort. (1) les distances d'installation mini. ne peuvent être observées
(1) ne jamais faire fonctionner l'alimentation sans raccordement à la terre ! (2) installation à une altitude > 2000 m
(2) débrancher l'installation avant toute intervention sur l'alimentation (ou démontage) et (3) pour des fonctionnements en charge et avec une température ambiante > 60°C
s'assurer qu'il n'y a pas risque de redémarrage. (4) pour des positions de montage différentes de la préconisation standard (entrée dessous, sortie en
(3) s'assurer que le câblage a été fait selon les prescriptions haut)
(4) ne pas effectuer de réparations ou modifications sur l'alimentation (5) lorsque la circulation d'air est génêe
(5) ne pas ouvrir l'appareil. Des tensions importantes passent à l'intérieur. D'autres informations sont disponibles dans la documentation de mise en service "
(6) veiller à ce qu'aucun objet ne rentre en contact avec l'intérieur de l'alimentation Ne pas toucher le carter pendant le fonctionnement ou après la mise sous tension. Surface chaude
(trombonnes, pièces métalliques) risquant d’entraîner des blessures.
(7) ne pas faire fonctionner l'appareil dans un environnement humide ou à l'extérieur, non Le déclenchment du fusible interne traduit très probablement un défaut au niveau de l'appareil. Si un
protégé défaut quelconque apparaît en cours de fonctionnement, débrancher au plus vite l'alimentation. Dans
(8) ne pas utiliser l'appareil dans un environnement où il peut y avoir de la condensation. ce deux cas de figure, il convient de faire contrôler l'alimentation en usine!
Les données indiquées dans ce document servent uniquement à donner une description du produit et n'ont aucune valeur juridique. En cas de divergences, le texte anglais fait foi.
Utilisation ATTENTION RISQUE D’ EXPLOSION Les appareils portant la marque ‘Class I Div 2’ au niveau de la plaque signalétique sont prévus pour fonctionner en Classe I, Division
Class I Div 2 2, Groupes A,B,C,D ou pour un environnement non explosif et non dangereux.
Le remplacement de composants peut rendre le matériel impropre à une utilisation en Classe 1, Division 2.
Ne déconnecter l’équipement qu’ hors tension ou en zone connue comme non dangereuse.
Le raccordement doit obligatoirement tenir compte des exigences de la classe 1, division 2, article 501-4(b) du National Electrical Code, NFPA 70.
Lea primero! Español 4
Conserve este manual como referencia para futuras consultas. La fuente de alimentación solo puede ser instalada y puesta en funcionamiento por personal cualificado. Por favor lea detenidamente
este manual antes de conectar la fuente de alimentación.
Uso apropiado:
Este equipo ha sido diseñado para su instalación en un ambiente cerrado y ha sido concebido para uso general en instalaciones de control industrial, oficinas, comunicaciones y equipos de
instrumentación. No emplee este equipo en aeronaves, trenes e instalaciones atómicas, donde un mal funcionamiento de la fuente de alimentación puede ocasionar lesiones graves o riesgo mortal.
ADVERTENCIA ! CUIDADO !
Riesgo de descarga eléctrica, incendio, accidente grave o muerte. La deriva en la tensión de salida se produce:
(1) No conectar nunca la unidad sin conexión de puesta a tierra. (1) cuando no pueden mantenerse las distancias mínimas de montaje.
(2) Desconectar la tensión de red antes de trabajar en la fuente de alimentación. Evite una (2) en caso de que el montaje se realice en altitudes superiores a los 2000 m.
posible reconexión involuntaria. (3) en caso de funcionamiento a plena carga y temperaturas ambientales superiores a 60º C.
(3) Asegurarse de que el cableado es correcto de acuerdo a los códigos locales y (4) En caso de posiciones de montaje diferentes a la posición de montaje estándar (terminales de
nacionales. entrada abajo y terminales de salida arriba).
(4) No realizar ninguna modificación o reparación de la unidad. (5) en caso de que la circulación de aire para la refrigeración por conducción esté obstruida.
(5) No abrir nunca la unidad. En el interior existe riesgo de altas tensiones. Puede encontrar más detalles del caso de deriva en este manual.
(6) Evitar la introducción en la carcasa de objetos extraños. No tocar durante el funcionamiento ni inmediatamente después del apagado. El calor de la superficie
(7) No usar el equipo en ambientes húmedos. puede causar quemaduras graves.
(8) No operar el equipo en ambientes donde se espere la formación de rocío o Cuando se funde un fusible interno, existe gran probabilidad de un fallo interno en el equipo.Si se
condensación. produce un fallo o mal funcionamiento durante la operación, desconecte inmediatamente la tensión
de alimentación. En ambos casos, el equipo debe ser inspeccionado en fábrica.
La información presentada en este documento es exacta y fiable en cuanto a la descripción del producto y puede cambiar sin aviso. En casa de duda, prevalece el texto inglés.
Uso apropiado ATENCIÓN PELIGRO DE EXPLOSIÓN! Los equipos marcados con la expresión "Class I Div 2" son adecuados para su uso en ambientes no peligrosos y en entornos con
Class I Div 2 la Clase I División 2 Grupos A, B, C, D. La sustitución de componentes puede perjudicar la idoneidad para la Clase I División 2.
No desconecte el equipo a menos que la tensión de alimentación esté desconectada.
El conexionado debe cumplir con la Clase I División 2 métodos de conexión del Código Nacional Eléctrico NFPA 70 o con el resto de códigos locales o nacionales.
Leggere prima questa parte! Italiano 5

Prima di collegare il sistema di alimentazione elettrica si prega di leggere attentamente le seguenti avvertenze. Conservare le istruzioni per la consultazione futura. Il sistema di alimentazione elettrica
deve essere installato solo da personale competente e qualificato.
Uso previsto:
Questo apparecchio è previsto per il montaggio in un rack per moduli elettronici, ad esempio per controllori industriali, apparecchiature per ufficio, unità di comunicazione o apparecchi di misura. Non
utilizzare l'apparecchio in impianti di controllo di aerei, di treni o di impianti nucleari in cui il suo eventuale guasto può comportare gravi lesioni o la morte di persone.
AVVERTENZA! CAUTELA !
Il mancato rispetto delle seguenti norme può provocare folgorazione elettrica, incendi, gravi È necessario ridurre la potenza di uscita se:
incidenti e perfino la morte. (1) non è possibile rispettare le distanze minime di montaggio;
(1) Non far funzionare in nessun caso il sistema di alimentazione elettrica senza conduttore di (2) l'apparecchio viene installato in un luogo di altitudine maggiore di 2000 m;
protezione! (3) il funzionamento è a pieno carico a temperatura ambiente maggiore di 60 °C;
(2) Prima di eseguire interventi di installazione, di manutenzione o di modifica scollegare la (4) la posizione di montaggio differisce da quella standard (ingresso in basso, uscita in alto);
tensione di rete ed adottare tutti i provvedimenti necessari per impedirne il ricollegamento (5) è ostacolata la libera circolazione dell'aria.
non intenzionale.
Ulteriori informazioni sono riportate in questo manuale.
(3) Assicurare un cablaggio regolare e corretto.
Non toccare quando acceso e subito dopo lo spegnimento. La superficie calda può causare
(4) Non tentare di modificare o di riparare da soli l'apparecchio. scottature.
(5) Non aprire l'apparecchio. Al suo interno sono applicate tensioni elettriche pericolose. In caso di intervento del fusibile interno, molto probabilmente l'apparecchio è guasto.
(6) Impedire la penetrazione di corpi estranei nell'apparecchio, ad esempio fermagli o altri Se durante il funzionamento si verificano anomalie o guasti, scollegare immediatamente la tensione di
oggetti metallici. alimentazione.
(7) Non far funzionare l'apparecchio in un ambiente umido. In entrambi i casi è necessario far controllare l'apparecchio dal produttore!
(8) Non far funzionare l'apparecchio in un ambiente soggetto alla formazione di condensa o
di rugiada.
I dati sono indicati solo a scopo descrittivo del prodotto e non vanno considerati come caratteristiche garantite dell'apparecchio.In caso di differenze o problemi è valido il testo inglese
Uso previsto ATTENZIONE: PERICOLO DI ESPLOSIONE! Gli apparecchi la cui targhetta riporta "Class I Div 2" sono adatti per l'impiego in ambienti di classe I, divisione 2, gruppi A, B,
Class I Div 2 C e D o non soggetti al pericolo di esplosione. La modifica dei componenti possono influenzare negativamente l'idoneità per ambienti di classe I, divisione 2.Non aprire i
morsetti con tensione di alimentazione collegata. Il collegamento deve essere eseguito nel rispetto dei requisiti previsti dalla classe I, divisione 2, articolo 501-4(b) del
National Electrical Code, NFPA 70.
Leia primeiro! Portuguès 6

Recomendamos a leitura cuidadosa das seguintes advertências e observações, antes de colocar em funcionamento a fonte de alimentação. Guarde as Instruções para futura consulta, em casos de
dúvida. A fonte de alimentação deverá ser instalada apenas por profissionais da área, tecnicamente qualificados.
Utilize:
apenas para o fim pré-estabelecido. Este aparelho foi concebido para ser montado dentro de invólucros, caixas ou armários para aparelhos eletrônicos em geral, como, por exemplo, comandos de
instalações industriais, aparelhos para escritórios, aparelhos de comunicação ou instrumentos de medida e quadros eléctricos. Não utilize este aparelho em sistemas de comando de aviões, de
comboios ou em instalações movidas por energia nuclear, nos quais um defeito de funcionamento poderá causar danos graves ou significar risco de morte.
ATENÇÃO ! CUIDADO !
A não observância ou o incumprimento dos pontos a seguir mencionados, poderá causar Será necessário reduzir a potência de saída nos seguintes casos:
uma descarga elétrica, incêndios, acidentes graves ou morte. (1) Quando não forem observadas as distâncias mínimas de montagem.
(1) Não use a fonte de alimentação sem o condutor de proteção terra! (2) Quando instaladas a altitudes superiores a 2000m.
(2) Antes de trabalhos de instalação, manutenção ou modificação, desligue a tensão de (3) Existencia de temperatura ambiente superior a 60ºC, em plena carga do aparelho.
alimentação, protegendo-a contra uma nova ligação involuntária. (4) Montagem invertida do aparelho (Entrada em baixo, saída em cima).
(3) As ligações devem ser efectuadas apenas por profissionais competentes. (5) Montagem em ambiente sem ventilação.
(4) Não efectue nenhuma modificação ou tentativa de reparação no aparelho. Quando No presente manual de funcionamento encontram-se ainda outras informações.
necessário contacte o seu distribuidor. Não tocar enquanto estiver em funcionamento, nem após a desligar. A superficie poderá estar quente
(5) Não abra o aparelho mesmo quando desligado. No seu interior existem condensadores e provocar lesões
que podem estar carregados electricamente.
Se o fusível interno se fundir, é grande a possibilidade de existir um defeito no aparelho. Se por
(6) Proteger a fonte de alimentação contra a introdução inadvertida de corpos metálicos, acaso, durante a utilização ocorrer algum defeito de funcionamento ou dano, desligue imediatamente
como por ex., clipes ou outras peças de metal. a tensão de alimentação.
(7) Não usar o aparelho em ambientes húmidos. Em ambos os casos, será necessária uma verificação na Fábrica!
(8) Não usar o aparelho em ambientes propensos a condensações.
Os dados mencionados têm como finalidade somente a descrição do produto, e não devem ser interpretados como propriedades garantidas no sentido jurídico. Em caso de dúvidas, aplica-se o
texto em Inglês.
Utilize ATENÇÃO, RISCO DE EXPLOSÃO ! Aparelhos que contêm na sua placa de dados elétricos o texto “Class I Div 2” são apropriados para a aplicação na Classe I, divisão 2,
Class I Div 2 Grupos A, B, C, D ou também para locais de instalação isentos de riscos de explosão.
Modificações efetuadas em componentes podem restringir ou reduzir a adequação para aplicação na Classe I, Divisão 2. As ligações não devem ser separadas enquanto
estiverem ligadas a uma fonte de alimentação elétrica. As ligações devem ser efetuadas levando-se em consideração as exigências normativas da Classe I, Divisão 2.
Germany PULS in Munich +49 89 9278 0 www.pulspower.com

China PULS in Shanghai +86 21 6432 7680 www.puls-power.cn Headquarters:
France PULS in Limonest / Lyon +33 608 5494 60 www.puls-power.com/fr PULS GmbH
North America PULS in St. Charles / Chicago +1 630 587 9780 www.puls-power.us Arabellastrasse 15
Austria PULS in Rohrbach +43 27 64 32 13 www.pulspower.com D-81925 Munich
Switzerland PULS in Oberflachs / Aargau +41 56 450 18 10 www.puls-power.ch Germany
United Kingdom PULS in Bedfordshire +44 1525 72 00 99 www.puls.co.uk
QT20 Power Supply Instruction Manual
Technical Data
QT20.241 QT20.361 QT20.481
Output Voltage DC 24-28V DC 36-42V DC 48-55V externally adjustable
Factory Set typ. 24.1V 36.0V 48.0V at full rated load
Output Current min 20-17.5A 13.3-11.4A 10-8.7A continuous
min 30-26A 20-17.1A 15-13A for typ. 4 sec
Output Power min. 480W 480W 480W continuous
min. 720W 720W 720W for typ. 4 sec
Output Ripple max. 100mVpp 150mVpp 100mVpp BW DC to 20MHz
Over-voltage Protection max. 35Vdc 53Vdc 60Vdc
AC Input Voltage - 3AC 380-480V -15/+15%, 50-60Hz TN, TT and IT mains
AC Input Current max. 0.9-0.65A / Phase at 3x 380 - 480Vac
Power Factor typ. 0.94 at 3x 380 - 480Vac
2
AC Inrush Current max. 4A peak, 1A s at 3x 380 - 480Vac
Efficiency typ. 95.0 / 94.8% 94.8 / 94.6% 95.4 / 95.0% at 3x 400 / 480Vac
Losses typ. 25.3 / 26.4W 26.3 / 27.4W 23.1 / 25.3W at 3x 400 / 480Vac
Hold-up Time typ. 22ms at 3x 380 - 480Vac
Capacitive Loads - No limitations
Inductive Loads - No limitations
Limited Warranty - 3 year
Functional Diagram Dielectric Strength

Output Input DC-ok Type tests and factory tests:
Voltage L1 B Conducted by the manufacturer.
Regulator VOUT Do not repeat test in field!
L1 L2
Field test rules:
L2 Input Filter + L3
(1) Use appropriate test equipment which
Input Rectifier PFC
Converter + D apply the voltage with a slow ramp!
B
Inrush Limiter Power Output
L3 Transient Filter Converter Filter
A
(2) Connect L1, L2 and L3 together as well as all
- output poles.
Output
- Earth
(3) Use only AC test-voltages with 50/60Hz.
C +
Over- The output voltage is floating and has no ohmic
load -
reference to ground.
DC
ok A B C D
Temper- Output Output Output
ature Power Over- Voltage
Shut- Manager Voltage
Monitor Type Test 60s 2500Vac 3000Vac 500Vac 500Vac
down Protection DC ok DC
Relay ok Factory Test 5s 2500Vac 2500Vac 500Vac 500Vac
Field Test 5s 2000Vac 2000Vac 500Vac 500Vac
DC-ok Relay Contact Overload Performance The unit is designed to support loads with a higher short-term
This feature monitors the output voltage, which is produced by the power supply, and is power requirement without damage or shutdown.
independent of a return voltage from a unit which is connected in parallel.
5s max.
Contact closes as soon as the output voltage reaches the nominal value. 28V
Contact opens as soon as the output voltage dips more than 10%. 24V 4s
Short dips will be extended to a length of 250ms on the relay. 20V 3s
Dips shorter than 1ms will be ignored. min.
16V continuous for 4s
Contact ratings 60Vdc 0.3A, 30Vdc 1A, 30Vac 0.5A, resistive load 2s
12V
8V 1s
VADJ VOUT Output Current
4V Output Current 0s
0V 110% 120% 130% 140% 150% 160%
90% 10% 0A 5A 10A 15A 20A 25A 30A 35A
VADJ
Output characteristic (typ.) Bonus time

Curve is valid for the 24V unit. Units with output Duration until the output starts dipping.
250ms voltages other than 24V have an equivalent and Bonus Time is hardware controlled.
< 1ms > 1ms
proportional performance.
Repetitive pulse loading: Multiple pulses can be supported as long as the average (R.M.S.)
output current stays below the specified continuous output current.
Examples for pulse load

POUT PPEAK TPEAK T0
compatibility:
open closed open closed
max. PPEAK P0 TPEAK T0
150%
Please note: 720W 480W 1s >25s
100%
The DC-ok feature requires that the output voltage reach the nominal (=adjusted) level after 720W 0W 1s >1.3s
turn-on in order to function to specification. If this level cannot be achieved, the unit will show P0
an overload condition. The overload signal will disappear as soon as the adjusted voltage is 720W 240W 0.1s >0.16s
reached. This is an important to condition to consider particularly, if the load is a battery or 720W 240W 1s >1.6s
the power supply is used for N+1 redundant systems. t
0% 720W 240W 3s >4.9s
t
Environment Protection
Operational temperature -25 to +70°C De-rate above +60°C Output Overload, no-load, short-circuit proof
Storage temperature -40 to +85° C Storage, transport Degree of protection IP 20 EN/IEC 60529
Humidity 5 to 95% RH No condensation allowed Class of protection I PE (Ground) connection required!
Vibration sinusoidal 2g IEC 60068-2-6 Degree of pollution 2 EN 50178, not conductive
Shock 30g 6ms, 20g 11ms IEC 60068-2-27 Over-temperature protection yes Output shut-down with automatic restart
Output over-voltage protection yes Output shut-down with automatic restart
150% Over-voltage category III EN 50178
for ty p. 4s
125% Penetration protection >3.5mm e.g. screws, small parts …
Allowed output current versus
100% Phase failures or missing phases yes Device also operates with two phases
the ambient temperature continuous
75% See specification on next page.
50%
Ambient temperature is defined Internal input fuse Not included
25% Ambient Temperature
2cm below the unit. External protection External branch circuit protection is required to protect
0%
the device. Use three thermo-magnetic circuit breakers
-40°C -20°C 0°C 20°C 40°C 60°C 80°C
with a value between 3A and 16A. Choose tripping
characteristic B (US: F) or C (US: G).
QT20 Power Supply Instruction Manual
Parallel Operation (1) Use only power supplies from the same Operation on Two Phases POUT
Power Dimension Q-series. L1 100%
Supply A
Fuse *)
(2) Adjust the output voltages of all power Fuse
AC L1 75%
+ supplies to approximately the same value
(±500mV). Otherwise, the DC-ok signal L3 50%
L2
- might not work properly. 2AC 460 to 550V
DC open L3 25%
2AC 340 to 460V
(3) A fuse (or diode) on the output is only
Power + required if more than three units are
PE DC 0%
Supply B Load -30°C -10°C 10°C 30°C 50°C 70°C
Fuse *) connected in parallel. L2
AC -
+ (4) Keep an installation clearance of 15mm
(left/right) between two power supplies and (1) Operation on two phases is specified.
- (2) Reduce output power according to curve. Exceeding the limits results in a thermal shut-down.
DC avoid installing the power supplies on top of
each other. (3) The specification for EMC performance, hold-up time, losses and output ripple will no longer
be valid. Check suitability individually in the application.
Serial Operation (1) It is possible to connect as many units in

Power series as needed, providing the sum of the
Supply A output voltage does not exceed 150Vdc.
AC (2) Voltages with a potential above 60Vdc
+
are not SELV any more and can be
- dangerous. Such voltages must be installed
DC
with a protection against touching.
Power + (3) For serial operation use power supplies
Supply B Load of the same type.
AC - (4) Earthing of the output is required when
+
the sum of the output voltage is above
- 60Vdc.
DC Earth
(see notes) (5) Keep an installation clearance of 15mm
(left/right) between two power supplies and
avoid installing the power supplies on top of
each other.
Check touch current (earth leakage current)! The total touch current is the sum of
the touch currents of all units. Safety limits – depending on the field of application -
apply for the allowed touch current!
EMC Safety
The device is suitable for applications in industrial environment as well as in residential, Separation of output SELV IEC/EN 60950-1
commercial and light industry environment without any restrictions.
For further details see datasheet. PELV EN 60204-1, EN 50178, IEC 60364-4-41
EMC Immunity EN 61000-6-1, EN 61000-6-2 Touch current max. 0.7mA Earth leakages current, TN- mains
EMC Emission EN 61000-3-2, EN 61000-3-3, EN 61000-6-3, EN 61000-6-4, Isolation resistance min. 5MOhm Input to output, 500Vdc
FCC Part 15 Class B
PE resistance max. 0.1Ohm Between housing and ground terminal
This device complies with FCC Part 15 rules. Operation is subjected to following two Transformer Safety transformer according to IEC/EN 61558-2-17
conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must
Approvals See datasheet or markings on the unit
accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
CE mark in conformance with EMC guideline 89/336/EEC and 93/68/EEC and low-voltage directive (LVD) 73/23/EWG.
Terminals and Connections

Terminals Input Output DC-ok
Type Bi-stable, quick-connect spring clamp terminals
Ferrules Allowed, but not required
Solid wire 0.5-6mm2 0.5-6mm2 0.5-6mm2
Stranded wire 0.5-4mm2 0.5-4mm2 0.5-4mm2
AWG AWG 20-10 AWG 20-10 AWG 20-10
open close
Stripping length 10mm / 0.4inch
Pull-out force 10AWG:80N, 12AWG:60N, 14AWG:50N, 16AWG:40N (UL486E)
Use appropriate copper cables that are designed for an operating temperatures of 60°C (for ambient
up to 45°C) and 75°C (for ambient up to 60°C), minimum. Follow national installation codes and
regulations! Ensure that all strands of a stranded wire enter the terminal connection! Up to two
stranded wires with the same cross section are permitted in one connection point (except PE wire). Do
1. Insert the wire 2. Snap the lever
not use without PE (Ground) connection!
Physical Dimensions, Indicators and Cooling

Width 65mm / 2.56’’
Height 124mm / 4.88’’
Depth 127mm / 5.0’’ plus DIN-rail depth
Weight 870g / 1.92lb
Use DIN-rails according to EN 60715 or EN 50022
DIN-Rail
with a height of 7.5 or 15mm
Mounting Output terminal on top and input terminals on the bottom.
Orientation For other orientations see datasheet.
DC-ok LED Overload DC-ok

Indicators (green) lamp (red) Relay
Normal operating mode ON OFF Closed
BonusPower® operation ON OFF Closed
Overload (VOUT < 90%) OFF ON Open
Short-circuit (VOUT = 0) OFF ON Open
Air flow
Temperature shut-down OFF ON Open
No input power OFF OFF Open Do not obstruct air flow! The unit is convection cooled. Ventilation grid must be kept free of any obstructions.
Keep installation clearances at higher ambient temperature and full load:
40mm on top, 20mm on the bottom, 5mm on the left and right side are recommended when loaded
permanently with full power. In case the adjacent device is a heat source, 15mm clearance are recommended.
PU-347.010.00-10B
QT20.241, QT20.241-C1
Q-Series 24V, 20A, THREE PHASE INPUT
POWER SUPPLY
• 3AC 380-480V Wide-range Input
• 2-Phase Operation also Possible
• Efficiency up to 95%
• Width only 65mm
• 150% Peak Load Capability
• Active Power Factor Correction PFC
• Active Input Transient Filter
• Full Power Between -25°C and +60°C
• Minimal Inrush Current
• DC-OK Relay Contact
• Quick-connect Spring Clamp Terminals
• 3 Year Warranty
1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION 2. SHORT-FORM DATA

The most outstanding features of this Dimension Q- Output voltage DC 24V
Series DIN-rail power supply are the high efficiency Adjustment range 24-28V
and the small size, which are achieved by a Output current 20A Continuous, 24V
synchronous rectification and further novel design 30A For typ. 4s, 24V
details. Output power 480W Continuous, 24V
Large power reserves of 150% support the starting 720W For typ. 4s, 24V
of heavy loads such as DC motors or capacitive loads. Output ripple < 100mVpp 20Hz to 20MHz
In many cases this allows the use of a unit from a
Input voltage AC 380-480V ±15%
lower wattage class which saves space and money.
Mains frequency 50-60Hz ±6%
High immunity to transients and power surges as
AC Input current 0.79 / 0.65A At 3x400 / 480Vac
well as low electromagnetic emission makes usage in
nearly every environment possible. Power factor 0.94 / 0.95 At 3x400 / 480Vac
AC Inrush current typ. 3A peak
The integrated output power manager and virtually
no input inrush current make installation and usage Efficiency 95.0 / 94.8% At 3x400 / 480Vac
simple with no jumpers and switches necessary. Losses 25.3 / 26.4W At 3x400 / 480Vac
Diagnostics are easy due to the dry DC-ok contact, a Temperature range -25°C to +70°C Operational
green DC-ok LED and red overload LED. Derating 12W/°C +60 to +70°C
Unique quick-connect spring-clamp terminals allow a Hold-up time typ. 22 / 22ms At 3x400 / 480Vac
safe and fast installation and a large international Dimensions 65x124x127mm WxHxD
approval package for a variety of applications makes
this unit suitable for nearly every situation.
3. ORDER NUMBERS 4. MARKINGS

Power QT20.241 24-28V Standard unit
Supply QT20.241-C1 Conformal coated unit IND. CONT. EQ.
Accessory ZM1.WALL Wall mount bracket UL 508 UL 60950-1 Class I Div 2
ZM14.SIDE Side mount bracket
YR2.DIODE Decoupling module GL
UF20.241 Buffer unit
EMC, LVD Marine
Apr. 2007 / Rev. 1.1 DS-QT20.241-EN

All parameters are specified at 24V, 20A, 3x400Vac, 25°C ambient and after a 5 minutes run-in time unless otherwise noted.
1/23
www.pulspower.com Phone +49 89 9278 0 Germany
QT20.241, QT20.241-C1
INDEX PAGE INDEX PAGE

1. General Description ............................................1 22. Fulfilled Standards............................................ 14
2. Short-form Data ..................................................1 23. Used Substances ............................................... 14
3. Order Numbers....................................................1 24. Physical Dimensions and Weight ..................... 15
4. Markings ..............................................................1 25. Installation and Operation Instructions .......... 15
5. AC-Input...............................................................3 26. Accessory........................................................... 16
6. DC-Input...............................................................4 27. Application Notes............................................. 17
7. Input Inrush Current ...........................................4 27.1. Repetitive Pulse Loading........................ 17
8. Output .................................................................5 27.2. Peak Current Capability ......................... 18
9. Hold-up Time.......................................................7 27.3. Back-feeding Loads ................................ 18
10. DC-OK Relay Contact ..........................................7 27.4. Charging of Batteries ............................. 18
11. Efficiency and Power Losses................................8 27.5. Output Circuit Breakers ......................... 19
12. Functional Diagram.............................................9 27.6. External Input Protection....................... 20
13. Front Side and User Elements.............................9 27.7. 2-Phase Operation.................................. 20
14. Terminals and Wiring........................................10 27.8. Parallel Use to Increase Output Power . 21
15. Reliability ...........................................................10 27.9. Parallel Use for Redundancy.................. 21
16. EMC....................................................................11 27.10. Daisy Chaining of Outputs..................... 21
17. Environment ......................................................12 27.11. Series Operation..................................... 22
18. Protection Features ...........................................13 27.12. Inductive and Capacitive Loads ............. 22
19. Safety .................................................................13 27.13. Use in a Tightly Sealed Enclosure .......... 22
20. Dielectric Strength ............................................13 27.14. Mounting Orientations .......................... 23
21. Approvals...........................................................14
INTENDED USE
The power supply shall only be installed and put into operation by qualified personnel.
This power supply is designed for installation in an enclosure and is intended for the general use, such as in industrial
control, office, communication, and instrumentation equipment. Do not use this device in aircraft, trains and nuclear
equipment, where malfunctioning of the power supply may cause severe personal injury or threaten human life.
TERMINOLOGY AND ABREVIATIONS

PE and symbol PE is the abbreviation for Protective Earth and has the same meaning as the symbol .
Earth, Ground This document uses the term “earth” which is the same as the U.S. term “ground”.
T.b.d. To be defined, value or description will follow later.
AC 400V A figure displayed with the AC or DC before the value represents a nominal voltage with
standard tolerances (usually ±15%) included.
E.g.: DC 12V describes a 12V battery disregarding whether it is full (13.7V) or flat (10V)
As long as not otherwise stated, AC 380V and AC 400V parameters are valid at 50Hz and AC
480V parameters are valid at 60Hz mains frequency.
400Vac A figure with the unit (Vac) at the end is a momentary figure without any additional
tolerances included.
DISCLAIMER
The information presented in this document is believed to be accurate and reliable and may change without notice.
Apr. 2007 / Rev. 1.1 DS-QT20.241-EN

2/23
QT20.241, QT20.241-C1
5. AC-INPUT
AC input nom. 3AC 380-480V Wide-range input, TN-, TT-, IT-Mains, see Fig. 5-1
Consult factory if one phase is earthed.
AC input range min. 3x 323-552Vac Continuous operation
min. 3x 280-323Vac Full power for 200ms, no damage between 0 and 280Vac
For 2-phase operation see section 27.7
Input frequency nom. 50–60Hz ±6%
Turn-on voltage typ. 3x 263Vac Steady-state value, see Fig. 5-1
Shut-down voltage typ. 3x 242Vac Steady-state value, see Fig. 5-1
3AC 400V 3AC 480V

Input current typ. 0.79A 0.65A At 24V, 20A, all three phases equal voltage
See Fig. 5-3
Power factor *) typ. 0.94 0.95 At 24V, 20A, see Fig. 5-4
Start-up delay typ. 350ms 290ms See Fig. 5-2
Rise time typ. 30ms 30ms 0mF, 24V, 20A, see Fig. 5-2
typ. 40ms 40ms 20mF, 24V, 20A, see Fig. 5-2
Turn-on overshoot max. 500mV 500mV See Fig. 5-2
*) The power factor is the ratio of the true (or real) power to the apparent power in an AC circuit.
Fig. 5-1 Input voltage range Fig. 5-2 Turn-on behavior, definitions
POUT Rated input range Intput

full power
for 200ms Voltage
Shut-down
Turn-on
Output - 5%
Overshoot
Voltage
VIN
Start-up Rise
delay Time
280V 323V 3x 552Vac
Fig. 5-3 Input current vs. output load at 24V Fig. 5-4 Power factor vs. output load
Input Current, typ. Power Factor, typ.
0.8A 1.0
c
Va
0.7 4 00 c 0.95 3x
0.6 3x 80Va 400Vac
4
0.5 3x 0.9
0.4
0.3 0.85
3x
0.2 480Vac
0.8
0.1 Output Current
Output Current
0 0.75
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20A 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20A
Apr. 2007 / Rev. 1.1 DS-QT20.241-EN

3/23
QT20.241, QT20.241-C1
6. DC-INPUT
The QT20 series shall not be used with a DC-input voltage without consulting PULS.
Check QTD20.241 for DC-input voltage. (special version for intermediate bus systems, drive systems)
7. INPUT INRUSH CURRENT

An active inrush limitation circuitry limits the input inrush current after turn-on of the input voltage and after short
input voltage interruptions.
The charging current into EMI suppression capacitors is disregarded in the first microseconds after switch-on.
3AC 400V 3AC 480V

Inrush current max. 10Apeak 10Apeak -25°C to +70°C
typ. 3Apeak 3Apeak -25°C to +70°C
Inrush energy max. 1A2s 1A2s -25°C to +70°C
Inrush delay typ. 270ms 220ms
Fig. 7-1 Input inrush current, typical behavior
A: Inrush delay
B: Start-up delay
Input Current
Input: 3x400Vac
Output: 24V, 20A
A Ambient: 25°C
Upper curve: Input current 2A / DIV
Medium curve: Input voltage 1000V / DIV
Input Voltage Lower curve: Output voltage 50V / DIV
Time basis: 100ms / DIV
B Output Voltage
Apr. 2007 / Rev. 1.1 DS-QT20.241-EN

4/23
QT20.241, QT20.241-C1
8. OUTPUT
Output voltage nom. 24V
Adjustment range min. 24-28V Guaranteed, multi turn potentiometer
max. 30V At clockwise end position of potentiometer
Factory setting 24.1V ±0.2%, at full load, cold unit
Line regulation max. 10mV 320 to 552Vac
Load regulation max. 100mV Static value, 0A Æ 20A Æ 0A
Ripple and noise voltage max. 100mVpp 20Hz to 20MHz, 50Ohm
Output capacitance typ. 950µF The energy of the bulk capacitor on the input side will be
transferred to the output to supply short load peaks.
Continuous power capability

Output current nom. 20A At 24V, see Fig. 8-1
nom. 17.5A At 28V, see Fig. 8-1
Output power nom. 480W 24V, continuous
nom. 490W 28V, continuous
Short-circuit current min. 20A Load impedance 50mOhm, see Fig. 8-1
max. 23A Load impedance 50mOhm, see Fig. 8-1
BonusPower®, short term power capability (up to typ. 4s)

The power supply is designed to support loads with a higher short-term power requirement without damage or
shutdown. The short-term duration is hardware controlled by an output power manager. The BonusPower® is
repeatedly available. Detailed information can be found in chapter 27.1 .
Once BonusPower® has been stopped by the output power limiter, a timer disables the next BonusPower® capability.
The recovery timer will start as soon as the output voltage reaches the adjusted value again, which usually happens
after the load has been reduced.
Output current nom. 30A At 24V, see Fig. 8-1
nom. 26A At 28V, see Fig. 8-1
Output power nom. 720W 24V, short term
nom. 728W 28V, short term
Short-circuit current min. 30A Load impedance 50mOhm, see Fig. 8-1
max. 34A Load impedance 50mOhm, see Fig. 8-1
Bonus time typ. 4s At 24V, 30A, duration until the output voltage dips,
min 3.5s See Fig. 8-2
max. 4.5s
BonusPower® recovery time typ. 7s Overload free time to reset power manager, see Fig. 8-3
Peak current capability (up to several ms)

The power supply can deliver a peak current which is higher than the specified short-term current. This helps to start
current demanding loads or to safely operate subsequent circuit breakers.
The extra current is supplied by the output capacitors inside the power supply. During this event, the capacitors will
be discharged and causes a voltage dip on the output. Detailed curves can be found in chapter 27.2.
Peak current voltage dips typ. from 24V to 16V At 40A for 50ms
typ. from 24V to 19V At 80A for 2ms
typ. from 24V to 16.5V At 80A for 5ms
Apr. 2007 / Rev. 1.1 DS-QT20.241-EN

5/23
QT20.241, QT20.241-C1
Fig. 8-1 Output voltage vs. output current, typ. Fig. 8-2 Bonus time vs. output power
Output Voltage Adjustment Bonus Time

Range
28V 5s max.
24
4
20
min.
continuous
short-term
16 3
12 2
8
1
4
Output Current Output Power
0 0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35A 110 120 130 140 150 160%
Fig. 8-3 BonusPower® recovery time
Limitation by
Power <150% Power Manager
Demand 100%
Bonus Recovery Time

Time Bonus Power disabled
Output
Voltage
Bonus Power® is available as soon as power comes on and immediately after the end of an output short circuit.
Fig. 8-4 BonusPower® after input turn-on Fig. 8-5 BonusPower® after output short
Intput Short of
Output
Voltage
Output
Voltage
Output
Voltage
150% Bonus 150% Bonus
Power Output Power
100% Power 100%
Output
Power
Apr. 2007 / Rev. 1.1 DS-QT20.241-EN

6/23
QT20.241, QT20.241-C1
9. HOLD-UP TIME
3AC 400V 3AC 480V
Hold-up Time typ. 22ms 22ms 20A, 24V, see Fig. 9-1
typ. 44ms 44ms 10A, 24V, see Fig. 9-1
Fig. 9-1 Hold-up time vs. input voltage Fig. 9-2 Shut-down behavior, definitions
Hold-up Time
50ms 24V, 10A, typ.
Zero Transition
Intput
40 Voltage
24V, 10A, min.
30
24V, 20A, typ.
20 - 5%
24V, 20A, min. Output
10 Voltage
Input Voltage Hold-up Time
0
320 360 400 440 3x480Vac
10. DC-OK RELAY CONTACT

This feature monitors the output voltage, which is produced by the power supply itself. It is independent of a back-
fed voltage from a unit which is connected in parallel to the power supply output.
Contact closes As soon as the output voltage reaches the adjusted output voltage.
Contact opens As soon as the output voltage dips more than 10% below the adjusted output voltage.
Short dips will be extended to a signal length of 250ms. Dips shorter than 1ms will be ignored.
Contact re-closes As soon as the output voltage exceeds 90% of the adjusted voltage.
Contact ratings max 60Vdc 0.3A, 30Vdc 1A, 30Vac 0.5A resistive load
min 1mA at 5Vdc min. permissible load
Isolation voltage See dielectric strength table in section 20
Fig. 10-1 DC-ok relay contact behavior

Note:
VOUT= VADJ
The DC-ok feature requires that the output voltage
90% reaches the nominal (=adjusted) level after turn-on in
10%
VADJ order to function according to specification. If this level
cannot be achieved, the overload lamp will be on and
< > the DC-ok contact will be open. The overload signal will
1ms 1ms 250ms
only shut off as soon as the adjusted voltage is reached.
This is an important condition to consider particularly, if
the load is a battery, the power supply is used in
parallel or the power supply is used for N+1 redundant
open closed open closed systems.
Apr. 2007 / Rev. 1.1 DS-QT20.241-EN

7/23
QT20.241, QT20.241-C1
11. EFFICIENCY AND POWER LOSSES

3AC 400V 3AC 480V
Efficiency typ. 95.0% 94.8% 20A, 24V
Power losses typ. 25.3W 26.3W 20A, 24V
typ. 8.2W 10.0W 0A
Fig. 11-1 Efficiency vs. output current at 24V Fig. 11-2 Losses vs. output current at 24V
Efficiency Power Losses
96% 30W
95 25
94 3x
400Vac 3x
93 20 480Vac
92 15
3x
91 480Vac 10 3x
400Vac
90
89 5
Output Current Output Current
88 0
4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20A 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20A
Fig. 11-3 Efficiency vs. input voltage, 24V, 20A Fig. 11-4 Losses vs. input voltage, 24V, 20A
Efficiency Power Losses
95.4% 27W
95.2 26.5
95.0 26.0
94.8 25.5
94.6 25.0
94.4 24.5
Input Voltage Input Voltage
94.2 24.0
350 400 450 500 3x550Vac 350 400 450 500 3x550Vac
Apr. 2007 / Rev. 1.1 DS-QT20.241-EN

8/23
QT20.241, QT20.241-C1
12. FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM

Fig. 12-1 Functional diagram
Output
Voltage
Regulator VOUT
L1
L2 Input Filter +
Input Rectifier PFC
Inrush Limiter Converter Power Output +
L3 Transient Filter Converter Filter
-
-
Over-
load
DC
ok
Temper- Output Output Output
ature Power Over- Voltage
Shut- Manager Voltage
down Protection Monitor DC ok DC
Relay ok
13. FRONT SIDE AND USER ELEMENTS

Fig. 13-1 Front side
Output Terminals Output voltage potentiometer

Quick-connect spring-clamp (multi turn potentiometer)
terminals, no tools required Open the flap to tune the output voltage.
Factory setting: 24.1V
+ Positive output
- Negative (return) output DC-ok lamp (green)
Dual pins per pole Overload lamp (red)
DC ok Relay contact Overload DC-ok DC-ok
(NO-contact) lamp lamp contact
Normal mode OFF ON Closed
480W Continuous power / BonusPower
®
720W Peak power OFF ON Closed

mode
Overload
ON OFF Open
(VOUT < 90%)
Input Terminals
Quick-connect spring-clamp Short-circuit
ON OFF Open
(VOUT = ca. 0V)
terminals, no tools required
Over-
ON OFF Open
temperature
L1, L2, L3 Line inputs
No input power OFF OFF Open
... PE (Protective Earth) input
See chapter 14 “Terminals and
Wiring” to choose appropriate DC-ok lamp and DC-ok contact
wire gauges function synchronized
Apr. 2007 / Rev. 1.1 DS-QT20.241-EN

9/23
QT20.241, QT20.241-C1
14. TERMINALS AND WIRING

Type Bi-stable, quick-connect spring clamp terminals. IP20 Finger safe construction.
Suitable for field- and factory installation. Shipped in open position.
Solid wire 0.5-6mm2
Stranded wire 0.5-4mm2
American wire gauge 20-10 AWG
Ferrules Allowed, but not required
Wire stripping length 10mm / 0.4inch
Pull-out force 10AWG:80N, 12AWG:60N, 14AWG:50N, 16AWG:40N (according to UL486E)
Fig. 14-1 Connecting a wire Instructions:

a) Use appropriate copper cables that are designed
for an operating temperature of:
60°C for ambient up to 45°C and
75°C for ambient up to 60°C minimum.
b) Follow national installation codes and
installation regulations!
c) Ensure that all strands of a stranded wire enter
the terminal connection!
1. Insert the wire 2. Snap the lever d) Up to two stranded wires with the same cross
To disconnect wire: same procedure section are permitted in one connection point
vice versa (except PE wire).
e) Do not use the unit without PE connection.
15. RELIABILITY
3AC 400V 3AC 480V

Lifetime expectancy min. 51 000h 48 000h 40°C, 24V, 20A
min. 89 000h 86 000h 40°C, 24V, 10A
min. 144 000h 135 000h 25°C, 24V, 20A
MTBF SN 29500, IEC 61709 690 000h 670 000h 40°C, 24V, 20A
1 194 000h 1 159 000h 25°C, 24V, 20A
MTBF MIL HDBK 217F 284 000h 271 000h 40°C, 24V, 20A, Ground Benign GB40
389 000h 371 000h 25°C, 24V, 20A, Ground Benign GB25
The Lifetime expectancy shown in the table indicates the operating hours (service life) and is determined by the
lifetime expectancy of the built-in electrolytic capacitors.
Lifetime expectancy is specified in operational hours. Lifetime expectancy is calculated according to the capacitor’s
manufacturer specification. The prediction model allows a calculation of up to 15 years from date of shipment.
MTBF stands for Mean Time Between Failure, which is calculated according to statistical device failures, and indicates
reliability of a device. It is the statistical representation of the likelihood of a unit to fail and does not necessarily
represent the life of a product.
Apr. 2007 / Rev. 1.1 DS-QT20.241-EN

10/23
QT20.241, QT20.241-C1
16. EMC
The power supply is suitable for applications in industrial environment as well as in residential, commercial and light
industry environment without any restrictions. CE mark is in conformance with EMC guideline 89/336/EEC and
93/68/EEC and the low-voltage directive (LVD) 73/23/EWG. A detailed EMC Report is available upon request
EMC Immunity EN 61000-6-1 EN 61000-6-2 Generic standards

Electrostatic discharge EN 61000-4-2 Contact discharge 8kV Criterion A
Air discharge 15kV Criterion A
Electromagnetic RF field EN 61000-4-3 80MHz-1GHz 10V/m Criterion A
Fast transients (Burst) EN 61000-4-4 Input lines 4kV Criterion A
Output lines 2kV Criterion A
Surge voltage on input EN 61000-4-5 L1 Æ L2, L2 Æ L3, 2kV Criterion A
L1 Æ L3
Surge voltage on input EN 61000-4-5 L1 / L2 / L3 Æ PE 4kV Criterion A
Surge voltage on output EN 61000-4-5 +Æ- 500V Criterion A
+ / - Æ PE 500V Criterion A
Conducted disturbance EN 61000-4-6 0.15-80MHz 10V Criterion A
Mains voltage dips EN 61000-4-11 70% of 380Vac 266Vac, 10ms Criterion A
Dip on all three phases 40% of 380Vac 152Vac, 100ms Criterion C
40% of 380Vac 152Vac, 1000ms Criterion C
Mains voltage dips EN 61000-4-11 70% of 380Vac 266Vac, 10ms Criterion A
Dip on one phase 40% of 380Vac 152Vac, 100ms Criterion A
40% of 380Vac 152Vac, 1000ms Criterion A
Voltage interruptions EN 61000-4-11 0Vac, 5000ms Criterion C
Voltage sags SEMI F47 0200 Dips on two phases 304Vac, 1000ms Criterion A
according to section 266Vac, 500ms Criterion A
7.2. (SEMI F47-200) 190Vac, 200ms Criterion A
Powerful transients VDE 0160 over entire load 1300V, 1.3ms Criterion A
range
Criterions:
A: Power supply shows normal operation behavior within the defined limits.
C: Temporary loss of function is possible. Power supply might shut-down and restarts by itself. No damages or hazards for the power supply occur.
EMC Emission EN 61000-6-3 and EN 61000-6-4 Generic standards

Conducted emission EN 55011, EN 55022, FCC Part 15, CISPR 11, CISPR 22 Class B, input lines
Radiated emission EN 55011, EN 55022 Class B
Harmonic input current EN 61000-3-2 Fulfilled, active PFC
Voltage fluctuations, flicker EN 61000-3-3 Fulfilled
This device complies with FCC Part 15 rules.
Operation is subjected to following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Switching Frequencies The power supply has three converters with three different switching frequencies
included. One is nearly constant. The other two are input voltage and load dependent.
Switching frequency 1 100kHz Nearly constant
Switching frequency 2 30kHz to 90kHz Input voltage and load dependent
Switching frequency 3 40kHz to 220kHz Input voltage and load dependent
Apr. 2007 / Rev. 1.1 DS-QT20.241-EN

11/23
QT20.241, QT20.241-C1
17. ENVIRONMENT
Operational temperature -25°C to +70°C (-13°F to 158°F) Reduce output power above +60°C
Output de-rating 12W/°C 60-70°C (140°F to 158°F), see Fig. 17-1
Storage temperature -40 to +85°C (-40°F to 185°F) Storage and transportation
Humidity 5 to 95% r.H. IEC 60068-2-30
Do not energize while condensation is present
Vibration sinusoidal 2-17.8Hz: ±1.6mm; IEC 60068-2-6
17.8-500Hz: 2g
2 hours / axis
2 3
0.5m (s ) IEC 60068-2-64
Vibration random
2 hours / axis
Shock 30g 6ms, 20g 11ms IEC 60068-2-27
3 bumps / direction,
18 bumps in total
Altitude 0 to 6000m (0 to 20 000ft) Reduce output power or ambient temperature
above 2000m sea level.
Output de-rating (for altitude) 30W/1000m or 5°C/1000m above 2000m, see Fig. 17-2
Over-voltage category III EN 50178, altitudes up to 2000m
II Altitudes from 2000m to 6000m
Degree of pollution 2 EN 50178, not conductive
Fig. 17-1 Output current vs. ambient temp., Fig. 17-2 Output current vs. altitude
Allowed Output Allowed Output

Current at 24V Current at 24V
30A 30A
for typ. 4s for typ. 4s
25 25
20 20 C
continuous continuous B
A
15 15
10 10
A... Tamb < 60°C
5 5 B... Tamb < 50°C
Ambient Temperature C... Tamb < 40°C Altitude
0 0
-25 0 20 40 60 70°C 0 2000 4000 6000m
The ambient temperature is defined as the air temperature 2cm below the unit.
Apr. 2007 / Rev. 1.1 DS-QT20.241-EN

12/23
QT20.241, QT20.241-C1
18. PROTECTION FEATURES

Output protection Electronically protected against overload, no-load and short-circuits
Output over-voltage protection typ. 32Vdc In case of an internal power supply defect, a redundant
max. 35Vdc circuitry limits the maximum output voltage. The output
shuts-down and automatically attempts to restart.
Degree of protection IP 20 EN/IEC 60529
Penetration protection > 3.5mm e.g. screws, small parts
Over-temperature protection yes Output shut-down with automatic restart
Input transient protection MOV (Metal Oxide Varistor) and active transient filter
Internal input fuse Not included See section 27.6
Note: In case of a protection event, audible noise may occur.
19. SAFETY
Input / output separation SELV IEC/EN 60950-1
PELV EN 60204-1, EN 50178, IEC 60364-4-41
double or reinforced insulation
Class of protection I PE (Protective Earth) connection required
Isolation resistance > 5MOhm Input to output, 500Vdc
PE resistance < 0.1Ohm Between housing and PE terminal
Touch current (leakage current) typ. 0.38mA 3x 440Vac, 50Hz, TN mains
typ. 0.54mA 3x 528Vac, 60Hz, TN mains
< 0.47mA 3x 400Vac, 50Hz, TN mains
< 0.7mA 3x 480Vac, 60Hz, TN mains
20. DIELECTRIC STRENGTH

Fig. 20-1 Dielectric strength A B C D
Type test 60s 2500Vac 3000Vac 500Vac 500Vac
Input DC-ok
L1 B
Factory test 5s 2500Vac 2500Vac 500Vac 500Vac
L2 Field test 5s 2000Vac 2000Vac 500Vac 500Vac
L3
Type tests and factory tests:
D
B
A Conducted by the manufacturer. Do not repeat test in field!

Output Rules for field test:
Earth
Use appropriate test equipment which applies the voltage
C +
-
with a slow ramp! Connect L1, L2 and L3 together as well as
all output poles.
The output voltage is floating and has no ohmic connection to ground.

To fulfill the PELV requirements according to EN60204-1 § 6.4.1, we recommend that either the + pole, the – pole or
any other part of the output circuit shall be connected to the protective earth system. This helps to avoid situations in
which a load starts unexpectedly or can not be switched off any more when unnoticed earth faults occur.
Apr. 2007 / Rev. 1.1 DS-QT20.241-EN

13/23
QT20.241, QT20.241-C1
21. APPROVALS
IECEE
IEC 60950-1 CB Scheme,
Information Technology Equipment
CB SCHEME
UL 508 LISTED E198865 listed for use in U.S.A. (UL 508) and Canada (C22.2
IND. CONT. EQ. No. 14-95)
Industrial Control Equipment
UL 60950-1 RECOGNIZED E137006 recognized for the use in U.S.A. (UL 60950-
1) and Canada (C22.2 No. 60950)
Information Technology Equipment, Level 5
UL 1604 RECOGNIZED E246877 recognized for use in U.S.A. (UL 1604) and
Canada (C22.2 No. 213-M1987)
Hazardous Location Class I Div 2 T4A Groups A,B,C,D and
Class I Zone 2 Groups IIA, IIB and IIC
The unit is suitable for use in Class I Division 2 Groups A, B, C, D locations as well as for Class I
Zone 2 Groups IIA, IIB and IIC locations. Substitution of components may impair suitability for
Class I Division 2 environment. Do not disconnect equipment unless power has been switched
off. Wiring must be in accordance with Class I, Division 2 wiring methods of the National
Electrical Code, NFPA 70, and in accordance with other local or national codes.
Marine GL (Germanischer Lloyd) classified and ABS (American Bureau for
GL ABS Shipping) PDA for marine and offshore applications.
Environmental category: C, EMC2
SEMI F47 SEMI F47-0200 Power Quality Star
Ride-through compliance for semiconductor industry.
Full SEMI range compliance (Dips on two phase: 304Vac for 1000ms,
266Vac for 500ms and 190Vac for 200ms)
22. FULFILLED STANDARDS

EN 61558-2-17 Safety of Power Transformers
EN/IEC 60204-1 Safety of Electrical Equipment of Machines
EN/IEC 61131-2 Programmable Controllers
EN 50178 Electronic Equipment in Power Installations
23. USED SUBSTANCES

The unit does not release any silicone and is suitable for the use in paint shops.
Electrolytic capacitors included in this unit do not use electrolytes such as Quaternary Ammonium Salt Systems.
Plastic housings and other molded plastic materials are free of halogens, wires and cables are not PVC insulated.
The production material within our production does not include following toxic chemicals:
Polychlorized Biphenyl (PCB), Polychlorized Terphenyl (PCT), Pentachlorophenol (PCP), Polychlorinated naphthalene
(PCN), Polybrom Biphenyll (PBB), Polybrom Bipheny-oxyd (PBO), Polybrominated Diphenylether (PBDE), Polychlorinated
Diphenylether (PCDE), Polydibromphenyl Oxyd (PBDO), Cadmium, Asbest, Mercury, Silicia
Apr. 2007 / Rev. 1.1 DS-QT20.241-EN

14/23
QT20.241, QT20.241-C1
24. PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT

Weight 870g / 1.92lb
DIN-Rail Use 35mm DIN-rails according to EN 60715 or EN 50022 with a height of 7.5 or 15mm.
The DIN-rail height must be added to the depth (127mm) to calculate the total required
installation depth.
Electronic files with mechanical data can be downloaded at www.pulspower.com
Fig. 24-1 Front view Fig. 24-2 Side view
25. INSTALLATION AND OPERATION INSTRUCTIONS

Mounting Orientation:
Output terminal must be located on top and input terminal on the bottom. For other orientations see section 27.14.
Cooling:
Convection cooled, no forced cooling required. Do not cover ventilation grid (e.g. cable conduits) by more than 30%!
Installation clearances:
40mm on top, 20mm on the bottom, 5mm on the left and right side are recommended when loaded permanently
with full power. In case the adjacent device is a heat source, 15mm clearance is recommended.
Risk of electrical shock, fire, personal injury or death!
Do not use the unit without proper earth connection (Protective Earth). Use the pin on the terminal block for earth
connection and not one of the screws on the housing.
Turn power off before working on the power supply. Protect against inadvertent re-powering.
Make sure the wiring is correct by following all local and national codes.
Do not open, modify or repair the unit.
Use caution to prevent any foreign objects from entering into the housing.
Do not use in wet locations or in areas where moisture or condensation can be expected.
Service parts:
The unit does not contain any serviceable parts. If damage or malfunctioning should occur during operation,
immediately turn power off and send unit to factory for inspection!
Apr. 2007 / Rev. 1.1 DS-QT20.241-EN

15/23
QT20.241, QT20.241-C1
26. ACCESSORY
ZM1.WALL Wall mounting bracket
This bracket is used to mount Dimension units onto a flat surface without utilizing a DIN-Rail. The two aluminum
brackets and the black plastic slide of the unit have to be detached, so that the two steel brackets can be mounted.
Fig. 26-1 ZM1.WALL Wall Mounting Bracket Fig. 26-2 Assembled Wall Mounting Bracket
ZM14.SIDE Side mounting bracket

This bracket is used to mount Dimension units sideways with or without utilizing a DIN-Rail. The two aluminum
brackets and the black plastic slide of the unit have to be detached, so that the steel brackets can be mounted.
For sideways DIN-rail mounting, the removed aluminum brackets and the black plastic slider need to be mounted on
the steel bracket.
Fig. 26-3 ZM14.SIDE Side Mounting Bracket Fig. 26-4 ZM14.SIDE Side Mounting Bracket
Panel Mount DIN-Rail Mount
Apr. 2007 / Rev. 1.1 DS-QT20.241-EN

16/23
QT20.241, QT20.241-C1
27. APPLICATION NOTES
27.1. REPETITIVE PULSE LOADING

Typically, a load current is not constant. It varies over time. For pulse load compatibility, following rules must be met:
a) The pulse power demand must be below 150% of the nominal power.
b) The duration of the pulse power must be shorter than the allowed Bonus Time. (see output section)
c) The average (R.M.S.) output current must be below the specified continuous output current.
If the R.M.S. current is higher, the unit will respond with a thermal shut-down after a while. Use the max. duty
cycle curve (Fig. 27-2) to check if the average output current is below the nominal current.
d) The duty cycle must be below 0.75.
e) For altitudes higher than 2000m reduce the pulse loading (15W/1000m) or the ambient temperature (5°C/1000m)
Fig. 27-1 Repetitive pulse loads, definitions Fig. 27-2 Max. Duty Cycle Curve
Duty Cycle P0 = 10%

P0 = 50%
PPEAK TPEAK T0 0.75
P0 = 75%
max.
150%
0.6
100% 0.4
0.2 P0 = 100%
P0
PPEAK
0
100 110 120 130 140 150%
Tpeak
P0 Base load (W) DutyCycle =
Tpeak + T0
PPEAK Pulse load (above 100%)
Tpeak - (DutyCycle x Tpeak)
T0 Duration between pulses (s) T0 =
TPEAK Pulse duration (s) DutyCycle
Utilizing the Max. Duty Cycle Curve:

Example to determine the repetition rate of pulses without dipping of the output voltage:
Parameters of application: Determining the repetition rate:
1) make a vertical line at PPEAK = 150%
Pulse length is TPEAK = 1s 2) make a horizontal line where the vertical line crosses the P0 = 50% curve
3) Read the Max. Duty Cycle from the Duty Cycle-axis (= 0.37)
Steady state load P0=120W 4) Calculate the min. pause (base load) length T0 :
(= 50% of IRATED)
Tpeak - (DutyCycle x Tpeak) 1s - (0.37 x 1s)
T0 = = = 1.7s
Peak load PPEAK = 360W DutyCycle 0.37
(= 150% of IRATED) 5) Pulse length = 1s, min. pause length = 1.7s
6) Max. repetition rate = pulse length +pause length = 2.7s
More examples for pulse load compatibility:

PPEAK P0 TPEAK T0 PPEAK P0 TPEAK T0
720W 480W 1s >25s 720W 240W 0.1s >0.16s
720W 0W 1s >1.3s 720W 240W 1s >1.6s
600W 240W 1s > 0,75s 720W 240W 3s >4.9s
Apr. 2007 / Rev. 1.1 DS-QT20.241-EN

17/23
QT20.241, QT20.241-C1
27.2. PEAK CURRENT CAPABILITY

Solenoids, contactors and pneumatic modules often have a steady state coil and a pick-up coil. The inrush current
demand of the pick-up coil is several times higher than the steady state current and usually exceeds the nominal
output current (including the Bonus Power®) The same situation applies, when starting a capacitive load.
Branch circuits are often protected with circuit breakers or fuses. In case of a short or an overload in the branch
circuit, the fuse needs a certain amount of over-current to trip or to blow. The peak current capability ensures the
safe operation of subsequent circuit breakers.
Assuming the input voltage is turned on before such an event, the built-in large sized output capacitors inside the
power supply can deliver extra current. Discharging this capacitor causes a voltage dip on the output. The following
two examples show typical voltage dips:
Fig. 27-3 Peak load 40A for 50ms, typ. Fig. 27-4 Peak load 80A for 5ms, typ.
Output Output
24V Voltage 24V Voltage
18V 16.5V
40A 80A
Output Output
0A Current 0A Current
20ms/DIV 2ms/DIV
Peak load 40A (resistive) for 50ms Peak load 80A (resistive) for 5ms
Output voltage dips from 24V to 18V. Output voltage dips from 24V to 16.5V.
Please note: The DC-OK relay triggers when the voltage dips more than 10% for longer than 1ms.
27.3. BACK-FEEDING LOADS

Loads such as decelerating motors and inductors can feed voltage back to the power supply. This feature is also called
return voltage immunity or resistance against Back- E.M.F. (Electro Magnetic Force).
This power supply is resistant and does not show malfunctioning when a load feeds back voltage to the power
supply. It does not matter, whether the power supply is on or off.
The maximum allowed feed back voltage is 34Vdc. The absorbing energy can be calculated according to the built-in
large sized output capacitor which is specified in chapter 8.
27.4. CHARGING OF BATTERIES

The power supply can be used to charge lead-acid or maintenance free batteries. (Two 12V batteries in series)
Instructions for charging batteries:
a) Set output voltage (measured at the battery) very precisely to the end-of-charge voltage.
End-of-charge voltage 27.8V 27.5V 27.15V 26.8V
Battery temperature 10°C 20°C 30°C 40°C
b) Use a 25A circuit breaker (or blocking diode ) between the power supply and the battery.
c) Ensure that the output current of the power supply is below the allowed charging current of the battery.
d) Use only matched batteries when putting 12V types in series.
e) The return current to the power supply is typ. 16mA at 25Vdc when the power supply is switched off (except in
case a blocking diode is utilized).
Apr. 2007 / Rev. 1.1 DS-QT20.241-EN

18/23
QT20.241, QT20.241-C1
27.5. OUTPUT CIRCUIT BREAKERS

Standard miniature circuit breakers (MCBs) can be used for branch protection. Ensure that the MCB is rated for DC
voltage, too. The following tests show which circuit breakers the power supply typically trips.
Circuit breakers have huge tolerances in their tripping behavior. Therefore, these typical tests can only be used as a
recommendation or for comparing two different power supplies. Furthermore, the loop impedance has a major
influence on whether a breaker trips or not. Two tests were performed, representing typical situations:
Test 1: Short circuit with S1 on the power supply end of the cable (loop impedance approx. 20mOhm)
Fig. 27-5 Branch protectors, test circuit 1
Circuit Parameters:
Power Breaker Input voltage:3x 400Vac, load current: 0A
Supply I Tripping time shorter than 5s.
AC + + The following circuit breaker tripped during the test:
S1 Load A- or Z- Characteristic:: equal or smaller 25A
DC - - B- Characteristic: equal or smaller 16A
C- Characteristic: equal or smaller 10A
Test 2: Short circuit with S1 on the load end (additional impedance included; represents longer load wire length).
Fig. 27-6 Branch protectors, test circuit 2 Parameters:
Input voltage: 3x 400Vac, load current: 0A
Circuit Tripping time shorter than 5s.
Power Breaker
Supply I The following circuit breaker tripped during the test:
R
AC + + A- or Z- Characteristic:: ≤ 16A and R< 82mOhm
B- Characteristic: ≤ 6A and R< 180mOhm
S1 Load
C- Characteristic: ≤ 8A and R<= 150mOhm
DC - -
What does this resistance mean in wire length?
2 2 2 2 2 2
0.5mm 0.7mm 1.0mm 1.5mm 2.5mm 4.0mm
82mOhm 2.3m 3.2m 4.6m 6.9m 11.4m 18.3m
150mOhm 4.2m 5.9m 8.4m 12.5m 20.9m 33.4m
180mOhm 5.0m 7.0m 10.0m 15.0m 25.1m 40.1m
Example:
Which wire gauge must be used to trip a B-Characteristic circuit breaker with a rating of 6A? The load wire length is
21m.
Answer: A 6A B-Characteristic circuit breaker requires a loop impedance of less than 180mOhm (test results). The wire
2
length table shows that up to 25.1m wire with a cross section of 2.5mm are below 180mOhm. A wire not smaller
2
than 2.5mm shall be used.
Apr. 2007 / Rev. 1.1 DS-QT20.241-EN

19/23
QT20.241, QT20.241-C1
27.6. EXTERNAL INPUT PROTECTION

The unit is tested and approved for branch circuits up to 15A (U.S.A.) and 16A (IEC). External protection is only
required, if the supplying branch has an ampacity greater than this. In some countries local regulations might apply.
Check also local codes and local requirements.
If an external fuse is necessary or utilized, a minimum value is required to avoid undesired tripping of the fuse.
B-Characteristic C-Characteristic
Ampacity max. 16A (U.S.A.: 15A) 16A (U.S.A.: 15A)
min. 6A 3A
27.7. 2-PHASE OPERATION

The QT20 series is specified to operate on two phases.
Instructions for 2-ph operation: Fig. 27-7 Wiring diagram 2-phase operation
Reduce output power according to curve. Exceeding the L1

limits results in a thermal shut-down. Fuse
L1
The specification for EMC performance, hold-up time, L3
L2
losses and output ripple will no longer be valid. Check open L3
suitability individually in the application. PE DC
L2
Fig. 27-8 2-phase operation, allowed output Fig. 27-9 2-phase operation, Hold-up time
current
Allowed Output Current at 24V Hold-up Time (2-Ph)
30A 50ms
for typ. 4s 24V, 10A, typ.
25 40
24V, 10A, min.
20
continuous 30
B A
15
20 24V, 20A, typ.
10 A... 2x 460 to 552Vac
B... 2x 340 to 460Vac 24V, 20A, min.
5 10
Input Voltage Input Voltage
0 0
-25 0 20 40 60 70°C 320 360 400 440 2x480Vac
Apr. 2007 / Rev. 1.1 DS-QT20.241-EN

20/23
QT20.241, QT20.241-C1
27.8. PARALLEL USE TO INCREASE OUTPUT POWER

Power supplies can be paralleled to increase the output power.
Fig. 27-10 Schematic for parallel operation Instructions for parallel use:
Unit A
a) Use only power supplies from the same series (Q-Series).
Fuse *)
AC b) Adjust the output voltages of all power supplies to
+ approximately the same value (±500mV).
- Otherwise, the DC-ok signal might not work properly.
DC
c) A fuse (or diode) on the output is only required if more
Unit B +
Fuse *)
Load
than three units are connected in parallel.
AC
+ - d) Keep an installation clearance of 15mm (left / right)
- between two power supplies and avoid installing the
DC power supplies on top of each other.
27.9. PARALLEL USE FOR REDUNDANCY

Power supplies can be paralleled for redundancy to gain a higher system availability. Redundant systems require a
certain amount of extra power to support the load in case one power supply unit fails. The simplest way is to put two
Q-Series power supplies in parallel. This is called a 1+1 redundancy. In case one power supply unit fails, the other one
is automatically able to support the load current without any interruption. Redundant systems for a higher power
demand are usually built in a N+1 method. E.g. Five power supplies, each rated for 10A are paralleled to build a 40A
redundant system.
Please note: This simple way to build a redundant system does not cover failures such as an internal short circuit in
the secondary side of the power supply. In such a - virtually nearly impossible - case, the defect unit becomes a load
for the other power supplies and the output voltage can not be maintained any more. This can only be avoided by
utilizing decoupling diodes which are included in the decoupling module YR2.DIODE. (One module per power supply)
Recommendations for building redundant power systems:
a) Use separate input fuses for each power supply.
b) Monitor the individual power supply units. A DC-ok lamp and a DC-ok contact is already included in the units
This feature reports a faulty unit.
c) When possible, connect each power supply to different phases or circuits.
d) It is desirable to set the output voltages of all power supplies to the same value to avoid a false DC-ok signal.
27.10. DAISY CHAINING OF OUTPUTS

Daisy chaining (jumping from one power supply output to the next) is allowed as long as the maximum current
through one terminal pin does not exceed 25A. If the current is higher, use a separate distribution terminal block.
Fig. 27-11 Daisy chaining of outputs Fig. 27-12 Using distribution terminals
max 25A!
+ -
++ -- ++ -- ++ -- ++ -- + -
Load
Power Power Load
Power Power
Supply Supply Supply Supply
Input Input
Distribution
Input Input Terminals
Apr. 2007 / Rev. 1.1 DS-QT20.241-EN

21/23
QT20.241, QT20.241-C1
27.11. SERIES OPERATION

The power supply can be put in series to increase the output voltage.
Fig. 27-13 Schematic for series operation Instructions for use in series:
a) It is possible to connect as many units in series as needed,
providing the sum of the output voltage does not exceed
Unit A 150Vdc.
AC b) Voltages with a potential above 60Vdc are not SELV any
+ more and can be dangerous. Such voltages must be installed
- with a protection against touching.
DC c) For serial operation use power supplies of the same type.
Unit B + d) Earthing of the output is required when the sum of the
AC Load output voltage is above 60Vdc.
+ - e) Keep an installation clearance of 15mm (left/right) between
two power supplies and avoid installing the power supplies
- Earth
DC on top of each other.
(see notes)
Note: Avoid return voltage (e.g. from a decelerating motor or
battery) which is applied to the output terminals.
27.12. INDUCTIVE AND CAPACITIVE LOADS

The unit is designed to supply any kind of load, including unlimited capacitive and inductive loads.
27.13. USE IN A TIGHTLY SEALED ENCLOSURE

When the power supply is installed in a tightly sealed enclosure, the temperature inside the enclosure will be higher
than outside. The inside temperature defines the ambient temperature for the power supply.
Results from such an installation:
Power supply is placed in the middle of the box, no other heat producer inside the box
Enclosure: Rittal Typ IP66 Box PK 9519 100, plastic, 180x180x165mm
Load: 24V, 16A; (=80%) load is placed outside the box
Input: 3x 400Vac
Temperature inside enclosure: 55.9°C (in the middle of the right side of the power supply with a distance of 2cm)
Temperature outside enclosure: 24.9°C
Temperature rise: 31K
Apr. 2007 / Rev. 1.1 DS-QT20.241-EN

22/23
QT20.241, QT20.241-C1
27.14. MOUNTING ORIENTATIONS

Mounting orientations other than input terminals on the bottom and output on the top require a reduction in
continuous output power or a limitation in the max. allowed ambient temperature. The amount of reduction
influences the lifetime expectancy of the power supply. Therefore, two different derating curves for continuous
operation can be found below:
Curve A1 Recommended output current.
Curve A2 Max allowed output current (results approx. in half the lifetime expectancy of A1).
Fig. 27-12 Output Current

Mounting OUTPUT
Orientation A 20A A1
Standard 16
Orientation Power 12
Supply
8
4
Ambient Temperature
INPUT 0
10 20 30 40 50 60°C

Mounting INPUT
Orientation B 20A
(Upside down) 16 A2
Supply
12
Power A1
8
4
OUTPUT Ambient Temperature
0
10 20 30 40 50 60°C

Mounting
Orientation C 20A
A2
(Table-top 16
mounting) 12 A1
8
4
Ambient Temperature
0
10 20 30 40 50 60°C

Mounting
Orientation D 20A
(Horizontal cw) 16 A2
OUTPUT
Supply
Power
INPUT
12
A1
8
4
Ambient Temperature
0
10 20 30 40 50 60°C

Mounting
Orientation E 20A
(Horizontal ccw) 16
OUTPUT
A2
Supply
Power
INPUT
12
8 A1
4
Ambient Temperature
0
10 20 30 40 50 60°C
Apr. 2007 / Rev. 1.1 DS-QT20.241-EN

23/23
EC Declaration of Conformity
The manufacturer declares hereby, that all power supplies listed below, are in conformity with the
provisions of the following European Directives:
89/336 and 93/68/EEC Electroma gnetic Compatibility Directive

73/23 and 93/68 /EEC Low Voltage Directive
QT20.241 Output: 24-28VDC; 20-17,5A continuous / 30-26A for 4s Input: 3AC 380-480V
The following standards were used to assess the products:
EN 61000-6-3:2001 Generic Emission Standard

(also meets the requirements of EN 61000-6-4:2001)
• EN 61000-3-2 Harmonics
• EN 61000-3-3 Voltage changes, voltage fluctuations and flicker
• EN 55011 class B and EN 55022 class B (for line-routed interference and radiation)
Configuration: Power supply on table, resistance load,

line length load/mains line: 1m for line-routed interference (150kHz -30MHz)
line length load/mains line: 1m horizontal and 0,8m vertical for radiated inte rference (30MHz-1GHz)
EN 61000-6-2:2001 Generic Immunity Standard

(also meets the requirements of EN 61000-6-1:2001)
• EN 61000-4-2 ( IEC 61000-4-2) Electrostatic discharge
• EN 61000-4-3 ( IEC 61000-4-3) Radio frequency electromagnetic field. Amplitude modulated.
• EN 61000-4-4 ( IEC 61000-4-4) Fast Transients
• EN 61000-4-5 ( IEC 61000-4-5) Surges
• EN 61000-4-6 ( IEC 61000-4-6) Radio frequency common mode. Amplitude modulated.
• EN 61000-4-11 ( IEC 61000-4-11) Voltage dips and interruptions
EN 60950-1:2001 Information technology equipment - Safety –

Part 1: General requirements
PULS as the manufacturer is liable for this declaration.
PULS Elektronische Stromversorgungen GmbH

Arabellastraße 15
D- 81925 München
Munich, 25.01.2005
Bernhard Erdl ,Managing Director

No. Z 347 1
engineering
mannesmann
Rexroth
ECODRIVE03
Drive For General Automation
With Fieldbus-Interface
Troubleshooting Guide: FGP-03VRS
7=78)1
Rexroth
DOK-ECODR3-FGP-03VRS**-WA01-EN-P Indramat
About this Documentation ECODRIVE03 FGP-03VRS
Title ECODRIVE03 Drive For General Automation With Fieldbus-Interfaces
Type of Documentation Troubleshooting Guide: FGP-03VRS
Document Typecode DOK-ECODR3-FGP-03VRS**-WA01-EN-P
Internal File Reference • Box 73-03V-EN

• Based on: FGP-03VRS
• 120-1000-B321-01/EN
Purpose of Documentation The following documentation describes the functions of the firmware
FWA-ECODR3-FGP-03VRS.
This documentation serves:
• for error diagnosis and error removal
Record of Revisions Description Release Notes

Date
DOK-ECODR3-FGP-03VRS**-WA01-DE-P 01.00 First edition
Copyright  2000 Rexroth Indramat GmbH

Copying this document, giving it to others and the use or communication
of the contents thereof without express authority, are forbidden. Offenders
are liable for the payment of damages. All rights are reserved in the event
of the grant of a patent or the registration of a utility model or design (DIN
34-1).
Validity All rights are reserved with respect to the content of this documentation
and the availability of the product.
Published by Rexroth Indramat GmbH

Bgm.-Dr.-Nebel-Str. 2 • D-97816 Lohr a. Main
Telephone 09352/40-0 • Tx 689421 • Fax 09352/40-4885
http://www.rexroth.com/indramat
Dept. ECD (TH/JR)
Note This document has been printed on chlorine-free bleached paper..
DOK-ECODR3-FGP-03VRS**-WA01-EN-P
ECODRIVE03 FGP-03VRS About this Documentation
Summary of Documentation - Box
Functional Description:
Description of all implemented Function

based on SERCOS Parameters
FK
Order designation:
DOK-ECODR3-FGP-03VRS**-FK02-EN-P
282801
Parameter Description:
A description of all parameters

used in the firmware
PA
Order designation:
282801
DOK-ECODR3-FGP-03VRS**-PA01-EN-P
Troubleshooting Guide:
-Explanation of the diagnostic states

-How to proceed when eliminating faults
WA
Order designation:
282801
Firmware Version Notes:
Description of new and changed functions

in terms of the derivatives:
Order designation
-FWA-ECODR3-FGP-02VRS-MS
FV DOK-ECODR3-FGP-03VRS**-7302-EN-P
Order designation:
282801
DOK-ECODR3-FGP-03VRS**-FV01-EN-P
Project Planning Manual:
-Planning control cabinet construction

-Planning the electric layout in the control cabinet
PR
Order designation:
DOK-ECODR3-DKC**.3****-PRxx-EN-P
282801
CD: DRIVEHELP
Win3.1 and
Win95&NT
(6-:),)04
epart
V282411
01
rsion:
number: Collection of Windows help systems which
contain documents on firmware derivatives
Order designation:
DOK-GENERL-DRIVEHELP**-GExx-MS-D0600
About this Documentation ECODRIVE03 FGP-03VRS
Notes
ECODRIVE03 FGP-03VRS Contents I
Contents
1 Diagnostic Message Descriptions 1-1
Overview of the diagnostic message descriptions .................................................................................. 1-1
Diagnostic Message Types...................................................................................................... 1-1
Construction of a diagnostic message..................................................................................... 1-1
2 Important directions for use 2-1

2.1 Introduction..................................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.2 Inappropriate use ........................................................................................................................... 2-2
3 Safety Instructions for Electric Servo Drives and Controls 3-1

3.1 Introduction..................................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2 Explanations................................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.3 Hazards by inappropriate use ........................................................................................................ 3-2
3.4 General Information ....................................................................................................................... 3-3
3.5 Protection against contact with electrical parts .............................................................................. 3-4
3.6 Protection by protective low voltage (PELV) against electrical shock ........................................... 3-6
3.7 Protection against dangerous movements..................................................................................... 3-6
3.8 Protection against magnetic and electromagnetic fields during operations and mounting............ 3-8
3.9 Protection against contact with hot parts ....................................................................................... 3-9
3.10 Protection during handling and installation .................................................................................... 3-9
3.11 Battery safety ............................................................................................................................... 3-10
3.12 Protection against pressurized Systems...................................................................................... 3-10
4 Description of diagnostic letters F... and E... 4-1

4.1 Error diagnostic messages F... ...................................................................................................... 4-1
F207 Switching to uninitialized operation mode ...................................................................... 4-2
F208 UL The motor type has changed. ................................................................................... 4-2
F209 PL Load parameter default values.................................................................................. 4-3
F218 Amplifier overtemp. shutdown ........................................................................................ 4-3
F219 Motor overtemp. shutdown ............................................................................................. 4-4
F220 Bleeder overload shutdown ............................................................................................ 4-4
F221 Motor temp. surveillance defective ................................................................................. 4-5
F223 Error during initialisation of the parking axis................................................................... 4-5
F224 Maximum braking time exceeded................................................................................... 4-6
F226 Undervoltage in power section ....................................................................................... 4-6
F228 Excessive deviation ........................................................................................................ 4-6
F229 Encoder 1 failure: quadrant error.................................................................................... 4-7
F230 Max. signal frequency of encoder 1 exceeded............................................................... 4-7
II Contents ECODRIVE03 FGP-03VRS
F236 Excessive position feedback difference.......................................................................... 4-7

F237 Excessive position command difference ........................................................................ 4-8
F242 Encoder 2 failure: signal amplitude wrong...................................................................... 4-9
F245 Encoder 2 failure: quadrant error.................................................................................. 4-10
F246 Max signal frequency of encoder 2 exceeded.............................................................. 4-10
F248 Low battery voltage....................................................................................................... 4-10
F249 Master drive encoder failure: signal too small .............................................................. 4-11
F250 Overflow of target position preset memory................................................................... 4-11
F252 Master drive encoder failure: quadrant error ................................................................ 4-12
F253 Incr. encoder emulator: pulse frequency too high ........................................................ 4-12
F260 Command current limit shutoff...................................................................................... 4-12
F262 External short at status outputs .................................................................................... 4-13
F267 Erroneous internal hardware synchronization .............................................................. 4-13
F269 Error during release of the motor holding brake........................................................... 4-13
F276 Absolute encoder out of allowed window ..................................................................... 4-14
F277 Current measurement trim wrong................................................................................. 4-14
F281 Mains fault .................................................................................................................... 4-14
F386 No ready signal from supply module ............................................................................ 4-15
F402 Double MDT failure shutdown ...................................................................................... 4-15
F407 Error during initialisation of master communication...................................................... 4-15
F408 Fatal error of the interface card .................................................................................... 4-16
F409 Bus failure..................................................................................................................... 4-16
F410 Synchronization with field bus impossible .................................................................... 4-16
F434 Emergency-Stop ........................................................................................................... 4-17
F629 Positive travel limit exceeded ....................................................................................... 4-17
F630 Negative travel limit exceeded...................................................................................... 4-18
F634 Emergency-Stop ........................................................................................................... 4-18
F643 Positive travel limit switch detected .............................................................................. 4-19
F644 Negative travel limit switch detected ............................................................................ 4-19
F811 Commutation offset could not be determined............................................................... 4-20
F812 Motion range exceeded during commutation ............................................................... 4-20
F822 Encoder 1 failure: signal amplitude wrong.................................................................... 4-20
F860 Overcurrent: short in power stage ................................................................................ 4-22
F870 +24Volt DC error........................................................................................................... 4-22
F873 Power supply driver stages fault................................................................................... 4-22
F878 Velocity loop error......................................................................................................... 4-23
F879 Velocity limit S-0-0091 exceeded ................................................................................. 4-23
4.2 Warning diagnostic messages ..................................................................................................... 4-24
E221 Warning Motor temp. surveillance defective ................................................................ 4-24
E225 Motor overload.............................................................................................................. 4-25
E226 Undervoltage in power section ..................................................................................... 4-25
E247 Interpolation velocity = 0............................................................................................... 4-25
E248 Interpolation acceleration = 0 ....................................................................................... 4-26
E249 Positioning velocity >= S-0-0091.................................................................................. 4-26
E250 Drive overtemp. prewarning ......................................................................................... 4-27
E251 Motor overtemp. prewarning ........................................................................................ 4-27
ECODRIVE03 FGP-03VRS Contents III
E252 Bleeder overload prewarning ....................................................................................... 4-28

E253 Target position out of travel range................................................................................ 4-28
E254 Not homed .................................................................................................................... 4-29
E255 Feedrate-override S-0-0108 = 0 ................................................................................... 4-29
E256 Torque limit = 0............................................................................................................. 4-29
E257 Continuous current limit active ..................................................................................... 4-30
E258 Selected process block is not programmed. ................................................................ 4-30
E259 Command velocity limit active ...................................................................................... 4-30
E260 Command Current limit active ...................................................................................... 4-31
E261 Continuous current limit prewarning............................................................................. 4-31
E263 Velocity command value > limit S-0-0091 .................................................................... 4-31
E264 Target position out of num. range ................................................................................ 4-32
E269 Brake torque too low..................................................................................................... 4-32
E281 Mains fault .................................................................................................................... 4-32
E386 No ready signal from supply module ............................................................................ 4-33
E401 Error in the parameter channel..................................................................................... 4-33
E402 Error in the cyclic data channel .................................................................................... 4-33
E405 No data exchange possible via the field bus ................................................................ 4-34
E408 Invalid addressing of MDT-data container A ................................................................ 4-34
E409 Invalid addressing of AT-data container A ................................................................... 4-34
E825 Overvoltage in power stage.......................................................................................... 4-34
E826 Undervoltage in power section ..................................................................................... 4-35
E829 Positive position limit exceeded ................................................................................... 4-35
E830 Negative position limit exceeded.................................................................................. 4-36
E831 Position limit reached during jog .................................................................................. 4-36
E834 Emergency-Stop........................................................................................................... 4-36
E843 Positive limit switch activated ....................................................................................... 4-37
E844 Negative limit switch activated ..................................................................................... 4-37
E881 Mains fault .................................................................................................................... 4-37
E886 No ready signal from supply module ............................................................................ 4-38
5 Description of Diagnostic Letters B..., C..., D... and A... 5-1

5.1 Command Diagnostic Messages B..., C... and D........................................................................... 5-1
B100 Command Release motor holding brake........................................................................ 5-1
B101 Command not enabled ................................................................................................... 5-1
B200 Brake check command................................................................................................... 5-1
B201 Brake check only with drive enable ................................................................................ 5-2
B202 Error during bedding in the brake................................................................................... 5-2
B203 Brake torque too low....................................................................................................... 5-2
C100 Communication phase 3 transition check ...................................................................... 5-2
C101 Invalid communication parameter (S-0-0021) ................................................................ 5-3
C102 Limit error communication parameter (S-0-0021) .......................................................... 5-3
C104 Config. IDN for MDT not configurable ............................................................................ 5-3
C105 Configurated length > max. length for MDT ................................................................... 5-3
C106 Config. IDN for AT not configurable ............................................................................... 5-4
C107 Configurated length > max. length for AT ...................................................................... 5-4
IV Contents ECODRIVE03 FGP-03VRS
C112 TNcyc (S-0-0001) or TScyc (S-0-0002) error................................................................. 5-4

C113 Relation TNcyc (S-0-0001) to TScyc (S-0-0002) error................................................... 5-4
C114 T4 > TScyc (S-0-0002) - T4min (S-0-0005) ................................................................... 5-5
C118 Order of MDT configuration wrong................................................................................. 5-5
C200 Communication phase 4 transition check ...................................................................... 5-5
C201 Invalid parameter(s) (->S-0-0022).................................................................................. 5-6
C202 Parameter limit error (->S-0-0022) ................................................................................. 5-6
C203 Parameter calculation error (->S-0-0022) ...................................................................... 5-6
C204 Motor type P-0-4014 incorrect........................................................................................ 5-6
C210 Feedback 2 required (->S-0-0022)................................................................................. 5-7
C211 Invalid feedback data (->S-0-0022)................................................................................ 5-7
C212 Invalid amplifier data (->S-0-0022)................................................................................. 5-7
C213 Position data scaling error.............................................................................................. 5-8
C214 Velocity data scaling error .............................................................................................. 5-8
C215 Acceleration data scaling error....................................................................................... 5-9
C216 Torque/force data scaling error ...................................................................................... 5-9
C217 Feedback1 data reading error...................................................................................... 5-10
C218 Feedback 2 data reading error..................................................................................... 5-10
C220 Feedback 1 initializing error ......................................................................................... 5-11
C221 Feedback 2 initializing error ......................................................................................... 5-11
C223 Input value for max. range too high.............................................................................. 5-12
C227 Modulo range error....................................................................................................... 5-12
C234 Encoder combination not possible ............................................................................... 5-12
C235 Load-side motor encoder with inductance motor only ................................................. 5-12
C236 Feedback 1 required (P-0-0074) .................................................................................. 5-13
C238 Wrong function of encoder 2 ........................................................................................ 5-13
C241 Binary encoder resolution necessary ........................................................................... 5-13
C300 Command Set absolute measuring.............................................................................. 5-13
C302 Absolute measuring system not installed..................................................................... 5-14
C400 Switching to parameter mode ...................................................................................... 5-14
C401 Drive active, switching not allowed .............................................................................. 5-14
C402 Only allowed without master ........................................................................................ 5-14
C500 Reset class 1 diagnostic, error reset............................................................................ 5-15
C600 Drive controlled homing procedure command ............................................................. 5-15
C601 Homing only possible with drive enable ....................................................................... 5-15
C602 Distance home switch - reference mark erroneous ..................................................... 5-15
C604 Homing of absolute encoder not possible .................................................................... 5-15
C606 Reference mark not detected....................................................................................... 5-16
C700 Basic load..................................................................................................................... 5-16
C702 Default parameters not available ................................................................................. 5-16
C703 Default parameters invalid ........................................................................................... 5-17
C704 Parameters not copyable ............................................................................................. 5-17
C800 Default parameter load................................................................................................. 5-17
C801 Parameter default value erroneous (-> S-0-0021) ....................................................... 5-18
C802 Locked with password .................................................................................................. 5-18
D300 Command adjust commutation .................................................................................... 5-18
ECODRIVE03 FGP-03VRS Contents V
D301 Drive not ready for commutation command ................................................................. 5-18

D302 Torque/Force too small to move .................................................................................. 5-18
D303 Drive in control at start of command ............................................................................ 5-19
D304 Error in offset calculation.............................................................................................. 5-19
D305 Drive enable refused .................................................................................................... 5-19
D306 Power is off................................................................................................................... 5-19
D307 Drive does not move .................................................................................................... 5-19
D308 No adjustment with asynchronous motor ..................................................................... 5-19
D309 Proceed to phase 4 ...................................................................................................... 5-19
D310 Input master password ................................................................................................. 5-19
D311 Commutation offset could not be determined. ............................................................. 5-20
D312 Motion range exceeded during commutation ............................................................... 5-20
D400 Positive stop drive procedure command ...................................................................... 5-20
D401 ZKL1-Error at command start....................................................................................... 5-21
D500 Command Get mark position ....................................................................................... 5-21
D501 Incremental encoder required ...................................................................................... 5-21
D600 Cancel reference point procedure command............................................................... 5-21
D700 Parking axis command................................................................................................. 5-22
D701 Parking axis only while drive is disabled ...................................................................... 5-22
D800 Command measuring wheel mode .............................................................................. 5-22
D801 Measuring wheel operation not possible...................................................................... 5-22
D900 Command automatic loop tuning ................................................................................. 5-22
D901 Start requires drive enable ........................................................................................... 5-23
D902 Motor feedback data not valid ...................................................................................... 5-23
D903 Inertia detection failed .................................................................................................. 5-24
D904 Gain adjustment failed.................................................................................................. 5-24
D905 Travel range invalid, P-0-0166 & P-0-0167.................................................................. 5-24
D906 Travel range exceeded................................................................................................. 5-25
5.2 Status diagnostic messages ........................................................................................................ 5-26
A002 Communication phase 2............................................................................................... 5-26
A003 Communication phase 3............................................................................................... 5-26
A010 Drive HALT ................................................................................................................... 5-27
A012 Control and power sections ready for operation .......................................................... 5-27
A013 Ready for power on ...................................................................................................... 5-27
A100 Drive in TORQUE control ............................................................................................. 5-27
A101 Drive in VELOCITY control........................................................................................... 5-27
A102 Position mode with encoder 1 ...................................................................................... 5-28
A103 Position mode with encoder 2 ...................................................................................... 5-28
A104 Position mode lagless, encoder 1 ................................................................................ 5-28
A105 Position control lagless, feedback 2 ............................................................................. 5-28
A106 Drive controlled interpolation, encoder 1...................................................................... 5-28
A107 Drive controlled interpolation, encoder 2...................................................................... 5-29
A108 Drive controlled interpolation, lagless, encoder 1 ........................................................ 5-29
A109 Drive controlled interpolation, lagless, encoder 2 ........................................................ 5-29
A110 Velocity synchronization, virtual master drive .............................................................. 5-30
A111 Velocity synchronization, real master drive .................................................................. 5-30
VI Contents ECODRIVE03 FGP-03VRS
A112 Phase synchronization, encoder 1, virtual master drive............................................... 5-30

A113 Phase synchronization, encoder 2, virtual master drive............................................... 5-30
A114 Phase synchronization, encoder 1, real master drive .................................................. 5-31
A116 Phase synchr. lagless, encoder 1, virtual master drive................................................ 5-31
A117 Phase synchr. lagless, encoder 2, virtual master drive................................................ 5-31
A118 Phase synchr. lagless, encoder 1, real master drive ................................................... 5-31
A128 Cam shaft, encoder 1, virtual master drive................................................................... 5-32
A129 Cam shaft, encoder 2, virtual master drive................................................................... 5-32
A130 Cam shaft, encoder 1, real master drive ...................................................................... 5-32
A132 Cam shaft, lagless, encoder 1, virt. master drive ......................................................... 5-32
A133 Cam shaft, lagless, encoder 2, virt. master drive ......................................................... 5-33
A134 Cam shaft, lagless, encoder 1, real master drive......................................................... 5-33
A150 Drive controlled positioning, encoder 1 ........................................................................ 5-33
A151 Drive controlled positioning, encoder 1, lagless........................................................... 5-34
A152 Drive controlled positioning, encoder 2 ........................................................................ 5-34
A153 Drive controlled positioning, encoder 2, lagless........................................................... 5-35
A206 Process block mode, encoder 1 ................................................................................... 5-35
A207 Process block mode lagless, encoder 1....................................................................... 5-35
A208 JOG mode positive ....................................................................................................... 5-35
A210 Process block mode, encoder 2 ................................................................................... 5-36
A211 Process block mode lagless, encoder 2....................................................................... 5-36
A218 JOG mode negative...................................................................................................... 5-36
A400 Automatic drive check and adjustment......................................................................... 5-36
A401 Drive deceleration to standstill ..................................................................................... 5-37
A800 Unknown operation mode ............................................................................................ 5-37
5.3 Diagnostic messages for basic initialization and after fatal System errors.................................. 5-38
Diagnostic Message Display: -0............................................................................................. 5-38
Diagnostic Message Display: (2 dots) ............................................................................. 5-38
Diagnostic Message Display: E1 ........................................................................................... 5-39
5.4 Operation Status .......................................................................................................................... 5-40
bb ........................................................................................................................................... 5-40
Ab........................................................................................................................................... 5-40
AC .......................................................................................................................................... 5-40
AE .......................................................................................................................................... 5-40
AF........................................................................................................................................... 5-40
AH .......................................................................................................................................... 5-40
ECODRIVE03 FGP-03VRS Contents VII
Jb ........................................................................................................................................... 5-40
JF ........................................................................................................................................... 5-40
P2........................................................................................................................................... 5-41
P3........................................................................................................................................... 5-41
PL........................................................................................................................................... 5-41
UL........................................................................................................................................... 5-41
6 Replacing or Exchanging Drive Components 6-1

6.1 Procedure on Replacing the Unit ................................................................................................... 6-3
Replacing the DKC: ................................................................................................................. 6-3
Replacing the Motor:................................................................................................................ 6-4
Replacing cables:..................................................................................................................... 6-4
7 Replacing Firmware 7-7

7.1 Replacing the Parameter Module .................................................................................................. 7-7
7.2 Replacing the Firmware Module .................................................................................................... 7-8
7.3 Replacing the Programming Module (complete module)............................................................... 7-8
8 Index 8-1
9 Kundenbetreuungsstellen - Sales & Service Facilities 9-1
VIII Contents ECODRIVE03 FGP-03VRS
Note
ECODRIVE03 FGP-03VRS Diagnostic Message Descriptions 1-1
1 Diagnostic Message Descriptions
Overview of the diagnostic message descriptions
Diagnostic Message Types

Each operational state of the drive will be characterized with a diagnostic
message.
Differentiations will be made between:
• Error diagnostic messages
• Warning diagnostic messages
• Command diagnostic messages
• Drive Mode diagnostic messages
• Operation status
Construction of a diagnostic message

A diagnostic message consists of:
• A diagnostic number and a
• diagnostic text
F228 Excessive Control Deviation
Diagnostic message
Diagnostic message number
Fig. 1-1: Diagnostic message with a diagnostic number and text.
For the example in the graphic, "F2" and "28" are shown alternately on the
H1-Display.
The control system can read out the diagnostic number in hexadecimal
form with the S-0-0390, Diagnostic message number parameter.
In addition, the drive allocates to the control system the diagnostic
number and diagnostic text as a string F228 Excessive deviation with
the S-0-0095, Diagnostic message parameter.
1-2 Diagnostic Message Descriptions ECODRIVE03 FGP-03VRS
H1-Display
The H1-Display serves as an optical display of the diagnostic message on
the drive.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
11121314 1516 1718 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
Typenschild
H1-Display
Barcode
Barcode
H1
S1
S3 0 1
S2 0 1
9 9
2
8
8
3
3
7
7
4 4
6 5 6 5
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
DKC
FA5047f1.fh7
Fig. 1-2: H1-/Display
The diagnostic number appears on this two-positional seven-segment

display. The image can be seen on the "Diagnostic Message Priority
Display".
This display quickly shows the current operation status without the use of
a communications interface.
The operating mode cannot be seen from the H1-Display. If the drive
follows the operating mode and no command was activated, then the
symbol "AF" appears on the display.
Diagnostic Message Output If more than one diagnostic message is waiting, then the message with
Priority the highest priority will be displayed.
The following graphic classifies operation status in order of importance.
ECODRIVE03 FGP-03VRS Diagnostic Message Descriptions 1-3
Error
P
R
Warning
I
O
R Command error
I
T Command active
Y
Ready to operate ?
yes no
Operation lock
active
Ready to Communicationphase
operate
Drive ready
Drive automatic
check
Drive error
reaction
Drive Halt
Drive is
following
Da0001f1.fh7
operating mode
Fig. 1-3: Diagnostic message priority diagram
Clear Coded Diagnostic Message

The clear coded diagnostic message contains the diagnostic number
followed by the diagnostic text, as shown in the example, "Excessive
Output Error" (Fig. 1-1). It can be read out with the S-0-0095, Diagnostic
message parameter and directly displays the operation status on an
operator surface.
The clear coded diagnostic message will be switched to the current
language.
1-4 Diagnostic Message Descriptions ECODRIVE03 FGP-03VRS
Notes
ECODRIVE03 FGP-03VRS Important directions for use 2-1
2 Important directions for use
2.1 Introduction
Rexroth Indramat products represent state-of-the-art developments and
manufacturing. They are tested prior to delivery to ensure operating safety
and reliability.
The products may only be used in the manner that is defined as
appropriate. If they are used in an inappropriate manner, then situations
can develop that may lead to property damage or injury to personnel.
Note: Rexroth Indramat, as manufacturer, is not liable for any

damages resulting from inappropriate use. In such cases, the
guarantee and the right to payment of damages resulting from
inappropriate use are forfeited. The user alone carries all
responsibility of the risks.
Before using Rexroth Indramat products, make sure that all the pre-
requisites for an appropriate use of the products are satisfied:
• Personnel that in any way, shape or form uses our products must first
read and understand the relevant safety instructions and be familiar
with appropriate use.
• If the product takes the form of hardware, then they must remain in
their original state, in other words, no structural changes are permitted.
It is not permitted to decompile software products or alter source
codes.
• Do not mount damaged or faulty products or use them in operation.
• Make sure that the products have been installed in the manner
described in the relevant documentation.
2-2 Important directions for use ECODRIVE03 FGP-03VRS
2.2 Inappropriate use

The use of the firmware and the drive controllers outside of applications
other than specified in the system overview or under operating conditions
other than those specified in the project planning manual and not with the
use of the specified technical data is defined as “inappropriate use”.
Drive controllers may not be used if
• they are subject to operating conditions that do not meet the above
specified ambient conditions. This includes, for example, operation
under water, in the case of extreme temperature fluctuations or
extremely high maximum temperatures or if
• Rexroth Indramat has not specifically released them for that intended
purpose. Please note the specifications outlined in the general safety
instructions!
ECODRIVE03 FGP-03VRS Safety Instructions for Electric Servo Drives and Controls 3-1
3 Safety Instructions for Electric Servo Drives and

Controls
3.1 Introduction
Read these instructions before the equipment is used and eliminate the
risk of personal injury or property damage. Follow these safety
instructions at all times.
Do not attempt to install, use or service this equipment without first
reading all documentation provided with the product. Read and
understand these safety instructions and all user documentation of the
equipment prior to working with the equipment at any time. If you do not
have the user documentation for your equipment contact your local
Rexroth Indramat representative to send this documentation immediately
to the person or persons responsible for the safe operation of this
equipment.
If the product is resold, rented or transferred or passed on to others, then
these safety instructions must be delivered with the product.
Inappropriate use of this equipment, failure to

follow the safety instructions in this document
or tampering with the product, including
WARNING disabling of safety devices, may result in
product damage, personal injury, severe
electrical shock or death!
3.2 Explanations
The safety warnings in this documentation describe individual degrees of
hazard seriousness in compliance with ANSI:
Warning symbol with signal Degree of hazard seriousness
word The degree of hazard seriousness
describes the consequences resulting
from non-compliance with the safety
guidelines.
Bodily harm or product damage will occur.
DANGER
Death or severe bodily harm may occur.
WARNING
Death or severe bodily harm may occur.
CAUTION
Fig. 3-1: Classes of danger with ANSI
3-2 Safety Instructions for Electric Servo Drives and Controls ECODRIVE03 FGP-03VRS
3.3 Hazards by inappropriate use
High voltage and high discharge current!

Danger to life, risk of severe electrical shock
and risk of injury!
DANGER
Dangerous movements! Danger to life and risk

of injury or equipment damage by unintentional
motor movements!
DANGER
High electrical voltage due to wrong

connections! Danger to life, severe electrical
shock and severe bodily injury!
WARNING
Health hazard for persons with heart

pacemakers, metal implants and hearing aids in
proximity to electrical equipment!
WARNING
Surface of machine housing could be extremely

hot! Danger of injury! Danger of burns!
CAUTION
Risk of injury due to inappropriate handling!

Bodily injury caused by crushing, shearing,
cutting and mechanical shock or improper
CAUTION handling of pressurized systems!
Risk of injury due to inappropriate handling of

batteries!
CAUTION
3.4 General Information

• Rexroth Indramat GmbH is not liable for damages resulting from
failure to observe the warnings given in these documentation.
• Order operating, maintenance and safety instructions in your language
before starting up the machine. If you find that due to a translation
error you can not completely understand the documentation for your
product, please ask your supplier to clarify.
• Proper and correct transport, storage, assembly and installation as
well as care in operation and maintenance are prerequisites for
optimal and safe operation of this equipment.
• Trained and qualified personnel in electrical equipment:
Only trained and qualified personnel may work on this equipment or
within its proximity. Personnel are qualified if they have sufficient
knowledge of the assembly, installation and operation of the product
as well as an understanding of all warnings and precautionary
measures noted in these instructions.
Furthermore, they should be trained, instructed and qualified to switch
electrical circuits and equipment on and off, to ground them and to
mark them according to the requirements of safe work practices and
common sense. They must have adequate safety equipment and be
trained in first aid.
• Only use spare parts and accessories approved by the manufacturer.
• Follow all safety regulations and requirements for the specific
application as practiced in the country of use.
• The equipment is designed for installation on commercial machinery.
European countries: see directive 89/392/EEC (machine guideline).
• The ambient conditions given in the product documentation must be
observed.
• Use only safety features that are clearly and explicitly approved in the
Project Planning manual.
For example, the following areas of use are not allowed: Construction
cranes, Elevators used for people or freight, Devices and vehicles to
transport people, Medical applications, Refinery plants, the transport
of hazardous goods, Radioactive or nuclear applications, Applications
sensitive to high frequency, mining, food processing, Control of
protection equipment (also in a machine).
• Start-up is only permitted once it is sure that the machine, in which the
product is installed, complies with the requirements of national safety
regulations and safety specifications of the application.
• Operation is only permitted if the national EMC regulations for the
application are met.
The instructions for installation in accordance with EMC requirements
can be found in the INDRAMAT document "EMC in Drive and Control
Systems”.
The machine builder is responsible for compliance with the limiting
values as prescribed in the national regulations and specific EMC
regulations for the application.
European countries: see Directive 89/336/EEC (EMC Guideline).
U.S.A.: See National Electrical Codes (NEC), National Electrical
Manufacturers Association (NEMA), and local building codes. The user of
this equipment must consult the above noted items at all times.
• Technical data, connections and operational conditions are specified in

the product documentation and must be followed at all times.
3.5 Protection against contact with electrical parts
Note: This section refers to equipment with voltages above 50 Volts.
Making contact with parts conducting voltages above 50 Volts could be

dangerous to personnel and cause an electrical shock. When operating
electrical equipment, it is unavoidable that some parts of the unit conduct
dangerous voltages.
High electrical voltage! Danger to life, severe

electrical shock and severe bodily injury!
⇒ Only those trained and qualified to work with or on
DANGER electrical equipment are permitted to operate,
maintain or repair this equipment.
⇒ Follow general construction and safety regulations
when working on electrical installations.
⇒ Before switching on power the ground wire must be
permanently connected to all electrical units accor-
ding to the connection diagram.
⇒ Do not operate electrical equipment at any time if the
ground wire is not permanently connected, even for
brief measurements or tests.
⇒ Before working with electrical parts with voltage
potentials higher than 50 V, the equipment must be
disconnected from the mains voltage or power
supply.
⇒ The following should be observed with electrical
drives, power supplies, and filter components:
Wait five (5) minutes after switching off power to
allow capacitors to discharge before beginning work.
Measure the voltage on the capacitors before
beginning work to make sure that the equipment is
safe to touch.
⇒ Never touch the electrical connection points of a
component while power is turned on.
⇒ Install the covers and guards provided with the
equipment properly before switching the equipment
on. Prevent contact with live parts at any time.
⇒ A residual-current-operated protective device (r.c.d.)
must not be used on an electric drive! Indirect
contact must be prevented by other means, for
example, by an overcurrent protective device.
⇒ Equipment that is built into machines must be
secured against direct contact. Use appropriate
housings, for example a control cabinet.
European countries: according to EN 50178/1998,
section 5.3.2.3.
U.S.A: See National Electrical Codes (NEC), National
Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) and local
building codes. The user of this equipment must observe
the above noted instructions at all times.
To be observed with electrical drives, power supplies, and filter

components:
High electrical voltage! High leakage current!

Danger to life, danger of injury and bodily harm
from electrical shock!
DANGER ⇒ Before switching on power for electrical units, all
housings and motors must be permanently grounded
according to the connection diagram. This applies
even for brief tests.
⇒ Leakage current exceeds 3.5 mA. Therefore the
electrical equipment and units must always be firmly
connected to the supply network.
⇒ Use a copper conductor with at least 10 mm² cross
section over its entire course for this protective
connection!
⇒ Prior to startups, even for brief tests, always connect
the protective conductor or connect with ground wire.
High voltage levels can occur on the housing that
could lead to severe electrical shock and personal
injury.
European countries: EN 50178/1998, section 5.3.2.1.
USA: See National Electrical Codes (NEC), National
Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA), and local
building codes. The user of this equipment must maintain
the above noted instructions at all times.
3.6 Protection by protective low voltage (PELV) against

electrical shock
All connections and terminals with voltages between 5 and 50 Volts on
INDRAMAT products are protective low voltages designed in accordance
with the following standards on contact safety:
• International: IEC 364-4-411.1.5
• EU countries: see EN 50178/1998, section 5.2.8.1.
High electrical voltage due to wrong

connections! Danger to life, severe electrical
shock and severe bodily injury!
WARNING ⇒ Only equipment, electrical components and cables of
the protective low voltage type (PELV = Protective
Extra Low Voltage) may be connected to all
terminals and clamps with 0 to 50 Volts.
⇒ Only safely isolated voltages and electrical circuits
may be connected. Safe isolation is achieved, for
example, with an isolating transformer, an opto-
electronic coupler or when battery-operated.
3.7 Protection against dangerous movements

Dangerous movements can be caused by faulty control or the connected
motors. These causes are be various such as:
• unclean or wrong wiring of cable connections
• inappropriate or wrong operation of equipment
• malfunction of sensors, encoders and monitoring circuits
• defective components
• software errors
Dangerous movements can occur immediately after equipment is
switched on or even after an unspecified time of trouble-free operation.
The monitors in the drive components make faulty operation almost
impossible. Regarding personnel safety, especially the danger of bodily
harm and property damage, this alone should not be relied upon to
ensure complete safety. Until the built-in monitors become active and
effective, it must be assumed in any case that some faulty drive
movements will occur. The extent of these faulty drive movements
depends upon the type of control and the state of operation.
Dangerous movements! Danger to life and risk

of injury or equipment damage!
⇒ Personnel protection must be secured for the above
DANGER listed reason by means of superordinate monitors or
measures.
These are instituted in accordance with the specific
situation of the facility and a danger and fault
analysis conducted by the manufacturer of the
facility. All the safety regulations that apply to this
facility are included therein. By switching off,
circumventing or if safety devices have simply not
been activated, then random machine movements or
other types of faults can occur.
Avoiding accidents, injury or property damage:
⇒ Keep free and clear of the machine’s range of
motion and moving parts. Prevent people from
accidentally entering the machine’s range of
movement:
- use protective fences
- use protective railings
- install protective coverings
- install light curtains or light barriers
⇒ Fences must be strong enough to withstand
maximum possible momentum.
⇒ Mount the emergency stop switch (E-stop) in the
immediate reach of the operator. Verify that the
emergency stop works before startup. Don’t operate
the machine if the emergency stop is not working.
⇒ Isolate the drive power connection by means of an
emergency stop circuit or use a start-inhibit system
to prevent unintentional start-up.
⇒ Make sure that the drives are brought to standstill
before accessing or entering the danger zone.
⇒ Secure vertical axes against falling or slipping after
switching off the motor power by, for example:
- Mechanically securing the vertical axes
- Adding an external brake / clamping mechanism
- Balancing and thus compensating for the vertical
axes mass and the gravitational force
The standard equipment motor brake or an external
brake controlled directly by the servo drive are not
sufficient to guarantee the safety of personnel!
⇒ Disconnect electrical power to the equipment using a

master switch and secure the switch against
reconnection for:
- maintenance and repair work
- cleaning of equipment
- long periods of discontinued equipment use
⇒ Avoid operating high-frequency, remote control and
radio equipment near electronics circuits and supply
leads. If use of such equipment cannot be avoided,
verify the system and the plant for possible
malfunctions at all possible positions of normal use
before the first start-up. If necessary, perform a
special electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) test on
the plant.
3.8 Protection against magnetic and electromagnetic fields

during operations and mounting
Magnetic and electromagnetic fields generated by current-carrying
conductors and permanent magnets in motors represent a serious health
hazard to persons with heart pacemakers, metal implants and hearing
aids.
Health hazard for persons with heart

pacemakers, metal implants and hearing aids in
proximity to electrical equipment!
WARNING ⇒ Persons with pacemakers, metal implants and
hearing aids are not permitted to enter following
areas:
- Areas in which electrical equipment and parts are
mounted, being operated or started up.
- Areas in which parts of motors with permanent
magnets are being stored, operated, repaired or
mounted.
⇒ If it is necessary for a person with a pacemaker to
enter such an area, then a physician must be con-
sulted prior to doing so. Pacemaker, that are already
implanted or will be implanted in the future, have a
considerable deviation in their resistance to
interference. Due to the unpredictable behavior there
are no rules with general validity.
⇒ Persons with hearing aids, metal implants or metal
pieces must consult a doctor before they enter the
areas described above. Otherwise health hazards
will occur.
3.9 Protection against contact with hot parts
Housing surfaces could be extremely hot!

Danger of injury! Danger of burns!
⇒ Do not touch surfaces near the source of heat!
CAUTION Danger of burns!
⇒ Wait ten (10) minutes before you access any hot
unit. Allow the unit to cool down.
⇒ Do not touch hot parts of the equipment, such as
housings, heatsinks or resistors. Danger of burns!
3.10 Protection during handling and installation

Under certain conditions unappropriate handling and installation of parts
and components may cause injuries.
Risk of injury through incorrect handling!

Bodily harm caused by crushing, shearing,
cutting and mechanical shock!
CAUTION ⇒ Observe general instructions and safety regulations
during handling installation.
⇒ Use only appropriate lifting or moving equipment.
⇒ Take precautions to avoid pinching and crushing.
⇒ Use only appropriate tools. If specified by the product
documentation, special tools must be used.
⇒ Use lifting devices and tools correctly and safely.
⇒ Wear appropriate protective clothing, e.g. safety
glasses, safety shoes and safety gloves.
⇒ Never stay under suspended loads.
⇒ Clean up liquids from the floor immediately to
prevent personnel from slipping.
3.11 Battery safety

Batteries contain reactive chemicals in a solid housing. Inappropriate
handling may result in injuries or equipment damage.
Risk of injury through incorrect handling!

⇒ Do not attempt to reactivate discharged batteries by
heating or other methods (danger of explosion and
corrosion).
CAUTION
⇒ Never charge batteries (danger from leakage and
explosion).
⇒ Never throw batteries into a fire.
⇒ Do not dismantle batteries.
⇒ Handle with care. Incorrect extraction or installation
of a battery can damage equipment.
Note: Environmental protection and disposal! The batteries

contained in the product should be considered as hazardous
material for land, air and sea transport in the sense of the legal
requirements (danger of explosion). Dispose batteries
separately from other refuse. Observe the legal requirements
given in the country of installation.
3.12 Protection against pressurized Systems

Certain Motors (ADS, ADM, 1MB etc.) and drives, corresponding to the
information in the Project Planning manual, must be provided with and
remain under a forced load such as compressed air, hydraulic oil, cooling
fluid or coolant. In these cases, improper handling of the supply of the
pressurized systems or connections of the fluid or air under pressure can
lead to injuries or accidents.
Danger of injury when pressurized systems are

handled by untrained personnel!
⇒ Do not attempt to disassemble, to open or to cut a
CAUTION pressurized system.
⇒ Observe the operation restrictions of the respective
manufacturer.
⇒ Before the disassembly of pressurized systems,
lower pressure and drain off the fluid or gas.
⇒ Use suitable protective clothing (for example
protective eyewear, safety shoes and gloves)
⇒ Remove any fluid that has leaked out onto the floor
immediately.
Note: Environmental protection and disposal! The fluids used in the

operation of the pressurized system equipment is not
environmentally compatible. Fluid that is damaging to the
environment must be disposed of separate from normal waste.
Observe the national specifications of the country of
installation.
ECODRIVE03 FGP-03VRS Description of diagnostic letters F... and E... 4-1
4 Description of diagnostic letters F... and E...
4.1 Error diagnostic messages F...

Many areas are monitored in connection with operating modes and
parameter settings. An error message is generated if a condition is
discovered which no longer allows proper operation.
Error Classes The errors are separated into four different error classes. The error class
is evident from the diagnostic message. They are determined with the
drive’s error response..
Error class : Diagnostic Drive Reaction:

Message:
Fatal F8xx Torque free switching
Travel range F6xx Velocity command value-zero
switch
Interface F4xx In accordance with best
possible deceleration
Non-fatal F2xx In accordance with best
possible deceleration
Fig. 4-1: Error Classes and Drive Reaction
Drive’s Error Reaction If an error state is detected in the drive then an automatic operation of the
drive’s error response will be started as long the drive is in control. The
H1 display blinks a Fx / xx.
The drive’s reaction can be parameterized by P-0-0119, Deceleration as
best as possible, with interface and non-fatal errors. At the end of each
error reaction the drive is switched off.
Reset the Error Errors will not be automatically deleted but must be:
• Reset from the control through the initialization of the command

S-0-0099, Reset Class 1 Diagnostics, or
• reset by pressing the "S1" button.
If the error state is still present then the error will be immediately detected
again.
A positive edge bit on the control enable signal is necessary in order to
turn on the drive again.
4-2 Description of diagnostic letters F... and E... ECODRIVE03 FGP-03VRS
F207 Switching to uninitialized operation mode

Cause:
0 has been selected in at least one of the four mode operating mode
parameters S-0-0032..35. This mode has been selected by the bits 8 and
9 in the master control word while the drive controller was on.
Remedy:
Enter the desired mode in the activated mode parameter.
Examples for possible modes are:

Bit list of the mode
Meaning: parameters:
Torque control 0000 0000 0000 0001
Velocity control 0000 0000 0000 0010
Position control with act. feedback val. 1 0000 0000 0000 x011
Position control with act. feedback val. 2 0000 0000 0000 x100
Drive-internal interpolation with actual 0000 0000 0001 x011
feedback value 1
Drive-internal interpolation with actual 0000 0000 0001 x100
feedback value 2
Relative drive-internal interpolation with 0000 0010 0001 x011
actual feedback value 1
Relative drive-internal interpolation with 0000 0010 0001 x100
actual feedback value 2
Fig. 4-2: Operation Modes
Which operation modes can be selected in a certain device is written in

the description for the operation mode parameters:
Parameter: Primary mode of operation S-0-0032
Secondary operation mode 1 S-0-0033
Check for input of the permissible interpolation method.
See also the functional description: "Setting the Operating Mode

Parameters"
F208 UL The motor type has changed.

This indication happens when you power up for the first time with a new
motor.
The regulator settings for the current, velocity and position loops are
stored in the feedback on the motor. After powering up, the drive
compares the motor type stored in the parameter with the connected
motor type. If the two do not match, basic control loop settings must be
adapted, too.
With the Basic Load command, the default control loop settings are
loaded from the feedback memory into the drive. The previous loop
settings are overwritten. By pressing the S1 key, the command Basic
Load is started.
Causes:
• The motor has been exchanged.
• A parameter file has been loaded, but the parameter S-0-0141, Motor
type contained a motor type different from the present one.
Remedy:
Command C700 Basic Load or press the S1 button.
See also the functional description: "Automatic Execution of the Load

Default Feature".
F209 PL Load parameter default values

After replacing the firmware version, the drive displays “PL”, if the
parameters have been changed in regards to the old product. By pressing
the S1 button on the drive controller or by starting the command “load
basic parameters”, all the parameters will be erased and restored with the
default (initial) values.
Cause:
The firmware has been exchanged; the number of parameters in
comparison to the old product has changed.
Remedy:
Press S1 button on the drive controller, and all the parameters will be
erased and restored with the factory preset default values
This overwrites all parameters and positioning blocks.
WARNING
See also the functional description: "Basic parameter block".
F218 Amplifier overtemp. shutdown

The temperature of the amplifier’s heatsink is monitored. If the heatsink is
too hot, the drive will power down in order to protect against damage.
Cause:
1. Ambient temperature is too high. The specified performance data are
valid up to an ambient temperature of 45°C.
2. The amplifier’s heatsink is dirty.
3. Air flow is prevented by other assembly parts or the control cabinet
assembly.
4. Blower defective
5. E219: Sensor defective appears prior to shutdown of unit
Remedy:
For 1. Reduce the ambient temperature, e.g. through cooling of the
control cabinet.
For 2. Remove obstructions or dirt from the heatsink.
For 3. Install the device vertically and clear a large enough area for
proper heatsink ventilation.
For 4. Exchange drive.
For 5. Exchange drive.
F219 Motor overtemp. shutdown

The motor temperature has risen to an unacceptable level.
As soon as the temperature error threshold of 155°C is exceeded, the
drive will immediately be brought to a standstill as set in the error reaction
(P-0-0119, best possible standstill).
It applies:
temperature warning threshold < temperature error threshold
See also E251 Motor overtemperature warning.
Cause:
1. The motor is overloaded. The effective torque demanded from the
motor has been above its allowable continuous torque level for too
long.
2. Wire break, short disconnection or circuit in the motor temperature
monitor line
3. Instability in the velocity loop
Remedy:
For 1. Check the installation of the motor. If the system has been in
operation for a long time, check to see if the the operating
conditions have changed. (in regards to pollution, friction, moved
components, etc.)
For 2. Check wires and cables to the motor temperature monitor for wire
breaks, earth short and short circuits.
For 3. Check velocity loop parameters.
See also the functional descripton: "Temperature Monitoring"
F220 Bleeder overload shutdown

1. The regenerated energy from the mechanism of the machine via the
motor has exceeded the capability of the braking resistor (bleeder).
By exceeding the maximum energy of the resistor, the drive will
shutdown according to the set error reaction, thereby protecting the
bleeder from temperature damage.
Cause:
The reflected energy from the machine’s mechanism over the motor is
too great.
Remedy:
With too much power Å reduce the acceleration value.
With too much energy Å reduce the velocity.
Check the drive installation.
May require installation of an additional bleeder module.
2. The bleeder resistor is used as a charging resistor to load the DC bus

capacitors.
Cause:
If a power failure has been programmed as a warning, then the softstart
of the mains section can be started (controller turned on via the bleeder
resistor on the mains). If the control does not bring the installation to a
standstill once this warning is issued (the drive continues to receive power
from the mains), then the bleeder monitor could be triggered.
Remedy:
• Set both power failure and undervoltage as a fatal warning. Then the
drive prevents power input from the mains.
• The control switches the installation/machine off as soon as this
warning is generated.
• Parametrize undervoltgage as an error, then the drive switches the
machine off with the error reaction which has been set.
See also the functional description: "Current Limit".
F221 Motor temp. surveillance defective

Cause:
Wire break or interruption in the wires for the motor temperature
monitoring.
Remedy:
Check the wiring for the motor temperature monitoring (signals MT(emp)+
and MT(emp)-) for interruption and short circuit.
See also the functional description: "Temperature Monitoring".
F223 Error during initialisation of the parking axis

Cause:
After the start of command S-0-0139, D700 Command Parking axis the
following is deactivated:
• Measuring system monitoring
• control loop monitoring and
• temperature monitoring
At the end of the command, measuring system initialization is carried out.

This means all initializations as with command S-0-0128, C200
Communication phase 4 transition check are carried out.
If an error occurs during these initialization procedures, then error F223
Error during initialisation of the parking axis is generated. To specify
the error more precisely, it is necessary to activate the transition
command phase 3 to 4.
Recovery:
1. bring drive into parametrization mode
2. the switching command phase 3 to 4 must be started
3. and the switching command error must be cleared
See also the functional description: "Command Parking Axis"
F224 Maximum braking time exceeded

Cause:
The decel time of the drive is monitored when the drive enable removed
and given an error reaction with velocity-controlled standstill of the drive.
If maximum decel time is exceeded (Parameter P-0-0126, Maximum
braking time), then the drive is brought to a torque-free standstill and
error F224 Maximum braking time exceeded is generated.
Remedy:
1. extend P-0-0126, Maximum braking time
2. increase brake ramp of error reaction
3. P-0-1203, P-0-1201 or P-0-1211 and P-0-1213.
4. reduce external moment of inertia
5. increase torque limit value
See also the function description: "Motor Holding Brake".
F226 Undervoltage in power section

The level of the DC bus voltage is monitored by the drive controller. If the
DC bus voltage falls below a minimal threshold, the drive independently
shuts down according to the set error reaction.
Cause:
1. The power source has been interrupted without first switching off the
drive enable (RF).
2. Disturbance in the power supply
Remedy:
For 1. Check the logic regarding the activation of the drive within the
connected control.
For 2. Check the power supply.
The error can be cleared by removing the drive enable signal.
See also the functional description: "Drive enable or drive start"
F228 Excessive deviation

When the position loop is closed, the drive monitors whether it is able to
follow the specified command value. This is done by calculating a model
position value in the drive and comparing that value with the actual
feedback value. If the difference between theoretical and actual position
value permanently exceeds the value of the S-0-0159, Monitoring
window parameter, the drive obviously cannot follow the given command
value. Then this error is generated.
Cause:
1. The drive’s acceleration capacity has been exceeded.
2. The axis is blocked.
3. Incorrect parameter values set in the drive parameters.
4. Incorrect parameter values in S-0-0159, Monitoring window.
Remedy:
Ref. 1. Check the S-0-0092, Bipolar torque/force limit value parameter
and set it to the maximum permissible value of the application.
Reduce the specified acceleration value from the controller (see
controller Manual).
Ref. 2. Check the mechanical system and eliminate jamming of the axis.
Ref. 3. Check the drive parameters (control loop tuning).
Ref. 4. Set the parameter values of S-0-0159, Monitoring window.
See also the functional description "Position Control Loop Monitoring".
F229 Encoder 1 failure: quadrant error

With wrong signals in the encoder evaluation, a hardware error has been
discovered in the encoder interface 1 being used.
Cause:
1. Defective encoder cable
2. Disruptive electro-magnetic interference on the encoder cable
3. Defective encoder interface
4. Defective drive controller
Remedy:
For 1. Exchange the encoder cable.
For 2. Keep the encoder cable well away from the power cables.
For 3. Exchange the encoder interface.
For 4. Exchange the drive controller.
F230 Max. signal frequency of encoder 1 exceeded

The signal frequency of the encoder 1 (motor encoder) is checked
whether the allowed max. frequency of the encoder interface is exceeded.
If the frequency is higher than allowed, the error F230, Max. signal
frequency of encoder 1 exceeded is generated. The position status of
the encoder 1 is cleared to 0.
Cause:
Maximum speed of the feedback device is lower than the maximum motor
speed.
Suggestion:
• Don’t allow the motor to run faster than the maximum allowed sensor
speed by reducing parameter S-0-0091, Bipolar Speed Limit.
• Change the sensor for a device with higher speed rating.
F236 Excessive position feedback difference

Cause:
In the communication phase 4 transition check command, position
feedback value 1 and position feedback value 2 are set to the same
value, and the cyclic evaluation of both encoders is started. In cyclic
operation (phase 4), the position feedback difference of both encoders is
compared with S-0-0391, Monitoring window feedback 2. If the amount
of the difference exceeds the monitoring window, the error F236
Excessive position feedback difference is diagnosed, the parameter-
selected error response is performed, and the reference bits of both
encoders are cleared.
Note: The monitoring is off, when the parameter S-0-0391,

Monitoring window feedback 2 is set to the value 0.
Possible Causes :
1. Incorrect parameter for the encoder 2
(S-0-0115, Position feedback 2 type parameter,
S-0-0117, Resolution of feedback 2)
2. Incorrect parameter setting of mechanical system between motor
shaft and encoder 2:
(S-0-0121, Input revolutions of load gear,
S-0-0122, Output revolutions of load gear,
S-0-0123, Feed constant)
3. The mechanical system between motor shaft and encoder 2 is not
rigid (e.g. gear play, slip).
5. Maximum input frequency of the encoder interface exceeded
6. Encoder 2 (optional) is not mounted to the driven axis.
7. Incorrect reference measure of an absolute encoder
Remedy:
Ref. 1. Check S-0-0115, Position feedback 2 type parameter and
S-0-0117, Resolution of feedback 2.
Ref. 2. Check S-0-0121, S-0-0122, Input/Output revolutions of load
gear and S-0-0123, Feed constant.
Ref. 3. Increase S-0-0391, Monitoring window feedback 2; switch off
when using a gearbox with a large amount of slip.
Ref. 4. Replace encoder cable.
Ref. 5. Reduce the velocity.
Ref. 6. Set S-0-0391, Monitoring window feedback 2 to 0 (de-activate
monitoring function).
Ref. 7. Perform P-0-0012, C300 Command ’Set absolute
measurement’.
See also the functional description "Actual Feedback Value Monitoring".
F237 Excessive position command difference

Cause:
When the drive is operating in position control, incoming position
command values are monitored. If the velocity required of the drive by two
successive position command values is greater than or equal to the value
in S-0-0091, Bipolar velocity limit value, position command value
monitoring is initiated. The Excessive position command value is
stored in parameter P-0-0010. The last valid position command value
is stored in parameter P-0-0011.
If position data are to be processed in modulo format, then the
interpretation of the command is also dependent on the value set in
S-0-0393, Command value mode for modulo format. The parameter
should be set for the "shortest path" (0).
Remedy:
Compare S-0-0091, Bipolar velocity limit value with the velocity in the
program and adjust to match it, if necessary.
F242 Encoder 2 failure: signal amplitude wrong

Cause:
The analog signals of an external measurement system are used for high
resolution analysis of that measurement system. These are monitored
according to two criteria:
1. The pointer length, which is calculated from the amplified sine and
cosine signals, must be at least 1 V.
2. The maximum pointer length resulting from the sine and cosine
signals must not exceed 11.8 V.
pointerlength = sin 2 + cos 2

Fig. 4-3: Pointer length
Permissible signal amplitudes for sine and cosine signals

15
maximum pointer length > 11,8V
10
5
cosine signal amplitude
minimum pointer length > 1,0V
nominal pointer length (9,2V)

-5
-10
-15
-15 -10 -5 0 5 10 15
sine signal amplitude
=non-permissible range
Dg5004a1.fh7
Fig. 4-4: Correct signal amplitude
Note: When an incremental encoder with squarewave signals is

used, the signal is not monitored.
Example:
Ucos = -6.5V
Usin = 6.5V
2
pointerlength = (- 6.5V ) + 6.5V 2 » 9.2V
Remedy:
1. Check the measurement system cable.
2. Check the measurement system.
F245 Encoder 2 failure: quadrant error

The evaluation of the additional optional encoder (encoder 2) is active. In
the evaluation of the sinusoidal input signals of the optional encoder, a
plausibility check is performed between these signals and the counter fed
by these signals. Doing this, an error has been encountered.
Cause:
3. Defective encoder interface
Remedy:
For 1. Exchange the encoder cable.
For 2. Keep the encoder cable well away from power cables.
For 3. Exchange the encoder interface (DIAX) or the drive (Ecodrive).
F246 Max signal frequency of encoder 2 exceeded

The signal frequency of the encoder 2 (optional encoder) is checked
whether the allowed max. frequency of the encoder interface is exceeded.
Whether, in the case of an excessive frequency, the error F246, Max
signal frequency for encoder 2 exceeded is generated or not, depends on
the setting in the parameter P-0-0185, Function of encoder 2. If the
number 4 for spindle encoder is set there, only the position status of the
optional encoder is cleared to 0. In the other case, the warning F246 is
generated and the position status is cleared to 0.
F248 Low battery voltage

Cause:
For motors of series MKD and MKE, the absolute position information is
stored by a battery-powered electronic in the motor feedback. The battery
is designed for a 10-year life span. If the battery voltage falls below 3,1 V,
this message appears. The absolute encoder function will still be
preserved for about 2 weeks.
Malfunction in the control of motors and moving

elements
⇒ Replace the battery as soon as possible.

CAUTION
Instructions for Exchanging Batteries

Have the following tools and accessories ready:
• Torx screwdriver size 10
• Needle-nose pliers, torque wrench
• New packaged battery (Part No. 257101)
Malfunction in the control of motors and moving

elements
⇒ Turn off the power supply. Make sure it will not be

CAUTION turned back on. Exchange the battery while the
control voltage (24V) is turned on.
If the control voltage is turned off while the battery is taken out, the
absolute reference point will be lost. Then, the reference point must be
reestablished with the command "Set absolute measuring“.
Removing the Battery

• Unscrew torx screws with size 10 screwdriver.
• Pull out the resolver feedback (RSF) lid by hand.
• Pull off the battery connector.
• Loosen battery clamp and remove the battery.
• Place the prepared battery in the housing and screw on the clamp.
Attention! Do not kink or clamp the battery cable.
• Attach the connector of the battery.
Close the resolver feedback lid, screw in 4 torx screws and tighten to 1.8
Nm with the torque wrench.
F249 Master drive encoder failure: signal too small

The signals of the master encoder are monitored. If its signal amplitude
falls below a minimum threshold value, then this error message appears.
The drive performs the best possible deceleration, as selected in the
parameter P-0-0119.
Criteria for correct encoder signals:

1. The pointer addition of the sine and cosine signals must give at least
1 V.
2. The maximum pointer sum of the sine and cosine signals may not
exceed 11.8 V.
Cause:
The analog signals of the measurement system at the master axis do not
have the correct amplitude.
Remedy:
1. Check the encoder cable.
2. Check the encoder.
F250 Overflow of target position preset memory

Cause:
If the attempt is made in mode "Running the positioning command value"
to set a new positioning command value while toggling parameter
S-0-0346, Positioning command latch even though the previous
positioning command value (k+1) has not yet been assumed (because
the previous positioning command value (k) has not yet been run to), then
error F250 Overflow of target position preset memory was generated.
Remedy:
• Wait until the position is run to.
• Use a different positioning mode (e.g., immediate acceptance).
See also functional description: "Acknowledging command value latch".
F252 Master drive encoder failure: quadrant error

A hardware error was discovered in the high resolution position interface
for "DLF" sine signals of the external measurement system.
Cause:
2. Insulation distrubance on the encoder cable
3. Defective DLF plug-in card
Remedy:
For 1. Exchange the encoder cable
For 2. Separate the encoder cable from the power cables.
For 3. Exchange the DLF plug-in card
F253 Incr. encoder emulator: pulse frequency too high

Cause:
The incremental encoder emulator can process a maximum 2047
increments per sample period (500µs ); this value has been exceeded.
Remedial action:
1. Reduce the number of lines of the incremental encoder emulator (P-
0-0502).
or
2. Reduce the travel velocity.
See also the functional description: "Encoder Emulation".
F260 Command current limit shutoff

If the current setpoint reaches the peak value, then warning E260
Command current limit shutoff is generated. If the limit remains
standing for more than 1.5 ms, then the drive is shutdown with error
message F260 Command current limit shutoff.
Error cause:
1. Motor power cable has not been connected.
2. Motor holding brake not released (not connected).
3. The axis is mechanically jammed.
4. Accel time exceeds maximum torque greater than 1.5s.
The error message can be switched off in the motor function parameters.
F262 External short at status outputs

Status outputs (ready, warning and UD-message) are monitored for short
circuits and thermal overload.
• If output current exceeds 350mA for about 1µs, then this is
acknowledged as a short circuit and the pertinent channel is shut off.
The output remains off unit the error is cleared.
• With thermal overload, the error is set and the output(s) shut off. After
the driver has cooled off, the outputs are switched back on and so on.
The error, however, remains until it is cleared. Thermal overload can
occur if several outputs are overloaded in excess of 80 mA.
Note: Light bulbs, for example, cannot be controlled as their inrush

current causes a short-circuit.
Cause:
1. Short circuited outputs
2. One or more outputs are overloaded.
Remedy:
For 1. Eliminate short circuit or limit switching current (< 350 mA)
For 2. Drop current, depending on output, to < 80 mA.
See also the functional description: "Setting the Operating Mode
Parameters".
F267 Erroneous internal hardware synchronization

Cause:
The drive control is synchronized on the bus interface (SERCOS,
Profibus, Interbus, ...). The correct function of the synchronization is
monitored. If the average value of the deviation exceeds 5 µs, this error is
generated.
Remedy:
Replace drive controller.
F269 Error during release of the motor holding brake

After drive enable is set or while running the brake monitor command the
motor does not move despite that. The motor torque command is equal to
the brake holding torque.
Cause:
1. Motor brake not connected
2. Axis mechanically jammed
3. Frictional torque > brake nominal torque.
Remedy:
on 1. connect brake
on 2. check mechanics and eliminate jam
on 3. switch brake monitor off
See also the functional description: "Motor Holding Brake"
F276 Absolute encoder out of allowed window

When turning off the drive controller with an absolute encoder, the actual
feedback position will be stored. When powered up, the absolute position
given by the encoder is compared with the stored position.
Cause:
1. Turning on for the first time (invalid stored position)
2. The motor has been moved further than allowed by the parameter in
the absolute encoder monitoring window, P-0-0097, while it was
turned off.
3. Incorrect position initialization
Remedy:
For 1. Press S1 to reset the error and set the absolute position.
For 2. The motor was moved while turned off and sits outside of its
permissible position. Check to see if the displayed position is
correct in relation to the machine zero point. Reset subsequent
errors.
For 3.
An accident may occur by accidental shaft

movement.
Check absolute position information. The feedback is
defective if the absolute position information is wrong.
WARNING The motor should be exchanged and sent to the Rexroth
Indramat Customer Service.
Note: If a customer password is activated and the drive controller is

locked, then error F276 Absolute encoder out of allowed
window cannot be reset. The drive controller must be
unlocked first.
See also the functional description "Absolute Encoder Monitoring".
F277 Current measurement trim wrong

The current reading in the drive controller is compensated for during
operation. The compensation values are stored in parameters P-0-4000
and P-0-4001. These values are queried to ensure they maintain the
tolerance of +/- 10 %. Should the values be greater, then this error is
generated.
Cause:
• Hardware defective in the drive controller.
Remedy:
• Replace hardware.
F281 Mains fault

Cause:
The power supply voltage was not present during operation for at least 3
power periods. As a result, the drive controller was brought to a standstill
according to the set error response.
Remedy:
Check the power supply connection according to the project planning
specifications.
F386 No ready signal from supply module

Cause:
Input BbN "mains section ready“ on the drive controller is at 24V, i.e., the
connected mains section is not issuing a ready to operate signal.
Recovery:
1. Check mains section.
2. Check connection from mains section to BbN input on drive.
3. If the drive does not have a separate power section, then switch the
input monitor off.
See also P-0-4062, Monitoring the Mains section

See also the functional description: "Current Limit"
F402 Double MDT failure shutdown

The master data telegram used for internal communications (MDT)
between both controllers has not been received in the drive over the
course of two sequential fieldbus cycles.
Cause:
1. There is interference in the internal communications between the two
controllers.
2. The fieldbus master is no longer cyclically sending telegrams to the
drive. They are, however, being cyclilcally expected in phase 4.
Recovery:
1. Replace interface module (e.g., PBK, CAN,...) in the drive.
2. Switch master on and initiate cyclilcal communications. See Control
Manual.
F407 Error during initialisation of master communication

While initializing and checking the command communications interface
between the drive and fieldbus processor, can error occurred.
Note: This error cannot be cleared and the drive remains in

Phase2. It is possible to parametrize the axis and conduct a
firmware update with DOLFI. The axis can be run, however!
Cause:
Error F407, Error during fieldbus initialized is entered if
• no command communications card has been inserted
• an incorrect command communications card has been inserted
• the fieldbus firmware does not run (timeout)
• an error occurred when programming the PBK flash
Recovery:
• insert correct card
• replace firmware
F408 Fatal error of the interface card

The fieldbus interface has detected a fatal error.
Cause:
1. The watchdog of the interface card has been triggered.
2. A non-permitted memory access follows.
Recovery:
Switch unit off and on and if error still pending, replace hardware.
F409 Bus failure

After the fieldbus has been initialized and everything is running, the
watdchdog of the fieldbus was triggered, i.e,. communications with the
fieldbus master is no longer possible.
Cause:
1. The fieldbus card connector has been pulled.
2. The fieldbus cable is faulty.
3. The master is not sending a telegram.
Recovery:
On 1. Ensure that the fieldbus card connector is correctly inserted.
On 2. Check fieldbus cable for faults.
On 3. Check master.
F410 Synchronization with field bus impossible

A connection to the drive cannot be established in profile type „cyclical
position control“.
Cause:
1. The cycle time of the fieldbus was incorrectly set.
2. Sercos cycle time (S-0-0002) was incorrectly set.
3. The fieldbus is only active during synchronization.
Recovery:
On 1 and 2. The cycle time of the fieldbus and Sercos cycle time must
have the correct ratio. As the Sercos cycle is derived from the
fieldbus cycle time the Sercos cycle must either be adapted in the
event of an error (cycle time of the fieldbus is fixed) or vice versa
(Sercos cycle fixed).
On 2. In drive phase 3 it is attempted to synchronize Sercos cycle of
drive to cycle time of fieldbus. This takes some time. If the
connection to the master should be interrupted during this
synchronization phase, then the fieldbus card cannot established
synchronization and the connection to the master cannot be
interrupted.
F434 Emergency-Stop
Pressing the emergency stop switch (E-Stop) has caused the drive to
perform the emergency stop function that was selected in the P-0-0119,
Best possible deceleration parameter. Setting bit 15 of S-0-0011, Class
1 diagnostics causes an error message to be issued to the controller.
Cause:
The emergency stop switch has been pressed.
Remedy:
Eliminate the malfunction that has caused the emergency switch to be
actuated, and clear the error.
See also the functional description: "Emergency stop feature".
F629 Positive travel limit exceeded

The drive has received a command value which has led to an axis
position outside the positive travel range. The axis has been brought to a
standstill with the error response "Set velocity command value to zero".
Bit 2 of paramater P-0-0090, Travel limit parameter is set for "Exceeding
travel range is an error", or after exceeding the position limit a drive
control command has been started (such as the drive-controlled homing
procedure).
Cause:
S-0-0049, Positive position limit value exceeded.
Remedy:
1. Check S-0-0049, Positive position limit value
2. Check the software limits of the control system
3. Activate the axis after the error response
Procedure:
• Clear the error.
• If the power supply was turned off, turn it back on.
• Move the axis into the permissible working range.
Note: Only command values which lead back into the allowed
working range will be accepted. With other command values,
the drive will stop again. - The parameter S-0-0057, Position
window defines a tolerance for the travel limits.
See also the functional description: "Axis Limit Values".
F630 Negative travel limit exceeded

The drive has received a command value which has led to an axis
position outside the negative travel range. The axis has been brought to a
standstill with the error response "Set velocity command value to zero".
Bit 2 of paramater P-0-0090, Travel limit parameter is set for "Exceeding
travel range is an error", or after exceeding the position limit a drive
control command has been started (such as the drive-controlled homing
procedure).
Cause:
S-0-0050, Negative travel limit value exceeded.
Remedy:
1. Check S-0-0050, Negative travel limit value.
2. Check the software limits of the control system.
3. Activate the axis after the error response.
Procedure:
• Clear the error.
• If the power supply was turned off, turn it back on.
• Move the axis into the permissible working range.
Note: Only such command values which lead back into the allowed
working range will be accepted. With other command values,
See also the functional description: "Travel Range Limits".
F634 Emergency-Stop
Pressing the emergency stop (E-Stop) switch has caused the drive to
stop by setting the velocity command value to zero. An error is reported in
the S-0-0011, Class 1 diagnostics parameter.
Cause:
The emergency stop switch has been pressed.
Remedy:
Eliminate the malfunction that has caused the emergency switch to be
actuated, and clear the error.
F643 Positive travel limit switch detected

The positive travel range limit switch has been activated. The axis was
brought to a standstill with error reaction "Velocity command value to
zero".
In P-0-0090, Travel limit parameter bit 2 has been set as "travel range
overrun treated as error" or or a drive control command was started after
the end switch had been actuated (e.g., drive-controlled homing).
Cause:
The positive travel range limit switch has been activated.
Remedy:
1. clear error
2. turn power source back on
3. move axis into the allowed travel range
Note: The drive will not accept command values which lead out of
the permissible travel range. Entering these command values
in the drivecontroller will result in this error.
F644 Negative travel limit switch detected

The negative travel limit switch has been activated. The axis has been
brought to a standstill with the "Set velocity command value to zero" error
response.
Bit 2 of parameter P-0-0090, Travel limit parameter is set for "Exceeding
travel range as error", or a drive control command has been started (such
as the drive-controlled homing procedure). with the limit switch already
actuated.
Cause:
The negative travel limit switch has been activated.
Remedy:
1. Reset the error.
2. Turn the power supply on again.
3. Move the axis into the permissible travel range.
Note: The drive will not accept command values which lead out of
the permissible travel range. Entering these command values
in the drive controller will result in this erro
F811 Commutation offset could not be determined

The Automatic Commutation Adjustment has tried to determine the
commutation offset. That has failed.
Cause:
The motor could not move freely enough.
Remedy:
Check whether the motor is blocked.
See also the functional description: "Determining commutation offset".
F812 Motion range exceeded during commutation

A range of +/- 1 pole pair distance is defined, within which the axis may
move during the Automatic Commutation adjustment. If this range is
exceeded, this error message appears.
Cause:
1. The drive enable has been set while the axis was still in motion.
2. The axis has been moved by a mechanical force.
3. Parameters P-0-0560 Commutation adjustment current and P-0-0562
Commutation adjustment periodic time are set too high. Possibly the
mechanical properties of the axis, like friction or weight load, have
changed.
Remedy:
1. Wait until the axis motion stops and set the drive enable once again.
2. Inhibit the influence of the mechanical force.
3. Reduce the parameter values for P-0-0560 Commutation adjustment
current and P-0-0562 Commutation adjustment cycle time. You can
also set them to the default values P-0-0560 Commutation
adjustment current = 25 % and P-0-0562 Commutation adjustment
cycle time = 4 milliseconds. Afterwards, start the command D300
Commutation adjustment to evaluate once again the optimal
parameters.
See also the functional description: "Synchronous Motors"
F822 Encoder 1 failure: signal amplitude wrong

The analog signals of a motor measurement system are used for high
resolution analysis of that measurement system. These are monitored
according to two criteria:
1. The pointer length, which is calculated from the amplified sine and
cosine signals, must be at least 1 V.
2. The maximum pointer length resulting from the sine and cosine
signals must not exceed 11.8 V.
pointer length = sin 2 + cos 2
Fig. 4-5: Pointer length
Permissible signal amplitudes for sine and cosine signals

15
maximum pointer length > 11,8V
10
cosine signal amplitude

minimum pointer length > 1,0V
nominal pointer length (9,2V)

-5
-10
-15
-15 -10 -5 0 5 10 15
sine signal amplitude
=non-permissible range
Dg5004a1.fh7
Fig. 4-6: Correct signal amplitude
Example:
Ucos = -6,5V
Usin = 6,5V
pointer length = (− 6.5V )2 + 6.5V 2 ≈ 9.2 V
Note: The error cannot be cleared in communications phase 4.

Before clearing the error, switch to communications phase 2.
Note: When an incremental encoder with squarewave signals is

used, the signal is not monitored.
Cause:
3. Defective encoder
Remedy:
1. Check the measurement system cable.
2. Lay the feedback cable well away from the motor power cable. The
cover must be placed over the drive controller (see drive controller
project specifications.)
3. Check the measurement system and exchange, if necessary.
F860 Overcurrent: short in power stage

The transistor (IGBT) current has exceeded the allowed maximum peak
value. The drive is immediately disabled, the motor freewheels to a stop.
Cause:
1. Short circuit in the motor or motor cable.
2. Defective power section of the drive controller
3. The current regulator was parameterized with wrong values.
Remedy:
For 1. Check the motor cable for a short.
For 3. Check that the current controller parameters are as given in the
motor data sheet; if they differ, input the correct values.
F870 +24Volt DC error

The drive controller requires a 24-V control voltage. The drive’s torque is
released immediately when the maximum permissible tolerance of +-20%
is exceeded. If an optional electrically released motor holding brake is
present, then it is activated.
Cause:
1. Defective cable for the control voltages.
2. 24-V power supply overload.
3. Defective power supply unit.
4. Short-circuit in the emergency stop circuit.
Remedy:
Ref. 1. Check and, if necessary, replace the cable and connections of the
control voltages.
Ref. 2. Check the 24-V power at the power supply unit.
Ref. 3. Check the power supply unit.
Ref. 4. Check the emergency stop circuit for a short-circuit.
Note: This error can only be cleared in parameter mode (phase 2).
As a result of this error, the encoder emulation is switched off.
F873 Power supply driver stages fault

The voltage supply of the driver stage is monitored, and if the voltage is
too low, the drive is turned off.
Cause:
The voltage supply of the driver stage is too low.
Remedy:
Exchange drive controller.
F878 Velocity loop error

The velocity loop monitor will appear when the following conditions occur
simultaneously:
• The current command value is at the peak current limit.
• Command accel and actual velocity have different qualifying signs
• Actual velocity > 20 rpm or 20 mm/min
• Command and actual acceleration have different qualifying (+/-)signs.
Cause:
1. Motor cable is connected incorrectly.
2. Defective controller section of the drive
3. Defective feedback
4. Velocity loop paramatrized incorrectly
5. Incorrect commutation offset
Remedy:
For 1. Check the motor cable connection.
For 3. Exchange the motor.
For 4. Check the velocity controller to see whether it is within operational
parameters.
See also the functional description: "Determining the Velocity Controller

Setting".
F879 Velocity limit S-0-0091 exceeded

In torque control, the actual velocity is monitored. This error is generated
if the programmed velocity in the S-0-0091, Bipolar velocity limit value
parameter is exceeded by the 1.125-fold value or a minimum of 100 rpm
(rotary motor) or by 100 mm/min (linear motor).
Cause:
The torque command value was for too long a time greater than the load
torque. This causes the actual speed to increase up to the maximum
possible motor speed.
Remedy:
Assign the correct torque command value for the required task. Reduce
the S-0-0092, Bipolar torque/force limit value parameter value.
See also the functional description "Limiting to Bipolar Velocity Limit

Value".
4.2 Warning diagnostic messages

Many areas are monitored in connection with operating modes and
Warnings do not lead to an parameter settings. As a result, if a state is discovered which is still
automatic shutdown allowed by the order of operation, but in continuous operation generates
an error and thereafter leads to shutdown of the drive, a warning will be
generated in the case where this state appears again.
Warning Classes
Warnings can be separated into 2 classes. They differentiate if the drive
The warning class is will perform an automatic response with the appearance of a warning.
evident from the diagnostic
message
Warning Class: Diagnostic Drive Reaction:
Message:
with Drive Response E8xx Drive Stop
without Drive E2xx --
Response
Fig. 4-7: Division of the Warning Classes
Warnings can not be externally deleted.
E221 Warning Motor temp. surveillance defective

Temperature monitoring checks to see if the measured motor
temperature is within reasonable bounds. If it determines that it is lower
than -10°C, then it is assumed the measuring unit is defective. Warning
E221 Warning Motor temp. surveillance defective will appear for 30
seconds. Afterwards the drive controller will be brought to a standstill
according to the selected error response and message F221 Error Motor
temp. surveillance defective will be generated.
Cause:
1. Motor temperature sensor not connected.
2. Broken cable.
3. Defective sensor.
4. Broken cable in drive controller.
Remedy:
For 1. Connect the sensor to the drive controller and to the motor
(see project planning specifications for the motor).
For 2. Exchange the wiring between the drive controller and the motor.
For 3. Exchange the motor. Use second sensor in the motor if available.
See also the functional description: "Temperature monitoring".
E225 Motor overload

The maximum possible motor current is reduced in order to protect the
motor from being destroyed.
If a current flows in the that is greater than 2.2 times the motor current at
standstill S-0-0111, the maximum possible motor current (S-0-0109,
Motor peak current) is reduced. With 4-fold motor current at standstill,
the reduction starts after 400 ms. With 5-fold current it starts earlier, and
with 3-fold current later.
The E225 Motor overload warning is issued when the motor peak
current is reduced by the limitation.
The reduction also has an effect on the P-0-4045, Active permanent
current.
E226 Undervoltage in power section

If bit 5 of the P-0-0118, Power off on error parameter has been set, an
undervoltage condition will be handled as a nonfatal warning. The drive
issues this warning if the drive enabling signal is present and the DC bus
voltage message disappears.
Cause:
Power supply unit is switched off or mains failure occurs while the drive
enabling signal is set.
Remedy:
Switch off the drive enabling signal before you switch off the power supply
unit.
E247 Interpolation velocity = 0

The drive-internal position command value interpolator is active if
• the "drive-internal interpolation" mode
• the "relative drive-internal interpolation" mode
• drive-controlled homing
• Jog
• drive halt
• Process block mode
is active
The E247 warning is issued if the employed velocity specification is 0.
Possible velocity specifications are:
• S-0-0259, Positioning velocity
• S-0-0041, Homing velocity
• S-0-0091, Bipolar velocity limit value
• P-0-4030, Jog velocity
• P-0-4007, Process block velocity
Note: Warning E247 is suppressed if S-0-0259, Positioning

Velocity is cyclically configured.
See also the functional description: "Operating Mode: Drive Internal

Interpolation"
E248 Interpolation acceleration = 0

Cause:
The drive internal position command interpolator (profile generator) is
active. It has been given the acceleration = 0. Without acceleration, it can
never reach a given speed.
Note: Input parameter values are converted into a drive internal

format, so an input acceleration word > 0 can, when
converted, result in an acceleration = 0. The parameter values
which, internaly, result in an acceleration > 0, can be
calculated using the formulas found in the chapter entitled
"Drive-internal format of position data"
Operation modes with drive internal position command generation:

1. Drive-internal interpolation
2. Relative drive-internal interpolation
3. Drive-controlled homing
4. Drive Halt
5. Process block mode
6. jog
Remedy:
Input a reasonable value > 0 for the employed acceleration. Possible
acceleration specifications, depending from the operation mode, are:
For 1, 2 and 6: S-0-0260, Positioning acceleration >0
For 3.: S-0-0042, Homing acceleration >0
For 4.: S-0-0138, Bipolar acceleration limit value >0
For 5.: P-0-4008, Process block Acceleration >0

Interpolation"
E249 Positioning velocity >= S-0-0091

Cause:
Operating modes with internal interpolation limit the positioning speed to
that set in S-0-0091, Bipolar velocity limit value.
This applies to the following modes:
1. Drive Internal Interpolation
2. Relative drive-internal interpolation
3. Positioning Block Mode
4. Jogging
Remedy:
S-0-0259, Positioning Velocity or
P-0-4007, Process block velocity or
P-0-4030, Jog velocity
must be reduced
See also functional description: "Operating Mode: Drive Internal

Interpolation".
E250 Drive overtemp. prewarning

The temperature of the heatsink in the drive controller has reached the
maximum permissible temperature. The drive controller follows the
command value input for a period of 30 seconds. This makes it possible
to bring the axis to a standstill with the control system while keeping true
to the process (for example, close the operation, leave the collision area,
etc.).
After 30 seconds, the response set in parameter P-0-0119, Best
possible deceleration will be performed by the drive controller.
Cause:
1. Failure of the drive’s internal blower.
2. Failure of the control cabinet’s climate control.
3. Incorrect control cabinet sizing in regards to heat dissipation.
Remedy:
For 1. If the blower fails, exchange the drive controller.
For 2. Install climate control feature in the cabinet.
For 3. Check the sizing of the control cabinet.
See also the functional description:"Current Limit"
E251 Motor overtemp. prewarning

As soon as the temperature warning threshold (145°C) is exceeded, the
warning E251 is output, and the drive keeps on following the command
value.
This state can last for a long time without powering down. Only when the
temperature error threshold is exceeded, an immediate powering down
will take place.
See also F219 Motor Overtemperature Shutdown.
Cause:
The motor is overloaded. The effective torque required from the motor
was above the allowable standstill continuous torque for too long.
Remedy:
Check the installation of the motor. For systems which have been in use
for a long time, check to see if the drive conditions have changed (in
regards to pollution, friction, moving components, etc).
See also the functional description: "Temperature Monitoring".
E252 Bleeder overload prewarning

Cause:
The braking resistance (bleeder) in the amplifier is charged with the
reflected energy from the motor by about 90%. The bleeder
overtemperature warning shows that an overload of the bleeder is
expected if the feedback energy increases on and on.
Remedy:
Reduce the acceleration value or velocity. Check the drive installation.
E253 Target position out of travel range

In operation modes with drive controlled interpolation, the drive checks
before the move whether the specified S-0-0258, Target position, is
within the possible travel range of the drive. This range is defined by the
parameters S-0-0049, Positive position limit value and S-0-0050,
Negative position limit value. The position limit check is activated in the
parameter S-0-0055, Position polarities with bit 4.
Cause:
The target position lies beyond the position limits, and the position limit
check is activated.. The motion profile results in a target position greater
than the maximum allowed position.
Results:
• This warning message, E253, appears.
• The drive stops.
• The drive does not accept the target position or the process block.
• In S-0-0012, Class 2 diagnostic warning bit 13 is set.
Remedy:
1. For the Drive controlled interpolation mode, input the S-0-0258,
Target position only within the position limits.
2. Don’t input moves which are greater than the maximum allowed
position minus the current position.
3. In positioning-sequence operating mode always set S-0-4006,
Command Targetposition smaller than the maximum allowed
position.
4. The same holds for Relative Positioning commands, where the sum
of the commanded positions + the start position should be less than
the maximum allowed position.
5. Check the position limit values. Moreover, the positive position limit
value must be greater than the negative position limit value.
6. If you don’t need the position limit check, de-activate it, e.g. in modulo
mode.

Interpolation".
E254 Not homed

If absolute positions are selected while in a positioning operation mode,
the control drive must be homed to a reference position. If this is not the
case, an absolute position cannot be reached. The drive rejects this
positioning command and stops. The warning E254 will be given.
Cause:
Absolute positioning was selected without the drive being referenced.
Remedies:
1. Do the homing (referencing) command with the drive or
2. do only relative positioning.
See also the function description "Drive-Controlled Homing".
E255 Feedrate-override S-0-0108 = 0

With the parameter S-0-0108, Feedrate override, the travel velocity of all
drive-controlled travel commands can be changed proportionally
(in %).
If the value of this parameter is 0, the travel velocity is also 0. With
velocity = 0, the motor remains stationary despite having a commanded
value.
Causes:
1. The parameter S-0-0108, Feedrate override is 0.
2. For devices with analog inputs: Feedrate override via analog input is
activated, and the voltage at the analog input is 0.
3. The feed potentiometer of the connected control system is at 0 or is
being evaluated incorrectly.
Remedies:
For 1.: Set Feedrate override > 0, so that the drive moves. Full speed is
attained with 100% .
For 2.: Apply a voltage > 0 proportional to the desired speed,
+10V corresponds to 100 % (full) speed.
Alternative: De-activate Feedrate override.
For 3.: Turn the feed potentiometer cautiously, check the analog signal
and the evaluation for it.
See also the functional description: "Sequence control Drive-Controlled

Homing".
E256 Torque limit = 0

Cause:
1. For protection against mechanical overload, the maximum torque can
be limited by the S-0-0092, Bipolar Torque Limit parameter. If the
actual value of this parameter is equal to 0, the motor does not
develop torque and does not follow the given command values.
2. Torque reduction is set via an analog channel, and the applied
voltage amounts to 10 V.
Remedy:
For 1. Set the torque limit to a value greater than 0.
For 2. Establish an analog voltage smaller than 10 V.
See also the functional description:"Current Limit"
E257 Continuous current limit active

The drive controller sets the peak current available for 400 ms.
Thereafter, the continuous current limit becomes active and dynamically
limits the peak current to the continuous current.
Cause:
More continuous torque was required than was available.
Remedy:
1. Check the drive installation.
2. Check the installation of the motor. For systems which have been in
use for a long time, check to see whether the drive conditions have
changed in regards to
• pollution
• friction
• moved masses
See also the functional description: "Current Limit".
E258 Selected process block is not programmed.

Cause:
A positioning block was selected for which there is no set target position
or positioning velocity, etc.
Remedy:
Select another positioning block or enter the required data.
See also the functional description: "Positioning Block Mode"
E259 Command velocity limit active

In the position control and velocity control operating modes, the effective
velocity command value is limited to the value in parameter S-0-0091,
Bipolar velocity limit value. The warning is given if the resulting velocity
command value reaches this limit.
Cause:
Parameter S-0-0091, Bipolar velocity limit value was set too low.
Remedy:
In normal operating conditions, set parameter S-0-0091, Bipolar velocity
limit value to a value 10% greater than the NC maximum velocity.
See also the functional description: "Limiting to Bipolar Velocity Limit

Value".
E260 Command Current limit active

Description:
The warning shows that the speed controller is entering its limit. This
means that the acceleration capacity of the drive has been exceeded. In
position control mode this means that there is an ever-increasing
deviation between command and actual values (lag error).
Remedy:
• In position control, reduce parametrized accel value or speed value so
that the drive can follow the position command value.
• Increase torque limit value, if necessary.
E261 Continuous current limit prewarning

Digital drives are monitored by a continually operating temperature model.
If the thermal load reaches 100%, the continuous current limit will be
activated shortly thereafter and error E257 Continuous Current Limit
Active, is displayed.
Before the torque is reduced, a continuous current limit early warning is

given via a switching threshold, which is determined by parameter
P-0-0127, Overload warning.
To deactivate the warning, enter P-0-0127 = 100% into the parameter.
Cause:
The drive controller was overloaded.
Remedy:
1. Check the drive layout.
2. Reduce acceleration.
3. Increase the switching threshold in parameter P-0-0127, Overload
warning
4. With systems which have been used for longer periods of time, check
to see if drive controller conditions have changed in regards to:
• Friction
• Movements of the load
• Feed during processing.
E263 Velocity command value > limit S-0-0091

Cause:
The value given to the drive for S-0-0036, Velocity command value was
greater than permissible.
Remedy:
It is limited to S-0-0091, Bipolar velocity limit value.
See also the functional description: "Operating Mode: Velocity Control"
E264 Target position out of num. range

Cause:
In modes:
• drive-internal interpolation,
• relative interpolation and
• positioning block mode
In drive-internal interpolation mode the previous target position in the
internal position format cannot be reached.
Recover:
1. Check the given target position and correct, if necessary.
2. With infinitely turning axes it is necessary that the position data be
illustrated in modulo format.
3. The absolute internally illustrable position can be enlarged by
enlarging the maximum travel range.
E269 Brake torque too low

When switching the drive enable off or with the brake monitoring
command, the motor has moved while checking the brake torque. The
motor holding brake thus no longer supplies the nominal torque.
Possible causes for the holding torque that is too low:
1. brake is covered with a layer of oxidization due to storage
2. brake is covered with oil or grease
3. brake is worn down
Remedy:
on 1 if the warning occurs when the drive enable is removed, then start
"command brake monitoring".
on 2 if the warning occurs with the removal of the drive enable, start
"command brake monitoring". The command brake monitoring
re-checks the brake torque. If the torque is too low, then the
brake is re-ground. This re-grinding of the brake removes any
residues or films. The brake should then bring its full torque.
on 3 if the brake is repeatedly re-ground yet the torque not achieved,
then the motor holding brake must be replaced.
E281 Mains fault

Cause:
The mains voltage has failed during operation for at least three mains
cycles.
In parameter P-0-0118, Power off on error mains failure and
undervoltage failure have been set as warnings.
The drive does not conduct an error reaction. If the drive continues to
operate despite the warning, an F220 Bleeder overload shutdown could
be generated.
Recovery:
Check the mains connections to ensure that they are as illustrated in the
project planning manual.
See Function Description: "Current Limit".
E386 No ready signal from supply module

Cause:
The input BbN "mains section "ready" to operate“ on the drive controller is
at 24V, i.e., the connected mains section does not issue a ready to
operate.
Mains failure and undervoltage errors have been set in parameter
P-0-0118, Power off on error have been set as warnings.
The drive does not conduct an error reaction. If the drive continues to
operate despite the warning, then error F220 Bleeder overload
shutdown could be generated.
Recovery:
2. Check the mains section connection to input ingang BbN on the drive.
3. If the drive is not supplied by a separate mains section, then the input
of the monitor must be switched off.
See P-0-4062, Power supply monitor

See the Function Description: "Current Limit".
E401 Error in the parameter channel

Description:
The fieldbus card communicates during operation with the drive via SIS
telegrams as well. A faulty SIS telegram was detected during processing.
Cause:
Error during internal SIS communications between fieldbus card and
basic controller card.
E402 Error in the cyclic data channel

Description:
During the execution of a function, the drive has shown not to be ready for
operation.
Cause:
This happens when you try to trigger functions on the drive which require
e.g. that
• the drive’s power is on
• the DRIVECOM state machine is up
E405 No data exchange possible via the field bus

Description:
Data exchange via the fieldbus is not possible.
Cause:
CANOpen:
1. The wrong baudrate is being used to go to the bus.
2. The bus cable is faulty.
3. The bus cable is too long for the baudrate that has been set.
Profibus:
1. The bus cable is faulty.
2. The bus cable is too long for the baudrate that has been set.
3. The master has not yet initialized the slave.
E408 Invalid addressing of MDT-data container A

This warning indicates an error during the index check in the multiplex
channel. During the cyclical data exchange, the index for the access to
the list S-0-0370, Configuration list for MDT data container is
monitored as to whether it points to a non-initialized field in the list. If it
does, this warning is generated.
Note: In fieldbus drives, the multiplex channel is used for internal

data exchange between controller and communications card.
E409 Invalid addressing of AT-data container A

This warning indicates an error during the index check in the multiplex
channel. During the cyclical data exchange, the index for the access to
the list S-0-0371, Configuration list for the AT data container is
monitored as to, whether it points to a non-initialized field in the list. If it
does, this warning is generated.
Note: In fieldbus drives, the multiplex channel is used for internal

data exchange between controller and communications card.
See also the functional description: "Checking the Indices"
E825 Overvoltage in power stage

The DC bus voltage is too high.
Cause:
1. During braking (decelerating): the energy regenerated from the
mechanical system via the motor was so high for a moment that it
could not be sufficiently dissipated to heat by the bleeder resistor. The
regenerated current could not be dissipated and therefore charged
the DC bus, so that the voltage has become too high.
2. The mains voltage (AC input) is too high.
Result:
In case of overvoltage, the motor is switched to torque-free operation. As
soon as the DC Bus voltage falls again below the maximum allowable
value, the controller will be turned on again.
Remedy:
For 1. Reduce the acceleration values.
Check the drive controller layout, if necessary.
Install an auxiliary bleeder, if necessary.
For 2. Check the mains supply voltage (AC/3phase).
⇒ Danger of high-voltage shock!

Care for protection against accidental touch.
WARNING
E826 Undervoltage in power section

If the bit 3 is set in the parameter P-0-0118, Power off on error, the
undervoltage is treated as "fatal warning“ with shutdown of the drive
operation. If the drive enable is on at the same time, and the DC bus
voltage indication goes down, the drive displays this warning.
Cause:
Switching off the power supply or a loss of mains while the drive enable is
on.
Remedy:
Switch off the drive enable before switching off the supply unit.
E829 Positive position limit exceeded

The drive has received a command value which resulted in an axis
standstill by setting the velocity command to zero. A class 1 diagnostic
error is not generated. The drive will automatically follow command values
that lead back into the allowed range. "Handle travel range exceeded as
warning" is set in bit 2 of parameter P-0-0090, Command value transmit
time (TMTSG).
Cause:
S-0-0049, Positive position limit value exceeded.
Remedy:
Enter command values which lead back into the allowed range.
Note: Only such command values will be accepted that lead back
into the allowed working range. With other command values,
E830 Negative position limit exceeded

which lead into the allowed range. "Handle travel range exceeded as
warning" is set in bit 2 of parameter P-0-0090, Travel limit parameter.
Cause:
S-0-0050, Negative travel limit value exceeded.
Remedy:
Note: Only such command values will be accepted that lead back
into the allowed working range. With other command values,
E831 Position limit reached during jog

If the position limit monitor is activated and the drive is “IN REFERENCE",
then it will be positioned on the position limit during movement by jogging.
If the drive is positioned on the position limit or beyond the position limit,
the drive stops and signals "Position limit value reached during jog".
Remedies:
1. 1. Move the motor back within the allowed travel area with the jog
function or
2. Turn off the position limit monitor.
See also the functional description: "Operating Mode: Jogging".
E834 Emergency-Stop
Pressing the emergency stop switch has caused the drive to perform the
error reaction that had been selected via the P-0-0119, Best possible
deceleration parameter. There is no error message issued to the
controller.
Cause:
The emergency stop switch was pressed.
Remedy:
Eliminate the malfunction that led to the activation of the emergency stop
switch. The warning will then disappear.
E843 Positive limit switch activated

that lead back into the allowed range. Bit 2 of P-0-0090, Travel limit
parameter is set to "Overtravelling is handled as a warning".
Cause:
The positive limit switch has been activated.
Remedy:
Enter command values that lead back into the allowed range.
See also the functional description: "Travel Zone Limit Switch Monitoring".
E844 Negative limit switch activated

that lead back into the allowed range. Bit 2 of P-0-0090, Travel limit
parameter is set to "Overtravelling is handled as a warning".
Cause:
The negative limit switch has been activated.
Remedy:
See also the functional description: "Travel Zone Limit Switch Monitoring".
E881 Mains fault

Cause:
The mains voltage has failed for at least three mains cycles during
operation.
Mains errors and undervoltage errors were set as fatal warnings in
parameter P-0-0118, Power off on error.
The drive switches the motor off.
Recovery:
Checked the mains connections to ensure that they are as specified in the
project planning manual.
See function description: "Current Limit".
E886 No ready signal from supply module

Cause:
Input BbN "Mains section readyl“ on the drive controller is at 24V, i.e., the
mains section connected is not issuing a ready to operate signal.
In parameter P-0-0118, Power off on error mains errors and
undervoltage errors were set as warnings.
The drive switches the motor off.
Recovery:
2. Check connection from mains section to input BbN on drive.
3. If the drive is not supplied by a separate mains section, then switch
the input monitor off.
See P-0-4062, Power supply monitor.

See function description: "Current Limit".
ECODRIVE03 FGP-03VRS Description of Diagnostic Letters B..., C..., D... and A... 5-1
5 Description of Diagnostic Letters B..., C..., D... and

A...
5.1 Command Diagnostic Messages B..., C... and D

The commands are used for control of complex features in the drive.
For example, the features "drive controlled homing procedure" or
"Communication Phase 4 Transition Check" are defined as commands.
Commands can start, interrupt or erase a primary control.
A parameter belongs to each command whereby the command can be
controlled by the parameter.
During the command operation, the diagnostic message "Cx" appears in
the H1 display where the x stands for the number of the command.
It can distinguish between 3 types of commands.
• Drive Commands
Command Types - Lead to an eventual automatic drive movement
- Can be started only through an inputted control enable
- Deactivates the active operating mode during its operation
• Monitor Commands
Activation or deactivation of monitors or features
• Management Commands
- Lead management tasks that are not interruptible
B100 Command Release motor holding brake

The command P-0-0542, Command Release motor holding brake has
been activated.
See also the functional description: "Motor Holding Brake".
B101 Command not enabled

The command P-0-0542, Command Release motor holding brake has
been activated without prior enabling via the parameter P-0-0538, Bit 8.
See also the functional description: "Motor Holding Brake".
B200 Brake check command

The command P-0-0542, Command to open motor holding brake was
activated.
5-2 Description of Diagnostic Letters B..., C..., D... and A... ECODRIVE03 FGP-03VRS
B201 Brake check only with drive enable

P-0-0541, B200 command brake monitor was activated and the drive
enable was not activated.
B202 Error during bedding in the brake

The brake monitor command tries to bed in the motor brake. This means
that the motor must be moved with closed holding brake. If the torque of
the motor is too small to move the motor with closed brake, then the
command error is generated.
Cause:
1. Torque of amplifier has been reduced.
2. Axis is mechanically jammed.
3. Weight load plus brake torque is bigger than motor peak torque.
Remedy:
on 1: remove reduction
on 2: eliminate jam
on 3: reduce weight load
B203 Brake torque too low

The motor moved when checking the brake torque during the command
monitor brake. The motor holding brake thus does not supply the nominal
torque.
Possible causes for the low holding torque:
1. Brake covered by oxidized layer due to storage
2. Brake covered by oil or lubricant
3. Brake is worn down.
Remedy:
on 1 Re-start "command brake monitor".
on 2 Re-start "command brake monitor". The command brake monitor
re-checks the brake torque again. If detected that the torque is
too low, then the brake is bedded in. The bedding of the brake
removes the oxidized layer or oil film. The brake should now be
able to generate sufficient torque.
on 3 If multiple tries result in the brake still not reaching the holding
torque, then the motor holding brake has to be replaced.
C100 Communication phase 3 transition check

The command S-0-0127, C1 Communication phase 3 transition check
has been activated.
See also the functional description: "S-0-0127, C100 Communication

phase 3 transition check"
C101 Invalid communication parameter (S-0-0021)

Cause:
Communications parameters which are needed to operate the drive in
communication phase 3 are invalid.
Remedy:
A list of the invalid parameters can be seen in parameter S-0-0021, List
of invalid op. data for comm. ph. 2. The invalid parameters must be
rewritten so they are correct.

phase 3 transition check".
C102 Limit error communication parameter (S-0-0021)

Cause:
Communications parameters, which are needed to operate the drive in
communication phase 3, are outside their limit values.
Remedy:
A list of the invalid parameters can be seen in parameter S-0-0021, List
of invalid op. data for comm. ph. 2. The invalid parameters must be
rewritten with values between the respective min. and the max. value to
be correct.

phase 3 transition check"
C104 Config. IDN for MDT not configurable

Cause:
Parameters which are missing in S-0-0188, List of configurable data in
MDT are kept in P-0-4081, Process data output description
Remedy:
• You must either set a priority telegram (Telegram type = 0..6) or
provide P-0-4081, process data output description with parameters.
These parameters are also contained in S-0-0188, List of
configurable data in the MDT.
Note: List parameters only allowed in multiplex channel.
See also the function description: "Profile Types"
C105 Configurated length > max. length for MDT

Cause:
The length of the configured data in MDT, which is determined by
P-0-4081, Real-time output object structure
exceeds the maximum permissible length S-0-0186, Length of the
configurable data record in the MDT.
Remedy:
• number of configured parameters in MDT (S-0-0024) must be
decreased
C106 Config. IDN for AT not configurable

Cause:
Parameters which are not contained in S-0-0187, List of configurable
data in AT can be seen in P-0-4080, Real-time input object structure
Remedy:
• P-0-4080, Real-time input object structure must have parameters
that are also in S-0-0187, List of configurable data in the AT.
Note: List parameters only allowed in multiplex channel.
C107 Configurated length > max. length for AT

Cause:
The length of the configured data record in the AT, that is defined via
P-0-4080, Real-time input object structure
exceeds the v maximum permissible S-0-0185, Length of the
configurable data record in the AT.
Remedy:
• number of configurated parameters in the AT (P-0-4080) must be
decreased
C112 TNcyc (S-0-0001) or TScyc (S-0-0002) error

Cause:
Only multiples of 1ms are permitted as valid values for S-0-0001, NC
Cycle time (TNcyc) and S-0-0002, SERCOS Cycle time (Tscyc). Here,
this is not the case.
Remedy:
S-0-0001, NC Cycle time (TNcyc) and S-0-0002, SERCOS Cycle time
(Tscyc) must be corrected. These parameters are determined by the
manufacturer of the control system and are specified by the SERCOS
interface.
C113 Relation TNcyc (S-0-0001) to TScyc (S-0-0002) error

Cause:
The value of S-0-0001, NC Cycle time (TNcyc) can only be equal to or
be a multiple of S-0-0002, SERCOS Cycle time (Tscyc). Here this is not
the case.
Remedy:
S-0-0001, NC Cycle time (Tncyc) and S-0-0002, SERCOS Cycle time
(Tscyc) must be corrected. These parameters are determined by the
manufacturer of the control system and are specified by the SERCOS
interface.
C114 T4 > TScyc (S-0-0002) - T4min (S-0-0005)

Cause:
The maximum permissible value for S-0-0007, Feedback acquisition
starting time (T4) is
S-0-0002, SERCOS Cycle time (Tscyc) -
S-0-0005, Minimum feedback acquisition time(T4min)
The value for S-0-0007, Feedback acquisition starting time (T4) is
incorrect.
Remedy:
Correct S-0-0007, Feedback acquisition starting time (T4). These
parameters are determined by the manufacturer of the control system and
are specified by the SERCOS interface.
C118 Order of MDT configuration wrong

The chronological order of processing the cyclical MDT data in the drive is
the same order in which the configurated ident numbers (IDN) are placed
in the parameter S-0-0024, Config. list of the master-data-telegram.
For the usage of the multiplex mode in the MDT, there are the parameters
• S-0-0360, MDT Data container A
• S-0-0368, Addressing for data container A
• S-0-0362, List index, MDT data container A
If more than one of these parameters is configured in the MDT, their

correct order is checked in the command S-0-0127, C100
Communication phase 3 transition check. The following rules must be
obeyed:
• S-0-0368, Addressing for data container A must be configured as
the first of the 3 parameters above.
• S-0-0360, MDT Data container A must be configured as the last of
the 3 parameters above.
If this is not the case, the drive generates the command error C118 Order
of MDT configuration wrong.
C200 Communication phase 4 transition check

Meaning:
The command S-0-0128, C200 Communication phase 4 transition
check has been activated.
See also the functional description "S-0-0128, C200 Communication
C201 Invalid parameter(s) (->S-0-0022)

Cause:
Parameters which will be necessary to operate the drive in
communications phase 4 are invalid. The invalid parameters can be seen
in S-0-0022, IDN list of invalid op. data for comm. ph. 3.
Remedy:
The parameters of S-0-0022, IDN list of invalid op. data for comm.
ph. 3 must be rewritten so they are correct.

C202 Parameter limit error (->S-0-0022)

Cause:
Parameters which are necessary to operate the drive in communications
phase 4 are outside of their minimum or maximum input values, or the
entered value can’t be processed (for bit bars). The incorrect parameters
are listed in S-0-0022, IDN list of invalid op. data for comm. ph. 3.
Remedy:
The parameters of S-0-0022, IDN list of invalid op. data for comm.
ph. 3 must be rewritten with correct values.

C203 Parameter calculation error (->S-0-0022)

Cause:
Parameters that are required for phase-4 operation (operating mode)
cannot be processed in that way. The incorrect parameters are listed in
S-0-0022, IDN List of Invalid Op. Data for Comm. Ph. 3.
Remedy:
Write correct values to the parameters in S-0-0022, IDN List of Invalid
Op. Data for Comm. Ph. 3.

C204 Motor type P-0-4014 incorrect

An MHD-, MKD or MKE motor (value 1 or 5) is entered into parameter
P-0-4014, Motor type. The appropriate abbreviation "MHD", "MKD", or
"MKE" however, was not found in parameter S-7-0141, Motor type in the
motor feedback data memory.
Cause:
1. Incorrect parameter set for type of motor.
2. The motor feedback memory cannot be read.
3. motor feedback - not connected
Remedy:
For 1. Enter the type of motor used in parameter P-0-4014, Motor type
For 2. Check feedback connection.
If feedback is defective, exchange motor.
See also the functional description: "Automatic Setting of the Motor Type
for Motors with Feedback Memory".
C210 Feedback 2 required (->S-0-0022)

Cause:
Values that require an optional encoder have been entered in S-0-0147,
Homing parameter or in the S-0-0032...35, Mode of Operation
parameters. However, 0 (not available) has been entered in the P-0-0075,
Interface Feedback 2, optional parameter.
The ident number of the parameter that requires the optional encoder is
entered in S-0-0022, IDN List of Invalid Op. Data for Comm. Ph. 3.
Remedy:
Modify S-0-0147, Homing parameter or the S-0-0032...35, Mode of
Operation parameters to utilization of the motor encoder instead of
optional encoder or set P-0-0075, Interface Feedback 2, optional to a
value different from 0 to activate the optional measuring system.

C211 Invalid feedback data (->S-0-0022)

Invalid data has been encountered when the parameters stored in the
motor feedback were read, or an error has occurred when the data was
read.
Causes:
1. Motor feedback cable not connected or defective
2. Motor feedback defective
3. Drive controller defective
Remedy:
Ref. 1. Check motor feedback cable; connect both sides
Ref. 2. Replace motor
Ref. 3. Replace amplifier

C212 Invalid amplifier data (->S-0-0022)

During drive initialization, the operating software accesses data from an
EEPROM in the drive controller. This error message is generated if the
attempt to read the data has failed.
Causes:
Defective hardware in the drive controller.
Remedy:
Replace drive controller.

C213 Position data scaling error

Cause:
The scaling parameters for position data permit the position data display
format to be selected. The drive-internal position data format depends on
the employed motor encoder and the encoder resolution. The factor used
for converting the position data from the drive-internal format into the
display format or vice versa is outside the allowable range, because either
• linear motor and rotary position scaling with motor reference, or
• rotary motor and linear position scaling with motor reference, or
• linear motor with modulo scaling has been selected; or
• the determined factor used for converting the position data from the
display format to the internal format, and vice versa, cannot be
represented.
Remedy:
Checking and correcting the relevant parameters, such as
• S-0-0076, Position data scaling type
• S-0-0077, Linear position data scaling factor
• S-0-0078, Linear position data scaling exponent
• S-0-0079, Rotational position resolution
• S-0-0116, Resolution of motor feedback
• S-0-0121, Input revolutions of load gear
• S-0-0122, Output revolutions of load gear
• S-0-0123, Feed constant
• P-0-0074, Interface feedback 1
• S-0-0277, Position feedback 1 type parameter

C214 Velocity data scaling error

Cause:
The scaling parameters for velocity data permit the velocity data display
format to be selected. The drive-internal velocity data format depends on
the employed motor encoder and the encoder resolution. The factor used
for converting the velocity data from the drive-internal format into the
display format or vice versa is outside the allowable range.
Remedy:
Checking and correcting the relevant parameters, such as
• S-0-0044, Velocity data scaling type
• S-0-0045, Velocity data scaling factor
• S-0-0046, Velocity data scaling exponent

C215 Acceleration data scaling error

Cause:
The display format of the acceleration data can be set using acceleration
scaling parameters. The drive-controlled format of the acceleration data is
dependent on what motor encoder and encoder resolution are used. The
factor for converting acceleration data from internal drive format to display
format (or vice-versa) is outside the allowable range.
Remedy:
Check and set the relevant parameters correctly as follows:
• S-0-0160, Acceleration data scaling type
• S-0-0161, Acceleration data scaling factor
• S-0-0162, Acceleration data scaling exponent

C216 Torque/force data scaling error

Cause:
The display format of the torque/force data can be set using torque/force
scaling parameters. The factor for converting torque data from drive-
controlled format to display format (or vice-versa) is outside the allowable
area.
Remedy:
Check and set the relevant parameters correctly as follows:
• S-0-0086, Torque/force data scaling type
• S-0-0093, Torque/force data scaling factor
• S-0-0094, Torque/force data scaling exponent
• S-0-0110, Amplifier peak current
• S-0-0111, Motor current at standstill

C217 Feedback1 data reading error

All MKD und MHD motors have a data memory in the feedback unit. From
there, settings for the encoder are read.
Cause:
During reading of the values from the feedback, an error has occurred.
Remedy:
Check feedback cable.
Change motor.

C218 Feedback 2 data reading error

The initialization of the measuring systems is done in the command
S-0-0128, C200 Communication phase 4 transition check. If the
measuring system to initialize has an intrinsic data memory, this memory
is read.
The error C218 Feedback 2 data reading error is generated, if an
additional optional encoder (encoder 2) is present and being evaluated
(P-0-0075 Feedback 2 type other than 0) and if an error is discovered
while reading the data.
Measuring systems with intrinsic data memory are :
• DSF/HSF/LSF and resolver, as well as
• measuring systems with Endat interface (from Heidenhain)
Cause:
1. Defective measurement system cable
2. Defective measurement system
Remedy:
For 1. Check the measurement system cable.
For 2. Exchange the measurement system.

C220 Feedback 1 initializing error

A number of tests are performed when the motor encoder is initialized. An
error was detected during this process. This error may be:
• Error while reading the angle rectification data
• Error while copying the angle rectification data
• Interruption of communication with the encoder
• Assembly error with the position of an initialization track
• Error while reading the analog signal of an initialization track
• Error in the pointer length of the analog signal of an initialization track
• Invalid offset between the high and low resolution track
• Error in the measuring system micro-controller
Cause:
1. Defective motor feedback cable
2. Defective motor feedback
3. Defective measurement system interface
Remedy:
For 1. Check the motor feedback cable.
For 3. Exchange the measuring system interface, if it is a module, or the
complete drive controller.

C221 Feedback 2 initializing error

Several checks are performed during the initialization of an optional
encoder. An error has been detected during this process. This error may
be:
• Error while reading the angle rectification data
• Error while copying the angle rectification data
• Interruption of communication with the encoder
• Assembly error with the position of an initialization track
• Error while reading the analog signal of an initialization track
• Error in the pointer length of the analog signal of an initialization track
• Invalid offset between the high and low resolution track
• Error in the measuring system micro-controller
• With DAG 1.2: external 24V set for SSI interface
Cause:
1. External encoder cable defective.
2. Defective feedback.
3. Defective measurement system interface.
Note: If this warning occurs in combination with an EnDat feedback

device then the feedback device is defective.
Remedy:
For 1. Check the optional feedback cable.
For 2. Exchange feedback.
For 3. Exchange the measuring system interface (module).

C223 Input value for max. range too high

Cause:
An internal position resolution has been selected via the S-0-0278,
Maximum travel range parameter that no longer guarantees a correct
commutation of the motor.
Remedy:
Select a smaller value for the S-0-0278, Maximum travel range
parameter.

C227 Modulo range error

Cause:
The marginal conditions for modulo processing were not maintained.
See functional description: "Modulo Processing-Limiting Conditions".
C234 Encoder combination not possible

Cause:
The encoder interface that has been selected in the P-0-0075, Interface
Feedback 2, optional parameter cannot be supported by the drive; it has
already been allocated to the motor encoder.
Remedy:
Select another optional encoder.
See also the functional description: "Determining the Encoder Interface of

the Optional Encoder"
C235 Load-side motor encoder with inductance motor only

Cause:
The functionality of the optional encoder can be defined in the P-0-0185,
Function of opt. encoder parameter. If ’load-side motor encoder’ has
been selected as the function of the optional encoder, that function will
only be supported for asynchronous motors.
Remedy:
Set the P-0-4014, Motor type parameter according to the employed
motor type.
Check the P-0-0185, Function of opt. encoder parameter.

C236 Feedback 1 required (P-0-0074)

Cause:
A motor encoder is not required (P-0-0074 = 0) if a load-sided motor
encoder has been selected via the P-0-0185, Function of opt. encoder
parameter. However, S-0-0147, Homing parameter or the S-0-0032...35,
Mode of Operation parameters contain values that require a motor
encoder.
Remedy:
Change S-0-0147, Homing parameter or the S-0-0032...35, Mode of
Operation parameters such that they are suitable for using an optional
encoder.
Enter a value ≠ 0 in the P-0-0074, Interface feedback 1 parameter to
activate the motor encoder.

C238 Wrong function of encoder 2

Cause:
An operating mode needs encoder 2 as control encoder.
Encoder 2 is, however, being used as master axis encoder or measuring
wheel encoder.
Recovery:
1. Only operating modes with motor encoder in the operating mode
parameter S-0-0032, S-0-0033, S-0-0034, S-0-0035, have been
entered.
2. If a mode needs encoder 2 for control, then encoder 2 must be used
as control encoder or spindle encoder. (P-0-0185 =0 or 4).
C241 Binary encoder resolution necessary

If the second encoder is to be used as a master position encoder, then
the encoder resolution must be set such that it is an exactly representable
binary value. e.g. 2, 4, 8, 16 etc.
C300 Command Set absolute measuring

Command P-0-0012, C300 Command ’Set absolute measurement’ was
activated by the control system in use.
See also the functional description: "Setting the Absolute Dimension"
C302 Absolute measuring system not installed

Command P-0-0012, C300 Command ’Set absolute measurement’ was
started without an absolute measuring system being present.
The command cannot be processed because no absolute measuring
system is available.
Cause:
1. The command should not have been activated.
2. The contacted motor or the external measurement system was not
executed as an absolute encoder.
Remedy:
For 1. Stop execution of the command.
For 2. Equip the motor or external measurement system with an
absolute encoder function.
See also the functional description: "Setting the Absolute Dimension"
C400 Switching to parameter mode

The command for transition into parameter mode. Before editing
parameters that can be edited only in parameter mode, this command
must be processed.
See also the functional description: "Parametrization Mode - Operating

Mode"
C401 Drive active, switching not allowed

Cause:
The command C400 Command: Switch to parameter mode has been
started, although the drive enable is on.
Remedy:
End the command and turn off the drive enable, then the command can
be started again.

Mode"
C402 Only allowed without master

Cause:
The command P-0-4023, C400 Communication phase 2 transition was
started even though the command communications interface (SERCOS
or fieldbus) is active (P-0-4086 = 00b).
The command can only be executed if the command communications
interface (SERCOS or fieldbus ) is inactive (P-0-4086 = xx1b).
• the status machine of the fieldbus has been run up.
Remedy:
Bring status machine of fieldbus back to basic status prior to command
start. (The bus connector can be pulled to do so!)
C500 Reset class 1 diagnostic, error reset

The command for clearing errors, S-0-0099, C500 Reset class 1
diagnostic was activated by the control system in use. All drive internal
errors are cleared. But before that happens, the cause of the error must
have been cleared.
See also the functional description: "Clearing Errors"
C600 Drive controlled homing procedure command

Command S-0-0148, C600 Drive controlled homing procedure
command has been activated by the control system in use.
See also the functional description: "Drive-Controlled Homing"
C601 Homing only possible with drive enable

Cause:
The controller enabling signal was not active when the program was
started. This is not permitted.
Remedy:
1. Switch on the controller enable signal.
2. Start the command again.
See also the functional description: "Sequence control Drive-Controlled

Homing"
C602 Distance home switch - reference mark erroneous

Cause:
The evaluation of the homing switch has been activated. The distance
between the positive homing switch edge and the reference mark that
shall be interpreted is outside the valid range.
Remedy:
Read the value from the S-0-0298, Reference cam shift by ... parameter
and enter it in the S-0-0299, Home switch offset parameter.
See also the functional description: "Connection of the Home switch"
C604 Homing of absolute encoder not possible

Cause:
If, with absolute encoder, the homing command was called without having
done the command P-0-0012, Set absolute measuring before, the
homing command is cancelled with this error.
If the encoder had been referenced with the "Set absolute measuring“,
then the homing command would give you a possibility to trigger a
positioning move to the reference point.
Remedy:
Home the absolute encoder with the command "Set absolute
measuring“.
See also the functional description: "Possible Error Messages During

"Drive-Controlled Homing""
C606 Reference mark not detected

Cause:
If
• a distance-coded or
• an incremental measuring system with zero switch
are referenced, then the maximum travel distance during the referencing
procedure is known. If no reference mark is detected over the course of
this path, then error message C606, Reference mark not detected is
generated and referencing is aborted with the generation of an error.
Note: The traversing path of linear non-distance coded measuring

system with zero switch evaluation is not known if „0“ is
entered in parameter P-0-0153, Optimal distance home
switch - reference mark. This is generally the case if the
linear scale has no reference marks at equal and known
distances.
Remedy:
• Check the measuring system to be referenced as well as all cabling.
• Check for correct parametrization.
• Check the correction reference mark detection using command
P-0-0014, D500 Command determine marker position
C700 Basic load

With motors of the MHD, MKD and MKE series, the controller parameters
for the connected motor that are stored in the controller are set to their
default values by activating the controller parameters that are stored in
the motor feedback. The drive controller issues the C7 message to
indicate that the C700 Basic load command has been activated via the
command parameter S-0-0262, C700 Command basic load.
Cause:
The command C700 Basic load has been activated.
See also the functional description "Load Default"
C702 Default parameters not available

With motors of the MHD, MKD and MKE series, adapting the control
loops to the connected digital drive is done by activating the speed
controller parameters that are stored in the motor feedback. The drive
controller employs the C702 Default parameters not available message
to signal that the S-0-0262, C700 Command basic load command has
been activated, but that there is no data memory at the connected motor.
Remedy:
Order the parameter sheet of the employed motor from the Rexroth
Indramat Service, and enter the parameters.
See also the functional description: "Error Conditions of the Load Default
Settings Procedure"
C703 Default parameters invalid

Cause:
The default parameters are read from the motor feedback data memory.
At least one of these parameters is invalid.
Remedy:
Check the connection to the motor feedback. Exchange the motor if
necessary.
Settings Procedure"
C704 Parameters not copyable

Cause:
The default parameters in use are not compatible with this software
version.
Remedy:
Please contact Indramat. Explain, which software version, which device
and which motor type you have.
Settings Procedure"
C800 Default parameter load

How to start the command:
This command can be started in 2 ways:
1. When "PL" is displayed on the drive controller (appears after a
change in firmware version), by pressing the S1 button beneath the
display.
2. By starting the P-0-4094, C8 Default parameter load
What the command does:

All the parameters are cleared and preset with their default (initial) value.
Process blocks and control loop settings are overwritten, too.
Default parameters:
Default values are stored in the drive for all parameters which are listed in
S-0-0192, IDN-list of backup operation data. They define a basic state
of the drive that permits the drive to be switched "ready for operation"
(display "bb“). Mechanical components like gear and load as well as the
control loop settings therefore are not taken into consideration.
See also the functional description: "Basic parameter block".
C801 Parameter default value erroneous (-> S-0-0021)

Cause:
During the execution of P-0-4094, C800 Command Base-parameter
load, a default value that has been stored in the drive was recognized as
incorrect. The related parameter is entered in the S-0-0021, IDN-list of
invalid op. data for comm. Ph. 2.
See also the functional description: "Basic parameter block"
C802 Locked with password

The parameter S-0-0267, Password offers the possibility to set a write
protection for the drive parameters. The diagnostic message C705
Locked with password indicates, that the command P-0-4094, C800
Command Base-parameter load has been started, although the drive
parameters are protected with the customer password.
See also the functional description: "Basic parameter block"
D300 Command adjust commutation

A correctly adjusted commutation offset is mandatory for the operation of
synchronous motors. The "D3“ message indicates that the command has
been activated, that is used for determining the commutation offset.
Cause:
The commutation setting command has been activated.
See also the functional description: "Determining commutation offset"
D301 Drive not ready for commutation command

Meaning:
The drive must be in torque control mode when the "D3“ command is
started.
Cause:
Activate torque control and start the command again.
D302 Torque/Force too small to move

The command D3 Command adjust commutation has been started. To
perform this, the motor must move. But it doesn’t move.
Cause:
1. The torque is too small to overcome mechanical resistances (friction
or weight).
2. The motor is blocked mechanically.
3. Motor movement and encoder rotation direction are contradictory to
each other.
Remedy:
1. Increase the S-0-0092, Torque/Force limit bipolar so that the motor
overcomes the mechanical resistances and can turn. Check also
P-0-0109, Torque/Force peak limit; this parameter value should be at
least as great as S-0-0092.
2. Clear the jamming. Check also the brake.
3. At the motor connection, switch 2 phases or turn rotational direction of
encoder ( Parameter S-0-0277, position encoder type parameter 1 ).
Note: For devices with analog inputs, the torque can be limited via
an analog torque reduction.
D303 Drive in control at start of command

If the drive controller is in control, then it is not possible to execute
command P-0-0524, D300 Commutation adjustment command.
D304 Error in offset calculation

The commutation offset could not be correctly determined because the
values were wrong.
D305 Drive enable refused

At the command P-0-0524, D300 Commutation adjustment command
the drive itself applies the drive enable. This procedure failed.
D306 Power is off

If the power is off, then it is not possible to execute command P-0-0524,
D300 Commutation adjustment command.
D307 Drive does not move

Command P-0-0524, D300 Commutation adjustment command was
terminated with an error.
D308 No adjustment with asynchronous motor

Commutation offset determination is not possible with an asynchronous
motor.
D309 Proceed to phase 4

If the drive controller is not in phase 4 (bb), then it is not possible to
executed command P-0-0524, D300 Commutation adjustment
command.
D310 Input master password

No master password was input.
D311 Commutation offset could not be determined.

The Automatic Commutation Adjustment has tried to determine the
commutation offset. That has failed.
Cause:
The motor could not move freely enough.
Remedy:
Check whether the motor is blocked.
D312 Motion range exceeded during commutation

A range of +/- 1 pole pair distance is defined, within which the axis may
move during the Automatic Commutation adjustment. If this range is
exceeded, this error message appears.
Cause:
1. The drive enable has been set while the axis was still in motion.
2. The axis has been moved by a mechanical force.
3. Parameters P-0-0560 Commutation adjustment current and P-0-0562
Commutation adjustment cycle time are set too high. Possibly the
mechanical properties of the axis, like friction or weight load, have
changed.
Remedy:
1. Wait until the axis stands still and set the drive enable once again.
2. Inhibit the influence of the mechanical force.
3. Reduce the parameter values for P-0-0560 Commutation adjustment
current and P-0-0562 Commutation adjustment cycle time. You can
also set them to the default values P-0-0560 Commutation
adjustment current = 25 % and P-0-0562 Commutation adjustment
cycle time = 4 milliseconds. Afterwards, start the command D300
commutation adjustment to evaluate once again the optimal
parameters.
See also the functional description: "Synchronous Motors".
D400 Positive stop drive procedure command

When the positive stop drive procedure command is activated, all
controller monitoring which would result in an error message for class 1
diagnostic caused by blocking the drive with a positive stop is turned off.
Cause:
Command D400 Positive stop drive procedure command was
activated.
See also the functional description: "Positive stop drive procedure"
D401 ZKL1-Error at command start

Cause:
A class 1 diagnostic error was discovered while starting the command
"Positive stop drive procedure" As a result, the command could not be
executed.
Remedy:
Eliminate the cause of the error, clear the error, and start the command
again.
See also the functional description: "Positive stop drive procedure"
D500 Command Get mark position

The P-0-0014, D500 Command determine marker position command
can be used for checking the correct acquisition and position of the
reference marker of an incremental measuring system. The "d5“ display
shows that the command has been activated.
Cause:
The Determine marker position command has been activated.
See also the functional description: "Functional principle of command

detect marker position"
D501 Incremental encoder required

Cause:
The command has been started for a measuring system that does not
possess real reference markers. These include measuring systems such
as DSF, EnDat, SSI or resolver measuring systems.
Remedy:
Check whether the correct encoder has been selected in S-0-0147,
Homing parameter.
Employ an encoder system with real reference markers.
See also the functional description: "Functional principle of command

detect marker position"
D600 Cancel reference point procedure command

Meaning:
The reference of the encoder that has been selected via S-0-0147,
Homing parameter is canceled.
Cause:
The D600 Cancel reference point procedure command has been
activated.
See also the functional description: "Drive-Controlled Homing"
D700 Parking axis command

The command permits one or more drives of a drive package to be
stopped without error messages being issued to the controller and/or the
power supply module. The remaining drives of the package can be
handled without any restrictions.
Cause:
The S-0-0139, D700 Command parking axis command has been
activated.
D701 Parking axis only while drive is disabled

The start of command "Command Parking Axis" is only permitted without
drive enable applied.
If the command is activated with an applied drive enable, then the drive
generates command error D701 Parking axis only while drive is
disabled.
D800 Command measuring wheel mode

Meaning:
The command is active.
The position loop is closed with encoder 1 and 2.
Control loop monitoring is de-activated.
Cause:
The P-0-0220, D800 Command measuring wheel operation mode
command has been activated.
D801 Measuring wheel operation not possible

Definition:
The measuring wheel mode command cannot be conducted.
Cause:
• Optional encoder not parametrized (P-0-0075)
• Use of optional encoders as measuring wheel encoder has not been
parametrized (P-0-0185 =3).
D900 Command automatic loop tuning

Description:
The start of this command means that an automatic control loop setting is
executed in the drive if the drive is in the loop at command start, i.e., the
drive enable signal is applied.
See also Function description "Automatic Control Loop Settings"
The start of this command can trigger a movement if

drive enable and drive start are at the drive.
The drive conducts autonomous movements within the
range defined by both limits.
The E-stop sequence function and the travel range limit
switch must be guaranteed and checked.
See also Function description:

"Safety Instructions for Electric Servo Drives and
WARNING Controls"
During command D9, the drive autonomously conducts

motions, i.e., without external command value.
D901 Start requires drive enable

Description:
To ensure that the drive is in the loop when starting the command
P-0-0162, D9 automatic control loop setting, such is queried at
command start.
Cause:
Drive enable not set at command start (NO-RF)
Remedy:
Set drive enable and restart command.
See also the functional description: "Automatic Control Loop Settings"
D902 Motor feedback data not valid

Description:
At the start of the automatic control loop setting (P-0-0162), the motor
parameters
• torque constant
• rated current of unit are read out of the feedback.
Cause:
• One of the above feedback data has a value smaller than or equal to
zero (<=0). This means that the controller parameter is incorrectly
calculated.
• Motor without feedback data storage.
Remedy:
If known, write the correct values back into the parameter or contact
Indramat Customer Service to obtain the feedback data valid for your
motor.
In the worst case, it may be necessary to replace the motor.
D903 Inertia detection failed

Description:
At the start of the automatic control loop setting, the load moment of
inertia is determined with an "oscillation attempt".
This means that the speed change and the motor current must exceed a
minimum value during acceleration or deceleration to guarantee a
sensible and sufficiently precise calculation of the moment of inertia.
Cause:
• drive acceleration too low
• number of measured value too small for automatic control loop setting
• motor speed too low
• load moment of inertia too big
Remedy:
• increase bipolar torque/force value S-0-0092
• increase pos. accel S-0-0260
• increase pos. speed S-0-0259
• increase feedrate override S-0-0108
See also Function description: "Prerequisites for starting the automatic

control loop settings"
D904 Gain adjustment failed

Description:
In exceptional cases, difficulties in the automatic control loop setting may
arise. This means that an automatic setting is not possible. Standard or
default values must therefore be loaded into the drive.
Cause:
• oscillating mechanical systems (resonance)
• high level of interference in the encoder signal
Remedy:
Satisfactory results can sometimes be achieved by starting the command
P-0-0162, D9 automatic control loop setting with a large P-0-0163,
damping factor for automatic control loop setting, i.e., low dynamics.
This value can be reduced until the control loop behaves as needed.
If even then control loop settings remain unsuccessful, then the setting
must be manual.
D905 Travel range invalid, P-0-0166 & P-0-0167

Description:
Before starting an automatic control loop setting, both travel range limits,
i.e., upper and lower, must be defined.
When starting command P-0-0162, D9 automatic control loop setting
the number values are automatically checked for validity. It is checked if
the traversing path is large enough and if sensible values have been
entered.
Cause:
• P-0-0167, upper traversing range smaller than P-0-0166, lower
traversing range
• Maximum traversing path (P-0-0169, Travel distance for autom.
control loop adjust) is less than 6 motor rotations and thus too small
to start the automatic control loop setting.
Remedy:
• clear command error by ending the command
• a) input new limits whereby:upper > lower limits
b) redefine limits to define a larger traversing range
• restart command with sensible traversing range

D906 Travel range exceeded

Description:
During automatic control loop setting, there is a constant monitoring of the
valid traversing range P-0-0166 and P-0-0167.
Cause:
If only one of these limits is exceeded, then command error D906 is
generated and the drive brought to standstill speed controlled.
Possible causes:
• actual position outside of defined traversing range
• limits redefined after command start
Remedy:
• clear command error and end command
• redefine limits so that the actual position is within defined traversing
range
• retart command using sensible traversing range

5.2 Status diagnostic messages
A002 Communication phase 2

For field bus and SERCOS devices, the control demands via the master
communication "communication phase 2", or the drive has been switched
to phase 2 by the command P-0-4023, C400 Communication phase 2
transition. Therefore, the drive is in the "parameter mode". In this mode,
many parameters are editable, which can no more be edited in
"communication phase 4" ("operation mode").
In this phase, usually
• for field bus and SERCOS devices, the communication parameters
are transferred from the control to the drive and
• the functions Load and Save parameters ("file services“) are
performed when needed.
Before switching to communication phase 3 is possible, the command

S-0-0127, C100 Communication phase 3 transition check must be
done. In this command, the drive checks e.g. the validity of the
parameters needed for the communication phase 3.
After successful execution of the command, the control switches the drive
to comm. phase 3 (with field bus and SERCOS devices), or the drive
switches by itself to phase 3 at the end of the command.

Mode".
A003 Communication phase 3

For field bus and SERCOS devices, the control demands via the master
communication "communication phase 3", or the drive has been switched
to phase 3 by the command S-0-0127, C100 Communication phase 3
transition check. The drive is in the "restricted parameter mode". In this
mode, still many parameters are editable too, which can no more be
edited in "communication phase 4" ("operation mode").
Before switching to communication phase 4 is possible, the command

S-0-0128, C200 Communication phase 4 transition check must be
done. In this command, the drive checks e.g. the validity of the
parameters needed for the communication phase 4 ("operation mode").
After successful execution of the command, the control switches the drive
to comm. phase 4 (with field bus and SERCOS devices), or the drive
switches by itself to phase 4 at the end of the command.

Mode".
A010 Drive HALT
Note: This diagnosis appears with fieldbus drives is the status

machine is in "ready to operate" mode.
Description:
The Drive-Halt feature is for decelerating the axis to standstill at defined
acceleration and defined jerk.
In Jog mode S-0-0260, Positioning Acceleration is used
for acceleration and S-0-0193, Positioning Jerk is used.
In Velocity control and in Torque control mode, the drive is decelerated
to standstill by setting the velocity command to 0 and using the max.
torque.
See also the functional description: "The Functional Principle of Drive

Halt".
A012 Control and power sections ready for operation

The drive is supplied with control voltage, and the power is switched
on. The drive is ready to deliver power.
A013 Ready for power on

The drive is supplied with a control voltage, and there are no errors in
the drive controller.
The drive is ready to be turned on with power.

Mode".
A100 Drive in TORQUE control

The drive is in the torque control operating mode. It follows the torque
command value sequence set by the control system.
See also the functional description: "Operating Mode: Torque Control".
A101 Drive in VELOCITY control

The drive is in the velocity control operating mode. It follows the velocity
command value sequence set by the control system. The velocity control
loop is closed in the drive.
See also the functional description: "Operating Mode: Velocity Control".
A102 Position mode with encoder 1

The drive is in position control mode. The position loop is closed in the
drive by a position encoder. The control system only sets the position
command value sequence; the drive follows the command value with a
systematical lag (following error).
Encoder 1 indicates that the position encoder is installed on the motor
shaft (indirect measurement of the axis position).
See also the functional description: "Operating Mode: Position Control".
A103 Position mode with encoder 2

command value sequence; the drive follows the command value with a
systematical lag (following error).
Encoder 2 indicates that the position encoder is installed on the machine
axis (direct axis position measurement).
A104 Position mode lagless, encoder 1

command value sequence; the drive follows the command value without
following error (lagless)
shaft (indirect measurement of axis position).
A105 Position control lagless, feedback 2

command value sequence; the drive follows the command value without
following error (lagless).
A106 Drive controlled interpolation, encoder 1

The drive receives a position command value from the control system
which is identical to the target position of the travel path. Then the drive
generates (interpolates) an internal position command value sequence,
which uses the control system to maintain maximum values for jerk,
velocity and acceleration sequences.
The drive moves with a systematical lag (following error) to the target
position.

Interpolation".
A107 Drive controlled interpolation, encoder 2

The drive moves with a systematical lag (following error) to the target
position.

Interpolation".
A108 Drive controlled interpolation, lagless, encoder 1

The drive moves without following error (lagless) to the target position.

Interpolation".
A109 Drive controlled interpolation, lagless, encoder 2

The drive moves without following error (lagless) to the target position.

Interpolation".
A110 Velocity synchronization, virtual master drive

The drive is in velocity control. The command velocity is determined in
the drive taking the ratio as well as master axis position into account.
Virtual master axis means that the master axis position is computed by
the control.
See also the functional description: "Operating mode: velocity

synchronization with virtual master axis"
A111 Velocity synchronization, real master drive

Description:
The drive is in speed control. The speed command value is derived from
the master axis position. The master axis position is generated from the
incremental encoder signals of the master axis encoder inputs.
See also the functional description: "Operating mode: velocity

synchronisation with real master axis"
A112 Phase synchronization, encoder 1, virtual master drive

The drive is in position control. The position control loop is closed in the
drive via a position encoder. The position command value is fixed in the
drive taking ratio and master axis position into account.
The drive follows the command value with lag distance.
Encoder 1 means that the position encoder is mounted on the motor
Virtual master axis means that the master axis position is fixed by the
control.
See also the functional description: "Operating mode: phase

synchronisation with virtual master axis"
A113 Phase synchronization, encoder 2, virtual master drive

Encoder 2 means that the position encoder is mounted on the motor shaft
(direct measurement of axis position).
control.

A114 Phase synchronization, encoder 1, real master drive

Real master axis means that the master axis position is derived from the
incremental encoder signals.

synchronization with real master axis"
A116 Phase synchr. lagless, encoder 1, virtual master drive

control.

A117 Phase synchr. lagless, encoder 2, virtual master drive

shaft (direct measurement of axis position).
control.

A118 Phase synchr. lagless, encoder 1, real master drive

Description:
The drive is in lag-free position control. The position command value is
calculated based on the master axis position which is derived from the

synchronization with real master axis"
A128 Cam shaft, encoder 1, virtual master drive

The drive is cam mode. The function is derived from the mechanical cam
principle. This includes a fixed position relationship between master and
slave axes. The position command values are listed in the table and can
be accessed using the master axis position.
The drive complies with the command value with lag distance.
Encoder 1 means that the position encoder is mounted to the motor shaft
(indirect measurement of axis position).
the control.
See also the functional description: "Operating mode: electronic cam

shaft with virtual master axis"
A129 Cam shaft, encoder 2, virtual master drive

Encoder 2 means that the position encoder is mounted to the machine
axis (direct measurement of axis position).
the control.

A130 Cam shaft, encoder 1, real master drive

Real master axis means that the master axis position is derived from

shaft with real master axis"
A132 Cam shaft, lagless, encoder 1, virt. master drive

The drive follows the command value without lag.
the control.

A133 Cam shaft, lagless, encoder 2, virt. master drive

Encoder 2 means that the position encoder is mounted to the machine
axis (direct measurement of axis position).
the control.

A134 Cam shaft, lagless, encoder 1, real master drive

The drive complies with the command value without lag.
Real master axis means that the master axis position is derived from the

shaft with real master axis"
A150 Drive controlled positioning, encoder 1

In the S-0-0282, Positioning command parameter, the drive receives a
distance specification from the controller. When bit 0 of the S-0-0346,
Positioning command latch parameter is toggled, this distance is
summed up to the value in S-0-0258, Target position. In order to get
from the current position to the new target position, the drive now
generates (interpolates) an internal position command value curve. This is
done taking the limit values of velocity, acceleration, and jerk in the
parameters
• S-0-0259, Positioning Velocity
• S-0-0260, Positioning Acceleration
• S-0-0193, Positioning Jerk
into account.
The drive approaches the target position with a position lag that is
proportional to the velocity.
Encoder 1 means that the position encoder that is attached to the load is
used for closing the position control loop (direct axis position
measurement).
See also the functional description: "Operating Mode: Drive Controlled

Positioning".
A151 Drive controlled positioning, encoder 1, lagless

parameters
into account.
measurement).

Positioning".
A152 Drive controlled positioning, encoder 2

parameters
into account.
The drive approaches the target position with a position lag that is
proportional to the velocity.
measurement).

Positioning".
A153 Drive controlled positioning, encoder 2, lagless

parameters
• S-0-0259, Positioning velocity
• S-0-0260, Positioning acceleration
• S-0-0193, Positioning jerk
into account.
Encoder 2 means that the position encoder is attached to the motor shaft
(indirect measurement of the axis position).

Positioning".
A206 Process block mode, encoder 1

The drive performs a closed loop position control with systematical lag.
The actual value comes from the encoder 1 (motor encoder). The
command value profile is generated in the drive.
Target position, velocity, acceleration and jerk are determined by a pre-
programmed process block. Depending on P-0-4019, Process block
mode, the target position is interpreted as an absolute value or as a
relative distance to move.
A207 Process block mode lagless, encoder 1

The drive performs a closed loop position control without lag. The actual
value comes from the encoder 1 (motor encoder). The command value
profile is generated in the drive.
A208 JOG mode positive

The drive moves with a jogging velocity (P-0-4030) in the positive
direction. The motor is turning clockwise, when viewing the motor shaft.
See also the functional description:"Operating Mode: Jogging"
A210 Process block mode, encoder 2

The drive performs a closed loop position control with systematical lag.
The actual value comes from the encoder 2 (ext. encoder). The command
value profile is generated in the drive.
A211 Process block mode lagless, encoder 2

The drive performs a closed loop position control without lag. The actual
value comes from the encoder 2 (ext. encoder). The command value
profile is generated in the drive.
A218 JOG mode negative

The drive moves with a jogging velocity (P-0-4030) in the negative
direction. The motor is turning counter clockwise, when viewing the motor
shaft.
See also the functional description:"Operating Mode: Jogging"
A400 Automatic drive check and adjustment

Diagnosis A400 is a group diagnosis for various system states. It is used
in drive checks and adjustments. A through diagnosis is automatically run
when the drive enable is switched on and off.
Drive checks and adjustments include systems states that are run
through independent on parametrization.
• sequence of holding brake delay time (see P-0-0526, Brake control
delay)
• structure of air gap field (is asynchronous motor)
• automatic determination of commutation offset (if synchronous motor
with incremental measuring system)
Depending on parametrization, the following system status is checked.

• Automatic brake monitor (see P-0-0538, Motor function parameter
1)
A401 Drive deceleration to standstill

The drive
• is brought to standstill as defined in parameter P-0-0119, Best
possible deceleration or
• carries out "velocity command value equals zero" after a travel range
error has occurred.
(see also functional description “General Instructions for Installation/

Definition of Terms, Introduction / Error".)
A800 Unknown operation mode

There is no diagnosis for the activated operation mode.
5.3 Diagnostic messages for basic initialization and after fatal

System errors
Diagnostic Message Display: -0

The writable data storage of the drive controller is tested for its functional
capability.
If an error is detected, E2 is displayed.

The hardware of the amplifier is beig initialized.

Cause:
The control supply voltage of the encoder is missing.
Remedy:
Exchange the hardware.

Initializing the parameters from the non volatile memory and calculating
the respective data depending from the parameter contents.

Initializing and checking the command communication.

Initializing the system control.

Starting the system.
Diagnostic Message Display: (2 dots)

Causes:
1. Programming mode
2. The prozessor does not run at all because of hardware fault.
Remedies:
For 1. Reload firmware program by Indramat customer service.
For 2. Exchange the hardware.
Diagnostic Message Display: E1

Cause:
Processor fault, caused by static discharge, program error or hardware
fault. More information is available via a terminal connected to the RS-232
interface.
Remedy:
Switch the amplifier off and on again; if the fault is still present, exchange
the hardware. In any case inform the customer service.

Cause:
Test of the RAM on the programming module has shown an error. RAM
defective or not plugged properly.
Remedy:
Switch off, check the plug connection and switch on again; if the error
happens agains, exchange the firmware module.

Cause:
st
Caused by a hardware fault or by a static discharge, the 1 watchdog of
the amplifier has triggered.
Remedy:
Switch the amplifier off and on again; if E3 appears again, exchange the
amplifier. In any case inform the customer service. Please explain the
exact circumstances under which the error occurred.

Cause:
nd
Caused by a hardware fault or by a static discharge, the 2 watchdog of
the amplifier has triggered.
Remedy:
Switch the amplifier off and on again; if E4 appears again, exchange the
amplifier. In any case inform the customer service.

Cause:
Test of the dual-port-RAM for command communication failed. Maybe
the hardware for command communication is not plugged on properly.
Remedy:
Check the plug connection; if OK, exchange the amplifier.
5.4 Operation Status

Hereafter, the possible states of operation are listed alphabetically. These
are shown on the H1 display of the device.
bb
"Ready for operation"
See also: A013 Ready for power on.
Ab
"Drive is ready"
See also: A012 Control and power sections ready for operation.
AC
"Drive Automatic Check"
See also: A400 Automatic drive check and adjustment
AE
"Drive Error Reaction"
See also: A401 Drive deceleration to standstill
AF
"Drive enable"
According to the operation mode in use, you will find a more exact
description of the display "AF" under the respective state diagnosis
A101..A800.
AH
"Drive Halt"
See also: A010 Drive HALT.
Jb
"Jog backward"
See also: A218 Jog negative
JF
"Jog Forward"
See also: A208 Jog positive
P2
"Phase 2"
See also: A002 Communication phase 2.
P3
"Phase 3"
See also: A003 Communication phase 3.
PL
"Basic Parameter Load"
See also: F209 PL Load parameter default values
UL
"Basic Load"
See also: F208 UL The motor type has changed
Notes
ECODRIVE03 FGP-03VRS Replacing or Exchanging Drive Components 6-1
6 Replacing or Exchanging Drive Components

The diagnostic display of ECODRIVE enables an aimed and effective
problem search in order to:
• avoid production downtimes due to extensive searches in individual

units and repairs of units on the machine
• assume operations without extensive assembly and adjustments
• to quickly eliminate the problem, and replace the defective component
When returning a defective unit to Rexroth Indramat Customer Service,

please complete the Fault Report in its entirety. This fault report is at the
end of this section and may be copied for your convenience.
Note: The new drive components must have the same type
designations as the old! To ensure this, register the entire type
designation when requesting a replacement part.
Position of the type plates:
The type plate of the DKC controller is on the front of the housing. It lists
all significant data.
The type plate of the MKD motors on the right side of the motor (when
looking onto the drive shaft, terminal box of the motor cable on top).
Standard cables are labelled (cable mark). It bears the order number an
the length of the cable.
6-2 Replacing or Exchanging Drive Components ECODRIVE03 FGP-03VRS
Specifications for model label
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
11121314 1516 1718 5 6 7 8

DKC _._ - _ _ _ _ - _
1 2 3 4
Typenschild
Barcode
S.No .: _ _ _ _ _ _
Barcode
H1
S1
S3 0 1
S2 0 1
9 9
2
8
8
3
3
7
7
4 4
6 5 6 5
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
Pre- formed engine performance cable
INDRAMAT - cable
IKS _ _ _
No.:
1) length: m
2)
Pre- formed engine feedback cable
2) INDRAMAT - cable
IKG _ _ _
No.:
1) length: m
_______-___-______/____
Hardware- H1 Software-
serialnumber S1 serialnumber
S3 0 1
S2 0 1
9 9
2
2
8
8
3
3
7
4 4
6 5 6 5
FWA-ECODR3 _-_ _ _-_ _VRS-MS
1. Pre- formed cables made by INDRAMAT (with connector) are identified with a
model label. The label provides the ordering information (IKS 103 for the Feedback
cable, for instance).
2. If cables are ordered without the connector, refer to the stamp on the cable
sheathing (Engine Feedback Cable IN 488, for instance).
AP5143F1.fh7
Fig. 6-1: Type designations of the drive components
6.1 Procedure on Replacing the Unit
Note: Note the safety instructions in section 2 when exchanging any

parts!
Replacing the DKC:

• Switch main switch off.
• Secure against being switched back on.
⇒ Prior to touching bear connecting cables and

terminals, wait for the capacitor to discharge! Only
then work on the cables!
• Remove contact protection and separate connecting line from DKC.

• Release screws on top and bottom of housing. Remove the DKC from
the drive package.
• Insert programming module from defective DKC into new one. This
eliminates the reloading of parameter files. If the programming module
is defective, see section "Replacing Firmware".
• Hand new DKC into place and tighten screws.
• Connect DKC as specified in the machine terminal diagrams.
• Start up installation.
Replacing the Motor:

Note: When replacing the motor, cap open connector ends

particularly if there might be the change that coolant or grease
could be sprayed or splashed in their vicinity (allowable level of
dirt contamination is V2).
• To mechanically replace the AC servo motor, note the instructions of

the machine manufacturer.
⇒ Danger of unwanted movements. Servo axes with an

indirect path measuring systems via a motor encoder
will loose the reference dimension if the motor is
replaced! This reference to machine coordinate
ATTENTION system must therefore be reestablished.
• Servo axes with absolute motor encoder necessitate reestablishing the

absolute reference.
Replacing cables:

⇒ Danger from high-voltage levels. Power connector of

the cables may only be inserted or separated if power
in the installation has been shutdown!
ATTENTION
Note: When replacing the motor, cap open connector ends

particularly if there might be the change that coolant or grease
could be sprayed or splashed in their vicinity (allowable level of
dirt contamination is V2).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
11121314 1516 1718 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4
Typenschild
Barcode
Barcode
H1
S1
V2 V2 V2 V2 V2
S3 0 1
S2 0 1
9 9
2
8
8
3
3
7
7
4 4
6 5 6 5
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
Indramat-Motor Machine housing Switchboard wall ECO3
Immediate environment requirements
Conductive contamination cannot occur when operating the control

drive (at least not with the IP 65); when installing or exchanging drive
V2
components, non- conductive contamination or light condensation
may momentarily occur.
AP5144F1.Fh7
Fig. 6-2: Dirt contamination per DIN VDE 0160
zum Austausch von Kabeln, Angaben des Maschinenherstellers

• When replacing cables, note the instructions of the machine
manufacturer.
⇒ Connect power connections only when they are dry

and clean.
ATTENTION
Note: If a standard cable from Rexroth Indramat is not used, then

check to ensure that the cable agrees with the terminal
diagram of the machine manufacturer!
Fault Report
for digital AC Servo Drives DKC
This fault report is intended to clarify problems and their causes. It is absolutely necessary for finding and
eliminating hidden, sporadic or application-related problems.
- Always include a Fault report with any parts returned for repair.
- Otherwise, send Fault Reports to your Rexroth Indramat representative or to the address of the Quality
Department printed on the reverse side of this page.
Co.: Loc.: Date:

Fault Report
dated: Dept.: Name: Tel.:
Information about the drive:

Data on rating plate DKC _._ - _ _ _ _ - _
Enter S.N.: _ _ _ _ _ _ -
display
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
data at
11121314 1516 1718 5 6 7 8
time Info about motor:

problem
1 2 3 4
Typenschild
occurred FWA-ECODR3_-_ _ _-_ _ VRS

Barcode
Motor type:
Barcode
H1
Hardware- S3
9
0 1
S1
S2
9
0 1
Software- S. No.:
2
2
8
8
3
3
7
4 4
S.N._ _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ _
6 5 6 5
H1 S.N._ _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ _
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
X5 Zwischenkreisanaschluß
Netzanschluß :
einphasig
dreiphasig
Information about machine at which problem occurred:

Machine manuf. Type: Oper. hours:
Machine number: Comm. date:
Manufacturer and type of machine control:
Designation of the machine axis in which fault occurredt:
Describe the problem:
Additional data:
Problem: Causes: Auxiliary problems:
Is there an air conditioner
always present unknown problem with mechanics
in the cabinet ? Y / N
at startup connection error mains sec. failure (24 Vext.)
occurs sporadically external causes control failure
Have there been previous
occurs after hrs. mechanical damage motor failure
problems at this machine ?
with vibrations loose leads/cables cable break
temperature dependent moisture in unit blower defective
How often:
foreign object in unit Feedback defective
Additional data: Did the problems occur on the same day or
the same time of the day ?
Rexroth Indramat GmbH

Bgm.-Dr.- Nebel- Straße 2
Abt. QSP
D-97816 Lohr am Main
Pi0001d1.fh7
Rexroth Indramat GmbH • Bgm.-Dr.-Nebel-Straße 2 • D-97816 Lohr • Telefon 09352 / 404-0 • Tx 689 421 • Fax 09352 / 404-885
Fig. 6-3: Fault report
ECODRIVE03 FGP-03VRS Replacing Firmware 7-7
7 Replacing Firmware
7.1 Replacing the Parameter Module

• Secure parameters (DriveTop)
• Switch unit off
• Remove programming module
• Open the lock on the back
Push locking plate

inside to open
Ap5145f1.fh7
Fig. 7-4: Locking the programming module
• Open the programming module
Programming module
Parameter module Firmware module

IS61C6416-20T
C2110900 9728
splSI2032
110LT48
H813A08
ISSI
ESF2
Barcode
Barcode
H1
H1
S1
S1
SDS
S3 S2
S3 S2 0 1 0
9 0 90 1
9 1 1
9
8
2
8
2
7
3
7
6 4 4
6 4 5 6
4 5
5 6 5
Ap5146f1.fh7
Fig. 7-5:Programming module
• Connect new parameter module and old firmware module

• Close lock (switch outward)
• Insert programming module
• Switch unit on
7-8 Replacing Firmware ECODRIVE03 FGP-03VRS
7.2 Replacing the Firmware Module

• Switch unit off
• Pull programming module out
• Open the lock on the back of the programming module
• Open the programming module
• Insert old parameter module into new firmware module
• Close lock (lock must be pushed outward)
• Insert programming module
• Switch unit on
7.3 Replacing the Programming Module (complete module)

• Secure parameters (DriveTop)
• Switch unit off
• Pull programming module out
• Insert new programming module
• Switch unit on
• Load parameters
ECODRIVE03 FGP-03VRS Index 8-1
8 Index
+
+24Volt DC error 4-22
A
Ab 5-40
Absolute encoder out of allowed window 4-14
Absolute measuring system not installed 5-14
AC 5-40
Acceleration data scaling error 5-9
AE 5-40
AF 5-40
AH 5-40
Amplifier overtemp. shutdown 4-3
Appropriate use
Introduction 2-1
Automatic drive check and adjustment 5-36
B
Basic load 5-16
bb 5-40
Binary encoder resolution necessary 5-13
Bleeder overload prewarning 4-28
Bleeder overload shutdown 4-4
Brake check command 5-1
Brake check only with drive enable 5-2
Brake torque too low 4-32, 5-2
Bus failure 4-16
C
Cam shaft, encoder 1, real master drive 5-32
Cam shaft, encoder 1, virtual master drive 5-32
Cam shaft, encoder 2, virtual master drive 5-32
Cam shaft, lagless, encoder 1, real master drive 5-33
Cam shaft, lagless, encoder 1, virt. master drive 5-32
Cam shaft, lagless, encoder 2, virt. master drive 5-33
Cancel reference point procedure command 5-21
Command adjust commutation 5-18
Command automatic loop tuning 5-22
Command Current limit active 4-31
Command current limit shutoff 4-12
Command Get mark position 5-21
Command measuring wheel mode 5-22
Command not enabled 5-1
Command Release motor holding brake 5-1
Command Set absolute measuring 5-13
Command velocity limit active 4-30
Communication phase 2 5-26
Communication phase 3 5-26
Communication phase 3 transition check 5-2
Communication phase 4 transition check 5-5
Commutation offset could not be determined 4-20
Commutation offset could not be determined. 5-20
Config. IDN for AT not configurable 5-4
Config. IDN for MDT not configurable 5-3
Configurated length > max. length for AT 5-4
Configurated length > max. length for MDT 5-3
Continuous current limit active 4-30
Continuous current limit prewarning 4-31
Control and power sections ready for operation 5-27
Current measurement trim wrong 4-14
8-2 Index ECODRIVE03 FGP-03VRS
D
Default parameter load 5-17
Default parameters invalid 5-17
Default parameters not available 5-16
Diagnostic Message Display
(2 dots) 5-38
Diagnostic Message Display
-0 5-38
-1 5-38
-2 5-38
-3 5-38
-4 5-38
-5 5-38
-6 5-38
E1 5-39
E2 5-39
E3 5-39
E4 5-39
E5 5-39
Distance home switch - reference mark erroneous 5-15
Double MDT failure shutdown 4-15
Drive active, switching not allowed 5-14
Drive controlled homing procedure command 5-15
Drive controlled interpolation, encoder 1 5-28
Drive controlled interpolation, encoder 2 5-29
Drive controlled interpolation, lagless, encoder 1 5-29
Drive controlled interpolation, lagless, encoder 2 5-29
Drive controlled positioning, encoder 1 5-33
Drive controlled positioning, encoder 1, lagless 5-34
Drive controlled positioning, encoder 2 5-34
Drive controlled positioning, encoder 2, lagless 5-35
Drive deceleration to standstill 5-37
Drive does not move 5-19
Drive enable refused 5-19
Drive HALT 5-27
Drive in control at start of command 5-19
Drive in TORQUE control 5-27
Drive in VELOCITY control 5-27
Drive not ready for commutation command 5-18
Drive overtemp. prewarning 4-27
E
Emergency-Stop 4-17, 4-18, 4-36
Encoder 1 failure
quadrant error 4-7
signal amplitude wrong 4-20
Encoder 2 failure
quadrant error 4-10
signal amplitude wrong 4-9
Encoder combination not possible 5-12
Erroneous internal hardware synchronization 4-13
Error during bedding in the brake 5-2
Error during initialisation of master communication 4-15
Error during initialisation of the parking axis 4-5
Error during release of the motor holding brake 4-13
Error in offset calculation 5-19
Error in the cyclic data channel 4-33
Error in the parameter channel 4-33
Excessive deviation 4-6
Excessive position command difference 4-8
Excessive position feedback difference 4-7
External short at status outputs 4-13
F
Fatal error of the interface card 4-16
Feedback 1 initializing error 5-11
Feedback 1 required (P-0-0074) 5-13
Feedback 2 data reading error 5-10

Feedback 2 initializing error 5-11
Feedback 2 required (->S-0-0022) 5-7
Feedback1 data reading error 5-10
Feedrate-override S-0-0108 = 0 4-29
G
Gain adjustment failed 5-24
H
Homing of absolute encoder not possible 5-15
Homing only possible with drive enable 5-15
I
Inappropriate use 2-2
Consequences, Discharge of liability 2-1
Incr. encoder emulator
pulse frequency too high 4-12
Incremental encoder required 5-21
Inertia detection failed 5-24
Input master password 5-19
Input value for max. range too high 5-12
Interpolation acceleration = 0 4-26
Interpolation velocity = 0 4-25
Invalid addressing of AT-data container A 4-34
Invalid addressing of MDT-data container A 4-34
Invalid amplifier data (->S-0-0022) 5-7
Invalid communication parameter (S-0-0021) 5-3
Invalid feedback data (->S-0-0022) 5-7
Invalid parameter(s) (->S-0-0022) 5-6
J
Jb 5-40
JF 5-40
JOG mode negative 5-36
JOG mode positive 5-35
L
Limit error communication parameter (S-0-0021) 5-3
Load-side motor encoder with inductance motor only 5-12
Locked with password 5-18
Low battery voltage 4-10
M
Mains fault 4-14, 4-32, 4-37
Master drive encoder failure
quadrant error 4-12
signal too small 4-11
Max signal frequency of encoder 2 exceeded 4-10
Max. signal frequency of encoder 1 exceeded 4-7
Maximum braking time exceeded 4-6
Measuring wheel operation not possible 5-22
Modulo range error 5-12
Motion range exceeded during commutation 4-20, 5-20
Motor feedback data not valid 5-23
Motor overload 4-25
Motor overtemp. prewarning 4-27
Motor overtemp. shutdown 4-4
Motor tauschen 6-4
Motor temp. surveillance defective 4-5
Motor type P-0-4014 incorrect 5-6
N
Negative limit switch activated 4-37
Negative position limit exceeded 4-36
Negative travel limit exceeded 4-18
Negative travel limit switch detected 4-19
No adjustment with asynchronous motor 5-19
No data exchange possible via the field bus 4-34
No ready signal from supply module 4-15, 4-33, 4-38
Not homed 4-29
O
Only allowed without master 5-14
Operation Status 5-40
Order of MDT configuration wrong 5-5
Overcurrent
short in power stage 4-22
Overflow of target position preset memory 4-11
Overvoltage in power stage 4-34
P
P2 5-41
P3 5-41
Parameter calculation error (->S-0-0022) 5-6
Parameter default value erroneous (-> S-0-0021) 5-18
Parameter limit error (->S-0-0022) 5-6
Parameters not copyable 5-17
Parking axis command 5-22
Parking axis only while drive is disabled 5-22
Phase synchr. lagless, encoder 1, real master drive 5-31
Phase synchr. lagless, encoder 1, virtual master drive 5-31
Phase synchr. lagless, encoder 2, virtual master drive 5-31
Phase synchronization, encoder 1, real master drive 5-31
Phase synchronization, encoder 1, virtual master drive 5-30
Phase synchronization, encoder 2, virtual master drive 5-30
PL 5-41
PL Load parameter default values 4-3
Position control lagless, feedback 2 5-28
Position data scaling error 5-8
Position limit reached during jog 4-36
Position mode lagless, encoder 1 5-28
Position mode with encoder 1 5-28
Position mode with encoder 2 5-28
Positioning velocity >= S-0-0091 4-26
Positive limit switch activated 4-37
Positive position limit exceeded 4-35
Positive stop drive procedure command 5-20
Positive travel limit exceeded 4-17
Positive travel limit switch detected 4-19
Power is off 5-19
Power supply driver stages fault 4-22
Proceed to phase 4 5-19
Process block mode lagless, encoder 1 5-35
Process block mode lagless, encoder 2 5-36
Process block mode, encoder 1 5-35
Process block mode, encoder 2 5-36
R
Ready for power on 5-27
Reference mark not detected 5-16
Relation TNcyc (S-0-0001) to TScyc (S-0-0002) error 5-4
Replacing Cables 6-4
Replacing the DKC 6-3
Replacing the Motor 6-4
Reset class 1 diagnostic, error reset 5-15
S
Safety Instructions for Electric Servo Drives and Controls 3-1
Selected process block is not programmed. 4-30
Start requires drive enable 5-23
Switching to parameter mode 5-14
Switching to uninitialized operation mode 4-2
Synchronization with field bus impossible 4-16
T
T4 > TScyc (S-0-0002) - T4min (S-0-0005) 5-5
Target position out of num. range 4-32
Target position out of travel range 4-28
TNcyc (S-0-0001) or TScyc (S-0-0002) error 5-4
Torque limit = 0 4-29
Torque/force data scaling error 5-9
Torque/Force too small to move 5-18
Travel range exceeded 5-25
Travel range invalid, P-0-0166 & P-0-0167 5-24
U
UL 5-41
UL The motor type has changed. 4-2
Undervoltage in power section 4-6, 4-25, 4-35
Unknown operation mode 5-37
Use See appropriate use and see inappropriate use
V
Velocity command value > limit S-0-0091 4-31
Velocity data scaling error 5-8
Velocity limit S-0-0091 exceeded 4-23
Velocity loop error 4-23
Velocity synchronization, real master drive 5-30
Velocity synchronization, virtual master drive 5-30
W
Warning Motor temp. surveillance defective 4-24
Wrong function of encoder 2 5-13
Z
ZKL1-Error at command start 5-21
Notes
ECODRIVE03 FGP-03VRS Kundenbetreuungsstellen - Sales & Service Facilities 9-1
9 Kundenbetreuungsstellen - Sales & Service

Facilities
Deutschland – Germany vom Ausland: (x) nach Landeskennziffer weglassen!!
from abroad: don’t dial (x) after country code!
Vertriebsgebiet Mitte SALES Vertriebsgebiet Mitte SALES Vertriebsgebiet Ost SALES Vertriebsgebiet Ost SALES
Germany Centre Service Germany Centre Service Germany East Service Germany East Service
Rexroth Indramat GmbH Mannesmann Rexroth AG Rexroth Indramat GmbH Mannesmann Rexroth AG
Bgm.-Dr.-Nebel-Str. 2 Gesch.ber. Rexroth Indramat Beckerstraße 31 GB Rexroth Indramat GmbH
97816 Lohr am Main Lilistraße 14-18 09120 Chemnitz Holzhäuser Str. 122
63067 Offenbach 04299 Leipzig
Telefon: +49 (0)9352/40-0 Telefon: +49 (0)371/35 55-0
Telefax: +49 (0)9352/40-4885 Telefon: +49 (0) 69/82 00 90-0 Telefax: +49 (0)371/35 55-333 Telefon: +49 (0)341/86 77-0
Telefax: +49 (0) 69/82 00 90-80 Telefax: +49 (0)341/86 77-219
Vertriebsgebiet Süd SALES Gebiet Südwest SALES Vertriebsgebiet Nord SALES Vertriebsgebiet Nord SALES
Germany South Service Germany South-West Service Germany North Service Germany North Service
Rexroth Indramat GmbH Mannesmann Rexroth AG Rexroth Indramat GmbH Mannesmann Rexroth AG
Ridlerstraße 75 Vertrieb Deutschland – VD-BI Kieler Straße 212 Vertriebsniederlassung Region Nord
80339 München Geschäftsbereich Rexroth Indramat 22525 Hamburg Gesch.ber. Rexroth Indramat
Regionalzentrum Südwest Walsroder Str. 93
Telefon: +49 (0)89/540138-30 Telefon: +49 (0)40/85 31 57-0
Ringstrasse 70 / Postfach 1144 30853 Langenhagen
Telefax: +49 (0)89/540138-10 Telefax: +49 (0)40/85 31 57-15
70736 Fellbach / 70701 Fellbach
indramat.mue@t-online.de Telefon: +49 (0) 511/72 66 57-0
Tel.: +49 (0)711/57 61–100 Telefax: +49 (0) 511/72 66 57-93
Fax: +49 (0)711/57 61–125
Vertriebsgebiet West SALES SERVICE - Hotline - 7 Tage / 24h - ERSATZTEIL - Hotline

Germany West Service
HELPDESK
Mannesmann Rexroth AG MO – FR - von 7 – 17 Uhr
Telefax +49 (0)9352/40-4941 ♦ nur an Werktagen
Vertrieb Deutschland
Telefon +49 (0)9352/40- - only on working days -
Regionalzentrum West
Borsigstrasse 15 Bernard A. -4894 ♦ von 15 -18 Uhr
D - 40880 Ratingen Kolb R. -4922 - from 15-18 o’clock -
Roeper P. -4359
Telefon: +49 (0)2102/409-0 Scheiner W. -4921
Telefax: +49 (0)2102/409-406
H O T L I N E (17 - 07 + SA / SO) Tel. +49 (0) 93 52/40 42 22
Telefon: +49 (0)172/660 04 06
oder/or
Telefon: +49 (0)171/333 88 26
Kundenbetreuungsstellen in Deutschland - Service agencies in Germany
9-2 Kundenbetreuungsstellen - Sales & Service Facilities ECODRIVE03 FGP-03VRS
Europa – Europe vom Ausland: (x) nach Landeskennziffer weglassen, 0 nach Landeskennziffer mitwählen (Italien)!
from abroad: don’t dial (x) after country code, dial 0 after country code (Italy)!
Austria SALES Service Austria SALES Service Belgium SALES Service Denmark SALES Service
Mannesmann Rexroth Ges.m.b.H. Mannesmann Rexroth G.m.b.H. Mannesmann Rexroth N.V.-S.A. BEC AS
Gesch.ber. Rexroth Indramat Gesch.ber. Rexroth Indramat Gesch.ber. Rexroth Indramat Zinkvej 6
Hägelingasse 3 Industriepark 18 Industrielaan 8 DK-8900 Randers
A - 1140 Wien A - 4061 Pasching B-1740 Ternat
Telefon: +43 (0)1/9852540-400 Telefon: +43 (0)7221/605-0 Telefon: +32 (0)2/5830719 Telefon: +45 (0)87/11 90 60
Telefax: +43 (0)1/9852540-93 Telefax: +43 (0)7221/605-21 Telefax: +32 (0)2/5830731 Telefax: +45 (0)87/11 90 61
E-mail: indramat@rexroth.be
Czech Rep. SALES Service England SALES Service Finland SALES Service France SALES Service
Mannesmann-Rexroth, spol.s.r.o. Mannesmann Rexroth Ltd. Rexroth Mecman Oy Mannesmann Rexroth S.A.
Hviezdoslavova 5 Rexroth Indramat Division Rexroth Indramat division Division Rexroth Indramat
CS - 627 00 Brno Broadway Lane, South Cerney Ansatie 6 Parc des Barbanniers
Telefon: +420 (0)5/48 126 358 GB - Cirencester, Glos GL7 5UH SF-017 40 Vantaa 4, Place du Village
Telefax: +420 (0)5/48 126 112 Telefon: +44 (0)1285/863000 Telefon: +358 (0)9/84 91-11 F-92632 Gennevilliers Cedex
Telefax: +44 (0)1285/863030 Telefax: +358 (0)9/84 91-13 60 Telefon: +33 (0)141 47 54 30
Telefax: +33 (0)147 94 69 41
Hotline: +33 (0)6 08 33 43 28
France SALES Service France SALES Service Hungary SALES Service Italy SALES Service
Mannesmann Rexroth S.A. Mannesmann Rexroth S.A. Mannesmann Rexroth Kft. Mannesmann Rexroth S.p.A.
Division Rexroth Indramat Division Rexroth Indramat Angol utca 34 Divisione Rexroth Indramat
270, Avenue de Lardenne 91, Bd. Irène Joliot-Curie H - 1149 Budapest Via G. Di Vittoria, 1
F - 31100 Toulouse F - 69634 Vénissieux – Cedex Telefon: +36 (1) 364 00 02 I - 20063 Cernusco S/N.MI
Telefon: +33 (0)5 61 49 95 19 Telefon: +33 (0)4 78 78 53 65 Telefax: +36 (1) 383 19 80 Telefon: +39 02/92 36 52 70
Telefax: +33 (0)5 61 31 00 41 Telefax: +33 (0)4 78 78 53 62 Telefax: +39 02/92 36 55 12
Italy SALES Service Italy SALES Service Italy SALES Service Italy SALES Service
Mannesmann Rexroth S.p.A. Mannesmann Rexroth S.p.A. Mannesmann Rexroth S.p.A. Mannesmann Rexroth S.p.A.
Divisione Rexroth Indramat Divisione Rexroth Indramat Divisione Rexroth Indramat Divisione Rexroth Indramat
Via Borgomanero, 11 Via del Progresso, 16 (Zona Ind.) Via Mascia, 1 Viale Oriani, 38/A
I - 10145 Torino I - 35020 Padova I - 80053 Castellamare di Stabia NA I - 40137 Bologna
Telefon: +39 011/7 50 38 11 Telefon: +39 049/8 70 13 70 Telefon: +39 081/8 71 57 00 Telefon: +39 051/34 14 14
Telefax: +39 011/7 71 01 90 Telefax: +39 049/8 70 13 77 Telefax: +39 081/8 71 68 85 Telefax: +39 051/34 14 22
Netherlands SALES Service Netherlands SALES Service Norway SALES Service Poland SALES Service
Hydraudyne Hydrauliek B.V. Hydrocare B.V. Rexroth Mecman AS Mannesmann Rexroth Sp.zo.o.
Kruisbroeksestraat 1 Kruisbroeksestraat 1 Rexroth Indramat Division Biuro Poznan
(P.O. Box 32) (P.O. Box 32) Berghagan 1 or: Box 3007 ul. Dabrowskiego 81/85
NL - 5281 RV Boxtel NL - 5281 RV Boxtel N -1405 Ski-Langhus N -1402 Ski PL - 60-529 Poznan
Telefon: +31 (0)411/65 19 51 Telefon: +31 (0)411/65 19 51 Telefon: +47 (0)64 86 41 00 Telefon: +48 061/847 67 99
Telefax: +31 (0)411/65 14 83 Telefax: +31 (0)411/67 78 14 Telefax: +47 (0)64 86 90 62 Telefax: +48 061/847 64 02
e-mail: indramat@hydraudyne.nl
Rumania SALES Service Russia SALES Service Spain SALES Service Spain SALES Service
Mannesmann Rexroth Sp.zo.o. Tschudnenko E.B. Mannesmann Rexroth S.A. Goimendi S.A.
Str. Drobety nr. 4-10, app. 14 Arsenia 22 Divisiòn Rexroth Indramat División Rexroth Indramat
RO - 70258 Bucuresti, Sector 2 RUS - 153000 Ivanovo Centro Industrial Santiga Jolastokieta (Herrera)
Telefon: +40 (0)1/210 48 25 Rußland Obradors s/n Apartado 11 37
+40 (0)1/210 29 50 Telefon: +7 093/223 96 33 E-08130 Santa Perpetua de Mogoda E - 20017 San Sebastian
Telefax: +40 (0)1/210 29 52 oder/or +7 093/223 95 48 Barcelona Telefon: +34 9 43/40 01 63
Telefax: +7 093/223 46 01 Telefon: +34 937 47 94 00 Telefax: +34 9 43/39 17 99
Telefax: +34 937 47 94 01
Sweden SALES Service Slowenia SALES Service Switzerland-East- SALES Service Switzerland-West- SALES Service
Rexroth Mecman Svenska AB Rexroth Indramat Mannesmann Rexroth Schweiz AG Mannesmann Rexroth Suisse SA
Rexroth Indramat Division elektromotorji d.o.o. Gesch.ber. Rexroth Indramat Département Rexroth Indramat
Varuvägen 7 Otoki 21 Gewerbestraße 3 Rue du village 1
S - 125 81 Stockholm SLO - 64 228 Zelezniki CH - 8500 Frauenfeld CH - 1020 Renens
Telefon: +46 (0)8/727 92 00 Telefon: +386 64/61 73 32 Telefon: +41 (0)52/720 21 00 Telefon: +41 (0)21/632 84 20
Telefax: +46 (0)8/647 32 77 Telefax: +386 64/64 71 50 Telefax: +41 (0)52/720 21 11 Telefax: +41 (0)21/632 84 21
Turkey SALES Service
Mannesmann Rexroth Hidropar A..S.

Fevzi Cakmak Cad No. 3
TR - 34630 Sefaköy Istanbul
Telefon: +90 212/541 60 70
Telefax: +90 212/599 34 07
Europäische Kundenbetreuungsstellen (ohne Deutschland)

European Service agencies (without Germany)
ECODRIVE03 FGP-03VRS Kundenbetreuungsstellen - Sales & Service Facilities 9-3
Außerhalb Europa - outside Europe vom Ausland: (x) nach Landeskennziffer weglassen!
from abroad: don’t dial (x) after country code!
Argentina SALES Service Argentina SALES Service Australia SALES Service Australia SALES Service
Mannesmann Rexroth S.A.I.C. NAKASE AIMS - Australian Industrial Mannesmann Rexroth Pty. Ltd.
Division Rexroth Indramat Servicio Tecnico CNC Machinery Services Pty. Ltd. No. 7, Endeavour Way
Acassusso 48 41/7 Calle 49, No. 5764/66 Unit 3/45 Horne ST Braeside Victoria, 31 95
RA - 1605 Munro (Buenos Aires) RA - 1653 Villa Balester Campbellfield , VIC 3061 AUS – Melbourne
Prov. - Buenos Aires AUS - Melbourne
Telefon: +54 (0)11/4756 01 40
Telefax: +54 (0)11/4762 6862 Telefon: +54 (0) 11/4768 36 43 Telefon: +61 (0)3/93 59 02 28
Telefon: +61 (0)3/95 80 39 33
e-mail:mannesmann@impsat1.com.ar Telefax: +54 (0) 11/4768 24 13 Telefax: +61 (0)3/93 59 02 86
Telefax: +61 (0)3/95 80 17 33
e-mail: nakase@usa.net
Email: mel@rexroth.com.au
nakase@infovia.com.ar
Brazil SALES Service Brazil SALES Service Canada SALES Service China SALES Service
Mannesmann Rexroth Mannesmann Rexroth Basic Technologies Corporation Rexroth International Trade
Automação Ltda. Automação Ltda. Burlington Division (Shanghai) Co., Ldt.
Divisão Rexroth Indramat Divisão Rexroth Indramat 3426 Mainway Drive Wai Gaoqiao Free Trade Zone
Rua Georg Rexroth, 609 R. Dr.Humberto Pinheiro Vieira, 100 Burlington, Ontario No.122, Fu Te Dong Yi Road
Vila Padre Anchieta Distrito Industrial Canada L7M 1A8 Shanghai 200131 - P.R.China
BR - 09951-270 Diadema-SP BR - 89220-390 Joinville - SC
Telefon: +1 905/335 55 11 Telefon: +86 21/58 66 30 30
[ Caixa Postal 377 ] [ Caixa Postal 1273 ]
[ BR-09901-970 Diadema-SP ]
Telefax: +1 905/335-41 84 Telefax: +86 21/58 66 55 23
Tel./Fax: +55 (0)47/473 58 33
Telefon: +55 (0)11/745 90 60 Mobil: +55 (0)47 974 66 45
+55 (0)11/745 90 70 e-mail: prochnow@zaz.com.br
Telefax: +55 (0)11/745 90 50
e-mail: awittwer@rexroth.com.br
China SALES Service China SALES Service China SALES Service Hongkong SALES Service
Mannesmann Rexroth (China) Ldt. Mannesmann Rexroth (China) Ldt. Mannesmann Rexroth (China) Ldt. Rexroth (China) Ldt.
15/F China World Trade Center A-5F., 123 Lian Shan Street Guangzhou Repres. Office 1/F., 19 Cheung Shun Street
1, Jianguomenwai Avenue Sha He Kou District Room 1014-1016, Metro Plaza, Cheung Sha Wan,
Beijing 100004, P.R.China Dalian 116 023, P.R.China Tian He District, 183 Tian He Bei Rd Kowloon, Hongkong
Guangzhou 510075, P.R.China
Telefon: +86 10/65 05 03 80 Telefon: +86 411/46 78 930 Telefon: +852 22 62 51 00
Telefax: +86 10/65 05 03 79 Telefax: +86 411/46 78 932 Telefon: +86 20/8755-0030 Telefax: +852 27 41 33 44
+86 20/8755-0011
Telefax: +86 20/8755-2387
India SALES Service India SALES Service Indonesia SALES Service Japan SALES Service
Mannesmann Rexroth (India) Ltd. Mannesmann Rexroth (India) Ltd. PT. Rexroth Wijayakusuma Rexroth Automation Co., Ltd.
Rexroth Indramat Division Rexroth Indramat Division Jl. Raya Bekasi Km 21 Service Center Japan
Plot. 96, Phase III Plot. A-58, TTC Industrial Area Pulogadung Yutakagaoka 1810, Meito-ku,
Peenya Industrial Area Thane Turbhe Midc Road RI - Jakarta Timur 13920 NAGOYA 465-0035, Japan
IND - Bangalore - 560058 Mahape Village
Telefon: +62 21/4 61 04 87 Telefon: +81 (0)52/777 88 41
IND - Navi Mumbai - 400 701
Telefon: +91 (0)80/8 39 73 74 +62 21/4 61 04 88 +81 (0)52/777 88 53
Telefax: +91 (0)80/8 39 43 45 Telefon: +91 (0)22/7 61 46 22 Telefax: +62 21/4 60 01 52 +81 (0)52/777 88 79
Telefax: +91 (0)22/7 68 15 31 Telefax: +81 (0)52/777 89 01
Japan SALES Service Mexico SALES Service Korea SALES Service Korea SALES Service
Rexroth Automation Co., Ltd. Mannesmann Rexroth Mexico S.A. Mannesmann Rexroth-Korea Ltd. Seo Chang Corporation Ltd.
Rexroth Indramat Division de C.V. Rexroth Indramat Division Room 903, Jeail Building
1F, I.R. Building Calle Neptuno 72 1500-12 Dadae-Dong- Saha-Ku 44-35 Yeouido-Dong
Nakamachidai 4-26-44, Tsuzuki-ku Unidad Ind. Vallejo Pusan, 604-050 Yeoungdeungpo-Ku
YOKOHAMA 224-0041, Japan MEX - 07700 Mexico, D.F. Republic of South Korea C.P.O.Box 97 56
ROK - Seoul
Telefon: +81 (0)45/942 72 10 Telefon: +52 5 754 17 11 Telefon: +82 (0)51/2600 741
Telefax: +81 (0)45/942 03 41 +52 5 754 36 84 Telefax: +82 (0)51/2600 747 Telefon: +82 (0)2/7 80 82 08
+52 5 754 12 60 +82 (0)2/7 80 82 09
Telefax: +52 5 754 50 73 Telefax: +82 (0)2/7 84 54 08
+52 5 752 59 43
e-mail: gsoria@rexroth-mexico.com
Taiwan SALES Service South Africa SALES Service
Rexroth Uchida Co., Ltd. TECTRA Automation (Pty) Ltd.

No.1, Tsu Chiang Street 28 Banfield Road,Industria North
Tu Cheng Ind. Estate RSA - Maraisburg 1700
Taipei Hsien, Taiwan, R.O.C.
Telefon: +27 (0)11/673 20 80
Telefon: +886 2/2 68 13 47 Telefax: +27 (0)11/673 72 69
Telefax: +886 2/2 68 53 88
Kundenbetreuungsstellen außerhalb Europa - Service agencies outside Europe
9-4 Kundenbetreuungsstellen - Sales & Service Facilities ECODRIVE03 FGP-03VRS
Außerhalb Europa / USA - outside Europe / USA

USA SALES Service USA SALES Service USA SALES Service USA SALES Service
Mannesmann Rexroth Corporation Mannesmann Rexroth Corporation Mannesmann Rexroth Corporation Mannesmann Rexroth Corporation
Rexroth Indramat Division Rexroth Indramat Division Rexroth Indramat Division Rexroth Indramat Division
5150 Prairie Stone Parkway Central Region Technical Center Southeastern Technical Center Northeastern Technical Center
USA -Hoffman Estates, IL 60192-3707 USA - Auburn Hills, MI 48326 3625 Swiftwater Park Drive 99 Rainbow Road
USA - Suwanee USA - East Granby,
Telefon: +1 847/6 45 36 00 Telefon: +1 248/3 93 33 30
Georgia 30174 Connecticut 06026
Telefax: +1 847/6 45 62 01 Telefax: +1 248/3 93 29 06
service@indramat.com Telefon: +1 770/9 32 32 00 Telefon: +1 860/8 44 83 77
+1 770/9 32 19 03 +1 860/8 44 85 95
USA SALES Service USA Service HOTLINE
Mannesmann Rexroth Corporation

Rexroth Indramat Division
+1-800-860-1055
Charlotte Regional Sales Office
14001 South Lakes Drive
USA - Charlotte, - 7 days / 24hrs -
North Carolina 28273
Telefon: +1 704/5 83 97 62
+1 704/5 83 14 86
Kundenbetreuungsstellen außerhalb Europa / USA

Service agencies outside Europe / USA
Printed in Germany
286661
Rexroth
Indramat
Schaltschrank-
Kühlgerät
Cooling unit
Climatiseur
Koelaggregaat
Kylaggregat SK 3302.xxx SK 3332.xxx
SK 3302.3xx SK 3361.xxx
Condizionatori per
armadi di comando SK 3303.xxx SK 3366.xxx
SK 3304.xxx SK 3377.xxx
Refrigerador
para armarios SK 3305.xxx
SK 3328.xxx
SK 3329.xxx
Montage-, Installations- und Bedienungsanleitung

Assembly and operating instructions
Manuel d’installation et de maintenance
Montage- en bedieningshandleiding
Montage- och hanteringsanvisning
Istruzioni di montaggio
Instrucciones de montaje
R
Contents
1 Notes on documentation. . . . . . . . . . 4 5 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 GB
1.1 Associated documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.2 CE labelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 6 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
1.3 Retention of documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 6.1 Control using the Basic controller . . . . . . 22
1.4 Symbols used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 6.1.1 Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
6.1.2 Operating and error display. . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
2 Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 6.1.3 Test mode for the Basic controller . . . . . . . . .23
6.1.4 Setting the temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
3 Device description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 6.1.5 Resetting the Basic controller . . . . . . . . . . . .24
3.1 Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 6.2 Control using the Comfort controller . . . . 24
3.1.1 How it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 6.2.1 Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
3.1.2 Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 6.2.2 Launching test mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
3.1.3 Bus mode (Comfort controller only) . . . . . . . . 5 6.2.3 General information about programming. . . .25
3.1.4 Safety equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 6.2.4 Variable parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
3.1.5 Condensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 6.2.5 Programming overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
3.1.6 Filter mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 6.2.6 Defining system messages
3.1.7 Door limit switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 for evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
3.1.8 Additional interface X3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 6.2.7 Setting the master/slave identifier . . . . . . . . .29
3.2 Proper usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 6.2.8 Evaluating system messages. . . . . . . . . . . . .29
3.3 Scope of supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 6.2.9 Resetting the Comfort controller . . . . . . . . . .31
4 Assembly and connection . . . . . . . . 7 7 Inspection and servicing. . . . . . . . . 31

4.1 Choosing an installation site . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 7.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
4.2 Assembly instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 7.1.1 Compressed air cleaning
4.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 SK 3304.xxx/SK 3305.xxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
4.2.2 Layout of the electronic components 7.1.2 Compressed air cleaning SK 3328.xxx,
in the enclosure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 SK 3329.xxx, SK 3332.xxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
4.3 Fitting the cooling unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
4.3.1 Cutting out the enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 8 Storage and disposal. . . . . . . . . . . . 40
4.3.2 External mounting of the cooling unit . . . . . . . 9
4.3.3 Partial internal mounting of the cooling unit . . 9 9 Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . 41
4.3.4 Full internal mounting of the cooling unit . . . 11
4.4 Connecting the condensate drain . . . . . . . 11 10 List of spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
4.5 Notes on electrical installation . . . . . . . . . 12
4.5.1 Connection data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 11 Appendix:
4.5.2 Overvoltage protection and Cut-out and hole sizes. . . . . . . . . . . 48
supply line load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 11.1 Dimensions for external mounting . . . . . . 48
4.5.3 Three-phase devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 11.2 Dimensions for partial internal
4.5.4 Door limit switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
4.5.5 Notes on the flicker standard . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 11.3 Dimensions for full internal mounting . . . 50
4.5.6 Potential equalisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
4.6 Carrying out the electrical installation . . . 13
4.6.1 Bus connection
(only in conjunction with several units
with a Comfort controller) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
4.6.2 Installing the power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
4.7 Finalising assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
4.7.1 Installing the filter media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
4.7.2 Fitting the cooling unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
4.7.3 Setting the filter mat monitor
(only with Comfort controller) . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Rittal cooling unit assembly instructions 3

1 Notes on documentation
1 Notes on documentation 2 Safety notes
GB These assembly instructions are aimed at tradesper-
sons who are familiar with assembly and installation
Please observe the following general safety instruc-
tions when assembling and operating the unit:
of the cooling unit, and at trained specialists who are – Assembly, installation and servicing must only be
familiar with operation of the cooling unit. carried out by properly trained specialists.
– Screw the enclosure to the floor to prevent it from
1.1 Associated documents tipping over when the cooling unit is installed.
There are two sets of instructions for the unit types – Do not obstruct the air inlet and air outlet of the
described here: cooling unit inside and outside the enclosure
– Assembly and installation instructions enclosed (see also section 4.2.2).
with the unit in the form of a paper document. – To ensure problem-free opening and closing of the
– Assembly, installation and operating instructions enclosure door, use a ride-up door roller (refer to
enclosed with the unit in the form of a PDF file the accessories in the Rittal Catalogue). This raises
(Adobe Acrobat) on CD-ROM. the door slightly and balances out the weight of the
We cannot accept any liability for damages asso- cooling unit, to prevent buckling of the door and
ciated with failure to observe these instructions. associated seal problems.
Where applicable, the instructions for any acces- – The heat loss of the components installed in the
sories used shall also apply. enclosure must not exceed the specific useful
cooling output of the cooling unit.
1.2 CE labelling – When transporting the enclosure with the cooling
The declaration of conformity is supplied with the unit unit externally mounted, always use an additional
as a separate document. shipping brace to support the cooling unit.
– The cooling unit must always be transported in an
1.3 Retention of documents upright position.
These instructions and all associated documents – Only use original spare parts and accessories.
shall constitute an integral part of the product. They – Do not make any changes to the cooling unit other
must be supplied to the plant operator. The plant than those described in these instructions or asso-
operator shall be responsible for storage of the ciated instructions.
documents, to ensure that they are readily available – Risk of burn injuries! For cooling units with auto-
when needed. matic condensate evaporation, the surface of the
thermal element will get very hot during operation,
1.4 Symbols used and will remain so for some time afterwards.
Please observe the following safety instructions and – The mains connector of the cooling unit must only
other notes in this guide: be connected and disconnected with the system
Symbol for an instructed action: de-energised. Connect the pre-fuse specified on
• The bullet point indicates that you should perform the rating plate.
an action.
Safety and other instructions:
Danger!
Immediate danger to life and limb!
Caution!
Potential threat to the product
and its environment.
Note:
Useful information
and special features.
4 Rittal cooling unit assembly instructions

3 Device description
3 Device description very eco-friendly. A filter dryer (5) which is integrated
into the hermetically sealed cooling circuit provides
Depending on the model chosen, your cooling unit
may vary in appearance from the illustrations con-
effective protection against moisture, acid, dirt par- GB
ticles, and foreign bodies within the cooling circuit.
tained in these instructions. However, the functions
are identical in principle. Condenser (3)
PSAH
pressure-
8 operated
switch
9 Condenser fan
1 Compressor (2) Filter dryer (5)
2
10 External circuit
3
Internal circuit
Temperature
4 control
5 11
Evaporator coil (1)
6 12 Expansion valve (4)
Evaporator fan
13
Fig. 2: Cooling circuit
7
In the evaporator coil (1), the liquid coolant is con-
14
verted to a gaseous state. The energy needed for
this purpose is taken from the enclosure air in the
form of heat, which has the effect of cooling the
15 enclosure air. In the compressor (2), the coolant is
16 heavily compressed, so that it achieves a higher
Fig. 1: Device description temperature inside the condenser (3) than the
ambient air. This means that excess heat may be
Key
emitted to the ambient air via the surface of the con-
1 Blind nut
2 Evaporator fan denser, as a result of which the temperature of the
3 Electrical wiring plan coolant drops and it is converted back into liquid.
4 X2 master/slave connection It is re-injected into the evaporator coil via a thermo-
5 X3 optional serial interface static expansion valve (4), which causes it to cool
6 X1 terminal strip down further, and is then once again able to absorb
7 Air outlet hole the energy from the enclosure air in the evaporator
8 Front half of the enclosure coil. The whole cycle begins again.
9 Rear half of the enclosure
10 Louvred grille for air outlet 3.1.2 Controller
11 Controller Rittal enclosure cooling units are fitted with a control-
12 Infill panel ler for setting the functions of the cooling unit.
13 Louvred grille for air inlet
Depending on the design, this is either a Basic con-
14 Rating plate
troller (display of the operating status via LED) or a
15 Condensate discharge
16 Dispatch bag Comfort controller (display plus extended functions,
see chapter “6 Operation”, page 22).
3.1 Functional description
3.1.3 Bus mode (Comfort controller only)
Enclosure cooling units are designed to dissipate
The serial interface X2 allows you to create a bus
heat from enclosures by cooling the air inside the
connection with up to 10 cooling units using the
enclosure and protecting temperature-sensitive
master/slave cable (shielded, four-wire cable,
components. They are built into the side or rear
Model No. SK 3124.100). This allows you to imple-
panel or into the door of the enclosure.
ment the following functions:
3.1.1 How it works – Parallel unit control (the cooling units in the network
The cooling unit (compression refrigeration system) can be switched on and off simultaneously)
is comprised of four main components (see Fig. 2): – Parallel door status message (“door open”)
the evaporator (1), the coolant compressor (2), the – Parallel collective fault message
condenser (3), and the control or expansion valve Data is exchanged via the master/slave connection.
(4), which are connected by suitable pipework. This During commissioning, an address is assigned
circuit is filled with a readily boiling substance, the to each device which also includes the identifier
refrigerant. Coolant R134a (CH2FCF3) is chlorine- “master” or “slave”.
free. Its ozone destruction potential is 0, making it

3 Device description
3.1.4 Safety equipment 3.1.6 Filter mats
– In the cooling cycle, the cooling unit has a tested The entire condenser in the cooling units is finished
GB pressure-operated switch to EN 12 263 which is with a dirt-repelling, easy-to-clean RiNano coating.
set to maximum PS (admissible pressure); this In many cases, therefore, the use of filter media is
operates via an automatic reset device whenever unnecessary, particularly in the case of dry dusts.
the pressure drops again. For coarse dust and lint in the enclosure air, we
– Temperature monitoring prevents the evaporator recommend installing an additional PU foam filter
coil from icing over. If there is a risk of icing over, mat (available as an accessory) in the cooling unit.
the compressor switches itself off and automati- Depending on the incidence of dust, you will need to
cally switches itself on again at higher tempera- replace the filter from time to time.
tures. For air containing oil condensation, we recommend
– The refrigerant compressor and the fans are the use of metal filters (also available as an acces-
equipped with thermal winding shields to protect sory). These may be cleaned with suitable deter-
against excess current and excess temperatures. gents and reused.
– In order to allow a reduction of pressure inside the Function of the filter mat monitor:
compressor and hence a safe restart, once it has Dirt on the filter mat is automatically determined by
been switched off (e.g. upon reaching the set tem- measuring the temperature difference in the external
perature via the door limit switch function or via de- circuit of the cooling unit. As the level of filter mat
energising), the device will switch back on with a soiling rises, the temperature difference will increase.
delay of 180 seconds. The nominal value of the temperature difference in
– The device has one (in the case of the Basic con- the external circuit adapts automatically to the rele-
troller) or two (in the case of the Comfort controller) vant operating points in the performance diagrams.
integral floating contacts on the connection clamp Hence there is no need to readjust the nominal value
(system message relay with changeover contact, for different unit operating points.
terminal 3 – 5) which may be used to retrieve
messages from the cooling unit, e.g. via PLC. 3.1.7 Door limit switch
The cooling unit may be operated with a door limit
3.1.5 Condensation switch connected. The door limit switch is not
At high levels of humidity and low temperatures included with the supply (available as an accessory,
inside the enclosure, condensation may form on the Model No. PS 4127.000).
evaporator coil. The door limit switch function causes the fans and
The cooling units (except SK 3302.xxx, SK 3303.xxx the compressor to be switched off after approxi-
and SK 3361.xxx) have automatic, electric conden- mately 15 seconds when the enclosure door is
sate evaporation. The thermal component used for opened (contacts 1 and 2 closed). This prevents the
this purpose is based on self-regulating PTC tech- formation of condensation inside the enclosure while
nology. Condensation arising on the evaporator coil the enclosure door is open. In order to prevent dam-
is collected in a tank in the external circuit of the age to the unit, it is equipped with an ON delay: The
cooling unit, and partially evaporated via the airflow. evaporator fan cuts back in with a delay of approxi-
When the water level rises, the water enters the PTC mately 15 seconds after the door has been closed,
thermal component and is evaporated (through-flow while the condenser fan and compressor switch on
principle). The water vapour flows out of the cooling after approximately 3 minutes.
unit with the airflow from the external fan.
The PTC thermal component is permanently con- Note:
nected and has no switchpoint. It is protected
For Basic controller cooling units with
against short-circuits with miniature fuses. If the fuse
230/115 V and 400 V/2-phase connection,
has tripped, any condensation is drained off via the
the evaporator fan remains operational
safety overflow.
even with the door open.
For unit types SK 3302.xxx, SK 3303.xxx and
SK 3361.xxx, the condensation is routed downwards
out of the unit via a drain pipe on the evaporator coil
divider panel. For this purpose, a hose must be con-
nected to the condensate nozzle (see “4.4 Connect-
ing the condensate drain”, page 11). External con-
densate evaporators are available as accessories
for these unit types (refer also to the accessories in
the Rittal Catalogue).

4 Assembly and connection
3.1.8 Additional interface X3 4 Assembly and connection
Note: 4.1 Choosing an installation site
GB
The electrical signals at the interface are When choosing an installation site for the enclosure,
extra-low voltages (not safety extra-low please observe the following:
voltages to EN 60 335). – The installation site and the positioning of the
An additional interface card may be connected to cooling unit must be selected in such a way as to
the 9-pole SUB-D connector X3 in order to incorpo- ensure good ventilation (distances between units
rate the cooling unit into superordinate monitoring and distances between the unit and the wall must
systems (available as an accessory, interface card be at least 200 mm in each case).
Model No. SK 3124.200). – The cooling unit must be installed and operated in
a vertical position (maximum deviation: 2°).
3.2 Proper usage – The site must be free from excessive contamina-
Rittal enclosure cooling units were developed and tion and moisture.
designed in accordance with the state of the art and – The ambient temperature must not exceed 55°C.
the recognized rules governing technical safety. – It must be possible to create a condensate drain
Nevertheless, if used improperly, they may pose a (see “4.4 Connecting the condensate drain”,
threat to life and limb or cause damage to property. page 11).
The device is only intended for cooling enclosures. – The mains connection data as stated on the rating
Any other use shall be deemed improper. The manu- plate of the device must be guaranteed.
facturer will not be liable for any damages caused as
a result of improper use, or for incorrect assembly, 4.2 Assembly instructions
installation or use. All risk shall be borne solely by the
user. 4.2.1 General
Proper usage shall also include the observance of all – Check the packaging carefully for signs of damage.
valid documents and compliance with the inspection Traces of oil on damaged packaging are an indica-
and servicing conditions. tion of refrigerant loss and leakages. Any packaging
damage may be the cause of a subsequent func-
3.3 Scope of supply tional failure.
The unit is supplied in a packaging unit in a fully – The enclosure must be sealed on all sides (IP 54).
assembled state. Condensation will occur if the enclosure is not air-
Please check the delivery for completeness: tight.
– In order to avoid excessive condensation in the
Qty. Description
enclosure, we recommend installing a door limit
1 Enclosure cooling unit switch (e.g. PS 4127.000) which deactivates the
1 Dispatch bag: cooling unit when the enclosure door is opened
1 – Assembly and installation instructions (see “3.1.7 Door limit switch”, page 6).
1 – Assembly, installation and
operating instructions on CD-ROM
1 – Self-adhesive tape
1 – Connector X1
4 – 10 – Threaded rods
1 – Declaration of conformity
– Nuts, washers
1 Drilling template
Tab. 1: Scope of supply

4.2.2 Layout of the electronic components x
in the enclosure
GB
Note:
Risk of condensation!
When arranging the electronic com-
ponents inside the enclosure, please
ensure that the cold airflow from the
cooling unit is not directed at active
components. Please ensure that the cold
airflow is not pointing directly at the
warm exhaust airflow from active com-
ponents such as converters. This may
lead to an air short-circuit and therefore
prevent adequate climate control, or may
even cause the cooling unit’s internal Fig. 4: Air circulation inside the enclosure
safety devices to cease cooling
operation. 4.3 Fitting the cooling unit
The enclosure cooling unit may optionally be exter-
nally mounted on the enclosure (1), partially inter-
nally mounted (2) or fully internally mounted (3):
1 2 3
Fig. 3: Never direct the cold air flow at active components Fig. 5: Installation method
Air diversion components are available as acces- To this end, cut the side panel or door of the enclo-
sories – please refer to the Rittal Catalogue under sure as per the drilling template included with the
“System climate control”. supply, and drill the relevant holes.
It is important to ensure even air circulation inside the
enclosure. Under no circumstances should air inlet Note:
and outlet openings be obstructed, otherwise the Units of type SK 3302.xxx can only be either
cooling performance of the unit will be reduced. externally mounted or fully internally
Measure the distance “x” (see Fig. 4) from electronic mounted.
components and other installed enclosures so that Units of type SK 3332.xxx can only be either
the required air circulation is not obstructed and pre- externally mounted or partially internally
vented. mounted.
For mounting the units SK 3328.xxx,
SK 3329.xxx and SK 3332.xxx in the TS side
panel or rear panel, we recommend the use
of enclosure panel fasteners TS 8800.071
(see Rittal Catalogue).

4.3.1 Cutting out the enclosure
• Stick the supplied drilling template onto the side
panel or door of the enclosure using adhesive GB
tape.
There are dimensioning lines on the drilling template
to suit the various installation options for your cooling
unit.
• Using the dimension drawings (see Appendix),
identify the valid lines and dimensions for your
installation type on the drilling template.
Risk of injury! Fig. 8: Secure the cooling unit (SK 3302.1xx only)
Carefully deburr all drilled holes and Only for SK 3302.xxx:
cut-outs to prevent injuries caused by • Before installing, remove the four screws as
sharp edges. shown.
• Mark, drill and deburr the holes.
• Make the cut-outs including the line width as per
the drilling template. 4x
Deburr the cut-outs.
4.3.2 External mounting of the cooling unit

• Cut the supplied sealing tape to the correct length
and stick it carefully along the back of the unit so
that no gaps are left at the joints.
Fig. 9: Only for SK 3302.xxx: Remove the four screws
4.3.3 Partial internal mounting of the cooling unit

• Carefully remove the louvred grille and, where
Fig. 6: Attach the sealing tape applicable, the infill panel, from the enclosure by
• Screw the supplied grub screws into the blind nuts pulling forwards.
on the rear of the unit. • Carefully disconnect the connector from the rear of
• Secure the unit using the washers and nuts the display and gently push it inwards through the
supplied. cable gland.
Fig. 7: Secure the cooling unit

(all models except SK 3302.1xx)
Fig. 10: Remove the louvred grille & disconnect the display
Risk of damage!
GB Stability of the cooling unit is only
guaranteed in its assembled state.
Brace the rear enclosure half to prevent
it from falling over before removing the
front enclosure half.
• Loosen the four nuts on the front enclosure half and
pull the enclosure forwards by approx. 5 cm.
• Loosen the flat-pin connectors of the PE conductor
between the two enclosure halves.
• Disconnect the fan connection.
• Remove the front enclosure tray completely.

• Connect the fan connector and PE conductor.
• Mount the front enclosure tray using the washers
and nuts.
Fig. 11: Remove the cover

• Remove the four spacer bolts.
and stick it carefully along the inside of the rear
enclosure half so that no gaps are left at the
connection points.
Fig. 14: Connect the display connector

• Carefully connect the display connector.
• Push the louvred grille and, where applicable,
the infill panel, onto the enclosure.
Fig. 12: Attach the sealing tape
• Push the rear enclosure half into the mounting

cut-out and secure it with the four spacer bolts.
• Push the display cable through the cable gland of
the front enclosure half.

4.3.4 Full internal mounting of the cooling unit
• Carefully remove the louvred grille and the infill
panel from the enclosure by pulling forwards. GB
• Carefully disconnect the connector from the rear of
the display.

• Where necessary, additionally secure the unit
using the supplied mounting plates as shown in
Fig. 17.
• Carefully connect the display connector.
Fig. 15: Remove the louvred grille and disconnect the • Push the louvred grille and, where applicable,
display
the infill panel, onto the enclosure.
and stick it carefully along the front enclosure half 4.4 Connecting the condensate drain
so that no gaps are left at the connection points. Unit types SK 3302.xxx, SK 3303.xxx and
SK 3361.xxx support the installation of a condensate
discharge hose (Ø 1/2˝).
The condensate drain
– must be laid with a suitable and constant gradient
(no siphoning)
– must be laid without kinks
– must not have a reduced cross-section if
extended.
The condensate hose is available as an accessory
(refer to Accessories in the Rittal Catalogue).
Fig. 16: Attach the sealing tape

• Loosen the four nuts and washers from the front
enclosure half.
• Push the unit into the mounting cut-out from the
inside of the enclosure, and secure it to the
enclosure from the outside using the washers and
nuts.
Fig. 18: Connect the condensate drain

• Connect a suitable hose to the condensate nozzle
and secure it with a hose clip.
• Lay the condensate hose into a pay-off or into
the external condensate evaporator (refer to
Accessories in the Rittal Catalogue).

4.5 Notes on electrical installation – Install the pre-fuse cited on the rating plate (minia-
ture circuit-breaker with “K” characteristic, motor
GB When carrying out the electrical installation, it is
important to observe all valid national and regional circuit-breaker or transformer circuit-breaker) to
regulations as well as the provisions of the respon- protect the cable and equipment from short-cir-
sible power supply company. Electrical installation cuits. Select the motor circuit-breaker/transformer
must only be carried out by a qualified electrician circuit-breaker in accordance with the information
who is responsible for compliance with the existing supplied on the rating plate: Set it to the minimum
standards and regulations. value specified. This will achieve the best short-
circuit protection for cables and equipment.
4.5.1 Connection data Example: Specified setting range MS/TS
– The connection voltage and frequency must match 6.3 – 10 A; set to 6.3 A.
the values specified on the rating plate.
– The cooling unit must be connected to the mains 4.5.3 Three-phase devices
via an all-pin isolating device, which ensures at – The three-phase variant of models SK 3304.xxx,
least 3 mm contact opening when switched off. SK 3305.xxx, SK 3328.xxx, SK 3329.xxx and
– No additional temperature control must be con- SK 3332.xxx must be connected to a TN grid with
nected upstream of the device at the supply end. earthed star point (current setting as per rating
– Install the pre-fuse cited on the rating plate (minia- plate). Special-voltage three-phase units must
ture circuit-breaker “K” characteristic or slow fuse) be protected with a transformer circuit-breaker
to protect the cable and equipment from short- (category AC-3) as per the rating plate.
circuits. – Units designed for three phase 400/460 V have
– The mains connection must ensure noiseless additional monitoring of the rotary field or the
potential equalisation. absence of a phase. If the rotary field is incorrect
or a phase is absent, the unit will not run.
4.5.2 Overvoltage protection and
supply line load 4.5.4 Door limit switch
– The unit does not have its own overvoltage protec- – Each door limit switch must only be assigned to
tion. Measures must be taken by the operator at one cooling unit.
the supply end to ensure effective lightning and – Several door limit switches may be connected in
overvoltage protection. The mains voltage must parallel and operated on one cooling unit.
not exceed a tolerance of ±10 %. – The minimum cross-section for the connection
– In accordance with IEC 61 000-3-11, the unit is cable is 0.3 mm2 for a cable length of 2 m.
intended solely for use at sites with a continuous – The line resistance to the door limit switch must not
current-carrying capacity (incoming mains power exceed a maximum of 50 Ω.
supply) of more than 100 A per phase and with a – The door limit switch only supports a floating con-
supply voltage of 400/230 V. If necessary, the nection; no external voltages.
power supply company must be consulted to – The contact of the door limit switch must be closed
ensure that the continuous current-carrying capac- when the door is open.
ity at the point of connection to the public grid is The safety extra-low voltage for the door limit switch
sufficient for connection of such a unit. is provided by the internal power pack: Current
– The fans and compressors in single- and three- approx. 30 mA DC.
phase units are intrinsically safe (thermal winding • Connect the door limit switch to terminals 1 and 2
protection). This also applies to the transformer of the connector.
versions of types SK 3304.110, SK 3304.510,
SK 3305.110, SK 3305.510, SK 3328.110, 4.5.5 Notes on the flicker standard
SK 3328.510, SK 3329.110 and SK 3329.510 and The flicker limits specified in standard
to special-voltage units which are likewise EN 61 000-3-3 or -3-11 are adhered to, provided
equipped with a transformer. the supply impedance is less than approx. 1.5 Ω.
Where necessary, the unit operator should measure
his connected impedance or consult the responsible
power supply company. If there is no way of influ-
encing the supply impedance and sensitive installed
components (e.g. BUS) experience interference, a
line reactor or starting-current limiting device should
be connected upstream of the cooling unit to restrict
the startup current of the cooling unit.

4.5.6 Potential equalisation
Rittal recommends connecting a conductor with a Note:
nominal cross-section of at least 6 mm2 to the poten- The electrical signals at the X2 interface are GB
tial equalisation connection point in wall-mounted extra-low voltages (not safety extra-low
cooling units, and incorporating it into the existing voltages to EN 60 335-1).
potential equalisation system. When interconnecting, please note the following:
According to the standard, the PE conductor in the – De-energise the cooling units to be connected.
mains connection cable is not classified as an equi-
– Ensure proper electrical insulation.
potential bonding conductor.
– Make sure the cables are not laid in parallel to
4.6 Carrying out the electrical installation power lines.
– Make sure that the lines are short.
4.6.1 Bus connection
(only in conjunction with several units with
a Comfort controller)
When using several cooling units, the serial device
interface can be used to connect up to 10 cooling
units with the bus cable (Model No. SK 3124.100).

GB CMC
RTT Adr.: 09 RTT Adr.: 11 RTT Adr.: 12 RTT Adr.: 19

Master Slave Slave Slave
X1 X1 X1 X1
X2 X3 X2 X3 X2 X3 X2 X3
St. X2 X3 Bu. St. X2 St. X2 St. X2
X2 X2 X2 X2 X2
Bu. St. Bu. St. Bu.
3
Fig. 19: Connection example: Master/slave operation

Key
1 Serial interface X2 Master/slave connection Sub-D, 9-pole
2 Serial interface cable X3 Serial interface Sub-D, 9-pole
3 Master/slave bus cable (Model No. SK 3124.100) St. Sub-D connector, 9-pole
RTT Rittal TopTherm cooling units Bu. Sub-D jack, 9-pole
X1 Supply connection/door limit switch/alarms Adr. Address
X2 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2
Adr.: 06 Adr.: 11 Adr.: 12 Adr.: 13 Adr.: 14 Adr.: 15

1 2 2 2 2 2
L2 L2
X10 L1 N PE 1 2 3 4 5 X10 L1 L2 L3 PE 1 2 3 4 5 X10 L1 N PE 1 2 3 4 5 X10 L1 L2 L3 PE 1 2 3 4 5 X10 L1 L2 L3 PE 1 2 3 4 5 X10 L1 L2 L3 PE 1 2 3 4 5
X2
X10
NPE 1 2 3 4 5
L2
L1
Adr.: 16
1 2 3 4 5 6
3 4 4 3 2
Fig. 20: Connection example: Door limit switch and master/slave operation
Key 4.6.2 Installing the power supply
1 Master cooling unit • Complete the electrical installation by following the
2 Slave cooling units wiring plan on the rear of the cooling unit
3 Twin-door enclosure with two door limit switches
(see Fig. 1 on page 5, for key see page 20).
4 Enclosure with door limit switch
• If you would like the system messages from the
cooling unit to be evaluated via the system
message relay, you should also connect a suitable
low-voltage cable to connection clamps 3 – 5.

SK 3302.100/.110, SK 3303.100/.110, SK 3302.200/.210, SK 3303.200/.210,
SK 3302.300/.310, SK 3361.100/.110, SK 3361.200/.210 GB
PE
21
5
Mains S1 A2
22
L1 L2 R1
L2
X1 L1 PE 1 2 3 4 5
N
1 2 3 1 2 3 2 1 2
NTC I red B1
L N 2
Power S1 NTC E blue B2
Kx
8
Term
A1
2
F2 1 P
M1 M2 M4
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 F2
C4
C1
S
R C2
M M
C F3 1~ 1~
M2 M4
M1
Fig. 21: Electrical wiring plan no. 1
SK 3303.500/.510, SK 3303.600/.610, SK 3361.500/.510, SK 3361.600/.610

21
Mains S1
22
PE
5 L2
X1 L1 N PE 1 2 3 4 5 X2 X3
3 8 A2
1 2 3 1 2 3 2 1 2
NTC I red B1
MS1 Serial
L N S1 K2 2
K1 NTC E blue B2
Power
Kx 2
NTC C white B3
PE 2
NTC A yellow B4
2
Level green B5
4
A1 Term
2
M1 M2 M4 F2 1 P F2
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
C4
PE
C1
S
R
C2
M M
C F3 1~ 1~
M2 M4
M1

SK 3361.540/.640
GB
L1 L2 PE
21
400 V S1
T1
22
230 V A2
PE
5 L2
X1 L1 N PE 1 2 3 4 5 X2 X3
3 8
1 2 3 2
1 2 3 2 1 B1
MS1 Serial NTC I red
K2 K1 2
L N S1 NTC E blue B2
Power Kx 2
NTC C white B3
PE 2
NTC A yellow B4
A1 2
Level green B5
4
Term
2
M1 M2 M4 F2 1 P
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
F2
C4
PE
C1
S R C2
M M
C F3 1~ 1~
M2 M4
M1
SK 3304.100/.200
21
Mains S1
22
PE
5
L2
X1 L1 PE 1 2 3 4 5 R1
N L1 L2
F11
L1 L2 A2
T1 E1
L N
1 2 3 1 2 3 2 1 2
NTC I red B1
PE
L N 2
Kx 8
Term
A1
2
F2 1 P F2
M1 M2 M4
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
C1
C4
1
S R
M M
C2
F3 1~ 1~
3
C
M2 M4
M1

SK 3305.100/.110, SK 3328.100/.110, SK 3329.100/.110, SK 3305.200/.210,
SK 3328.200/.210, SK 3329.200/.210, SK 3366.100/.110, SK 3377.100/.110, GB
SK 3366.200/.210, SK 3377.200/.210
21
Mains S1
22
PE
5
L2
X1 L1 PE 1 2 3 4 5 R1
N L1 L2
F11
L1 L2 A2
T1 E1
L N
1 2 3 1 2 3 2 1 2
PE NTC I red B1
L N 2
Kx 8
Term
A1
2
F2 1 P F2
M1 M2 M4
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
A3 C4
A R
C 4
C12
1
P C11
2
5
M M
C2
1~ 1~
F3
M1 M2 M4
SK 3304.140, SK 3304.142, SK 3305.140, SK 3305.142, SK 3328.140, SK 3329.140,

SK 3304.240, SK 3305.240, SK 3328.240, SK 3329.240, SK 3366.140/.240, SK 3377.140/.240
21
Mains S1
22
PE
5
X1 L1 L2 L3 PE 1 2 3 4 5
L1 L2 R1
F11 F12
A2
T1 E1
3 2 1 1 2 2 4 1 3 2
NTC I red B1
PE
R S T S1 2
Power NTC E blue B2
Kx 8
Term
A1
M1 F3 F2 M2 F4 M4 F5
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2
F2
U V
M M
W F3
3~ 3~
M2 M4
M1

SK 3304.500/.600
GB
21
Mains S1
PE
22
5 X2 X3
A2
X1 L2
L1 PE 1 2 3 4 5
N
3 6
L1 L2
F11
T1 E1
L N
2
1 2 3 1 2 3 2 1 NTC I red B1
PE MS1 Serial
L N S1 2
NTC E blue B2
Power
K2 K1 2
NTC C white B3
Kx
2
A1 NTC A yellow B4
2
Level green B5
4
Term
2
M1 M2 M4 F2
1 P
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
F2
C1
C4
1
S R
C2 M M
F3 1~ 1~
3
C
M2 M4
M1
SK 3305.500/.510, SK 3328.500/.510, SK 3329.500/.510, SK 3305.600/.610, SK 3328.600/.610,

SK 3329.600/.610, SK 3366.500/.510, SK 3377.500/.510, SK 3366.600/.610, SK 3377.600/.610
21
PE A2
Mains X2 X3
S1
22
5
3 6
L2 L2
L1 X1 L1 PE 1 2 3 4 5
N N
F11
T1
E1
1 2 3 1 2 3 2 1 2
MS1 Serial NTC I red B1
L N K2 K1 2
Kx
2
NTC C white B3
2
NTC A yellow B4
A1
2
Level green B5
4
Term
2
M1 M2 M4 F2
1 P
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
F2
A3
A R
4 C4
C
C12
1
P C11
2
5
C2 M M
1~ 1~
F3
M1
M2 M4

SK 3304.540, SK 3304.542, SK 3305.540, SK 3305.542, SK 3328.540, SK 3329.540, SK 3304.640,
SK 3305.640, SK 3328.640, SK 3329.640, SK 3366.540, SK 3377.540, SK 3366.640, SK 3377.640 GB
Mains
22 S1
21
PE X1 L1 L2 L3 PE 1 2 3 4 5 X2 X3
5
F11 F12 3 8
A2
T1 E1
3 2 1 1 2 2
2 4 1 3 NTC I red B1
MS1 Serial
Power K2 2
K1 B2
S1 NTC E blue
2
Kx NTC C white B3
2
NTC A yellow B4
2
Level green B5
4
A1 Term
M1 F3 F2 M2 F4 M4 F5
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2
F2
U V
M M
W F3
3~ 3~
M2 M4
M1
SK 3332.140/.240
21
PE Mains S1
22
6 A2
L1 L2 R1
X1 L1 L2 L3 PE 1 2 3 4 5
F11 F12
T1 8
E1
3 2 1 1 2 2 4 1 3 2
Term NTC I red B1
R S T
S1 2
Power NTC E blue B2
Kx
A1
M1 F3 F2 M2 F4 M4 F5
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2
F2
U V
M M
P
3~ 3~
W
M2 M4
M1

SK 3332.540/.640
GB
21
S1
Mains
22
A2
PE
X2 X3
6 X1 L1 L2 L3 PE 1 2 3 4 5
3 8
F11 F12
T1 E1
3 2 1 1 2 2 4 1 3 2
NTC I red B1
MS1 Serial
R S T 2
K2 K1 NTC E blue B2
Power S1
2
Kx NTC C white B3
2
NTC A yellow B4
2
A1 Level green B5
4
Term
M1 F3 F2 M2 F4 M4 F5
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2
U
V F2
M M
P
3~ 3~
W
M2 M4
M1

Key
A1 Power PCB Note:
A2 Basic or Comfort controller For technical data refer to rating plate.
A3 Starter relay and RC element
B1 Temperature sensor, internal temperature
B2 Icing hazard temperature sensor
B3 Temperature sensor, external 1 AC DC
B4 Temperature sensor, external 2 cos f = 1 L/R = 20 ms
B5 Condensate warning sensor (optional)
C1 – C4 Running capacitors I max. = 2 A I min. = 100 mA
E1 Condensate evaporator U max. = 250 V U max. = 200 V
F2 PSAH pressure-operated switch U min. = 18 V
(3302.1x0 has bridge instead of pressostat) I max. = 2 A
F3 Bimetal contact compressor Tab. 2: Contact data
F11/F12 Miniature fuse
K1 Relay collective fault 1
K2 Relay collective fault 2
L1 LED operational green
L2 LED alarm red
M1 Compressor
M2 Condenser fan
M4 Evaporator fan
R1 Potentiometer for setting the temperature
S1 Door limit switch
(without door limit switch: terminal 1, 2 open)
T1 Transformer (optional)
X1 Main connection clamping strip
X2 Master/slave connection
X3 Optional interface

5 Commissioning
4.7 Finalising assembly 4.7.3 Setting the filter mat monitor
(only with Comfort controller)
4.7.1 Installing the filter media Function of the filter mat monitor: GB
The entire condenser in the cooling units is finished Dirt on the filter mat is automatically determined by
with a dirt-repelling, easy-to-clean RiNano coating. measuring the temperature difference in the external
In many cases, therefore, the use of filter media is circuit of the cooling unit (see “6.2.5 Programming
unnecessary, particularly in the case of dry dusts. overview”, page 27). As the level of filter mat soiling
For dry, coarse dust and lint in the air, we recom- rises, the temperature difference will increase. The
mend installing an additional PU foam filter mat nominal value of the temperature difference in the
(available as an accessory) in the cooling unit. For air external circuit adapts automatically to the relevant
containing oil condensation, we recommend the use operating points in the performance diagrams.
of metal filters (also available as an accessory). Hence there is no need to readjust the nominal value
When used in textile plants with heavy lint contami- for different operating points of the cooling unit.
nation, lint screens should be used (available as an
optional extra).
• Pull the louvred air inlet grille from the enclosure.
• Insert the filter mat into the louvred grille as shown 5 Commissioning
in Fig. 32 and push it back onto the enclosure.
Caution! Risk of damage!
The oil must collect in the compressor in
order to ensure lubrication and cooling.
Do not operate the cooling unit for at
least 30 min. after assembling the
equipment.
• Once all the assembly and installation work is
complete, switch on the power supply to the
cooling unit.
The cooling unit will commence operation:
Fig. 32: Installing the filter mat – With Basic controller: The green operating LED
(“line”) is illuminated.
4.7.2 Fitting the cooling unit – With Comfort controller: First the software version
For partial and full internal mounting only. of the controller will appear for approx. 2 sec., then
• Connect the connector to the rear of the display. the enclosure internal temperature will appear in
• Place the louvred grille onto the unit at the front, the 7-segment display.
and press it down until you hear it snap into place. You can now make your individual settings on the
unit e.g. set the temperature or (with Comfort control-
ler only) assign the network identifier etc. (refer to the
chapter on “Operation”).
Fig. 33: Attach the louvred grille and connect the display

6 Operation
6 Operation 6.1.1 Properties
– Three voltage variants are supported:
GB You can operate the cooling unit using the controller
on the front of the device (page 5, Fig. 1, no. 11). – 115 V
Depending on the model, the unit is equipped with – 230 V
a Basic or Comfort controller. – 400/460 V, 3 phases
– Supports multiple voltages without rewiring
6.1 Control using the Basic controller – Integral start-up delay and door limit switch func-
For Model Nos. SK xxxx.100/.110/.140 and tion
SK xxxx.200/.210/.240/.300/.310. – Protective function to prevent icing
– Monitoring of all motors (compressor, condenser
1
fan, evaporator fan)
– Phase monitoring for three-phase units
– Visualisation of the operating status via
LED display:
– Voltage on, device operational
– Door open (only if door limit switch installed)
– Warning of overtemperature
3 4
– High-pressure-operated switch has switched
– Switching hysteresis: 5 K
– Floating system message contact in case of over-
temperature
– Temperature setting
2 (setting range 20 – 55°C) via potentiometer
5 – Test function
The cooling unit operates automatically i.e. after

Fig. 34: Basic controller
switching on the power supply, the evaporator fan
Key (see page 5, Fig. 2) will run continuously and perma-
1 Controller trim panel nently circulate the internal enclosure air. The built-in
2 Temperature setting
basic regulator ensures automatic normal shut-down
3 LED green (“line”)
4 LED red (“alarm”)
operation of the cooling unit by the value of the fixed
5 Reset button preset switching difference of 5 K.

6 Operation
6.1.2 Operating and error display
The Basic controller monitors and controls the cool-
ing unit. It indicates the operating and error statuses GB
via the green and red LEDs (Fig. 34, nos. 3 and 4):
LED State Cause Solution
Green Illuminated Power supply on, –
(line) unit operational
Flashing Only with installed door limit switch: In order to avoid condensation, close the
Enclosure door open enclosure door as quickly as possible.
Only with installed door limit switch: Check the position of the door limit switch
Enclosure door closed
Red Illuminated The enclosure internal temperature is 5 K Check the temperature setting. Check the
(alarm) above the set temperature condenser and clean if necessary. Check the
filter mat and replace if necessary. Check the
heat loss to be dissipated – it must not exceed
the useful cooling output of the cooling unit.
Flashing High-pressure alarm in the cooling circuit Check the temperature setting. Check the
condenser and clean if necessary. Check the
filter mat and replace if necessary. Check the
heat loss to be dissipated – it must not exceed
the useful cooling output of the cooling unit.
After rectifying the fault, you will need to reset
the Basic controller manually (see page 24
“6.1.5 Resetting the Basic controller”).
Only for SK 3302.xxx: Check, replace board if necessary
Connection to board interrupted
Off No No power Check power supply
display
Rotary current phase monitoring: Swap phases
“LED off” = Incorrect phase connection
Tab. 3: Operating and error display of the Basic controller
You may also request the overtermperature mes- 6.1.3 Test mode for the Basic controller
sage (red LED illuminated) via an integral floating The Basic controller is equipped with a test function
contact on the connection clamp of the cooling unit whereby the cooling unit commences cooling opera-
(system message relay with changeover contact, tion independently of the set temperature or door
see connection diagrams under “4.6.2 Installing the limit switch function.
power supply”, page 14): First you must dismantle the trim panel of the con-
– Terminal 3: NC (normally closed) troller.
– Terminal 4: C (connection of the supply voltage to • Switch off the mains voltage.
the system message relay) • Remove the louvred grille or infill panel in which the
– Terminal 5: NO (normally opened) controller is installed.
The definitions NC and NO refer to the de-energised • Release the display lock from behind and pull it
state. As soon as voltage is applied to the cooling forwards slightly.
unit, the system message relay is picked up, so that
the relay contacts change status (contact 3 – 4 open;
contact 4 – 5 closed). This is the normal operating
state of the cooling unit. As soon as an error mes-
sage occurs or the power supply is interrupted, the
relay drops out.
Fig. 35: Releasing the trim panel of the Basic controller

6 Operation
• Carefully raise the trim panel e.g. using your thumb 6.2 Control using the Comfort controller
or a flat screwdriver, and remove it.
GB Now you can start test mode.
For Model Nos. SK xxxx.500/.510/.540 and
SK xxxx.600/.610/.640.
• Hold the rubberised potentiometer display (see
1 2
page 22, Fig. 34, item 5) down while you switch the
mains power back on, and keep the button (5) held
down for a further 5 seconds (for access to the
potentiometer, see also 6.1.1).
The cooling unit will commence operation. After
approximately 5 minutes or upon reaching 15°C, test
mode will end. The device cuts out and changes to
normal operation.
6.1.4 Setting the temperature

4 3
Note: Fig. 36: Comfort controller
In the case of the Basic controller, the Key
temperature is preset in the factory to 1 Programming button, also display of the set
+35°C. temperature unit (degrees Celsius)
In order to save energy, do not set the 2 Set button
temperature any lower than is actually 3 Programming button, also display of the set
necessary. temperature unit (degrees Fahrenheit)
4 7-segment display
To change the temperature setting:
• Dismantle the trim panel of the controller as 6.2.1 Properties
described in “6.1.3 Test mode for the Basic – Three voltage variants are supported:
controller”, page 23. – 115 V
• Set the required temperature on the temperature – 230 V
setting device (page 22, Fig. 34). – 400/460 V, 3 phases
• Carefully push the trim panel onto the display until – Supports multiple voltages without rewiring
you hear it snap into place. – Integral start-up delay and door limit switch
• Re-insert the display into the infill panel or louvred function
grille. – Protective function to prevent icing
• Re-attach the louvred grille or infill panel to the – Monitoring of all motors (compressor, condenser
cooling unit. fan, evaporator fan)
– Phase monitoring for three-phase units
6.1.5 Resetting the Basic controller
– Master/slave function with up to 10 units. One
Following a high-pressure alarm in the cooling cycle,
device functions as a master unit. Once the set
and once the cause has been rectified, you will need
temperature is reached by one of the connected
to manually reset the Basic controller:
slave devices or in the event of the door limit switch
• Dismantle the trim panel of the Basic controller
function, the affected slave unit will report to the
as described in “6.1.4 Setting the temperature”,
master unit, which will switch all the other cooling
page 24.
units on or off as required.
• Press the reset button (Fig. 34, no. 5) for at least
– Switching hysteresis: Settable from 2 – 10 K, preset
3 sec.
to 5 K
The red LED is extinguished.
– Visualisation of the current enclosure internal tem-
• Re-install the Basic controller. perature and all fault messages in the 7-segment
display
– Using an interface card (Model No. SK 3124.100),
the unit may be incorporated into superordinate
remote monitoring systems such as the Rittal
Computer Multi Control CMC.

6 Operation
The cooling unit operates automatically i.e. after In principle, programming is identical for all variable
switching on the power supply, the evaporator fan parameters.
(see page 5, Fig. 2) will run continuously and perma- To enter programming mode: GB
nently circulate the internal enclosure air. The com- • Press button 2 (“Set”) for approx. 5 seconds.
pressor and condenser fan are regulated by the The controller is now in programming mode. While in
Comfort controller. programming mode, if you do not press any buttons
The Comfort controller has a 7-segment display for approx. 30 seconds, the display will first flash,
(Fig. 36, no. 4). After switching on the power supply, then the controller will switch back to normal display
the current software version initially appears on this mode. The display “Esc” indicates that any amend-
display for approx. 2 seconds. In regular operation, ments made have not been saved.
the display shows both the temperature (in degrees • Press the programming buttons ▲ (°C) or ▼ (°F)
Celsius or Fahrenheit – users may switch between to switch between the settable parameters
the two) and any error messages. (see Tables 4 and 5).
The current enclosure internal temperature is usually • Press button 2 (“Set”) to select the displayed
displayed permanently. In the event of an error mes- parameter for editing.
sage, this will alternate with the temperature display.
The current value of this parameter is displayed.
The unit is programmed using buttons 1 – 3 (Fig. 36).
• Press one of the programming buttons ▲ (°C) or
The relevant parameters likewise appear in the dis-
▼ (°F).
play.
The display “Cod” will appear. In order to be able to
6.2.2 Launching test mode change a value, you must enter the authorisation
The Comfort controller is equipped with a test func- code “22”.
tion whereby the cooling unit commences cooling • Keep the programming button ▲ (°C) held down
operation independently of the set temperature or until “22” appears.
door limit switch function. • Press button 2 (“Set”) to confirm the code.
• Press buttons 1 and 2 simultaneously (Fig. 36) for You can now alter the parameter within the preset
at least 5 sec. limits.
The cooling unit will commence operation. • Press one of the programming buttons ▲ (°C) or
After approximately 5 minutes or upon reaching ▼ (°F) until the required value appears.
15°C, test mode will end. The device cuts out and • Press button 2 (“Set”) to confirm the amendment.
changes to normal operation. You can now alter other parameters in the same way.
There is no need to re-enter the authorisation code
6.2.3 General information about programming “22”.
Using buttons 1, 2 and 3 (Fig. 36) you can change • To exit programming mode, press button 2 (“Set”)
24 parameters within the preset ranges (min. value – for a further 5 seconds or so.
max. value). “Acc” will appear in the display to indicate that the
Tables 4 and 5 show the parameters you are able to changes have been saved. The display will then
change. Fig. 37 of page 27 shows which buttons switch back to regular operation (enclosure internal
need to be pressed. temperature).
You can also program the Comfort controller using
Note on switching hysteresis: a diagnosis software package (Model No.
With a low hysteresis and short switching SK 3159.100), the supply of which also includes a
cycles, there is a risk that cooling may not connection cable to the PC. The cable connector on
be adequate or that only partial sections of the rear of the Comfort controller display serves as
the enclosure are cooled. an interface.
Note on temperature settings:

With the Comfort controller, the temperature
is preset in the factory to +35°C.
In order to save energy, do not set the
temperature any lower than is actually
necessary.
Note on useful cooling output:

Interactive performance diagrams for
calculating the useful cooling output may
be found at www.rittal.com.

6 Operation
6.2.4 Variable parameters
GB See also Fig. 37 on page 27.
Progr. Display Parameter Min. Max. Factory Description
level screen value value setting
1 St Setting for 20 55 35 The nominal value of the internal enclosure

enclosure internal temperature is preset at the factory to 35°C and
temperature Ti may be altered within a range of 20 – 55°C.
2 Fi Filter mat 10 60 99 To activate filter mat monitoring, set the display to
monitoring (= off) at least 10 K above the temperature differential
displayed in programming mode “Fi”. Filter mat
monitoring is preset to “deactivated” in the factory
(99 = off).
3 Ad Master/slave 0 19 0 See “6.2.7 Setting the master/slave identifier”,
identifier page 29.
4 CF Changeover 0 1 0 The temperature display can be switched from °C
°C/°F (0) to °F (1). The corresponding LED displays the
current unit of temperature.
5 H1 Setting for 2 10 5 The cooling unit is preset in the factory to a
switching switching hysteresis of 5 K. This parameter should
difference only be changed in consultation with ourselves.
(hysteresis) Please contact us for advice.
6 H2 Differential for error 3 15 5 If the internal enclosure temperature exceeds the
message A2 set value by more than 5 K, then error message A2
(internal enclosure temperature too high) appears
on the display terminal. If necessary, the differ-
ential may be altered here within the range from
3 – 15 K.
Tab. 4: Variable parameters

6 Operation
6.2.5 Programming overview
GB
= 5 sec.
= 5 sec.
Fig. 37: Programming overview

6 Operation
6.2.6 Defining system messages for evaluation
System messages are shown on the display of the
GB Comfort controller via the displays A1 to A20 and E0.
A more detailed explanation of the system messages
may be found in section “6.2.8 Evaluating system
messages”, page 29.
See also Fig. 37 on page 27.
Progr. Display Min. Max. Factory Type or location of fault
level screen value value setting
7 A1 0 2 0 Enclosure door open
8 A2 0 2 0 Internal temperature of enclosure too high
9 A3 0 2 0 Filter monitoring
10 A4 0 2 0 Ambient temperature too high/too low
11 A5 0 2 0 Icing hazard
12 A6 0 2 1 PSAH pressure-operated switch
13 A7 0 2 2 Evaporator coil
14 A8 0 2 1 Condensate warning
15 A9 0 2 1 Condenser fan blocked or defective
16 A10 0 2 1 Evaporator fan blocked or defective
17 A11 0 2 2 Compressor
18 A12 0 2 1 Condenser
19 A13 0 2 1 Ambient temperature sensor
20 A14 0 2 1 Icing temperature sensor
21 A15 0 2 1 Condensate warning temperature sensor
22 A16 0 2 1 Internal temperature sensor
23 A17 0 2 1 Phase monitoring
24 A18 0 2 0 EPROM
25 A19 0 2 0 LAN/Master-Slave
Tab. 5: System messages evaluable via relay
The system messages A1 – A19 may additionally be The definitions NC and NO refer to the de-energised
evaluated via two floating system message relays. state. As soon as power is applied to the cooling unit,
In this way, one of the two system message relays the system message relay picks up, so that the relay
may be allocated to each system message. contacts change status (contact 3 – 4 open; contact
System message relays with changeover and nor- 4 – 5 closed). This is the normal operating state of the
mally open contact: see connection diagrams under cooling unit. As soon as a system message occurs or
“4.6.2 Installing the power supply”, page 14: the power supply is interrupted, the relay drops out.
– Terminal 3: NC (normally closed)
– Terminal 4: C (connection of the supply voltage to Program system messages with the value
the system message relay) 0: System message is not sent to the system
– Terminal 5: NO (normally opened) message relay, but merely appears in the
display
1: System messages is evaluated by relay 1
2: System messages is evaluated by relay 2

6 Operation
6.2.7 Setting the master/slave identifier
When several cooling units are linked together (up to
a maximum of 10), one of the cooling units must be Master Slave Slave
GB
defined as the “master” and the others as “slaves”. 02 11 12
To this end, assign a corresponding identifier
(address) to each cooling unit which will enable the Fig. 38: Master/slave connection (example)
cooling unit to be identified in the network.
For further connection examples, see “4.6.1 Bus
If one of the slave units reaches the set temperature
connection (only in conjunction with several units
or in the case of the door limit switch function, the
with a Comfort controller)”, page 13.
affected slave unit will report to the master unit,
For details of how to set the identifier, see “6.2.4
which will then switch off all the other cooling units.
Variable parameters”, page 26 or “6.2.5 Program-
ming overview”, page 27, parameter “Ad”.
Notes:
– Only one unit may be configured as 6.2.8 Evaluating system messages
master, and its identifier must match the In the Comfort controller, system messages are indi-
number of slave units. cated by a number in the display.
– The slave units must have different Following the appearance of messages A03, A06
identifiers. and A07 and after rectifying their cause, you will
– The identifiers must be in ascending need to reset the Comfort controller (see “6.2.9
order without any gaps. Resetting the Comfort controller”, page 31).
On the master cooling unit (00 = factory setting),

set the number of slave units contained in the net-
work:
01: Master with 1 slave cooling unit
02: Master with 2 slave cooling units
On the slave cooling unit (00 = factory setting),

set its own address:
11: Slave cooling unit no. 1

6 Operation
Display System message Possible cause Measures to rectify the fault
GB screen
A01 Enclosure door open Door open or door limit switch Close door, position door limit switch correctly,
incorrectly positioned check connection if necessary
A02 Enclosure interior Cooling capacity too low/ Check cooling capacity
temperature too high unit underdimensioned.
Error as a consequence of messages A03 to
A17.
A03 Filter monitoring Filter mat soiled Clean or exchange;
reset the Comfort controller
A04 Ambient temperature too Ambient temperature outside Increase or lower the ambient temperature
high/too low of admissible operating range (e.g. heat or ventilate room)
(+10°C to +60°C)
A05 Icing hazard Operational display in case of Set the enclosure interior temperature higher.
icing hazard. Check the evaporator fan; release or exchange
Evaporator fan may be mechanically if necessary.
blocked or defective.
A06 PSAH pressure-operated Ambient temperature too high Lower the ambient temperature;
switch reset the Comfort controller
Condenser soiled Clean the condenser;
Filter mat soiled Clean or exchange;
Condenser fan defective Replace;
E-valve defective Repair by refrigeration engineer;
PSAH pressure-operated switch defective Exchange by refrigeration engineer;
A07 Evaporator coil Lack of coolant; sensor in front of or behind Repair by refrigeration engineer;
condenser defective. reset the Comfort controller
A08 Condensate warning Condensate discharge kinked or blocked Check condensate discharge; remove any
kinks or blockages in the hose
Only in units with optional Check the evaporation unit, exchange if
condensate evaporation necessary
A09 Condenser fan Blocked or defective Clear the blockage; exchange if necessary
A10 Evaporator fan Blocked or defective Clear the blockage; exchange if necessary
A11 Compressor Compressor overloaded No action required;
(inner winding protection) unit switches on again independently.
Defective Exchange by refrigeration engineer
(check by measuring the winding resistance)
A12 Condenser temperature Open or short circuit Replace
sensor
A13 Ambient temperature Open or short circuit Replace
sensor
A14 Temperature sensor Open or short circuit Replace
Icing
Condensate warning
Internal temperature
A17 Phase monitoring For three-phase devices only: Exchange two phases
Incorrect rotary field/phase absent
A18 EPROM error New board obstructed Software update needed (only following board
installation with more recent software): enter
the programming level with Code 22;
press button 1 and confirm with “Set” until
“Acc” appears. Then disconnect the unit from
the mains and re-connect.
A19 LAN/Master-Slave Master and slave not linked Check setting and/or cable
A20 Voltage drop Error display not shown Result is stored in the log file
E0 Display message Connection problem between display Reset: Switch power supply off, then switch on
and controller board again after approx. 2 sec.
Cable defective; connection loose Exchange the boards
Tab. 6: Troubleshooting with the Comfort controller

7 Inspection and servicing
6.2.9 Resetting the Comfort controller Sequence of maintenance measures:
After the occurrence of faults A03, A06 and A07, – Check the level of dirt.
you will need to reset the Comfort controller. – Filter soiling? Replace the filter if necessary.
GB
• Press buttons 1 (▲) and 3 (▼) (Fig. 36) – Cooling membranes soiled? Clean if necessary.
simultaneously for 5 seconds. – Activate test mode; cooling function OK?
The system messages will disappear and the – Check the noise generation of the compressor and
temperature display will be shown. fans.
7.1.1 Compressed air cleaning

SK 3304.xxx/SK 3305.xxx
Risk of electric shock!

The unit is live.
Switch off the power supply before
opening, and take suitable precautions
to prevent it being switched back on
accidentally.
7.1 General
The cooling circuit is designed in the form of a main-
tenance-free, hermetically sealed system. The cool-
ing unit is filled with the required quantity of coolant Fig. 39: Disconnect the power cord
at the factory, checked for leaks, and subjected to a
functional test run.
The installed maintenance-free fans are mounted on
ball bearings, protected against moisture and dust,
and fitted with a temperature monitor. The life
expectancy is at least 30,000 operating hours.
The cooling unit is thus largely maintenance-free.
All that may be required from time to time is to clean
the components of the external air circuit using a
vacuum cleaner or compressed air if they become
visibly dirty. Any stubborn, oily stains may be
removed using a non-flammable detergent, such
as degreaser.
Maintenance interval: 2000 operating hours.
Depending on the level of contamination in the am-
bient air, the maintenance interval may be reduced
to suit the air pollution intensity.
Caution!
Risk of fire!
Never use flammable
liquids for cleaning.
Fig. 40: Remove the upper louvred grille

GB
Fig. 41: Remove the lower louvred grille Fig. 43: Disconnect the connector from the display (1)
Fig. 44: Disconnect the connector from the display (2)
Fig. 42: Remove the infill panel

GB
Fig. 48: Disconnect the fan connectors
Fig. 45: Cooling unit without grille Fig. 49: Remove the cover (loosen the four screws)
Fig. 46: Remove the external circuit fan Fig. 50: Push back the display cable
(loosen the four screws)
Fig. 47: Remove the fan Fig. 51: Push the display cable through the cable gland

GB
Fig. 54: Loosen the earthing cable between the cover

and the chassis (1)
Fig. 52: Remove the cover (1)

Fig. 55: Loosen the earthing cable between the cover
and the chassis (2)
Fig. 53: Remove the cover (2)
Fig. 56: Clean out the heat exchanger coil and compressor
chamber using compressed air (1)

GB
Fig. 57: Clean out the heat exchanger coil and compressor Fig. 59: Remove the upper louvred grille (1)
7.1.2 Compressed air cleaning SK 3328.xxx,

SK 3329.xxx, SK 3332.xxx
Fig. 58: Disconnect the power cord
Fig. 60: Remove the upper louvred grille (2)

GB
Fig. 61: Remove the upper louvred grille (3) Fig. 63: Remove the lower louvred grille (2)
Fig. 62: Remove the lower louvred grille (1) Fig. 64: Remove the infill panel

GB
Fig. 65: Disconnect the display cable Fig. 69: Remove the external circuit fan
Fig. 66: Push back the display cable Fig. 70: Disconnect the fan connectors (1)
and press it through the cable gland (1)
Fig. 67: Push back the display cable Fig. 71: Disconnect the fan connectors (2)
and press it through the cable gland (2)
Fig. 68: Loosen the four screws of the external circuit fan Fig. 72: Disconnect the fan connectors (3)

GB
Fig. 73: Disconnect the fan earthing cable (1)
Fig. 74: Disconnect the fan earthing cable (2) Fig. 76: Remove the cover
Fig. 75: Loosen the four screws of the cover Fig. 77: Disconnect the earthing cable (1)

GB
Fig. 78: Disconnect the earthing cable (2) Fig. 80: Clean out the heat exchanger coil and compressor
Fig. 79: Clean out the heat exchanger coil and compressor Fig. 81: Clean out the heat exchanger coil and compressor
chamber using compressed air (1) chamber using compressed air (3)

8 Storage and disposal
8 Storage and disposal
GB
Caution! Risk of damage!
The cooling unit must not be
exposed to temperatures
above +70°C during storage.
During storage, the cooling unit must stand upright.
The closed cooling circuit contains refrigerant and oil
which must be properly disposed of for the sake of
the environment. Disposal can be carried out at the
Rittal plant.
Please contact us for advice.

9 Technical specifications
9 Technical specifications – Observe the mains connection data (voltage and
frequency) as per the specifications on the rating
plate. GB
– Observe the pre-fuse as per the specifications on
the rating plate.
Fig. 82: Rating plate (technical specifications)
Unit Model No. SK
Basic controller,
– 3302.100 3302.110 3302.300 3302.310 3303.100 3303.110 3304.100 3304.110
RAL 7035
Comfort controller,
– – – – – 3303.500 3303.510 3304.500 3304.510
RAL 7035
Basic controller,
– 3302.200 3302.210 – – 3303.200 3303.210 3304.200 3304.210
stainless steel cover
Comfort controller,
– – – – – 3303.600 3303.610 3304.600 3304.610
V 230, 1~, 115, 1~, 230, 1~, 115, 1~, 230, 1~, 115, 1~, 230, 1~, 115, 1~,
Rated voltage
Hz 50/60 60 50/60 60 50/60 60 50/60 50/60
Rated current A 1.6/1.7 3.3 1.6/1.7 4.0 2.6/2.6 5.7 5.4/5.0 10.6/11.1
Start-up current A 3.0/3.4 8.0 4.3/5.3 12.0 5.1/6.4 11.5 12.0/14.0 26.0/28.0
Pre-fuse T A 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 16.0
Motor circuit breaker – – – – – – – – –
Transformer circuit-breaker – – – – – – – – –
Miniature circuit-breaker/
–
Fuse
Useful cooling
.
output Qk L 35 L 35 W 300/320 300 300/320 300 500/610 500 1000/1060 1000/1060
to DIN 3168 L 35 L 50 W 150/170 150 150/160 150 280/350 280 790/840 790/840
Power
consumption Pel L 35 L 35 W 245/255 290 285/300 290 360/380 470 825/775 850/800
to DIN 3168 L 35 L 50 W 255/275 340 320/340 340 420/390 500 875/835 900/875
.
Refrigeration factor ε = Qk/Pel 1.2 1.2 1.1 1.1 1.4 1.4 1.2 1.2
Refrigerant
– Type – R134a R134a R134a R134a R134a R134a
– Filling g 100 95 170 170 325 325
Admissible pressure bar 25 25 25 25 28 28 25 25
Temperature setting range °C +20 to +55
Noise level dB (A) < 61 < 61 < 61 < 61 < 61 < 61 < 61 < 64
Protection category to
EN 60 529/10.91
– Internal circuit – IP 54
– External circuit – IP 34
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 280 x 550 x 140 525 x 340 x 153 280 x 550 x 200 400 x 950 x 260
Weight kg 13 13 13 17 17 17 39 44

Unit Model No. SK
GB Basic controller,
RAL 7035
–
3304.140
3304.142
3305.100 3305.110
3305.140
3305.142
3328.100 3328.110 3328.140 3329.100
Comfort controller, 3304.540 3305.540

– 3305.500 3305.510 3328.500 3328.510 3328.540 3329.500
RAL 7035 3304.542 3305.542
Basic controller,
– 3304.240 3305.200 3305.210 3305.240 3328.200 3328.210 3328.240 3329.200
Comfort controller,
– 3304.640 3305.600 3305.610 3350.640 3328.600 3328.610 3328.640 3329.600
400, 3~, 50/ 230, 1~, 115, 1~, 400, 3~, 50/ 230, 1~, 115, 1~, 400, 3~, 50/ 230, 1~,
Rated voltage V, Hz
460, 3~, 60 50/60 50/60 460, 3~, 60 50/60 50/60 460, 3~, 60 50/60
Rated current A 2.8/2.9 6.0/6.5 12.1/13.6 2.6/2.9 7.5/9.1 14.7/17.3 2.8/3.3 8.6/10.6
Start-up current A 11.5/12.7 22.0/24.0 42.0/46.0 12.2/11.3 22.0/26.0 36.0/39.0 6.8/7.8 21.0/21.0
Pre-fuse T A 6.3 – 10.0 16.0 20.0 6.3 – 10.0 16.0 25.0 6.3 – 10.0 16.0
Motor circuit breaker – – – – – –
Transformer circuit-breaker – – – – – – – – –
Miniature circuit-breaker/
– – – –
Fuse
Useful cooling
.
output Qk L 35 L 35 W 1000/1060 1500/1510 1500/1510 1500/1510 2000/2350 2000/2350 2000/2350 2500/2750
to DIN 3168 L 35 L 50 W 790/840 1230/1250 1230/1250 1230/1250 1450/1690 1450/1690 1450/1690 1600/1750
Power
consumption Pel L 35 L 35 W 700/675 975/1125 1000/1175 925/1100 1025/1200 1085/1250 1050/1275 1450/1675
to DIN 3168 L 35 L 50 W 785/800 1125/1285 1165/1325 1085/1275 1250/1350 1300/1410 1275/1525 1625/2000
.
Refrigeration factor ε = Qk/Pel 1.4 1.5 1.5 1.6 2.0 1.8 1.9 1.7
Refrigerant
– Type – R134a R134a R134a R134a R134a R134a R134a R134a
– Filling g 500 600 600 600 950 950 950 950
Admissible pressure bar 25 25 25 25 28 28 28 28
Noise level dB (A) < 64 < 64 < 64 < 64 < 64 < 64 < 64 < 64
Protection category to
EN 60 529/10.91
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 400 x 950 x 260 400 x 1580 x 290
Weight kg 40 41 46 42 66 73 67 69

Unit Model No. SK
Basic controller, RAL 7035
Comfort controller, RAL 7035
–
–
3329.110
3329.510
3329.140
3329.540
3332.140
3332.540
3361.100
3361.500
3361.110
3361.510
3361.140
3361.540
GB
Basic controller,
– 3329.210 3329.240 3332.240 3361.200 3361.210 3361.240
Comfort controller,
– 3329.610 3329.640 3332.640 3361.600 3361.610 3361.640
115, 1~, 400, 3~, 50/ 400, 3~, 50/ 230, 1~, 115, 1~, 400, 2~,
Rated voltage V, Hz
50/60 460, 3~, 60 460, 3~, 60 50/60 60 50/60
Rated current A 17.0/22.0 3.7/3.8 4.2/4.8 2.3/2.4 5.3 1.2/1.4
Start-up current A 44.0/42.0 6.8/7.6 9.2/11.0 5.6/5.6 12.0 3.1/3.3
Pre-fuse T A 25.0 6.3 – 10.0 6.3 – 10.0 10.0 10.0 6.3 – 10.0
Motor circuit breaker – – – – –
Transformer circuit-breaker – – – – – –
Miniature circuit-breaker/Fuse – – – –
.
Useful cooling output Qk L 35 L 35 W 2500/2750 2500/2700 4000/4400 750/780 750 750/780
to DIN 3168 L 35 L 50 W 1600/1750 1900/1950 3070/3570 510/540 500 510/540
Power consumption Pel L 35 L 35 W 1500/1725 1425/1625 1850/2250 480/550 570 480/550
to DIN 3168 L 35 L 50 W 1675/2065 1675/1975 2120/2590 530/640 670 530/640
.
Refrigeration factor ε = Qk/Pel 1.7 1.8 2.1 1.5 1.5 1.5
Refrigerant
– Filling g 950 950 3000 280 260 280
Admissible pressure bar 28 28 28 28 28 28
Temperature setting range °C +20 to +55 +20 to +52 +20 to +55
Noise level dB (A) < 64 < 64 < 64 < 64 < 64 < 64
Protection category to EN 60 529/10.91
500 x 1580 x
340
Weight kg 76 70 91 22 22 22
Unit Model No. SK

Basic controller, RAL 7035 – 3366.100 3366.110 3366.140 3377.100 3377.110 3377.140
Comfort controller, RAL 7035 – 3366.500 3366.510 3366.540 3377.500 3377.510 3377.540
Basic controller,
– 3366.200 3366.210 3366.240 3377.200 3377.210 3377.240
Comfort controller,
– 3366.600 3366.610 3366.640 3377.600 3377.610 3377.640
230, 1~, 115, 1~, 400, 3~, 50/ 230, 1~, 115, 1~, 400, 3~, 50/
Rated voltage V, Hz
50/60 50/60 460, 3~, 60 50/60 50/60 460, 3~, 60
Rated current A 7.1/7.3 14.3/14.7 3.0/3.1 7.1/7.3 14.3/14.7 3.3/3.4
Start-up current A 22.0/24.0 43.0/47.0 8.0/8.8 22.0/24.0 43.0/47.0 8.0/8.8
Pre-fuse T A 10.0 20.0 6.3 – 10.0 10.0 20.0 6.3 – 10.0
Motor circuit breaker – – – – –
Transformer circuit-breaker – – – – – – –
Miniature circuit-breaker/Fuse – – –
.
Useful cooling output Qk L 35 L 35 W 1500/1500 1500/1500 1500/1500 1500/1500 1500/1500 1500/1500
to DIN 3168 L 35 L 50 W 1050/1100 1050/1100 1050/1100 1050/1100 1050/1100 1050/1100
Power consumption Pel L 35 L 35 W 1045/1175 1075/1200 1090/1240 1045/1175 1075/1200 1090/1240
to DIN 3168 L 35 L 50 W 1220/1335 1265/1375 1260/1430 1220/1335 1265/1375 1260/1430
.
Refrigeration factor ε = Qk/Pel 1.4 1.4 1.3 1.4 1.4 1.3
Refrigerant
– Filling g 700 700 700 700 700 700
Admissible pressure bar 28 28 28 28 28 28
Noise level dB (A) < 64 < 64 < 64 < 64 < 64 < 64
Protection category to EN 60 529/10.91
Weight kg 45 50 46 45 50 46

10 List of spare parts
GB SK 3302.xxx
75
40 10
71
25
45
100
55 71
90
15
Fig. 83: Spare parts for SK 3302.xxx
SK 3302.3xx
10
90
71 71 20
25
100
45
40
5 1
15
55
Spare parts for SK 3302.3xx

SK 3303.xxx
SK 3361.xxx 10 GB
40
71
30
75
25
45
15
55
100
90
5
71 71
20
71
Spare parts for SK 3303.xxx, SK 3361.xxx
SK 3304.xxx
SK 3305.xxx 10
40
71
30
102
75
1
45
25
100
71
50
80 15
20
55
90
5
45
71
71
101

SK 3328.xxx 75
GB SK 3329.xxx 46
40
10
71
30
102
45
71
20
50
1
55
100
45
46
90 80
5
71
71 15
101
SK 3332.xxx 75
10
46
40
71
102
45
25
100
50
55
1
45
71
90
46
71
71
20 15
5
30
101
Fig. 84: Spare parts for SK 3332.xxx

SK 3366.xxx
SK 3377.xxx 75 100 75 GB
40 10
46
71
102
45
20
90
50 71 30
55
25
45
101
46
80
5
15
Key
1 Compressor Note:
5 Condenser fan In addition to the spare part number, when
10 Evaporator fan ordering spares please always give the
15 Dispatch bag following:
20 Expansion valve – Unit model
25 Filter dryer – Fabrication number
30 PSAH pressure-operated switch
– Date of manufacture
40 Controller box
45 Louvred grille 1 This information may be found
46 Louvred grille 2 on the rating plate.
50 Infill panel
55 Controller
71 Temperature sensor
75 Enclosure tray
80 Transformer
90 Evaporator coil
100 Condenser
101 Condensate evaporator
102 Miniature fuse, condensate evaporator

11 Appendix: Cut-out and hole sizes
11 Appendix:
354
GB Cut-out and hole sizes 345
78.5
55
11.1 Dimensions for external mounting
240
353
326
280
360
251 140
354
360
354
49
260
353
Ø8
155
(10x)
550
165.5
501
354
85.5
Fig. 88: SK 3366.xxx/SK 3377.xxx external mounting
400
Fig. 85: SK 3302.xxx external mounting
36.5
250 260
(except SK 3302.3xx)
280
235
345
525
471 153
6
Ø 9.5 (8x)
255
950
340
281
385
350
350
15
25

Fig. 86: SK 3302.3xx external mounting
400
280 290
35
280
262 200
15.5
295
380
350
266
480
532
550
550
1580
Ø 8 (4x)
Ø 13 (10x)
325
260
320
340
275
25

400
500
45
330
380 340
370
320 145 145 GB
380
440 R95 (2x)
500
1580
Ø 13 (10x)
1558
1580
1540
1554
375
440 376
164
360
275
25
Ø 13 (4x)
Fig. 91: SK 3332.xxx external mounting R95 (2x)
11.2 Dimensions for partial internal 320
mounting
Fig. 94: SK 3328.xxx partial internal mounting
280
254 100 100
25
500
362 145 195
25
550
492
518
524
266
Ø 8 (4x)
1550
1580
1530
18 x 45° 474
(230)

Ø 13 (4x)
400
370
330 105 155
25 x 45
950
920
920
380
Ø 9.5 (4x)
Fig. 93: SK 3304.xxx/SK 3305.xxx partial internal mounting

11.3 Dimensions for full internal mounting
GB 280
254
98
42
400
210
370
200 R6 (4x) 25
25
50
25 x 45
Ø 15 (2x)
550
518
492
524
266
950
920
920
380
Ø 8 (4x)
18 x 45°
(230) Ø 9.5 (4x)
Fig. 96: SK 3302.1xx full internal mounting
98 55 Fig. 99: SK 3304.xxx/SK 3305.xxx full internal mounting

525
510 400
20
370
320 240 50
R95 (2x)
340
325
314
Ø 7.5 (4x)
20
499
1558
1580
1540
1554
376
Fig. 97: SK 3302.3xx full internal mounting
42
280 158
254
200
25
Ø 13 (4x)
R95 (2x)
Ø 19 (2x)
320
550
518
492
524
266
Fig. 100: SK 3328.xxx/SK 3329.xxx full internal mounting
Ø 8 (4x)
45
400
18 x 45°
(230)

1500
1510
45

Schaltschrank-Systeme
Industrial Enclosures
Coffrets et armoires électriques
Kastsystemen
Apparatskåpssystem
Armadi per quadri di comando
Sistemas de armarios
Stromverteilung
Power Distribution
Distribution de courant
Stroomverdeling
Strömfördelning
Distribuzione di corrente
Distribución de corriente
Elektronik-Aufbau-Systeme
Electronic Packaging
Electronique
Electronic Packaging Systems
Electronic Packaging
Contenitori per elettronica
Sistemas de montaje para la electrónica
System-Klimatisierung
System Climate Control
Climatisation
Systeemklimatisering
Systemklimatisering
Soluzioni di climatizzazione
Climatización de sistemas
IT-Solutions
IT Solutions
Solutions IT
IT-Solutions
IT-lösningar
Soluzioni per IT
Soluciones TI
Communication Systems
Armoires outdoor
Outdoor-behuizingen
Soluzioni outdoor
Sistemas de comunicación
318 635
Rittal GmbH & Co. KG · Postfach 1662 · D-35726 Herborn R
Telephone: +49(0)2772 505-0 · Telefax: +49(0)2772 505-2319 · eMail: info@rittal.de · www.rittal.com
Switch to perfection
(04/07)
edition
12/07
2nd
I n s t r u c t i o n s
D
DK
FIN
GB
GR
O p e r at i n g
N
NL
T 4000
Safety Sensor
BA_T4000_de.pmd 1 01.02.05, 09:39

Betriebsanleitung Sicherheitssensor T 4000
Inhalt/Contents EC Certificate
D EU Europe
CH Fachausschuss Elektrotechnik
A Seite: 1 - 16 Prüf- und Zertifizierungsstelle
im BG-Prüfzert
Gustav-Heinemann-Ufer 130
DK Side: 17 - 30 D-50968 Köln
E Páginas: 31 - 44 Bescheinigungs-Nr. 00083
F Pages: 45 - 58
FIN Sivut: 59 - 72
GB Page: 73 - 86
GR ÓåëßäÜ: 87 - 100
I Pagina: 101 - 114
N Side: 115 - 128
NL Pagina: 129 - 142 LISTED
IND.CONT.EQ.
P Páginas: 143 - 156 7C77
For use in class 2
S Sidan: 157 - 169 circuits
2 8 009 704/P076/25-01-05 • © SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Deutschland • Alle Rechte vorbehalten
BA_T4000_de.pmd 2 01.02.2005, 10:35

D
Inhalt
Bestimmungsgemäßer Gebrauch 4
Sicherheitshinweise 4
Montage 4
Elektrischer Anschluss 5
Systembeschreibung 7
Lernfunktion für Betätiger 7
System-Zustandstabelle 8
Kontrolle und Wartung 8
Funktionsprüfung (Selbsttest) 9
Haftungsausschluss 9
Ansprechbereich 9
Technische Daten 10
Anschluss- und Blockschaltbild 10
Auswertegerät T 4000-1RBA 01 11
Sensoren T 4000-DNA... 13
Betätiger T 4000-1KBA 15
8 009 704/P076/25-01-05 • © SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Deutschland • Alle Rechte vorbehalten 3
BA_T4000_de.pmd 3 01.02.2005, 10:35

Bestimmungsgemäßer Gebrauch Montage
Der Sicherheitssensor T 4000 ist eine sicherheits- Die Montage darf ausschließlich von autori-
technische Einrichtung zur Überwachung von be- siertem Fachpersonal durchgeführt werden.
weglich trennenden Schutzeinrichtungen, so dass:
● Betätiger und Sensor müssen für Kontroll- und
- gefahrbringende Arbeiten an der Maschine nur Austauscharbeiten leicht zugänglich sein.
ausgeführt werden können, wenn die Schutzein-
richtung geschlossen ist. ● Der Schaltvorgang darf nur durch den speziell da-
- ein Stopp-Befehl ausgelöst wird, wenn die Schutz- für vorgesehenen Betätiger ausgelöst werden.
einrichtung bei laufender Maschine geöffnet wird.
● Betätiger und Sensor müssen so angebracht wer-
Vor dem Einsatz von Sicherheitssensoren ist eine den, dass
Risikobeurteilung an der Maschine durchzuführen - die Stirnflächen bei geschlossener Schutzein-
nach: richtung sich im Mindest-Einschaltabstand
0,8 x Sao oder näher (siehe technische Daten)
- EN 954-1, Sicherheitsbezogene Teile von Steue- gegenüber liegen.
rungen, Anhang C - sie nicht als mechanischer Anschlag verwen-
- EN 1050, Sicherheit von Maschinen, Risiko- det werden.
beurteilung. Hinweis: Zusätzlichen Anschlag für bewegli-
chen Teil der Schutzeinrichtung anbringen.
Zum bestimmungsgemäßen Gebrauch gehört das - bei bündigem Einbau ändert sich, in Abhängig-
Einhalten der einschlägigen Anforderungen für den keit von der Einbautiefe und dem Material der
Einbau und Betrieb, insbesondere Schutzeinrichtung, der Schaltabstand.
- sie formschlüssig mit der Schutzeinrichtung ver-
- EN 954-1, Sicherheitsbezogene Teile von Steue- bunden sind z.B. durch die Verwendung der bei-
rungen liegenden Sicherheitsschrauben.
- EN 1088, Verriegelungseinrichtungen in Verbin-
dung mit trennenden Schutzeinrichtungen ● Das Auswertegerät muss in einem Schaltschrank
- EN 60 204-1, Elektrische Ausrüstungen von Ma- mit einer Schutzart von mindestens IP 54 einge-
schinen. baut werden. Zur Befestigung auf einer Norm-
- EN 60 947-5-3 Anforderungen für Näherungs- schiene dient ein Rastelement auf der Rückseite
schalter mit definiertem Verhalten unter Fehler- des Gerätes.
bedingungen.
● Bei Montage mehrerer Auswertegeräte nebenein-
ander in einem Schaltschrank ohne Luftzirkulation
Sicherheitshinweise (z.B. Ventilator) ist zwischen den Auswertegeräten
ein Einbauabstand von 10 mm einzuhalten.
Der Sicherheitssensor T 4000 erfüllt folgende Si- Der Einbauabstand ermöglicht eine freie Wärme-
cherheitsanforderungen ableitung der Auswertegeräte.
- Steuerungskategorie 3 nach EN 954-1.
- Näherungsschalter mit Selbstüberwachung Typ
PDF-M nach EN 60 947-5-3.
- Schaltung im Auswertegerät ist redundant mit
Selbstüberwachung aufgebaut.
Dadurch bleibt die Sicherheitseinrichtung auch bei
Ausfall eines Bauteils wirksam.
- Beim Öffnen bzw. Schließen der Schutzein-
richtung wird überprüft, ob die Relais der Sicher-
heitseinrichtung richtig öffnen und schließen.
Sicherheitssensoren erfüllen Personenschutz-Funk-

tionen. Unsachgemäßer Einbau oder Manipulatio-
nen können zu schweren Verletzungen von Perso-
nen führen.
BA_T4000_de.pmd 4 01.02.2005, 10:35

D
Elektrischer Anschluss
Der elektrische Anschluss darf ausschließlich von autorisiertem, EMV-geschultem Fachpersonal durch-
geführt werden. Die Elektroinstallation darf nur in spannungsfreiem Zustand ausgeführt werden.
● Sicherheitssensoren dürfen nicht umgangen (Kontakte überbrückt), weggedreht, entfernt oder auf an-
dere Art und Weise unwirksam gemacht werden.
● Alle elektrischen Anschlüsse müssen entweder durch einen Trenntransformator (IEC 742) oder durch
gleichwertige Isolationsmaßnahmen vom Netz isoliert werden.
● Alle Ausgangskontakte müssen bei kapazitiven und induktiven Lasten eine ausreichende Schutzbe-
schaltung besitzen.
● Externe Kontaktabsicherung (Sicherung 6,3 A flink) für Relaisausgänge vorsehen.
Zur Gewährleistung der Sicherheit sind beide Sicherheitsausgänge (Relaisausgänge) 13/14

und 23/24 zwingend auszuwerten.
T 4000-Auswertegerät
Betriebsspannung
+ 24 V 0 V
DC
Schirmanschluss
braun weiss
Sensor
Codierter
13 14 23 24 Betätiger
Trans-
ponder
T 4000-Auswertegerät
Betriebsspannung
+ 24 V 0 V
DC
Schirmanschluss
braun weiss
Sensor
Codierter
13 14 23 24 Betätiger
Trans-
ponder
BA_T4000_de.pmd 5 01.02.2005, 10:35

● Bei Verwendung einer gemeinsamen Spannungs- Hinweis: Die steckbaren und codierten Klemmen
versorgung, sind alle an der Spannungsversor- am Auswertegerät ermöglichen eine Vorkon-
gung angeschlossenen induktiven und kapazitiven fektionierung der Leitungsanschlüsse und damit
Lasten (z.B. Schütze) mit entsprechenden Ent- eine einfache und schnelle Endmontage.
störgliedern zu beschalten. Darüber hinaus bieten sie auch im Servicefall ein
Höchstmaß an Sicherheit.
Der Tür-Meldeausgang OUT darf nicht als
Sicherheitsausgang verwendet werden.
● Die Anschlussleitung des Sensors darf nicht ver-

längert werden.
● Der Schirm der Sensorleitung (max. 3 cm ab-

isolieren) muss mit dem Anschluss SH der Aus-
werteeinheit verbunden werden.
● Meldeausgänge ERR und OUT sowie die An-

schlussklemmen für Sensor H1/H2 sind nicht
kurzschlusssicher.
● Sollte das Gerät nach Anlegen der Betriebsspan-

nung keine Funktion zeigen (z.B. grüne STATE-
LED leuchtet nicht), muss das Gerät ungeöffnet
an den Hersteller zurückgesandt werden.
● Als Leitungsmaterial darf nur Kupfer mit einer

Temperaturfestigkeit ≥ 75 °C verwendet werden.
● Die Schrauben der Anschlussklemmen müssen LED-Anzeigen

mit einem Anzugsmoment von 0,6 - 0,8 Nm an-
gezogen werden. STATE LED grün Normalbetrieb
● Für den Einsatz und die Verwendung gemäß den blinkend Lernvorgang (weitere Sig-
Anforderungen muss eine Spannungsver- nalfunktion siehe Zustands-
sorgung mit dem Merkmal „for use in class 2 tabelle)
circuits“ verwendet werden.
Es dürfen keine Ströme ≥ 8 A fließen! OUT LED gelb gültiger Betätiger erkannt
ERROR LED rot - Testeingang aktiviert

- interner Fehler Elektronik
- ungültiger Lernvorgang
(siehe Zustandstabelle)
Bei Bedienungsfehler (ERROR) kann durch Unter-

brechung der Spannungsversorgung - ca. 10 Se-
kunden - das Auswertegerät in den Betriebszustand
zurückgesetzt werden.
BA_T4000_de.pmd 6 01.02.2005, 10:35

D
Systembeschreibung Lernfunktion für Betätiger
Der Sicherheitssensor T 4000 besteht aus drei Kom- Bevor das System eine Funktionseinheit bildet,
ponenten: muss der Betätiger in einer Lernfunktion dem Aus-
wertegerät zugeordnet werden.
- Codierter Betätiger Während eines Lernvorganges sind die Sicherheits-
- Sensor ausgänge und der Tür-Meldeausgang auf LOW, d.h.
- Auswertegerät das System befindet sich im sicheren Zustand.
Jeder ausgelieferte Betätiger besitzt eine eindeuti- ● Lernfunktion für ersten Betätiger (Auslieferungs-
ge elektronische Codierung und ist damit für das zustand):
eingesetzte System ein Unikat. Der Code eines 1.Anlegen der Betriebsspannung am Auswertegerät
Betätigers kann nicht umprogrammiert werden. - schnelles Blinken (ca. 4 Hz) der grünen LED
2.Betätiger an den Sensor heranführen
Der Sensor wird an dem feststehenden Teil der (Abstand < Sao beachten)
Schutzeinrichtung befestigt und ist über ein zwei- - Lernvorgang beginnt, langsames Blinken (ca.
adriges geschirmtes Kabel mit dem Auswertegerät 1Hz) der grünen LED
verbunden. 3.Lernvorgang beendet (nach 60 Sekunden)
Der an der Schutzeinrichtung befestigte Betätiger - grüne LED erlischt
wird beim Schließen der Türe an den Sensor her- 4.Um den gelernten Code des Betätigers im Aus-
angeführt. Beim Erreichen des Einschaltabstandes wertegerät zu aktivieren, muss die Betriebsspan-
erfolgt über den induktiven Sensor die Spannungs- nung am Auswertegerät anschließend für min. 10
versorgung zum Betätiger und die Datenübertra- Sekunden abgeschaltet werden.
gung kann erfolgen.
Das eingelesene Bitmuster wird mit dem gespei- ● Lernfunktion eines neuen Betätigers:
cherten Code im Auswertegerät verglichen, bei 1.Anlegen der Betriebsspannung am Auswertegerät
Übereinstimmung der Daten erfolgt die Freigabe der 2.Neuer Betätiger an den Sensor heranführen (Ab-
Sicherheitsausgänge (Relaisausgang) und der Tür- stand < Sao beachten)
Meldeausgang OUT (Halbleiterausgang) wird eben- - Lernvorgang beginnt, grüne LED blinkt (ca. 1 Hz)
falls auf HIGH gesetzt. 3.Lernvorgang beendet (nach 60 Sekunden)
Durch die dynamische Abfrage des Betätigers und - grüne LED erlischt, neuer Code gespeichert,
durch den redundanten, diversitären Aufbau der alter Code deaktiviert
Sicherheitselektronik in Verbindung mit zwei 4.Um den neu erlernten Code des Betätigers im
Sicherheitsausgängen geht das Auswertegerät bei Auswertegerät zu aktivieren, muss die Betriebs-
jedem erkennbaren Fehler in den sicheren Zustand spannung am Auswertegerät anschließend für
über. min. 10 Sekunden abgeschaltet werden.
Beim Öffnen der Schutzeinrichtung schalten die
Sicherheitsausgänge den Sicherheitskreis ab und
der Tür-Meldeausgang (OUT) wird auf LOW ge- Hinweis:
schaltet. Der Zustand der Sicherheitsausgänge wird ● Das mehrfache Erlernen des gleichen
intern über zwangsgeführte Öffnerkontakte (Relais- Betätigers am gleichen Auswertegerät ist
ausgang) überwacht. nicht möglich.
Bei einem internen Fehler im Auswertegerät wird ● Die Anzahl der gültigen Lernvorgänge an ei-
der Sicherheitskreis abgeschaltet, der Diagnose- nem Auswertegerät ist auf maximal 8 begrenzt.
ausgang (ERROR) auf HIGH gesetzt und die ● Das Auswertegerät kann nur mit dem jeweils
ERROR-LED leuchtet rot. zuletzt gelernten Betätiger betrieben werden.
● Ein Lernvorgang ist ungültig wenn:
Hinweis: Die Verweildauer eines Betätigers inner- - der Lernvorgang vor Erlöschen der grünen
halb und außerhalb des Ansprechbereiches muss LED abgebrochen wird
mindestens 0,5 Sekunden betragen, ansonsten - während des Lernvorganges die Versor-
kann das Auswertegerät in den Fehlerzustand über- gungsspannung abgeschaltet wurde
gehen und die ERROR-LED leuchtet rot. Durch Un-
terbrechung der Spannungsversorgung wird das
Auswertegerät in den Betriebszustand zurückge- Achtung:
setzt. Auch nach dem 8. Lernvorgang oder beim Anlegen
eines “alten” Betätigers an den Lesekopf geht das
System automatisch in den Lernmodus über. In bei-
den Fällen wird ein Lernvorgang mit der Dauer von
60 Sekunden eingeleitet, der letzte Betätigercode
bleibt jedoch im Speicher aktiv (siehe Zustands-
tabelle), es wird kein neuer Code erlernt.
BA_T4000_de.pmd 7 01.02.2005, 10:35

System-Zustandstabelle
SPS LED-Anzeige Zustand

Ein- Ausgang
OUT (Meldesignal)
Sicherheitsaus-
gang A und B
STATE (grün)
Blinkimpulse
Türstellung
OUT (gelb)
Betätiger-/
ERR (rot)
Anzahl
ERR
TST
Normalbetrieb zu ein N 1 0 1 1 0 Normalbetrieb, Tür geschlossen
auf aus N 0 0 1 0 0 Normalbetrieb, Tür offen
Inbetriebnahme blinkt
Erste Inbetriebnahme nach Auslieferung
auf aus N 0 0 dauernd 0 0
Bereit für ersten Lernvorgang
mit 4 Hz
blinkt 60 s
zu aus N 0 0 0 0 Lernvorgang
mit ca. 1 Hz
Positiv-Quittung für erfolgreichen Lernvorgang.

zu aus N 0 0 0 0 0 Für Normalbetrieb muss das Gerät neu
eingeschaltet werden
Statusanzeige x aus x 0 0 3 0 0 Anzeige nach 1. bis 5. Lernvorgang
Anzeige der noch erlaubten Lernvorgänge

x aus x 0 0 2 0 0
nach dem 6. Lernvorgang
Einmalige
Blinkfolge Anzeige der noch erlaubten Lernvorgänge
x aus x 0 0 nach dem 1 0 0
nach dem 7. Lernvorgang
Einschalten
Gerät kann keinen weiteren Lernvorgang
x aus x 0 0 0 0 0
mehr durchführen
Fehleranzeige
geräteinterner Bauteile-Ausfall
x aus N 0 1 0 0 1 oder
Betätiger kürzer als 0,5 s im Ansprechbereich
Bedienungsfehler zu aus N 0 1 Kurze 1 0 1 Unerlaubter 9. Lernvorgang

zu aus N 0 1 Blinkfolgen 2 0 1 Unerlaubter Lernvorgang eines alten Betätigers
mit Wieder-
Negativ-Quittung für Lernvorgang. Betätiger wurde
zu aus N 0 1 holung nach 3 0 1
kürzer als 60 s vor den Lesekopf gehalten
1s
Testbetrieb auf aus 1 0 1 1 0 1
ext. Geräte-Test auf „OFFEN“ und Funktion

zu aus 1 0 1 1 0 1
ERR-Ausgang bei geschlossener Tür
N = 0 Volt oder nicht beschaltet 1 = hell

0 = 0 Volt 0 = dunkel
1 = 24 Volt
x = 0 oder 24 Volt
bzw. Türe auf oder zu
Hinweis:
● Das Auswertegerät kann nur mit dem jeweils zuletzt gelernten Betätiger betrieben werden.
Kontrolle und Wartung
Um eine einwandfreie und dauerhafte Funktion zu - Dichtheit der Kabeleinführung am Sensor

gewährleisten, sind regelmäßige Kontrollen erfor- - gelockerte Leitungsanschlüsse am Auswertegerät
derlich auf: - Prüfung des Abschaltabstandes
- sichere Befestigung des Betätigers und Sensors
(Verwendung der beigelegten Sicherheits-
schrauben)
BA_T4000_de.pmd 8 01.02.2005, 10:35

D
Funktionsprüfung (Selbsttestung) Die Sicherheitsausgänge werden ausgeschaltet und
damit die Testung des gesamten Sicherheitskreises
Bei elektromagnetischen Sicherheitsschaltern oder ermöglicht. Als Überwachungsfunktion wird der
Magnetsensoren kann die Funktionsprüfung durch Diagnoseausgang ERR vom Auswertegerät eben-
zyklisches Öffnen der Schutzeinrichtung erfolgen. falls auf HIGH gesetzt.
Beim Rücksetzen des Testeingangs wird vom Aus-
Ab Steuerungskategorie 2 muss entsprechend der wertegerät der Diagnoseausgang ERR wieder auf
EN 60204-1 : 1997 (Kap. 9.4.2.4) beim Anlauf oder LOW rückgesetzt, die rote LED erlischt und die
nach festgelegten Abständen eine Funktions- Sicherheitsausgänge werden wieder eingeschaltet.
prüfung des gesamten Sicherheitssystems vorge- Damit ist ein Selbsttest des Sicherheitssystems
nommen werden. ohne Öffnen der Schutzeinrichtung möglich.
Die Prüfung der internen Funktion des Sicherheits-

sensors T 4000 ist nicht notwendig, weil das Gerät Haftungsausschluss
sich selbst in Echtzeit überwacht. Das Verschweißen
eines Ausgangskontaktes (Relaisausgang) wird Haftungsausschluss bei:
vom Gerät spätestens beim nächsten Öffnen der
Schutzeinrichtung erkannt. Ein Querschluss der - nicht bestimmungsgemäßem Gebrauch
Ausgangsleitung wird vom Gerät nicht erkannt. - Nichteinhaltung der Sicherheitshinweise
Darüber hinaus kann der ganze Sicherheitskreis - Anbau und elektrischem Anschluss durch nicht-
ohne Öffnen der Schutzeinrichtung getestet werden. autorisiertes Personal
Dazu wird durch Anlegen von 24 V DC an den Test- - bei Fremdeingriff
eingang das Öffnen der Schutzeinrichtung simuliert.
Typischer Ansprechbereich (bei Leitungslänge l = 0 bis 25 m) *)
Sicheren Abschaltabstand m Ausgangszustand

sar = 23 mm beachten
(s. Sicherheitshinweise Betätiger Hysterese
Sensoren, S. 14) s EIN
Sensor
AUS
Abschalt- Sao Abstand s
8 abstand
Abstand s [mm]
Hysterese
AUS 6
AUS
Einschalt-
abstand Sao
4
2
EIN
-8 -6 -4 -2 0 2 4 6 8
Mittenversatz m [mm]
*)
Min.-/Max.-Werte siehe Technische Daten
BA_T4000_de.pmd 9 01.02.2005, 10:35

Anschluss- und Blockschaltbild, Anschlussbeispiel
T4000-Auswertegerät
Betriebsspannung
+ 24 V 0 V
DC
Schirmanschluss
braun weiss
Sensor
Codierter
Betätiger
CPU-A CPU-B Trans-
Betrieb ohne externe Testung
DDSP: ponder
TST-Eingang unbeschaltet:
Doppelt Dynamischer
S Pfad
mit Fehler-Überwachung
des Betätigers,
KA KB des Sensors und
des Kabels zum Sensor
TST Testeingang
OUT Tür-Meldeausgang (kein Sicherheitsausgang)
10kW
ER R Diagnoseausgang
10kW GND 0V (intern verbunden mit 0V der Betriebsspannung)
H1/H2 Anschluss Sensor
SH Schirmanschluss Sensor
13/14 Anschluss Schließerkontakt 1, Freigabe Sicherheitsrelais
23/24 Anschluss Schließerkontakt 2, Freigabe Sicherheitsrelais
Sicherheits - SPS
KANAL A
I0 Sicherheits-Eingang
0V
TO0 getakteter Ausgang
0V
KANAL B
Anschlussbeispiel mit
I1 Sicherheits-Eingang
Sicherheits - SPS
0V
TO1 getakteter Ausgang
0V
I2 Eingänge
I3
0V
O2 statischer
Ausgang
BA_T4000_de.pmd 10 01.02.2005, 10:35

D
Auswertegerät T 4000-1RBA 01
Maßzeichnung
22,5 114,5
H1 H2 SH
24V 0V
STATE
99
OUT
ERROR
TST OUT ERR GND

13 14 23 24
passend für Standard-

Hutschiene 35 mm
Schaltverhalten
Schutzeinrichtung
2 Sicherheitsausgänge (Relaisausgänge)
1 Tür-Meldeausgang (Halbleiterausgang, kein geschlossen offen
Sicherheitsausgang) (Betätiger erkannt) (Betätiger nicht im
Ansprechbereich)
Sensor Betätiger Sensor
13 14 13 14
23 24 23 24
24 V OUT 24 V OUT
BA_T4000_de.pmd 11 01.02.2005, 10:35

Technische Daten
Parameter Wert Einheit
min. typ. max.
Gehäusewerkstoff Kunststoff PA6.6
Abmessungen 114,5 x 99 x 22,5 mm
Masse 0,2 kg
Umgebungstemperatur bei U B = 24 V DC 0 - +55 °C
Lagertemperatur -25 - +70 °C
Schutzart IP20
Schutzklasse Schutzklasse III, Verschmutzungsgrad 2
Werkstoffgruppe II
Montage Hutschiene 35 mm nach DIN 46277
Anzahl der Sensoren 1 Sensor je Auswertegerät
Anschlussart steckbare Schraubklemmen / codiert
Anschlussklemmen 0,14 - 2,5 mm²
Betriebsspannung U B
21 24 27 V DC
(geregelt, Restwelligkeit < 5 %)
Stromaufnahme (bei angezogenem Relais) 150 mA
Sicherheitsausgänge 2 Sicherheitsrelais mit je einem Schließer
Schaltstrom (Relaisausgänge) 1)
- bei Schaltspannung 0,1 ... 60 V 1 - 300 mA
- bei Schaltspannung 10 ... 24 V 1 - 4000 mA
Absicherung extern (Sicherheitskreis) 6,3 A flink
Gebrauchskategorie nach EN 60947-5-2 AC-12 300mA 60V 50Hz / DC-12 300mA 60V
AC-140 2A 30V 50Hz / DC-13 4A 30V
Steuerungskategorie nach EN 954 3
Klassifizierung nach IEC/EN 60 947-5-3 PDF-M
Bemessungsisolationsspannung Ui - - 63 V
Bemessungsstoßspannungsfestigkeit Uimp - - 1,5 kV
Widerstandsfestigkeit gegen Vibrationen entsprechend EN 60 947-5-2
Mechanische Schaltspiele (Relais) 10 x 10 6
Schaltverzögerung ab Zustandsänderung - - 180 ms
Bereitschaftsverzögerung 2) 3 s
Verweildauer 0,5 - - s
Meldeausgänge (Diagnose ERR, Tür-Melde-
kontakt OUT, Halbleiterausgang, p-schaltend) 3)
- Ausgangsspannung 0,8 x U B - UB V DC
- Belastbarkeit - - 20 mA
Testeingang LOW 0 - 2 V DC
HIGH 15 - UB V DC
EMV-Schutzanforderungen gemäß IEC 60947-5-3
LED-Anzeigen STATE LED grün: Normalbetrieb
blinkend: Lernvorgang
OUT LED gelb: Betätiger erkannt
ERROR LED rot: - Testeingang aktiviert
- Interner Fehler Elektronik
- Ungültiger Lernvorgang
1)
Wird über die Relaisausgänge einmal ein Schaltstrom von > 300 mA geschaltet, lässt sich infolge des Abbrandes der Goldkontakte kein
Kleinstrom (≤ 10 mA) mehr sicher schalten.
2)
Nach Einschalten der Betriebsspannung sind während der Bereitschaftsverzögerung die Relaisausgänge ausgeschaltet und der Tür-
Meldekontakt auf LOW-Potential.
3)
nicht kurzschlusssicher
BA_T4000_de.pmd 12 01.02.2005, 10:35

D
Sensoren T 4000-DNA...
Sensor T 4000-DNA..P (mit festangeschlossener Leitung)
Maßzeichnung
Leitungslänge l 42 12
ø4,5
ø8
T4000-D XXXXXX
25
32 ±0,1 aktive 4,6 aktive
Fläche Fläche
Anschlussbelegung
Sensor mit Anschlussleitung

Schirm
BN Sensor
WH
H1 H2 SH
Auswertegerät
Sensor T 4000-DNAC mit Steckverbinder M8 (Kombivariante mit Rast- und Schraubanschluss)

Maßzeichnung
32,6 42 12
6,8 32 ±0,1 4,6

ø8
ø4,5
ø10
T4000-DNACXXXXXX
25
aktive
3 Fläche
4
aktive 1
min.38 5,5
Fläche
Anschlussbelegung
Sensor mit Steckverbinder
WH Schirm 3
4
BN 1
Ansicht
H1 H2 SH auf Steckverbinder
des Sensors
Auswertegerät
BA_T4000_de.pmd 13 01.02.2005, 10:35

Technische Daten
min. typ. max.
Gehäusewerkstoff Fortron, glasfaserverstärkter Thermoplast, vollvergossen
Abmessungen 42 x 25 x 12 mm
Masse (inkl. 10 m Leitung) 0,3 kg
Umgebungstemperatur -25 - +70 °C
Schutzart IP67
Dynamische Datenübertragung
2 kbit/s
zum Auswertegerät
Verweildauer 1) 0,5 - - s
Ansprechbereich bei Mittenversatz m = 0 2)
Leitungslänge l = 0 bis 25 m
- Einschaltabstand S ao 5 6 -
- Schalthysterese 0,5 1,5 -
- Sicherer Abschaltabstand Sar - - 23 mm
Leitungslänge l ≥ 25 bis 50 m
- Einschaltabstand S ao 4 4,8 -
- Schalthysterese 0,4 1,2 -
- Sicherer Abschaltabstand Sar - - 23
Spannungsversorgung über Auswertegerät
Anschluss Sensor T 4000-DNA..P fest vergossene Anschlussleitung, mit Ader-Endhülsen
Leitungslänge Sensor T 4000-DNA..P - - 15 m
Anschluss Sensor T 4000-DNAC Steckverbinder M8 (mit Rast- und Schraubanschluss), 3-polig
Leitungslänge T 4000-DNAC - - 50 m
1)
Die Verweildauer ist die Zeit, in der sich der Betätiger innerhalb oder außerhalb des Ansprechbereichs befinden muss.
2)
Diese Werte gelten für nichtbündigen und bündigen Einbau des Sensors und des Betätigers in Aluminium
Montagehinweise Sensor und Betätiger
● Die Anschlussleitung des Sensors darf nicht verlängert werden.

Zwischenklemmen dürfen nicht eingesetzt werden.
● Betätiger und Sensor müssen so angebracht werden, dass:

- die aktiven Flächen (Stirnflächen) bei geschlossener Schutzeinrichtung sich im Einschaltabstand
0,8 x Sao oder näher (siehe technische Daten) gegenüber liegen.
- sie nicht als mechanischer Anschlag verwendet werden.
- sie formschlüssig mit der Schutzeinrichtung verbunden sind z.B. durch die Verwendung der beilie-
genden Sicherheitsschrauben.
Sicherheitshinweise
● Bei bündigem Einbau von Sensor und/oder Betätiger ändert sich der Schaltabstand in Abhängigkeit
von der Einbautiefe und dem Material der Schutzeinrichtung.
● Die Schutzeinrichtung muss so konstruiert sein, dass bis zu dem Abstand Sar (sicherer Abschaltab-
stand) eine Gefährdung ausgeschlossen ist.
Hinweis: Beim sicheren Abschaltabstand Sar = 23 mm sind die Relaisausgänge, auch bei einem
internen Bauteilausfall, sicher ausgeschaltet.
BA_T4000_de.pmd 14 01.02.2005, 10:35

D
Betätiger T 4000-1KBA
Maßzeichnung
42 12
ø4,5
ø8
T4000-1KBA 5306531
25
32 ±0,1 4,6
aktive aktive
Fläche Fläche
Technische Daten
min. typ. max.
Gehäusewerkstoff Fortron, glasfaserverstärkter Thermoplast, vollvergossen
Abmessungen 42 x 25 x 12 mm
Masse 0,02 kg
Umgebungstemperatur -25 – +70 °C
Schutzart IP67
Einbaulage aktive Fläche gegenüber Sensor
Verweildauer 1) 0,5 – – s
1)
Die Verweildauer ist die Zeit, in der sich der Betätiger innerhalb oder außerhalb des Ansprechbereichs befinden muss.
BA_T4000_de.pmd 15 01.02.2005, 10:35

BA_T4000_de.pmd 16 01.02.2005, 10:35

DK
Betjeningsvejledning Sikkerhedslæsehoved T 4000
Indhold
Brug i overensstemmelse med formålet 18

Sikkerhedsanvisninger 18
Montering 18
El-tilslutning 19
Systembeskrivelse 21
Lærefunktion for kodet brik 21
System-tilstandstabel 22
Kontrol og vedligeholdelse 22
Funktionskontrol (selvtest) 23
Udelukkelse af ansvar 23
Tekniske data 24
Tilslutnings- og blokdiagram, tilslutningseksempler 24
Sikkerhedsrelæ T 4000-1RBA 01 25
Læsehoved T 4000-DNA... 27
Kodet brik T 4000-1KBA 29
8 009 704/P076/25-01-05 • © SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Tyskland • Alle rettigheder forbeholdes 17
Ba_T4000_dk.PMD 17 31.01.2005, 10:28

Brug i overensstemmelse med formålet Montering
Sikkerhedslæsehovedet T 4000 er en sikker- Monteringen må kun udføres af autoriseret fag-

hedsteknisk anordning til overvågning af bevægeligt personale.
skillende beskyttelsesanordninger, så:
● Den kodede brik og læsehovedet skal være let
- farebringende arbejder på maskinen kun kan ud- tilgængelig til kontrol- og udskiftningsarbejder.
føres, når beskyttelsesanordningen er lukket;
- der udløses en stop-kommando, når beskyttelse- ● Koblingsprocesssen må kun udløses med den spe-
sanordningen åbnes, mens maskinen er i gang. cielt dertil beregnede kodede brik.
Inden brugen af sikkerhedslæsehoveder skal der ● Den kodede brik og læsehovedet skal være anbragt
gennemføres en risikobedømmelse af maskinen iht.: således, at
- frontfladerne med lukket beskyttelsesanordning
- EN 954-1, Styringers sikkerhedsrelevante dele, bi- ligger overfor hinanden med en indkoblings-
lag C afstand på 0,8 x Sao eller mindre (se de tekniske
- EN 1050, Maskiners sikkerhed, risikobedømmelse data);
- de ikke benyttes som mekanisk stopanslag.
Til brugen i overensstemmelse med formålet hører Henvisning: Anbring yderligere stopanslag til be-
overholdelsen af de gældende krav vedrørende ind- skyttelsesanordningens del.
bygningen og driften, især - Ved flugtende indbygning ændrer koblingsafstan-
den sig, afhængigt af indbygningsdybden og
- EN 954-1, Styringers sikkerhedsrelevante dele beskyttelsesanordningens materiale.
- EN 1088, Blokeringsanordninger i forbindelse med - de er forbundet tætsluttende med beskyttelse-
skillende beskyttelsesanordninger sanordningen, f.eks. ved at bruge de vedlagte
- EN 60 204-1, Maskiners elektriske udstyr sikkerhedsskruer.
- EN 60 947-5-3 Krav til følerafbrydere med defineret
udløsning ved fejlbetingelser. ● Sikkerhedsrelæet skal indbygges i et elskab med
en kapslingsklasse på mindst IP 54. Et holdeele-
ment på apparatets bagside tjener til fastgørelse
Sikkerhedsanvisninger på en standardskinne.
Sikkerhedslæsehovedet T 4000 opfylder følgende sik- ● Ved montering af flere sikkerhedsrelæer ved siden
kerhedskrav af hinanden i et styreskab uden luftcirkulation (f.eks.
- Styringskategori 3 iht. EN 954-1 ventilator) skal der overholdes en indbygnings-
- Følerafbryder med selvovervågning af typen PDF-M afstand på 10 mm mellem sikkerhedsrelæerne.
iht. EN 60 947-5-3 Indbygningsafstanden gør det muligt, at varmen
- Koblingen i sikkerhedsrelæet er opbygget redun- frit kan udledes fra fortolkningsenheden.
dant med selvovervågning.
Derved virker sikkerhedsanordningen også, hvis en
komponent svigter.
- Ved at åbne hhv. lukke beskyttelsesanordningen
kontrolleres det, om sikkerhedsanordningens relæ
åbner og lukker korrekt.
Sikkerhedslæsehoveder opfylder personbes-

kyttelsesfunktioner. Faglig ukorrekt indbygning eller
manipula-tioner kan medføre, at mennesker bliver
alvorligt kvæstet.
18 8 009 704/P076/25-01-05 • © SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Tyskland • Alle rettigheder forbeholdes
Ba_T4000_dk.PMD 18 31.01.2005, 10:28

DK
El-tilslutning
El-tilslutningen må kun udføres af autoriseret, EMC-instrueret fagpersonale. El-installationen må kun

udføres i spændingsfri tilstand.
● Der må ikke kobles udenom sikkerhedslæsehoveder (kontakter kortsluttet), de må ikke drejes væk, fjer-
nes eller på anden måde gøres uvirksomme.
● Alle elektriske tilslutninger skal isoleres fra lysnettet enten med en skilletransformer (IEC 742) eller med
tilsvarende isolationsforholdsregler.
● Alle udgangskontakter skal ved kapacitive og induktive belastninger have en tilstrækkelig beskyttel-
sesbestykning.
● Indsæt en ekstern kontaktsikring (sikring 6,3 A flink) til relæudgange.
For at garantere sikkerheden skal begge sikkerhedsudgange (relæudgange) 13/14 og 23/24

altid fortolkes.
T4000-sikkerhedsrelæ
Driftsspænding
+ 24 V 0 V
DC
Afskærmet tilslutning
brun
r hvid
Læsehoved
Kodet
13 14 23 24 udløser
Trans-
ponder
Driftsspænding
+ 24 V 0 V
DC
Afskærmet tilslutning
brun hvid
Læsehoved
Kodet
13 14 23 24 udløser
Trans-
ponder
Ba_T4000_dk.PMD 19 31.01.2005, 10:28

● Ved brug af en fælles spændingsforsyning skal alle Henvisning: De stikbare og kodede klemmer på
induktive og kapacitive belastninger (f.eks. relæer), sikkerhedsrelæet gør det muligt at lave lednings-
som er tilsluttet til spændingsforsyningen, bestykkes tilslutningerne parat på forhånd, så den endelige
med tilsvarende støjdæmpningsanordninger. montering bliver let og hurtig.
Desuden giver de et maksimum af sikkerhed i service-
Dør-signaludgangen OUT må ikke benyttes tilfælde.
som sikkerhedsudgang.
● Læsehovedets tilslutningsledning må ikke

forlænges.
● Sensorledningens skærm (der afisoleres maks.

3 cm) skal forbindes med tilslutningen SH på
fortolkningsenheden.
● Meldeudgangene ERR og OUT samt tilslutnings-

klemmerne til læsehovedet H1/H2 er ikke kort-
slutningssikre.
● Hvis apparatet en gang ikke skulle vise nogen funk-

tion, efter at der er tændt for driftsspændingen
(f.eks. hvis den grønne STATE-LED ikke lyser), skal
apparatet sendes uåbnet tilbage til producenten.
● Som ledningsmateriale må der kun benyttes kobber

med en temperaturholdbarhed ≥ 75 °C.
● Tilslutningsklemmernes skruer skal strammes med LED visninger

et tilspændingsmoment på 0,6 - 0,8 Nm.
STATE LED grøn normal drift
● For indsatsen og brugen iht. -kravene skal der
benyttes en spændingsforsyning med kendetegnet blinkende læreproces (yderligere signal-
“for use in class 2 circuits”. Der må ikke forekomme funktion: se tilstandstabellen)
strømme ≥ 8 A!
OUT LED gul gyldig kodet brik fastslået
ERROR LED rød - testindgang aktiveret

- intern fejl elektronik
- ugyldig læreproces
(se også tilstandstabellen)
Ved betjeningsfejl (ERROR) kan sikkerhedsrelæet på

grund af, at spændingstilførslen afbrydes - ca.
10 sekunder - resettes til driftstilstanden.
Ba_T4000_dk.PMD 20 31.01.2005, 10:28

DK
Systembeskrivelse Lærefunktion for kodet brik
Det berøringsløst virkende sikkerhedslæsehovede Inden systemet danner en funktionsenhed, skal den
T 4000 består af tre komponenter: kodede brik tilordnes til sikkerhedsrelæet ved en lære-
funktion.
- kodet brik Under læreprocessen er sikkerhedsudgangene og
- læsehoved dør-signaludgangen på LOW, dvs. at systemet befind-
- sikkerhedsrelæ er sig i den sikre tilstand.
Hver af de leverede kodede brikker har en entydig ● Lærefunktion for den første kodede brik (leverings-
elektronisk kodning og er således et unikat for det tilstand):
indsatte system. En kodet briks kode kan ikke 1.Tilførsel af driftsspænding til sikkerhedsrelæet
omprogrammeres. - den grønne LED blinker hurtigt (ca. 4 Hz)
2.Den kodede brik føres hen til læsehovedet
Læsehovedet fastgøres på den faststående del af (bemærk: afstand < Sao)
beskyttelsesanordningen; det er forbundet med - Læreprocessen begynder, den grønne LED blin-
udlæsningsenheden via et to-året, afskærmet kabel. ker langsomt (ca. 1 Hz)
Den kodede brik, som er fastgjort på beskyttelses 3.Læreprocessen er afsluttet (efter 60 sekunder)
anordningen, føres hen til læsehovedet, når døren - den grønne LED slukker
lukkes. Når indkoblingsafstanden er nået, forsynes 4.For at aktivere den kodede briks lærte kode i
den kodede brik via det induktive læsehoved med sikkerhedsrelæet skal der derefter slukkes for drifts-
spænding og dataene kan overføres. spændingen på sikkerhedsrelæet i min.
Det indlæste bitmønster sammenlignes i sikker- 10 sekunder.
hedsrelæet med den lagrede kode. Hvis dataene
stemmer overens, frigives sikkerhedsudgangene ● Lærefunktion for en ny kodet brik:
(relæudgang), og dørens meldeudgang OUT 1.Tilførsel af driftsspænding til sikkerhedsrelæet
(halvlederudgang) sættes ligeledes på HIGH. 2.Den nye kodede brik føres hen til læsehovedet
Ved den dynamiske kontrol af aktiveringsanordningen (bemærk: afstand < Sao)
og ved sikkerhedselektronikkens redundante, diver- - Læreprocessen begynder, den grønne LED blin-
sitære opbygning i forbindelse med to sikkerheds- ker (ca. 1 Hz)
udgange går sikkerhedsrelæet over i den sikre tilstand 3.Læreprocessen er afsluttet (efter 60 sekunder)
ved hver fastslået fejl. - den grønne LED slukker, den nye kode er lagret,
Når beskyttelsesanordningen åbnes, frakobler sikker- den gamle kode er deaktiveret
hedsudgangene sikkerhedskredsen, og dør-signalud- 4.For at aktivere den kodede briks lærte kode i
gangen (OUT) skiftes til LOW. sikkerhedsrelæet skal der derefter slukkes for
Sluttekontakternes tilstand overvåges internt over driftsspændingen på sikkerhedsrelæet i min.
tvangsstyrede brydekontakter. 10 sekunder.
Ved en intern fejl i sikkerhedsrelæet frakobles
sikkerhedskredsen, diagnoseudgangen (ERROR)
sættes på HIGH, og ERROR LED’en lyser rødt. Henvisning:
● Det er ikke muligt at lade en kodet brik lære
Henvisning: Den kodede briks opholdstid indenfor flere gange ved det samme sikkerhedsrelæ.
og udenfor udløsningsområdet skal mindst være ● Antallet af gyldige læreprocesser ved et
0,5 sekunder, ellers kan sikkerhedsrelæet gå over i sikkerhedsrelæ er begrænset til maksimalt 8.
fejltilstanden, og ERROR-LED’en lyser rødt. Ved ● Sikkerhedsrelæet kan kun benyttes med den
afbrydelse af spændingstilførslen resettes sidst lærte kodede brik.
sikkerhedsrelæet til driftstilstanden. ● En læreproces er ugyldig, hvis:
- læreprocessen afbrydes, inden den grønne
LED slukker
- der slukkes for tilførselsspændingen under
læreprocessen
Bemærk:
Også efter den 8. læreproces, eller hvis der lægges
en "gammel" kodet brik hen til læsehovedet, går sys-
temet automatisk over i læremodus. I begge tilfælde
indledes en læreproces over 60 sekunder, den sid-
ste udløserkode forbliver dog aktiv i lageret ( se
tilstandstabellen ), der læres ingen ny kode.
Ba_T4000_dk.PMD 21 31.01.2005, 10:28

System-tilstandstabel
PLC LED-visning Tilstand

Ind- Udgang
OUT (meldesignal)
(sikkerhedskreds)
blinkimpulser
S T A T E
Relæ KA, KB
Kodet brik-/
dør-stilling
ERR (rød)
OUT (gul)
(grøn)
Antal
ERR
TST
Normal drift lukket tændt N 1 0 1 1 0 Normal drift, dør lukket
åben slukket N 0 0 0 0 0 Normal drift, dør åben
Idrifttagning blinker
Første idrifttagning efter levering
åben slukket N 0 0 vedvarende 0 0
Parat til første læreproces
med 4 Hz
blinker i
lukket slukket N 0 0 60 sek. med 0 0 Læreproces
ca. 1 Hz
Positiv-kvittering for korrekt gennemført
lukket slukket N 0 0 0 0 0 læreproces.
Til normal drift skal apparatet tændes på ny
Statusvisning x slukket x 0 0 3 0 0 Visning eft<er 1. til 5. Læreproces
Visning af de endnu tilladte læreprocesser efter

x slukket x 0 0 2 0 0
6. læreproces
En
Visning af de endnu tilladte læreprocesser efter
x slukket x 0 0 blinkserie 1 0 0
7. læreproces
efter
indkoblin-
Appparatet kann ikke gennemføre
x slukket x 0 0 gen 0 0 0
læreprocesser mere
Fejlvisning x slukket N 0 1 0 0 1 Svigt af apparatintegreret komponent eller
x slukket N 0 1 0 0 1 Den kodede brik er kortere end 0,5 sek. i

udløsningsområdet
Betjeningsfejl lukket slukket N 0 1 1 0 1 Ikke-tilladt 9. læreproces
lukket slukket N 0 1 Korte blink- 2 0 1 Ikke-tilladt-læreproces af en gammel kodet brik
serier med Negativ-kvittering af en læreproces. Den kodede
lukket slukket N 0 1 gentagelse 3 0 1 brik blev holdt hen foran læsehovedet i mindre
efter 1 sek. end 60 sek.
Testdrift lukket slukket 1 0 1 1 0 1
Ekstern apparat-test på “ÅBEN” og funktion

lukket slukket 1 0 1 1 0 1
ERR-udgang med lukket dør
N = 0 volt eller ikke koblet 1 = lys

0 = 0 Volt 0 = mørk
1 = 24 Volt
x = volt eller 24 volt
hhv. dør åbne eller lukket
Henvisning:
● Sikkerhedsrelæet kan kun benyttes sammen med den aktuelt sidst kodede brik.
Kontrol og vedligeholdelse
Til sikring af en korrekt og vedvarende funktion er - at kabelåbningen på læsehovedet er tæt

det nødvendigt at foretage regelmæssige kontroller - løse ledningstilslutninger på sikkerhedsrelæet
med hensyn til: - kontrol af koblingsafstanden
- at den kodede brik og læsehovedet er fastgjort
sikkert (brug af de vedlagte sikkerhedsskruer)
Ba_T4000_dk.PMD 22 31.01.2005, 10:28

DK
Funktionskontrol (selvtest) Der slukkes for sikkerhedsudgangene, dermed er det
muligt at teste hele sikkerhedskredsen. Som
Ved elektromagnetiske sikkerhedsafbrydere eller overvågningsfunktion sættes diagnoseudgangen
magnetsensorer kan funktionskontrollen foregå ved ERR af sikkerhedsrelæet ligeledes på HIGH.
at man regelmæssigt åbner beskyttelsesanordningen. Når testindgangen resettes, resettes diagnose-
udgangen ERR igen til LOW af sikkerhedsrelæet, den
Fra styringskategori 2 skal der i henhold til EN 60204-1 : røde LED går ud, og der tændes igen for
1997 (kap. 9.4.2.4) ved opstarten eller med fastlagte sikkerhedsudgangene.
mellemrum foretages en funktionskontrol af hele På den måde er en selvtest af sikkerhedssystemet
sikkerhedssystemet. mulig uden at åbne beskyttelsesanordningen.
Det er ikke nødvendigt at kontrollere sikker-

hedslæsehovedet T 4000’s interne funktion, fordi Udelukkelse af ansvar
apparatet overvåger sig selv i realtid. Apparatet
fastslår en forsvejsning fra en udgangskontakt Udelukkelse af ansvar ved:
(relæudgang) senest næste gang beskyttelses-
anordningen åbnes. En tværslutning af udgangs- - brug i modstrid med formålet
ledningen fastslås ikke af apparatet. Desuden kan - manglende overholdelse af sikkerheds-
hele sikkerhedskredsen testes uden at åbne anvisningerne
beskyttelsesanordningen. Dertil simuleres en åbning - påmontering og elektrisk tilslutning af ikke-autori-
af beskyttelsesanordningen ved at tilføre 24 V DC til seret personale
testindgangen. - indgreb af udenforstående
Typisk aktiveringsområde (ved ledningslængde I = 0 til 25 m) *)
Vær opmærksom Udgangstilstand

på den sikre
m
frakoblingsafstand Kodet brik Hysterese
sar = 23 mm s TÆNDT
(s. Sikkerhedshenvisninger
sensorer, s. 28) Læsehoved
SLUKKET
Frakoblings-
8 Sao Afstand s
afstand
Afstand s [mm]
Hysterese
SLUKKET 6
SLUKKET
Indkoblings-
afstand Sao
4
2
TÆNDT
-8 -6 -4 -2 0 2 4 6 8
Centrumsforskydning m [mm]
*)
Min.-/maks.-værdier se Tekniske data
Ba_T4000_dk.PMD 23 31.01.2005, 10:28

Tilslutnings- og blokdiagram, tilslutningseksempler
Driftsspænding
Driftssp
Driftsspæ
pændin
nding
g
+ 24 V 0 V
DC
Afskærmet
Afskæ rmet
et tilslutnin
tilslutning
g
brun hvid
Læsehoved
Kodet
udløser
u dlø
d øser
ser
se
er
CPU-A CPU-B Trans-
DDSP (Double Dynamic ponder
Safety Path): Dobbelt
dynamisk sikkerhedssti
koblet
et
med fejlovervågning af
oble
test
est
udløseren, læsehovedet
e ko
ern te
KA KB og kablet til læsehovedet

ekstern
g iikke
kke
ste
ks
TST-indgang
gang
Drift uden e
TST T
Testindgang
ST-indg
OUT Frigivelsesudgang (ingen sikkerhedsudgang)

10kW
ERR Diagnoseudgang
GND 0V (internt forbundet med driftsspændingens 0 V)
T
10kW
H1/H2 Tilslutning læsehoved
SH Afskærmet tilslutning læsehoved
13/14 Tilslutning slutterkontakt 1, frigivelse sikkerhedsrelæ
23/24 Tilslutning slutterkontakt 2, frigivelse sikkerhedsrelæ
Sikkerheds - PLC
KANAL A
I0 sikkerheds-indgang
0V
TO0 taktet udgang
0V
KANAL B
med sikkerheds-PLC
Tilslutningseksempel
I1 sikkerheds-indgang
0V
TO1 taktet udgang
0V
I2 indgange
I3
0V
O2 statisk
udgang
Ba_T4000_dk.PMD 24 31.01.2005, 10:28

DK
Sikkerhedsrelæ T 4000-1RBA 01
Måltegning
22,5 114,5
H1 H2 SH
24V 0V
STATE
99
OUT
ERROR
TST OUT ERR GND

13 14 23 24
passer til standard-

DIN-skinne 35 mm
Koblingsreaktion
Beskyttelsesanordning
2 sikkerhedsudgange (relæudgange)
1 dør-meldeudgang (halvlederudgang, ingen lukket åben
sikkerhedsudgang) (kodet brik fastslået) (kodet brik ikke i
udløsningsområdet)
Læsehoved Kodet brik Læsehoved
13 14 13 14
23 24 23 24
24 V OUT 24 V OUT
Ba_T4000_dk.PMD 25 31.01.2005, 10:28

Tekniske data
Parameter Værdi Enhed
min. typ. max.
Husets materiale Kunststof PA6.6
Mål 114,5 x 99 x 22,5 mm
Masse 0,2 kg
Omgivelsestemperatur ved UB = 24 V DC 0 - +55 °C
Opbevaringstemperatur -25 - +70 °C
Kapslingsklasse IP20
Kapslingsklasse Kapslingsklasse III, tilsmudsningsgrad 2
Materialegruppe II
Montering DIN-skinne 35 mm iht. DIN 46277
Antal læsehoveder 1 læsehoved pr. sikkerhedsrelæ
Tilslutningsmåde stikbare skrueklemmer / koded
Tilslutningsklemmer 0,14 - 2,5 mm²
Driftsspænding UB
21 24 27 V DC
(styret, restripple < 5 %)
Optaget effekt (med relæet slået til) 150 mA
Sikkerhedsudgange 2 sikkerhedsrelæer med hver sin slutter
Udløsningsspænding (relæudgange) 1)
- ved koblingsspænding 0,1 ... 60 V 1 - 300 mA
- ved koblingsspænding 10 ... 24 V 1 - 4000 mA
Ekstern sikring (sikkerhedskreds) 6,3 A flink
Anvendelseskategori iht. EN 60947-5-2 AC-12 300mA 60V 50Hz / DC-12 300mA 60V
AC-140 2A 30V 50Hz / DC-13 4A 30V
Styringskategori iht. EN 954 3
Klassificering iht. IEC/EN 60 947-5-3 PDF-M
Nominel isolationsspænding Ui - - 63 V
Nominel stødspændingssikkerhed U imp - - 1,5 kV
Modstandsstyrke mod vibrationer iht. EN 60 947-5-2
Mekaniske udløsningscyklusser (relæ) 10 x 10 6
Udløsningsforsinkelse fra tilstandens ændring - - 180 ms
Beredskabsforsinkelse 2) 3 s
Holdetid 0,5 - - s
Meldeudgange (diagnose ERR, frigivelse OUT,
Halvlederudgang, p-koblende) 3)
- Udgangsspænding 0,8 x UB - UB V DC
- Belastbarhed - - 20 mA
Testindgang LOW 0 - 2 V DC
HIGH 15 - UB V DC
EMC-beskyttelseskrav iht. IEC 60947-5-3
LED-visninger STATE LED grøn: normal drift
blinkende: læreproces
OUT LED gul: kodet brik fastslået
ERROR LED rød: - testindgang aktiveret
- intern fejl elektronik
- ugyldig læreproces
1)
Hvis der kobles en koblingsstrøm på > 300 mA over relæudgangene, kan der ikke længere sikkert kobles en lav strøm (≤ 10 mA) på grund af
guldkontakternes udbrænding.
2)
Efter indkoblingen af driftsspændingen er relæudgange slukket under beredskabsforsinkelsen, og meldeudgangene er på LOW-potential
3)
ikke kortslutningssikker
Ba_T4000_dk.PMD 26 31.01.2005, 10:28

DK
Læsehoveder T 4000-DNA...
Læsehoved T 4000-DNA..P (med fast forbundet ledning)
Måltegning
Ledningslængde I 42 12
ø4,5
ø8
T4000-D XXXXXX
25
32 ±0,1 aktive 4,6 aktive
flade flade
Tilslutningsfordeling
Læsehoved med tilslutningsledning
Skærm
BN Læsehoved
WH
H1 H2 SH
Sikkerhedsrelæ
Læsehoved T 4000-DNAC med stikforbindelse M8 (kombinationsvariant med stop- und skruetilslutning)

Måltegning
32,6 42 12
6,8 32 ±0,1 4,6

ø8
ø4,5
ø10
T4000-DNACXXXXXX
25
aktive
3 flade
4
aktive 1
min.38 5,5
flade
Tilslutningsfordeling
Læsehoved med stikforbindelse
WH Skærm 3
4
BN 1
Oversigt over
H1 H2 SH læsehovedets
stikforbindelse
Sikkerhedsrelæ
Ba_T4000_dk.PMD 27 31.01.2005, 10:28

Tekniske data
min. typ. max.
Husets materiale Fortron, glasfiberarmeret termoplast, massivt støbtn
Mål 42 x 25 x 12 mm
Masse (inkl. 10 m ledning) 0,3 kg
Omgivelsestemperatur -25 - +70 °C
Indbygningsposition vilkårlig
Virkemåde induktiv
Dynamisk dataoverføring
2 kbit/s
til sikkerhedsrelæet
Holdetid 1) 0,5 - - s
Udløsningsområde ved centrumsforskydning m = 0 2)
Ledningslængde l = 0 til 25 m
- Indkoblingsafstand Sao 5 6 -
- Koblingshysterese 0,5 1,5 -
- Sikker frakoblingsafstand Sar - - 23 mm
Ledningslængde l ≥ 25 til 50 m
- Indkoblingsafstand Sao 4 4,8 -
- Koblingshysterese 0,4 1,2 -
- Sikker frakoblingsafstand Sar - - 23
Spændingstilførsel over sikkerhedsrelæ
Tilslutning læsehoved T 4000-DNA..P fast støbt tilslutningsledning med kabeltyller
Ledningslængde læsehoved T 4000-DNA..P - - 15 m
Tilslutning læsehoved T 4000-DNAC Stikforbinder M8 (med stop- og skruetilslutning), 3-polet
Ledningslængde T 4000-DNAC - - 50 m
1)
Gennemløbstiden er det interval, hvor den kodede brik skal være inden for eller uden for responsområdet.
2)
Disse værdier gælder for den ikke-flugtende og den flugtende montering af læsehovedet og den kodede brik på aluminium.
Montageanvisninger
● Læsehovedets tilslutningsledning må ikke forlænges.

Der må ikke indsættes mellemklemmer.
● Den kodede brik og læsehovedet skal anbringes således, at:

- frontfladerne med lukket beskyttelsesanordning ligger overfor hinanden med en indkoblingsafstand på
0,8 x Sao eller mindre (se de tekniske data).
- de ikke benyttes som mekanisk stopanslag.
- de er formsluttende forbundet med beskyttelsesanordningen, f.eks. ved brug af de vedlagte sikkerheds-
skruer.
Sikkerhedshenvisninger
● Ved flugtende indbygning af læsehoved og/eller kodet brik ændres koblingsafstanden afhængigt af
indbygningsdybden og beskyttelsesanordningens materiale.
● Beskyttelsesanordningen skal være konstrueret sådan, at enhver fare er udelukket indtil afstanden Sar
(sikker frakoblingsafstand).
Henvisning: med en sikker frakoblingsafstand Sar = 23 mm er relæudgangene udkoblet sikkert, også ved
svigt af en intern komponent.
Ba_T4000_dk.PMD 28 31.01.2005, 10:28

DK
Kodet brik T 4000-1KBA
Måltegning
42 12
ø4,5
ø8
T4000-1KBA 5306531
25
32 ±0,1 4,6
aktive aktive
flade flade
Tekniske data
min. typ. max.
Husets materiale Fortron, glasfiberarmeret termoplast, massivt støbt
Mål 42 x 25 x 12 mm
Masse 0,02 kg
Indbygningsposition aktiv flade over for læsehovedet
Holdetid 1) 0,5 – – s
1)
Holdetiden er den tid, hvor aktiveringsanordningen skal befinde sig inden for eller uden for udløsningsområdet.
Ba_T4000_dk.PMD 29 31.01.2005, 10:28

Ba_T4000_dk.PMD 30 31.01.2005, 10:28

E
Instrucciones de manejo Sensor de seguridad T 4000
Contenido
Aplicación de acuerdo a la finalidad 32

Instrucciones de seguridad 32
Montaje 32
Conexión eléctrica 33
Descripción del sistema 35

Función de aprendizaje para el actuador 35
Tabla de estados del sistema 36
Control y mantenimiento 36
Prueba de función (autotest) 37
Margen de reacción 37
Exoneración de responsabilidad
Datos técnicos 38
Diagrama de conexiones y de bloques 38
Aparato evaluador T 4000-1RBA 01 39
Sensores T 4000-DNA... 41
Actuador T 4000-1KBA 43
8 009 704/P076/25-01-05 • © SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Alemania • Reservados todos los derechos 31
Ba_T4000_es.pmd 31 31.01.2005, 10:30

Aplicación de acuerdo a la finalidad Montaje
El sensor de seguridad T 4000 es un dispositivo El montaje deberá ser efectuado exclusivamen-

técnico de seguridad que se utiliza para controlar te por personal especializado y autorizado.
puertas de seguridad, de tal manera que:
● Tanto el actuador como el sensor deben ser
- en la máquina puedan realizarse trabajos peligro- fácilmente accesibles para realizar los trabajos
sos únicamente, si se encuentra cerrado el dis- de control y sustitución.
positivo de seguridad.
- se active un comando de PARO cuando se abra ● El proceso de conmutación deberá ser iniciado
el dispositivo de seguridad durante el únicamente por el actuador previsto especialmen-
funcionamiento de la máquina. te para este efecto.
Antes de utilizar sensores de seguridad se deberá ● El actuador y el sensor deben estar colocados
llevar a cabo un análisis de riesgos según: de tal modo que
- mientras esté cerrado el dispositivo de seguri-
- EN 954-1, piezas de sistemas de mando relevan- dad, las superficies frontales se encuentren a
tes para la seguridad, anexo C una distancia de conexión no mayor que 0,8 x
- EN 1050, seguridad de máquinas, análisis de ries- Sao (véase las especificaciones técnicas).
gos - no puedan ser utilizados como tope mecánico.
Indicación: Montar un tope adicional para la
La aplicación de acuerdo a la finalidad implica una parte movible del dispositivo de protección.
estricta observancia de los requerimientos para el - en un montaje enrasado se cambia la distancia
montaje y operación, en especial de detección, en dependencia de la profundidad
de montaje y del material del dispositivo de
- EN 954-1, piezas de sistemas de mando relevan- protección.
tes para la seguridad - estén unidos con el dispositivo de protección
- EN 1088, dispositivos de enclavamiento en com- de forma positiva, p. ej. usando los tornillos de
binación con dispositivos disyuntores de protec- seguridad adjuntos.
ción
- EN 60 204-1, equipamiento eléctrico de máquinas. ● El aparato evaluador debe instalarse en un arma-
- EN 60 947-5-3 Exigencias para detectores de rio de distribución con tipo de protección por lo
aproximación con comportamiento definido ante menos de IP54. Para montarlo en un riel normali-
condiciones de error. zado se utiliza el elemento de enclavamiento colo-
cado en el lado trasero del aparato.
Instrucciones de seguridad ● En el montaje consecutivo de varios aparatos

evaluadores en un armario de distribución sin
El sensor de seguridad T 4000 cumple los siguientes circulación de aire (p. ej. ventilador) ha de
requerimientos de seguridad respetarse una distancia de montaje de 10 mm
- Categoría de mando 3 conforme a EN 954-1. entre los aparatos evaluadores.
- Interruptor de proximidad con autorregulación, La distancia de montaje permite disipar
modelo PDF-M según EN 60 947-5-3. libremente el calor de los aparatos evaluadores.
- La conexión en el aparato evaluador tiene una
estructura redundante con autocontrol.
De este modo el dispositivo de seguridad permanece
también operativo incluso al fallar un componente.
- Al abrirse o cerrarse el dispositivo de protección
se controla si los relés del dispositivo de seguridad
se abren y cierran correctamente.
Los sensores de seguridad cumplen funciones de

protección de las personas. Su montaje incorrecto o
bien su manipulación, puede causar graves lesiones
a personas.
32 8 009 704/P076/25-01-05 • © SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Alemania • Reservados todos los derechos
Ba_T4000_es.pmd 32 31.01.2005, 10:30

E
Conexión eléctrica
La conexión eléctrica debe ser llevada a cabo exclusivamente por personal autorizado e instruido
en el campo CEM (compatibilidad electromagnética). La instalación eléctrica debe ser realizada
únicamente estando desconectada la tensión de alimentación del sistema.
● No se deben puentear, separar, desmontar o desactivar de cualquier otro modo los sensores de
seguridad.
● Todas las conexiones eléctricas deberán estar aisladas de la red bien sea por medio de un transformador
aislante (IEC 742) o por medio de medidas de aislamiento equivalentes.
● Todos los contactos de salida para cargas capacitivas e inductivas deben tener un circuito de protección
de suficiente capacidad.
● Prever una protección mediante fusibles de contacto externa (fusible 6,3 A rápido) para salidas de relés.
Para garantizar la seguridad es imprescindible chequear las dos salidas de seguridad (salidas de relé)
13/14 y 23/24.
Dispositivo de evaluación T 4000

Tensión de operación
+ 24 V 0 V
DC
Conexión de blindaje
marrón blanco
Sensor
Actuador
13 14 23 24 codificado
Trans-
ponder
Dispositivo de evaluación T 4000

+ 24 V 0 V
DC
marrón blanco
Sensor
Actuador
Trans-
ponder
Ba_T4000_es.pmd 33 31.01.2005, 10:30

● Usando una fuente de alimentación común, todas Indicación: Los bornes enchufables y codificados en
las cargas capacitivas e inductivas conectadas a el aparato evaluador permiten efectuar una confec-
la fuente de alimentación (p. ej. contactores) han ción preliminar de las conexiones de potencia facili-
de conectarse con elementos antiparasitarios tando de este modo un rápido y sencillo montaje final.
correspondientes. Además, los bornes ofrecen un grado máximo de
seguridad en caso de servicio.
La salida de aviso de puerta OUT no debe
usarse como salida de seguridad.
● No se debe prolongar el cable de conexión del

sensor.
● La pantalla del cable del sensor (pelar máx. 3 cm)

se tiene que enlazar con la conexión SH de la
unidad evaluadora.
● Las salidas de aviso ERR y OUT así como los

bornes de conexión para la cabeza de lectura H1/
H2 no son a prueba de cortocircuitos.
● Si el aparato no muestra función alguna después

de conectarse la tensión de operación, (por ejem-
plo, el LED verde STATE no se enciende), debe
enviarse el aparato, sin abrirlo, al fabricante.
● Como material conductor sólo deberá emplearse

cobre de termorresistencia ≥ 75 °C.
Indicatores LED
● Los tornillos de los bornes de conexión deberán
apretarse a par de apriete de 0,6 - 0,8 Nm. STATE LED verde operación normal
● Para el empleo y la utilización conforme a los intermitente aprendizaje (para otras

requisitos es necesario emplear alimentación señales, ver tabla de estado)
de tensión con característica “for use in class 2
circuits”. OUT LED amaril. se detectó un actuador válido
No deberán fluir corrientes de ≥ 8 A.
ERROR LED rojo - Entrada de test activada
- Error interno de electrónica
- Proceso de aprendizaje in-
válido (ver tabla de estado)
En caso de manejo incorrecto (ERROR) es posible

reposicionar el aparato evaluador a su estado de
operación, interrumpiendo la alimentación de tensión
durante unos 10 segundos.
Ba_T4000_es.pmd 34 31.01.2005, 10:30

E
Descripción del sistema seguridad y la salida de aviso de la puerta se
encuentran en LOW, es decir que el sistema se
El sensor de seguridad T 4000 está formado por tres encuentra en un estado seguro.
componentes:
● Función de aprendizaje para el primer actuador
(estado de entrega):
- actuador codificado
1.Conectar la tensión de operación en el aparato evaluador
- sensor
- parpadeo rápido (aprox. 4 Hz) del LED verde
- aparato de evaluación
2.Acercar el actuador al sensor (poner atención a
la distancia < Sao)
Cada actuador suministrado posee una clara codifi-
- Comienza el proceso de aprendizaje, parpadeo
cación electrónica, constituyendo por lo tanto un
lento (aprox. 1 Hz) del LED verde
ejemplar único para el sistema aplicado. No es posi-
3.Termina el proceso de aprendizaje (después de
ble modificar el código de un actuador.
60 segundos)
- se apaga el LED verde
El sensor está montado en la parte fija del dispositivo
4.Para activar el código aprendido del actuador en
de protección, y está conectado con el aparato
el aparato evaluador, es necesario desconectar
evaluador mediante un cable bifilar apantallado.
ahora la tensión de operación por lo menos duran-
El actuador fijado al dispositivo móvil de protección
te 10 segundos.
es acercado al sensor al cerrarse las puertas. Al
alcanzar la distancia de conexión se activa la ● Función de aprendizaje de un actuador nuevo:
alimentación de tensión hacia el actuador a través 1.Conectar la tensión de operación en el aparato eva-
del sensor inductivo, con lo cual se puede iniciar la luador
transmisión de datos. 2.Acercar el actuador nuevo al sensor (poner
La muestra leída de Bits se compara con el código atención a la distancia < Sao)
memorizado en el aparato evaluador y al coincidir - Comienza el proceso de aprendizaje, parpadeo
los datos se habilitan a las salidas de seguridad del LED verde (aprox. 1 Hz)
(salida de relé) y la salida de aviso de la puerta OUT 3.Termina el proceso de aprendizaje (después de
(salida semiconductora) se pone igualmente a HIGH. 60 segundos)
Debido a la consulta dinámica del actuador y a la - se apaga el LED verde, se memoriza el código
estructura redundante y diversitaria de la electrónica nuevo, se desactiva el código viejo
de seguridad junto con dos salidas de seguridad, el 4.Para activar el código nuevo aprendido del actuador
aparato evaluador pasa al estado seguro con en el aparato evaluador, es necesario desconec-
cualquier fallo detectado. tar ahora la tensión de operación por lo menos
Al abrir el dispositivo de protección las salidas de durante 10 segundos.
seguridad desconectan el circuito de seguridad y la
salida de aviso de la puerta (OUT) conmuta a LOW. Indicación:
El estado de los contactos normalmente abiertos se ● No es posible el aprendizaje repetido del mis-
controla internamente mediante los contactos NC de mo actuador en el mismo aparato evaluador.
acción positiva. ● La cantidad de procesos de aprendizaje váli-
Ante un fallo interno en el aparato evaluador se dos en un aparato evaluador está limitada a
desconecta el circuito de seguridad, la salida de un máximo de 8.
diagnóstico (ERROR) se pone a HIGH y el indicador ● El aparato evaluador podrá ser operado única-
LED ERROR rojo se enciende. mente con el actuador aprendido en último lugar.
● Un proceso de aprendizaje es inválido cuando:
Indicación: El tiempo de presencia de un actuador - el proceso de aprendizaje fue interrumpido
dentro y fuera de la zona de reacción debe ser como antes de que se apagara el LED verde
mínimo de 0,5 segundos, de lo contrario el aparato - durante el proceso de aprendizaje fue inter-
evaluador puede pasar a estado de error y el LED rumpida la tensión de alimentación
ERROR rojo se enciende. Interrumpiendo el abaste- Atención:
cimiento de tensión, el aparato evaluador se repone El sistema pasa también automáticamente al modo
al estado de servicio. de aprendizaje después del 8vo proceso de aprendi-
zaje o bien al colocarse un actuador "viejo" en la ca-
Función de aprendizaje para el actuador beza de lectura. En ambos casos se inicia un proce-
so de aprendizaje con una duración de 60 segun-
Antes de que el sistema forme una unidad funcional dos, sin embargo, el último código de actuador per-
es necesario que el actuador sea asignado al apara- manece activo en la memoria (véase tabla de esta-
to evaluador en una función de aprendizaje. dos), no se aprenderá un código nuevo.
Durante un proceso de aprendizaje, las salidas de
Ba_T4000_es.pmd 35 31.01.2005, 10:30

Tabla de estados del sistema
PLC Indicador de LED Estado

Entr. Salida
pulsos parpadeo
actuador/puerta
Cantidad de im-
(señal de aviso
OUT (amarillo)
STATE (verde)
Relés KA, KB
Posición de
(circuito de
ERR (rojo)
seguridad)
ERR
TST
OUT
Operación normal cerr. con. N 1 0 1 1 0 Operación normal, puerta cerrada
abie. desc. N 0 0 0 0 0 Operación normal, puerta abierta
Puesta en marcha parpadea
Primera puesta en marcha después de entrega
abie. desc. N 0 0 permanente- 0 0
Listo para el primer aprendizaje
mente a 4 Hz
parpadea
cerr. desc. N 0 0 60 seg. a 0 0 Proceso de aprendizaje
aprox. 1 Hz
Acuse de recibo positivo para proceso exito
cerr. desc. N 0 0 0 0 0 so de aprendizaje. Para la operación normal,
el aparato debe ser conectado nuevamente
Indicación de status x desc. x 0 0 3 0 0 Indic. desp. del 1° hasta el 5° proceso de aprendizaje
Indicación de los procesos de aprendizaje

x desc. x 0 0 2 0 0 permitidos restantes después del 6° proceso de
aprendizaje
Secuencia
única de Indicación de los procesos de aprendizaje
x desc. x 0 0 parpadeo 1 0 0 permitidos restantes después del 7° proceso de
después de aprendizaje
conexión
El aparato no puede realizar más procesos de
x desc. x 0 0 0 0 0
aprendizaje
Indicación de fallos x desc. N 0 1 0 0 1 Falla de componentes internos del aparato o bien
el actuador ha estado menos de 0,5 seg. en la

x desc. N 0 1 0 0 1
zona de reacción
Error de manejo cerr. desc. N 0 1 Breves 1 0 1 el 9° proceso de aprendizaje es inadmisible

cerr. desc. N 0 1 secuencias de 2 0 1 Proceso de aprendizaje inadmisible de un act. viejo
parpadeo con
repetición Acuse de recibo negativo para proceso de
cerr. desc. N 0 1 después de 3 0 1 aprendizaje. El actuador estuvo menos de
1 seg. 60 seg. delante de la cabeza de lectura
Operación de test abie. desc. 1 0 1 1 0 1
Test externo de aparato en „ABIERTO“ y

cerr. desc. 1 0 1 1 0 1
función salida ERR con la puerta cerrada
N = 0 voltios o no conectado 1 = claro

0 = 0 voltios 0 = obscuro
1 = 24 voltios
x = 0 ó 24 voltios
o bien puerta abierta o cerrada
Indicación:
● El aparato evaluador puede ser operado únicamente con el actuador respectivo aprendido en último lugar.
Control y mantenimiento
Para poder garantizarse una función correcta y du- - Estanqueidad de la penetración de cables en el
radera del sistema, es necesario llevar a cabo perió- sensor
dicamente los siguientes controles: - conexiones aflojadas de los conductores en el apa-
- fijación segura del actuador y del sensor rato evaluador
(utilización de los tornillos de seguridad adjuntos) - comprobar la distancia de conmutación
Ba_T4000_es.pmd 36 31.01.2005, 10:30

E
Prueba de función (autotest) Las salidas de seguridad se desconectan permitién-
dose de este modo el ensayo de todo el circuito de
En los interruptores de seguridad electromagnéticos seguridad. Como función de control el aparato eva-
y en los sensores magnéticos se puede comprobar luador pone igualmente la salida de diagnóstico ERR
el funcionamiento abriendo y cerrando cíclicamente a HIGH.
el dispositivo de protección (puerta). Al resetear la entrada de test, el aparato evaluador
repone de nuevo la salida de diagnóstico ERR a LOW,
De acuerdo a la norma EN 60204-1 : 1997 (cap. el LED rojo se apaga y las salidas de seguridad se
9.4.2.4), a partir de la categoría de mando 2 es ne- conectan de nuevo.
cesario llevar a cabo una prueba de función del sis- De este modo es posible un autotest del sistema de
tema de seguridad completo al momento de ser pues- seguridad sin abrir el dispositivo de protección.
to en marcha o bien periódicamente conforme a los
intervalos previamente especificados.
Exoneración de responsabilidad
No es necesario comprobar el funcionamiento interno
del sensor de seguridad T 4000, porque el aparato Una exoneración de responsabilidad tendrá lugar en
se autocontrola en tiempo real. La soldadura de un los siguientes casos:
contacto de salida (salida de relé) es reconocida por
el aparato lo más tardar con la siguiente apertura del - utilización en desacuerdo con la finalidad
dispositivo de protección. El aparato no reconoce un - incumplimiento de las instrucciones de seguridad
cortocircuito transversal del cable de salida. Además - montaje y conexión eléctrica llevados a cabo por
puede ensayarse todo el circuito de seguridad sin personal no autorizado
abrir el dispositivo de protección. Aplicando 24 V DC - intervención ajena
en la entrada de test, se simula una apertura del
dispositivo de protección.
Rango de actuación (con una longitud del cable l = 0 a 25 m) *)
Observar el cumplimiento Estado inicial

de la distancia de
m
conmutación segura, Actuador Histéresis
sar = 23 mm s CON
(v. indicaciones de
seguridad de los sensores, Sensor
pág. 42) DESC
Distancia de Sao Distancia s
8 desconexión
Distancia s [mm]
Desconectado Histéresis Desconectado

6
Distancia de
conexión Sao
2
Conectado
-8 -6 -4 -2 0 2 4 6 8
Desplazamiento de centros en m [mm]
*)
Valores máx./mín, v. Datos técnicos
Ba_T4000_es.pmd 37 31.01.2005, 10:30

Diagrama de conexiones y de bloques, ejemplo de conexión
Aparato evaluador T 4000

T
+ 24 V 0 V
DC
marrón
n blanco
Sensor
Actuador
codificado
CPU-A CPU-B Trans-
Entrada TST no conectada:
operación sin test externo
Safety Path):
Ruta de seguridad
dinámica doble
del actuador,
KA KB del sensor y
del cable del sensor
TST entrada de test

10kW
OUT Salida de aviso de puerta ( ninguna salida de seguridad)
10kW ERR salida de diagnóstico
GND 0V (unido internamente con 0V de la tensión de servicio)
H1/H2 conexión del sensor
SH conexión blindada del sensor
13/14 conexión contactos normalm.abiertos 1, liberación relé de seguridad
23/24 conexión contactos normalm.abiertos 2, liberación relé de seguridad
PLC de seguridad
CANAL A
I0 entrada de seguridad
0V
TO0 salida sincronizada
0V
CANAL B
con PLC de seguridad
Ejemplo de conexión
I1 entrada de seguridad
0V
TO1 salida sincronizada
0V
I2 entradas
I3
0V
O2 salida
estática
Ba_T4000_es.pmd 38 31.01.2005, 10:30

E
Aparato evaluador T 4000-1RBA 01
Dibujo acotado
22,5 114,5
H1 H2 SH
24V 0V
STATE
99
OUT
ERROR
TST OUT ERR GND

13 14 23 24
adaptado para riel de perfil de sombrero

de 35 mm
Comportamiento de conexión
Dispositivo de protección
2 salidas de seguridad (salidas de relé)
1 salida de aviso de puerta (salida de semiconductor, cerrado abierto
sin salida de seguridad) (actuador reconocido) (actuador no enzona
de reacción)
Sensor Actuador Sensor
13 14 13 14
23 24 23 24
24 V OUT 24 V OUT
Ba_T4000_es.pmd 39 31.01.2005, 10:30

Datos técnicos
Parámetro Valor Unidad
Mínimo Típico Máximo
Material de la carcasa Plástico PA6.6
Dimensiones 114,5 x 99 x 22,5 mm
Masa 0,2 kg
Temperatura ambiental a Uap = 24 V DC 0 - +55 °C
Temperatura de almacenamiento -25 - +70 °C
Tipo de Protección ambiental IP20
Clase de Protección Clase de protección III, grado de ensuciamiento 2
Grupo de material II
Montaje 35 mm al rail de adaptación según DIN 46227
Cantidad de sensores 1 sensor por dispositivo de evaluación
Tipo de conexión Terminales atornillados enchufables / codificados
Terminales de conexión 0,14 - 2,5 mm²
Voltaje operativo Uap
21 24 27 V DC
(regulado, ondulación residual < 5 %)
Consumo de corriente (con relé cerrado) 150 mA
Salidas de seguridad 2 relés de seguridad con 1 contacto NO cada uno
Intensidad de corriente de con. (salidas de relé) 1)
- Tensión de conmutación 0,1 ... 60 V 1 - 300 mA

- Tensión de conmutación 10 ... 24 V 1 - 4000 mA
Fusibles externos (circuito de seguridad) 6,3 A rápido
Categoria de utilización según EN 60947-5-2 AC-12 300mA 60V 50Hz / DC-12 300mA 60V
AC-140 2A 30V 50Hz / DC-13 4A 30V
Categoría de control según EN 954 3
Clasificación según IEC/EN 60-947-5-3 PDF-M
Tensión de aislamiento medida Ui - - 63 V
Resistencia a la tensión transitoria Uimp - - 1,5 kV
Resistencia a la vibración De acuerdo con EN 60 947-5-2
Operaciones mecánicas de activación (relé) 10 x 10 6
Retardo operativo de cambio de estado - - 180 ms
Tiempo de retraso antes de disponibilidad 2) 3 s
Tiempo de espera 0,5 - - s
Salidas alarma (diagnóstico ERR, habilitar
OUT, salida semicond., activación p) 3)
- Voltaje de salida 0,8 x Uap - Uap V DC
- Rango de carga - - 20 mA
Test input LOW 0 - 2 V DC
HIGH 15 - Uap V DC
Requerimiento de protección EMV
(compa. Electromagnética) De acuerdo con IEC 60947-5-3
Indicadores LED STATE LED verde: Operación Normal
Intermitente: Operación de aprendizaje
OUT LED amarillo: Detección del actuador
ERROR LED rojo: - Test de entrada activado
- Error interno de circuito
- Operación de aprendizaje invalidada
1)
Si se conmuta una vez una corriente de conexión de > 300 mA a través de las salidas de relé, no se puede conmutar con mayor seguridad
una corriente menor (£10 mA) como consecuencia del desgaste de los contactos de oro.
2)
Las salidas de relé están desactivadas y las salidas de alarma están a BAJO potencial, durante el tiempo de retardo para su puesta en
funcionamiento.
3)
No está a prueba de cortocircuito.
Ba_T4000_es.pmd 40 31.01.2005, 10:30

E
Sensores T 4000-DNA...
Sensor T 4000-DNA..P (con cable fijo)
Dibujo acotado
42 12
Longitud de cable l
ø4,5
ø8
T4000-D XXXXXX
25
32 ±0,1 4,6 Superficie
Superficie
activa
activa
Conexionado
Sensor con cable de conexión
Pantalla
BN Sensor
WH
H1 H2 SH
Aparato evaluador
Sensor T 4000-DNAC con conector por enchufe M8 (variante combinada con conector de muesca y
roscado)
Dibujo acotado
32,6 42 12
6,8 32 ±0,1 4,6

ø8
ø4,5
ø10
T4000-DNACXXXXXX
25
Superficie
3 activa
min.38 Superficie 5,5 1

activa
Conexionado
Sensor con conector por enchufe
WH Pantalla 3
4
BN 1
Vista del conector
H1 H2 SH por enchufe del
sensor
Aparato evaluador
Ba_T4000_es.pmd 41 31.01.2005, 10:30

Datos técnicos
Parámetro Valor Unidad
Mínimo Típico Máximo
Material de la carcasa Fortron, material termoplástico reforzado
completamente encapsulado
Dimensiones 42 x 25 x 12 mm
Masa (incluyendo 10 m de cable) 0,3 kg
Temperatura ambiental -25 - +70 °C
Protección ambiental IP67
Posición de montaje Cualquiera
Funcionamiento Inductiva
Transferencia de datos dinámica a la unidad
2 kbit/s
de evaluación
Tiempo de espera 1) 0,5 - - s
Rango operativo en caso de holgura
central m = 0 2)
Longitud de cable l = 0 a 25 m
- Distancia de activación Sao 5 6 -
- Histéresis diferencial 0,5 1,5 -
- Distancia de desactivación de seguridas Sar en ca - - 23 mm
Longitud de cable l ≥ 25 a 50 m
- Distancia de activación Sao 4 4,8 -
- Histéresis de diferencial 0,4 1,2 -
- Distancia de desactivación de seguridas Sar en ca - - 23
Fuente de alimentación Via unidad evaluadora
Conexión del sensor T 4000-DNA..P Cable de conexión permanentemente sellado y manguitos
Longitud del cable del sensor T 4000-DNA..P 15 m
Conexión del sensor T 4000-DNAC Conector enchufable M8 (con empalme de muesca y roscado),
3 polos
Longitud de T 4000-DNAC - - 50 m
1)
El tiempo de permanencia es el intervalo de tiempo en el que el actuador debe estar dentro o fuera del margen de reacción.
2)
Estos valores tienen validez tanto para el montaje enrasado como no enrasado del sensor y del actuador en aluminio.
Avisos de montaje
● No se debe prolongar el cable de conexión del sensor.
No se deben usar bornes intermedios.
● Tanto el actuador como el sensor deben estar instalados de modo que:

- las superficies activas (frontales) con dispositivo de protección cerrado se enfrenten a una distancia de
conexión de 0,8 x Sao o menor (véase los datos técnicos).
- no puedan ser utilizados como tope mecánico.
- la unión con el dispositivo de protección sea positiva, por ejemplo, utilizando los tornillos de seguridad
adjuntos.
Instrucciones de seguridad
● En un montaje enrasado del sensor y/o del actuador, la distancia de conmutación varía en función de
la profundidad de montaje y del material del dispositivo de protección móvil.
● El dispositivo de protección debe estar diseñado de tal modo que se excluya todo riesgo hasta la distancia
Sar (distancia segura de desconexión).
Indicación: A la distancia segura de desconexión Sar = 23 mm, las salidas de relés se encuentran
desconectadas con seguridad, incluso en caso de un fallo interno de un componente.
Ba_T4000_es.pmd 42 31.01.2005, 10:30

E
Actuador T 4000-1KBA
Dibujo acotado
42 12
ø4,5
ø8
T4000-1KBA 5306531
25
32 ±0,1 4,6
Superficie Superficie
activa activa
Datos técnicos
Parametro Valor Unidad
mín. tipo máx.
Material de la carcasa Fortron, termoplástico reforzado con fibra de vidrio,
completamente sellada
Dimensiones 42 x 25 x 12 mm
Masa 0,02 kg
Temperatura ambiental -25 - +70 °C
Tipo de protección IP67
Posición de montaje superficie activa frente al sensor
Tiempo de espera 1) 0,5 - - s
1)
El tiempo de espera es el tiempo en el que se debe encontrar el actuador dentro o fuera de la zona de reacción.
Ba_T4000_es.pmd 43 31.01.2005, 10:30

Ba_T4000_es.pmd 44 31.01.2005, 10:30

F
Mode d’emploi Capteur de sécurité T 4000
Sommaire
Utilisation conforme 46
Consignes de sécurité 46
Montage 46
Raccordement électrique 47
Description du système 49
Fonction d’apprentissage pour l’actionneur 49
Tableau des états du système 50
Contrôle et entretien 50
Contrôle du fonctionnement (auto-test) 51
Exclusion de responsabilité 51
Zone de déclenchement type 51
Caractéristiques techniques 52
Schéma de raccordement et synoptique
modulaire, exemple de raccordement 52
Analyseur T 4000-1RBA 01 53
Capteurs T 4000-DNA... 55
Actionneur T 4000-1KBA 57
8 009 704/P076/25-01-05 • © SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Allemagne • Tous droits réservés 45
Ba_T4000_fr.pmd 45 31.01.2005, 10:35

Utilisation conforme Montage
Le capteur de sécurité T 4000 est un équipement Le montage doit être effectué uniquement par
technique de sécurité destiné à surveiller des des professionnels qualifiés et agréés.
dispositifs de protection de machines. Ainsi :
● L’actionneur et le capteur doivent être bien
- les travaux dangereux ne peuvent être exécutés accessibles pour le contrôle et le remplacement.
sur la machine que si le dispositif de protection est
fermé. ● L’opération de commutation doit être déclenchée
- un ordre d’arrêt est déclenché si le dispositif de uniquement par l’actionneur spécialement prévu à
protection est ouvert lorsque la machine fonctionne. cet effet.
Avant d’utiliser des capteurs de sécurité, il est ● L’actionneur et le capteur doivent être disposés de
nécessaire d’évaluer les risques à la machine suivant : manière à ce que
- les faces avant soient espacées de la distance
- EN 954-1, Parties des systèmes de commande rede connexion minimale 0,8 x Sao ou moins (voir
latives à la sécurité, annexe C les caractéristiques techniques) lorsque le dis-
- EN 1050, Sécurité des machines, appréciation du positif de protection est fermé.
risque - ils ne soient pas utilisés comme butée méca-
nique.
L’utilisation conforme implique le respect des exi- Remarque: Mettre en place une butée supplé-
gences applicables au montage et à la mise en ser- mentaire pour la partie mobile du dispositif de
vice, et en particulier protection.
- en cas de montage affleurant, la distance de
- EN 954-1, Parties des systèmes de commande re- connexion varie en fonction de la profondeur
latives à la sécurité d’insertion et du matériel du dispositif de
- EN 1088, Dispositifs de verrouillage et protection.
d’interverrouillage - l’actionneur soit lié de manière permanente au
- EN 60 204-1, Equipement électrique des machines dispositif de protection par ex. par l’utilisation des
- EN 60 947-5-3, Spécifications pour commutateur vis de sécurité jointes.
capacitif avec comportement défini en cas d’erreur.
● L’analyseur doit être monté dans une armoire de
commande du type de protection minimal IP 54.
Consignes de sécurité Un élément d’enclenchement est prévu au dos de
l’appareil pour la fixation sur un rail normalisé.
Le capteur de sécurité T 4000 satisfait aux exigences ● Lors du montage de plusieurs analyseurs les uns
de sécurité suivantes à côté des autres dans une armoire électrique sans
- Catégorie de commande 3 selon EN 954-1 circulation d’air (par ex. ventilateur), une distance
- Commutateurs capacitifs autocontrôlés type PDF-M de construction de 10 mm doit être respecter entre
selon EN 60 947-5-3 les analyseurs.
- Montage de l’analyseur construit de façon La distance d’implantation permet la libre
redondante avec autosurveillance. dissipation de la chaleur dégagée par l’électronique.
Ainsi, le dispositif de sécurité est encore efficace
si un composant est défectueux.
- Lors de l’ouverture ou de la fermeture du dispositif
de protection, le système vérifie si les relais du dis-
positif de sécurité s’ouvrent et se ferment correc-
tement.
Les capteurs de sécurité remplissent des fonctions

de protection des personnes. Un montage incorrect
ou des manipulations peuvent être à l’origine de
blessures graves.
46 8 009 704/P076/25-01-05 • © SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Allemagne • Tous droits réservés
Ba_T4000_fr.pmd 46 31.01.2005, 10:35

F
Raccordement électrique
Le raccordement électrique doit être effectué uniquement par des professionnels habilités, formés à
la CEM. L’installation électrique doit être effectuée en l’absence de tension.
● Les capteurs de sécurité ne doivent pas être neutralisés (pontage des contacts), dévissés, retirés ni être
inactivés de quelque manière que ce soit.
● Tous les raccordements électriques doivent être isolés du réseau d’alimentation soit par un transformateur
d’isolement (IEC 742), soit par des mesures d’isolation de même valeur.
● Tous les contacts de sortie pour les charges capacitives et inductives doivent posséder une protection
suffisante.
● Prévoir une protection des contacts externe (fusible 6,3 rapide) pour sorties de relais.
Afin de garantir la sécurité, les deux sorties de sécurité (sorties de relais) 13/14 et 23/24 doivent être
impérativement analysées.
Analyseur T 4000
Tension de service
+ 24 V 0 V
DC
Raccordement du blindage
r
Brun Blanc
Capteur
Actionneur
13 14 23 24 codé
Trans-
pondeur
Analyseur T 4000
Tension de service
+ 24 V 0 V
DC
Brun Blanc
Capteur
Actionneur
13 14 23 24 codé
Trans-
pondeur
Ba_T4000_fr.pmd 47 31.01.2005, 10:35

● En utilisant une alimentation standard, toutes les Remarque: Les bornes enfichables et codées de
charges capacitives et inductives reliées à l’analyseur permettent de préconfectionner les câ-
l’alimentation (par ex. protections) doivent bles de raccordement, pour un montage final simple
disposées d’un antiparasite. et rapide.
Elles offrent également une sécurité maximale pour
La sortie OUT (signalisation de l’état de la la maintenance.
porte) ne doit pas être utilisée comme sortie
de sécurité.
● Le câble du capteur ne doit pas être rallongé.
● Le blindage du câble du capteur (dénuder sur 3

cm max.) doit être relié à la connexion SH du
boîtier électronique.
● Les sorties de signalisation ERR et OUT ainsi que

les bornes de la tête de lecture H1/H2 ne sont
pas protégées contre les courts-circuits.
● Si l’appareil ne fonctionne pas une fois la tension

de service appliquée (par ex. LED verte STATE
éteinte), il doit être retourné non ouvert au
fabricant.
● Comme matériau pour les câbles, il ne faut utiliser

que du cuivre résistant à une température ≥ 75°.
● Serrer les vis des bornes de raccordement avec Indicateurs à LED

un couple de 0,6 à 0,8 Nm.
STATE LED verte Fonctionnement normal
● Pour les usages conformes aux normes , il
convient d’utiliser une alimention électrique clignote Processus d’apprentissage
portant la caractéristique « for use in class 2 (pour les autres fonctions de
circuits ». signal, Cf. tableau des états)
Il ne doit pas passer de courants ≥ 8 A.
OUT LED jaune Actionneur correct détecté
ERROR LED rouge - entrée de test activée

- erreur interne électronique
- apprentissage incorrect
(Cf. tableau des états)
En cas d’erreur de manipulation (ERROR), l’analyseur

peut être remis en état de fonctionner en coupant la
tension d’alimentation pendant environ 10 secondes.
Ba_T4000_fr.pmd 48 31.01.2005, 10:35

F
Description du système Fonction d’apprentissage pour l’actionneur
Le capteur de sécurité T 4000 se compose de trois Avant que le système ne forme une unité fonctionnel-
éléments : le, il est nécessaire d’attribuer l’actionneur à l’analy-
seur grâce à une fonction d’apprentissage.
- Actionneur codé Lors d’un processus d’apprentissage, les sorties de
- Capteur sécurité et la sortie d’alarme de la porte sont en niveau
- Analyseur bas, c’est-à-dire que le système se trouve en position
sûre.
Chaque actionneur livré possède son propre codage
électronique et est donc unique pour le système uti- ● Fonction d’apprentissage pour le premier ac-
lisé. Il n’est pas possible de reprogrammer le code tionneur (état d’origine):
d’un actionneur. 1.Appliquer la tension de service à l’analyseur
- clignotement rapide (env. 4 Hz) de la LED verte
Le capteur se fixe sur la partie fixe du dispositif de 2.Approcher l’actionneur du capteur (observer une
protection et est relié à l’analyseur par un câble blindé distance < Sao)
à deux conducteurs. - l’apprentissage commence, clignotement lent
L’actionneur fixé au dispositif de protection s’approche (env. 1 Hz) de la LED verte
du capteur lors de la fermeture de la porte. Lorsque 3.Apprentissage terminé (au bout de 60 secondes)
la distance de détection est atteinte, l’actionneur est - la LED verte s’éteint
alimenté en tension par le capteur inductif et la 4.Pour activer le code de l’actionneur appris dans
transmission des données peut se faire. l’analyseur, la tension de service de l’analyseur doit
Le modèle binaire mémorisé est comparé au code ensuite être déconnectée pendant au moins 10
enregistré dans l’analyseur ; en cas de concordance secondes.
des informations, le changement d’état des sorties
de sécurité (sortie de relais) s’effectue et la sortie ● Fonction d’apprentissage d’un nouvel actionneur:
d’alarme de la porte OUT (sortie semi-conducteur) 1.Appliquer la tension de service à l’analyseur
est en niveau haut. 2.Approcher le nouvel actionneur du capteur
Grâce à la scrutation dynamique de l’actionneur, à la (observer une distance < Sao)
redordance de l’électronique interne et des sorties, - l’apprentissage commence, la LED verte clignote
l’analyseur détecte toute erreur. (env. 1 Hz)
Lors de l’ouverture du dispositif de protection, les 3.Apprentissage terminé (au bout de 60 secondes)
sorties de sécurité ouvert le circuit de sécurité et la - la LED verte s’éteint, le nouveau code est enregi-
sortie d’alarme de la porte (OUT) est commutée en stré, l’ancien code est désactivé
niveau bas. 4.Pour activer le nouveau code appris de l’actionneur
L’état des sorties de sécurité est contrôlé en interne dans l’analyseur, la tension de service de l’analy-
par des contacts repos contraints (sortie de relais). seur doit ensuite être déconnectée pendant au
Lors d’une erreur interne dans l’analyseur, le circuit moins 10 secondes.
de sécurité est déconnecté, la sortie de diagnostic
(ERROR) est placée en niveau haut et la LED ERROR Remarque:
rouge s’allume. ● Il n’est pas possible d’effectuer plusieurs
apprentissages pour un même actionneur sur
Remarque: Le temps de maintien de l’actionneur le même analyseur.
dans et hors de la zone de direction doit être au ● Le nombre de processus d’apprentissage sur
minimum de 0,5 s, sinon l’analyseur peut passer en un analyseur est limité à 8 au maximum.
erreur et la LED ERROR rouge s’allume. ● L’analyseur peut uniquement être utilisé à
Dès rupture de l’alimentation, l’analyseur se chaque fois avec le dernier actionneur appris.
réinitialise. ● Un processus d’apprentissage est invalide si:
- l’apprentissage est arrêté avant l’extinction
de la LED verte
- la tension d’alimentation a été déconnectée
pendant l’apprentissage
Attention:
Le système se met également automatiquement dans
le mode d’apprentissage après le 8ème processus
d’apprentissage ou en appliquant à la tête de lecture
un «ancien» actionneur. Dans les deux cas, un pro-
cessus d’apprentissage d’une durée de 60 secon-
des est démarré mais le dernier code d’actionneur
reste actif dans la mémoire (voir le tableau des états).
Un nouveau code n’est pas appris.
Ba_T4000_fr.pmd 49 31.01.2005, 10:35

Tableau des états du système
API Indicateur à LED Etat

Entrée Sortie
(circuit de sécurité)
Nombre d’impuls-
ions de clignote-
Position action-
Relais KA, KB
STATE (vert)
ERR (rouge)
OUT (jaune)
OUT (signal)
neur/porte
ERR
TST
ment
Fonctionnement fermé marche N 1 0 1 1 0 Fonctionnement normal, porte fermée
normal ouvert arrêt N 0 0 0 0 0 Fonctionnement normal, porte ouverte
Mise en service clignote-
Première mise en service après la livraison
ouvert arrêt N 0 0 ment perm. 0 0
Prêt pour le premier apprentissage
de 4 Hz
clignotem.
fermé arrêt N 0 0 60 s d’environ 0 0 Processus d’apprentissage
ca. 1 Hz
Acquittement postif du bon apprentissage.
fermé arrêt N 0 0 0 0 0 L’appareil doit être remisen marche pour le
fonctionnement normal.
Affichage d’etat x arrêt x 0 0 3 0 0 Affichage après le 1. au 5. processus
d’apprentissage
Séquence
Affichage des processus d’apprentissage
de
x arrêt x 0 0 2 0 0 encore autorisés après le 6ème processus
clignotement
d’apprentissage
uique après
Affichage des processus d’apprentissage
la mise en
x arrêt x 0 0 1 0 0 encore autorisés après le 7ème processus
marche
d’apprentissage
L’appareil ne peut plus effectuer d’autre
x arrêt x 0 0 0 0 0 processus d’apprentissage
Affichage d’erreur x arrêt N 0 1 0 0 1 Défaillance d’un composant interne de l’appareil
x arrêt N 0 1 0 0 1 ou actionneur dans la zone de déclenchment

pendant moins de 0,5 s
Affichage d’erreur fermé arrêt N 0 1 Séquences 1 0 1 9ème processus d’apprentissage interdit

fermé arrêt N 0 1 de clignotem. 2 0 1 Processus d’apprentissage interdit d’un ancien
courtes avec actionneur
répétition au Acquittement négatif du proc. d’apprentissage.
fermé arrêt N 0 1 3 0 1
bout de1 s L’actionneur a été tenu pendant moinsde 60 s
Mode test ouvert arrêt 1 0 1 1 0 1

Test d’appareil externe sur ”OUVERT” et
fermé arrêtv 1 0 1 1 0 1 fonction sortie ERR lorsque la porte est
fermée
N = 0 volt ou non connecté 1 = allumé
0 = 0 volt 0 = éteint
1 = 24 volts
x = 0 ou 24 volts
et porte ouverte ou fermée
Remarque:
● L’appareil peut fonctionner uniquement à chaque fois avec le dernier actionneur appris.
Contrôle et entretien
Des contrôles réguliers sont nécessaires pour garantir - Étanchéité de l’entrée de câble sur le capteur
un fonctionnement impeccable et permanent: - bon serrage des câbles aux bornes d l’analyseur
- bonne fixation de l’actionneur et du capteur - vérification de la distance de déconnexion
(utilisation des vis de sécurité jointes)
Ba_T4000_fr.pmd 50 31.01.2005, 10:35

F
Contrôle du fonctionnement (auto-test) Les sorties de sécurité sont déconnectées et ainsi
l’essai de l’ensemble du circuit de sécurité est rendu
Pour les interrupteurs de sécurité électromagnétiques possible. La sortie de diagnostic ERR de l’analyseur
ou les capteurs magnétiques, le contrôle du est aussi placée en niveau haut comme fonction de
fonctionnement peut être effectué par l’ouverture surveillance.
cyclique du dispositif de protection. Quand l’entrée test est remise à zéro, la sortie de
diagnostics ERR est en niveau bas, la LED rouge
A partir de la catégorie de commande 2, la norme s’allume et les sorties de sécurité sont à nouveau
EN 60204-1 : 1997 (chap. 9.4.2.4) prévoit la réali- commutées. Ainsi, un auto-contrôle du système de
sation, au démarrage ou à intervalles définis, d’un sécurité est possible sans ouvrir le dispositif de
contrôle de fonctionnement de l’ensemble du système protection.
de sécurité.
Le contrôle du fonctionnement interne du capteur de Exclusion de responsabilité

sécurité T 4000 n’est pas nécessaire parce que
l’appareil s’auto-contrôle en temps réel. La soudure Nous déclinons toute responsabilité dans les cas
d’un contact de sortie (sortie de relais) est détectée suivants:
par l’appareil au plus tard à la prochaine ouverture
du dispositif de protection. Une court-circuit sur le - utilisation non conforme
circuit de sortie n’est pas détectée par l’appareil. En - non-respect des consignes de sécurité
outre, le circuit de sécurité peut être testé sans ouvrir - montage et raccordement électrique par des
le dispositif de protection. Cesi peut se fraire en personnes non autorisées
appliquant une tension de 24 V CC à l’entrée test, - intervention par des tiers
l’ouverture du dispositif de protection est simulé.
Zone de déclenchement type (avec une longueur de câble l = 0 à 25 m) *)
Observer une distance Etat initial

m
de sécurité de
déconnexion Actionneur Hysteresis
sar = 23 mm s MARCHE
(cf. Consignes de sé-
curité capteurs, p. 56) Capteur
ARRET
Distance de Sao Distance s
8 déconnexion
Distance s [mm]
Hysteresis
ARRET 6
ARRET
Distance de
connexion Sao
4
2
MARCHE
-8 -6 -4 -2 0 2 4 6 8
Déport des axes m [mm]
*)
Valeurs mini./maxi. : cf. Caractéristiques techniques
Ba_T4000_fr.pmd 51 31.01.2005, 10:35

Schéma de raccordement et synoptique modulaire, exemple de raccordement
Analyseur T 4000
T
Tension de service
+ 24 V 0 V
DC
Brun Blanc
Capteur
Actionneur
codé
Fonctionnement sans test externe
CPU-A CPU-B DDSP (Double Dynamic Trans-

Safety Path) : Double pondeur
Entrée TST non commutée::
circuit dynamique de
sécurité avec surveillance
de défaut de l'actionneur,
du capteur et du câble
KA KB vers le capteur
TST Entrée de test

OUT Sortie d'alarme de la porte (aucune sortie de sécurité)
ERR Sortie de diagnostic
10kW
GND 0V (lié en interne avec 0V de tension de service)
10kW H1/H2 Raccordement du capteur
SH Raccordement du blindage du capteur
13/14 Raccord.du contact travail 1, libération du relais de sécurité
23/24 Raccord.du contact travail 2, libération du relais de sécurité
API de sécurité
CANAL A
I0 entrée de sécurité
0V
TO0 sortie synchronisée
0V
Exemples de connexion
CANAL B
avec API de sécurité
I1 entrée de sécurité
0V
TO1 sortie synchronisée
0V
I2 Entrées
I3
0V
O2 Sortie statique
Ba_T4000_fr.pmd 52 31.01.2005, 10:35

F
Analyseur T 4000-1RBA 01
Dimensions
22,5 114,5
H1 H2 SH
24V 0V
STATE
99
OUT
ERROR
TST OUT ERR GND

13 14 23 24
pour profilé chapeau

standard 35 mm
Schèma de commutation
Dispositif de protection
2 sorties de sécurité (sorties relais)
1 sortie alarme de la porte (sortie semi-conducteur, Fermé Ouvert
pas de sécurité) (actionneur reconnu) (l’actionneur n’est
pas dans la zone
de détection)
Capteur Actionneur Capteur
13 14 13 14
23 24 23 24
24 V OUT 24 V OUT
Ba_T4000_fr.pmd 53 31.01.2005, 10:35

Caractéristiques techniques
Paramètre Valeur Unité
mini. typ. maxi.
Composition du boîtier plastique PA6.6
Dimensions 114,5 x 99 x 22,5 mm
Masse 0,2 kg
Température ambiante avec UB = 24 V DC 0 - +55 °C
Température de stockage -25 - +70 °C
Type de protection IP20
Classe de protection classe de protection III, degré de pollution 2
Groupe de matériaux II
Montage profilé 35 mm suivant DIN 46277
Nombre de capteurs 1 capteur par analyseur
Mode de raccordement bornes à vis enfichables / codées
Bornes de raccordement 0,14 - 2,5 mm²
Tension de service UB
21 24 27 V DC
(stabilisée, ondulation résiduelle < 5 %)
Consommation (aux relais activés) 150 mA
Sorties de sécurité 2 relais de sécurité avec respectivement un contact travail
Courant de commutation (sorties relais) 1)
- Tension de commutation 0,1 ... 60 V 1 - 300 mA
- Tension de commutation 10 ... 24 V 1 - 4000 mA
Fusible externe (circuit de sécurité) 6,3 A rapide
Catégorie d’emploi suivant EN 60947-5-2 AC-12 300mA 60V 50Hz / DC-12 300mA 60V
AC-140 2A 30V 50Hz / DC-13 4A 30V
Catégorie d’utilisation selon EN 954 3
Classification selon IEC/EN 60 947-5-3 PDF-M
Tension nominale d’isolement U i - - 63 V
Résistance de tension impulsionnelle Uimp - - 1,5 kV
Résistance aux vibrations suivant EN 60 947-5-2
Cycles de manoeuvres mécaniques (relais) 10 x 10 6
Temporisation de commutation à partir d’un
changement d’état - - 180 ms
Temporisation avant l’état prêt 2) 3 s
Durée de contact 0,5 - - s
Sorties de sigalement (diagnostic ERR, Contact
de sortie d’alarme de la porte OUT, sortie à
semi-conducteurs, commutation positive) 3)
- Tension de sortie 0,8 x UB - UB V DC
- Charge admissible - - 20 mA
Entrée de test Niveau bas 0 - 2 V DC
Niveau haut 15 - UB V DC
Exigences de protection CEM suivant IEC 60947-5-3
Indicateurs à LED STATE LED verte: fonctionnement normal
clignotante: processus d’apprentissage
OUT LED jaune: actionneur reconnu
ERROR LED rouge: - entrée de test activée
- défaut interne électronique
- apprentissage incorrect
1)
Un courant de connexion > 300 mA est admis dans les sorties des relais, aucun petit courant (≤ 10 mA) ne pourra plus être coupé (usure des
contacts dorés).
2)
Après la connexion de la tension de service, les sorties semi-conducteur sont déconnectées pendant le délai de préparation et les contacts de
sortie d’alarme de la porte sont sur le potentiel niveau bas
3)
Ne sont pas àl épreuve des courts-circuits.
Ba_T4000_fr.pmd 54 31.01.2005, 10:35

F
Capteurs T 4000-DNA...
Capteur T 4000-DNA..P (avec câble moulé fixe)
Plan coté
42 12
Longueur de câble l
ø4,5
ø8
T4000-D XXXXXX
25
32 ±0,1 surface 4,6 surface
active active
Affectation des broches

Capteur avec câble de raccordement
Blindage
BN Capteur
WH
H1 H2 SH
Analyseur
Capteur T 4000-DNAC avec connecteur mâle M8 (connecteur enfichable/vis filetée)

Plan coté
32,6 42 12
6,8 32 ±0,1 4,6

ø8
ø4,5
ø10
T4000-DNACXXXXXX
25
surface
3 active
4
surface 1
min.38 5,5
active
Affectation des broches

Capteur avec connecteur mâle
WH Blindage 3
4
BN 1
Vue du
H1 H2 SH connecteur mâle
du capteur
Analyseur
Ba_T4000_fr.pmd 55 31.01.2005, 10:35

Paramètre Valeur Unité
mini. typ. maxi.
Composition du boîtier Fortron, thermoplastique renforcé à la fibre de verre, moulé
Dimensions 42 x 25 x 12 mm
Masse (10 m de câble compris) 0,3 kg
Température ambiante -25 - +70 °C
Position de montage quelconque
Mode de fonctionnement inductif
Transmission dynamique
2 kbit/s
des données à l’analyseur
Durée de contact1) 0,5 - - s
Zone de déclenchement avec un
déport des axes m = 0 2)
Longueur du câble l = 0 à 25 m
- distance de connexion Sao 5 6 -
- hysteresis 0,5 1,5 -
- distance de déconnexion sûre Sar - - 23 mm
Longueur du câble l ≥ 25 à 50 m
- distance de connexion Sao 4 4,8 -
- hysteresis 0,4 1,2 -
- distance de déconnexion sûre Sar - - 23
Alimentation en tension par l’analyseur
Raccordement capteur T 4000-DNA..P câble d’alimentation pré-moulé avec embouts
Longueur du câble capteur T 4000-DNA..P 15 m
Raccordement capteur T 4000-DNAC connecteur M8 (connecteur enfichable et
longue filetée), à trois pôles
Longueur du câble T 4000-DNAC - - 50 m
1)
Le temps de séjour est le temps pendant lequel l’actionneur doit se trouver un intérieur ou à l’extérieur de la zone de déclenchement.
2)
Ces valeurs sont valables pour un montage à affleurement ou non du capteur et l’actionneur dans de l’aluminium.
Instructions de montage
● Le câble de raccordement du capteur ne doit pas être rallongé.

D’autres connections intermédiaires ne doivent pas être utilisées.
● L’actionneur et le capteur doivent être disposés de sorte que :

- les surfaces actives se trouvent à une distance de connexion de 0,8 x Sao ou moins lorsque le dispositif
de protection est fermé (voir les caractéristiques techniques).
- ils ne soient pas utilisés comme butée mécanique.
- ils soient reliés de maniere permanente au dispositif de protection, par ex. par l’utilisation des vis de
sécurité jointes.
Consignes de sécurité
● En cas de montage affleurant du capteur et/ou de l’actionneur, la distance de connexion varie en fonction
de la profondeur d’insertion et du matériau du dispositif de protection.
● Le dispositif de protection doit être conçu de manière à exclure tout danger jusqu’à la distance Sar (distance
de déconnexion sûre).
Remarque: A la distance de déconnexion sûre Sar = 23 mm, les sorties relais sont déconnectées de
manière sûre même en cas de défaillance d’un composant interne.
Ba_T4000_fr.pmd 56 31.01.2005, 10:35

F
Actionneur T 4000-1KBA
Dimensions
42 12
ø4,5
ø8
T4000-1KBA 5306531
25
32 ±0,1 4,6
surface surface
active active
Paramètre Valeur Einheit
mini. typ. maxi.
Composition du boîtier Fortron, thermoplastique renforcé aux fibres de verre, moulé
Masse 0,02 kg
Température ambiante -25 - +70 °C
Position de montage surface active en face du capteur
Durée de contact 1) 0,5 - - s
1)
La durée de contact correspond à la période pendant laquelle l’actionneur doit se trouver à l’intérieur ou à l’extérieur de la zone de détection.
Ba_T4000_fr.pmd 57 31.01.2005, 10:35

Ba_T4000_fr.pmd 58 31.01.2005, 10:35

FIN
Käyttöohje Turva-tunnistinpää T 4000
Sisällysluettelo
Määräystenmukainen käyttö 60
Turvaohjeita 60
Asennus 60
Sähköliitäntä 61
Järjestelmän periaate 63
Laukaisimen opetustoiminto 63
Järjestelmän tilataulukko 64
Tarkastukset ja huolto 64
Toimintatarkastus (itsetestaus) 65
Vastuun raukeaminen 65
Tyypillinen vastealue 65
Tekniset tiedot 66
Liitäntä- ja lohkokaavio, liitäntäesimerkki 66
Valvontayksikkö T 4000-1RBA 01 67
Anturit T 4000-DNA... 69
Vastakappale T 4000-1KBA 71
8 009 704/P076/25-01-05 • © SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Saksa • Oikeudet muutoksiin pidätetään 59
Ba_T4000_fn.pmd 59 31.01.2005, 10:32

Määräystenmukainen käyttö Asennus
Turva-tunnistinpää T 4000 on turvatekninen laite, jota Asennuksen saa suorittaa ainoastaan alan
käytetään liikuteltavien suojusten valvontaan siten, ammattihenkilö.
että:
● Vastakappale ja tunnistinpää on asennettava siten,
- vaaralliset työt voidaan suorittaa koneella vain että niihin pääsee helposti käsiksi tarkastus- ja
silloin, kun suojus on suljettu. huoltotöitä suoritettaessa.
- SEIS-käsky seuraa heti, kun suojus avataan
koneen käydessä. ● Kytkentä saa olla mahdollista vain siihen tarkoitet-
tujen laukaisimien avulla.
Ennen turva-anturien asennusta on arvioitava koneen
käytöstä mahdollisesti johtuvat riskitekijät seuraavia ● Vastakappale ja tunnistinpää on asennettava siten,
standardeja noudattaen: että
- otsapinnat osuvat päällekytkentäetäisyydellä
- EN 954-1, Turvallisuuteen liittyvät ohjaus- 0,8 x Sao tai lähempänä (ks. Tekniset tiedot)
järjestelmän osat, liite C vastakkain suojuksen ollessa suljettuna.
- EN 1050, Koneturvallisuus, riskin arviointi - niitä ei voida käyttää mekaanisina vastineina.
Huomautus: suojuksen liikkuvalle osalle on
Määräystenmukaiseen käyttöön kuuluu asennusta ja asennettava lisävastin.
käyttöä koskevien vaatimusten ja standardien - Uppoasennuksessa kytkentäetäisyys muuttuu
noudattaminen, erityisesti asennussyvyydestä ja suojuksen materiaalista
riippuen.
- EN 954-1, Turvallisuuteen liittyvät ohjaus- - ne on kiinnitetty suojukseen yhdensuuntaisesti
järjestelmän osat esim. käyttämällä apuna toimitukseen kuuluvia
- EN 1088, Lukituslaitteet erottavien turvalaitteiden ruuveja.
yhteydessä
- EN 60 204-1, Koneiden sähkölaitteisto. ● Valvontayksikkö on asennettava ohjauskaappiin
- EN 60 947-5-3, Vaatimukset virhetilassa tietyllä kotelointiluokan IP54 (vähimmäisvaatimus)
tavalla reagoiville lähestymiskytkimille. mukaisesti. Kiinnitys normitettuun kiskoon
suoritetaan laitteen takapaneelissa olevan
lukitussalvan avulla.
Turvaohjeita ● Jos ohjauskaappiin, jossa ei ole ilmastointia (esim.

puhallin) asennetaan useampia ohjauslaitteita, on
Turva-tunnistinpää T 4000 täyttää seuraavat niiden väliin jätettävä 10 mm:n ilmatila.
turvallisuusvaatimukset Ilmatila on tarpeen, jotta valvontayksikön kehittämä
- Ohjausluokka 3 standardin EN 954-1 mukaan lämpö pääsee poistumaan.
- Lähestymiskytkimet itsevalvonnalla tyyppi PDF-M
standardin EN 60 947-5-3 mukaan.
- Ohjauslaitteen itsevalvonta valvoo kytkimen
toimintaa.
Tämän ansiosta suojaus toimii myös silloin, jos jokin
komponentti on vioittunut.
- Suojuksia avattaessa tai suljettaessa releiden
toiminta (avautuminen ja sulkeutuminen)
tarkastetaan automaattisesti.
Turva-anturit on tarkoitettu henkilövahinkojen estä-

miseksi. Epäasiallinen asennus tai omavaltaiset muu-
tokset saattavat johtaa pahoihin tapaturmiin.
60 8 009 704/P076/25-01-05 • © SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Saksa • Oikeudet muutoksiin pidätetään
Ba_T4000_fn.pmd 60 31.01.2005, 10:32

FIN
Sähköliitäntä
Sähköliitännän saa suorittaa vain EMV-koulutettu alan ammattihenkilö. Sähköasennuksen aikana

laitteen on aina oltava jännitteettömässä tilassa.
● Turva-antureita ei saa ohittaa (silloittamalla), kääntää, poistaa tai saattaa muuten tilaan, jossa ne eivät
toimi.
● Kaikki sähköliittymät on eristettävä verkosta joko eristysmuuntajalla (IEC 742) tai muilla samanarvoisilla
eristystoimenpiteillä.
● Kaikki relelähdöt tulee varustaa tarvittavin kipinänsammutuspiirein induktiivisten ja kapasitiivisten

kuormien vuoksi.
● Relelähdöt on varustettava erillisellä sulakkeella (sulake 6,3 A nopea).
Turvallisuussyistä on ehdottomasti tarkkailtava molempia turvaulostuloja (releulostuloja) 13/14 ja

23/24.
T 4000-valvontayksikkö
Käyttöjännite
+ 24 V 0 V
DC
suojaliitäntä
ruskea
r valkoinen
tunnistinpää
koodattu
13 14 23 24 vastakappale
Trans-
ponder
Käyttöjännite
+ 24 V 0 V
DC
suojaliitäntä
ruskea valkoinen
tunnistinpää
koodattu
13 14 23 24 vastakappale
Trans-
ponder
Ba_T4000_fn.pmd 61 31.01.2005, 10:32

● Yhteistä jännitelähdettä käytettäessä on kaikki sii- Huomautus: Ohjauslaitteen koodattujen pisto-
hen kytketyt induktiiviset ja kapasitiiviset kuormat liittimien ansiosta liitäntöjen suorittaminen on helppoa.
(esim. kontaktorit) varustettava häiriönpoistokom- Lisäksi niiden etuna on ensiluokkainen turvallisuus
ponentein. huoltotöitä silmällä pitäen.
Ovi-ilmoituslähtöä OUT ei saa käyttää turva-

lähtönä.
● Anturin liitäntäjohtoa ei saa jatkaa.
● Anturijohdon suojus (eristys poistetaan enint.

3 cm:n matkalta) on kytkettävä valvontayksikön
liitäntään SH.
● Ilmoituslähdöt ERR ja OUT sekä lukupään liittimet

H1/H2 eivät ole oikosulkusuojattuja
● Jos laite ei toimi käyttöjännitteen päällekytkemisen

jälkeen (esim. vihreä STATE-LED ei pala), se on
toimitettava avaamattomana takaisin valmistajalle.
● Johtomateriaalina saa käyttää vain kuparia, jonka

lämpötilakestoisuus on ≥ 75 °C.
● Liitospidikkeiden ruuvit on kiristettävä

kiristysmomentilla 0,6 – 0,8 Nm. LED-näytöt
● Vaatimuksen mukaisessa käytössä on STATE LED vihreä normaalikäyttö

käytettävä jännitesyöttöä, jossa on merkintä “for
use in class 2 circuits”. vilkkuva opetustoiminto (muut sig-
Kaikenlainen sähkövirta ≥ 8 A on kielletty! naalitoiminnot, ks.
tilataulukko)
OUT LED kelt. oikea vastakappale

tunnistettu
ERROR LED pun. - testilähtö aktivoitu

- sisäinen elektroniikkavirhe
- luvaton opetustoiminto
(ks. myös tilataulukko)
Jos käytön aikana tapahtuu virhe (ERROR),

valvontayksikkö voidaan palauttaa takaisin
käyttötilaan kytkemällä käyttöjännite pois päältä n.
10 sekunnin ajaksi.
Ba_T4000_fn.pmd 62 31.01.2005, 10:32

FIN
Järjestelmän periaate Laukaisimen opetustoiminto
Turva tunnistinpää T 4000 koostuu kolmesta Ennen kuin järjestelmä muodostaa

komponentista: toimintakokonaisuuden, vastakappale on sovellettava
ohjauslaitteeseen opetustoiminnolla.
- koodattu vastakappale Opetustoiminnon aikana turvalähdöt ja ovi-ilmoitus-
- tunnistinpää lähtö ovat LOW-tilassa, jolloin koko järjestelmä on
- valvontayksikkö varmistetussa tilassa.
Jokaisessa laukaisimessa on yksiselitteinen elektro- ● Opetustoiminto ensimmäiselle laukaisimelle (lait-

ninen koodaus, joka on järjestelmässä ainutlaatuinen. teen toimituksen jälkeen):
Koodia ei voi muuttaa jälkikäteen. 1.Kytke käyttöjännite ohjauslaitteeseen
- vihreä LED vilkkuu nopeasti (n. 4 Hz)
Anturi kiinnitetään suojuksen liikkumattomaan osaan 2.Ohjaa vastakappale anturia kohti
ja se yhdistetään valvontayksikköön kaksisäikeisellä, (huomioi etäisyys < Sao)
suojatulla johdolla. - opetustoiminto käynnistyy, vihreä LED vilkkuu
Suojukseen kiinnitetty vastakappale lähestyy anturia hitaasti (n. 1 Hz)
ovien sulkeutuessa. Saavutettuaan päällekytkentä- 3.Opetustoiminto päättyy (n. 60 sekunnin kuluttua)
etäisyyden vastakappale saa käyttöjännitteen - vihreä LED sammuu
induktiiviselta anturilta, jolloin tiedonvälitys alkaa 4.Laukaisimen koodi aktivoidaan ohjauslaitteessa
toimia. kytkemällä ohjauslaitteen käyttöjännite pois päältä
Valvontayksikkö vertaa lukemaansa bittikuviota vähintään 10 sekunnin ajaksi.
muistiin tallennettuun koodiin. Tietojen vastaessa
toisiaan turvalähdöt (relelähtö) vapautuvat ja myös ● Uuden laukaisimen opetustoiminto:
ovi-ilmoituslähtö OUT (puolijohdelähtö) siirtyy HIGH- 1.Kytke käyttöjännite ohjauslaitteeseen
tilaan. 2.Ohjaa uusi vastakappale anturia kohti
Laukaisimen dynaamisen kyselyn ja kahdella (huomioi etäisyys < Sao)
turvalähdöllä varustetun elektronikaan reduntantin - opetustoiminto käynnistyy, vihreä LED vilkkuu
rakenteen ansiosta valvontayksikkö siirtyy virheen (n. 1 Hz)
tunnistettuuaan varmistettuun tilaan. 3.Opetustoiminto päättyy (n. 60 sekunnin kuluttua)
Kun suojus avataan, turvalähdöt kytkevät - vihreä LED sammuu, uusi koodi tallentuu muis-
suojakytkentäpiirin pois päältä ja ovi-ilmoituslähtö tiin, vanha pyyhkiytyy pois
(OUT) kytkeytyy LOW-tilaan. Pakko-ohjatut 4.Uuden laukaisimen koodi aktivoidaan
avautuvat koskettimet valvovat sulkeutuvien ohjauslaitteessa kytkemällä ohjauslaitteen
koskettimien tilaa. käyttöjännite pois päältä vähintään 10 sekunnin
Jos ohjauslaitteessa on jokin vika, turvapiiri kytkeytyy ajaksi.
pois päältä, diagnoosilähtö (ERROR) siirtyy HIGH-
tilaan ja punainen ERROR LED palaa.
Huomautus:
Huomautus: Laukaisimen on viivyttävä vastealueen ● Laukaisimen voi soveltaa samaan ohjaus-
sisä- ja ulkopuolella vähintään 0,5 sekunnin ajan, laitteeseen vain kerran.
muutoin valvontayksikkö saattaa siirtyä virhetilaan ja ● Opetuksen voi suorittaa samassa ohjaus-
punainen ERROR-LED palaa. laitteessa korkeintaan 8 kertaa.
Valvontayksikkö palautetaan takaisin käyttötilaan kyt- ● Ohjauslaitetta voidaan käyttää ainoastaan
kemällä käyttöjännite pois päältä. viimeksi opetetulla laukaisimella.
● Opetustoiminto ei päde, jos:
- se keskeytetään ennen kuin vihreä LED sam-
muu
- käyttöjännite kytketään pois päältä opetuk-
sen aikana
Huomio:
Myös 8. opetuskerran jälkeen tai jos lukupäähän vie-
dään "vanha" vastakappale, järjestelmä siirtyy auto-
maattisesti opetustilaan. Opetustoiminto tosin
käynnistyy 60 sekunnin ajaksi, mutta aktivoituna on
viimeksi opittu laukaisinkoodi (ks. tilataulukko); uusi
koodi ei tallennu muistiin.
Ba_T4000_fn.pmd 63 31.01.2005, 10:32

Järjestelmän tilataulukko
SPS LED-näyttö Tila

Tulo Lähtö
Vilkkumispulssien
(suojakytkentäpiiri)
(ilmoitussignaali)
ERR (punainen)
OUT (keltainen)
STATE (vihreä)
Releet KA, KB
Laukaisimen /
oven asento
lukumäärä
ERR
TST
OUT
Normaalikäyttö kiinni on N 1 0 1 1 0 Normaalikäyttö, ovi suljettu
auki off N 0 0 0 0 0 Normaalikäyttö, ovi auki
Käyttöönotto vilkkuu
Ensimmäinen käyttöönotto toimituksen jälkeen
auki off N 0 0 jatkuvas 0 0 Valmiustila opetustoiminnolle
(4 Hz)
kiinni off N 0 0 vilkkuu 0 0 Opetustoiminto

60 sek. (1 Hz)
Positiivinen kuittaus onnistuneelle

kiinni off N 0 0 0 0 0 opetustoiminnolle.
Normaalikäytölle laite tarvitsee vain kytkeä päälle
Tilanäyttö x off x 0 0 3 0 0 Näyttö 1. - 5. opetuskerran jälkeen
Jäljellä olevien opetuskertojen näyttö

x off x 0 0 2 0 0
6. opetuskerran jälkeen
yksi
vilkkumis-
jakso Jäljellä olevien opetuskertojen näyttö
x off x 0 0 1 0 0
päällekyt- 7. opetuskerran jälkeen
kennän
jälkeen
Laitteessa ei voida enää aktivoida uutta
x off x 0 0 0 0 0 opetustoimintoa
Virhenäyttö x off N 0 1 0 0 1 Jokin laitteen komponentti ei toimi tai
x off N 0 1 0 0 1 vastakappale viipyy vastealueella alle 0,5 sek.
Käyttövirhe kiinni off N 0 1 1 0 1 Luvaton 9. opetuskerta

kiinni off N 0 1 lyhyet 2 0 1 Vanhan laukaisimen luvaton opetus
vilkkumis-
Negatiivinen kuittaus opetustoiminnolle.
kiinni off N 0 1 jaksot, toisto 3 0 1 Vastakappale alle 60 sek. lukupäässä
1 sek. välein
Testikäyttö auki off 1 0 1 1 0 1
Ulk. laitetesti asennossa ”AUKI” ja toiminto

kiinni off 1 0 1 1 0 1 ERR-lähtö oven ollessa kiinni
N = 0V tai ei kytkentää 1 = vaalea

0= 0V 0 = tumma
1 = 24 V
x = 0 tai 24 V
tai ovi auki tai kiinni
Huomautus:
● Ohjauslaitetta voidaan käyttää vain viimeksi opitulla laukaisimella.
Tarkastukset ja huolto
Virheettömän ja jatkuvan toiminnan takaamiseksi on - johdon läpiviennin tiiviys anturissa

suoritettava säännöllisesti seuraavat tarkastukset: - liitäntöjen pito ohjauslaitteessa
- koodatun vastakappaleen ja tunnistinpään kiinnitys - päältäkytkentäetäisyys
(laitteen mukana toimitettujen ruuvien käyttö)
Ba_T4000_fn.pmd 64 31.01.2005, 10:32

FIN
Toimintatarkastus (itsetestaus) Turvalähdöt kytketyvät pois päältä, jolloin koko
suojakytkentäpiiri voidaan testata. Valvontaa varten
Sähkömekaanisten turvakytkimien ja magneet- ohjauslaitteen diagnoosilähtö ERR kytketyy niinikään
tianturien toimintatarkastus voidaan suorittaa HIGH-tilaan.
avaamalla suojus tietyin väliajoin. Kun testitulo kytketään alkutilaan, ohjauslaitteen
diagnoosilähtö ERR palautuu LOW-tilaan, punainen
Ohjausluokasta 2 lähtien (normin EN 60204- 1 : 1997, LED sammuu ja turvalähdöt kytkeytyvät taas päälle.
kappale 9.4.2.4) on käynnistyksen yhteydessä tai Näin turvajärjestelmän itsetestaus on mahdollista
määrätyin väliajoin suoritettava koko turvajärjestel- ilman suojuksen avaamista
män toimintatarkastus.
Turva-anturin T 4000 sisäisen toiminnan tarkastus ei Vastuun raukeaminen

ole tarpeen, koska laite valvoo itse itseään tosiajassa.
Laite tunnistaa lähtökoskettimen (relelähtö) Vastuumme raukeaa, jos:
kiinnipalamisen viimeistään, kun suojus avataan
seuraavan kerran. Lähtöjohdossa esiintyviä - kytkintä käytetään määräystenvastaisesti
vikavirtoja laite sitä vastoin ei tunnista. Koko - turvaohjeita ei noudateta
suojakyktentäpiiri voidaan testata ilman, että suojus - asennuksen ja sähköliitännän suorittaa joku muu
avataan. Suojuksen avaaminen simuloidaan kuin alan ammattihenkilö
kytkemällä testituloon jännite 24 V DC. - laitetta käsitellään asiattomien taholta
Tyypillinen tunnistusalue (johdon pituudella I = 0–25 m)
Huomioi varma m lähtötila

päältäkytkentäetäisyys
Sar = 23 mm (ks. vastakappale toimin-
antureita koskevat s ON
turvallisuusohjeet, s. 70)
tunnistinpää
OFF
päältäkyt- Sao etäisyys s
8 kentäetäisyys
Etäisyys s [mm]
toimintavälys
OFF 6 OFF
päällekyt-
kentäetäisyysSao
2
ON
-8 -6 -4 -2 0 2 4 6 8
keskipisteen siirto m [mm]
*)
Min.-/maks. arvot ks. Tekniset tiedot
Ba_T4000_fn.pmd 65 31.01.2005, 10:32

Liitäntä- ja lohkokaavio, liitäntäesimerkki
Käyttöjännite
+ 24 V 0 V
DC
suojaliitäntä
ruskea valkoinen
tunnistinpää
koodattu
vastakappale
CPU-A CPU-B Trans-
Safety Path):
Käyttö ilman ulkop. testausta
kaksinkertainen
dynaaminen varmuuspolku
TST-tulo ei kytkettynä:
laukaisimen, anturin ja
KA KB anturin johdon vikavalvonnalla
TST Ttestitulo
OUT ovi-ilmoituslähtö (ei turvalähtö)
ERR diagnoosilähtö
10kW
GND 0V (y y0 y jä)nnitteeseen
10kW H1/H2 anturin liitäntä
SH anturin suojaliitäntä
13/14 sulkeutuvan koskettimen 1 liitäntä, suojareleen vapautus
23/24 sulkeutuvan koskettimen 2 liitäntä, suojareleen vapautus
SPS-turvapiiri
KAN AVA A
I0 turvatulo
0V
TO0 tahdistettu
tahdistett
a d s e u lä
lähtö
ähtö
httö
0V
KAN AVA B
I1 turvatulo
Liitäntäesimerkki
SPS-turvapiiristä
0V
TO1 tahdistettu
tahdistett
a d s e u llähtö
ähtö
httö
0V
I2 tulot
I3
0V
O2 staattinen
läht
äht ö
Ba_T4000_fn.pmd 66 31.01.2005, 10:32

FIN
Valvontayksikkö T 4000-1RBA 01
Mittapiirros
22,5 114,5
H1 H2 SH
24V 0V
STATE
99
OUT
ERROR
TST OUT ERR GND

13 14 23 24
sopii 35 mm:n
standardikiskoon
Kytkentäkäyttäytyminen
Suojus
2 turvalähtöä (relelähdöt)
1 ovi-ilmoituslähtö (puolijohdelähtö, ei turvalähtö) kiinni auki
(vastakappale (vastakappale ei
tunnistettu) kytkentäalueella)
Tunnis- Vasta- Tunnistinpää

tinpää kappale
13 14 13 14
23 24 23 24
24 V OUT 24 V OUT
Ba_T4000_fn.pmd 67 31.01.2005, 10:32

Tekniset tiedot
Parametri Arvo Yksikkö
min. tyyp. maks.
Kotelon materiaali muovi PA6.6
Mitat 114,5 x 99 x 22,5 mm
Paino 0,2 kg
Ympäristön lämpötila UB = 24 V DC 0 - +55 °C
Varastointilämpötila -25 - +70 °C
Kotelointiluokka IP20
Suojausluokka suojausluokka III, likaantumisaste 2
Materiaaliryhmä II
Asennus standardikisko 35 mm DIN 46277 mukaan
Anturien lukumäärä 1 tunnistinpää valvontayksikköä kohti
Liitäntätapa ruuvikiinnitteiset pistoliittimet / koodattu
Liittimet 0,14 - 2,5 mm²
Käyttöjännite UB
21 24 27 V DC
(säädetty, jäännösaalto < 5 %)
Ottoteho (rele vetänyt) 150 mA
Turvalähdöt 2 sulk. koskettimella varustettua turvarelettä
Kytkentävirta (relelähdöt) 1)
- kytkentäjännitteellä 0,1 ... 60 V 1 - 300 mA
- kytkentäjännitteellä 10 ... 24 V 1 - 4000 mA
Ulk. suojaus (turvapiiri) 6,3 A nopea
Käyttöluokka EN 60947-5-2 mukaan AC-12 300mA 60V 50Hz / DC-12 300mA 60V
AC-140 2A 30V 50Hz / DC-13 4A 30V
Ohjausluokka EN 954 mukaan 3
Luokittelu IEC/EN 60 947-5-3 mukaan PDF-M
Laskettu eristysjännite Ui - - 63 V
Laskettu sykäysjännitekestävyys Uimp - - 1,5 kV
Tärinänkestävyys vastaa normia EN 60 947-5-2
Mekaaniset toimijaksot (releet) 10 x 10 6
Kytkentäviive tilan muutoksesta lähtien - - 180 ms
Valmiusviive 2) 3 s
Viipymäaika 0,5 - - s
Ilmoituslähdöt (diagnoosi ERR, vapautus OUT,
puolijohdelähtö, p-kytkevä) 3)
- lähtöjännite 0,8 x UB - UB V DC
- kuormitettavuus - - 20 mA
Testilähtö LOW 0 - 2 V DC
HIGH 15 - UB V DC
EMV-turvallisuusvaatimukset IEC 60947-5-3 mukaan
LED-näytöt STATE LED vihreä: normaalikäyttö
vilkkuva: opetustoiminto
OUT LED kelt: vastakappale tunnistettu
ERROR LED pun: testilähtö aktivoitu
sis. elektroniikkavirhe
luvaton opetustoiminto
1)
Jos relelähtöjen kautta on kerran kytketty kytkentävirta > 300 mA, ei kultakoskettimien palamisen vuoksi heikkoja virtoja (≤ 10 mA) voida enää
kytkeä varmasti.
2)
Käyttöjännitteen päällekytkennän jälkeen relelähdöt ovat valmiusviiveen aikana kytkettyinä pois päältä ja ilmoituslähdöt ovat LOW-tilassa.
3)
ei oikosulkusuojattu
Ba_T4000_fn.pmd 68 31.01.2005, 10:32

FIN
Anturit T 4000-DNA...
Tunnistinpää T 4000-DNA..P (kiinteällä johdolla)
Mittapiirros
johdon pituus I 42 12
ø4,5
ø8
T4000-D XXXXXX
25
32 ±0,1 4,6 aktiivinen
aktiivinen
pinta pinta
Liitäntä
Tunnistinpää liitäntäjohdolla
suojaus
BN tunnistinpää
WH
H1 H2 SH
valvontayksikkö
Tunnistinpää T 4000-DNAC liittimellä M8 (pika- ja ruuviliitäntä)

Mittapiirros
32,6 42 12
6,8 32 ±0,1 4,6

ø8
ø4,5
ø10
T4000-DNACXXXXXX
25
aktiivinen
3 pinta
4
aktiivinen 1
min.38 5,5
pinta
Liitäntä
Tunnistinpää liittimellä
WH suojaus 3
4
BN 1
anturin liittimen
H1 H2 SH näkymä
valvontayksikkö
Ba_T4000_fn.pmd 69 31.01.2005, 10:32

Tekniset tiedot
min. tyyp. maks.
Kotelon materiaali Fortron, lasikuituvahvisteinen kestomuovi, täysvalu
Mitat 42 x 25 x 12 mm
Paino (10 m: n johto muk. luettuna) 0,3 kg
Ympäristön lämpötila -25 - +70 °C
Asennusasento vapaasti valittava
Toimintatapa induktiivinen
Dynaaminen tiedonsiirto
2 kbit/s
tulkintalaitteeseen
Viivästysaika 1) 0,5 - - s
Vastealue keskipisteen siirrolla m = 0 2)
Johdon pituus l = 0 ... 25 m

- päällekytkentäetäisyys Sao 5 6 -
- toimintavälys 0,5 1,5 -
- varma päältäkytkentäetäisyys Sar - - 23 mm
Johdon pituus l ≥ 25 ... 50 m

- päällekytkentäetäisyys Sao 4 4,8 -
- toimintavälys 0,4 1,2 -
- varma päältäkytkentäetäisyys Sar - - 23
Käyttöjännite tulkintalaitteesta
Liitäntä, tunnistinpää T 4000-DNA..P kiinteästi valettu liitäntäjohto päätehylsyineen
Johdon pituus, tunnistinpää T 4000-DNA..P 15 m
Liitäntä, tunnistinpää T 4000-DNAC liitin M8 (pika- ja ruuviliitännällä), 3-napainen
Johdon pituus, T 4000-DNAC - - 50 m
1)
Viipymällä tarkoitetaan sitä aikaa, jonka kuluessa laukaisimen on oltava vastealueen sisä- tai ulkopuolella.
2)
Nämä arvot ovat voimassa anturin ja laukaisimen uppo- ja pinta-asennuksessa alumiiniin.
Asennusohjeita
● Anturin liitäntäjohtoa ei saa jatkaa.

Väliliittimien käyttö ei ole luvallista.
● Vastakappale ja tunnistinpää on asennettava siten, että:

- otsapinnat osuvat päällekytkentäetäisyydellä 0,8 x Sao tai lähempänä (ks. Tekniset tiedot) vastakkain
turvalaitteen ollessa suljettuna.
- niitä ei voida käyttää mekaanisina vastineina.
- ne ovat yhdensuuntaisesti kiinnitettyinä turvalaitteeseen, esim. toimitukseen kuuluvien kiinnitysruuvien
avulla.
Turvaohjeita
● Anturin ja/tai laukaisimen uppoasennuksessa kytkentäetäisyys muuttuu asennussyvyydestä ja suojuksen

materiaalista riippuen.
● Turvalaitteen on oltava rakenteeltaan sellainen, että vaaratilanteen syntyminen etäisyyteen Sar (varma
päältäkytkentäetäisyys) saakka on mahdotonta.
Huomautus: varmalla päältäkytkentäetäisyydellä Sar = 23 mm relelähdöt on kytkettyinä pois päältä myös
silloin, jos jokin komponentti ei toimi.
Ba_T4000_fn.pmd 70 31.01.2005, 10:32

FIN
Vastakappale T 4000-1KBA
Mittapiirros
42 12
ø4,5
ø8
T4000-1KBA 5306531
25
32 ±0,1 4,6
aktiivinen aktiivinen
pinta pinta
Tekniset tiedot
min. tyyp. maks.
Kotelon materiaali Fortron, lasikuituvahvisteinen kestomuovi, täysvalu
Mitat 42 x 25 x 12 mm
Paino 0,02 kg
Ympäristön lämpötila -25 - +70 °C
Asennusasento aktiivinen pinta anturia vasten
Viipymisaika 1) 0,5 – – s
1)
Viipymisajalla tarkoitetaan aikaa, jona laukaisimen on oltava vastealueen ulkopuolella tai sisäpuolella.
Ba_T4000_fn.pmd 71 31.01.2005, 10:32

Ba_T4000_fn.pmd 72 31.01.2005, 10:32

GB
Operating Instructions Safety sensor T 4000
Contents
Correct use 74
Safety precautions 74
Installation 74
Electrical connection 75
System description 77
„Teach-In“ actuator function 77
System status table 78
Inspection and maintenance 78
Function test (self-test) 79
Disclaimer of liability 79
Typical operating range 79
Technical data 80
Connection and block diagram 80
Evaluation unit T 4000-1RBA 01 81
Sensors T 4000-DNA... 83
Actuator T 4000-1KBA 85
8 009 704/P076/25-01-05 • © SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved 73
Correct use Installation
The safety sensor T 4000 is a safety device for Only authorised specialists may perform
monitoring moving safety guards so that: installation work.
- potentially hazardous work on the machine can be ● Actuator and sensor must be easily accessible for
performed only if the safety guard is closed. inspection and exchange.
- a Stop command is triggered if the safety guard is
opened with the machine running. ● The switching operation may only be triggered by
the actuator specifically designed for this purpose.
A risk assessment in accordance with the following
standards must be conducted before using safety ● Actuator and sensor must be mounted in a manner
sensors: such that
- the distance between the end faces is equal
- EN 954-1, Safety-Related Components of Controls, to, or less than, the minimum switch-on distance
Annex C 0.8 x Sao when the safety guard is closed (see
- EN 1050, Machine Safety, Risk Assessment Technical data);
- they are not used as a mechanical stop;
Use as intended includes compliance with the rele- Note: Attach an additional stop for the moving
vant requirements for installation and operation, in part of the safety guard;
particular - with flush installation, the switching distance will
change depending on the installation depth and
- EN 954-1, Safety-Related Components of Controls the material of the safety guard.
- EN 1088, Interlocking Devices in Conjunction with - they are attached flush with the safety guard, e.g.
Moving Safety Guards by using the enclosed safety screws.
- EN 60 204-1, Electrical Equipment of Machines
- EN 60 947-5-3, Requirements for Proximity Devices ● The evaluation unit must be installed in a switch
with Defined Behaviour under Error Conditions cabinet with an enclosure of at least IP 54. A
latching element on the rear side of the device is
used for mounting on a standard rail.
Safety precautions
● If several evaluation units are mounted next to each
The safety sensor T 4000 complies with the following other in a switch cabinet where no air circulation
safety requirements (e.g. fan) is provided, there must be a gap of
- Control category 3 to EN 954-1. 10 mm between the evaluation units.
- Proximity switch with self-monitoring, type PDF-M The clearance enables heat to be dissipated from
in accordance with EN 60-947-5-3. the evaluation units.
- The circuit in the evaluation unit is configured using
redundancy design techniques with self-monitoring.
As a result, the safety guard remains active even if
a component fails.
- When the safety guard is opened or closed, a check
is conducted in order to establish whether the re-
lays of the safety guard are opening and closing
correctly.
Safety sensors perform personnel safety functions.

Incorrect installation or tampering may lead to serious
injury.
74 8 009 704/P076/25-01-05 • © SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
GB
Electrical connection
Electrical connection work may only be carried out by authorised specialists trained in EMC regulations.
The electrical installation is only allowed to be performed with the electrical power supply switched off.
● Safety sensors may not be bypassed (contacts jumpered), turned away, removed or rendered inoperative
in any other manner.
● All electrical connections must be isolated from the mains either by an isolating transformer (IEC 742) or
using a comparable isolation method.
● All output contacts in the case of capacitive and inductive loads must feature an adequate suppressor
circuit.
● Provide external contact fusing (fuse 6.3 A, quick acting) for relay outputs.
To ensure that safety is maintained, both output signal switching devices (relay outputs) 13/14 and
23/24 must be evaluated.
T 4000 Evaluation Unit

Operating voltage
+ 24 V 0 V
DC
Screen terminal
brown white
Sensor
Coded
13 14 23 24 actuator
Trans-
ponder

Operating voltage
+ 24 V 0 V
DC
Screen terminal
brown white
Sensor
Coded
13 14 23 24 actuator
Trans-
ponder
● If a common voltage supply is used, all of the Note: The plug-in, coded terminals on the evaluation
inductive and capacitive loads (e.g. contactors) unit allow the preparation of the line terminals for use,
connected to the voltage supply must be connected thus permitting simple and fast final installation.
to suitable suppressors. They also provide maximum safety during servicing.
The door signal output OUT must not be used

as a safety output.
● It is not permitted to increase the length of the

sensor connecting cable.
● The screen of the sensor cable (3 cm max. to be

stripped) must be connected to the earth of the
evaluation unit.
● The signal outputs ERR and OUT and the

connection terminals for the read head H1/H2 are
not short-circuit-proof.
● Should the device not function after the operating

voltage has been connected (e.g. green STATE-
LED does not light); please return the unit unopened
to the manufacturer.
● Only copper with a temperature resistance of

≥ 75 °C may be used for the wiring.
LED indicators
● The screws for the connecting terminal must be
tightened to a tightening torque of 0.6-0.8 Nm. STATE LED green Normal operation
● For use in accordance with requirements, a blinking Teach-in operation (See sy-
power supply rated as suitable ”for use in class 2 stem status table for other
circuits” must be used. signalling functions)
No currents ≥ 8A are permitted!
OUT LED yellow Valid actuator detector
ERROR LED red - Test input activated

- Internal circuitry error
- Invalid Teach-In operation
(See system status table)
In the event of operating errors (ERROR), the evalu-

ation unit can be reset to operating state by interrup-
ting the supply voltage for approx. 10 seconds.
GB
System description „Teach-In“ actuator function
The safety sensor T 4000 consists of three com- The actuator must be assigned to the evaluation unit
ponents: with the Teach-In function before the system forms a
functional unit.
- Coded actuator During the Teach-In operation, the safety outputs and
- Sensor the door signal output are set to LOW, i.e. the system
- Evaluation unit is in the safe state.
Each actuator supplied features a unique electronic ● Teach-In function for first actuator (condition as
code that is unique to the system used. The actuator delivered):
code cannot be reprogrammed. 1.Apply the operating voltage to the evaluation unit
- Fast blinking (approx. 4 Hz) of the green LED
The sensor is mounted on the stationary part of the 2.Move the actuator towards the sensor
safety guard and is connected to the evaluation unit (note distance < Sao)
via a two-core, screened cable. - Teach-In operation commences; slow blinking
The actuator mounted on the safety guard is moved (approx. 1 Hz) of the green LED
towards the sensor when the door is closed. When 3.Teach-In operation complete (after 60 seconds)
the activation distance is reached, power is supplied - Green LED goes out
to the actuator via the inductive sensor and the data 4.The operating voltage applied to the evaluation unit
can be transferred. must then be disconnected for a minimum of 10
The read-in bit pattern is compared with the code seconds to activate the actuator code taught in the
stored in the evaluation unit. If the two sets of data evaluation unit.
match, the safety outputs (relay output) are released
and the door signal output OUT (semiconductor ● Teach-In function for a new actuator:
output) is set to HIGH. 1.Apply the operating voltage to the evaluation unit
Owing to dynamic scanning by the actuator and the 2.Move the new actuator towards the sensor
diversity of the safety electronics in conjunction with (note distance < Sao)
two monitored safety outputs, the evaluation unit - Teach-In operation commences; green LED
enters the safe state when any detectable error blinks (approx. 1 Hz)
occurs. 3.Teach-In operation complete (after 60 seconds)
When the safety guard is opened, the safety outputs - Green LED goes out, new code is saved and old
disconnect the safety circuit and the door signal output code is deactivated.
(OUT) is switched to LOW. The status of the normally 4.The operating voltage on the evaluation unit must
open contacts is monitored internally via positive- then be disconnected for a minimum of 10 seconds
action normally closed contacts. to activate the actuator code taught in the evaluation
If an internal error occurs in the evaluation unit, the unit.
safety circuit is disconnected, the diagnostic output
(ERROR) is set to HIGH and the red ERROR LED
lights up. Note:
● It is not possible to teach the same actuator
Note: The dwell time of an actuator inside and outsi- on the same evaluation unit more than once.
de the operating range must be at least 0.5 seconds, ● The number of valid Teach-In operations on
otherwise the evaluation unit could enter the error one evaluation unit is limited to a maximum of
state so that the red ERROR LED lights up. Discon- 8.
necting the voltage supply returns the evaluation unit ● The evaluation unit can be operated only with
to the operating state. the last actuator taught.
● A Teach-In operation is invalid if:
- the Teach-In operation is aborted before the
green LED go out
- The supply voltage has been disconnected
during the Teach-In operation
Important:
The system automatically reverts to Teach-In mode
even after the 8th Teach-In operation or if an “old”
actuator is moved against the read head. In both ca-
ses, a Teach-In operation lasting 60 seconds is in-
itiated, but the last actuator code remains active in
memory (see Status table); no new code is taught.
System status table
PLC LED indicator Status

Input Output
OUT (alarm signal)
STATE (green)
Relays KA, KB
(Safety citcuit)
Door position
OUT (yellow)
blink pulses
Number of
ERR (red)
Actuator/
ERR
TST
Normal operation clos. on N 1 0 1 1 0 Normal operation, door closed
open off N 0 0 0 0 0 Normal operation, door open
Commissioning blinks
Initial commissioning on delivery
open off N 0 0 constantly 0 0
Ready for first Teach-In operation
at 4 Hz
blinks 60
clos. off N 0 0 sec at 0 0 Teach-In operation
approx. 1 Hz
Positive acknowledgment for successful Teach-
clos. off N 0 0 0 0 0 In operation. The unit must be switched back on
again for normal operation
Status display x off x 0 0 3 0 0 Indication after 1st to 5th Teach-In operation
Indication of the number of Teach-In operations

x off x 0 0 2 0 0
still allowed after the 6th Teach-In operation
One-Off
blink Indication of the number of Teach-In operations
x off x 0 0 sequence 1 0 0
still allowed after the 7th Teach-In operation
after power-
off Device is now unable to perform a further
x off x 0 0 0 0 0
Teach-In operation
Error indication x off N 0 1 0 0 1 Device-internal component failure or
x off N 0 1 0 0 1 Actuator in response range less than 0,5 sec
Operating error clos. off N 0 1 1 0 1 Illegal 9th Teach-In-operation

Brief blink
clos. off N 0 1 2 0 1 Illegal Teach-In operation of an old actuator
sequences
repeated Negative acknowledgment for Teach-In operation.
clos. off N 0 1 after 1 3 0 1 Actuator was held in front of read head for less
sec. than 60 sec.
Test mode open off 1 0 1 1 0 1
External device test for „OPEN“ and function

clos. off 1 0 1 1 0 1
ERR output with door closed
N = 0 Volt or not connected 1 = on

0 = 0 Volt 0 = offl
1 = 24 Volt
x = 0 or 24 Volt
resp.door open or closed
Note:
● The evaluation unit can be operated only with the last actuator taught.
Inspection and maintenance
Regular inspections must be conducted, as follows, - Tightness of the cable entry point on the sensor to
in order to ensure correct long term operation: prevent moisture ingress
- Firm, safe attachment of the actuator and sensor - Loose line and lead connections on the evaluation
(use the enclosed safety screws) unit
- Check of the switch-off distance
GB
Function test (self-test) The safety outputs are disabled so that the entire
safety circuit can be tested. As a monitoring function,
On electromechanical safety switches or magnetic the diagnostic output ERR is also set to HIGH by the
sensors, the test function can be conducted by evaluation unit.
cyclically opening the safety guard. When the test input is reset, the diagnostic output
ERR is set back to LOW by the evaluation unit, the
As of control category 2, a function test of the entire red LED goes out and the safety outputs are switched
safety system must be conducted in accordance with on again.
EN 60204-1 : 1997 (Chapter 9.4.2.4) on start-up or This allows the safety system to test itself without the
at required intervals. safety guard having to be opened.
The internal functioning of the T 4000 safety sensor

does not need to be checked because the device Disclaimer of liability
monitors itself in real time. The fusing of an output
contact (relay output) will be detected at the very latest We do not accept liability in the following cases:
when the safety guard is next opened. A cross fault
along the output line is not detected by the device. - use as not intended
Furthermore, the entire safety circuit can be tested - non-compliance with safety information
without opening the safety guard. This is done by - electrical attachment and connection by unautho-
applying 24 V DC to the test input to simulate opening rised personnel
of the safety guard. - tampering
Typical operating range (with cable length l = 0 to 25 m) *)
Observe the safe m Output state

switch-off distance
sar = 23 mm Actuator Hysteresis
(see Safety s ON
instructions for
sensors, p. 84) Sensor
OFF
Switch-off Sao Distance s
8 distance
Distance s [mm]
Hysteresis
OFF 6
Switch-on
distance Sao
2
ON
-8 -6 -4 -2 0 2 4 6 8
Centre offset m [mm]
*)
For min./max. values, see Technical data
Connection and block diagram, example connection

Operating voltage
+ 24 V 0 V
DC
Screen terminal
brown white
Sensor
Coded
actuator
CPU-A CPU-B Trans-
DDSP: ponder
Double Dynamic
Safety Path with error
TST input not connected:
Operation without testing
monitoring of the actuator,

of the sensor and of the
KA KB cable to the sensor
TST T
Test input
OUT Door signal output (not a safety output)
ERR Diagnostic output
10kW
GND 0V (internally connected to 0V of operating voltage)
10kW H1/H2 Connection, sensor
SH Shielded connection, sensor
13/14 Connection, NO contact 1, Enable safety relay
23/24 Connection, NO contact 2, Enable safety relay
Safety PLC
Channel A
I0 Safety input
0V
TO0 Clocked output
0V
Example connection with
Channel B
I1 Safety input
0V
safety PLC
TO1 Clocked output
0V
I2 Inputs
I3
0V
O2 static
output
GB
Evaluation unit T 4000-1RBA 01
Dimension drawing
22,5 114,5
H1 H2 SH
24V 0V
STATE
99
OUT
ERROR
TST OUT ERR GND

13 14 23 24
35 mm rail according
to DIN 46277
Switching characteristics
Safety Guard
2 safety outputs (relay outputs)
1 door signal output (semiconductor output, no safety closed open
output) (actuator identified) (actuator out of
operating range)
Sensor Actuator Sensor
13 14 13 14
23 24 23 24
24 V OUT 24 V OUT
Technical data
Parameter Value Unit
min. typical max.
Housing material Plastic PA6.6
Dimensions 114.5 x 99 x 22.5 mm
Weight 0.2 kg
Ambient temperature at UB = 24 V DC 0 - +55 °C
Storage temperature -25 - +70 °C
Enclosure IP20
Protection class Protection class III, degree of contamination 2
Material class II
Mounting 35 mm rail in accordance with DIN 46277
Number of sensors 1 sensor per evaluation unit
Type of connection plug-in screw terminals / coded
Connection terminals 0.14 - 2.5 mm²
Operating voltage UB
21 24 27 V DC
(stabilised, residual ripple < 5 %)
Current consumption (with activated relay) 150 mA
Safety outputs 2 safety relays, each with one NO contact
Switching current (relay outputs) 1)
- Switching voltage 0,1 ... 60 V 1 - 300 mA
- Switching voltage 10 ... 24 V 1 - 4000 mA
External fusing (safety circuit) 6,3 A quick acting
Utilisation category to EN 60947-5-2 AC-12 300mA 60V 50Hz / DC-12 300mA 60V
AC-140 2A 30V 50Hz / DC-13 4A 30V
Control category to EN 954 3
Classification to IEC/EN 60 947-5-3 PDF-M
Rated insulation voltage Ui - - 63 V
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp - - 1,5 kV
Resistance to vibration in accordance with EN 60 947-5-2
Meachanical switching operations (relays) 10 x 10 6
Operating delay as of state change - - 180 ms
Start-up delay time 2) 3 s
Dwell time 0,5 - - s
Signal outputs (diagnostic ERR, door signal out-
put OUT, semiconductor output, p-switching) 3)
- Output voltage 0,8 x UB - UB V DC
- Load rating - - 20 mA
Testinput LOW 0 - 2 V DC
HIGH 15 - UB V DC
EMV protection requirements to IEC 60947-5-3
LED indicators STATE LED green: Normal mode
blinking: Teach-In operation
OUT LED yellow: Actuator detected
ERROR LED red: - Test input activated
- Internal circuitry error
- Invalid Teach-In operation
1)
If a switching current > 300 mA is switched via the relay outputs, low current (≤ 10 mA) can no longer be reliably switched owing to erosion of
the gold contacts.
2)
When the operating voltage is switched on, the relay outputs are switched off and the door signal contact set to LOW potential during the start-
up delay.
3)
non-short-circuit-proofed
GB
Sensors T 4000-DNA...
Sensor T 4000-DNA..P (with fixed cable)
Dimension drawing
Cable length l 42 12
ø4,5
ø8
T4000-D XXXXXX
25
32 ±0,1 sensing 4,6 sensing
face face
Connection diagram
Sensor with connecting cable
Shield
BN Sensor
WH
H1 H2 SH
Evaluation unit
Sensor T 4000-DNAC with plug connector M8 (with snap-in/screw connection)

Dimension drawing
32,6 42 12
6,8 32 ±0,1 4,6

ø8
ø4,5
ø10
T4000-DNACXXXXXX
25
sensing
3 face
4
sensing 1
min.38 5,5
face
Connection diagram
Sensor with plug connector
WH Shield 3
4
BN 1
View on sensor plug
H1 H2 SH connector
Evaluation unit
Technical data
min. typical max.
Housing material Fortron, glass-reinforced thermoplastic material, fully encapsulated
Mass (including 10 m cable) 0.3 kg
Ambient temperature -25 - +70 °C
Enclosure IP67
Installation position any
Mode of operation inductive
Dynamic data transfer
2 kbit/s
to evaluation unit
Dwell time 1) 0.5 - - s
Operating range in the case of centre offset m = 0 2)
Line length l = 0 to 25 m
- Switch-on distanc Sao 5 6 -
- Differential hysteresis 0.5 1.5 -
- Safe switch-off distance Sar - - 23 mm
Line length l ≥ 25 to 50 m
- Switch-on distanc Sao 4 4.8 -
- Differential hysteresis 0.4 1.2 -
- Safe switch-off distance Sar - - 23
Power supply via evaluation unit
Connection sensor T 4000-DNA..P permanently sealed connection cable, with wire end ferrules
Line length sensor T 4000-DNA..P 15 m
Connection sensor T 4000-DNAC Plug connector M8 (with snap-in / screw connection), 3-pole
Line length T 4000-DNAC - - 50 m
1)
The dwell time is the time during which the actuator must be inside or outside the operating range.
2)
These values only apply for the protruding and flush installation of the sensor and the actuator in aluminium.
Notes on installation
● The sensor connecting cable must not be increased in length.

Inline connection not permitted.
● Actuator and sensor must be attached so that:

- The distance between the sensing faces is less than or equal to the switch-on distance 0,8 x Sao (see
Technical data) with the safety guard closed.
- They are not used as a mechanical stop.
- They are positively connected to the safety guard; e.g. by using the enclosed safety screws.
Safety precautions
● With flush installation of the sensor and/or actuator, the switching distance will change depending on the
installation depth and the material of the safety guard.
● The safety guard must be designed so that the distance Sar (safe switch-off distance) does not allow for a
gap that will increase the possibility of exposure to the hazard.
Note: The relay outputs are safely deactivated, even in the case of an internal component failure, at the
safe switch-off distance Sar = 23 mm .
GB
Actuator T 4000-1KBA
Dimensions drawing
42 12
ø4,5
ø8
T4000-1KBA 5306531
25
32 ±0,1 4,6
sensing sensing
face face
Technical data
min. typ. max.
Housing material Fortron, glass-reinforced thermoplastic material, fully encapsulated
Mass 0,02 kg
Ambient temperature -25 - +70 °C
Enclosure IP67
Installation position sensing face opposite sensor
Dwell time 1) 0,5 - - s
1)
The dwell time is the period for which the actuator must remain inside or outside the operating range.
GR
Ïäçãßåò ëåéôoõñãßáò ÁéóèçôÞñáò áóöáëåßáò T 4000
Ðåñéå÷üìåíá
×ñÞóç óýìöùíá ìå ôïõò ïñéóìïýò 88

Ïäçãßåò áóöáëåßáò 88
Óõíáñìïëüãçóç 88
ÇëåêôñéêÞ óýíäåóç 89
ÐåñéãñáöÞ óõóôÞìáôïò 91
Ëåéôïõñãßá åêìÜèçóçò ãéá ôïí åíåñãïðïéçôÞ 91
Ðéíáêßäá êáôÜóôáóçò óõóôÞìáôïò 92
Eëåã÷ïé êáé óõíôÞñçóç 92
Eëåã÷ïò ëåéôïõñãßáò (ÁõôïÝëåã÷ïò) 93
ÔõðéêÞ ðåñéï÷Þ áðüêñéóçò 93
Áðïêëåéóìüò åõèýíçò 93
Ôå÷íéêÜ ÷áñáêôçñéóôéêÜ 93
ÄéÜãñáììá óýíäåóçò êáé ó÷Þìáôïò 93
ÓõóêåõÞ åðåîåñãáóßáò T 4000-1RBA 01 95
ÁéóèçôÞñåò T 4000-DNA... 97
ÅíåñãïðïéçôÞ T 4000-1KBA 99
8 009 704/P076/25-01-05 • © SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Ãåñìáíßá • Ìå ôçí åðéöýëáîç êÜèå äéêáéþìáôïò 87
Ba_T4000_gr.pmd 87 01.02.2005, 10:48

×ñÞóç óýìöùíá ìå ôïõò ïñéóìïýò Óõíáñìïëüãçóç
Ï áéóèçôÞñáò áóöáëåßáò T 4000 åßíáé ìéá Ç óõíáñìïëüãçóç ðñÝðåé íá åðéôåëåßôáé

äéÜôáîç ôå÷íéêÞò áóöÜëåéáò ãéá ôçí åðéôÞñçóç áðïêëåéóôéêÜ áðü åîïõóéïäïôçìÝíï êáé
êéíïýìåíùí ðñïóôáôåõôéêþí äéáôÜîåùí Ýôóé åîåéäéêåõìÝíï ðñïóùðéêü.
þóôå:
● Ï åíåñãïðïéçôÞò êáé ï áéóèçôÞñáò ðñÝðåé íá
- ïé åðéêßíäõíåò åñãáóßåò óôï ìç÷Üíçìá íá ðáñÝ÷ïõí åýêïëç ðñüóâáóç ãéá ôéò åñãáóßåò
åêôåëïýíôáé ìüíï, üôáí ç ðñïóôáôåõôéêÞ åëÝã÷ïõ êáé áíôéêáôÜóôáóçò.
äéÜôáîç åßíáé êëåéóôÞ.
- ìßá åíôïëÞ ÔÅÑÌÁÔÉÓÌÏÕ íá äßäåôáé, üôáí ● Ç äéáäéêáóßá äéáêïðÞò ðñÝðåé íá åðéôåëåßôáé
ç ðñïóôáôåõôéêÞ äéÜôáîç áíïßãåé, êáèþò ôï ìüíï ìÝóù ôïõ åéäéêïý åíåñãïðïéçôÞ ðïõ
ìç÷Üíçìá âñßóêåôáé óå ëåéôïõñãßá. ðñïäéáãñÜöåôáé ãéá áõôÞí.
Ðñéí ôç ÷ñçóéìïðïßçóç ôùí áéóèçôÞñùí ● Ï åíåñãïðïéçôÞò êáé ï áéóèçôÞñáò ðñÝðåé íá

áóöáëåßáò áðáéôåßôáé ìßá áîéïëüãçóç åßíáé ðñïóáñìïóìÝíïé Ýôóé, þóôå:
åðéêéíäõíüôçôáò ôïõ ìç÷áíÞìáôïò óýìöùíá ìå: - ïé ìåôùðéêÝò åðéöÜíåéåò, üôáí ç
- ôï Åõñùðáúêü Ðñüôõðï EN 954-1, ÌÝñç ôùí ðñïóôáôåõôéêÞ äéÜôáîç åßíáé êëåéóôÞ, íá
äéáôÜîåùí åëÝã÷ïõ ðïõ ó÷åôßæïíôáé ìå ôçí âñßóêïíôáé áðÝíáíôé óå åëÜ÷éóôç áðüóôáóç
áóöÜëåéá, ÐáñÜñôçìá C äéáêïðÞò 0,8 x Sao Þ ðéï êïíôÜ (âëÝðå ôå÷íéêÜ
- ôï Åõñùðáúêü Ðñüôõðï EN 1050, ÁóöÜëåéá ÷áñáêôçñéóôéêÜ),
ìç÷áíçìÜôùí, áîéïëüãçóç åðéêéíäõíüôçôáò. - íá ìçí ÷ñçóéìïðïéïýíôáé ùò ìç÷áíéêïß
Óôç ÷ñÞóç óýìöùíá ìå ôïõò ïñéóìïýò åìðßðôåé áíáóôïëåßò.
ç ôÞñçóç ôùí ó÷åôéêþí áðáéôÞóåùí ãéá ôçí Ïäçãßá: Ðñïóáñìüóôå åðéðñüóèåôïõò
êáôáóêåõÞ êáé ôç ëåéôïõñãßá, åéäéêüôåñá âÜóåé áíáóôïëåßò ãéá ôá êéíïýìåíá ìÝñç ôçò
- ôïõ Åõñùðáúêïý Ðñïôýðïõ EN 954-1, ÌÝñç ðñïóôáôåõôéêÞò äéÜôáîçò.
äéáôÜîåùí åëÝã÷ïõ ðïõ ó÷åôßæïíôáé ìå ôçí - óå ðåñßðôùóç äåóìéêÞò åãêáôÜóôáóçò
áóöÜëåéá, áëëÜæåé óå åîÜñôçóç ìå ôï âÜèïò
- ôïõ Åõñùðáúêïý Ðñïôýðïõ EN 1088, ÄéáôÜîåéò åãêáôÜóôáóçò êáé ôï õëéêü ôçò
ìáíäÜëùóçò óõíäåìÝíåò ìå ìåìïíùìÝíåò ðñïóôáôåõôéêÞò äéÜôáîçò ç áðüóôáóç
ðñïóôáôåõôéêÝò äéáôÜîåéò, äéáêïðÞò.
- ôïõ Åõñùðáúêïý Ðñïôýðïõ ÅÍ 60 204-1, - íá åßíáé áóöáëþò óõíäåäåìÝíïé ìå ôçí
Çëåêôñéêüò åîïðëéóìüò ìç÷áíçìÜôùí, ðñïóôáôåõôéêÞ äéÜôáîç, ð.÷.
- ôïõ Åõñùðáúêïý Ðñïôýðïõ ÅÍ 60 947-5-3, ÷ñçóéìïðïéþíôáò ôéò óõíçììÝíåò âßäåò
áðáéôÞóåéò ãéá äéáêüðôåò ðñïóÝããéóçò ìå áóöáëåßáò.
ïñéæüìåíç óõìðåñéöïñÜ õðü óõíèÞêåò
óöÜëìáôïò. ● Ç ìç÷áíÞ åðåîåñãáóßáò ðñÝðåé íá åßíáé
åãêáôåóôçìÝíç óå Ýíáí ðßíáêá åëÝã÷ïõ ìå
Ïäçãßåò áóöáëåßáò Ýíá ôýðï ðñïóôáóßáò ôïõëÜ÷éóôïí ôïõ äåßêôç
IP54. Ãéá ôç óôåñÝùóç óå Ýíá ðëáßóéï-êáíüíá
Ï áéóèçôÞñáò áóöáëåßáò T4000 ðëçñåß ôéò ÷ñçóéìåýåé ìßá äéÜôáîç óõãêñÜôçóçò óôçí
áêüëïõèåò áðáéôÞóåéò áóöáëåßáò: ïðßóèéá ðëåõñÜ ôçò óõóêåõÞò.
- Êáôçãïñßá åëÝã÷ïõ 3 óýìöùíá ìå ÅÍ 954-1
- Äéáêüðôåò ðñïóÝããéóçò ìå áõôüìáôç ● Óå ðåñßðôùóç åãêáôÜóôáóçò ðåñéóóïôÝñùí
åðéôÞñçóç ôïõ ôýðïõ PDF-M óýìöùíá ìå ôï óõóêåõþí åðåîåñãáóßáò ç ìßá äßðëá óôçí
ðñüôõðï ÅÍ 60 947-5-3. Üëëç óå åñìÜñéï ìåôáãùãþí ÷ùñßò
(Ó÷Ýäéï, áñ. ðáñáðïìðÞò. DIN IEC 17B/848/CDV) êõêëïöïñßá áÝñá (ð.÷. áíåìéóôÞñáò) ðñÝðåé
- MåôáãùãÞ óôç óõóêåõÞ åðåîåñãáóßáò åßíáé íá ôçñåßôáé áðüóôáóç åãêáôÜóôáóçò ìåôáîý
ðëåïíÜæïõóá ìå áõôïÝëåã÷ï. Ìå ôïí ôñüðï ôùí óõóêåõþí åðåîåñãáóßáò 10 mm.
áõôü ç äéÜôáîç áóöáëåßáò ðáñáìÝíåé Ç áðüóôáóç åãêáôÜóôáóçò äéáóöáëßæåé ôoí
åíåñãüò êáé óå ðåñßðôùóç áðþëåéáò åíüò åëåýèåño äéáóêïñðéóìü èåñìüôçôáò áðü ôéò
äïìéêïý ìÝñïõò. óõóêåõÝò åðåîåñãáóßáò.
- Óôç äéÜñêåéá ôïõ áíïßãìáôïò, äçë. êáôÜ ôï
êëåßóéìï ôçò ðñïóôáôåõôéêÞò äéÜôáîçò
åëÝã÷åôáé, áí áíïßãïõí êáé êëåßíïõí ìå ïñèü
ôñüðï ïé çëåêôñïíüìïé ôçò ðñïóôáôåõôéêÞò
äéÜôáîçò.
Ïé áéóèçôÞñåò áóöáëåßáò åðéôåëïýí
ëåéôïõñãßåò ðñïóôáóßáò áôüìùí. ÁêáôÜëëçëç
ôïðïèÝôçóç Þ ÷ñÞóç ìðïñåß íá åðéöÝñåé
óïâáñïýò ôñáõìáôéóìïýò óôá Üôïìá.
88 8 009 704/P076/25-01-05 • © SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Ãåñìáíßá • Ìå ôçí åðéöýëáîç êÜèå äéêáéþìáôïò
Ba_T4000_gr.pmd 88 01.02.2005, 10:48

GR
ÇëåêôñéêÞ óýíäåóç
Ç çëåêôñéêÞ óýíäåóç ðñÝðåé íá åðéôåëåßôáé áðïêëåéóôéêÜ áðü åîïõóéïäïôçìÝíï êáé

åîåéäéêåõìÝíï ðñïóùðéêü ìå áñìïäéüôçôá óôçí çëåêôñïìáãíçôéêÞ óõìâáôüôçôá. Ç çëåêôñéêÞ
åãêáôÜóôáóç åðéôñÝðåôáé íá ðñáãìáôïðïéçèåß ìüíï óå êáôÜóôáóç áðüæåõîçò.
● Ïé áéóèçôÞñåò áóöáëåßáò äåí ðñÝðåé íá ôßèåíôáé åêôüò ëåéôïõñãßáò ìå ðáñÜêáìøç

(ãåöõñùìÝíåò åðáöÝò), ðåñéóôñïöÞ, áöáßñåóç Þ ìå Üëëïí ôñüðï.
● ¼ëåò ïé çëåêôñéêÝò óõíäÝóåéò ðñÝðåé íá áðïìïíùèïýí áðü ôï äßêôõï Þ ìå ìåôáó÷çìáôéóôÞ

äéá÷ùñéóìïý (IEC 742) Þ ìå Üëëá éóïäýíáìá ìÝôñá ìüíùóçò.
● ¼ëåò ïé åðáöÝò Ýîïäùí ðñÝðåé íá äéáèÝôïõí åðáñêÞ ðñïóôáôåõôéêÜ óõóôÞìáôá æåýîçò ãéá
÷ùñçôéêÜ êáé åðáãùãéêÜ öïñôßá.
● Íá ðñïâëåöèåß ìéá åîùôåñéêÞ áóöÜëéóç åðáöÞò (áóöÜëåéá 6,3 Á ãñÞãïñçò áäñÜíåéáò) ãéá ôéò
åîüäïõò çëåêôñïíüìùí.
Ãéá ôçí åããýçóç áóöáëåßáò ðñÝðåé êáé ïé äõï Ýîïäïé áóöáëåßáò (Ýîïäïé ñùóôÞñùí) 13/14
êáé 23/24 íá áîéïëïãïýíôáé õðï÷ñåùôéêÜ.
Ìç÷áíÞ áîéïëüãçóçò - T 4000

ÔÜóç ëåéôïõñãßáò
+ 24 V 0 V
DC
èùñáêéóìÝíç óýíäåóç
êáöÝ Üóðñï
ÁéóèçôÞñáò
êùäéêïðïéçìÝíïò
13 14 23 24 åíåñãïðïéçôÞò
Trans-
ponder

+ 24 V 0 V
DC
êáöÝ Üóðñï
13 14 23 24 åíåñãïðïéçôÞò
Trans-
ponder
Ba_T4000_gr.pmd 89 01.02.2005, 10:48

● Óå ðåñßðôùóç ýðáñîçò êïéíÞò Ïäçãßá: Ïé âõóìáôþóéìïé êáé êùäéêïðïéçìÝíïé
ôñïöïäüôçóçò ñåýìáôïò ðñÝðåé íá õðÜñ÷åé áêñïäÝêôåò óôç óõóêåõÞ åðåîåñãáóßáò
ìéá äéåõèÝôçóç üëùí ôùí åðáãùãéêþí êáé êáèéóôïýí åöéêôÞ åê ôùí ðñïôÝñùí ìßá
÷ùñçôéêþí öïñôßùí (ð.÷. åðáöÝùí), ôá ïðïßá äéáäï÷éêÞ óåéñÜ óôéò óõíäÝóåéò ôùí áãùãþí
åßíáé óõíäåäåìÝíá ìå ôçí ôñïöïäüôçóç êáé ãéá ôï ëüãï áõôü ìßá åýêïëç êáé ôá÷åßá ôåëéêÞ
ñåýìáôïò, ìå êáôÜëëçëá áíôéðáñáóéôéêÜ óõíáñìïëüãçóç.
óôïé÷åßá. ÐÝñá áðü áõôü ðáñÝ÷ïõí óå ðåñßðôùóç
óõíôÞñçóçò ìßá õøçëïý âáèìïý áóöÜëåéá.
Ç Ýîïäïò áíáããåëßáò ôçò ðüñôáò OUT
äåí åðéôñÝðåôáé íá ÷ñçóéìïðïéåßôáé ùò
Ýîïäïò áóöáëåßáò.
● Äåí åðéôñÝðåôáé íá ãßíåôáé åðéìÞêõíóç ôïõ

êáëùäßïõ ôñïöïäüôçóçò ñåýìáôïò ôïõ
áéóèçôÞñá.
● Ç èùñÜêéóç ôïõ áãùãïý ôïõ áéóèçôÞñá (ìÝã.
áðïãýìíùóç ìüíùóçò 3 cm) ðñÝðåé íá
óõíäåèåß ìå ôç óýíäåóç SH ôçò ìïíÜäáò
åðåîåñãáóßáò.
● Ïé Ýîïäïé áíáããåëßáò ERR êáé OUT üðùò êáé

ïé áêñïäÝêôåò ãéá êåöáëÞ áíÜãíùóçò Ç1/
Ç2 äåí åßíáé ðñïóôáôåõìÝíåò åíáíôßïí
âñá÷õêõêëþìáôïò.
● Óå ðåñßðôùóç ðïõ ç óõóêåõÞ, ýóôåñá áðü

ôçí åöáñìïãÞ ôçò ôÜóçò ëåéôïõñãßáò, äåí
äåß÷íåé êáìßá ëåéôïõñãßá (ð.÷. äåí áíÜâåé ç
ðñÜóéíç Ýíäåéîç STATE-LED [öùôïäßïäïò
êáôÜóôáóçò]), ðñÝðåé ç óõóêåõÞ íá
áðïóôáëåß ðßóù óôïí êáôáóêåõáóôÞ ÷ùñßò Åíäåßîåéò LED
íá áíïé÷èåß.
STATE ðñÜóéíï LED êáíïíéêÞ ëåéôïõñãßá
● Ùò õëéêü áãùãþí åðéôñÝðåôáé íá [ÊÁÔÁÓÔÁÓÇ]
÷ñçóéìïðïéçèåß ìüíï ÷áëêüò ìå áíôï÷Þ óå
èåñìïêñáóßá Ùò õëéêü áãùãþí åðéôñÝðåôáé áíáâïóâÞíåé äéáäéêáóßá åêìÜèçóçò
íá ÷ñçóéìïðïéçèåß ìüíï ÷áëêüò ìå áíôï÷Þ (ðåñáéôÝñù
óå èåñìïêñáóßá ≥ 75 °C. ëåéôïõñãßá óÞìáôïò
âëÝðå ðßíáêá
● Ïé âßäåò ôùí áêñïäåêôþí ðñÝðåé íá êáôÜóôáóçò)
óöé÷ôïýí ìå ñïðÞ 0,6 – 0,8 Nm.
OUT êßôñéíï LED áíáãíþñéóç
● Ãéá ôçí åöáñìïãÞ êáé ÷ñÞóç óýìöùíá ìå åöáñìïæüìåíïõ
ôéò áðáéôÞóåéò ðñÝðåé íá [ÅÎÏÄÏÓ] íåñãïðïéçôÞ
÷ñçóéìïðïéçèåß ôÜóç ôñïöïäïóßáò ìå ôï
÷áñáêôçñéóôéêü ”for use in class 2 circuits”. ERROR êüêêéíï LED - Åíåñãïðïßçóç åéóüäïõ
Äåí åðéôñÝðåôáé ç ñïÞ ñåýìáôïò ³ 8 Á! åëÝã÷ïõ [ËÁÈÏÓ]
- Çëåêôñïíéêü êýêëùìá
åóùôåñé êïý óöÜëìáôïò
- Ìç åöáñìïæüìåíç
äéáäéêáóßá åêìÜèçóçò
(âëÝðå ðßíáêá
êáôÜóôáóçò)
Óå ðåñéðôþóåéò óöÜëìáôïò êáôÜ ôï ÷åéñéóìü

(ERROR), ç óõóêåõÞ åðåîåñãáóßáò ìðïñåß ìÝóù
äéáêïðÞò ôçò ôñïöïäüôçóçò ôçò ôÜóçò - ãéá
ðåñßðïõ 10 äåõôåñüëåðôá - íá åðáíÝëèåé óôçí
êáôÜóôáóç ëåéôïõñãßáò.
Ba_T4000_gr.pmd 90 01.02.2005, 10:48

GR
ÐåñéãñáöÞ óõóôÞìáôïò ● Äéáäéêáóßá åêìÜèçóçò ãéá ôïí áñ÷éêü åíåñãïðïéçôÞ
Ï áéóèçôÞñáò áóöáëåßáò T4000 áðïôåëåßôáé (ÊáôÜóôáóç ðáñÜäïóçò):
áðü ôñßá åîáñôÞìáôá: 1. ÅöáñìïãÞ ôçò ôÜóçò ëåéôïõñãßáò óôç óõóêåõÞ
åðåîåñãáóßáò
- ÊùäéêïðïéçìÝíï åíåñãïðïéçôÞ - Ôá÷ý áíáâüóâçìá (ðåñßðïõ 4 Hz) ôçò ðñÜóéíçò
- ÁéóèçôÞñáò Ýíäåéîçò LED
- ÓõóêåõÞ åðåîåñãáóßáò 2. Ï åíåñãïðïéçôÞò ïäçãåßôáé êïíôÜ óôïí
ÊÜèå åíåñãïðïéçôÞò ðïõ ðáñáäßäåôáé äéáèÝôåé ìßá áéóèçôÞñá (ðñïóÝîôå ãéá ôçí áðüóôáóç < Sao)
ëåðôïìåñÞ çëåêôñïíéêÞ êùäéêïðïßçóç êáé óõíéóôÜ ãéá - Ç äéáäéêáóßá åêìÜèçóçò åêêéíåß, áñãü
ôï ëüãï áõôü Ýíá ìïíüôõðï ãéá ôï åãêáôåóôçìÝíï áíáâüóâçìá ôïõ (ðåñßðïõ 1 Hz) ôçò ðñÜóéíçò
óýóôçìá. Ï êùäéêüò åíüò åíåñãïðïéçôÞ äåí ìðïñåß Ýíäåéîçò LED
åðßóçò íá áðïðñïãñáììáôéóèåß. 3. Ç äéáäéêáóßá åêìÜèçóçò ôåñìáôßæåôáé (ýóôåñá áðü
Ï áéóèçôÞñáò óôåñåþíåôáé óôï óôáèåñü 60 äåõôåñüëåðôá)
ìÝñïò ôçò ðñïóôáôåõôéêÞò äéÜôáîçò êáé - óâÞíåé ç ðñÜóéíç Ýíäåéîç LED
óõíäÝåôáé ìÝóù åíüò èùñáêéóìÝíïõ êáëùäßïõ 4. ÐñïêåéìÝíïõ íá åíåñãïðïéÞóåôå ôïí êùäéêü ôïõ
ìå äýï óýñìáôá ìå ôç óõóêåõÞ åðåîåñãáóßáò. åíåñãïðïéçôÞ ðïõ Ý÷åé ðåñÜóåé áðü ôç äéáäéêáóßá
Ï åíåñãïðïéçôÞò ðïõ åßíáé óôåñåùìÝíïò óôçí åêìÜèçóçò, ðñÝðåé áêïëïýèùò íá äéáêüðôåôáé ç
ðñïóôáôåõôéêÞ äéÜôáîç ïäçãåßôáé ìå ôï êëåßóéìï ôÜóç åñãáóßáò óôç óõóêåõÞ åðåîåñãáóßáò ãéá
ôçò èýñáò óôïí áéóèçôÞñá. ¼ôáí öèÜóåé óôçí 10 äåõôåñüëåðôá.
áðüóôáóç óýíäåóçò, ðñáãìáôïðïéåßôáé ìÝóù ● Ëåéôïõñãßá åêìÜèçóçò åíüò íÝïõ åíåñãïðïéçôÞ.
ôïõ åðáãùãéêïý áéóèçôÞñá ç ôñïöïäüôçóç 1. ÅöáñìïãÞ ôçò ôÜóçò åñãáóßáò óôç óõóêåõÞ
ôÜóçò êáé ìðïñåß íá áêïëïõèÞóåé ç ìåôáâßâáóç åðåîåñãáóßáò.
ôùí äåäïìÝíùí. 2. ÌåôÜâáóç ôïõ íÝïõ åíåñãïðïéçôÞ óôïí
Ç åéêüíá äõáäéêþí øçößùí ðïõ Ý÷ïõí áíáãíùóèåß áéóèçôÞñá (ðñïóÝîôå ôçí áðüóôáóç < Sao)
óõãêñßíåôáé ìå ôï áðïèçêåõìÝíï êþäéêá ôçò óõóêåõÞò - Ç äéáäéêáóßá åêìÜèçóçò åêêéíåß, áíáâïóâÞíåé ç
åðåîåñãáóßáò. Óå ðåñßðôùóç ôáýôéóçò ôùí ðñÜóéíç Ýíäåéîç LED (ðåñßðïõ. 1 Hz).
äåäïìÝíùí ãßíåôáé ç áðüëõóç ôùí åîüäùí áóöáëåßáò 3. Ôåñìáôéóìüò ôçò ëåéôïõñãßáò åêìÜèçóçò (ýóôåñá
(Ýîïäïò çëåêôñïíüìïõ) êáé ç Ýîïäïò áíáããåëßáò ôçò áðü 60 äåõôåñüëåðôá).
ðüñôáò OUT (Ýîïäïò çìéáãùãïý) ôßèåôáé åðßóçò óå - ç ðñÜóéíç Ýíäåéîç LED óâÞíåé, áðïèçêåýåôáé ï
HIGH. íÝïò êùäéêüò, ï ðáëáéüò êùäéêüò
Ìå ôç äõíáìéêÞ æÞôçóç ôïõ åíåñãïðïéçôÞ êáé ôçí áðåíåñãïðïéåßôáé.
ðëåïíÜæïõóá êáé äéáöïñïðïéçìÝíç äïìÞ ôïõ 4. ÐñïêåéìÝíïõ íá åíåñãïðïéçèåß ï íÝïò êùäéêüò ðïõ
çëåêôñïíéêïý óõóôÞìáôïò áóöáëåßáò óå óõíäõáóìü Ý÷åé ðåñÜóåé áðü ôç äéáäéêáóßá åêìÜèçóçò óôç
ìå äýï åîüäïõò áóöáëåßáò ìåôáâáßíåé ç óõóêåõÞ óõóêåõÞ åðåîåñãáóßáò, ðñÝðåé áêïëïýèùò íá
åðåîåñãáóßáò óå êÜèå áíôéëçðôü óöÜëìá óôçí äéáêïðåß ç ôÜóç ëåéôïõñãßáò óôç óõóêåõÞ ãéá 10
áóöáëÞ êáôÜóôáóç. äåõôåñüëåðôá.
ÊáôÜ ôï Üíïéãìá ôçò ðñïóôáôåõôéêÞò äéÜôáîçò Ïäçãßá:
äéáêüðôïõí ïé Ýîïäïé áóöáëåßáò ôï êýêëùìá ● Ç ðïëëáðëÞ åêìÜèçóç ôïõ ßäéïõ åíåñãïðïéçôÞ
áóöáëåßáò êáé ç Ýîïäïò áíáããåëßáò ôçò ðüñôáò (OUT) óôçí ßäéá óõóêåõÞ åðåîåñãáóßáò äåí åßíáé
ôßèåôáé óå LOW. åöéêôÞ.
Ç êáôÜóôáóç ôùí åîüäùí áóöáëåßáò åðéôçñåßôáé ● Ï ìÝãéóôïò áñéèìüò ôùí åöáñìïæüìåíùí
åóùôåñéêÜ áðü äýï ìéêñïåðåîåñãáóôÝò (Ýîïäïò äéáäéêáóéþí åêìÜèçóçò óå ìßá óõóêåõÞ
çëåêôñïíüìïõ). åðåîåñãáóßáò ðåñéïñßæåôáé óôéò 8 öïñÝò.
Óå ðåñßðôùóç êÜðïéïõ åóùôåñéêïý óöÜëìáôïò ôçò ● ÔåëéêÜ óõóêåõÞ åðåîåñãáóßáò ìðïñåß íá
óõóêåõÞò åðåîåñãáóßáò äéáêüðôåôáé ôï êýêëùìá ëåéôïõñãåß ìüíï âÜóåé ôïõ åêÜóôïôå ôåëåõôáßïõ
áóöáëåßáò, ç Ýîïäïò äéÜãíùóçò (ERROR) ìåôáâáßíåé åíåñãïðïéçôÞ.
óå HIGH êáé ç Ýíäåéîç LED ERROR äåß÷íåé êüêêéíï öùò. ● Ìéá äéáäéêáóßá åêìÜèçóçò äåí åöáñìüæåôáé,
Óçìåßùóç: Ï ÷ñüíïò ðáñáìïíÞò åíüò åíåñãïðïéçôÞ üôáí:
åíôüò êáé åêôüò ôïõ ôïìÝá åíåñãïðïßçóçò ðñÝðåé íá - ç äéáäéêáóßá åêìÜèçóçò äéáêüðôåôáé ðñéí íá
áíÝñ÷åôáé ôïõëÜ÷éóôïí óå 0,5 äåõôåñüëåðôá, óâÞóåé ç ðñÜóéíç Ýíäåéîç LED,
äéáöïñåôéêÜ åßíáé äõíáôüí íá ìåôáâåß ç óõóêåõÞ - óôç äéÜñêåéá ôçò äéáäéêáóßáò åêìÜèçóçò
åðåîåñãáóßáò óôçí êáôÜóôáóç âëÜâçò êáé íá áíÜøåé äéáêüðôåôáé ç ôÜóç ôñïöïäüôçóçò.
ç êüêêéíç Ýíäåéîç LED ERROR. Ðñïóï÷Þ:
ÌÝóù äéáêïðÞò ôçò ôñïöïäüôçóçò ôçò ôÜóçò ç Áêüìá êáé ýóôåñá áðü ôçí üãäïç öïñÜ Þ óå
óõóêåõÞ åðåîåñãáóßáò åðáíÝñ÷åôáé óôçí êáôÜóôáóç ðåñßðôùóç åöáñìïãÞò åíüò "ðáëáéïý" åíåñãïðïéçôÞ
ëåéôïõñãßáò. óôçí êåöáëÞ áíÜãíùóçò ôï óýóôçìá ìåôáâáßíåé
Ëåéôïõñãßá åêìÜèçóçò ãéá ôïí åíåñãïðïéçôÞ áõôïìÜôùò óôç ëåéôïõñãßá åêìÜèçóçò. Êáé óôéò äýï
Ðñéí ôï óýóôçìá ó÷çìáôßóåé ìßá åíüôçôá ëåéôïõñãßáò, ðåñéðôþóåéò åêêéíåß ìßá äéáäéêáóßá åêìÜèçóçò
ï åíåñãïðïéçôÞò ðñÝðåé óå ìßá ëåéôïõñãßá åêìÜèçóçò äéÜñêåéáò 60 äåõôåñïëÝðôùí, üìùò ï ôåëåõôáßïò
íá ôáîéíïìçèåß óôç óõóêåõÞ åðåîåñãáóßáò. êùäéêüò åíåñãïðïéçôÞ ðáñáìÝíåé åíåñãüò óôç ìíÞìç
ÊáôÜ ôç äéÜñêåéá ìéáò äéáäéêáóßáò åêìÜèçóçò (âëÝðå ðéíáêßäá êáôÜóôáóçò), åíþ äåí åðéôåëåßôáé
âñßóêïíôáé ïé Ýîïäïé áóöáëåßáò êáé ç Ýîïäïò êáìßá ëåéôïõñãßá åêìÜèçóçò åíüò íÝïõ êùäéêïý.
áíáããåëßáò ôçò ðüñôáò óôçí êáôÜóôáóç LOW, äçë.
ôï óýóôçìá âñßóêåôáé óå áóöáëÞ êáôÜóôáóç.
Ba_T4000_gr.pmd 91 01.02.2005, 10:48

Ðéíáêßäá êáôÜóôáóçò óõóôÞìáôïò
SPS åíäåßîåéò LED ÊáôÜóôáóç

åßóï- Ýîïäïò
åíåñ-
ãïðïé-çôÞ / èýñáò
STATE (ðñÜóéíï)
KA, KB(Êýê-ëùìá
áíáâïóâÞ-íïõí
Çëåê-ôñïíü-ìïò
OUT (åíäåé-êôéêü
Áñéè-ìüò ðáë-
ERR (êüê-êéíï)
OUT (êßôñé-íï)
áóöá-ëåßáò)
ìþí ðïõ
ÈÝóç
óÞìá)
ERR
TST
ÊáíïíéêÞ ëåéôïõñãßá êëåéóôÞ on N 1 0 1 1 0 êáíïíéêÞ ëåéôïõñãßá, èýñá êëåéóôÞ
áíïéêôÞ off N 0 0 0 0 0 êáíïíéêÞ ëåéôïõñãßá, èýñá áíïéêôÞ
Åêêßíçóç áíáâïóâÞíåé åêêßíçóç ãéá ðñþôç öïñÜ ìåôÜ ôçí
áíïéêôÞ off N 0 0 ãéá 60 secìå 0 0 ðáñÜäïóç,ðñïåôïéìáóßá ãéá ôçí ðñþôç
ðåñßðïõ 1Hz äéáäéêáóßá åêìÜèçóçò
áíáâïóâÞíåé
êëåéóôÞ off N 0 0 ãéá 60 secìå 0 0 äéáäéêáóßá åêìÜèçóçò
ðåñßðïõ 1Hz
ÈåôéêÞ áíáãíþñéóç ãéá åðéôõ÷çìÝíç äéáäéêáóßá
êëåéóôÞ off N 0 0 0 0 0 åêìÜèçóçò. Ãéá ôçí êáíïíéêÞ ëåéôïõñãßá ç
óõóêåõÞ ðñÝðåé íá åíåñãïðïéçèåß åê íÝïõ.
Åíäåéîç x off x 0 0 3 0 0 Eíäåéîç ýóôåñá áðü 1 ùò 5 äéáäéêáóßåò åêìÜèçóçò
êáôÜóôáóçò
Eíäåéîç ôùí äéáäéêáóéþí åêìÜèçóçò ðïõ
x off x 0 0 2 0 0 åßíáé áêüìç åðéôñåðôÝò ìåôÜ ôçí 6ç
ìïíáäéêÞ äéáäéêáóßá åêìÜèçóçò
áêïëïõèßá
áíÜììáôïò - Eíäåéîç ôùí äéáäéêáóéþí åêìÜèçóçò ðïõ
x off x 0 0 óâçóßìáôïò 1 0 0 åßíáé áêüìç åðéôñåðôÝò ìåôÜ ôçí 7ç
ìåôÜ ôçí äéáäéêáóßá åêìÜèçóçò
åíåñãïðïßçóç
Ç óõóêåõÞ äåí ìðïñåß íá åêôåëÝóåé
x off x 0 0 0 0 0 Üëëåò äéáäéêáóßåò åêìÜèçóçò
Eíäåéîç óöÜëìáôïò x off N 0 1 0 0 1 áóôï÷ßá åîáñôÞìáôïò óôï åóùôåñéêü ôçò óõóêåõÞò Þ

åíåñãïðïéçôÞò óôçí ðåñéï÷Þ
x off N 0 1 0 0 1 áðüêñéóçò ëéãüôåñï áðü 0,5 sec
ÓöÜëìá ÷åéñéóìïý êëåéóôÞ off N 0 1 1 0 1 Ìç åðéôñåðüìåíç 9ç äéáäéêáóßá åêìÜèçóçò

âñá÷åßá
êëåéóôÞ off N 0 1 áêïëïõèßá
2 0 1 Äåí åðéôñÝðåôáé åêìÜèçóç ðáëáéïý
åíåñãïðïéçôÞ áíáâïóâÞìá- ÁñíçôéêÞ áíáãíþñéóç. Ï åíåñãïðïéçôÞò
ôïò ìå Ýìåéíå ìðñïò áðü êåöáëÞ áíÜãíùóçò
åðáíÜëçøç
êëåéóôÞ off N 0 1 ìåôÜ áðü 1 sec 3 0 1 ëéãüôåñï áðü 60 sec.
Ëåéôïõñãßá åëÝã÷ïõ áíïéêôÞ off 1 0 1 1 0 1
åî. äïêéìÞ óõóêåõþí óôï “ ÁÍÏÉÊÔÏ“ êáé

êëåéóôÞ off 1 0 1 1 0 1
ëåéôïõñãßá åîüäïõ ERR ìå êëåéóôÞ èýñá
N = 0 Volt Þ ìç êåíÞ 1 = öùôåéíü

0 = 0 Volt 0 = óêïôåéíü
1 = 24 Volt
x = 0 ç 24 Volt
äçë. áíïéêôÞ Þ êëåéóôÞ
Oäçãßá:
● ÔåëéêÜ ç ìç÷áíÞ åðåîåñãáóßáò ìðïñåß íá ëåéôïõñãåß ìüíï âÜóåé ôïõ åêÜóôïôå ôåëåõôáßïõ
åíåñãïðïéçôÞ ðïõ Ý÷åé ðåñÜóåé ôç äéáäéêáóßá åêìÜèçóçò.
Eëåã÷ïé êáé óõíôÞñçóç

ÐñïêåéìÝíïõ íá äéáóöáëéóèåß ìßá áðñüóêïðôç - ôç óôåãáíïðïßçóç ôçò åéóáãùãÞò ôïõ
êáé äéáñêÞò ëåéôïõñãßá, áðáéôïýíôáé ôáêôéêïß êáëùäßïõ óôïí áéóèçôÞñá.
Ýëåã÷ïé ùò ðñïò: - ôéò ÷áëáñÝò óõíäÝóåéò áãùãþí óôç óõóêåõÞ
- ôçí áóöáëÞ óôåñÝùóç ôïõ åíåñãïðïéçôÞ êáé åðåîåñãáóßáò,
ôïõ áéóèçôÞñá (÷ñçóéìïðïßçóç ôùí - ôïí Ýëåã÷ï ôçò áðüóôáóçò äéáêïðÞò.
óõíïäåõôéêþí êï÷ëéþí áóöáëåßáò)
Ba_T4000_gr.pmd 92 01.02.2005, 10:48

GR
Eëåã÷ïò ëåéôïõñãßáò (ÁõôïÝëåã÷ïò) Ïé Ýîïäïé áóöáëåßáò áðåíåñãïðïéïýíôáé êáé
Ýôóé äßíåôáé ç äõíáôüôçôá åëÝã÷ïõ ïëüêëçñïõ
Óôéò ðåñéðôþóåéò çëåêôñïìç÷áíéêþí äéáêïðôþí ôïõ êõêëþìáôïò áóöáëåßáò. Ùò ëåéôïõñãßá
áóöáëåßáò Þ ìáãíçôéêþí áéóèçôÞñùí ï Ýëåã÷ïò åðéôÞñçóçò ç Ýîïäïò äéÜãíùóçò ERR ôçò
ëåéôïõñãßáò åðéôõã÷Üíåôáé ìÝóù êõêëéêïý óõóêåõÞò åðåîåñãáóßáò ìåôáâáßíåé åðßóçò óå
áíïßãìáôïò ôçò ðñïóôáôåõôéêÞò äéÜôáîçò. HIGH.
ÊáôÜ ôçí åðáíáöïñÜ ôçò åéóüäïõ åëÝã÷ïõ ç
Áðü ôçí êáôçãïñßá åëÝã÷ïõ 2 êáé ýóôåñá ðñÝðåé Ýîïäïò äéÜãíùóçò ERR åðáíáöÝñåôáé áðü ôç
åðéôåëåßôáé Ýíáò Ýëåã÷ïò ëåéôïõñãßáò ôïõ óõóêåõÞ åðåîåñãáóßáò óôï LOW, ç êüêêéíç
óõíïëéêïý óõóôÞìáôïò áóöáëåßáò êáôÜ ôçí Ýíäåéîç LED óâÞíåé êáé åíåñãïðïéïýíôáé ðÜëé ïé
Ýíáñîç Þ ýóôåñá áðü ôéò êáèïñéóìÝíåò Ýîïäïé áóöáëåßáò. Ìå ôïí ôñüðï áõôü åßíáé
áðïóôÜóåéò óýìöùíá ìå ôï Åõñùðáúêü äõíáôüò ï áõôïÝëåã÷ïò ôïõ êõêëþìáôïò
Ðñüôõðï EN 60204-1 : 1997 (Kåö. 9.4.2.4). áóöáëåßáò ÷ùñßò ôï Üíïéãìá ôçò
ðñïóôáôåõôéêÞò äéÜôáîçò.
Ï Ýëåã÷ïò ôçò åóùôåñéêÞò ëåéôïõñãßáò ôïõ
áéóèçôÞñá áóöáëåßáò Ô 4000 äåí åßíáé
áðáñáßôçôïò, äéüôé ç óõóêåõÞ áõôïåðéôçñåßôáé
óå ðñáãìáôéêü ÷ñüíï. Ç óõãêüëëçóç ìéáò Áðïêëåéóìüò åõèýíçò
åðáöÞò åîüäïõ (Ýîïäïò çëåêôñïíüìïõ)
áíáãíùñßæåôáé áðü ôç óõóêåõÞ ôï áñãüôåñï Áðïêëåéóìüò åõèýíçò óôéò ðåñéðôþóåéò:
êáôÜ ôï åðüìåíï Üíïéãìá ôçò ðñïóôáôåõôéêÞò
äéÜôáîçò. ÅãêÜñóéï êýêëùìá ôïõ áãùãïý - ÷ñÞóçò ðïõ áíôéôßèåôáé óôïõò ïñéóìïýò,
åîüäïõ äåí áíáãíùñßæåôáé áðü ôç óõóêåõÞ. - áèÝôçóçò ôùí ïäçãéþí áóöáëåßáò,
ÅðéðëÝïí, åßíáé äõíáôüò ï Ýëåã÷ïò ïëüêëçñïõ - ôïðïèÝôçóçò êáé çëåêôñéêÞò óýíäåóçò áðü
ôïõ êõêëþìáôïò áóöáëåßáò ÷ùñßò ôï Üíïéãìá ìç åîïõóéïäïôçìÝíï ðñïóùðéêü,
ôçò ðñïóôáôåõôéêÞò äéÜôáîçò. Ðñïò ôï óêïðü - áëëüôñéáò åðÝìâáóçò.
áõôü ìå ôçí åöáñìïãÞ ôÜóçò 24 V DC óôçí ÄéÜãñáììá óýíäåóçò êáé ó÷Þìáôïò
åßóïäï åëÝã÷ïõ ãßíåôáé ðñïóïìïßùóç
áíïßãìáôïò ôçò ðñïóôáôåõôéêÞò äéÜôáîçò.
*)
ÔõðéêÞ ðåñéï÷Þ áðüêñéóçò (óå ìÞêïò áãùãïý 1 = 0 Ýùò 25 m)
ÐñïóÝîôå ôçí áóöáëÞ m ÊáôÜóôáóç åîüäïõ

áðüóôáóç s ar = 23 mm
ÅíåñãïðïéçôÞò
(âë. õðïäåßîåéò áóöáëåßáò ÕóôÝñçóç
áéóèçôÞñùí, ó. 98) s ON
OFF
Áðüóôáóç Sao Áðüóôáóç s
8 äéáêïðÞò
Áðüóôáóç s [mm]
ÕóôÝñçóç
OFF 6 OFF
Áðüóôáóç
óýíäåóçò Sao
2
ON
-8 -6 -4 -2 0 2 4 6 8
ÌÝóç ìåôÜèåóçò m [mm]
*)
Ãéá åëÜ÷./ìÝã. ôéìÝò âëÝðå Ôå÷íéêÜ äåäïìÝíá
Ba_T4000_gr.pmd 93 01.02.2005, 10:48


+ 24 V 0 V
DC
êáöÝ Üóðñï
H1 H2 SH ÁéóèçôÞñáò
24V 0V
DDSP
åíåñãïðïéçôÞò
Ëåéôïõñãßá ÷ùñßò åîùôåñéêü Ýëåã÷ï
CPU-A CPU-B Trans-

DDSP (ÄÄÄÁ): ponder
ÄéðëÞ äõíáìéêÞ äßïäïò
áóöáëåßáò ìå åðéôÞñçóç
óöÜëìáôïò ôïõ åíåñãïðïéçôÞ,
ôïõ áéóèçôÞñá êáé ôïõ
Åßóïäïò TST êåíÞ
êáëùäßïõ ãéá ôïí áéóèçôÞñá

KA KB
TST Åßóïäïò åëÝã÷ïõ
OUT ¸îïäïò áðüëõóçò (êáìßá åßóïäïò áóöáëåßáò)
ERR ÄéáãíùóôéêÞ Ýîïäïò (ERROR) [ËÁÈÏÓ]
GND 0V (åóùôåñéêÞ óýíäåóç ìå 0V ôçò ôÜóçò ë åéôïõñãßáò )
10kΩ H1/H2 Óýíäåóç áéóèçôÞñá
SH Óýíäåóç èùñÜêéóçò áéóèçôÞñá
10kΩ 13/14 Óýíäåóç åðáöÝá ôçò äéÜôáîçò êëåéóßìáôïò 1,
Áðüëõóç çëåêôñïíüìïõ áóöáëåßáò
TST OUT ERR GND 23/24 Óýíäåóç åðáöÝá ôçò äéÜôáîçò êëåéóßìáôïò 2,
Áðüëõóç çëåêôñïíüìïõ áóöáëåßáò
13 14 23 24
ÁóöÜëåéá SPS
ÊÁÍÁËÉ A
I0 åßóïäïò áóöáëåßáò
0V
TO0 Ýîïäïò ìå ÷ñïíéóìü
0V
Ðáñáäåßãìáôá óýíäåóçò
ÊÁÍÁËÉ B
I1 åßóïäïò áóöáëåßáò
ìå ÁóöÜëåéá SPS
0V
TO1 Ýîïäïò ìå ÷ñïíéóìü
0V
I2 åßóïäïé
I3
0V
O2 óôáôéêÞ
Ýîïäïò
Ba_T4000_gr.pmd 94 01.02.2005, 10:48

GR
ÓõóêåõÞ åðåîåñãáóßáò T 4000-1RBA 01
Ó÷Þìá ìå äéáóôÜóåéò
22,5 114,5
H1 H2 SH
24V 0V
STATE
99
OUT
ERROR
TST OUT ERR GND

13 14 23 24
êáôÜëëçëï ãéá óôÜíôáñô

ðëáßóéï 35 mm
ÓõìðåñéöïñÜ æåýîçò
2 Ýîïäïé áóöáëåßáò (Ýîïäïé çëåêôñïíüìùí) ÐñïóôáôåõôéêÞ äéÜôáîç
1 Ýîïäïò áíáããåëßáò ðüñôáò (Ýîïäïò
çìéáãùãïý, ÷ùñßò Ýîïäï áóöáëåßáò) êëåéóôÞ áíïé÷ôÞ
(åíåñãïðïéçôÞò (åíåñãïðïéçôÞò ü÷é óôïí
áíáãíùñßóèçêå) ôïìÝá åíåñãïðïßçóçò)
ÁéóèçôÞñáò Åíåñãï- ÁéóèçôÞñáò

ðïéçôÞ
13 14 13 14
23 24 23 24
24 V OUT 24 V OUT
Ba_T4000_gr.pmd 95 01.02.2005, 10:48

Ôå÷íéêÜ ÷áñáêôçñéóôéêÜ
ÐáñÜìåôñïò ÔéìÞ ÌïíÜäá
åëÜ÷éóôï ôõðéêü ìÝãéóôï
Õëéêü ðåñéâëÞìáôïò ðëáóôéêü PA6.6
ÄéáóôÜóåéò 114,5 x 99 x 22,5 mm
MÜæá 0,2 kg
Èåñìïêñáóßá ðåñéâÜëïíôïò óå UB = 24 V DC 0 - +55 °C
Èåñìïêñáóßá ðåñéâÜëëïíôïò -25 - +70 °C
Ôýðïò ðñïóôáóßáò IP20
Êáôçãïñßá ðñïóôáóßáò Êáôçãïñßá ðñïóôáóßáò ÉÉÉ, âáèìüò ëåñþìáôïò 2
ÏìÜäá õëéêïý II
EãêáôÜóôáóç Ðëáßóéï 35 mm óýìö. ìå DIN 46277
Áñéèìüò áéèçôÞñùí 1 áéóèçôÞñáò áíÜ óõóêåõÞ åðåîåñãáóßáò
Åßäïò óýíäåóçò åìâõóìáôþóéìïé áêñïäÝêôåò / êùäéêïðïéçìÝíïé
ÁêñïäÝêôåò 0,14 - 2,5 mm²
ÁêñïäÝêôåò UB
21 24 27 V DC
(ñõèìéæüìåíç, óôÜóéìï êýìá ôÜóçò < 5%)
ÊáôáíÜëùóç ñåýìáôïò (ìå ôñáâçãìÝíï çëåêôñïíüìï) 150 mA
¸îïäïé áóöáëåßáò 2 çëåêôñïíüìïé áóöáëåßáò áíÜ Ýíá äéáêüðôç
Ñåýìá æåýîçò (Ýîïäïé çëåêôñïíüìùí) 1)
- óå ôÜóç æåýîçò 0,1 ... 60 V 1 - 300 mA
- óå ôÜóç æåýîçò 10 ... 24 V 1 - 4000 mA
ÁóöÜëåéá åîùôåñéêÜ (êýêëùìá áóöáëåßáò) 6,3 A ãñÞãïñçò áäñÜíåéáò
Êáôçãïñßá ÷ñÞóçò óýìö. ìå EN 60947-5-2 AC-12 300mA 60V 50Hz / DC-12 300mA 60V
AC-140 2A 30V 50Hz / DC-13 4A 30V
Êáôçãïñßá åëÝã÷ïõ óýìö. ìå EN 954 3
Ôáîéíüìçóç óýìöùíá ìå IEC/EN 60 947-5-3 PDF-M
EðéìåôñéêÞ ôÜóç ìüíùóçò Ui - - 63 V
ÅðéìåôñéêÞ áíôï÷Þ óå áé÷ìÝò ôÜóçò Uimp - - 1,5 kV
Áíôï÷Þ áíôßóôáóçò Ýíáíôé êñáäáóìþí óýìöùíá EN 60 947-5-2
Ìç÷áíéêÜ ðáßãíéá æåýîçò 10 x 106
ÊáèõóôÝñçóç æåýîçò - - 180 ms
ÊáèõóôÝñçóç åðéöõëáêÞò 2) 3 s
ÄéÜñêåéá ðáñáìïíÞò 0,5 - - s
¸îïäïé áíáããåëßáò (äéÜãíùóç ERR, åðáöÞ
áíáããåëßáò OUT, Ýîïäïò çìéáãùãïý, æåýîç p) 3)
- ôÜóç åîüäïõ 0,8 x UB - UB V DC
- áíôï÷Þ - - 20 mA
Åßóïäïò åëÝã÷ïõ LOW 0 - 2 V DC
HIGH 15 - UB V DC
ÁðáéôÞóçò ðñïóôáóßáò çëåêôñ. óõìâáôüôçôáò óýìöùíá IEC 60947-5-3
Åíäåßîåéò LED STATE ðñÜóéíï LED: êáíïíéêÞ ëåéôïõñãßá
áíáâüóâçìá: åéôïõñãßá åêìÜèçóçò
OUT êßôñéíï LED: áíáãíþñéóç åíåñãïðïéçôÞ
ERROR êüêêéíï LED: - åíåñãïðïßçóç åéóüäïõ
åëÝã÷ïõ
- åóùôåñéêü óöÜëìá
çëåêôñïíéêïý êõêëþìáôïò
- Üêõñç ëåéôïõñãßá
åêìÜèçóçò
1)
Áí óôéò åîüäïõò çëåêôñïíüìùí óõíäåèåß ñåýìá æåýîçò > 300 mA, äåí åßíáé ðëÝïí äõíáôÞ ç áóöáëÞò æåýîç ìéêñïý ñåýìáôïò
(≤ 10 mA) ëüãù êÜøéìïõ ôùí åðáöþí ÷ñõóïý.
2)
ÌåôÜ ôï Üíïéãìá ôçò ëåéôïõñãéêÞò ôÜóçò êáôÜ ôçí êáèõóôÝñçóç åðéöõëáêÞò ïé Ýîïäïé çëåêôñïíüìùí åßíáé êëåéóôÝò êáé ç
åðáöÞ áíáããåëßáò âñßóêïíôáé óôï äõíáìéêü LOW.
3)
÷ùñßò ðñïóôáóßá Ýíáíôé âñá÷õêõêëþìáôïò
Ba_T4000_gr.pmd 96 01.02.2005, 10:48

GR
ÁéóèçôÞñåò T 4000-DNA...
ÁéóèçôÞñáò T 4000-DNA..P (ìå óôáèåñÜ óõíäåäåìÝíï áãùãü)
Ó÷Ýäéï äéáóôÜóåùí
ÌÞêïò áãùãïý l 42 12
ø4,5
ø8
T4000-D XXXXXX
25
32 ±0,1 4,6 åíåñãÞ
åíåñãÞ
åðéöÜíåéá
åðéöÜíåéá
ÊáôÜëçøç óýíäåóçò
ÁéóèçôÞñáò ìå áãùãü óýíäåóçò
ÈùñÜêéóç
BN ÁéóèçôÞñá
WH
H1 H2 SH
ÓõóêåõÞ
ÁéóèçôÞñáò T 4000-DNAC ìå âýóìá óýíäåóçò Ì8 (óõíäõáóìüò áóöÜëéóç/âßäùìá)

Ó÷Ýäéï äéáóôÜóåùí
32,6 42 12
6,8 32 ±0,1 4,6

ø8
ø4,5
ø10
T4000-DNACXXXXXX
25
åíåñãÞ
3 åðéöÜíåéá
4
åíåñãÞ 1
min.38 5,5
åðéöÜíåéá
ÊáôÜëçøç óýíäåóçò
ÁéóèçôÞñáò ìå âýóìá
WH ÈùñÜêéóç 3
4
BN 1
Ïøç âýóìáôïò
H1 H2 SH ôïõ áéóèçôÞñá
ÓõóêåõÞ
Ba_T4000_gr.pmd 97 01.02.2005, 10:48

ÐáñÜìåôñïò ÔéìÞ ÌïíÜäá
Õëéêü ðåñéâëÞìáôïò Fortron, èåñìïðëÜóôçò åíéó÷õìÝíïò ìå ßíåò ãõáëéïý,
ðëÞñùò ÷õôåõìÝíïò
ÄéáóôÜóåéò 42 x 25 x 12 mm
MÜæá (ìå 10 m êáëþäéï) 0,3 kg
ÈÝóç åãêáôÜóôáóçò êáôÜ ðñïôßìçóç
Ôñüðïò äñÜóçò åðáãùãéêÜ
ÄõíáìéêÞ ìåôÜäïóç äåäïìÝíùí óôç
2 kbit/s
óõóêåõáÞ åðåîåñãáóßáò
ÄéÜñêåéá ðáñáìïíÞò 1) 0,5 - - s
2)
ÔïìÝáò åíåñãïðïßçóçò óå ìÝóç ìåôÜèåóç m = 0
ÌÞêïò áãùãïý l = 0 Ýùò 25 m

- Áðüóôáóç æåýîçò Sao 5 6 -
- ÕóôÝñçóç æåýîçò 0,5 1,5 -
- ÁóöáëÞò áðüóôáóç äéáêïðÞò Sar - - 23 mm
ÌÞêïò áãùãïý l ≥ 25 Ýùò 50 m

- Áðüóôáóç æåýîçò Sao 4 4,8 -
- ÕóôÝñçóç æåýîçò 0,4 1,2 -
- ÁóöáëÞò áðüóôáóç äéáêïðÞò Sar - - 23
Ôñïöïäïóßá ôÜóçò ìÝóù óõóêåõÞò åðåîåñãáóßáò
Óýíäåóç áéóèçôÞñá T 4000-DNA..P êáëþäéï óôáèåñÞò ÷ýôåõóçò, ìå êáëýðôñåò óýñìáôïò
ÌÞêïò êáëùäßïõ áéóèçôÞñá T 4000-DNA..P 15 m
Óýíäåóç áéóèçôÞñá T 4000-DNAC Býóìá óýíäåóçò Ì8 (óõíäõáóìüò
áóöÜëéóç/âßäùìá) 3-ðïëéêü
ÌÞêïò êáëùäßïõ T 4000-DNAC - - 50 m
1)
×ñüíïò ðáñáìïíÞò åßíáé ï ÷ñüíïò óôïí ïðïßï ï åíåñãïðïéçôÞò ðñÝðåé íá âñßóêåôáé åíôüò Þ åêôüò ôçò ðåñéï÷Þò áðüêñéóçò.
2)
Ïé ôéìÝò áõôÝò éó÷ýïõí ãéá ìç äåóìéêÞ êáé äåóìéêÞ åãêáôÜóôáóç ôïõ áéóèçôÞñá êáé åíåñãïðïéçôÞ áëïõìéíßïõ.
Ïäçãßåò óõíáñìïëüãçóçò
● Ôï êáëþäéï óýíäåóçò ôïõ áéóèçôÞñá äåí åðéôñÝðåôáé íá åðéìçêõíèåß.

Äåí åðéôñÝðåôáé ç ÷ñÞóç åíäéÜìåóùí áêñïäåêôþí.
● Ï åíåñãïðïéçôÞò êáé ï áéóèçôÞñáò ðñÝðåé íá åßíáé ðñïóáñìïóìÝíïé Ýôóé, þóôå:

- ïé ìåôùðéêÝò åðéöÜíåéåò, âñßóêïíôáé áðÝíáíôé óå áðüóôáóç óýíäåóçò 0,8 x Sao Þ êïíôýôåñá,
üôáí ç ðñïóôáôåõôéêÞ äéÜôáîç åßíáé êëåéóôÞ (âëÝðå ôå÷íéêÜ ÷áñáêôçñéóôéêÜ),
- äåí ðñÝðåé íá ÷ñçóéìïðïéïýíôáé ùò ìç÷áíéêïß áíáóôïëåßò,
- óõíäÝïíôáé ìå åóùôåñéêÞ áóöÜëéóç ìå ôçí ðñïóôáôåõôéêÞ äéÜôáîç ð.÷. ìÝóù ÷ñçóéìïðïßçóçò
ôùí óõíïäåõôéêþí êï÷ëéþí áóöáëåßáò.
Oäçãßåò áóöáëåßáò
● Óå ðåñßðôùóç äåóìéêÞò åãêáôÜóôáóçò áéóèçôÞñá êáé/Þ åíåñãïðïéçôÞ, áëëÜæåé óå åîÜñôçóç

áðü ôï âÜèïò åãêáôÜóôáóçò êáé ôï õëéêü ôçò ðñïóôáôåõôéêÞò äéÜôáîçò ç áðüóôáóç äéáêïðÞò.
● Ïé äéáôÜîåéò ðñïóôáóßáò ðñÝðåé íá åßíáé êáôáóêåõáóìÝíåò Ýôóé, þóôå íá áðïôñÝðåôáé ï

êßíäõíïò ìÝ÷ñé ôçí áðüóôáóç Sar (áóöáëÞò áðüóôáóç äéáêïðÞò).
Ïäçãßá: Óôçí áóöáëÞ áðüóôáóç äéáêïðÞò Sar = 23 mm, ïé Ýîïäïé ôùí çëåêôñïíüìùí äéáêüðôïíôáé
ìå áóöÜëåéá, áêüìá êáé óå ðåñßðôùóç âëÜâçò åíüò åîáñôÞìáôïò.
Ba_T4000_gr.pmd 98 01.02.2005, 10:48

GR
ÅíåñãïðïéçôÞ T 4000-1KBA
Ó÷Þìá ìå äéáóôÜóåéò
42 12
ø4,5
ø8
T4000-1KBA 5306531
25
32 ±0,1 4,6
åíåñãÞ åíåñãÞ
åðéöÜíåéá åðéöÜíåéá
ÐáñÜìåôñïé ÔéìÞ ÌïíÜäá
Õëéêü ðåñéâëÞìáôïò Fortron, èåñìïðëÜóôçò åíéó÷õìÝíïò ìå ßíåò ãõáëéïý,
ðëÞñùò ÷õôåõìÝíïò
ÄéáóôÜóåéò 42 x 25 x 12 mm
ÌÜæá 0,02 kg
ÈÝóç åãêáôÜóôáóçò åíåñãÞ åðéöÜíåéá áðÝíáíôé áðü áéóèçôÞñá
ÄéÜñêåéá ðáñáìïíÞò 1) 0,5 – – s
1)
Ï ÷ñüíïò ðáñáìïíÞò åßíáé ï ÷ñüíïò, êáôÜ ôïí ïðïßï ï åíåñãïðïéçôÞò ðñÝðåé íá âñßóêåôáé åíôüò Þ åêôüò ôïõ ôïìÝá
åíåñãïðïßçóçò.
Ba_T4000_gr.pmd 99 01.02.2005, 10:48

Ba_T4000_gr.pmd 100 01.02.2005, 10:48

I
Istruzioni d’uso Sensore di sicurezza T 4000
Indice
Impiego conforme alle norme 102

Avvertenze per la sicurezza 102
Installazione 102
Collegamento elettrico 103
Descrizione del sistema 105

Funzioni di apprendimento dell’azionatore 105
Tabella di stato del sistema 106
Controllo e manutenzione 106
Verifica di funzionamento (controllo automatico) 107
Campo di risposta tipica 107
Esclusione di responsabilità 107
Caratteristiche tecniche 108

Schema di collegamento e diagramma
a blocchi, esempio di collegamento 108
Centralina T 4000-1RBA 01 109
Sensori T 4000-DNA... 111
Azionatore T 4000-1KBA 113
8 009 704/P076/25-01-05 • © SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germania • Tutti i diritti riservati 101
Ba_T4000_it.pmd 101 31.01.2005, 10:41

Impiego conforme alle norme Installazione
Il sensore di sicurezza T 4000 è un dispositivo tecnico L’installazione deve essere eseguita solo da
di protezione per la sorveglianza di ripari mobili. In tecnici autorizzati.
questo modo:
● Il sensore e l’attuatore devono essere facilmente
- i lavori pericolosi possono essere effettuati dalla accessibili per gli eventuali interventi di sostituzione
macchina solo con il dispositivo di protezione e di controllo.
chiuso;
- viene attivato il comando di stop se il dispositivo di ● Il processo di commutazione può essere attivato
protezione viene aperto mentre la macchina è in solo dall’apposito predisposto allo scopo.
funzione.
● Predisporre sensore e attuatore in modo che
Prima di impiegare dei sensori di sicurezza va - con il dispositivo di protezione chiuso le superfici
effettuata una valutazione dei rischi che la macchina frontali si trovino ad una distanza di lavoro minima
comporta in conformità a: di 0,8 x Sao o minore (vedere caratteristiche
tecniche).
- EN 954-1, Parti dei sistemi di comando legati alla - questi non vengano impiegati come dispositivi di
sicurezza, appendice C arresto meccanici.
- EN 1050, Sicurezza delle macchine, valutazione Nota: Applicare un dispositivo di arresto
del rischio meccanico per la parte mobile del riparo di
protezione.
Per un uso conforme alle norme è indispensabile il Attenzione: con montaggio incassato, la
rispetto di tutte le prescrizioni tecniche applicabili per distanza di commutazione si modifica in funzione
il montaggio ed il funzionamento, in particolare della profondità di montaggio e del materiale del
dispositivo di protezione.
- EN 954-1, Parti dei sistemi di comando legati alla - essi siano uniti al dispositivo di protezione con
sicurezza accoppiamento amovibile, p. es. utilizzando le
- EN 1088, Dispositivi di interblocco associati ai ripari. viti di sicurezza fornite alla consegna.
- EN 60 204-1, Equipaggiamento elettrico delle
macchine ● La centralina deve essere installata all’interno di
- EN 60 947-5-3 Requisiti per interruttori di prossimità un quadro elettrico con un grado di protezione di
con comportamento definito in condizioni di errore almeno IP 54. Per fissare la centralina su una barra
standard utilizzare l’elemento di arresto presente
sul retro dell’apparecchio.
Avvertenze per la sicurezza
● Se più dispositivi di rilevamento vengono montati
l’uno accanto all’altro in un quadro elettrico ad ar-
Il sensore di sicurezza T 4000 risponde ai seguenti madio senza circolazione d’aria (p. es. ventilato-
requisiti di sicurezza re), essi dovranno essere installati a 10 mm di di-
- Categoria di comando 3 secondo EN 954-1 stanza tra loro.
- Interruttore di prossimità con autoverifica tipo PDF- La distanza di montaggio consente che il calore
M secondo EN 60 947-5-3 delle centraline di rilevamento venga liberamente
- Interruttore di prossimità con controllo della commuta- dissipato.
zione tipo PDF-M secondo EN 60 947-5-3
- Il funzionamento della centralina di rilevamento è
in realizzazione ridondante e con autoverifica.
In tal modo il dispositivo di sicurezza rimane attivo
anche in caso di guasto di uno dei componenti.
- All’apertura o alla chiusura del dispositivo di
protezione avviene la verifica della corretta apertura
e chiusura dei relè del dispositivo di sicurezza.
I sensori di sicurezza adempiono delle funzioni di

protezione delle persone. Un montaggio improprio o
eventuali manipolazioni possono provocare lesioni
gravi.
102 8 009 704/P076/25-01-05 • © SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germania • Tutti i diritti riservati
Ba_T4000_it.pmd 102 31.01.2005, 10:41

I
Collegamento elettrico
Il collegamento elettrico va effettuato esclusivamente da personale tecnico autorizzato e addestrato in

EMC. L’installazione elettrica va esclusivamente eseguita in mancanza di tensione.
● I sensori di sicurezza non devono essere esclusi (contatti ponticellati), ruotati in posizione non efficace,
eliminati o resi inefficaci in un altro modo.
● Tutti i collegamenti elettrici devono essere isolati dalla rete mediante trasformatore di separazione
(IEC 742) o opportune misure di isolamento.
● Tutti i contatti di uscita, se impiegati con carichi capacitivi o induttivi, devono venir protetti con una circuita-
zione esterna adeguata.
● Predisporre la protezione esterna dei contatti (dispositivo di protezione 6,3 A rapido) per le uscite a relè.
Per la sicurezza si devono utilizzare obbligatoriamente entrambe le uscite di sicurezza (uscite relè)
13/14 e 23/24.
Ba_T4000_it.pmd 103 31.01.2005, 10:41

● Se la tensione di alimentazione è d’uso comune, Nota: I morsetti a spina codificati del dispositivo di
tutti i carichi induttivi e capacitivi (p.es. relé) colle- rilevamento agevolano la preparazione dei collega-
gati alla tensione di alimentazione devono essere menti rendendo possibile un’installazione finale sem-
cablati con appositi dispositivi antidisturbo. plice e rapida.
Inoltre, offrono la massima sicurezza anche nei casi
L’uscita di segnalazione ausiliaria OUT non deve di assistenza tecnica.
essere impiegata come uscita di sicurezza.
● Non è consentito prolungare il cavo di connessione

del sensore.
● La schermatura della linea del sensore (spelatura

max. di 3 cm) va collegata alla connessione SH
dell’unità di rilevamento.
● Le uscite di segnalazione ERR e OUT ed il morsetto

di collegamento della testina di lettura H1/H2 non
sono protetti dai corti circuiti.
● E, dopo l’applicazione della tensione di esercizio,

l’apparecchio non funziona (ad esempio il LED STA-
TE verde non si accende), è opportuno rispedire
l’apparecchio al produttore senza aprirlo.
● Per il materiale elettrico deve essere utilizzato solo

rame con una resistenza a temperature ≥ 75 °C.
● Le viti dei morsetti devono essere fissate con una Spie LED
coppia di serraggio di 0,6 - 0,8 Nm.
STATE LED verde Funzionamento normale
● Per l’impiego e l’utilizzo secondo le esigenze
deve essere utilizzata una tensione di alimentazio- Lampeg-
ne avente la caratteristica ”for use in class 2 cir- giante Ciclo di apprendimento (ve-
cuits”. dere la tabella degli stati per
Non utilizzare correnti ≥ 8 A ! ulteriore funzione di segnala-
zione)
OUT LED giallo Azionatore valido rilevato
ERROR LED rosso - Entrata test attivata

- Guasto interno
all’elettronica
- Ciclo di apprendimento
non valido (vedere tabella
degli stati)
In caso di un errore di manovra (ERROR) è possibile

resettare la centralina interrompendo la tensione di
alimentazione per almeno circa 10 secondi.
Ba_T4000_it.pmd 104 31.01.2005, 10:41

I
Descrizione del sistema Durante la procedura di apprendimento le uscite di
sicurezza e l’uscita di segnalazione ausiliaria sono su
Il sensore di sicurezza T 4000 è composto da tre LOW, vale a dire che lo stato del sistema è sicuro.
componenti:
● Funzione di apprendimento per il primo azionatore
- Azionatore codificato (stato al momento della consegna):
- Sensore 1.Applicazione della tensione di esercizio al disposi-
- Centralina di rilevamento tivo di rilevamento
- lampeggio veloce (circa 4 Hz) del LED verde
Al momento della consegna ogni azionatore possiede 2.Accostare l’attuatore al sensore
una propria codifica elettronica e rappresenta quindi (rispettare la distanza < Sao)
una copia unica per il sistema impiegato. Il codice, - il ciclo di apprendimento ha inizio, lampeggio
una volta programmato, non può essere modificato. lento (circa 1 Hz) del LED verde
3.Fine del ciclo di apprendimento (dopo 60 secondi)
Il sensore viene fissato alla parte fissa del dispositivo - il LED verde si spegne
di protezione ed è collegato al dispositivo di 4.Per attivare nella centralina di rilevamento il codice
rilevamento attraverso un cavo a due fili schermato. appreso dell’azionatore, interrompere la tensione
Alla chiusura della porta l’attuatore fissato al di esercizio al dispositivo di rilevamento per almeno
dispositivo di protezione viene accostato al sensore. 10 secondi.
Una volta raggiunta la distanza di lavoro,
l’alimentazione viene fornita all’attuatore attraverso il ● Funzione di apprendimento di un nuovo azionatore:
sensore induttivo e la trasmissione dei dati può essere 1.Applicazione della tensione di esercizio al
eseguita. dispositivo di rilevamento
Dopo aver letto lo schema dei bit, questo viene con- 2.Accostare l’attuatore nuovo al sensore
frontato con il codice memorizzato nella centralina di (rispettare la distanza < Sao)
rilevamento, se i dati corrispondono le uscite di sicu- - il ciclo di apprendimento ha inizio, il LED verde
rezza (uscite relé) vengono attivate e l’uscita di se- lampeggia (circa 1 Hz)
gnalazione ausiliaria OUT (uscita a semiconduttore) 3.Fine del ciclo di apprendimento (dopo 60 secondi)
viene parimenti commutata su HIGH. - il LED verde si spegne, il nuovo codice è
Grazie alla richiesta dinamica dell’azionatore e alla memorizzato, il vecchio codice disattivato
costruzione ridondante, diversificata del dispositivo 4.Per attivare nella centralina di rilevamento il codice
di sicurezza elettronico in abbinamento con due uscite appreso dell’azionatore, interrompere la tensione
di sicurezza, la centralina di rilevamento passa allo di esercizio al dispositivo di rilevamento per almeno
stato sicuro ogni qualvolta venga riconosciuto un 10 secondi.
errore.
All’apertura del dispositivo di sicurezza, le uscite di Nota:
sicurezza disinseriscono il circuito di sicurezza e ● Non è possibile eseguire più volte il ciclo di
l’uscita di segnalazione ausiliaria (OUT) commuta su apprendimento dello stessso azionatore con
LOW. Lo stato delle uscite di sicurezza viene lo stesso dispositivo di rilevamento.
controllato internamente da due contatti NC a guida ● I cicli di apprendimento possibili per un
forzata (uscita relé). dispositivo di rilevamento sono al massimo 8.
In caso di errore interno nella centralina di rilevamen- ● Il dispositivo di rilevamento può essere messo
to, si disinserisce il circuito di sicurezza, l’uscita per in funzione soltanto con l’azionatore con cui
diagnosi (ERROR) passa su HIGH e si accende il sia stato eseguito per ultimo il ciclo di appren-
LED rosso ERRORE. dimento.
● Un ciclo di apprendimento non è valido quando:
Indicazione: il tempo di permanenza di un azionatore - viene interrotto prima che si spenga il LED
fuori ed entro il campo d’intervento deve essere verde
almeno 0,5 sec., in caso contrario la centralina di - durante il ciclo viene interrotta l’ alimenta-
rilevamento passa allo stato di errore e si accende il zione.
LED rosso ERRORE. L’interruzione dalla tensione di
alimentazione ripristina lo stato operativo della Attenzione:
centralina di rilevamento. Anche dopo l’ottavo ciclo di apprendimento o quan-
do si accosta un „vecchio“ azionatore alla testina di
Funzioni di apprendimento dell’azionatore lettura, il sistema si pone nella modalità di apprendi-
mento. In entrambi i casi viene avviato un ciclo di
Prima che il sistema costituisca un’unità funzionante, è apprendimento di 60 secondi, l’ultimo codice
necessario far corrispondere l’azionatore al dispositivo dell’azionatore rimane tuttavia memorizzato (vedere
di rilevamento tramite la funzione di apprendimento. tabella di stato), non viene appreso nessun codice
nuovo.
Ba_T4000_it.pmd 105 31.01.2005, 10:41

Tabella di stato del sistema
SPS Spie LED Stato

Entr. Uscita
Pos. azionatore-
STATE (verde)
(cir. sicurezza)
segnalazione)
ERR (rosso)
OUT (giallo)
Relè KA, KB
OUT (Spia
lampeggi
Numero
porta
ERR
TST
Funzion. normale chiu. on N 1 0 1 1 0 Funzionamento normale, porta chiusa
aper. off N 0 0 0 0 0 Funzionamento normale, porta aperta
Messa in funzione lampeggio
Prima messa in funzione dopo la consegna
aper. off N 0 0 continuo 0 0
Pronto per il primo ciclo di apprendimento
4 Hz
lampeggio
chiu. off N 0 0 60 sec ca. 0 0 Ciclo di apprendimento
1 Hz
Conferma positiva del ciclo di apprendimento.
chiu. off N 0 0 0 0 0 Per il funzionamento normale il dispositivo
deve essere inserito nuovamente.
Segnalazione stato x off x 0 0 3 0 0 Segnalazione dopo il 1° sino al 5° ciclo di appr.
Segnalazione dei cicli di appr. ancora possibili

x off x 0 0 2 0 0
dopo il 6°
Unica serie
di lampeggi Segnalazione dei cicli di appr. ancora possibili
x off x 0 0 dopo 1 0 0
dopo il 7°
l’inseriment
Il dispositivo non può eseguire altri cicli di
x off x 0 0 0 0 0
apprendimento
Segnalazione x off N 0 1 0 0 1 Mancato funzionnamento dei componenti interni

errore al dispositivo oppure
x off N 0 1 0 0 1 Azionatore per meno di 0,5 sec nel campo di
risposta
Errore di manovra chiu. off N 0 1 1 0 1 9° ciclo di apprendimento non consentito
Brevi serie
chiu. off N 0 1 2 0 1 Ciclo di apprendim. di un vecchio azionatore non
di lampeggi
consetito
con
Conferma negativa del ciclo di apprendimento.
ripetizione
chiu. off N 0 1 3 0 1 L’azionatore è stato accostato davanti alla testina di
dopo 1 sec.
lettura per meno di 60 sec
Funzionamento aper. off 1 0 1 1 0 1
test Controllo dei dispositivi esterni su „APERTO“ e
chiu. off 1 0 1 1 0 1 funzione Uscita-ERR con la porta chiusa
N = 0 Volt o non inserito 1 = acceso
0 = 0 Volt 0 = spento
1 = 24 Volt
x = 0 o 24 Volt
porta aperta o chiusa
Nota:
● Il dispositivo di rilevamento può essere messo in funzione soltanto con l’azionatore con cui sia stato
eseguito per ultimo il ciclo di apprendimento.
Controllo e manutenzione
Per un funzionamento corretto e duraturo è neces- - la tenuta dell’ingresso del cavo con il sensore
sario verificare regolarmente: - i collegamenti allentati con la centralina
- la sicurezza del fissaggio dell’attuatore e del - il controllo della distanza di lavoro
sensore (utilizzando le viti di sicurezza fornite alla
consegna)
Ba_T4000_it.pmd 106 31.01.2005, 10:41

I
Verifica di funzionamento (controllo automatico) Vengono quindi disinserite le uscite di sicurezza il
che consente di controllare il completo circuito di
Negli interruttori di sicurezza elettromagnetici o sicurezza. La centralina di sicurezza commuta su
sensori magnetici la verifica del funzionamento può HIGH l’uscita di diagnosi ERR che assume cosi una
avvenire mediante l’apertura ciclica del dispositivo di funzione di segnalazione.
protezione. Al reset dell’ingresso di Test, la centralina di
rilevamento ricommuta l’uscita di diagnosi ERR su
A partire dalla categoria di sicurezza 2, in base alla LOW, il LED rosso si spegne e le uscite di sicurezza
norma EN 60204-1 : 1997 (Cap. 9.4.2.4) è necessario vengono nuovamente inserite. E’ così possibile
eseguire un controllo del funzionamento dell’intero effettuare l’autotest del sistema di sicurezza senza
sistema di sicurezza all’avviamento oppure ad dover aprire il dispositivo di protezione.
intervalli stabiliti.
Non è necessario effettuare la verifica della funzione Esclusione di responsabilità

interna del sensore di sicurezza T 4000 in quanto il
dispositivo è in grado di autocontrollarsi in tempo re- Si declina ogni responsabilità nel caso di:
ale. L’apparecchio identifica la saldatura di un contatto
d’uscita (uscita relé) al più tardi alla prossima apertura - Impiego del dispositivo non conforme alle norme
del dispositivo di protezione. L’apparecchio non è in - Mancato rispetto delle avvertenze per la sicurezza
grado di identificare un cortocircuito trasversale sul - Montaggio e collegamento elettrico effettuato da
cavo d’uscita. E’ inoltre possibile controllare il circuito personale non autorizzato
di sicurezza completo senza dover aprire il dispositivo - Impiego del dispositivo da parte di persone estrane
di protezione. A tale scopo viene simulata l’apertura
del dispositivo di protezione dando 24 V DC
all’ingresso di Test.
Campo di risposta tipica (con lunghezza del cavo I = da 0 a 25 m) *)
Osservate la distanza Stato di uscita

di sicurezza per il
m
disinserimento Azionatore Isteresi
sar = 23 mm s ON
(vedi note di sicurezza
dei sensori, pag. 112) Sensore
OFF
Distanza di Distanza s
8 Sao
disinserimento
Distanza s [mm]
Isteresi
OFF OFF
6
Distanza di
inserimento Sao
-8 -6 -4 -2 0 2 4 6 8
Disassamento medio m [mm]
*)
Per i valori min./max. consultare i dati tecnici
Ba_T4000_it.pmd 107 31.01.2005, 10:41

Schema di collegamento e diagramma a blocchi, esempio di collegamento
Connessione sensore
Collegamento schermatura sensore
Ba_T4000_it.pmd 108 31.01.2005, 10:41

I
Centralina T 4000-1RBA 01
Disegno in scala
22,5 114,5
H1 H2 SH
24V 0V
STATE
99
OUT
ERROR
TST OUT ERR GND

13 14 23 24
Adatto per la barra di

installazione standard di 35 mm
Funzionamento delle uscite

Dispositivi di sicurezza
2 uscite di sicurezza (uscite relé)
1 uscita di segnalazione ausillaria a semiconduttore Chiuso Aperto
non di sicurezza (riconosciuto azionatore) (azionatore fuori dal
campo d’intervento)
Sensore Azionatore Sensore
13 14 13 14
23 24 23 24
24 V OUT 24 V OUT
Ba_T4000_it.pmd 109 31.01.2005, 10:41

Caratteristiche tecniche
Parametro Valore Unità
min. standard max.
Materiale custodia Plastica PA6.6
Dimensioni 114,5 x 99 x 22,5 mm
Peso 0,2 kg
Temperatura ambiente a UB = 24 V DC 0 - +55 °C
Temperatura di immagazzinamento -25 - +70 °C
Grado di protezione IP20
Classe di protezione classe di potezione III, grado di inquinamento 2
Gruppo materiali II
Installazione su barra 35 mm secondo la norma DIN 46277
Numero di sensori 1 sensore per ogni dispositivo di rilevamento
Tipo di collegamento morsetti a vite / codificati
Sezione dei cavi 0,14 - 2,5 mm²
Tensione di esercizio UB
21 24 27 V DC
(ondulazione residua < 5 %)
Assorbimento (con relé eccitato) 150 mA
Uscite di sicurezza 2 relè di sicurezza, ognuno con un contatto NA
Corrente di uscita (relè) 1)
- Tensione di uscita 0,1 ... 60 V 1 - 300 mA
- Tensione di uscita 10 ... 24 V 1 - 4000 mA
Protezione esterna (circuito di sicurezza) 6,3 A rapido
Categoria di impiego secondo EN 60947-5-2 AC-12 300mA 60V 50Hz / DC-12 300mA 60V
AC-140 2A 30V 50Hz / DC-13 4A 30V
Categoria di comando a norma EN 954 3
Classificazione ai sensi IEC/EN 60 947-5-3 PDF-M
Tensione d’isolamento dimensionamento Ui - - 63 V
Tensione impulsiva dimensionamento Uimp - - 1,5 kV
Resistenza alle vibrazioni conforme alla norma EN 60 947-5-2
Cicli di commutazione meccanici (relè) 10 x 10 6
Tempo di razione - - 180 ms
Ritardo al’accensione 3) 3 s
Tempo di permanenza 0,5 - - s
Uscite di segnalazione a semiconduttore PNP
(diagnosi ERR,ausiliaria di segnalazione OUT) 4)
- tensione di uscita 0,8 x UB - UB V DC
- carico ammesso - - 20 mA
Entrata test LOW 0 - 2 V DC
HIGH 15 - UB V DC
Protezione EMV secondo la IEC 60947-5-3
Spie LED STATE LED verde: Funzionamento normale
lampeggiante: Ciclo di apprendimento
OUT LED giallo: Azionatore rilevato
ERROR LED rosso: - Entrata test attivata
1)
Se i relè di uscita hanno commutato in presenza di una corrente > 300 mA, i contatti con placcatura dorata non sono più in grado di pilotare
correnti (≤ 10 mA).
2)
Dopo aver inserito la tensione d’esericizio, durante il ritardo della fase di pronto, le uscite dei relè sono disinserite ed il contatto di segnalazione
porta è su potenziale LOW.
3)
Non protetto contro il cortocircuito.
Ba_T4000_it.pmd 110 31.01.2005, 10:41

I
Sensori T 4000-DNA...
Sensore T 4000-DNA..P (con cavo do collegamento)
Disegno quotato
Lunghezza linea l 42 12
ø4,5
ø8
T4000-D XXXXXX
25
32 ±0,1 4,6 superficie
superficie
attiva attiva
Disposizione dei collegamenti

Sensore con cavo di collegamento
Schermo
BN Sensore
WH
H1 H2 SH
Centralina
Sensore T 4000-DNAC con connettore M8 (variante combinata con collegamento a vite e ad innesto)
Disegno quotato
32,6 42 12
6,8 32 ±0,1 4,6

ø8
ø4,5
ø10
T4000-DNACXXXXXX
25
superficie
3 attiva
min.38 superficie 5,5 1

attiva
Disposizione dei collegamenti

Sensore con connettore
WH Schermo 3
4
BN 1
Vista del connettore
H1 H2 SH del sensore
Centralina
Ba_T4000_it.pmd 111 31.01.2005, 10:41

min. standard max.
Materiale della custodia Fortron, materiale termoplastico rinforzato in fibra di vetro,
interamente a tenuta
Dimensioni 42 x 25 x 12 mm
Peso (con cavo 10 m) 0,3 kg
Temperatura ambiente -25 - +70 °C
Posizione di installazione qualsiasi
Principio di funzinamento induttivo
Velocità di trasmissione dei dati
2 kbit/s
alla centralina
Tempo di permanenza 1) 0,5 - - s
Campo di risposta (disassamento medio m = 0) 2)
Lunghezza dei cavi l = da 0 a 25 m

- Distanza di lavoro Sao 5 6 -
- Isteresi 0,5 1,5 -
- Distanza di disinserim. sicuro Sar - - 23 mm
Lunghezza dei cavi l ≥ da 25 a 50 m

- Distanza di lavoro Sao 4 4,8 -
- Isteresi 0,4 1,2 -
- Distanza di disinserim. sicuro Sar - - 23
Alimentazione attraverso la centralina
Connessione sensore T 4000-DNA..P cavo di collegamento fisso con maricotto terminale
Lunghezza cavo sensore T 4000-DNA..P 15 m
Connessione sensore T 4000-DNAC connettore a spina M8 (con collegamento a scatti e a vite), 3 poli
Lunghezza cavo T 4000-DNAC - - 50 m
1)
Il tempo di permanenza è il tempo in cui l’attuatore deve trovarsi all’interno o all’esterno del campo di risposta.
2)
Questi valori valgono per un montaggio con aderenza o meno tra sensore e attuatore di alluminio.
Avvertenze per l’installazione

● Non è consentito prolungare il cavo di collegamento del sensore.
Non è consentito l’uso di morsetti intermedi.
● Predisporre sensore e attuatore in modo che:

- con il dispositivo di protezione chiuso le superfici frontali si trovino ad un intervallo di inserimento minimo
di 0,8 x Sao o minore (vedere dati tecnici).
- non vengano utilizzati come arresto meccanico.
- siano collegati in accoppiamento con il dispositivo di protezione, ad esempio utilizzando le viti di sicurezza
accluse.
Avvertenze per la sicurezza

● Se il sensore e/o l’attuatore sono montati in modo da essere aderenti, la distanza di commutazione si
modifica in funzione della profondità del montaggio e del materiale del dispositivo di protezione.
● Il dispositivo di protezione deve essere montato in modo da escludere ogni pericolo sino alla distanza Sar
(distanza di disinserimento sicuro.)
Nota: con la distanza di disinserimento sicuro Sar = 23 mm i relè di uscita sono sicuramente disinseriti,
anche nel caso di un guasto dei componenti interni.
Ba_T4000_it.pmd 112 31.01.2005, 10:41

I
Azionatore T 4000-1KBA
Disegno in scala
42 12
ø4,5
ø8
T4000-1KBA 5306531
25
32 ±0,1 4,6
superficie superficie
attiva attiva
min. standard max.
Materiale della custodia Fortron, materiale termoplastico rinforzato in fibra di vetro,
interamente a tenuta
Dimensioni 42 x 25 x 12 mm
Peso 0,02 kg
Posizione di installazione superficie attiva di fronte al sensore
Tempo di permanenza 1) 0,5 - - s
1)
Il tempo di permanenza è il tempo minimo in cui l’azionatore si deve trovare entro il campo di intervento.
Ba_T4000_it.pmd 113 31.01.2005, 10:41

Ba_T4000_it.pmd 114 31.01.2005, 10:41

N
Bruksanvisning Sikkerhetssensor T 4000
Innhold
Formålstjenlig bruk 116

Sikkerhetshenvisninger 116
Montasje 116
Elektrisk tilkopling 117
Systembeskrivelse 119
Læringsfunksjon for aktuator 119
System-tilstandstabell 120
Kontroll og vedlikehold 120
Funksjonskontroll (selvtest) 121
Typisk reaksjonsområde 121
Utelukket ansvar 121
Tekniske data 122

Koplings- og blokkdiagram 122
Vurderingsapparat T 4000-1RBA 01 123
Sensorer T 4000-DNA... 125
Aktuator T 4000-1KBA 127
8 009 704/P076/25-01-05 • © SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Tyskland • Med forbehold om alle rettigheter 115
Ba_T4000_no.pmd 115 31.01.2005, 10:50

Formålstjenlig bruk Montasje
Sikkerhetssensoren T 4000 er en sikkerhetsteknisk Montasjen må utelukkende gjennomføres av

innretning for overvåking av bevegelig skillende autoriserte personer.
beskyttelsesinnretninger slik at:
● Aktuator og sensor må være lett tilgjengelig for
- Farlige arbeider på maskinen bare kan utføres når kontroll- og utskiftingsarbeider.
beskyttelsesinnretningen er lukket.
- En stopp-kommando utløses når beskyttelsesinn- ● Koplingen må bare utløses av aktuatorer bestemt
retningen åpnes mens maskinen er i gang. for dette.
Før bruk av sikkerhetssensorer må det gjennomføres ● Aktuator og sensor må plasseres slik at

en risikovurdering på maskinen etter: - frontflatene ved lukket beskyttelsesinnretning er
overfor hverandre i minsteinnkoplingsavstand
- EN 954-1, Sikkerhetsrelaterte deler av styringer, 0,8 x Sao eller nærmere (se tekniske data).
tillegg C - de ikke benyttes som mekanisk stopper.
- EN 1050, Sikkerhet av maskiner, risikobedømmel- Henvisning: Monter ekstra stopper for beskyt-
se. telsesinnretningens bevegelige del.
OBS: Ved plan innbygging endres koplingsav-
Med til formålstjenlig bruk hører at det overholdes standen avhengig av innbyggingsdybden og
vedkommende krav for innbygging og drift, spesielt beskyttelsesinnretningens materiale.
- de formtilpasset er forbundet med beskyt-
- EN 954-1, Sikkerhetsrelaterte deler av styringer telsesinnretningen f.eks. ved bruk av vedlagte
- EN 1088, Forriglingsutstyr i forbindelse med sikkerhetsskruer.
skillende beskyttelsesinnretninger
- EN 60 204-1, Elektrisk utstyr av maskiner ● Vurderingsapparatet må bygges inn i et koplings-
- EN 60 947-5-3 Krav til nærbrytere med definert skap med en IP grad på minst IP54. For feste på
oppførsel under feilvilkår. en standardskinne benyttes et låseelement på
apparatets bakside.
Sikkerhetshenvisninger ● Ved montasje av flere vurderingsapparater ved

siden av hverandre i et koplingsskap uten
Sikkerhetssensoren T 4000 oppfyller følgende luftsirkulasjon (f.eks. ventilator) må en innbyg-
sikkerhetskrav gingsavstand på 10 mm mellom vurderings-
- Styringskategori 3 i henhold til EN 954-1 apparatene overholdes.
- Nærbryter med koplingsovervåking type PDF-M i Innbyggingsavstanden muliggjør at varmen
hht. EN 60-947-5-3. bortledes fritt fra vurderingsapparatene.
- Koplingen i vurderingsapparatet er bygget opp red-
undant med egendiagnose.
Sikkerhetsinnretningen blir derved virksom når en
komponent svikter.
- Ved åpning hhv. lukking av beskyttelsesinn-
retningen kontrolleres om sikkerhetsinnretningens
reléer åpner og lukker riktig.
Sikkerhetssensorer oppfyller personvernfunksjoner.

Ikke sakkyndig innbygging eller manipulasjoner kan
føre til alvorlige personskader.
116 8 009 704/P076/25-01-05 • © SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Tyskland • Med forbehold om alle rettigheter
Ba_T4000_no.pmd 116 31.01.2005, 10:50

N
Elektrisk tilkopling
Elektrisk tilkopling må utelukkende gjennomføres av autorisert, EMC-opplært fagpersonal. El-

installasjonen må kun utføres i en spenningsfri tilstand.
● Sikkerhetssensorer må ikke omgås (kontakter brokoples), dreies vekk, fjernes eller på annen måte gjøres
uvirksom.
● Alle elektriske forbindelser må enten ved en skilletransformator (IEC 742) eller ved likeverdige isolasjonstiltak
isoleres fra nettet.
● Alle utgangskontakter må ha en tilstrekkelig sikkerhetskopling ved kapasitive og induktive laster.
● Planlegg ekstern kontaktsikring (sikring 6,3 A kvikk) for reléutgangene.
For å garantere sikkerheten må begge sikkerhetsutgangene (reléutgangene) 13/14 og 23/24 absolutt

analyseres.
T4000-vurderingsapparat
Driftsspenning
+ 24 V 0 V
DC
Skjermtilkopling
brun hvit
Sensor
Kodet
13 14 23 24 aktuator
Trans-
ponder
Driftsspenning
+ 24 V 0 V
DC
Skjermtilkopling
brun hvit
Sensor
Kodet
13 14 23 24 aktuator
Trans-
ponder
Ba_T4000_no.pmd 117 31.01.2005, 10:50

● Ved bruk av felles spenningstilførsel må alle induk- Henvisning: De kodete klemmene som kan plugges
tive og kapasitive laster (f.eks. kontaktorer) koplet inn på vurderingsapparatet muliggjør at led-
til spenningstilførselen installeres med tilsvarende ningstilkoplingene kan prekonfeksjoneres og dermed
støydempere. enkel og rask sluttmontasje.
Utover det gir de også i servicetilfelle størst mulig
Dør-signalutgangen OUT må ikke benyttes sikkerhet.
som sikkerhetsutgang
● Sensorens forbindelseskabel må ikke forlenges.
● Skjermen til sensorledningen (max. 3 cm isoleres)

må forbindes med koblingen SH til vurderings-
enheten.
● Meldeutganger ERR og OUT og koplingsklemmene

for lesehodet H1/H2 er ikke kortslutningssikre.
● Hvis apparatet ikke viser funksjon etter at

driftsspenningen er lagt på (f.eks. grønn STATE-
LED lyser ikke), må apparatet sendes uåpnet
tilbake til produsenten.
● Som ledningsmateriale må bare kobber med

temperaturfasthet ≥ 75 °C benyttes.
● Koplingsklemmenes skruer må trekkes til med et

tiltrekningsmoment på 0,6 - 0,8 Nm.
● For anvendelse og bruk i hht. krav må LED display

spenningstilførselen med kjennetegnet «for use in
2 class circuits» benyttes. STATE LED grønn Normal drift
Strømmer ≥ 8 A er ikke tillatt! blinkende Læringsprosess
(ytterligere signalfunksjon se
tilstandstabell)
ERROR LED gul gyldig aktuator gjenkjent
ERROR LED rød - Testinngang aktivert

- Intern feil elektronikk
- Ugyldig læringsprosess
(se tilstandstabell)
Betjeningsfeilen (ERROR) kan ved å avbryte spen-

ningstilførselen - ca. 10 sekunder -sette vurderings-
apparatet tilbake til driftstilstanden.
Ba_T4000_no.pmd 118 31.01.2005, 10:50

N
Systembeskrivelse Læringsfunksjon for aktuator
Sikkerhetssensoren T 4000 består av tre kompo- Før systemet danner en funksjonsenhet må aktuatoren i
nenter: en læringsfunksjon tilordnes vurderingsapparatet.
Under læringsprosessen er sikkerhetsutgangene og
- Kodet aktuator dør-meldeutgangen på LOW, dvs. systemet befinner
- Sensor seg i sikker tilstand.
- Vurderingsapparat
● Læringsfunksjon for første aktuator (tilstand ved
Hver utlevert aktuator har en entydig elektronisk utlevering):
koding og finnes bare en gang i det benyttede 1. Legg driftsspenning på vurderingsapparatet
systemet. Koden til aktuatoren kan ikke omprogram- - rask blinking (ca. 4 Hz) på grønn LED
meres. 2. Aktuator føres mot sensoren
(pass på avstand < Sao )
Sensoren festes til beskyttelsesinnretningens - Læringsprosess begynner, langsom blinking (ca.
stasjonære del og er via en totrådet skjermet kabel 1 Hz) på grønn LED
forbundet med vurderingsapparatet. 3. Læringsprosess avsluttet (etter 60 sekunder)
Aktuatoren som er festet til beskyttelsesinnretningen - grønn LED slukner
føres mot sensoren når døren lukkes. 4. For å aktivere den opplærte koden til aktuatoren i
Når innkoplingsavstanden er nådd tilføres aktuatoren vurderingsapparatet må driftsspenningen på
spenning via den induktive sensoren og data- vurderingsapparatet deretter koples ut i min.
overføringen kan settes i gang. 10 sekunder.
Det innleste bitmønster sammenlignes med den lag-
rede koden i vurderingsapparatet, hvis dataene ● Læringsfunksjon for ny aktuator:
stemmer overens frigis sikkerhetsutgangene 1. Legg driftsspenning på vurderingsapparatet
(reléutgang) og dør-meldeutgangen OUT (halv- 2. Ny aktuator føres mot sensoren (pass på avstand
lederutgang) settes likeledes på HIGH. < Sao )
Ved hjelp av den den dynamiske utspørringen av - Læringsprosess begynner, grønn LED blinker
aktuatoren og den redundante, ulike struktur av (ca. 1 Hz)
sikkerhetselektronikken i forbindelse med to 3. Læringsprosess avsluttet (etter 60 sekunder)
sikkerhetsutganger går vurderingsapparatet ved hver - grønn LED slukner, ny kode lagret, gammel kode
tydelig feil over til sikker tilstand. deaktivert
Når beskyttelsesinnretningen åpnes kopler sikker- 4. For å aktivere den opplærte koden til aktuatoren i
hetskretsens sikkerhetsutgangene ut og dør-meldeut- vurderingsapparatet må driftsspenningen på
gangen (OUT) koples til LOW. vurderingsapparatet deretter koples ut i min.
Sikkerhetsutgangenes tilstand overvåkes internt via 10 sekunder.
tvangsstyrte NC-kontakter (reléutgang). Ved en in-
tern feil i vurderingsapparatet koples sikker-
hetskretsen ut, diagnoseutgangen (ERROR) settes Henvisning:
på HIGH og ERROR LED lyser rødt. ● Det er ikke mulig med opplæring av samme
aktuator på samme vurderingsapparat flere
Henvisning: Oppholdstiden til aktuator innenfor og ganger.
utenfor responsområdet skal værings minst ● Antall gyldige læringsprosesser på et vurder-
0,5 sekunder. Vurderingsapparatet kan ellers gå over ingsapparat er begrenset til maksimalt 8.
til feiltilstand og ERROR LED lyser rødt. ● Vurderingsapparatet kan kun benyttes med den
Ved å avbryte spenningstilførselen settes vurderings- henholdsvis sist opplærte aktuatoren.
apparatet tilbake til driftstilstand. ● Læringsprosessen er ugyldig når:
- Læringsprosessen avbrytes før den grønne
LEDen slukner
- forsyningsspenningen utkoples under lærings-
prosessen
OBS:
Også etter den 8. læringsprosessen eller ved
installering av en «gammel» aktuator på lesehodet
går systemet automatisk over til læringsmodus. I
begge tilfeller innledes en læringsprosess med
60 sekunders varighet, den siste aktuatorkoden forblir
imidlertid aktiv i minnet (se tilstandstabell), det læres
ingen ny kode.
Ba_T4000_no.pmd 119 31.01.2005, 10:50

System-tilstandstabell
SPS LED-indikator Tilstand

Inn- Utgang
OUT (meldesignal)
blinkeimpulser
STATE (grønn)
Sikkerhetsut-
gang A og B
dørstilling
Aktuator-/
ERR (rød)
OUT (gul)
Antall
ERR
TST
Normal drift stengt på N 1 0 1 1 0 Normal drift, dør stengt
åpen av N 0 0 1 0 0 Normal drift, dør åpen
Idriftsettelse blinker
Første idriftsettelse etter utlevering
åpen av N 0 0 kontinuerlig 0 0
Klar for første læringsprosess
med 4 Hz
blinker 60 s
stengt av N 0 0 0 0 Læringsprosess
med ca. 1 Hz
Positiv-kvittering for vellykket læringsprosess

stengt av N 0 0 0 0 0 For normal drift må apparatet koples inn på nytt
Statusindikering x av x 0 0 3 0 0 Indikering etter 1. til 5. læringsprosess
Indikering av læringsprosesser som ennå er etter

x av x 0 0 2 0 0
tillatt 6. læringsprosessen
Engangs
blinke- Indikering av læringsprosesser som ennå er tillatt
x av x 0 0 sekvens 1 0 0
etter 7. læringsprosessen
etter
innkopling Apparat kan ikke gjennomføre en ytterligere
x av x 0 0 0 0 0
læringsprosess
Feilindikasjon
apparatintern svikt av komponenter
x av N 0 1 0 0 1 eller
aktuator kortere enn 0,5 s i responsområde
Betjeningsfeil stengt av N 0 1 Korte 1 0 1 Ikke tillatt 9. læringsprosess

stengt av N 0 1 blinke- 2 0 1 Ikke tillat læringsprosess av en gammel aktuator
sekvenser
med Negativ-kvittering for læringsprosess. Aktuator
stengt av N 0 1 gjentagelse 3 0 1
etter 1 s holdt kortere enn 60 s foran lesehode
Prøvedrift åpen av 1 0 1 1 0 1
ekst. apparat-test for «ÅPEN» og funksjon

stengt av 1 0 1 1 0 1
ERR-utgang ved lukket dør
N = 0 volt eller ikke installert 1 = lys

0 = 0 Volt 0 = mørk
1 = 24 Volt
x = 0 eller 24 Volt
hhv. dør åpen eller stengt
Henvisning:
● Vurderingsapparatet kan bare brukes sammen med den sist opplærte aktuator.
Kontroll og vedlikehold
For å garantere feilfri og kontinuerlig funksjon er - tetthet av kabelinnføring på sensoren

regelmessige kontroller nødvendig for: - løsnete ledningstilkoplinger på vurderingsapparatet
- sikkert feste av aktuator og sensor (bruk av vedlagte - kontroll av utkoplingsavstand
sikkerhetsskruer)
Ba_T4000_no.pmd 120 31.01.2005, 10:50

N
Funksjonskontroll (selvtest) Sikkerhetsutgangene koples ut og dermed er det
mulig å teste hele sikkerhetskretsen.
Ved elektromagnetiske sikkerhetsbrytere eller Som overvåkingsfunksjon settes diagnoseutgangen
magnetsensorer kan funksjonskontrollen gjennom- ERR igjen tilbake til LOW, den røde LED slukner og
føres ved syklisk åpning av beskyttelsesinnretningen. sikkerhetsutgangene koples inn igjen. Selvtest av
sikkerhetssystemet er dermed mulig uten å åpne
Fra styringskategori 2 må i samsvar med EN 60204-1 : beskyttelsesinnretningen.
1997 (kap. 9.4.2.4) funksjonskontrollen av hele
sikkerhetssystemet foretas ved start eller etter
bestemte avstander. Utelukket ansvar
Kontrollen av den interne funksjonen til sikker- Ansvaret er utelukket ved:

hetssensoren T 4000 er ikke nødvendig fordi
apparatet overvåker seg selv i sanntid. Når ut- - ikke formålstjenlig bruk
gangskontakten (reléutgang) sveises sammen - når sikkerhetshenvisningene ikke overholdes
registrerer apparatet dette ved neste åpning av - montasje og elektrisk tilkopling av ikke autoriserte
beskyttelsesinnretningen. Utgangsledningens personer
tverrforbindelse gjenkjenens ikke av apparatet. Utover - inngrep av fremmede
det kan hele sikkerhetskretsen testes uten å åpne
beskyttelseinnretningen.Ved å legge på 24 V DC på
testinngangen simuleres at beskyttelsesinnretningen
åpner.
Typisk reaksjonsområde (ved en ledningslengde på l = 0 til 25 m) *)
Pass på sikker m Utgangstilstand

utkoplingsavstand
sar = 23 mm Aktuator Hysterese
(se sikkerhetsinformasjoner s PÅ
for sensorer, side 126)
Sensor
AV
Utkoplingsavstand Sao Avstand s
8
Hysterese
Avstand s [mm]
AV 6 AV
Innkoplings-
avstand Sao
2
PÅ
-8 -6 -4 -2 0 2 4 6 8
Forskyvning i midten m [mm]
*)
Min.-/max. verdier se Tekniske data
Ba_T4000_no.pmd 121 31.01.2005, 10:50

Koplings- og blokkdiagram
Driftsspenning
+ 24 V 0 V
DC
Skjermtilkopling
brun hvit
Sensor
Kodet
aktuator
CPU-A CPU-B Trans-
TST-inngang ikke tilkoplet
Safety Path): Dobbelt

Drift uten ekstern testing
Dynamisk Sikkerhets
Path med feil-overvåking
av aktuator, sensor og
KA KB kabel til sensoren
TST Testinngang
OUT Dør-meldeutgang (ikke sikkerhetsutgang)
10kW
ERR Diagnoseutgang
10kW GND 0V (internt forbundet med driftsspenningens 0V)
H1/H2 Tilkopling sensor
SH Skjermtilkopling sensor
13/14 Tilkopling NO-kontakt 1, frigivelse sikkerhetsrelé
23/24 Tilkopling NO-kontakt 2, frigivelse sikkerhetsrelé
Sikkerhets - SPS
KANAL A
I0 sikkerhets-inngang
0V
TO0 taktstyrt utgang
0V
Koplingseksempel med
KANAL B
I1 sikkerhets-inngang
sikkerhet s - SPS
0V
TO1 taktstyrt utgang
0V
I2 innganger
I3
0V
O2 statisk utgang
Ba_T4000_no.pmd 122 31.01.2005, 10:50

N
Vurderingsapparat T 4000-1RBA 01
Målskisse
22,5 114,5
H1 H2 SH
24V 0V
STATE
99
OUT
ERROR
TST OUT ERR GND

13 14 23 24
passende for
standard-skinne 35 mm
Koplingsfunksjon
Beskyttelsesinnretning
2 sikkerhetsutganger (reléutganger)
1 dør-meldeutgang (halvlederutgang, ikke sikkerhets- stengt åpen
utgang) (aktuator registrert) (aktuator ikke
i responsområde)
sensor aktuator sensor
13 14 13 14
23 24 23 24
24 V OUT 24 V OUT
Ba_T4000_no.pmd 123 31.01.2005, 10:50

Tekniske data
Parameter Verdi Enhet
min. typ. maks.
Husmateriale kunststoff PA6.6
Dimensjoner 114,5 x 99 x 22,5 mm
Masse 0,2 kg
Arbeidstemperatur ved UB = 24 V DC 0 - +55 °C
Lagringstemperatur -25 - +70 °C
IP grad IP20
Fareklasse Fareklasse III, tilsmussingsgrad 2
Materialgruppe II
Montasje Skinne 35 mm ifølge DIN 46277
Antall sensorer 1 sensor pr. vurderingsapparat
Tilkoplingsmåte skruklemmer som kan plugges inn / kodet
Tilkoplingsklemmer 0,14 - 2,5 mm²
Driftsspenning UB
21 24 27 V DC
(polaritetssikker, regulert, rippel < 5 %)
Strømforbruk (ved tiltrukket relé) 150 mA
Sikkerhetsutganger 2 sikkerhetsreléer med hhv. en NO-kontakt
Koplingsstrøm (reléutganger) 1)
- ved koplingsspenning 0,1 ... 60 V 1 - 300 mA
- ved koplingsspenning 10 ... 24 V 1 - 4000 mA
Sikring ekstern (sikkerhetskrets) 6,3 A kvikk
Brukskategori ifølge EN 60947-5-2 AC-12 300mA 60V 50Hz / DC-12 300mA 60V
AC-140 2A 30V 50Hz / DC-13 4A 30V
Styringskategori ifølge EN 954 3
Klassifikasjon ifølge IEC/EN 60 947-5-3 PDF-M
Beregnet isolasjonsspenning Ui - - 63 V
Beregnet støtspenningsfasthet Uimp - - 1,5 kV
Motstandsevne mot vibrasjoner tilsvarende EN 60 947-5-2
Mekanisk koplingshysterese (relé) 10 x 10 6
Koplingsforsinkelse fra tilstandsendring - - 180 ms
Beredskapsforsinkelse 2) 3 s
Oppholdstid 0,5 - - s
Meldeutganger (diagnose ERR, dør-melde-
kontakt OUT, halvlederutgang, p-koplende) 3)
- Utgangsspenning 0,8 x UB - UB V DC
- Belastningskapasitet - - 20 mA
Testinngang LOW 0 - 2 V DC
HIGH 15 - UB V DC
EMV-krav til beskyttelse ifølge IEC 60947-5-3
LED-indikatorer STATE LED grønn: Normal drift
blinkende: Læringsprosess
OUT LED gul: Aktuator gjenkjent
ERROR LED rød: - Testinngang aktivert
- Intern feil elektronikk
- Ugyldig læringsprosess
1)
Hvis det en gang koples koplingsstrøm på > 300 mA via reléutgangene, kan lavspenningen (≤ 10 mA) ikke lenger koples sikkert fordi
gullkontaktene er brent vekk.
2)
Etter innkopling av driftsspenningen er reléutgangene koplet ut under beredskapsforsinkelsen og dør-meldekontakten på LOW-potensial.
3)
Ikke kortslutningssikker.
Ba_T4000_no.pmd 124 31.01.2005, 10:50

N
Sensorer T 4000-DNA...
Sensor T 4000-DNA..P (med fast tilkoplet ledning)
Måltegning
Ledningslengde I 42 12
ø4,5
ø8
T4000-D XXXXXX
25
32 ±0,1 aktiv 4,6 aktiv
flate flate
Pin-konfigurasjon
Sensor med forbindelseskabel
Skjerm
BN Sensor
WH
H1 H2 SH
Vurderingsapparat
Sensor T 4000-DNAC med pluggkontakt M8 (kombinasjonsvariant med låse- og skrukobling)

Måltegning
32,6 42 12
6,8 32 ±0,1 4,6

ø8
ø4,5
ø10
T4000-DNACXXXXXX
25
aktiv
3 flate
4
aktiv 1
min.38 5,5
flate
Pin-konfigurasjon
Sensor med pluggkontakt
WH Skjerm 3
4
BN 1
Oppriss på
H1 H2 SH pluggkontakten til
sensoren
Vurderingsapparat
Ba_T4000_no.pmd 125 31.01.2005, 10:50

Tekniske data
min. typ. maks.
Husmateriale Fortron, glassfiberarmert termoplast, støpt i ett stykke
Dimensjoner 42 x 25 x 12 mm
Masse (inkl. 10 m ledning) 0,3 kg
IP grad IP67
Monteringsposisjon etter ønske
Virkemåte induktiv
Dynamisk dataoverføring
2 kbit/s
til vurderingsapparat
Oppholdstid 1) 0,5 - - s
Responsområde ved feiljustering m = 0 2)
Ledningslengde l = 0 til 25 m
- Innkoplingsavstand Sao 5 6 -
- Koplingshysterese 0,5 1,5 -
- Sikker utkoplingsavstand Sar - - 23 mm
Ledningslengde l ≥ 25 til 50 m
- Innkoplingsavstand Sao 4 4,8 -
- Koplingshysterese 0,4 1,2 -
- Sikker utkoplingsavstand Sar - - 23
Spenningsforsyning via vurderingsapparat
Tilkopling sensor T 4000-DNA..P fast støpt forbindelseskabel, med endemuffer for kordeler
Ledningslengde sensor T 4000-DNA..P 15 m
Tilkopling sensor T 4000-DNAC pluggkontakt M8 (med fjær- og skruklemme), 3-polet
Ledningslengde T 4000-DNAC - - 50 m
1)
Oppholdstiden er tiden aktuatoren må befinne seg inne i eller utenfor reaksjonsområdet.
2)
Disse verdiene gjelder for plan eller ikke plan innbygging av sensoren og aktuatoren i aluminium.
Montasjehenvisninger
● Forbindelseskabelen til sensoren må ikke forlenges.

Mellomklemmer må ikke benyttes.
● Aktuator og sensor må plasseres slik at:

- De aktive flatene (frontflater) ved stengt beskyttelsesinnretning ligger overfor hverandre med
innkoplingsavstand 0,8 x Sao eller nærmere (se tekniske data).
- De ikke benyttes som mekanisk stopper.
- De formtilpasset er forbundet med beskyttelsesinnretningen f.eks. ved bruk av vedlagte sikkerhetsskruer.
Sikkerhetshenvisninger
● Ved plan innbygging av sensoren og/eller aktuator endres koplingsavstanden avhengig av innbyggingsdybde
og beskyttelsesinnretningens materiale.
● Beskyttelsesinnretningen må være konstruert slik at fare er utelukket inntil avstand S ar (sikker

utkoplingsavstand).
Henvisning: Ved sikker utkoplingsavstand Sar = 23 mm er reléutgangene koplet ut sikkert, også ved intern
svikt av en komponent.
Ba_T4000_no.pmd 126 31.01.2005, 10:50

N
Aktuator T 4000-1KBA
Målskisse
42 12
ø4,5
ø8
T4000-1KBA 5306531
25
32 ±0,1 4,6
aktiv aktiv
flate flate
Tekniske data
min. typ. maks.
Husmateriale Fortron, glassfiberarmert termoplast, støpt i ett stykke
Dimensjoner 42 x 25 x 12 mm
Masse 0,02 kg
Omgivelsestemperatur -25 – +70 °C
IP grad IP67
Monteringsposisjon aktiv flate overfor sensoren
Oppholdstid 1) 0,5 – – s
1)
Oppholdstiden er den tiden som aktuatoren må være innenfor eller utenfor responsområdet.
Ba_T4000_no.pmd 127 31.01.2005, 10:50

Ba_T4000_no.pmd 128 31.01.2005, 10:50

NL
Gebruiksaanwijzing Veiligheidssensor T 4000
Inhoud
Reglementaire toepassing 130

Veiligheidsaanwijzingen 130
Montage 130
Elektrische aansluiting 131
Systeembeschrijving 133
Leerfunctie voor bediener 133
Systeem-toestandstabel 134
Controle en onderhoud 134
Functiecontrole (zelftest) 135
Typisch reactiebereik 135
Uitsluiting van de aansprakelijkheid 135
Technische gegevens 136

Aansluitings- en blokschakelbeeld,
aansluitvoorbeeld 136
Evaluatietoestel T 4000-1RBA 01 137
Sensoren T 4000-DNA... 139
Bediener T 4000-1KBA 141
8 009 704/P076/25-01-05 • © SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Duitsland • Alle rechten voorbehouden 129
Ba_T4000_nl.pmd 129 31.01.2005, 10:45

Reglementaire toepassing Montage
De veiligheidssensor T 4000 is een veiligheids- De montage mag uitsluitend door geautori-

technische inrichting ter controle van beweeglijk schei- seerd personeel worden uitgevoerd.
dende veiligheidsinrichtingen zodat:
● De activator en de sensor moeten voor controle-
- gevaarlijke werkzaamheden aan de machine alleen en vervangingswerkzaamheden gemakkelijk
uitgevoerd kunnen worden wanneer de veiligheid- toegankelijk zijn.
sinrichting gesloten is.
- er een Stop-commando wordt gegeven als de ● Het schakelproces mag alleen door speciaal hier-
veiligheidsinrichting bij lopende machine geopend voor bestemde bedieners geactiveerd worden.
wordt.
● De activator en de sensor moeten zodanig
Voordat u veiligheidssensoren gaat gebruiken, dient aangebracht worden dat
u een risicibeoordeling aan de machine te verrichten - de kopvlakken bij gesloten veiligheidsinrichting
en wel volgens: op een minimum afstand van 0,8 x Sao of dichter-
bij (zie technische gegevens) tegenover elkaar
- EN 954-1, veiligheidsrelevante delen van bestu- liggen.
ringen, bijlage C - zij niet als mechanische aanslag gebruikt wor-
- EN 1050, Veiligheid van machines, risicobeoorde- den.
ling Aanwijzing: Extra aanslag voor beweeglijke deel
van de veiligheidsinrichting aanbrengen.
Tot de reglementaire toepassing hoort het opvolgen - bij de vlakke montage verandert de
van de betreffende eisen voor de inbouw en de wer- schakelafstand afhankelijk van de inbouwdiepte
king, in het bijzonder en het materiaal van de veiligheidsinrichting.
- deze vormgesloten met de veiligheidsinrichting
- EN 954-1, Veiligheidsrelevante onderdelen van verbonden zijn, bijv. door de toepassing van de
besturingen bijgesloten veiligheidsschroeven.
- EN 1088, Vergrendelingsinrichtingen in combina-
tie met scheidende veiligheidsinrichtingen ● Het evaluatietoestel moet in een scahkelkast met
- EN 60 204-1, Elektrische uitrustingen van een beschermklasse van tenminste IP 54 wordne
machines. ingebouwd. Voor de bevestiging op een standaard-
- EN 60 947-5-3 Eisen aan benaderingsschakelaars rail dient een vergrendelingselement aan de ach-
met gedefinieerd gedrag onder storingsomstan- terkant van het apparaat.
digheden.
● Bij de montage van meerdere evaluatietoestellen
naast elkaar in een schakelkast zonder
Veiligheidsaanwijzingen luchtcirculatie (bijv. ventilator) moet tussen de
evaluatietoestellen een montageafstand van 10 mm
De veiligheidssensor T 4000 voldoet aan de volgende worden aangehouden.
veiligheidseisen De inbouwafstand maakt een ongehinderde afvoer
- Besturingscategorie 3 overeenkomstig EN 954-1 van warmte uit de analyse-apparaten mogelijk.
- Benaderingsschakelaar met zelfbewaking type
PDF-M overeenkomstig EN 60 947-5-3.
(Draft, ref. nr. DIN IEC 17B/848/CDV)
- Schakeling in verwerkingseenheid is redundant
opgebouwd met zelfbewaking.
Daardoor blijft de veiligheidsinrichting ook bij uitval
van een component werkzaam.
- Bij het openen c.q. sluiten van de veiligheidsin-
richting wordt gecontroleerd of de relais van de
veiligheidsinrichting correct openen en sluiten.
Veiligheidssensoren zijn bedoeld voor persoonlijke

bescherming. Onvakkundige inbouw of manipulaties
kunnen ernstig letsel van personen veroorzaken.
130 8 009 704/P076/25-01-05 • © SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Duitsland • Alle rechten voorbehouden
Ba_T4000_nl.pmd 130 31.01.2005, 10:45

NL
Elektrische aansluiting
De elektrische aansluiting mag uitsluitend door geautoriseerd, EMC-geschoold vakpersoneel in

spanningsvrije toestand uitgevoerd worden. De elektro-installatie mag alleen in spanningsvrije toestand
verricht worden.
● Veiligheidssensoren mogen niet omzeild (contacten overbrugd) weggedraaid of op andere wijze onwerkzaam
worden gemaakt.
● Alle elektrische aansluitingen moeten of door een scheidingstransformator (IEC 742) of door gelijkwaardige
isolatiemaatregelen van het net worden geïsoleerd.
● Alle uitgangscontacten bij capacitieve en inductieve lasten moeten een voldoende veiligheids-beschake-
ling hebben.
● Externe contactbeveiliging (zekering 6,3 A flink) voor relaisuitgangen monteren.
Om de veiligheid te garanderen, moeten beide veiligheidsuitgangen (relaisuitgangen) 13/14 en 23/24

absoluut geanalyseerd worden.
T 4000-verwerkingseenheid
Bedrijfsspanning
+ 24 V 0 V
DC
Schermaansluiting
bruin wit
Sensor
Gecodeerde
13 14 23 24 bediener
Trans-
ponder
T 4000-evaluatietoestel
Bedrijfsspanning
+ 24 V 0 V
DC
Schermaansluiting
bruin wit
Sensor
Gecodeerde
13 14 23 24 bediener
Trans-
ponder
Ba_T4000_nl.pmd 131 31.01.2005, 10:45

● Bij de toepassing van een gemeenschappelijke Aanwijzing: De steekbare en gecodeerde klemmen
voedingsspanning moeten alle aan de voedings- op het evaluatietoestel maken een voorconfec-
spanning aangesloten inductieve en capacitieve tionering van de leidingsaansluitingen en zodoende
lasten (bijv. magneetschakelaars) met overeen- een eenvoudige en snelle eindmontage mogelijk.
komstige ontstoringselementen worden geschakeld. Bovendien bieden zij ook in het geval van service
een hoge mate aan veiligheid.
De deurmeldingsuitgang OUT mag niet als
veiligheidsuitgang worden gebruikt
● De aansluitleiding van de sensor mag niet verlengd

worden.
● De afscherming van de sensorleiding (max. 3 cm

van de isolatie wegnemen) moet verbonden wor-
den met de aansluiting SH van de analyse-eenheid.
● Meldingsuitgangen ERR en OUT en de

aansluitklemmen voor leeskop H1/H2 zijn niet
kortsluitvast.
● Wanneer het apparaat na het inscahkelen van de

bedrijfsspanning geen functie toont (bijv. groene
STATE-LED brandt niet), moet het apparaat on-
geopend aan de fabrikant worden teruggezonden.
● Als leidingmateriaal mag alleen koper met een

temperatuurvastheid ≥ 75 °C worden gebruikt.
LED indicaties
● De schroeven van de aansluitklemmen moeten met
een aandraaimoment van 0,6 – 0,8 Nm worden STATE LED groen normale werking
aangetrokken.
knipperend leerproces (verdere signaal-
● Voor de toepassing en het gebruik overeenkomstig functie zie toestandstabel)
de eisen moet een spanningsvoeding met
het kenmerk ”for use in class 2 circuits” worden OUT LED geel gledige bediener herkend
gebruikt.
Er mogen geen spanningen ≥ 8 A stromen. ERROR LED rood -Testingang geactiveerd
- Interne fout elektronica
- Ongeldig leerproces
(zie ook toestandstabel)
Bij bedieningsfouten (ERROR) kan door het onder-

breken van de spanningsvoeding - ca.10 seconden -
de verwerkingseenheid in de bedrijfstoestand worden
teruggezet.
Ba_T4000_nl.pmd 132 31.01.2005, 10:45

NL
Systeembeschrijving Leerfunctie voor bediener
De veiligheidssensor T 4000 bestaat uit drie Voor het systeem een functie-eenheid vormt moet
componenten: de bediener aan een leerfunctie van het evaluatie-
toestel worden toegekend.
- Gecodeerde bediener Tijdens een leerproces zijn de veiligheidsuitgangen
- Sensor en de deurmeldingsuitgang op LOW, d.w.z. het sys-
- Verwerkingseenheid teem bevindt zich in een veilige toestand.
Iedere geleverde bediener heeft een ondubbelzin- ● Leerfunctie voor de eerste bediener (levertoestand):
nige elektronische codering en is zodoende voor het 1.Aanleggen van de voedingsspanning aan het
toegepaste systeem een unicum. De code van een evaluatietoestel
bediener kan niet omgeprogrammeerd worden. - snel knipperen (ca. 4 Hz) van de groene LED
2.Activator naar de sensor toe brengen
De sensor wordt op het vaststaande deel van de (Afstand < Sao in acht nemen)
veiligheidsinrichting bevestigd en is via een twee- - Leerproces begint, langzaam knipperen (ca.
aderige afgeschermde kabel verbonden met het 1 Hz) van de groene LED
analyse-apparaat. 3.Leerproces beëindigd (na 60 seconden)
De aan de veiligheidsinrichting bevestigde activator - groene LED gaat uit
wordt bij het sluiten van de deuren naar de sensor 4.Om de geleerde code van de bediener in het
geleid. Bij het bereiken van de inschakelafstand vindt evaluatietoestel te activeren, moet de werkings-
via de inductieve sensor de spanningsvoeding naar spanning op het evaluatietoestel vervolgens ten
de activator plaats en kan de datatransmissie minste 10 seconden uitgeschakeld worden.
plaatsvinden.
Het ingelezen bitpatroon wordt vergeleken met de ● Leerfunctie van een nieuwe bediener:
opgeslagen code in het evaluatietoestel, bij 1.Aanleggen van de werkingsspanning op evaluatie-
overeenstemming van de gegevens vindt de vrijgave toestel
van de veiligheidsuitgangen (relaisuitgang) plaats en 2.Nieuwe activator naar de sensor toe brengen
de deur-meldingsuitgang OUT (halfgeleideruitgang) (Afstand < Sao in acht nemen)
wordt eveneens op HIGH gezet. - Leerproces begint, groene LED knippert (ca.
Door de dynamische opvraag van de bediener en 1 Hz)
door de redundante diversitaire opbouw van de 3.Leerproces beëindigd (na 60 seconden)
veiligheidselektronica in combinatie met twee - groene LED gaat uit, nieuwe code opgeslagen,
veiligheidsuitgangen gaat het evaluatietoestel bij oude code gedeactiveerd
iedere herkenbare fout over in de veilige toestand. 4.Om de nieuwe geleerde code van de bediener in
Bij het openen van de veiligheidsinrichting schakelen het evaluatietoestel te activeren, moet de werkings-
de veiligheidsuitgangen het veiligheidscircuit uit en spanning op het evaluatietoestel vervolgens ten
de deurmeldingsuitgang (OUT) wordt op LOW minste 10 seconden uitgeschakeld worden.
geschakeld. De toestand van de maakcontacten
wordt intern via verbreekcontacten met coulisse-
geleiding bewaakt. Aanwijzing:
Bij een interne fout in het evaluatietoestel wordt het ● Het meervoudig leren van dezelfde bediener
veiligheidscircuit uitgeschakeld, de diagnose-uitgang op hetzelfde evaluatietoestel is niet mogelijk.
(ERROR) op HIGH gezet en de ERROR LED gaat ● Het aantal geldige leerprocessen op een
rood branden. evaluatietoestel is tot maximaal 8 begrensd.
● Het evaluatietoestel kan alleen met de telkens
Aanwijzing: de verblijfsduur van een transponder bin- laatste geleerde bediener worden bedreven.
nen en buiten het reactiebereik moet minstens ● Een leerproces is ongeldig wanneer:
0,5 seconden bedragen anders kan verwerkings- - het leerproces voor het doven van de groene
eenheid in de fouttoestand overgaan en gaat de LED wordt afgebroken
ERROR LED rood branden. - tijdens het leerproces de voedingsspanning
Door de onderbreking van de spanningstoevoer wordt uitgeschakeld werd
verwerkingseenheid in de bedrijfstoestand
teruggezet.
Attentie:
Ook na het 8e leerproces of bij het aanleggen van
een "oude" bediener aan de leeskop gaat het sys-
teem automatisch over in de leermodus. In beide
gevallen wordt een leerproces met de duur van
60 seconden ingeleid, de laatste bedienercode blijft
echter in het geheugen actief (zie toestandstabel),
er wordt geen nieuwe code geleerd.
Ba_T4000_nl.pmd 133 31.01.2005, 10:45

Systeem-toestandstabel
SPS LED-indicatie Toestand

In- Uitgang
(veiligheidscircuit)
OUT (meldsignaal)
knipperimpulsen
STATE (groen)
Relais KA, KB
ERR (rood)
OUT (geel)
deurstand
Bediener/
Aantal
ERR
TST
Normaal bedrijf dicht aan N 1 0 1 1 0 Normaal bedrijf, deur gesloten
open aus N 0 0 0 0 0 Normaal bedrijf, deur open
Inbedrijfstelling Knippert
Eerste inbedrijfstelling na levering, gereed voor
open uit N 0 0 continu 0 0
eerste leerproces
met 4 Hz
Knippert
dicht uit N 0 0 60 s met 0 0 Leerproces
ca. 1 Hz
Positieve bevestiging voor succesvol
dicht uit N 0 0 0 0 0 leerproces. Voor normaal bedrijf moet
het apparaat opnieuw ingeschakeld worden.
Statusdisplay x uit x 0 0 3 0 0 Weergave na 1e tot 5e leerproces
Weergave van de nog toegestane

x uit x 0 0 2 0 0
leerprocessen na het 6e leerproces
Eenmalige
knippervolg- Weergave van de nog toegestane
x uit x 0 0 orde na het 1 0 0
leerprocessen na het 7e leerproces
inschakelen
Apparaat kan geen verder leerproces meer
x uit x 0 0 0 0 0
uitvoeren
Storingsindicatie x uit N 0 1 0 0 1 Uitval van interne componenten van het apparaat
x uit N 0 1 0 0 1 Bediener korter dan 0,5 s in reactiebereik
Bedieningsfouten dicht uit N 0 1 1 0 1 Niet toegestaan 9e leerproces

dicht uit N 0 1 Knippervolg- 2 0 1 Niet toegestaan leerproces van een bediener
orde met Negatieve bevestiging voor leerproces.
dicht uit N 0 1 herhaling 3 0 1 Bediener werd korter dan 60 s voor de leeskop
na 1 s gehouden.
Testbedrijf open uit 1 0 1 1 0 1
ext. test van apparaat op ”OPEN” en functie

dicht uit 1 0 1 1 0 1
ERR-uitgang bij gesloten deur
N = 0 Volt of niet beschadigd 1 = licht

0 = 0 Volt 0 = donker
1 = 24 Volt
x = 0 of 24 Volt
c.q. deuren open of dicht
Aanwijzing:
● Het evaluatietoestel kan alleen met de laatste aangeleerde bediener worden bedreven.
Controle en onderhoud
Om een correcte en permanente functie te waarbor- - Dichtheid van de kabelinvoer op de sensor
gen zijn regelmatige controles nodig op: - losse leidingsaansluitingen op het evaluatietoestel
- veilige bevestiging van de activator en de sensor - controle van de uitschakelafstand
(gebruik de meegeleverde veiligheidsschroeven)
Ba_T4000_nl.pmd 134 31.01.2005, 10:45

NL
Functiecontrole (zelftest) De veiligheidsuitgangen worden uitgeschakeld en
zodoende het testen van het hele veiligheidscircuit
Bij elektromechanische veiligheidsschakelaars of mogelijk gemaakt. Als bewakingsfunctie wordt de
magneetsensoren kan de functiecontrole door cyc- diagnose-uitgang ERR door het evaluatietoestel
lisch openen van de veiligheidsinrichting plaatsvinden. eveneens op HIGH gezet.
Bij het terugzetten van de testingang wordt de
Vanaf besturingscategorie 2 moet overeenkomstig diagnose-uitgang ERR door het evaluatietoestel weer
de EN 60204-1 : 1997 (Hoofdstuk 9.4.2.4) bij de start op LOW teruggezet, de rode LED gaat uit en de
of na vastgelegde afstanden een functiecontrole van veiligheidsuitgangen worden weer ingeschakeld.
het gehele veiligheidssysteem worden uitgevoerd. Zodoende is een zelftest van het veiligheidssysteem
zonder openen van de veiligheidsinrichting mogelijk.
Het testen van de interne werking van de
veiligheidssensor T 4000 is niet noodzakelijk omdat
het apparaat zichzelf in de real-time controleert. Het Uitsluiting van de aansprakelijkheid
lassen van een uitgangscontact (relaisuitgang) wordt
door het apparaat uiterlijk bij het volgende openen Uitsluiting van de aansprakelijkeheid bij:
van de veiligheidsinrichting herkend. Een onderlinge
sluiting van de uitgangsleiding wordt door het - niet reglementaite toepassing
apparaat niet herkend.Bovendien kan het hele - niet opvolgen van de veiligheidsaanwijzingen
veiligheidscircuit zonder het openen van de - Aanbouw en elektrische aansluiting door niet
veiligheidsinrichting worden getest. Daarvoor wordt geautoriseerd personeel
door het belasten met 24 V DC aan de testingang - bij ingrepen door derden
het openen van de veiligheidsinrichting gesimuleerd.
Typisch reactiebereik (bij leidinglengte l = 0 tot 25 m) *)
Veilige uitschakelafstand m Utgangstilstand

sar = 23 mm in acht nemen
(zie veiligheidsinstructies Aktuator Hysterese
sensoren, pag. 140) s PÅ
Sensor
AV
Utkoplingsavstand Sao Avstand s
8
Avstand s [mm]
Hysterese
AV 6
AV
Innkoplings-
avstand Sao
2
PÅ
-8 -6 -4 -2 0 2 4 6 8
Forskyvning i midten m [mm]
*)
Min./max. waarden, zie Technische gegevens
Ba_T4000_nl.pmd 135 31.01.2005, 10:45

Aansluitings- en blokschakelbeeld, aansluitvoorbeeld
T 4000-evaluatietoestel
Bedrijfsspanning
+ 24 V 0 V
DC
Schermaansluiting
bruin wit
Sensor
Gecodeerde
bediener
Trans-
TST ingang niet geschakel d
CPU-A CPU-B
Bedrijf zonder externe test

Safety Path): Dubbel
dynamisch veiligheidspad
met fout bewaking van de
activator van de sensor en
KA KB de kabel naar de sensor
TST Testingang
T
OUT Vrijgave uitgang (geen veiligheidsuitgang)
10kW
ERR Diagnose uitgang
10kW GND 0V (intern verbonden met 0V van de bedrijfsspanning)
H1/H2 Aansluiting sensor
SH Schermaansluiting sensor
13/14 Aansluiting maakcontact 1, vrijgave veiligheidsrelais
23/24 Aansluiting maakcontact 2, vrijgave veiligheidsrelais
V
Veilighei d - PLC
KANAAL A
I0 veiligheidsingang
0V
TO0 geklokte uitgang
0V
KANAAL B
I1 veiligheidsingang
met veiligheids-SPS
Aansluitvoorbeeld
0V
TO1 geklokte uitgang
0V
I2 ingangen
I3
0V
O2 statische
uitgang
Ba_T4000_nl.pmd 136 31.01.2005, 10:45

NL
Evaluatietoestel T 4000-1RBA 01
Maatschets
22,5 114,5
H1 H2 SH
24V 0V
STATE
99
OUT
ERROR
TST OUT ERR GND

13 14 23 24
passend voor standaard-

din-rails 35 mm
Schakelgedrag
Veiligheidsinrichting
2 Veiligheidsuitgangen (relaisuitgangen)
1 Deur-meldingsuitgang (halfgeleideruitgang, geen gesloten offen
veiligheidsuitgang) (transponder (transponder niet in
herkend) reactiebereik)
sensor bediener sensor
13 14 13 14
23 24 23 24
24 V OUT 24 V OUT
Ba_T4000_nl.pmd 137 31.01.2005, 10:45

Technische gegevens
Parameters Waarde Eenheid
min. type max.
Materiaal behuizing Kunststof PA6.6
Afmetingen 114,5 x 99 x 22,5 mm
Massa 0,2 kg
Omgevingstemperatuur bij UB = 24 V DC 0 - +55 °C
Opslagtemperatuur -25 - +70 °C
Beschermklasse IP20
Beschermklasse Beschermklasse III, verontreinigingsgraad 2
Materiaalgroep II
Montage din-rail 35 mm overeenkomstig DIN 46277
Aantal sensoren 1 sensor per verwerkingseenheid
Soort aansluiting steekbare schroefklemmen / gecodeerd
Aansluitklemmen 0,14 - 2,5 mm²
Werkingsspanning UB
21 24 27 V DC
(geregeld, restrimpel < 5 %)
Stroompopname (bij aangetrokken relais) 150 mA
Veiligheidsuitgangen 2 veiligheidsrelais met elk een maakcontact
Schakelstroom (relaisuitgangen) 1)
- bij schakelspanning 0,1 ... 60 V 1 - 300 mA
- bij schakelspanning 10 ... 24 V 1 - 4000 mA
Beveiliging extern (Veiligheidscircuit) 6,3 A flink
Gebruikscategorie overeenkomstig EN 60947-5-2 AC-12 300mA 60V 50Hz / DC-12 300mA 60V
AC-140 2A 30V 50Hz / DC-13 4A 30V
Sturingscategorie overeenkomstig EN 954 3
Classificatie overeenkomstig IEC/EN 60 947-5-3 PDF-M
Isolatiespanning Ui - - 63 V
Stootspanningsbestendigheid Uimp - - 1,5 kV
Weerstandsvermogen tegen vibraties overeenkomstig EN 60 947-5-2
Mechanische schakelspeling (relais) 10 x 10 6
Schakelvertraging vanaf wijziging toestand - - 180 ms
Vertraging bedrijfsklare toestand 2) 3 s
Verblijfduur 0,5 - - s
Melduitgangen (Diagnose ERR, vrijgave OUT,
Halfgeleider uitgang, p-schakelend) 3)
- Uitgangsspanning 0,8 x UB - UB V DC
- Belastbaarheid - - 20 mA
Testingang LOW 0 - 2 V DC
HIGH 15 - UB V DC
EMV-veiligheidseisen overeenkomstig IEC 60947-5-3
LED-indicaties STATE LED groen: Normale werking
knipperend: Leerproces
OUT LED geel: Bediener herkend
ERROR LED rood: Testingang geactiveerd
Interne fout elektronica
Ongeldig leerproces
1)
Wanneer er via de relaisuitgangen een maal een schakelstroom > 300 mA geschakeld wordt, kan als gevolg van afbrand van de goudcontaten
geen lage spanning (</= 10 mA) meer veilig worden geschakeld.
2)
Na het isncahkelen van de werkingsspanning zijn tijdens de vertraging van de bedrijfkslare toestand de relaisuitgangen uitgeschakeld en de
melduitgangen op LOW-potentiee
3)
niet kortsluitveilig
Ba_T4000_nl.pmd 138 31.01.2005, 10:45

NL
Sensoren T 4000-DNA...
Sensor T 4000-DNA..P (met vast aangesloten leiding)
Maattekening
Leidinglengte l 42 12
ø4,5
ø8
T4000-D XXXXXX
25
32 ±0,1 actief 4,6 actief
vlak vlak
Aansluitbelegging
Sensor met aansluitleiding
scherm
BN sensor
WH
H1 H2 SH
evaluatietoestel
Sensor T 4000-DNAC met connector M8 (combi variant met vergrendel- en schroefaansluiting)

Maattekening
32,6 42 12
6,8 32 ±0,1 4,6

ø8
ø4,5
ø10
T4000-DNACXXXXXX
25
actief
3 vlak
4
actief 1
min.38 5,5
vlak
Aansluitgegevens
Sensor met connector
WH scherm 3
4
BN 1
Aanzicht op
H1 H2 SH connector van de
sensor
evaluatietoestel
Ba_T4000_nl.pmd 139 31.01.2005, 10:45

Technische gegevens
min. type max.
Materiaal behuizing Fortron, met glasvezels versterkte thermoplast, vol gegoten
Afmetingen 42 x 25 x 12 mm
Massa (incl. 10 m leiding) 0,3 kg
Omgevingstemperatuur -25 - +70 °C
Beschermklasse IP67
Inbouwpositie willekeurig
Werkwijze inductief
Dynamische datatransmissie
2 kbit/s
naar evaluatietoestel
Verblijfduur 1) 0,5 - - s
Reactiebereik bij middenverschuiving m = 0 2)
Leidinglengte l = 0 tot 25 m
- Inschakelafstand Sao 5 6 -
- Schakelhysterese 0,5 1,5 -
- Veilige uitschakelafstand Sar - - 23 mm
Leidinglengte l ≥ 25 tot 50 m
- Inschakelafstand Sao 4 4,8 -
- Schakelhysterese 0,4 1,2 -
- Veilige uitschakelafstand Sar - - 23
Spanningsvoeding via evaluatietoestel
Aansluiting sensor T 4000-DNA..P vast gegoten aansluitleiding met ader eindhulzen
Leidinglengte sensor T 4000-DNA..P 15 m
Aansluiting sensor T 4000-DNAC Steekverbinder M 8 (met vergrendel- en schroefaansluiting), 3-polig
Leidinglengte T 4000-DNAC - - 50 m
1)
De verblijftijd is de tijd waarin de activator zich binnen of buiten het reactiebereik moet bevinden.
2)
Deze waarden gelden voor niet vlak afsluitende en vlak afsluitende inbouw van de sensor en de activator in aluminium.
Montageaanwijzingen
● De aansluitleiding van de sensor mag niet verlengd worden.

Er mogen geen tussenklemmen worden gebruikt.
● Activator en sensor moeten zodanig aangebracht worden dat:

- de kopvlakken bij gesloten veiligheidsinrichting binnen inschakelafstand 0,8 x Sao of dichterbij (zie tech-
nische gegevens) tegenover elkaar liggen.
- niet als mechanische aanslag worden gebruikt.
- zij overeenkomstig de vorm met de veiligheidsinrichting zijn verbonden, bijv. door de toepassing van de
bijgevoegde veiligheidsschroeven.
Veiligheidsinstructies
● Als de sensor en/of de activator vlak afgesloten wordt ingebouwd, verandert de schakelafstand in functie
van de inbouwdiepte en het materiaal van de veiligheidsinrichting.
● De veiligheidsinrichting moet zodanig geconstrueerd zijn, dat tot de afstand Sar (veilige uitschakelafstand)
een risico uitgesloten is.
Aanwijzing: Bij de veilige uitschakelafstand Sar = 23 mm zijn de relaisuitgangen, ook bij de uitval van een
intern component, veilig uitgeschakeld.
Ba_T4000_nl.pmd 140 31.01.2005, 10:45

NL
Bediener T 4000-1KBA
Maattekening
42 12
ø4,5
ø8
T4000-1KBA 5306531
25
32 ±0,1 4,6
actief actief
vlak vlak
Technische gegevens
min. type max.
Materiaal behuizing Fortron, met glasvezels versterkte thermoplast, vol gegoten
Afmetingen 42 x 25 x 12 mm
Massa 0,02 kg
Omgevingstemperatuur -25 – +70 °C
Beschermklasse IP67
Inbouwpositie actieve vlak tegenover sensor
Verblijfduur 1) 0,5 – – s
1)
De verblijfduur is de tijd waarin de bediener zich binnen of buiten het reactiebereik moet bevinden.
Ba_T4000_nl.pmd 141 31.01.2005, 10:45

Ba_T4000_nl.pmd 142 31.01.2005, 10:45

P
Manual de instruções Sensor de segurança T 4000
Índice
Uso corrente 144

Instruções de Segurança 144
Montagem 144
Ligação eléctrica 145
Descrição do Sistema 147

Função de Aprendizagem para o Actuador 147
Quadro de estados do sistema 148
Controlo e manutenção 148
Ensaio de funcionamento (Auto-teste) 149
Área de reacção típica 149
Exclusão da responsabilidade civil 149
Dados técnicos 150

Esquema de ligações e organigrama
de circuitos, exemplo de ligação 150
Aparelho de avaliação T 4000-1RBA 01 151
Sensores T 4000-DNA... 153
Actuador T 4000-1KBA 155
8 009 704/P076/25-01-05 • © SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Alemanha • Reservados todos os direitos 143
Ba_T4000_pt.pmd 143 31.01.2005, 10:57

Uso corrente Montagem
O sensor de segurança T 4000 é um dispositivo de A montagem pode ser efectuada exclusiva-

segurança para a verificação de dispositivos de mente por pessoal profissional autorizado.
protecção móveis, de modo a que:
● Para os trabalhos de controlo e de substituição, o
- possam ser efectuados trabalhos perigosos na actuador e o sensor têm que ser de fácil acesso.
máquina, caso o dispositivo de segurança se en-
contre fechado. ● A própria comutação só pode ser iniciada pelo
- possa ser dada uma ordem de STOP, caso o actuador especialmente previsto para o efeito.
dispositivo de protecção seja aberto, com a
máquina em funcionamento. ● Actuador e sensor têm que ser montados de forma
a que,
Antes de utilizar os sensores de segurança, tem que - as superfícies da frente, com o dispositivo de
ser efectuada uma avaliação do risco, de acordo com: protecção fechado, fiquem colocadas de forma
oposta, com uma distância mínima de activação
- EN 954-1, Componentes de comandos relevantes de 0,8 x Sao, ou inferior (veja os dados técnicos).
para a segurança, Anexo C - nunca devem ser utilizados na função de baten-
- EN 1050, Segurança de máquinas, Avaliação do tes.
risco. Nota: Montar um batente adicional para a parte
móvel do dispositivo de segurança.
A observação dos requisitos normais em vigor sobre - Em caso da montagem de união positiva alterar-
a montagem e operação fazem parte do uso corren- se-á a distância de comutação, em função da
te, especialmente: profundidade da montagem e do material do
dispositivo de protecção.
- EN 954-1, Componentes de comandos relevantes - que estejam integrados no dispositivo de
para a segurança protecção, de modo a criar uma única superfície,
- EN 1088, Dispositivos de trancagem em conjunto por exemplo, utilizando os parafusos de
com dispositivos de protecção de separação segurança fornecidos.
- EN 60 204-1, Equipamentos eléctricos de máquinas.
- EN 60 947-5-3 Requisitos para interruptores de ● O aparelho de avaliação tem que ser montado num
proximidade com comportamento definido sob armário de distribuição da classe de protecção
condições de erros. IP 54, no mínimo. Um elemento de encaixe, no
lado traseiro do aparelho, serve para a fixação a
uma calha normalizada.
Instruções de Segurança
● Em caso da montagem de vários aparelhos de
O sensor de segurança T 4000 cumpre os seguintes avaliação lado a lado num armário de comando
requisitos de segurança sem circulação de ar (p.ex. ventilador), deve
- Categoria de comando 3, conforme EN 954-1 observar-se uma distância de montagem de 10 mm
- Interruptores de proximidade com auto-verificação entre os aparelhos de avaliação.
do Tipo Typ PDF-M, conforme EN 60 947-5-3. A distância de montagem permite uma livre
- O circuito dentro do aparelho de avaliação tem uma dissipação do calor dos aparelhos de avaliação.
estrutura redundante com auto-verificação.
Desta forma, o dispositivo de segurança fica activo,
mesmo em caso da falha de uma componente.
- Ao abrir ou fechar um dispositivo de protecção será
verificado, se os relés do dispositivo de segurança
abrem e fecham correctamente.
Os sensores de segurança cumprem funções de

protecção de pessoas. A montagem incorrecta ou
manipulações podem provocar danos corporais gra-
ves.
144 8 009 704/P076/25-01-05 • © SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Alemanha • Reservados todos os direitos
Ba_T4000_pt.pmd 144 31.01.2005, 10:57

P
Ligação eléctrica
A ligação eléctrica deve ser efectuada exclusivamente por pessoal profissional autorizado, formado
nas regulamentações da norma CEM. A instalação eléctrica só pode ser efectuada com o sistema
isento de tensão.
● Sensores de segurança nunca devem ser contornados (ligação dos contactos em ponte), virados, retirados,
ou inviabilizados de qualquer outra forma ou maneira.
● Todas as ligações eléctricas devem ser isoladas da rede, ou mediante um transformador de corte (IEC 742)
ou mediante medidas de isolamento semelhantes.
● No caso de cargas capacititivas e indutivas, todos os contactos de saída têm que estar equipados com
circuitos protectores.
● Prever uma protecção de contactos externa (disjuntor de 6,3 A, de acção rápida) para as saídas dos relés.
De modo a garantir a segurança, ambas as saídas de protecção (saídas de relé) 13/14 e 23/24, são
de avaliação obrigatória.
Aparelho de avaliação-T4000
Tensão de operação
+ 24 V 0 V
DC
Ligação da blindagem
castanho branco
Sensor
Actuador
Trans-
ponder
+ 24 V 0 V
DC
castanho branco
Sensor
Actuador
Trans-
ponder
Ba_T4000_pt.pmd 145 31.01.2005, 10:57

● Ao utilizar uma alimentação de tensão conjunta, Nota: Os terminais codificados e encaixáveis do apa-
todas as cargas indutivas e capacitivas ligadas à relho de avaliação possibilitam a pré-confecção das
alimentação de tensão (por exemplo, contactores) ligações dos cabos, e subsequentemente a monta-
devem estar ligadas aos respectivos elementos de gem final rápida e simples.
eliminação de interferências. Além disso, também no caso de assistência técnica
oferecem uma segurança máxima.
A saída de aviso da porta OUT nunca deve
ser utilizado como saída de segurança
● O cabo de ligação do sensor não pode ser

prolongado por uma extensão.
● A blindagem do cabo do sensor (isolamento máx.

de 3 cm) tem que ser ligada ao conector SH da
unidade de avaliação.
● As saídas de mensagens ERR e OUT bem como

os terminais de conexão para a cabeça de leitura
H1/H2 não são à prova de curto-circuitos.
● Caso o aparelho não mostre nenhum indício de

funcionamento, após a aplicação da tensão de
serviço (p.ex., o LED verde STATE não está ace-
so), o aparelho tem que ser enviado ao fabricante,
sem ser aberto.
● Para material dos cabos pode ser utilizado

exclusivamente cobre, com uma resistência
Indicações LED
térmica ≥ 75 °C.
STATE LED verde Operação normal
● Os parafusos dos terminais de ligação devem ser
apertados com um binário de aperto de 0,6 - 0,8 Nm.
intermitente Processo de aprendiza-
gem (para mais funções
● Para a utilização e uso conforme os requisitos
de sinalização, ver o
, deve ser utilizada uma fonte de alimentação
quadro de estados)
com as características “for use in class 2 circuits”.
Nunca devem correr correntes ≥ 8 A !
OUT LED amarelo foi reconhecido o actuador
válido
ERROR LED vermelho - Entrada de teste activada

- Erro interno da parte elec-
trónica
- Processo de aprendiza
gem inválido
(ver também o Quadro de
estados)
No caso de erros (ERROR) de operação é possível

reinicializar o aparelho de avaliação para o estado
de operação, interrompendo a alimentação da tensão
durante aprox. 10 seg.
Ba_T4000_pt.pmd 146 31.01.2005, 10:57

P
Descrição do Sistema Durante de um processo de aprendizagem, as saídas
de segurança e a saída de aviso da porta OUT
O sensor de segurança T 4000 consiste em três encontram-se em LOW, ou seja, o sistema está num
componentes: estado seguro.
- Actuador codificado ● Função de aprendizagem para o primeiro actuador

- Sensor (estado de fornecimento):
- Aparelho de avaliação 1. Aplicar a tensão de operação no aparelho de avaliação
- luz intermitente rápida (aprox. 4 Hz) do LED verde
Cada actuador fornecido possui uma codificação 2. Movimentar o actuador em direcção ao sensor
electrónica inequívoca, sendo desta maneira para o (Observar a distância < Sao)
sistema utilizado um exemplar único. Não é possível - o processo de aprendizagem inicia-se, luz inter-
re-programar o código de um actuador. mitente lenta (aprox. 1 Hz) do LED verde
3. o processo de aprendizagem foi terminado (após
O sensor é montado na parte fixa do dispositivo de 60 segundos)
protecção, sendo ligado ao aparelho de avaliação - o LED verde apaga-se
através de um cabo blindado de dois fios. 4. Para activar no aparelho de avaliação o código
Ao fechar a porta, o actuador montado no dispositivo aprendido do actuador, a tensão de operação do
de protecção será movimentado para o sensor. No aparelho de avaliação tem que ser desligada a
momento em que atinge a distância de activação, a seguir, durante 10 segundos, no mínimo.
tensão é aplicada ao actuador através do sensor
indutivo, e a transmissão de dados pode iniciar-se. ● Função de aprendizagem de um novo actuador:
O padrão de bits lido é comparado com o código 1. Aplicar a tensão de operação no aparelho de avaliação
armazenado no aparelho de avaliação; em caso de 2. Movimentar o novo actuador em direcção ao sensor
concordância dos dados será efectuada a liberação (observar a distância < Sao)
das saídas de segurança (saída de relé) e a saída - o processo de aprendizagem inicia-se, luz inter-
de mensagem da porta OUT (saída de semicondutor) mitente (aprox. 1 Hz) do LED verde
também é colocada em HIGH. 3.Processo de aprendizagem foi terminado (após
Devido à pesquisa dinâmica do actuador e devido à 60 segundos)
estrutura redundante diversitária do sistema - o LED verde apaga-se, o novo código foi memo-
electrónico de segurança em conjunto com duas rizado, o antigo código foi desactivado
saídas de segurança, o aparelho de avaliação entrará 4. Para activar, no aparelho de avaliação, o novo có-
no estado seguro sempre que detecte um erro. digo aprendido do actuador, a tensão de operação
Ao abrir o dispositivo de protecção, as saídas de do aparelho de avaliação tem que ser desligada a
segurança desligarão o circuito de segurança, e a seguir, durante 10 segundos, no mínimo.
saída de aviso da porta (OUT) é comutada para LOW.
O estado dos contactos de corte é monitorizado in- Nota
ternamente através de contactos de contactos de tra- ● Não é possível efectuar várias vezes a apren-
balho de condução forçada. dizagem do mesmo actuador no mesmo apa-
Em caso de um erro interno do aparelho de avaliação, relho de avaliação.
o circuito de segurança é desligada, a saída ● O número de processos de aprendizagem vá-
diagnóstico (ERROR) é colocada em HIGH e a lidos num único aparelho de avaliação é limi-
lâmpada ERROR LED fica vermelha. tado a 8, no máximo.
● O aparelho de avaliação pode ser operado
Nota: O período de permanência de um actuador exclusivamente com o actuador que foi apren-
dentre e fora da área de reacção deve ser, no mínimo, dido por último.
de 0,5s, caso contrário, o aparelho de avaliação pode ● Um processo de aprendizagem é inválido, se:
entrar no estado de erro e o LED OUT/ERROR fica - o processo de aprendizagem for interrompi-
vermelho. do antes de o LED verde se apagar
Interrompendo a alimentação da tensão, o aparelho - a tensão de alimentação for desligada du-
de avaliação é reinicializado para o estado de rante o processo de aprendizagem.
operação.
Atenção:
O sistema entra automaticamente no modo de apren-
Função de Aprendizagem para o Actuador dizagem, mesmo após o 8º processo de aprendiza-
gem, ou ao colocar um actuador "antigo" na cabeça
Antes que todo o sistema possa ser uma unidade de leitura. Em ambos os casos será iniciado um pro-
funcional, o actuador tem que ser atribuído ao apa- cesso de aprendizagem com uma duração de
relho de avaliação através de uma função de apren- 60 segundos, no entanto, o código do último actuador
dizagem. mantém-se activo na memória (ver Quadro de esta-
dos), e não será aprendido um novo código.
Ba_T4000_pt.pmd 147 31.01.2005, 10:57

Quadro de estados do sistema
SPC Indicação LED Estado

Entr. Saida
cuito de segurança)
OUT (Sinal de aviso)

Actuador/Posição
ERR (vermelho)
Relé KA, KB (Cir-
OUT (amarelo)
STATE (verde)
Número de
impulsos
da porta
ópticos
ERR
TST
Operação normal fech. ligado N 1 0 1 1 0 Operação normal, porta fechada
aberto deslig. N 0 0 0 0 0 Operação normal, porta aberta
Colocação em pisca
serviço aberto deslig. N 0 0 perm. 0 0 Primeira colocação em serviço após a entrega.
aos 4 Hz Pronto para o primeiro processo de aprendizagem
pisca 60 s
fech. deslig. N 0 0 seg. a 1 0 0 Processo de aprendizagem
Hzaprox.
Confirmação positiva de um processo de

fech. deslig. N 0 0 0 0 0 aprendizagem bem sucedido. Para a operação
normal, o aparelho tem que ser activado de novo
Indicação do x deslig. x 0 0 3 0 0 Indic. após o 1º até ao 5º processo de aprendizagem
estado
Indicação do número de processos de aprendi-
x deslig. x 0 0 2 0 0 zagem permitidos após o 6º processo de
Sequência aprendizagem
única de luz
Indicação do número de processos de aprendi-
x deslig. x 0 0 intermitente 1 0 0 zagem permitidos após o 6º processo de
após a aprendizagem
ligação
O aparelho não pode efectuar mais nenhum pro-
x deslig. x 0 0 0 0 0
cesso de aprendizagem
Indicação do erro x deslig. N 0 1 0 0 1 Falha do componente interno do aparelho, ou
o actuador encontra-se na área de reacção por

x deslig. N 0 1 0 0 1
um período inferior a 0,5 seg.
Erro de operação fech. deslig. N 0 1 1 0 1 9º Processo de aprendizagem não-permitido

Sequências
fech. deslig. N 0 1 curtas de luz 2 0 1 Proces. aprendizagem não-permitido de um act. antigo
intermitente, Confirmação negativa para um processo de
fech. deslig. N 0 1 repetidas 3 0 1 aprendizagem. O actuador encontrou-se em frente da
após 1 seg. cabeça de leitura por um período inferior a 60 seg.
Operação de teste aberto deslig. 1 0 1 1 0 1
Teste do aparelho externo rel. a “ABERTO” e
fech. deslig. 1 0 1 1 0 1 ao funcionamento da saída-ERR com a porta
fechada
N = 0 Volt ou não ligado 1 = claro

0 = 0 Volt 0 = escuro
1 = 24 Volt
x = 0 ou 24 Volt, ou a porta
está aberta ou fechada
Nota:
● O aparelho de avaliação pode ser operado exclusivamente com o actuador que foi aprendido por último.
Controlo e manutenção
Para garantir o funcionamento contínuo e perfeito - a estanquecidade da passagem do cabo do sensor

são necessários controlos regulares relativamente: - a ligações soltas de cabos do aparelho de avaliação
- à fixação segura do actuador e do sensor (utilizar - à verificação da distância de desactivação
os parafusos fornecidos)
Ba_T4000_pt.pmd 148 31.01.2005, 10:57

P
Ensaio de funcionamento (Auto-teste) As saídas de segurança serão desactivadas,
permitindo desta forma a verificação de todo o circuito
No caso de interruptores de segurança electro- de segurança. Como função de monitorização, o
mecânicos ou de sensores electromagnéticos, o aparelho de avaliação colocará também a saída de
ensaio de funcionamento pode ser efectuado, abrindo diagnóstico ERR para HIGH.
ciclicamente o dispositivo de protecção. No momento de reposicionar a entrada de
verificação, o aparelho de avaliação reposiciona a
A partir da categoria de comando 2, tem que ser efec- saída de diagnóstico ERR de novo para LOW, o LED
tuado, de acordo com a norma EN 60204-1: 1997 vermelho apaga-se e as saídas de segurança são
(cap. 9.4.2.4) um ensaio de funcionamento de todo de novo activadas.
o sistema de segurança, no momento da activação Desta forma é possível a auto-verificação do sistema
ou em intervalos definidos. de segurança sem abrir o dispositivo de protecção.
A verificação do funcionamento interno do sensor de Exclusão da responsabilidade civil

segurança T 4000 não é necessária, porque o próprio
aparelho efectua uma auto-verificação em tempo real. Exclusão da responsabilidade civil no caso de
A soldadura de um contacto de saída (saída de relé)
será detectada pelo aparelho, o mais tardar, na - uso indevido
próxima abertura do dispositivo de protecção. Um - não-observação das instruções de segurança
circuito cruzado do circuito de saída não é detectado - montagem e ligação eléctrica através de pessoal
pelo aparelho. Além disto pode verificar-se todo o não autorizado
circuito de segurança sem abrir o dispositivo de - manipulação por terceiros
protecção. Para o efeito, simula-se a abertura do
dispositivo de segurança, aplicando uma corrente de
24 V DC na saída de verificação.
Área de reacção típica (comprimento do cabo l = 0 até 25 m) *)
Observar a distância m Estado de saída

de desactivação segura
sar = 23 mm; (veja os Actuador Hysterese
avisos de segurança s LIG.
"Sensores", pág. 154)
Sensor
DESLIG.
Distância de Sao Distância s
8 desactivação
Distância s [mm]
Hysterese
LIG. 6 LIG.
Distância de
activação Sao
2
DESLIG.
-8 -6 -4 -2 0 2 4 6 8
Desfasamento do centro m [mm]
*)
Veja os Dados técnicos para consultar os valores máx./mín.
Ba_T4000_pt.pmd 149 31.01.2005, 10:57

Esquema de ligações e organigrama de circuitos, exemplo de ligação
+ 24 V 0 V
DC
castanho branco
Sensor
Actuador
codificado
CPU-A CPU-B Trans-
Safety Path): Linha de
Operação sem teste externo
Entrada-TST sem ligação :
Segurança Dinâmica
Dupla com monitorização
de erros do actuador, do sensor
KA KB e do cabo até ao sensor
TST Entrada de teste

OUT Saída de libertação (não é uma saída de segurança)
10kW
ERR Saída do diagnóstico
GND 0V (internamente conectada aos 0V da tensão de serviço)
10kW H1/H2 Ligação do sensor
SH Ligação de blindagem do sensor
13/14 Ligação do contacto de corte 1, libertação do relé de segurança
23/24 Ligação do contacto de corte 2, libertação do relé de segurança
SPC de Segurança
CANAL A
I0 entrada de segurança
0V
TO0 saída de impulsos
0V
com PLC de segurança
CANAL B
Exemplo de ligação
I1 entrada de segurança
0V
TO1 saída de impulsos
0V
I2 Entradas
I3
0V
O2 Saída
estática
Ba_T4000_pt.pmd 150 31.01.2005, 10:57

P
Aparelho de avaliação T 4000-1RBA 01
Desenho cotado
22,5 114,5
H1 H2 SH
24V 0V
STATE
99
OUT
ERROR
TST OUT ERR GND

13 14 23 24
adaptado para a calha

em U normalizada de 35 mm
Comportamento de comutação
Dispositivo de protecção
2 Saídas de segurança (saídas de relés)
1 Saída de mensagem da porta (saída de semi- fechado aberto
condutor, nenhuma saída de segurança) (Actuador (Actuador não está
reconhecido) na área de reacção)
Sensor Actuador Sensor
13 14 13 14
23 24 23 24
24 V OUT 24 V OUT
Ba_T4000_pt.pmd 151 31.01.2005, 10:57

Dados técnicos
Parâmetros Valor Unidade
mín. típico máx.
Material da caixa Material sintético PA6.6
Dimensões 114,5 x 99 x 22,5 mm
Massa 0,2 kg
Temperatura ambiente aos UB = 24 V DC 0 - +55 °C
Temperatura de armazenagem -25 - +70 °C
Classe de protecção IP20
Classe de protecção Classe de protecção III, Grau de sujidade 2
Grupo de materiais II
Montagem Calha em U de 35 mm, de acordo com DIN 46277
Número de sensores 1 sensor por cada aparelho de avaliação
Tipo de ligação Terminais aparafusáveis de encaixe / codificado
Terminais de ligação 0,14 - 2,5 mm²
Tensão de operação UB
21 24 27 V DC
(regulada, ondulação residual < 5 %)
Consumo de corrente (com o relé excitado) 150 mA
Saídas de segurança 2 relés de segurança, cada com um contacto de corte
Corrente de comutação (saídas dos relés) 1)
- com uma tensão de comutação 0,1 ... 60 V 1 - 300 mA
- com uma tensão de comutação 10 ... 24 V 1 - 4000 mA
Protecção de circuitos externa (circuito de segurança) 6,3 A de acção rápida
Categoria de utilização conforme EN 60947-5-2 AC-12 300mA 60V 50Hz / DC-12 300mA 60V
AC-140 2A 30V 50Hz / DC-13 4A 30V
Categoria do comando conforme EN 954 3
Classificação conforme IEC/EN 60 947-5-3 PDF-M
Tensão de isolamento de projecto Ui - - 63 V
Resistência à choques de tensão de projecto Uimp - - 1,5 kV
Robustez de resistência a vibrações de acordo com a EN 60 947-5-2
Ciclos de comutação mecânicos (relé) 10 x 10 6
Retardamento de comutação a partir da alteração do estado - - 180 ms
Retardamento de operacionalidade 2) 3 s
Duração de permanência 0,5 - - s
Saídas de aviso (Diagnóstico ERR, Libertação OUT,
Saída semi-condutora, tipo de comutação-p) 3)
- Tensão de saída 0,8 x UB - UB V DC
- Capacidade de carga - - 20 mA
Entrada de teste LOW 0 - 2 V DC
HIGH 15 - UB V DC
Requisitos de protecção-CEM de acordo com a IEC 60947-5-3
Indicações-LED STATE LED verde: Operação normal
luz intermitente: Processo de aprendizagem
OUT LED amarelo: Actuador reconhecido
ERROR LED vermelho: Entrada de teste activada
Erro int. - parte electrónica
Processo de aprendizagem
inválido
1)
Ao comutar mediante as saídas de relé uma corrente de comutação > 300 mA, ficará impossível a comutação segura de correntes baixas de
10 mA, devido à queimadura dos contactos dourados.
2)
Após a aplicação da tensão de operação, as saídas de relés encontram-se desligadas, durante o retardamento da operacionalidade, e as
saídas de aviso encontram-se no potencial LOW.
3)
não à prova de curto-circuitos
Ba_T4000_pt.pmd 152 31.01.2005, 10:57

P
Sensores T 4000-DNA...
Sensor T 4000-DNA..P (com cabo de ligação permanente)
Desenho cotado
Comprimento da linha l 42 12
ø4,5
ø8
T4000-D XXXXXX
25
32 ±0,1 4,6 Superfície
Superfície
activa activa
Atribuição de ligação
Sensor com cabo de ligação
Blindagem
BN Sensor
WH
H1 H2 SH
Aparelho de avaliação
Sensor T 4000-DNAC com ficha M8 (com ligação de encaixe ou por aparafusamento)

Desenho cotado
32,6 42 12
6,8 32 ±0,1 4,6

ø8
ø4,5
ø10
T4000-DNACXXXXXX
25
Superfície
3 activa
4
Superfície 1
min.38 5,5
activa
Atribuição de ligação
Sensor com ficha
WH Blindagem 3
4
BN 1
Vista sobre a ficha
H1 H2 SH do sensor
Aparelho de avaliação
Ba_T4000_pt.pmd 153 31.01.2005, 10:57

Dados técnicos
mín. típico máx.
Material da caixa Fortron, termoplástico reforçado com fibra de vidro, moldagem maciça
Dimensões 42 x 25 x 12 mm
Massa (incluindo o cabo de 10 m) 0,3 kg
Posição de montagem igual
Tipo de funcionamento indutivo
Transmissão dinâmica de dados
2 kbit/s
ao aparelho de avaliação
Duração de permanência 1) 0,5 - - s
Área de reacção com um desfasamento do centro de m = 0 2)
Comprimento do cabo l = 0 até 25 m

- Distância de activação Sao 5 6 -
- Histerese de comutação 0,5 1,5 -
- Distância de desactivação segura Sar - - 23 mm
Comprimento do cabo l ≥ 25 até 50 m

- Distância de activação Sao 4 4,8 -
- Histerese de comutação 0,4 1,2 -
- Distância de desactivação segura Sar - - 23
Alimentação de tensão através do aparelho de avaliação
Ligação do sensor T 4000-DNA..P cabo de ligação moldado, com terminais de condutores
Comprimento do cabo do sensor T 4000-DNA..P 15 m
Ligação do sensor T 4000-DNAC ficha M8 (com ligação de encaixe ou por aparafusamento), de 3 polos
Comprimento do cabo T 4000-DNAC - - 50 m
1)
O tempo de permanência é o tempo, durante o qual o actuador deve situar-se dentro ou fora do intervalo de actuação.
2)
Estes valores são válidos para a montagem nivelada e desnivelada do sensor e do actuador em alumínio.
Instruções de montagem
● O cabo de ligação do sensor não pode ser prolongado por uma extensão.
Nunca podem ser utilizadas terminais intermédias.
● Actuador e sensor têm que se montados de forma a que:

- as superfícies da frente, com o dispositivo de protecção fechado, fiquem colocadas de forma oposta,
com uma distância de activação de 0,8 x Sao, ou inferior (veja os dados técnicos).
- nunca devem ser utilizados na função de batentes.
- fiquem montados no dispositivo de segurança de união positiva, p. ex., utilizando os parafusos de segu-
rança fornecidos.
Instruções de segurança
● Em caso da montagem nivelada do sensor e/ou do actuador, a distância de comutação altera-se em

função da profundidade da montagem e do material do dispositivo de protecção.
● O dispositivo de segurança tem que ser construído de forma de que fique excluído qualquer perigo até à
distância Sar (distância segura de desactivação).
Nota: Com a distância segura de desactivação Sar = 23 mm, as saídas dos relés encontram-se desligadas
de forma segura, mesmo no caso de falha de um componente interno.
Ba_T4000_pt.pmd 154 31.01.2005, 10:57

P
Actuador T 4000-1KBA
Desenho cotado
42 12
ø4,5
ø8
T4000-1KBA 5306531
25
32 ±0,1 4,6
Superfície Superfície
activa activa
Dados técnicos
mín. típico máx.
Material da caixa Fortron, termoplástico reforçado com fibra de vidro, moldagem maciça
Dimensões 42 x 25 x 12 mm
Massa 0,02 kg
Posição de montagem superfície activa em posição oposta ao sensor
Duração de permanência 1) 0,5 – – s
1)
A duração de permanência é o período durante o qual o actuador se deve situar fora ou dentro da área de reacção.
Ba_T4000_pt.pmd 155 31.01.2005, 10:57

Ba_T4000_pt.pmd 156 31.01.2005, 10:57

S
Bruksanvisning Säkerhetssensor T 4000
Innehåll
Ändamålsenlig användning 158

Säkerhet 158
Montering 158
Elanslutning 159
Systembeskrivning 161
Inlärningsfunktion för kontakten 161
System-tillståndstabell 162
Kontroll och Service 162
Funktionskontroll (Självtest) 163
Typiskt reaktionsområde 163
Tekniska data 164

Anslutnings- och blockkopplingsschema,
anslutningsexempel 164
Utvärderingsenhet T 4000-1RBA 01 165
Sensor T 4000-DNA... 167
Kodnyckel T 4000-1KBA 169
8 009 704/P076/25-01-05 • © SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Tyskland • Alla rättigheter förbehålles 157
Ba_T4000_sw.pmd 157 31.01.2005, 11:37

Ändamålsenlig användning Montering
Säkerhetssensor T 4000 är en säkerhetsteknisk Monteringen får uteslutande utföras av aukto-

anordning för övervakning av rörliga avspärrande riserad fackpersonal.
skyddsanordningar, så att
● Kodnyckeln och sensorn måste vara lätt tillgängliga
- farofyllda arbeten vid maskinen endast kan utfö- för kontroll och byte.
ras när skyddsanordningen är stängd.
- ett stoppkommando utlöses då skyddsanordningen ● Brytningsförloppet får endast utlösas av den där-
öppnas och maskinen är igång. för speciellt avsedda brytaren.
Innan säkerhetssensorer tas i drift ska en riskbe- ● Kodnyckeln och sensorn ska monteras så att
dömning för maskinen göras enligt: - ändytorna vid stängd skyddsanordning befinner
sig på ett minimiavstånd från varandra av 0,8 x
- EN 954-1, Säkerhetsrelevanta delar i styrningar, Sao eller närmare (se tekniska data).
Bilaga C - de inte används som mekaniska anslag.
- EN 1050, Maskinsäkerhet, riskbedömning Anm.: Montera extra anslag för skydds-
anordningens rörliga del.
Till ändamålsenlig användning hör att man följer gäl- - Kopplingsavståndet ändrar sig beroende på
lande bestämmelser för montage och drift, särskilt monteringsdjup och skyddsanordningens
material.
- EN 954-1, Säkerhetsrelevanta delar i styrningar - de är fast förbundna med skyddsanordningen, t
- EN 1088, Låsanordningar med och utan låsregel ex med hjälp av de medföljande säkerhets-
- EN 60 204-1, Maskiners elutrustning skruvarna.
- EN 60 947-5-3 Krav för närhetsbrytare med
bestämd funktion vid felfunktion. ● Utvärderingsenheten måste monteras i ett kopp-
lingsskåp i minst skyddsklass IP54. Enheten är på
baksidan så utformad att den kan hakas upp på en
Säkerhet normskena.
Säkerhetssensor T 4000 uppfyller följande säker- ● Vid montering av flera utvärderingsenheter i rad
hetskrav i ett kopplingsskåp utan ventilation (t.ex. fläkt)
- Styrkategori 3 enligt EN 954-1 skall utvärderingsenheterna monteras med
- Beröringsfria kodnyckel brytarövervakning Typ PDF- ett avstånd på minst 10 mm.
M enligt IEC 60 947-5-3 Detta avstånd medger obehindrad värmeavledning
(Utkast, Ref. Nr. DIN IEC 17B/848/CDV). för utvärderingsenheterna.
- Kopplingen i utvärderingsenheten är redundant
uppbyggd med självkontroll.
Skyddsanordningen är aktiv även om en enskild
del i utrustningen inte fungerar.
- Vid skyddsanordningens öppnande resp. stäng-
ande kontrolleras om skyddsanordningens reläer
öppnar och stänger korrekt.
Säkerhetssensorer utgör personskydd. Icke fackman-

namässig inbyggnad eller manipulering kan medföra
svåra personskador.
158 8 009 704/P076/25-01-05 • © SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Tyskland • Alla rättigheter förbehålles
Ba_T4000_sw.pmd 158 31.01.2005, 11:37

S
Elanslutning
Elanslutning får endast utföras av behörig, EMC-utbildad fackpersonal när utrustningen inte är
spänningsförande.
● Säkerhetssensorer får inte kringgås (byglingar), vridas bort, avlägsnas eller sättas ur funktion på annat
sätt.
● Alla elektriska ingångar måste vara isolerade, antingen med en transformator (IEC 742) eller likvärdiga
isoleringsåtgärder.
● Alla utgångskontakter måste, vid kapacitiva och intuitiva laster, ha tillräcklig skyddskoppling.
● Extern kontaktavsäkring (säkring 6,3 A snabb) avsedd för reläutgångarna.
För att säkerställa skyddsfunktionen måste båda säkerhetsutgångarna (reläutgångarna) 13/14 och
23/24 utvärderas.
T4000 utvärderingsutrustning
Driftsspänning
+ 24 V 0 V
DC
Anslutning,skärm-
brun vit
Sensor
Kodnyckel
13 14 23 24
Trans-
ponder
Driftsspänning
+ 24 V 0 V
DC
Anslutning,skärm-
brun vit
Sensor
Kodnyckel
13 14 23 24
Trans-
ponder
Ba_T4000_sw.pmd 159 31.01.2005, 11:37

● Används gemensam strömförsörjning skall alla Anm.: De instickbara och kodade anslutningskläm-
anslutna induktiva och kapacitiva laster, (t.ex. morna möjliggör en konfigurering av kabelanslut-
kontaktor) kopplas med avstörningskontakter. ningarna i förväg och därmed en enkel och snabb
slutmontering.
Dörrens testutgång OUT får inte användas som Därutöver innebär de vid serviceåtgärder högsta sä-
säkerhetsutgång kerhet.
● Sensorns anslutningsledning får inte förlängas.
● Sensorledningens skärm (max 3 cm avisoleras) ska

anslutas till anslutning SH på utvärderingsenheten.
● Testutgångarna ERR och OUT samt anslutnings-

klämmorna för läshuvud H1/ H2 är inte kort-
slutningssäkra.
● Ifall enheten inte skulle starta efter det att ström-

försörjningen slagits till (t.ex. den gröna STATE-
LED- indikatorn lyser ej), måste enheten oöppnad
sändas tillbaka till tillverkaren.
● Endast koppar med temperaturstabilitet på

≥ 75 °C får användas.
● Skruvarna för anslutningsklämmorna måste dras

åt med ett vridmoment på 0,6 - 0,8 Nm.
● För användning enligt kraven måste LED-displayer

strömförsörjning med märkning ”for use in class 2
circuits” användas. STATE LED grön Normaldrift
Ingen ström ≥ 8 A får flyta!
blinkande Inlärning (ytterligare
signalfunktioner: Se
tillståndstabell)
OUT LED gul giltig kodnyckel igenkänd
ERROR LED röd - Testingång aktiverad

- Internfel, elektronik
- Ogiltig inlärning
(se även tillståndtabell)
Vid operatörfel (ERROR) kan man genom att under

ca. 10 sekunder avbryta strömförsörjningen nollställa
utvärderingsenheten.
Ba_T4000_sw.pmd 160 31.01.2005, 11:37

S
Systembeskrivning Inlärningsfunktion för kontakten
Säkerhetssensor T 4000 består av tre komponenter: Innan systemet utgör en funktionsenhet måste bryta-
ren genom en inlärningsfunktion anpassas till
- Kodnyckel utvärderingsenheten.
- Sensor Under denna inlärningsfas skall systemet befinna sig
- Utvärderingsenhet i säkert tillstånd, dvs. säkerhetsutgångarna och
dörrens testutgång skall vara LOW.
Varje utlevererad kodnyckel har en entydig elektronisk
kodning och är därmed unik för systemet. En bryta- ● Inlärningsfunktion för kodnyckel nr. 1 (leverans-
res kod kan inte omprogrammeras. tillstånd):
1.Utvärderingsenheten får driftsspänning
Sensorn fästs på skyddsanordningens fasta del och - den gröna LED:en blinkar snabbt (ca. 4 Hz)
ansluts till utvärderingsenheten med en skärmad 2.För fram kodnyckeln mot sensorn
tvåledarkabel. (Kontroll av att avståndet < Sao)
Kodnyckeln, som är infäst i skyddsanordningen, förs - Inlärningen börjar, den grön LED:en blinkar lång-
fram mot sensorn när dörren stängs. När samt (c:a 1 Hz)
inkopplingsavståndet nås matas spänning via den 3.Inlärningen avslutas (efter 60 sekunder)
induktiva sensorn till kodnyckeln och dataöverföring - den gröna LED:en slocknar
kan ske. 4.För att aktivera den inlärda koden i utvärderings-
Koden jämförs med den inlärda koden i enheten måste dess driftsspänning därefter avbry-
utvärderingsenheten. Är koden korrekt kopplar tas under c:a 10 sekunder.
säkerhetsutgångarna (reläutgång) och dörrens
testutgång OUT (halvledarutgång) kopplar till HIGH. ● Inlärningsfunktion för en ny kodnyckel:
Brytarens dynamiska kontroll och den 1.Utvärderingsenheten får driftsspänning
redundanta och diversitära uppbyggnaden i 2.För fram den nya kodnyckeln mot sensorn
säkerhetselektroniken tillsammans med två (Kontroll av att avståndet < Sao)
säkerhetsutgångar ser till att utvärderingsenheten - Inlärningen börjar, den grön LED:en blinkar lång-
kopplar till säkert tillstånd närhelst ett fel detekteras. samt (c:a 1 Hz)
Öppnas skyddsanordningen kopplar säkerhetskret- 3.Inlärningen avslutas (efter 60 sekunder)
sens utgångar från och dörrens testutgång (OUT) - den gröna LED:en slocknar, den nya koden är
kopplar till LOW. Slutarkontakternas tillstånd lagrad, den gamla deaktiverad
övervakas internt via tvångsstyrda öppningskontakter. 4.För att aktivera den nya brytarens inlärda kod i
Ett internt fel i utvärderingsenheten medför att utvärderingsenheten måste dess driftsspänning
säkerhetskretsen kopplar från, diagnosutgång därefter avbrytas under c:a 10 sekunder.
(ERROR) kopplar till HIGH och LED ERROR
lyser röd.
Anm.:
Anm: Uppehållstiden för en kodnyckel inom eller och ● Att flera gånger lära samma kodnyckel för
utanför aktiveringsområdet skall vara minst samma utvärderingsenhet är inte möjligt.
0,5 sekunder annars kan utvärderingsenheten ● Antalet giltiga inlärningar för en utvärdering-
uppfatta tillståndet som fel och LED/ERROR lyser senhet är maximerade till 8 st.
röd. ● Utvärderingsenheten kan endast drivas med
Genom att avbryta strömförsörjningen återförs en- den senast inlärda brytaren.
heten till driftsläge. ● En inlärning är ogiltig när:
- inlärningen avbryts innan den gröna LED:en
slocknat
- strömförsörjningen avbryts under inlärningen
OBS:
Även efter den 8:e inlärningen eller då en "gammal"
kodnyckel förs fram till läshuvudet övergår systemet
automatiskt till inlärningsläge. I båda fallen inleds en
60 sekunders inlärningsfas, den sista brytarkoden
förblir dock aktiv i minnet (se tillståndstabell). Ingen
ny kod lärs in.
Ba_T4000_sw.pmd 161 31.01.2005, 11:37

System-tillståndstabell
SPS LED-signal Läge

In- Utgång
(Säkerhetskrets)
Blinkimpulser
STATE (grön)
Dörrposition
OUT (Signal)
Relä KA, KB
Kodnyckel/
ERR (röd)
OUT (gul)
Antal
ERR
TST
Normaldrift Stängd Till N 1 0 1 1 0 Normaldrift, dörr stängd
Öppen Från N 0 0 0 0 0 Normaldrift, dörr öppen
Idrifttagning blinkar
Första idrifttagning efter leverans
Öppen Från N 0 0 kontinuerlig 0 0
Färdig för första inlärning
med 4 Hz
blinkar 60 s
Stängd Från N 0 0 med ca. 0 0 Inlärning
1Hz
Positiv kvittering för framgångsrik inlärning.
Stängd Från N 0 0 0 0 0 För normaldrift måste utrustningen först slås
av och sedan åter på.
Lägesvisning x Från x 0 0 3 0 0 Visning efter 1:a till 5:e inlärningen
Visning av återstående tillåtna inlärningar efter

x Från x 0 0 2 0 0
den 6:e.
Blinkning
en gång Visning av återstående tillåtna inlärningar efter
x Från x 0 0 efter tillslag 1 0 0
den 7:e.
Utrustningen kan inte längre genomföra en

x Från x 0 0 0 0 0
inlärning.
Felmeddelande x Från N 0 1 0 0 1 Komponentfel i utrustningen
x Från N 0 1 0 0 1 Kodnyckel kortare tid än 0,5 s i aktiveringsområdet
Operatörsfel Stängd Från N 0 1 1 0 1 Otillåten 9:e inlärning

Stängd Från N 0 1 Korta 2 0 1 Otillåten inlärning för tidigare kodnyckel
blinkföljder
med Negativ kvittering vid 10:e inlärning, kodnyckel
Stängd Från N 0 1 upprepning 3 0 1
hölls mindre än 60 sek framför läshuvudet.
varje sekund
Testdrift Öppen Från 1 0 1 1 0 1
ext. utrustningstest av funktionerna

Stängd Från 1 0 1 1 0 1
”ÖPPEN” och ERR vid stängd dörr.
N = 0 Volt eller ej kopplad 1 = ljus

0 = 0 Volt 0 = mörk
1 = 24 Volt
x = 0 eller 24 Volt
resp. dörr öppen eller stängd
Anm.:
● Utvärderingsenheten kan endast drivas med den sist inlärda brytaren.
Kontroll och Service
För att säkerställa en felfri och varaktig funktion är - att sensorns kabelingång är tät
det nödvändigt med regelbundna kontroller av: - att utvärderingsenhetens kabelanslutningar inte är
- säker infästning av kodnyckeln och sensorn (med glappa
de medföljande säkerhetsskruvarna) - frånkopplingsavståndet
Ba_T4000_sw.pmd 162 31.01.2005, 11:37

S
Funktionskontroll (Självtest) Säkerhetsutgångarna kopplar från och möjliggör
test av hela säkerhetskretsen.
Funktionen för elektromagnetiska säkerhetsbrytare Som bevakningsfunktion ställs diagnosutgången
eller magnetsensorer kan kontrolleras genom att ERR på utvärderingsenheten in på HIGH.
öppna skyddsanordningen cykliskt. Vid återställningen av testingången, återställs
diagnosutgången ERR på LOW av utvärde-
Fr.o.m. styrningskategori 2 måste enligt EN 60204-1: ringsenheten, den röda LED:n slocknar och säker-
1997 (Kap.9.4.2.4) en funktionskontroll av hela sä- hetsutgångarna kopplar igen.
kerhetssystemet genomföras vid start eller i vissa Därmed är det möjligt att genomföra ett självtest
fastlagda intervall. utan att öppna säkerhetssystemet.
Den interna funktionen för säkerhetssensor T 4000

behöver inte kontrolleras eftersom den övervakar sig Befrielse från ansvar
själv i realtid. Sammansvetsningen av en utgångs-
kontakt (reläutgång) detekteras av instrumentet nästa Tillverkaren befrias från allt ansvar om:
gång skyddsanordningen öppnas. En kortslutning i
utgångsledning detekteras inte av brytaren. Däruöver - icke avsedd användning av utrustningen
kan hela säkerhetskretsen testas utan att öppna - säkerhetsbetämmelserna ej följts
skyddanordningen. Genom att anlägga 24 V DC på - tillbyggnad eller elanslutning utförts av icke-
testingången simuleras öppningen av skydds- auktoriserad personal
anordningen. - ingrepp från tredje man
Typiskt reaktionsområde (ledningslängd l = 0 till 25 m) *)
Säkerställ ett säkert Utgångsläge

avstängningsavstånd
m
sar = 23 mm (se Kodnyckel Hysteres
säkerhetsanvisningar s TILL
för sensorer, sid 168).
Sensor
FRÅN
Avstängnings- Avstånds
8 Sao
avstånd
Avstånds [mm]
Hysteres
FRÅN 6 FRÅN
Mittförsk-
jutning S ao
2
TILL
-8 -6 -4 -2 0 2 4 6 8
Mittförskjutning m [mm]
*)
Min-/maxvärden, se Tekniska data
Ba_T4000_sw.pmd 163 31.01.2005, 11:37

Anslutnings- och blockkopplingsschema, anslutningsexempel
Driftsspänning
+ 24 V 0 V
DC
Anslutning,skärm-
brun vit
Sensor
Kodnyckel
CPU-A CPU-B Trans-

Safety Path):
Dubbel dynamisk
Drift utan extern testning
säkerhetskoppling med
TST-ing ång okopplad
felövervakning av kodnyckel,
KA KB sensor och sensorkabel
TST T
Testing ång
10kW OUT Startsignalutgång (ingen säkerhetsutgång)
ERR Diagnosutgång
10kW
GND 0V ( ) på driftsspänning
H1/H2 Anslutning, sensor
SH Skärmanslutning, sensor
13/14 Anslutning, brytare 1. Säkerhetsrelä löses
23/24 Anslutning, brytare 2. Säkerhetsrelä löses
Säkerhet s - SPS
KANAL A
I0 Säkerhetsingång
0V
TO0 taktat utgång
0V
KANAL B
Anslutningsex. med
I1 Säkerhetsingång
säkerhets-PLC
0V
TO1 taktat utgång
0V
I2 Ingångar
I3
0V
O2 statisk
utgång
Ba_T4000_sw.pmd 164 31.01.2005, 11:37

S
Utvärderingsenhet T 4000-1RBA 01
Måttritning
22,5 114,5
H1 H2 SH
24V 0V
STATE
99
OUT
ERROR
TST OUT ERR GND

13 14 23 24
passande till standard-

normskena 35 mm
Kopplingsförhållande
Skyddsanordning
2 säkerhetsutgångar (reläutgångar)
1 dörrens testutgång (halvledarutgång, ingen stängd öppen
säkerhetsutgång) (Kodnyckel igenkänd) (Kodnyckel inte i
aktiveringsområde)
Sensor Kodnyckel Sensor
13 14 13 14
23 24 23 24
24 V OUT 24 V OUT
Ba_T4000_sw.pmd 165 31.01.2005, 11:37

Tekniska data
Parameter Värde Enhet
min. typ. max.
Chassimaterial Plast PA6.6
Mått 114,5 x 99 x 22,5 mm
Vikt 0,2 kg
Omgivningstemperatur vid UB = 24 V DC 0 - +55 °C
Lagertemperatur -25 - +70 °C
Skyddsklass IP20
Kapslingsklass Kapslingsklass III, nedsmutsningsgrad 2
Materialgrupp II
Montage Normskena 35 mm enl. DIN 46277
Antal sensorer 1 sensor per utvärderingsenhet
Anslutning instickbar skruvklämma / kodad
Anslutningsklämmor 0,14 - 2,5 mm²
Driftsspänning UB
21 24 27 V DC
(stabiliserad, rippel < 5 %)
Strömförbrukning (med åtdraget relä) 150 mA
Säkerhetsutgångar 2 säkerhetsreläer med var sin slutare
Kopplingsström (reläutgångar) 1)
- vid kopplingsspänning 0,1 ... 60 V 1 - 300 mA
- vid kopplingsspänning 10 ... 24 V 1 - 4000 mA
Avsäkring, extern (säkerhetskrets) 6,3 A snabb
Förbrukningskategori enl. EN 60947-5-2 AC-12 300mA 60V 50Hz / DC-12 300mA 60V
AC-140 2A 30V 50Hz / DC-13 4A 30V
Styrningskategori enl. EN 954 3
Klassificering enl. IEC/EN 60 947-5-3 PDF-M
Isolationsspänning Ui - - 63 V
Stötspänningsstabilitet Uimp - - 1,5 kV
Vibrationskänslighet motsvarande EN 60 947-5-2
Mekaniskt spel (relä) 10 x 106
Kopplingsfördröjning vid tillståndsändring - - 180 ms
Beredskapsfördröjning 2) 3 s
Uppehållstid 0,5 - - s
Signalutgångar (Diagnos ERR, klartecken OUT,
Halvledarutgång, p-kopplande) 3)
- Utgångsspänning 0,8 x UB - UB V DC
- Belastbarhet - - 20 mA
Testingång LOW 0 - 2 V DC
HIGH 15 - UB V DC
EMV-Skyddskrav enl. IEC 60947-5-3
LED-visning STATE LED grön: Normaldrift
blinkande: Inlärning
OUT LED gul: Kodnyckel noterad
ERROR LED röd: Testeingång aktiverad
Internfel, elektronik
Ogiltig inlärning
1)
Kopplas en kopplingsström > 300 mA via reläutgångarna kan ingen klenström (≤ 10 mA) kopplas säkert, beroende på att guldkontakten är
bränd.
2)
Efter det att driftsspänningen slagits till är reläutgångarna frånkopplade under beredskapsfördröjningen och signalutgångarna, som ligger i
läge LOW.
3)
inte kortslutningssäker
Ba_T4000_sw.pmd 166 31.01.2005, 11:37

S
Sensor T 4000-DNA...
Sensor T 4000-DNA..P (fast ansluten ledning)
Måttskiss
Ledningslängd l 42 12
ø4,5
ø8
T4000-D XXXXXX
25
32 ±0,1 aktiv 4,6 aktiv
yta yta
Anslutning
Sensor med anslutningsledning
Skärm
BN Sensor
WH
H1 H2 SH
Utvärderingsenhet
Sensor T 4000-DNAC med kontaktdon M8 (kombinerad snäpp- och skruvinfästning)

Måttskiss
32,6 42 12
6,8 32 ±0,1 4,6

ø8
ø4,5
ø10
T4000-DNACXXXXXX
25
aktiv
3 yta
4
aktiv 1
min.38 5,5
yta
Anslutning
Sensor med kontaktdon
WH Skärm 3
4
BN 1
Vy över sensorns
H1 H2 SH kontaktdon
Utvärderingsenhet
Ba_T4000_sw.pmd 167 31.01.2005, 11:37

Tekniska data
min. typ. max.
Chassimaterial Fortron, glasfiberarmerad termoplast, fullgjute
Mått 42 x 25 x 12 mm
Vikt (inkl. 10 m kabel) 0,3 kg
Omgivningstemperatur -25 - +70 °C
Skyddsklass IP67
Inbyggnadsläge valfritt
Verkningssätt induktivt
Dynamisk dataöverföring
2 kbit/s
till utvärderingsenhet
Uppehållstid 1) 0,5 - - s
Aktiveringsområde vid mittre förskjutning m = 0 2)
Kabellängd l = 0 till 25 m
- Inkopplingsavstånd Sao 5 6 -
- Kopplingshysteres 0,5 1,5 -
- Säkert frånkopplingsavstånd Sar - - 23 mm
Kabellängd l ≥ 25 till 50 m
- Inkopplingsavstånd Sao 4 4,8 -
- Kopplingshysteres 0,4 1,2 -
- Säkert frånkopplingsavstånd Sar - - 23
Strömförsörjning via utvärderingsenheten
Anslutning, sensor T 4000-DNA..P fastgjuten anslutningsledning, med ledarändhylsor
Ledningslängd, sensor T 4000-DNA..P 15 m
Anslutning, sensor T 4000-DNAC med kontakt M8 (Kombinerad med tryck-
och skruvanslutning), 3-polig
Ledningslängd T 4000-DNAC - - 50 m
1)
Varaktigheten är den tid under vilken kodnyckeln måste befinna sig i eller utanför utlösningsområdet.
2)
Dessa värden gäller för utvändig och infälld montering av sensorn och kodnyckeln i aluminium.
Monteringsanvisningar
● Sensorns anslutningsledning får inte förlängas.

Mellanklämmor får inte användas.
● Kodnyckeln och sensorn ska monteras så att:

- ändytorna vid stängd skyddsanordning befinner sig mittemot varandra på ett påslagsavstånd av 0,8 x Sao
eller närmare (Se tekniska data).
- de inte används som mekaniska anslag.
- de är direkt förbundna med skyddsanordningen, t.ex. genom att använda bifogade säkerhetsskruvar.
Säkerhetsbestämmelser
● Vid infälld montering av sensorn och/eller kodnyckeln ändras kopplingsavståndet i förhållande till
monteringsdjupet och skyddsanordningens material.
● Skyddsanordningen måste vara så konstruerad att fara är utesluten fram till avståndet Sar (säkert
frånkopplingsavstånd).
Anm.: Vid Sar = 23 mm är relaäutgångarna säkert frånkopplade, även vid ett internt driftsavbrott.
Ba_T4000_sw.pmd 168 31.01.2005, 11:37

S
Kodnyckel T 4000-1KBA
Måttritning
42 12
ø4,5
ø8
T4000-1KBA 5306531
25
32 ±0,1 4,6
aktiv aktiv
yta yta
Tekniska data
min. typ. max.
Chassimaterial Fortron, glasfiberarmerad termoplast, fullgjuten
Mått 42 x 25 x 12 mm
Vikt 0,02 kg
Omgivningstemperatur -25 - +70 °C
Skyddsklass IP67
Inbyggndasläge aktiv yta mitt för sensorn
Uppehållstid 1) 0,5 – – s
1)
Uppehållstiden är den tid som brytaren måste befinna sig inom eller utanför aktiveringsområdet.
Ba_T4000_sw.pmd 169 31.01.2005, 11:37

N.daiILnds
Phon, +31(430 229 25 44
E-Mal I m s i d v i l
Norge
Bslglum/Luxambouig h m +4767815000
rn +32 (0)2488 55 88 EMal
E-Mal nl&&be brteirslch
BraS11 R o m +43(0)22l62286O
Phons +56 11 50914900 E-Mal omoe@5k+a
EMal sac5skkmm.br Polska
CelkA Republlka Phon, +48 22 837 40 50
Phone M20257911850 E-Mal Info~sickpl
EMal &hWdLa Schwalz
Chlna Phom +414161929 39
rn +852-27638966 E-Mal oon-di
E-Mal Ck@WLmmhk Slngapoia
Danmark Phon, +65 6744 3732
Rione M545826400 E W l admh@sWs@.msg
EMai M W d k Suoml
Davtschland R o m +3588-2515 800
rn +49 (0)211 53 01-280 E-Mal *@&n
E-Mal n l & W S Svsilge
Phon, +46 8 680 64 50
EMal- I
Tslwan
France Phone +888 2 23856292
+331M623500 E W ~ skkgcSms6.iiwinet
E-Mal iiM%kkh Tüiklye
Gieat Biltaln h m +90 216 388 95 90 pbr
rn +44 141727 831121 E-Mal Irdc@WLmmt
EMal nr-uk lISA/Canada/MCxlco
ItaIIa Phon, +1@52) 941-6780
Phon, +U80227408318 180~257425- t d h e
EMal iif&z4ciui E-Mal InfoQSkh6a.m
lapan
Ftcm +81(0)3 3358 1341
EMal nlc&d~)p
KOI.8 Mon and agendu,
Phon, +82-2786 6321/4 In sll r.& h d W natbns ai
EMal kam - mwiskkmm
Preface
SIMATIC S7-300 CPU 31xC and CPU 31x, Technical Data
Guide to the S7-300

1
______________
documentation
Operating and display

2
SIMATIC ______________
elements
3
S7-300 ______________
Communication
CPU 31xC and CPU 31x, Technical 4

Data ______________
Memory concept
5
Manual ______________
Cycle and reaction times
6
______________
Technical data of CPU 31xC
7
The following supplement is part of this documentation:
______________
Technical data of CPU 31x
No. Designation Drawing number Edition
A
1
2
Product Information
Product Information
A5E00688649-02
A5E00830174-01
03/2006
07/2006 ______________
Appendix
This manual is included in the documentation package

with Order No.: 6ES7398-8FA10-8BA0
01/2006 Edition
A5E00105475-06
Safety Guidelines
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
Danger
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
Warning
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
Caution
with a safety alert symbol, indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
Caution
without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
Notice
indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the corresponding information is not taken into
account.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The device/system may only be set up and used in conjunction with this documentation. Commissioning and
operation of a device/system may only be performed by qualified personnel. Within the context of the safety notes
in this documentation qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission, ground and
label devices, systems and circuits in accordance with established safety practices and standards.
Prescribed Usage
Note the following:
Warning
This device may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the technical description and only in
connection with devices or components from other manufacturers which have been approved or recommended
by Siemens. Correct, reliable operation of the product requires proper transport, storage, positioning and
assembly as well as careful operation and maintenance.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of the Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this
publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the
owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.
Siemens AG Order No.: A5E00105475-06 Copyright © Siemens AG 2006.

Automation and Drives Edition 0102/2006 Technical data subject to change
Postfach 48 48
90437 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface
Purpose of the Manual

This manual contains all the information you will need concerning the configuration,
communication, memory concept, cycle, response times and technical data for the CPUs.
You will then learn the points to consider when upgrading to one of the CPUs discussed in
this manual.
Required basic knowledge

• To understand this manual, you require a general knowledge of automation engineering.
• You should also be accustomed to working with STEP 7 basic software.
Area of application
Table 1 Application area covered by this manual
CPU Convention: Order number as of version

CPU designations: Firmware Hardware
CPU 312C CPU 31xC 6ES7312-5BD01-0AB0 V2.0.0 01
CPU 313C 6ES7313-5BE01-0AB0 V2.0.0 01
CPU 313C-2 PtP 6ES7313-6BE01-0AB0 V2.0.0 01
CPU 313C-2 DP 6ES7313-6CE01-0AB0 V2.0.0 01
CPU 314C-2 PtP 6ES7314-6BF02-0AB0 V2.0.0 01
CPU 314C-2 DP 6ES7314-6CF02-0AB0 V2.0.0 01
CPU 312 CPU 31x 6ES7312-1AD10-0AB0 V2.0.0 01
CPU 314 6ES7314-1AF11-0AB0 V2.0.0 01
CPU 315-2 DP 6ES7315-2AG10-0AB0 V2.0.0 01
CPU 315-2 PN/DP 6ES7315-2EG10-0AB0 V2.3.0 01
CPU 317-2 DP 6ES7317-2AJ10-0AB0 V2.1.0 01
CPU 317-2 PN/DP 6ES7317-2EJ10-0AB0 V2.3.0 01
CPU 319-3 PN/DP 6ES7318-3EL00-0AB0 V2.4.0 01
CPU 31xC and CPU 31x, Technical Data

Manual, 01/2006 Edition, A5E00105475-06 iii
Preface
Note
For information on the special features of the CPU 315F-2 DP (6ES7 315-6FF00-0AB0) and
CPU 317F-2 DP
(6ES7 317-6FF00-0AB0), refer to the product information in the Internet:
http://support.automation.siemens.com under article ID 17015818.
Note
There you can obtain the descriptions of all current modules. For new modules, or modules
of a more recent version, we reserve the right to include a Product Information containing
latest information.
Changes in comparison to the previous version

Compared to the previous version of this manual CPU31xC and CPU31x, Technical Data,
with the footnote number: A5E00105475-05, Release 08/2004, there are following changes:
• CPU 319-3 PN/DP, 6ES7 318-3EL00-0AB0, Firmware V2.4.0, supplemented
• Product information A5E00385496-01 integrated into manual
New features of CPU 319-3 PN/DP:

• Increased instruction-processing performance
• Expansion of quantity structures:
– 1.4 MB work memory
– 4096 modules
• CPU with 3 interfaces (1xMPI/DP, 1xDP and 1xPN)
• Isochronous mode for a sub-process diagram
• New system functions:
– Measuring initiator for diagnostic repeater (SFC 103)
• New message blocks (SFC105-108)
• Addition of following protocol versions to open communication via Industrial Ethernet:
– Connection oriented protocol: ISO on TCP according to RFC 1006
– Connectionless protocol: UDP according to RFC 768
Approvals
The SIMATIC S7-300 product series has the following approvals:
• Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.: UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment)
• Canadian Standards Association: CSA C22.2 No. 142, (Process Control Equipment)
• Factory Mutual Research: Approval Standard Class Number 3611

iv Manual, 01/2006 Edition, A5E00105475-06
Preface
CE label
The SIMATIC S7-300 product series satisfies the requirements and safety specifications of
the following
EC Directives:
• EC Directive 73/23/EEC "Low-voltage directive"
• EC Directive 89/336/EEC "EMC directive"
C tick mark
The SIMATIC S7-300 product series is compliant with AS/NZS 2064 (Australia).
Standards
The SIMATIC S7-300 product series is compliant with IEC 61131-2.
Documentation classification
This manual is part of the S7-300 documentation package.
Name of the manual Description

YOU ARE READING the Manual Operation and display elements,
• CPU 31xC and CPU 31x, Technical communication, memory concept, cycle and
Specifications response times, technical specifications
Operating Instructions Configuration, installation, wiring, addressing,
• S7-300, CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Installation commissioning, maintenance and the test
functions, diagnostics and troubleshooting.
System Manual Basic information on PROFINET:
PROFINET System Description Network components, data exchange and
communication, PROFINET IO, Component
Based Automation, sample application
PROFINET IO and Component Based
Automation
Programming Manual Guideline for the migration from PROFIBUS DP
From PROFIBUS DP to PROFINET IO to PROFINET I/O.
Manual Description of the individual technological
• CPU 31xC: Technological functions functions Positioning, Counting. PtP
communication, rules
• Examples
The CD contains examples of the technological
functions
Reference Manual Descriptions of functions and technical
• S7-300 Automation System: Module data specifications of signal modules, power supply
modules and interface modules
Instruction List List of operation repertoire of CPU and its
• CPU 31xC and CPU 31x execution times. List of executable blocks.

Manual, 01/2006 Edition, A5E00105475-06 v
Preface

Getting Started The example used in this Getting Started
The following Getting Started editions are available guides you through the various steps in
as a collective volume: commissioning required to obtain a fully
• CPU 31x: Commissioning functional application.
• CPU 31xC: Commissioning
• CPU 31xC: Positioning with analog output
• CPU 31xC: Positioning with digital output
• CPU 31xC: Counting
• CPU 31xC: Rules
• CPU 31xC: PtP communication
• CPU 315-2 PN/DP, 317-2 PN/DP, CPU 319-3
PN/DP: Configuring the PROFINET interface
• CPU 317-2 PN/DP: Configuring an
ET 200S as PROFINET IO device
• CPU 443-1 Advanced: Configuration of the
PROFINET interface with an
IE/PB-Link and ET 200B
Additional information required:

Reference Manual Description of the SFCs, SFBs and OBs.
System software for S7-300/400 system and standard This manual is part of the STEP 7
functions documentation package. For further
information, refer to the STEP 7 Online
Help.
Manual Description of Industrial Ethernet
SIMATIC NET: Twisted Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks networks, network configuration,
components, installation guidelines for
networked automation systems in
buildings, etc.
Manual Description of the SIMATIC iMap
Component Based Automation: Configure SIMATIC iMap configuration software
plants
Manual Descriptions and instructions for creating
Component Based Automation: SIMATIC iMap STEP 7 PROFINET components with STEP 7
AddOn, create PROFINET components and for using SIMATIC devices in
Component Based Automation
Manual Description of the system property
Isochronous mode "Isochronous mode"
Manual Programming with STEP 7
Programming with STEP 7 V5.3
Manual Basics, services, networks,
SIMATIC communication communication functions, connecting
PGs/OPs, engineering and configuring in
STEP 7.

vi Manual, 01/2006 Edition, A5E00105475-06
Preface
Recycling and Disposal

The devices described in this manual can be recycled, due to their ecologically compatible
components. For environment-friendly recycling and disposal of your old equipment, contact
a certified disposal facility for electronic scrap.

Manual, 01/2006 Edition, A5E00105475-06 vii
Preface

viii Manual, 01/2006 Edition, A5E00105475-06
Table of contents
Preface. ..................................................................................................................................................... iii
1 Guide to the S7-300 documentation ....................................................................................................... 1-1
2 Operating and display elements ............................................................................................................. 2-1
2.1 Operating and display elements: CPU 31xC ............................................................................. 2-1
2.1.1 Operating and display elements: CPU 31xC ............................................................................. 2-1
2.1.2 Status and Error Indicators: CPU 31xC ..................................................................................... 2-4
2.2 Operating and display elements: CPU 31x................................................................................ 2-5
2.2.1 Operating and display elements: CPU 312, 314, 315-2 DP: ..................................................... 2-5
2.2.2 Operating and display elements: CPU 317-2 DP ...................................................................... 2-7
2.2.3 Operating and display elements: CPU 31x-2 PN/DP ................................................................ 2-9
2.2.4 Operating and display elements: CPU 319-3 PN/DP .............................................................. 2-11
2.2.5 Status and error displays of CPU 31x...................................................................................... 2-13
3 Communication....................................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1 Interfaces ................................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.1 Multi-Point Interface (MPI) ......................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.2 PROFIBUS DP........................................................................................................................... 3-2
3.1.3 PROFINET (PN)......................................................................................................................... 3-3
3.1.4 Point to Point (PtP) .................................................................................................................... 3-5
3.2 Communication services............................................................................................................ 3-6
3.2.1 Overview of communication services ........................................................................................ 3-6
3.2.2 PG communication..................................................................................................................... 3-7
3.2.3 OP communication..................................................................................................................... 3-8
3.2.4 Data exchanged by means of S7 basic communication............................................................ 3-8
3.2.5 S7 communication ..................................................................................................................... 3-8
3.2.6 Global data communication (MPI only)...................................................................................... 3-9
3.2.7 Routing..................................................................................................................................... 3-11
3.2.8 Point-to-point connection ......................................................................................................... 3-15
3.2.9 Data consistency...................................................................................................................... 3-15
3.2.10 Communication by means of PROFINET ................................................................................ 3-16
3.2.10.1 PROFINET IO System ............................................................................................................. 3-19
3.2.10.2 Blocks in PROFINET IO........................................................................................................... 3-20
3.2.10.3 System status lists (SSLs) in PROFINET IO ........................................................................... 3-22
3.2.10.4 Open communication via Industrial Ethernet ........................................................................... 3-24
3.2.10.5 SNMP communication service ................................................................................................. 3-27
3.3 S7 connections ........................................................................................................................ 3-27
3.3.1 S7 connection as communication path .................................................................................... 3-27
3.3.2 Assignment of S7 connections................................................................................................. 3-28
3.3.3 Distribution and availability of S7 connection resources ......................................................... 3-30
3.3.4 Connection resources for routing............................................................................................. 3-32
3.4 DPV1........................................................................................................................................ 3-33

Manual, 01/2006 Edition, A5E00105475-06 ix
Table of contents
4 Memory concept ..................................................................................................................................... 4-1

4.1 Memory areas and retentivity..................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.1 CPU memory areas.................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.2 Retentivity of load memory, system memory and RAM............................................................. 4-2
4.1.3 Retentivity of memory objects .................................................................................................... 4-3
4.1.4 Address areas of system memory ............................................................................................. 4-4
4.1.5 Properties of the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card (MMC) ............................................................ 4-8
4.2 Memory functions..................................................................................................................... 4-10
4.2.1 General: Memory functions ...................................................................................................... 4-10
4.2.2 Loading user program from SIMATIC Micro Memory Card (MMC) to the CPU ...................... 4-10
4.2.3 Handling with modules ............................................................................................................. 4-11
4.2.3.1 Download of new blocks or delta downloads ........................................................................... 4-11
4.2.3.2 Uploading blocks...................................................................................................................... 4-11
4.2.3.3 Deleting blocks......................................................................................................................... 4-12
4.2.3.4 Compressing blocks................................................................................................................. 4-12
4.2.3.5 Promming (RAM to ROM) ........................................................................................................ 4-12
4.2.4 CPU memory reset and restart ................................................................................................ 4-13
4.2.5 Recipes .................................................................................................................................... 4-14
4.2.6 Measured value log files .......................................................................................................... 4-16
4.2.7 Backup of project data to SIMATIC Micro Memory Card (MMC)............................................. 4-18
5 Cycle and reaction times......................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2 Cycle time................................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2.2 Calculating the cycle time .......................................................................................................... 5-4
5.2.3 Different cycle times................................................................................................................... 5-7
5.2.4 Communication load .................................................................................................................. 5-8
5.2.5 Cycle time extension as a result of testing and commissioning functions ............................... 5-10
5.2.6 Cycle extension through Component Based Automation (CBA) ............................................. 5-10
5.3 Response time ......................................................................................................................... 5-13
5.3.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................. 5-13
5.3.2 Shortest response time ............................................................................................................ 5-15
5.3.3 Longest response time............................................................................................................. 5-16
5.3.4 Reducing the response time with direct I/O access................................................................. 5-17
5.4 Calculating method for calculating the cycle/response time .................................................... 5-18
5.5 Interrupt response time ............................................................................................................ 5-20
5.5.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................. 5-20
5.5.2 Reproducibility of Time-Delay and Watchdog Interrupts ......................................................... 5-22
5.6 Sample calculations ................................................................................................................. 5-22
5.6.1 Example of cycle time calculation ............................................................................................ 5-22
5.6.2 Sample of response time calculation ....................................................................................... 5-23
5.6.3 Example of interrupt response time calculation ....................................................................... 5-25
6 Technical data of CPU 31xC................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1 General technical data ............................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1.1 Dimensions of CPU 31xC .......................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1.2 Technical specifications of the Micro Memory Card (MMC) ...................................................... 6-2
6.2 CPU 312C .................................................................................................................................. 6-3
6.3 CPU 313C .................................................................................................................................. 6-8
6.4 CPU 313C-2 PtP and CPU 313C-2 DP ................................................................................... 6-14

x Manual, 01/2006 Edition, A5E00105475-06
Table of contents
6.5 CPU 314C-2 PtP and CPU 314C-2 DP ................................................................................... 6-21

6.6 Technical data of the integrated I/O......................................................................................... 6-28
6.6.1 Arrangement and usage of integrated I/Os.............................................................................. 6-28
6.6.2 Analog I/O ................................................................................................................................ 6-34
6.6.3 Parameterization ...................................................................................................................... 6-38
6.6.4 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................. 6-43
6.6.5 Diagnostics............................................................................................................................... 6-44
6.6.6 Digital inputs............................................................................................................................. 6-45
6.6.7 Digital outputs .......................................................................................................................... 6-47
6.6.8 Analog inputs ........................................................................................................................... 6-49
6.6.9 Analog outputs ......................................................................................................................... 6-51
7 Technical data of CPU 31x ..................................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1 General technical data ............................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1.1 Dimensions of CPU 31x............................................................................................................. 7-1
7.1.2 Technical specifications of the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card (MMC) ...................................... 7-2
7.2 CPU 312..................................................................................................................................... 7-3
7.3 CPU 314..................................................................................................................................... 7-8
7.4 CPU 315-2 DP ......................................................................................................................... 7-13
7.5 CPU 315-2 PN/DP ................................................................................................................... 7-19
7.6 CPU 317-2 DP ......................................................................................................................... 7-26
7.7 CPU 317-2 PN/DP ................................................................................................................... 7-33
7.8 CPU 319-3 PN/DP ................................................................................................................... 7-40
A Appendix.................................................................................................................................................A-1
A.1 Information about upgrading to a CPU 31xC or CPU 31x ......................................................... A-1
A.1.1 Scope ......................................................................................................................................... A-1
A.1.2 Changed behavior of certain SFCs............................................................................................ A-2
A.1.3 Interrupt events from distributed I/Os while the CPU status is in STOP ................................... A-4
A.1.4 Runtimes that change while the program is running ................................................................. A-4
A.1.5 Converting the diagnostic addresses of DP slaves ................................................................... A-5
A.1.6 Reusing existing hardware configurations ................................................................................. A-5
A.1.7 Replacing a CPU 31xC/31x ....................................................................................................... A-6
A.1.8 Using consistent data areas in the process image of a DP slave system ................................. A-6
A.1.9 Load memory concept for the CPU 31xC/31x ........................................................................... A-7
A.1.10 PG/OP functions ........................................................................................................................ A-7
A.1.11 Routing for the CPU 31xC/31x as an intelligent slave............................................................... A-7
A.1.12 Changed retentive behavior for CPUs with firmware >= V2.1.0 ................................................ A-8
A.1.13 FMs/CPs with separate MPI address in the central rack of a CPU 315-2 PN/DP,
a CPU 317 or a CPU 319-3 PN/DP ........................................................................................... A-8
A.1.14 Using loadable blocks for S7 communication for the integrated PROFINET interface ............. A-9
Glossary ..................................................................................................................................... Glossary-1
Index................................................................................................................................................ Index-1

Manual, 01/2006 Edition, A5E00105475-06 xi
Table of contents
Tables
Table 1 Application area covered by this manual ...................................................................................... iii
Table 1-1 Ambient influence on the automation system (AS).................................................................... 1-1
Table 1-2 Galvanic isolation ....................................................................................................................... 1-1
Table 1-3 Communication between sensors/actuators and the PLC......................................................... 1-2
Table 1-4 The use of local and distributed I/O ........................................................................................... 1-2
Table 1-5 Configuration consisting of the Central Unit (CU) and Expansion Modules (EMs).................... 1-2
Table 1-6 CPU performance ...................................................................................................................... 1-3
Table 1-7 Communication .......................................................................................................................... 1-3
Table 1-8 Software ..................................................................................................................................... 1-3
Table 1-9 Supplementary features ............................................................................................................. 1-4
Table 2-1 Mode selector switch settings .................................................................................................... 2-3
Table 2-2 Differences of the CPUs 31xC ................................................................................................... 2-4
Table 2-5 Mode selector switch settings .................................................................................................. 2-10
Table 2-6 Mode selector switch settings .................................................................................................. 2-12
Table 2-7 General status and error displays of the CPU 31x .................................................................. 2-13
Table 2-8 Bus error displays of CPU 31x................................................................................................. 2-13
Table 3-1 Operating modes for CPUs with two DP interfaces ................................................................... 3-2
Table 3-2 Communication services of the CPUs ....................................................................................... 3-6
Table 3-3 Client and server in S7 communication, using connections with unilateral /
bilateral configuration ................................................................................................................. 3-9
Table 3-4 GD resources of the CPUs....................................................................................................... 3-10
Table 3-5 Number of routing connections for DP CPUs .......................................................................... 3-13
Table 3-6 New System and Standard Functions/System and Standard Functions to be Replaced........ 3-20
Table 3-7 System and Standard Functions in PROFIBUS DP that must be Implemented with
Different Functions in PROFINET IO ....................................................................................... 3-21
Table 3-8 OBs in PROFINET IO and PROFIBUS DP.............................................................................. 3-22
Table 3-9 Comparison of the System Status Lists of PROFINET IO and PROFIBUS DP ...................... 3-23
Table 3-10 Distribution of connections ....................................................................................................... 3-30
Table 3-11 Availability of connection resources......................................................................................... 3-31
Table 3-12 Number of routing connection resources (for DP/PN CPUs)................................................... 3-32
Table 3-13 Interrupt blocks with DPV1 functionality................................................................................... 3-34
Table 3-14 System function blocks with DPV1 functionality ...................................................................... 3-34
Table 4-1 Retentivity of the RAM ............................................................................................................... 4-2
Table 4-2 Retentivity behavior of memory objects (applies to all CPUs with DP/MPI-SS) ........................ 4-3
Table 4-3 Retentive behavior of DBs for CPUs with firmware >= V2.1.0................................................... 4-4

xii Manual, 01/2006 Edition, A5E00105475-06
Table of contents
Table 4-4 Address areas of system memory ............................................................................................. 4-5

Table 5-1 Cyclic program processing......................................................................................................... 5-2
Table 5-2 Formula for calculating the process image (PI) transfer time .................................................... 5-4
Table 5-3 CPU 31xC: Data for calculating the process image (PI) transfer time....................................... 5-4
Table 5-4 CPU 31x: Data for calculating the process image (PI) transfer time ......................................... 5-5
Table 5-5 Extending the user program processing time ............................................................................ 5-5
Table 5-6 Operating system processing time at the scan cycle check point ............................................. 5-6
Table 5-7 Extended cycle time due to nested interrupts............................................................................ 5-6
Table 5-8 Cycle time extension as a result of errors.................................................................................. 5-7
Table 5-9 Cycle time extension as a result of testing and commissioning functions............................... 5-10
Table 5-10 Formula: Shortest response time............................................................................................. 5-15
Table 5-11 Formula: Longest response time ............................................................................................. 5-17
Table 5-12 Calculating the response time.................................................................................................. 5-19
Table 5-13 Process and diagnostic interrupt response times .................................................................... 5-20
Table 5-14 Process and diagnostic interrupt response times .................................................................... 5-21
Table 6-1 Available SIMATIC Micro Memory Cards .................................................................................. 6-2
Table 6-2 Maximum number of loadable blocks on the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card............................. 6-2
Table 6-3 Technical data of CPU 312C ..................................................................................................... 6-3
Table 6-4 Technical data of CPU 313C ..................................................................................................... 6-8
Table 6-5 Technical data for CPU 313C-2 PtP/ CPU 313C-2 DP............................................................ 6-14
Table 6-6 Technical data of CPU 314C-2 PtP and CPU 314C-2 DP....................................................... 6-21
Table 6-7 Parameters of standard DI....................................................................................................... 6-38
Table 6-8 Parameters of the interrupt inputs............................................................................................ 6-38
Table 6-9 Parameters of standard AI ....................................................................................................... 6-40
Table 6-10 Parameters of standard AO ..................................................................................................... 6-40
Table 6-11 Start information for OB40, relating to the interrupt inputs of the integrated I/O ..................... 6-44
Table 6-12 Technical data of digital inputs................................................................................................. 6-45
Table 6-13 Technical data of digital outputs .............................................................................................. 6-47
Table 6-14 Technical data of analog inputs ............................................................................................... 6-49
Table 6-15 Technical data of analog outputs ............................................................................................. 6-51
Table 7-1 Available SIMATIC Micro Memory Cards .................................................................................. 7-2
Table 7-2 Maximum number of loadable blocks on the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card............................. 7-3
Table 7-3 Technical data for the CPU 312................................................................................................. 7-3
Table 7-4 Technical data for the CPU 314................................................................................................. 7-8
Table 7-5 Technical data for the CPU 315-2 DP ..................................................................................... 7-13
Table 7-6 Technical data for the CPU 315-2 PN/DP ............................................................................... 7-19
Table 7-7 Technical data for the CPU 317-2 DP ..................................................................................... 7-26
Table A-1 Consistent data .......................................................................................................................... A-6

Manual, 01/2006 Edition, A5E00105475-06 xiii
Table of contents

xiv Manual, 01/2006 Edition, A5E00105475-06
Guide to the S7-300 documentation 1
Overview
There you find a guide leading you through the S7-300 documentation.
Selecting and configuring
Table 1-1 Ambient influence on the automation system (AS)
Information on.. is available in ...

What provisions do I have to make for AS installation S7-300, CPU 31xC and CPU 31x operating instructions:
space? Installation: Configuring - Component dimensions
S7-300, CPU 31xC and CPU 31x operating instructions:
Installation: Mounting - Installing the mounting rail
How do environmental conditions influence the AS? S7-300, CPU 31xC and CPU 31x operating instructions:
Installation: Appendix
Table 1-2 Galvanic isolation

Which modules can I use if electrical isolation is required S7-300, CPU 31xC and CPU 31x operating instructions:
between sensors/actuators? Hardware and Installation: Configuring – Electrical
assembly, protective measures and grounding
Module Data Manual
Under what conditions do I have to isolate the modules S7-300, CPU 31xC and CPU 31x operating instructions:
electrically? Hardware and Installation: Configuring – Electrical
How do I wire that? assembly, protective measures and grounding
CPU 31xC and CPU 31x operating instructions: Installation:
Wiring
Under which conditions do I have to isolate stations S7-300, CPU 31xC and CPU 31x operating instructions:
electrically? Installation – Configuring – Configuring subnets
How do I wire that?

Manual, 01/2006 Edition, A5E00105475-06 1-1
Guide to the S7-300 documentation
Table 1-3 Communication between sensors/actuators and the PLC

Which module is suitable for my sensor/actuator? For CPU: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x Manual, Technical Data
For signal modules: Reference manual of your signal
module
How many sensors/actuators can I connect to the module? For CPU: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x Manual, technical data
of signal modules: Reference manual of your signal module
To connect my sensors/actuators to the PLC, how do I wire S7-300, CPU 31xC and CPU 31x operating instructions:
the front connector ? Installation: Wiring – Wiring the front connector
When do I need expansion modules (EM) and how do I S7-300, CPU 31xC and CPU 31x operating instructions:
connect them? Hardware and Installation: Configuring – Distribution of
modules to several racks
How to mount modules on racks / mounting rails S7-300, CPU 31xC and CPU 31x operating instructions:
Installation: Assembly – Installing modules on the mounting
rail
Table 1-4 The use of local and distributed I/O

Which range of modules do I want to use? For local I/O and expansion devices: Module Data reference
manual
For distributed I/O and PROFIBUS DP: Manual of the
relevant I/O device
Table 1-5 Configuration consisting of the Central Unit (CU) and Expansion Modules (EMs)

Which rack / mounting rail is most suitable for my S7-300, CPU 31xC and CPU 31x operating instructions:
application? Hardware and Installation: Configuration
Which interface modules (IM) do I need to connect the EMs S7-300, CPU 31xC and CPU 31x operating instructions:
to the CU? Hardware and Installation: Configuring – Distribution of
modules to several racks
What is the right power supply (PS) for my application? S7-300, CPU 31xC and CPU 31x operating instructions:
Hardware and Installation: Configuration

1-2 Manual, 01/2006 Edition, A5E00105475-06
Table 1-6 CPU performance

Which memory concept is best suited to my application? CPU 31xC and CPU 31x Manual, Technical Data
How do I insert and remove Micro Memory Cards? S7-300, CPU 31xC and CPU 31x operating instructions:
Installation: Commissioning – Commissioning modules –
Removing / inserting a Micro Memory Card (MMC)
Which CPU meets my demands on performance? S7-300 instruction list: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
Length of the CPU response / execution times CPU 31xC and CPU 31x Manual, Technical Data
Which technological functions are implemented? Technological Functions Manual
How can I use these technological functions? Technological Functions Manual
Table 1-7 Communication

Which principles do I have to take into account? Communication with SIMATIC Manual
PROFINET System Manual, System Description
Options and resources of the CPU CPU 31xC and CPU 31x Manual, Technical Data
How to use communication processors (CPs) to optimize CP Manual
communication
Which type of communication network is best suited to my S7-300, CPU 31xC and CPU 31x operating instructions:
application? Hardware and Installation: Configuring – Configuring
subnets
How to network the various components S7-300, CPU 31xC and CPU 31x operating instructions:
Hardware and Installation: Configuring – Configuring
subnets
What to take into account when configuring PROFINET SIMATIC NET Manual, Twisted-Pair and Fiber Optic
networks Networks (6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0) – Network Configuration
PROFINET System Manual, System Description –
Installation and Commissioning
Table 1-8 Software

Software requirements of my S7-300 system CPU 31xC and CPU 31x Manual, Technical Data –
Technical Data

Table 1-9 Supplementary features

How to implement monitor and modify functions For text-based displays: The relevant Manual
(Human Machine Interface) For Operator Panels: The relevant Manual
For WinCC: The relevant Manual
How to integrate process control modules For PCS7: The relevant Manual
What options are offered by redundant and fail-safe S7-400H Manual – Redundant Systems
systems? Fail-Safe Systems Manual
Information to be observed when migrating from PROFIBUS Programming Manual: From PROFIBUS DP to PROFINET
DP to PROFINET IO IO

Operating and display elements 2
2.1 2.1 Operating and display elements: CPU 31xC
2.1.1 Operating and display elements: CPU 31xC
Operating and display elements of CPU 31xC
1 2 3
6)
'&9
00& )5&(
581
6723
581
6723
05(6
6
; ;
5 ; ;

Operating and display elements
2.1 Operating and display elements: CPU 31xC
The figures show the following CPU elements

(1) Status and error displays
(2) Slot for the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card (MMC) incl. the ejector
(3) Connections of the integrated I/O.
(4) Power supply connection
(5) 2. Interface X2 (PtP or DP)
(6) 1. Interface X1 (MPI)
(7) Mode selector switch
The figure below illustrates the integrated digital and analog I/Os of the CPU with open front
covers.
; ;
6)
%)
'&9
)5&(
581
6723
581 1 2 2 3
6723
05(6
1 2 3
Figure 2-1 Integrated I/Os of CPU 31xC (CPU 314C-2 PtP, for example)
The figures show the following integrated I/Os

(1) Analog I/Os
(2) each with 8 digital inputs
(3) each with 8 digital outputs

Slot for the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card (MMC)

Memory module is a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card. You can use MMCs as load memory and
as portable storage medium.
Note
These CPUs do not have an integrated load memory and thus require an SIMATIC Micro
Memory Card for operation.
Mode selector switch

Use the mode selector switch to set the CPU operating mode.
Table 2-1 Mode selector switch settings
Position Meaning Description

RUN RUN mode The CPU executes the user program.
STOP STOP mode The CPU does not execute a user program.
MRES CPU memory Mode selector switch position with pushbutton function for CPU
reset memory reset. A CPU memory reset by means of mode selector
switch requires a specific sequence of operation.
Reference
• CPU operating modes: STEP 7 Online Help.
• Information on CPU memory reset: Operating instructions CPU 31xC and CPU31x,
Commissioning, Commissioning Modules, CPU Memory Reset by means of Mode
Selector Switch
• Evaluation of the LEDs upon error or diagnostic event: Operating Instructions CPU 31xC
and CPU 31x, Test Functions, Diagnostics and Troubleshooting, Diagnostics with the
help of Status and Error LEDs
Power supply connection

Each CPU is equipped with a double-pole power supply socket. The connector with screw
terminals is inserted into this socket when the CPU is delivered.

Differences between the CPUs
Table 2-2 Differences of the CPUs 31xC
Element CPU CPU CPU CPU CPU CPU

312C 313C 313C-2 DP 313C-2 PtP 314C-2 DP 314C-2 PtP
9-pole DP – – X – X –
interface (X2)
15-pole PtP – – – X – X
interface (X2)
Digital inputs 10 24 16 16 24 24
Digital outputs 6 16 16 16 16 16
Analog inputs – 4+1 – – 4+1 4+1
Analog outputs – 2 – – 2 2
Technological 2 counters 3 counters 3 counters 3 counters 4 counters 4 counters
functions 1 channel for 1 channel
positioning for
positioning
2.1.2 Status and Error Indicators: CPU 31xC
LED designation Color Meaning

SF red Hardware or software error
BF (for CPUs with DP red Bus error
interface only)
DC5 V green 5-V power for CPU and S7-300 bus is OK
FRCE yellow Force job is active
RUN green CPU in RUN
The LED flashes during STARTUP at a rate of 2 Hz, and in HOLD
state at 0.5 Hz.
STOP yellow CPU in STOP and HOLD or STARTUP
The LED flashes at 0.5 Hz when the CPU requests a memory reset,
and during the reset at 2 Hz.
Reference
Selector Switch
and CPU 31x, Test Functions, Diagnostics and Troubleshooting, Diagnostics with the
help of Status and Error LEDs

2.2 Operating and display elements: CPU 31x
2.2 2.2 Operating and display elements: CPU 31x
2.2.1 Operating and display elements: CPU 312, 314, 315-2 DP:
6)
%)
6 '&9
00&
)5&(
581
5 6723
581
6723
05(6
4 2
; ; 3

(2) 2. Interface X2 (only for CPU 315-2 DP)
(4) 1. Interface X1 (MPI)


Note
These CPUs do not have an integrated load memory and thus require a SIMATIC Micro

The mode selector switch is used to set the CPU operating mode.

MRES CPU memory reset Mode selector switch position with pushbutton function for CPU
memory reset. A CPU memory reset by means of mode
selector switch requires a specific sequence of operation.
Reference
Selector Switch
and
CPU 31x, Test Functions, Diagnostics and Troubleshooting, Diagnostics with the help of
Status and Error LEDs


2.2.2 Operating and display elements: CPU 317-2 DP
1 2 3
%) 6)
%)
'&9
00&
)5&(
581
6723
4
581
6723
05(6
7
6
5 ; ;

(1) Bus error indicators
(6) 1. Interface X1 (MPI/DP)
(7) 2. Interface X2 (DP)


Note

Use the mode selector switch to set the CPU operating mode.

memory reset. A CPU memory reset by means of mode
selector switch requires a specific sequence of operation.
Reference
Selector Switch
and


2.2.3 Operating and display elements: CPU 31x-2 PN/DP
1 2 3
%) 6)
%)
'&9 00&
)5&(
581
6723
4
581
6723
05(6
5
8
/,1.
5; 0$&$''
7; ;;;
;;;
;
6
7
;

(5) Status display of 2nd interface (X2)
(6) 2. Interface X2 (PN)


Note

You can use the mode selector switch to set the current operating mode of the CPU.

memory reset. A CPU memory reset by means of mode selector
Reference
Selector Switch
and


2.2.4 Operating and display elements: CPU 319-3 PN/DP
1 2 3
%) 6)
%)
%) '&9 00&

)5&(
581
6723
4
581
6723 5
05(6
10
9
0$&$''
;;;
;;;
; ; ;
8
6
7

(5) 3. Interface X3 (PN)
(6) Green LED (LED designation: LINK)
(7) Yellow LED (LED designation: RX/TX)
(10) 2. Interface X2 (DP)


Note

You can use the mode selector switch to set the current operating mode of the CPU.

memory reset. A CPU memory reset by means of mode selector
Reference
Selector Switch
and


2.2.5 Status and error displays of CPU 31x
General status and error displays
Table 2-7 General status and error displays of the CPU 31x
LED designation Color Meaning

SF red Hardware or software error.
DC5 V green 5-V power for the CPU and the S7-300 bus
FRCE yellow LED is lit: Active force job
LED flashes at 2 Hz: Node flash test function (only CPUs with
firmware V2.2.0 or higher)
RUN green CPU in RUN
The LED flashes during STARTUP at a rate of 2 Hz, and in HOLD
state at 0.5 Hz.
STOP yellow CPU in STOP, or HOLD, or STARTUP
The LED flashes at 0.5 Hz when the CPU requests a memory reset,
and during the reset at 2 Hz.
Status displays for the interfaces X1, X2 and X3
Table 2-8 Bus error displays of CPU 31x
CPU LED designation Color Meaning

315-2 DP BF red Bus error at DP interface (X2)
317-2 DP BF1: red Bus error at interface 1 (X1)
BF2: red Bus error at interface 2 (X2)
31x-2 PN/DP BF1: red Bus error at interface 1 (X1)
LINK green Connection at interface 2 (X2) is active
RX/TX yellow Receive / Transmit data at interface 2 (X2)
319-3 PN/DP BF1: red Bus error at interface 1 (X1)
LINK1 green Connection at interface 3 (X3) is active
RX/TX1 yellow Receive / transmit data at interface 3 (X3)
1 Inthe case of the CPU 319-3 PN/DP are located directly at the RJ45 socket (LEDs are not
labeled!)

Reference
Selector Switch
and

Communication 3
3.1 3.1 Interfaces
3.1.1 Multi-Point Interface (MPI)
Availability
All the CPUs described here are equipped with an MPI interface
A CPU equipped with an MPI/DP interface is configured and supplied as
MPI interface. To use the DP interface, set DP interface mode in
STEP 7.
Properties
The MPI (Multi-Point Interface) represents the CPU interface for PG/OP connections, or for
communication on an MPI subnet.
The typical (default) transmission rate of all CPUs is 187.5 kbps. You can also set 19.2 kbps
for communication with an S7-200. Baud rates of up to 12 Mbaud are possible with the
CPU 315-2 PN/DP, CPU 317 and CPU 319-3 PN/DP.
The CPU automatically broadcasts its bus configuration via the MPI interface (the
transmission rate, for example). A PG, for example, can thus receive the correct parameters
and automatically connect to a MPI subnet.
Note
You may only connect PGs to an MPI subnet which is in RUN.
Other stations (for example, OP, TP, ...) should not be connected to the MPI subnet while
the system is in RUN. Otherwise, transferred data might be corrupted as a result of
interference, or global data packages may be lost.

Communication
3.1 Interfaces
Devices capable of MPI communication

• PG/PC
• OP/TP
• S7-300 / S7-400 with MPI interface
• S7-200 (19.2 kbps only)
3.1.2 PROFIBUS DP
Availability
CPUs with the "DP" have at least one DP interface.
The 315-2 PN/DP and 317 CPUs are equipped with an MPI/DP interface.
The CPU319-3 PN/DP has an MPI/DP interface and additionally a DP interface. A CPU with
MPI/DP interface is supplied with a default MPI configuration. You need to set DP mode in
STEP 7 if you want to use the DP interface.
Operating modes for CPUs with two DP interfaces
Table 3-1 Operating modes for CPUs with two DP interfaces
MPI/DP interface PROFIBUS DP interface

• MPI • not configured
• DP master • DP master
• DP slave 1 • DP slave 1
1 simultaneous operation of the DP slave on both interfaces is excluded
Properties
The PROFIBUS DP interface is mainly used to connect distributed I/O. PROFIBUS DP
allows you to create large subnets, for example.
The PROFIBUS DP interface can be set for operation in master or slave mode, and supports
transmission rates up to 12 Mbps.
The CPU broadcasts its bus parameters (transmission rate, for example) via the PROFIBUS
DP interface when master mode is set. A PG, for example, can thus receive the correct
parameters and automatically connect to a PROFIBUS subnet. In your configuration you can
specify to disable bus parameter broadcasting.

Communication
3.1 Interfaces
Note
(for DP interface in slave mode only)
When you disable the Commissioning / Debug mode / Routing check box in the DP interface
properties dialog in STEP 7, all user-specific transmission rate settings will be ignored, and
the transmission rate of the master is automatically set instead. This disables the routing
function at this interface.
Devices capable of PROFIBUS DP communication

• PG/PC
• OP/TP
• DP slaves
• DP master
• Actuators/Sensors
• S7-300/S7-400 with PROFIBUS DP interface
Reference
Further information on PROFIBUS: http://www.profibus.com
3.1.3 PROFINET (PN)
Availability
CPUs with a "PN" name suffix are equipped with a PROFINET interface.
Connecting to Industrial Ethernet

You can use the integrated PROFINET interface of the CPU to establish a connection to
Industrial Ethernet.
The integrated PROFINET interface of the CPU can be configured via MPI or PROFINET.
Devices capable of PROFINET (PN) communication

• PROFINET IO devices (for example, interface module IM 151-3 PN in an ET 200S)
• S7-300 / S7-400 with PROFINET interface (for example, CPU 317-2 PN/DP or CP 343-1)
• Active network components (a switch, for example)
• PG/PC with network card

Communication
3.1 Interfaces
Properties of the PROFINET interface
Properties
IEEE standard 802.3
Connector design RJ45
Transmission speed Max. 100 Mbps
Media Twisted Pair Cat5 (100BASE-TX)
Note
Networking PROFINET components
The use of switches, rather than hubs, for networking PROFINET components brings about
a substantial improvement in decoupling bus traffic, and improves runtime performance
under higher bus load. PROFINET CBA with cyclic PROFINET interconnections requires the
use of switches in order to maintain compliance with performance specifications. Full duplex
mode at 100 Mbps is mandatory for cyclic PROFINET interconnections.
PROFINET IO also requires the use of switches and 100 Mbps full duplex mode.
Reference
• For instructions on how to configure the integrated PROFINET interface, refer to S7-300,
CPU 31xC and CPU 31x operating instructions (Setup).
• For further information on PROFINET, refer to PROFINET System Description
• For detailed information on Ethernet networks, network configuration and network
components refer to the SIMATIC NET Manual: Twisted-Pair and Fiber Optic Networks ,
available under article ID 8763736 at http://support.automation.siemens.com.
• Component Based Automation, Commissioning SIMATIC iMap Systems - Tutorial,
Article ID 18403908
• Further information about PROFINET: http://www.profinet.com
See also
PROFINET IO System (Page 3-19)

Communication
3.1 Interfaces
3.1.4 Point to Point (PtP)
Availability
CPUs with the "PtP" name suffix have at least one PtP interface.
Properties
Using the PtP interface of your CPU, you can connect external devices with serial interface.
You can operate such a system at transmission rates up to 19.2 kbps in full duplex mode
(RS 422), and up to 38.4 kbps in half duplex mode (RS 485).
Transmission rate
• Half duplex: 38.4 kbps
• Full duplex: 19.2 kbps
Drivers
PtP communication drivers installed in those CPUs:
• ASCII drivers
• 3964(R) Protocol
• RK 512 (CPU 314C-2 PtP only)
Devices capable of PtP communication

Devices equipped with a serial port, for example, barcode readers, printers, etc.
Reference
CPU 31xC: Technological functions manual

Communication
3.2 Communication services
3.2 3.2 Communication services
3.2.1 Overview of communication services
Selecting the communication service
You need to decide on a communication service, based on functionality requirements. Your

choice of communication service will have no effect on:
• the functionality available,
• whether an S7 connection is required or not, and
• the time of connecting.
The user interface can vary considerably (SFC, SFB, ...), and is also determined by the
hardware used (SIMATIC CPU, PC, ...).
Overview of communication services

The table below provides an overview of communication services offered by the CPUs.
Table 3-2 Communication services of the CPUs
Communication service Functionality Time at which the S7 via MPI via DP via via
connection is established ... PtP PN
PG communication Commissioning, test, From the PG, starting when X X – X
diagnostics the service is being used
OP communication Monitor and modify via OP at POWER ON X X – X
S7 basic communication Data exchange is programmed at the blocks X – – –
(SFC parameters)
S7 communication Data exchange in server via active partner at POWER Only in Only in – X
and client mode: ON. server server
Configuration of mode mode
communication required.
Global data Cyclic data exchange (for does not require an S7 X – – –
communication example, flag bits) connection
Routing PG functions for example testing, from the PG, starting when the X X – X
(only for CPUs with diagnostics on other service is being used
DP or PN interface) networks also
PtP communication Data exchange via serial does not require an S7 – – X –
interface connection
PROFIBUS DP Data exchange between does not require an S7 – X – –
master and slave connection
PROFINET CBA Data exchange by means does not require an S7 – – – X
of component based connection
communication

Communication
Communication service Functionality Time at which the S7 via MPI via DP via via
connection is established ... PtP PN
PROFINET IO Data exchange between IO does not require an S7 – – – X
controllers and the IO connection
devices
SNMP Standard protocol for does not require an S7 – – – X
(Simple Network network diagnostics and connection
Management Protocol) configuration
open communication by Data exchange via Does not require an S7 – – – X
means of TCP/IP Industrial Ethernet with connection, is handled in the
TCP/IP protocol (by means user program by means of
of loadable FBs) loadable FBs
Open communication by Data exchange via Does not require an S7 – – – X
means of ISO on TCP Industrial Ethernet with connection, is handled in the
ISO-on-TCP protocol (by user program by means of
means of loadable FBs) loadable FBs
Open communication by Data exchange via Does not require an S7 – – – X
means of UDP Industrial Ethernet with connection, is handled in the
UDP protocol (by means of user program by means of
loadable FBs) loadable FBs
See also
Distribution and availability of S7 connection resources (Page 3-30)
Connection resources for routing (Page 3-32)
3.2.2 PG communication
Properties
PG communication is used to exchange data between engineering stations (PG, PC, for
example) and SIMATIC modules which are capable of communication. This service is
available for MPI, PROFIBUS and Industrial Ethernet subnets. Transition between subnets is
also supported.
PG communication provides the functions needed to download / upload programs and
configuration data, to run tests and to evaluate diagnostic information. These functions are
integrated in the operating system of
SIMATIC S7 modules.
A CPU can maintain several simultaneous online connections to one or multiple PGs.

Communication
3.2.3 OP communication
Properties
OP communication is used to exchange data between operator stations (OP, TP, for
example) and SIMATIC modules which are capable of communication. This service is
available for MPI, PROFIBUS and Industrial Ethernet subnets.
OP communication provides functions you require for monitoring and modifying. These
functions are integrated in the operating system of SIMATIC S7 modules. A CPU can
maintain several simultaneous connections to one or several OPs.
3.2.4 Data exchanged by means of S7 basic communication
Properties
S7-based communication is used to exchange data between S7 CPUs and the
communication-capable SIMATIC modules within an S7 station (acknowledged data
exchange). Data are exchanged across non-configured S7 connections. The service is
available via MPI subnet, or within the station to function modules (FM).
S7-based communication provides the functions you require for data exchange. These
functions are integrated into the CPU operating system. The user can utilize this service by
means of "System function" (SFC) user interface.
Reference
Further information
• on SFCs, refer to Instruction list.
For further information refer to STEP 7 Online Help or System and Standard Functions
reference manual.
• on communication can be found in the Communication with SIMATIC manual.
3.2.5 S7 communication
Properties
A CPU can always operate in server or client mode in S7 communication: We distinguish
between
• communication with unilateral configuration (for PUT/GET only)
• communication with bilateral configuration (for USEND, URCV, BSEND, BRCV, PUT,
GET)
However, the functionality depends on the CPU. A CP is therefore required in certain
situations.

Communication
Table 3-3 Client and server in S7 communication, using connections with unilateral / bilateral
configuration
CPU Use in server mode for Use in server mode for Use as client
connections with unilateral connections with bilateral
configuration configuration
31xC >= V1.0.0 Generally possible on Only possible with CP Only possible with CP
MPI/DP interface without and loadable FBs. and loadable FBs.
configuration of user
interface
31x >= V2.0.0 Generally possible on Only possible with CP Only possible with CP
MPI/DP interface without and loadable FBs. and loadable FBs.
configuration of user
interface
31x >= V2.2.0 Generally possible on • Possible on PN • Possible on PN
MPI/DP/PN interface interface with interface with
without configuration of user loadable FBs loadable FBs
interface or or
• with CP and loadable • with CP and loadable
FBs. FBs.
The user interface is implemented using standard function modules (FBs) from the standard
library of STEP 7, under communication blocks.
Reference
For further information on communication, refer to the Communication with SIMATIC
manual.
3.2.6 Global data communication (MPI only)
Properties
Global data communication is used for cyclic exchange of global data via MPI subnets (for
example, I, Q, M) between SIMATIC S7 CPUs (data exchange without acknowledgement).
One CPU broadcasts its data to all other CPUs on the MPI subnet. This function is
integrated in the CPU operating system.
Reduction ratio
The reduction ratio specifies the cyclic intervals for GD communication. You can set the
reduction ratio when you configure global data communication in STEP 7. For example, if
you set a reduction ratio of 7, global data are transferred only with every 7th cycle. This
reduces CPU load.

Communication
Send and receive conditions

Conditions which should be satisfied for GD communication:
• For the transmitter of a GD packet:
Reduction ratiotransmitter x cycle timetransmitter ≥ 60 ms
• For the receiver of a GD packet:
Reduction ratioreceiver x cycle timereceiver
< reduction ratiotransmitter x cycle timetransmitter
A GD packet may be lost if you do not adhere to these conditions. The reasons being:
• the performance of the "smallest" CPU in the GD circuit
• asynchronous transmitting / receiving of global data at the stations
When setting in STEP 7: “Transmit after each CPU cycle“, and the CPU has a short scan
cycle time (< 60 ms), the operating system might overwrite a GD packet of the CPU before it
is transmitted. The loss of global data is indicated in the status box of a GD circuit, if you set
this function in your STEP 7 configuration.
GD resources of the CPUs
Table 3-4 GD resources of the CPUs
Parameters CPU 31xC, 312, 314 CPU 315-2 DP, 315-2 PN/DP,
317-2 DP, 317-2 PN/DP,
319-3 PN/DP
Number of GD circuits per CPU Max. 4 Max. 8
GD packets transmitted per GD circuit Max. 1 Max. 1
GD packets transmitted by all GD circuits Max. 4 Max. 8
GD packets received per GD circuit Max. 1 Max. 1
GD packets received by all GD circuits Max. 4 Max. 8
Data length per GD packet Max. 22 bytes Max. 22 bytes
Consistency Max. 22 bytes Max. 22 bytes
Min. reduction ratio (default) 1 (8) 1 (8)

Communication
3.2.7 Routing
Properties
STEP 7 V5.1 + SP4 or higher allows you to access your S7 stations on all subnets with your
PG/PC, for example, to
• download user programs
• download a hardware configuration, or
• perform debugging and diagnostic functions.
Note
If you use your CPU as I-slave, the routing function is only possible when the
DP interface is switched to active IN STEP 7, set the Test, Commission Routing check
box on the properties dialog of the DP interface. For detailed information, refer to the
Programming with STEP 7 manual, or directly to the STEP 7 Online Help
Routing network nodes: MPI - DP

Gateways between subnets are routed in a SIMATIC station that is equipped with interfaces
to the respective subnets. The figure below shows CPU 1 (DP master) acting as router for
subnets 1 and 2.
6 6
3* &38'3PDVWHU &38'3VODYH
6XEQHWHJ352),%86'3
6XEQHWHJ03,

Communication
The figure below shows the MPI access to PROFINET via PROFIBUS CPU 1 (315-2 DP, for
example) is the router for subnet 1 and 2;
CPU 2 is the router for subnet 2 and 3.
Routing network nodes: MPI - DP - PROFINET
&38 &38 &38

HJ'3 31'3 31'3
03, '3 03,'3 31 31

PDVWHU DFWLYHVODYH
6XEQHW352),%86 6XEQHW352),1(7
6XEQHW03,
3*

Communication
Number of connections for routing

The CPUs with DP interface provide a different number of connections for the routing
function:
Table 3-5 Number of routing connections for DP CPUs
CPU As of firmware version Number of connections for routing

31xC, CPU 31x 2.0.0 Max. 4
317-2 DP 2.1.0 Max. 8
31x-2 PN/DP 2.2.0 Interface X1 configured as:
• MPI: Max. 10
• DP master: Max. 24
• DP slave (active): Max. 14
Interface X2 configured as:

• PROFINET: Max. 24
319-3 PN/DP 2.4.0 Interface X1 configured as:
• MPI: Max. 10


Requirements
• The station modules are "capable of routing" (CPUs or CPs).
• The network configuration does not exceed project limits.
• The modules have loaded the configuration data containing the latest "knowledge" of the
entire network configuration of the project.
Reason: All modules participating in the network transition must receive the routing
information defining the paths to other subnets.
• In your network configuration, the PG/PC you want to use to establish a connection via
network node must be assigned to the network it is physically connected to.
• The CPU must set to master mode, or
• when set to operate in slave mode, the Test, Commissioning, Routing functionality must
be enabled by setting the check box in STEP 7, in the
DP interface for DP slave properties dialog box.

Communication
Routing: Example of a TeleService application

The figure below shows the example of an application for remote maintenance of an S7
station using a PG. The connection to other subnets is here established via modem
connection.
The lower section of the figure shows how to configure this in STEP 7.
'3PDVWHU '3VODYH
HJ[&'3 HJ[&'3
5HDOLQVWDOODWLRQ
3*
7HOH6HUYLFH
6XEQHW
DGDSWHU
HJ352),%86'3
0RGHP 0RGHP
6XEQHW
HJ03,
&RQILJXUDWLRQLQ67(3 '3PDVWHU '3VODYH

HJ&38[&'3 HJ&38[&'3
3*
6XEQHW
HJ352),%86'3
6XEQHW
HJ03,

Communication
Reference
Further information
• on configuring in STEP 7 is found in the Configuring Hardware and Connections in
STEP 7 manual
• of a basic nature is contained in the Communication with SIMATIC Manual.
• about the TeleService adapter is available under article ID 20983182 on the Internet URL
http://support.automation.siemens.com.
• on SFCs, refer to Instruction list.
For further information refer to STEP 7 Online Help or System and Standard Functions
reference manual.
• on communication are found in the Communication with SIMATIC Manual.
3.2.8 Point-to-point connection
Properties
PtP communication enables you to exchange data via serial port. PtP communication can be
used to interconnect automation devices, computers or communication-capable systems of
external suppliers. The function also allows adaptation to the protocol of the communication
partner.
Reference
Further Information
• on SFCs are found in the Instruction list.
For detailed information, refer to the STEP 7 Online Help , or to the System and Standard
Functions Reference Manual.
• on communication are found in the Communication with SIMATIC Manual.
3.2.9 Data consistency
Properties
A data area is consistent if it can be read or written to from the operating system as a
consistent block. Data exchanged collectively between the stations should belong together
and originate from a single processing cycle, that is, be consistent. If the user program
contains a programmed communication function, for example, access to shared data with X-
SEND/ XRCV, access to that data area can be coordinated by means of the "BUSY"
parameter itself.

Communication
With PUT/GET functions

For S7 communication functions, such as PUT/GET or write / read via OP communication,
which do not require a block in the user program on the CPU (operating in server mode),
allowances must be made in the program for the extent of the data consistency. The
PUT/GET functions for S7 communication, or for reading/writing variables via OP
communication, are executed at the CPU's scan cycle checkpoint. To save a defined
process alarm response time, the communication variables are copied in blocks of up to 64
bytes (CPU 317, CPU 319: 160 bytes) to / from work memory at the scan cycle checkpoint of
the operating system. Data consistency is not guaranteed for larger data areas.
Note
If a defined data deficiency is required, the defined communication variables in the user
program of the CPU may be no larger than 64 bytes (for CPU 317, CPU 319: 160 bytes.)
3.2.10 Communication by means of PROFINET
What is PROFINET?
Within the framework of Totally Integrated Automation (TIA), PROFINET represents a
consequent enhancement of:
• PROFIBUS DP, the established fieldbus and
• Industrial Ethernet, the communication bus for the cell level
Experience gained from both systems was and is being integrated into PROFINET.
PROFINET is an Ethernet-based automation standard of PROFIBUS International
(previously PROFIBUS Users Organization e.V.), and defines a multi-vendor communication,
automation, and engineering model.
Objectives in PROFINET
The objectives in PROFINET are:
• Open Ethernet Standard for automation based on Industrial Ethernet.
Although Industrial Ethernet and Standard Ethernet components can be used together,
the Industrial Ethernet devices are more sturdy and therefore better suited for industrial
environments (temperature, immunity to interference, etc.)
• Use of TCP/IP and IT standards
• Automation with real-time Ethernet
• Total integration of field bus systems

Communication
Implementation of PROFINET by us
We have integrated PROFINET as follows:
• We have implemented communication between field devices with PROFINET IO.
• We have implemented communication between controllers as components in
distributed systems with PROFINET CBA (Component based Automation)
• Installation engineering and network components are available in SIMATIC NET.
• Established IT standards from the Office environment (e.g. SNMP=Simple Network
Management Protocol for network parameter assignment and diagnosis) are used for
remote maintenance and network diagnostics.
Documentation from PROFIBUS International on the Internet

Numerous texts on the subject of PROFINET are available from the URL
"http://www.profinet.com" from PROFIBUS International (formerly PROFIBUS Nutzer-
Organisation, PNO)
For further information, refer to Internet address " http://www.siemens.com\profinet\".
What is PROFINET IO?

Within the framework of PROFINET, PROFINET IO is a communication concept for the
implementation of modular, distributed applications.
PROFINET IO allows you to create automation solutions, which are familiar to you from
PROFIBUS.
That is, you have the same application view in STEP 7, regardless of whether you configure
PROFINET or PROFIBUS devices.
What is PROFINET CBA (Component Based Automation)?

Within the framework of PROFINET, PROFINET CBA is an automation concept for the
implementation of applications with distributed intelligence.
PROFINET CBA lets you create distributed automation solutions, based on default
components and partial solutions.
Component-based Automation allows you to use complete technological modules as
standardized components in large systems.
The components are also created in an engineering tool which may differ from vendor to
vendor. Components of SIMATIC devices are created, for example, with STEP 7.

Communication
Extent of PROFINET CBA and PROFINET IO

PROFINET IO and CBA represent two different views of automation devices on Industrial
Ethernet.
352),1(7
&RPSRQHQWYLHZ ,2GDWDYLHZ
352),1(7&%$ 352),1(7,2
'LVWULEXWHGLQWHOOLJHQFH 'LVWULEXWHG,2
6\VWHPZLGHHQJLQHHULQJ 8VXDO,2YLHZLQ67(3
3&' *6'
352),1(7&RPSRQHQW'HVFULSWLRQ *HQHULF6WDWLRQ'HVFULSWLRQ
2QHFDEOH,7VWDQGDUGVVWDQGDUGDSSOLFDWLRQV
3URWRFROVFRQWUROOHUVಹ
Figure 3-1 Extent of PROFINET IO and Component-Based Automation
Component Based Automation divides the entire system into various functions. These
functions are configured and programmed.
PROFINET IO provides you with a view of the system that is very similar to the view
obtained in PROFIBUS. You continue to configure and program the individual automation
devices.
Reference
Further Information
• on PROFINET IO and PROFINET CBA is available in the PROFINET system
specification.
For differences and similarities between PROFIBUS DP and PROFINET IO, refer to the
From PROFIBUS DP to PROFINET IO programming manual.
• For further information about PROFINET CBA, refer to the documentation on
SIMATIC iMAP and Component Based Automation.

Communication
3.2.10.1 PROFINET IO System
Extended Functions of PROFINET IO

The following graphic shows the new functions of PROFINET IO
&RPSDQ\1HWZRUN ,QGXVWULDO(WKHUQHW
5RXWHU
,2 (7
'HYLFH 6
6ZLWFK
6ZLWFK
6ZLWFK
1 3*
2
,2 ,2 (7
&38 &RQWUROOHU
'HYLFH 6
[
31'3 '3
,2
0DVWHU &38 &RQWUROOHU
[
31'3 '3
,(
0DVWHU
,(3%/LQN 3
6 3%
5 4
(7 (7
'36/$9( '36/$9(
352),%86
The graphic displays Examples of connection paths

The connection of company From PCs in your company network, you can access devices at the field level
network and field level Example:
• PC - Switch 1 - Router - Switch 2 - CPU 31x PN/DP ①.
The connection between the You can, of course, also access one of the other areas in Industrial Ethernet from an IO
automation system and field supervisor at the field level.
level Example:
• IO supervisor - Switch 3 - Switch 2 - ET 200S IO device ②.
The IO controller of the CPU At this point, you see the extended IO feature between the IO controller and IO device(s)
31x PN/DP ① directly controls on Industrial Ethernet:
devices on the Industrial • The CPU 31x PN/DP ①is the IO controller for one of the ET 200S ② IO-Devices.
Ethernet and on the
• Die CPU 31x PN/DP ① is via the IE/PB Link ⑥ also the IO controller for the ET 200
PROFIBUS (DP slave) ⑤.
A CPU can be both Here, you can see that a CPU can be both IO controller for an IO device as well as DP
IO controller and master for a DP slave:
DP master. • The CPU 31x PN/DP ③ is the IO controller for the the other ET 200S ② IO device.
CPU 31x PN/DP ③ - Switch 3 - Switch 2 - ET 200S ②
• The CPU 31x PN/DP ③ is the DP master for a DP slave ④. The DP slave ④ is
assigned locally to the CPU ③ and is not visible on Industrial Ethernet.

Communication
Reference
For information
• on PROFINET refer to the From PROFIBUS DP to PROFINET IO programming manual.
This manual also provides a comprehensive overview of the new PROFINET blocks and
system status lists.
See also
PROFINET (PN) (Page 3-3)
3.2.10.2 Blocks in PROFINET IO
Content of this Section

This section explains the following:
• Which blocks are intended for PROFINET
• Which blocks are intended for PROFIBUS DP
• Which blocks are intended for both PROFINET IO and PROFIBUS DP
Compatibility of the New Blocks

For PROFINET IO, it was necessary to create some new blocks, among other things,
because larger configurations are now possible with PROFINET. You can also use the new
blocks with PROFIBUS.
Comparison of the System and Standard Functions of PROFINET IO and PROFIBUS DP

For CPUs with an integrated PROFINET interface, the table below provides you with an
overview of:
• System and standard functions for SIMATIC that you may need to replace when
converting from PROFIBUS DP to PROFINET IO.
• New system and standard functions
Table 3-6 New System and Standard Functions/System and Standard Functions to be Replaced
Blocks PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP

SFC 12 (deactivation and Yes (as of firmware V.2.4.0) Yes
activation of DP slaves/IO
devices)
SFC 13 (read diagnostic data of No Yes
a DP slave) Substitute:
• event-related: SFB 54
• state-related: SFB 52
SFC 58/59 (write/read data No (replacement: SFB 53/52) Yes (but should already have
record in I/O) been replaced by SFB 53/52 in
DPV1)

Communication

SFB 52/53 (read/write data Yes Yes
record)
SFB 54 (evaluate interrupt) Yes Yes
SFC102 (read predefined No (replacement: SFB81) Yes
parameters)
SFB 81 (read predefined Yes Yes
parameters)
SFC5 (query start address of a No (replacement: SFC70) Yes
module)
SFC 70 (query start address of Yes Yes
a module)
SFC49 (query the slot belonging No (replacement: SFC71) Yes
to a logical address)
SFC 71 (query the slot Yes Yes
belonging to a logical address)
The following table provides you with an overview of the system and standard functions for
SIMATIC, whose functionality must be implemented by other functions when converting from
PROFIBUS DP to PROFINET IO.
Table 3-7 System and Standard Functions in PROFIBUS DP that must be Implemented with
Different Functions in PROFINET IO

SFC 55 (write dynamic No Yes
parameters) (simulate via SFB 53)
SFC 56 (write predefined No Yes
parameters) (simulate via SFB 81 and SFB
53)
SFC 57 (assign module No Yes
parameters) (simulate via SFB 81 and SFB
53)
You cannot use the following SIMATIC system and standard functions with PROFINET IO:
• SFC 7 (trigger hardware interrupt on DP master)
• SFC 11 (synchronize groups of DP slaves)
• SFC 72 (read data from a communication partner within local S7 station)
• SFC 73 (write data to a communication partner within local S7 station)
• SFC 74 (abort an existing connection to a communication partner within local S7 station)
• SFC 103 (determine the bus typology in a DP master)

Communication
Comparison of the Organization Blocks of PROFINET IO and PROFIBUS DP

Here, there are changes in OB 83 and OB 86, as shown in the following table.
Table 3-8 OBs in PROFINET IO and PROFIBUS DP

OB 83 (removing and inserting Also possible with an S7-300, With an S7-300 not possible
modules during operation) new error information Removing and inserting
modules during operation is
reported by slaves added using
a GSD file by means of a
diagnostic interrupt; in other
words OB 82.
In the case of S7 slaves, a
swapping interrupt causes a
station failure to be reported and
OB 86 to be called.
OB 86 (rack failure) New error information Unchanged
Detailed Information
For detailed descriptions of the individual blocks, refer to the manual System Software for
S7-300/400 System and Standard Functions.
3.2.10.3 System status lists (SSLs) in PROFINET IO
Content of this Section

This section explains the following:
• Which system status lists are intended for PROFINET IO
• Which system status lists are intended for PROFIBUS DP
• Which system status lists are intended for both PROFINET IO and PROFIBUS DP
Introduction
The CPU of the SIMATIC modules can provide you with certain information. The CPU stores
this information in the "system status list".
The system status list describes the current status of the automation system. It provides an
overview of the configuration, the current parameter assignment, the current statuses and
sequences in the CPU, and the assigned modules.
The system status list data are read-only; they cannot be changed. The system status list is
a virtual list that is compiled only on request.
With the help of a system status list you receive the following information via the PROFINET
IO system:
• System data
• Module status information in the CPU
• Diagnostic data on module
• Diagnostic buffer

Communication
Compatibility of the New System Status Lists

For PROFINET IO, the system status lists had to be revamped to some extent because,
among other things, larger configurations are now possible with PROFINET.
You should also use these new system status lists with PROFIBUS.
You can continue to use a known PROFIBUS system status list that is also supported by
PROFINET. If you use a system status list in PROFINET that PROFINET does not support,
an error code is returned in RET_VAL (8083: Index wrong or not permitted).
Comparison of the System Status Lists of PROFINET IO and PROFIBUS DP
Table 3-9 Comparison of the System Status Lists of PROFINET IO and PROFIBUS DP
SSL-ID PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP Applicability

W#16#0591 yes Yes Module status information for the interfaces of a
(parameter adr1 changed) module
W#16#0A91 Yes Yes Status information of all subsystems and master
(parameter adr1 changed) systems (S7-300 without CPU 318-2 DP)
W#16#0C91 Yes Yes Module status information of a module in a central
(parameter adr1/adr2 and configuration or attached to an integrated DP or PN
set/actual type identifier interface module using the logical address of the
changed) module.
W#16#4C91 Yes Yes Not with S7-300
(parameter adr1 changed) Module status information of a module attached to an
external DP or PN interface module using the start
address
W#16#0D91 Yes Yes Module status information of all modules in the
(parameter adr1 changed) specified rack/station
W#16#0696 Yes No Module status information of all submodules of a
module using the logical address of the module, not
possible for submodule 0 (= module)
W#16#0C96 Yes Yes Module status information of a submodule using the
logical address of this submodule
W#16#xy92 No Yes Rack/stations status information
(replacement: SSL-ID Replace this system status list with the system status
W#16#0x94) list with ID W#16#xy94 in PROFIBUS DP, as well.
W#16#0x94 Yes Yes Rack/station status information
Detailed Information
For detailed descriptions of the individual system status lists, refer to the manual System
Software for S7-300/400 System and Standard Functions.

Communication
3.2.10.4 Open communication via Industrial Ethernet
Requirements
• STEP 7 V5.3 + Servicepack 1 or higher
Functionality
The CPUs with integrated PROFINET interface as of firmware V2.3.0 or V2.4.0 support the
functionality of open communication by means of Industrial Ethernet (abbreviated: open
IE communication)
Following services are available for open IE communication:
• Connection oriented protocols
– TCP native according to RFC 793, connection type B#16#01, as of firmware V2.3.0
– TCP native according to RFC 793, connection type B#16#11, as of firmware V2.4.0
– ISO on TCP according to RFC 1006, as of firmware V2.4.0
• Connectionless protocols
– UDP according to RFC 768, as of firmware V2.4.0
Features of the communication protocols

The following distinctions are made between protocol types in data communication:
• Connection oriented protocols:
Prior to data transmission these establish a (logical) connection to the communication
partner and close this again, if necessary, after transmission is completed. Connection
oriented protocols are used when security in especially important in data transmission. A
physical cable can generally accommodate several logical connections.
For the FBs to open communication by means of Industrial Ethernet, the following
connection oriented protocols are supported:
– TCP native according to RFC 793 (connection types B#16#01 and B#16#11)
– ISO on TCP according to RFC 1006 (connection type B#16#12)
• Connectionless protocols:
These operate without a connection. There is also no establishing or terminating a
connection to remote partner. Connectionless protocols transfer the data without
acknowlegement and thus unsecured to the remote partner.
The following connectionless protocol is supported at the FBs for open communication
via Industrial Ethernet:
– UDP according to RFC 768 (connection type B#16#13)

Communication
How to use open IE communication

To allow data to be exchanged with other communication partners, STEP 7 provides the
following FBs and UDTs under "Communication Blocks" in the "Standard Library":
• Connection oriented protocols: TCP-native, ISO-on-TCP
– FB 63 "TSEND" for sending data
– FB 64 "TRCV" for receiving data
– FB 65 "TCON", for connecting
– FB 66 "TDISCON", for disconnecting
– UDT 65 "TCON_PAR" with the data structure for the configuration of the connection
• Connectionless protocol: UDP
– FB 67 "TUSEND" for sending data
– FB 68 "TURCV" for receiving data
– FB 65 "TCON" for establishing the local communication access point
– FB 66 "TDISCON" for resolving the local communication access point
– UDT 65 "TCON_PAR" with the data structure for configuring the local communication
access point
– UDT 66 "TCON_ADR" with the data structure of the address parameters of the remote
partner
Data blocks for the configuration of the connection

• Data blocks for configuring TCP native and ISO-on-TCP connections.
To configure your connection, you need to create a DB that contains the data structure of
UDT 65 "TCON_PAR." This data structure contains all parameters you need to establish
the connection. You need to create such a data structure for each connection, and you
can also organize it in a global DB.
Connection parameter CONNECT of FB 65 "TCON" reports the address of the
corresponding connection description to the user program (for example,
P#DB100.DBX0.0 byte 64).
• Data blocks for the configuration the local UDP communication access point
To assign parameters for the local communication access point, create a DB containing
the data structure from the UDT 65 "TCON_PAR" This data structure contains the
required parameters you need to establish the connection between the user program and
the communication level of the operating system
The CONNECT parameter of the FB 65 "TCON" contains a reference to the address of
the corresponding connection description (e.g. P#DB100.DBX0.0 Byte 64).
Note
Setting up the connection description (UDT 65)
The interface to be used for for communication (for example B#16#03: Communication
via the integrated IE interface for the CPU 319-3 PN/DP) has to be entered in the UDT 65
"TCON_PAR" in the parameter "local_device_id".

Communication
Establishing a connection for communication

• Use with TCP native and ISO on TOP
Both communication partners call FB 65 "TCON" to establish the connection. In your
connection configuration, you define which communication partner activates the
connection, and which communication partner responds to the request with a passive
connection. To determine the number of possible connections, refer to your CPU's
technical specifications.
The CPU automatically monitors and holds the active connection.
If the connection is broken, for example by line interruption or by the remote
communication partner, the active partner tries to reestablish the connection. You do not
have to call FB 65 "TCON" again.
FB 66 "TDISCON" disconnects the CPU from a communication partner, as does STOP
mode. To reestablish the connection to have to call FB65 "TCON" again.
• Use with UDP
Both communication partners call FB 65 "TCON" to set up their local communication
access point. This establishes a connection between the user program and operating
system's communication level No connection is established to the remote partner.
The local access point is used to send and receive UDP telegrams.
Disconnecting
• Use with TCP native and ISO on TCP
FB 66 "TDISCON" disconnects the communication connection between CPU and
communication partner.
• Use with UDP
FB 66 "TDISCON" disconnects the local communication access point, i.e., the connection
between user program and communication level of operating system is interrupted.
Options for interrupting the communication connection

Events causing interruptions of communication:
• You program the cancellation of connections at FB 66 "TDISCON."
• The CPU goes from RUN to STOP.
• At POWER OFF / POWER ON
Reference
For detailed information on the blocks described earlier, refer to the STEP 7 Online Help.

Communication
3.3 S7 connections
3.2.10.5 SNMP communication service
Availability
The SNMP communication service is available for CPUs with integrated PROFINET
interface and Firmware 2.3.0 or higher.
Properties
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol)) is a standard protocol for TCP/IP networks.
Reference
For further information on the SNMP communication service and diagnostics with SNMP,
refer to the PROFINET System Description.
3.3 3.3 S7 connections
3.3.1 S7 connection as communication path

An S7 connection is established when S7 modules communicate with one another. This S7
connection is the communication path.
Note
Global data communication, point-to-point connection, no S7 connections are required for
communication via PROFIBUS DP, PROFINET CBA, PROFINET IO, TCP/IP, ISO on TCP,
UDP and SNMP
Every communication link requires S7 connection resources on the CPU for the entire
duration of this connection.
Thus, every S7 CPU provides a specific number of S7 connection resources. These are
used by various communication services (PG/OP communication, S7 communication or S7
basic communication).

Communication
3.3 S7 connections
Connection points
An S7 connection between modules with communication capability is established between
connection points. The S7 connection always has two connection points: The active and
passive connection points:
• The active connection point is assigned to the module that establishes the S7 connection.
• The passive connection point is assigned to the module that accepts the S7 connection.
Any module that is capable of communication can thus act as an S7 connection point. At the
connection point, the established communication link always uses one S7 connection of the
module concerned.
Transition point
If you use the routing functionality, the S7 connection between two modules capable of
communication is established across a number of subnets. These subnets are
interconnected via a network transition. The module that implements this network transition
is known as a router. The router is thus the point through which an S7 connection passes.
Any CPU with a DP or PN interface can be the router for an S7 connection. You can
establish a certain maximum number of routing connections. This does not limit the data
volume of the S7 connections.
See also
Connection resources for routing (Page 3-32)
3.3.2 Assignment of S7 connections

There are several ways to allocate S7 connections on a communication-capable module:
• Reservation during configuration
• Assigning connections in the program
• Allocating connections during commissioning, testing and diagnostics routines
• Allocating connection resources to HMI services
Reservation during configuration

One connection resource each is automatically reserved on the CPU for PG and OP
communication. Whenever you need more connection resources (for example, when
connecting several OPs), configure this increase in the CPU properties dialog box in
STEP 7.
Connections must also be configured (using NetPro) for the use of S7 communication. For
this purpose, connection resources have to be available, which are not allocated to PG/OP
or other connections. The required S7 connections are then permanently allocated for S7
communication when the configuration is uploaded to the CPU.

Communication
3.3 S7 connections
Assigning connections in the program

In S7 basic communication, and in open Industrial Ethernet communication with TCP/IP, the
user program establishes the connection. The CPU operating system initiates the
connection. S7 basic communication uses the corresponding S7 connections. The open
IE communication does not use any S7 connections. The maximum number of eight
connections also applies to this type of communication.
Using connections for commissioning, testing and diagnostics

An active online function on the engineering station (PG/PC with STEP 7) occupies
S7 connections for PG communication:
• An S7 connection resource for PG communication which was reserved in your CPU
hardware configuration is assigned to the engineering station, that is, it only needs to be
allocated.
• If all reserved S7 connection resources for PG communication are allocated, the
operating system automatically assigns a free S7 connection resource which has not yet
been reserved. If no more connection resources are available, the engineering station
cannot go online to the CPU.
Allocating connection resources to HMI services

An online function on the HMI station (OP/TP/... with WinCC) is used for assigning S7
connection resources for the OP communication:
• An S7 connection resource for OP communication you have reserved in your CPU
hardware configuration is therefore assigned to the OCM station engineering station, that
is, it only needs to be allocated.
• If all reserved S7 connection resources for OP communication are allocated, the
operating system automatically assigns a free S7 connection resource which has not yet
been reserved. If no more connection resources are available, the OCM station cannot go
online to the CPU.
Time sequence for allocation of S7 connection resources

When you program your project in STEP 7, the system generates parameter assignment
blocks which are read by the modules in the startup phase. This allows the module's
operating system to reserve or allocate the relevant S7 connection resources. That is, for
instance, OPs cannot access a reserved S7 connection resource for PG communication.
The CPU's S7 connection resources which were not reserved can be used freely. These S7
connection resources are allocated in the order they are requested.
Example
If there is only one free S7 connection left on the CPU, you can still connect a PG to the bus.
The PG can then communicate with the CPU. The S7 connection is only used, however,
when the PG is communicating with the CPU. If you connect an OP to the bus while the PG
is not communicating, the OP can establish a connection to the CPU. Since an OP maintains
its communication link at all times, in contrast to the PG, you cannot subsequently establish
another connection via the PG.

Communication
3.3 S7 connections
See also
Open communication via Industrial Ethernet (Page 3-24)
3.3.3 Distribution and availability of S7 connection resources
Distribution of connection resources
Table 3-10 Distribution of connections
Communication service Distribution

PG communication In order to avoid allocation of connection resources being dependent only on
OP communication the chronological sequence in which various communication services are
requested, connection resources can be reserved for these services.
S7 basic communication
For PG and OP communication respectively, at least one connection
resource is reserved by default.
In the table below, and in the technical data of the CPUs, you can find the
configurable S7 connection resources and the default configuration for each
CPU. You "redistribute“ connection resources by setting the relevant CPU
parameters in STEP 7.
S7 communication Available connection resources that are not specially reserved for a service
Other communication resources (e.g. via (PG/OP communication ,
CP 343-1, with a data length of S7 basis communication) are used for this.
> 240 bytes)
Routing PG functions The CPUs provide a certain number of connection resources for routing.
(only for CPUs with DP/PN interface) These connections are available in addition to the connection resources.
The subsection below shows the number of connection resources.
Global data communication This communication service requires no S7 connection resources.
Point-to-point communication
PROFIBUS DP This communication service requires no S7 connection resources.
PROFINET CBA This communication service requires no S7 connection resources.
PROFINET IO This communication service requires no S7 connection resources.
Open communication by means of TCP/IP This communication service requires no S7 connection resources.
Open communication by means of ISO on Independently of the S7 connections, a total of 8 own resources are available
TCP for connections or local access points (UDP) for TCP/IP, ISO on TCP, UDP.
Open communication by means of UDP
SNMP This communication service requires no S7 connection resources.

Communication
3.3 S7 connections
Availability of connection resources
Table 3-11 Availability of connection resources
CPU Total number Reserved for Free

connection PG OP communication S7 basic S7 connections
resources communication communication
312C 6 1 to 5, default 1 1 to 5, default 1 0 to 2, default 2 Displays all non-
313C 8 1 to 7, default 1 1 to 7, default 1 0 to 4, default 4 reserved S7
313C-2 PtP connection resources
313C-2 DP as free connection
resources.
314C-2 PtP 12 1 to 11, default 1 to 11, default 1 0 to 8, default 8
314C-2 DP 1
312 6 1 to 5, default 1 1 to 5, default 1 0 to 2, default 2
314 12 1 to 11, default 1 to 11, default 1 0 to 8, default 8
1
315-2 DP 16 1 to 15, default 1 to 15, default 1 0 to 12, default 12
315-2 PN/DP 1
317-2 DP 32 1 to 31, default 1 to 31, default 1 0 to 30, default 0
317-2 PN/DP 1
319-3 PN/DP 32 1 to 31, default 1 to 31, default 1 0 to 30, default 0
1
Note
When using a CPU 315-2 PN/DP, you can configure up to 14 connection resources for S7
communication in NetPro: These connections are then reserved. For CPU 317-2 PN/DP and
CPU 319-3 PN/DP, you can configure a maximum of 16 coonnection resources for S7
communication in NetPro.

Communication
3.3 S7 connections
3.3.4 Connection resources for routing
Number of connection resources for routing

The CPUs with DP interface provide a different number of connection resources for the
routing function:
Table 3-12 Number of routing connection resources (for DP/PN CPUs)
CPU As of firmware version Number of connections for routing

31xC, CPU 31x 2.0.0 Max. 4
317-2 DP 2.1.0 Max. 8
31x-2 PN/DP 2.2.0 Interface X1 configured as:
• MPI:Max. 10

319-3 PN/DP 2.4.0 Interface X1 configured as:
• MPI: Max. 10


PROFINET: Max. 48
Example of a CPU 314C-2 DP

The CPU 314C-2 DP provides 12 connection resources (refer to Table 3-11):
• Reserve two connection resources for PG communication.
• Reserve three connection resources for OP communication.
• Reserve one connection resource for S7-based communication.
This leaves six connection resources available for other communication service, e.g. S7
communication, OP communication, etc.
In addition 4 routing connections via the CPU are possible.

Communication
3.4 DPV1
Example for a CPU 317-2 PN/DP / CPU 319-3 PN/DP

The CPU 317-2 PN/DP and CPU 319-3 PN/DP provide you with 32 connection resources
(refer to Table 3-11):
• Reserve four connection resources for PG communication.
• Reserve six connection resources for OP communication.
• Reserve two connection resources for S7-based communication.
• In NetPro you configure eight S7 connection resources for S7 communication via the
integrated PROFINET interface
This leaves 12 S7 connections available for arbitrary communication services, e.g.
S7 communication, OP communication, etc.
However, only a maximum of 16 connection ressources for S7 communication at the
integrated PN interface can be configured in NetPro.
In addition, there are another 24 routing connections available for the CPU 317-2 PN/DP,
and another 48 routing connections for the CPU 319-3 PN/DP, which do not affect the
aforementioned S7 connections.
However, take the interface-specific maximum numbers into account (refer to Table 3-12).
3.4 3.4 DPV1

New automation and process engineering tasks require the range of functions performed by
the existing DP protocol to be extended. In addition to cyclical communication functions,
acyclical access to non-S7 field devices is another important requirement of our customers,
and was implemented in the standard EN 50170. In the past, acyclical access was only
possible with S7 slaves. The distributed I/O standard EN 50170 has been further developed.
All the changes concerning new DPV1 functions are included in IEC 61158/ EN 50170,
volume 2, PROFIBUS.
Definition DPV1
The term DPV1 is defined as a functional extension of the acyclical services (to include new
interrupts, for example) provided by the DP protocol.
Availability
All CPUs with DP interface(s) and serving as DP masters feature the enhanced DPV1
functionality.
Note
If you want to use the CPU as an intelligent slave, remember that it does not have DPV1
functionality.

Communication
3.4 DPV1
Requirement for using the DPV1 functionality with DP slaves

For DPV1 slaves from other vendors, you will need a GSD file conforming to EN 50170,
revision 3 or later.
Extended functions of DPV1

• Use of any DPV1 slaves from external vendors (in addition to the existing DPV0 and S7
slaves, of course).
• Selective handling of DPV1-specific interrupt events by new interrupt blocks.
• Reading/writing SFBs that conform to standards to the data record (although this can only
be used for centralized modules).
• User-friendly SFB for reading diagnostics.
Interrupt blocks with DPV1 functionality
Table 3-13 Interrupt blocks with DPV1 functionality
OB Functionality
OB 40 Process interrupt
OB 55 Status interrupt
OB 56 Update interrupt
OB 57 Vendor-specific interrupt
OB 82 Diagnostic interrupt
Note
You can now also use organizational blocks OB40 and OB82 for DPV1 interrupts.
System blocks with DPV1 functionality
Table 3-14 System function blocks with DPV1 functionality
SFB Functionality
SFB 52 Read data record from DP slave/IO device or centralized module
SFB 53 Write data record to DP slave/IO device or centralized module
SFB 54 Read additional alarm information from a DP slave/IO device or a centralized
module in the relevant OB
SFB 75 Set any interrupts for intelligent slaves

Communication
3.4 DPV1
Note
You can also use SFB 52 to SFB 54 for centralized I/O modules. SFBs 52 to 54 can also be
used for PN IO.
Reference
For further information on the blocks mentioned earlier, refer to the reference manual
System Software for S7-300/400: System and Standard Software, or directly to the STEP
7Online Help.
See also
PROFIBUS DP (Page 3-2)

Communication
3.4 DPV1

Memory concept 4
4.1 4.1 Memory areas and retentivity
4.1.1 CPU memory areas
The three memory areas of your CPU:
0HPRU\RIWKH&38
/RDGLQJPHPRU\
&38 00&
ORFDWHGRQWKH00&
6\VWHPPHPRU\
:RUNLQJPHPRU\
Load memory
The load memory is located on the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card (MMC). The size of the
load memory corresponds exactly to the size of the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card. It is used
to store code blocks, data blocks and system data (configuration, connections, module
parameters, etc.). Blocks that are identified as non runtime-related are stored exclusively in
load memory. You can also store all the configuration data for your project on the SIMATIC
Micro Memory Card.
Note
User programs can only be downloaded and thus the CPU can only be used if the SIMATIC
Micro Memory Card is inserted in the CPU.

Memory concept
4.1 Memory areas and retentivity
System memory
The RAM system memory is integrated in the CPU and cannot be expanded.
It contains
• the address areas for address area memory bits, timers and counters
• the process image of the I/Os
• local data
RAM
The RAM is integrated in the CPU and cannot be extended. It is used to run the code and
process user program data. Programs only run in RAM and system memory.
Table 4-1 Retentivity of the RAM
All CPUs except: CPU 317, CPU 319 RAM is always retentive.
317 256 KB of RAM can be used
for retentive data modules.
319 700 KB of RAM can be used
for retentive data modules.
4.1.2 Retentivity of load memory, system memory and RAM

Your CPU is equipped with a service-free retentive memory, i.e. its operation does not
require a buffer battery. Data is kept in retentive memory across POWER OFF and
restart (warm start).
Retentive data in load memory

Your program in load memory is always retentive: It is stored on the SIMATIC Micro Memory
Card, where it is protected against power failure or CPU memory restart
Retentive data in system memory

In your configuration (Properties of CPU, Retentivity tab), specify which part of memory bits,
timers and counters should be kept retentive and which of them are to be initialized with "0"
on restart (warm restart).
The diagnostic buffer, MPI address (and transmission rate) and operating hour counter data
are generally written to the retentive memory area on the CPU. Retentivity of the MPI
address and baud rate ensures that your CPU can continue to communicate, even after a
power loss, memory reset or loss of communication parameters (e.g. due to removal of the
SIMATIC Micro Memory Card or deletion of communication parameters).

Memory concept
Retentive data in RAM

Therefore, the contents of retentive DBs are always retentive at restart and POWER
ON/OFF.
CPUs V2.1.0 or higher also support volatile DBs (the volatile DBs are initialized at restart of
POWER OFF-ON with their initial values from load memory.)
See also
Properties of the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card (MMC) (Page 4-8)
4.1.3 Retentivity of memory objects
Retentive behavior of memory objects

The table below shows the retentive behavior of memory objects during specific operating
state transitions.
Table 4-2 Retentivity behavior of memory objects (applies to all CPUs with DP/MPI-SS)
Memory object Operating state transition

POWER ON / STOP → RUN CPU memory
POWER OFF reset
User program/data (load memory) X X X
• Retentive behavior of DBs for CPUs
with firmware < V2.1.0 X X –
• Retentive behavior of DBs for CPUs Can be set in the properties of the DBs –
with firmware >= V2.1.0 in STEP 7 V5.2 + SP1 or higher.
Flag bits, timers and counters configured as X X –
retentive data
Diagnostics buffers, operating hour X X X
counters
MPI address, transmission rate X X X
(or also DP address, transmission rate of
the MPI/DP interface of CPU 315-2 PN/DP
and CPU 317 and CPU 319, if these are
configured as DP nodes).
x = retentive; – = not retentive
Retentive behavior of a DB for CPUs with firmware < V2.1.0

For these CPUs, the contents of the DBs are always retentive at POWER ON/OFF or STOP-
RUN.

Memory concept
Retentive behavior of a DB for CPUs with firmware >= V2.1.0

For these CPUs you can specify in STEP 7 (beginning with version 5.2 + SP 1), or at
SFC 82 CREA_DBL (parameter ATTRIB -> NON_RETAIN bit), whether a DB at POWER
ON/OFF or RUN-STOP
• keeps the actual values (retentive DB), or
• accepts the initial values from load memory (non-retentive DB)
Table 4-3 Retentive behavior of DBs for CPUs with firmware >= V2.1.0
At POWER ON/OFF or restart (warm start) of the CPU, the DB should

receive the initial values retain the actual values (retentive DB)
(non-retentive DB)
Reason: Reason:
At POWER ON/OFF and restart (STOP- At POWER OFF/ON and restart (STOP-RUN) of the
RUN) of the CPU, the actual values of the CPU, the actual values of the DB are retained.
DB are non-retentive. The DB receives the
start values from load memory.
Requirement in STEP 7: Requirement in STEP 7:
• The "Non-retain" check box must be set • The "Non-retain" check box must be reset in the
in the block properties of the DB, or block properties of the DB or
• a non-retentive DB was generated with • a retentive DB was generated with SFC 82.
SFC 82 "CREA_DBL" and the
corresponding block attribute (ATTRIB -
> NON_RETAIN bit.)
Note
Note:
• Only 256 KB of RAM can be used for retentive DBs on a CPU 317.
• Only 700 KB of RAM can be used for retentive DBs on a CPU 319.
The remainder of the RAM is used by code blocks and non-retentive data blocks.
4.1.4 Address areas of system memory

The system memory of the S7 CPUs is organized in address areas (refer to the table below).
In a corresponding operation of your user program, you address data directly in the relevant
address area.

Memory concept
Address areas of system memory
Table 4-4 Address areas of system memory
Address areas Description

Process image of inputs At every start of an OB1 cycle, the CPU reads the values at the
input of the input modules and saves them the process image of
inputs.
Process image of outputs During its cycle, the program calculates the values for the outputs
and writes these to the process image of outputs. At the end of
the OB1 cycle, the CPU writes the calculated output values to the
output modules.
Flag bits This area provides memory for saving the intermediate results of
a program calculation.
Timers Timers are available in this area.
Counters Counters are available in this area.
Local data Temporary data in a code block (OB, FB, FC) is saved to this
memory area while the block is being edited.
Data blocks See Recipes and measurement value logs
Reference
The address areas of your CPU are listed in the Instruction list for CPUs 31xC and 31x.
I/O process image

When the user program addresses the input (I) and output (O) address areas, it does not
query the signal states of digital signal modules. Instead, it rather accesses a memory area
in CPU system memory. This particular memory area is the process image.
The process image is organized in two sections: The process image of inputs, and the
process image of outputs.
Advantages of the process image
Process image access, compared to direct I/O access, offers the advantage that a consistent
image of process signals is made available to the CPU during cyclic program execution.
When the signal status at an input module changes during program execution, the signal
status in the process image is maintained until the image is updated in the next cycle.
Moreover, since the process image is stored in CPU system memory, access is significantly
faster than direct access to the signal modules.
Process image update
The operating system updates the process image periodically. The figure below shows the
sequence of this operation within a cycle.

Memory concept
6WDUWXS 6WDUWXSSURJUDP
3URFHVVLQJWKHXVHUSURJUDP2%
3,2 DQGDOOSURJUDPVFDOOHGLQVLGHRILW
&\FOHWLPH
5HDGLQJWKHLQSXWVIURPWKHPRGXOHV
3,, DQGUHIUHVKLQJWKHGDWDLQWKHSURFHVV
LPDJHRIWKHLQSXWV
8VHUSURJUDP :ULWLQJWKHSURFHVVLPDJHRIWKHRXWSXWV
LQWRWKHPRGXOHV
&&326
Configurable process image with CPUs that have FW V2.3.0 or higher

In STEP 7, you can define a user-specific size of the I/O process images between 0 to 2048
for the CPUs, FW V2.3.0 or higher.
Note the information below:
Note
Currently, the dynamic setting of the process image only affects its update at the scan cycle
control point. That is, the process image of inputs is only updated up to the set PII size with
the corresponding values of the peripheral input modules existing within this address area,
or the values of the process image of outputs up to the set PIO size are written to the
peripheral output modules existing within this address area.
This set size of the process image is ignored with respect to STEP 7 commands used to
access the process image (for example U I100.0, L EW200, = Q20.0, T AD150, or
corresponding indirect addressing commands also). However, up to the maximum size of the
process image (that is, up to I/O byte 2047), these commands do not return any
synchronous access errors, but rather access the permanently available internal memory
area of the process image.
The same applies to the use of actual parameters of block calls from the I/O area (area of
the process image).
Particularly if these process image limits were changed, you should check to which extent
your user program accesses the process image in the area between the set and the
maximum process image size. If access to this area continues, the user program may not
detect changes at the inputs of the I/O module, or actually fails to write the data of outputs to
the output module, without the system generating an error message.
You should also note that certain CPs may only be addressed outside of the process image.

Memory concept
Local data
Local data store:
• the temporary variables of code blocks
• the start information of the OBs
• transfer parameters
• intermediate results
Temporary Variables
When you create blocks, you can declare temporary variables (TEMP) which are only
available during block execution and then overwritten again. These local data have fixed
length in each OB. Local data must be initialized prior to the first read access. Each OB also
requires 20 bytes of local data for its start information. Local data access is faster compared
to access to data in DBs.
The CPU is equipped with memory for storing temporary variables (local data) of currently
executed blocks. The size of this memory area depends on the CPU. It is distributed in
partitions of equal size to the priority classes. Each priority class has its own local data area.
Caution
All temporary variables (TEMP) of an OB and its nested blocks are stored in local data.
When using complex nesting levels for block processing, you may cause an overflow in the
local data area.
The CPUs will change to STOP mode if you exceed the permissible length of local data for a
priority class.
Make allowances for local data space required for synchronous error OBs. This is assigned
to the respective triggering priority class.
See also
Retentivity of load memory, system memory and RAM (Page 4-2)

Memory concept
4.1.5 Properties of the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card (MMC)
The SIMATIC Micro Memory Card (MMC) as memory module for the CPU
The memory module used on your CPU is a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card. You can use
MMCs as load memory or as a portable storage medium.
Note
The CPU requires the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card for operation.
The following data are stored on the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card.
• User programs (all blocks)
• Archives and recipes
• Configuration data (STEP 7 projects)
• Data for operating system update and backup
Note
You can either store user and configuration data or the operating system on the SIMATIC
Micro Memory Card.
Properties of the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card (MMC)

The SIMATIC Micro Memory Card ensures maintenance-free and retentive operation of
these CPUs.
Caution
Data on a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card can be corrupted if you remove the card while it is
being accessed by a write operation. In this case, you may have to delete the SIMATIC
Micro Memory Card on your PG, or format the card in the CPU. Never remove a SIMATIC
Micro Memory Card in RUN mode. Always remove it when power is off, or when the CPU is
in STOP state, and when the PG is not writing to the card. When the CPU is in STOP mode
and you cannot not determine whether or not a PG is writing to the card (e.g. load/delete
block), disconnect the communication lines.

Memory concept
SIMATIC Micro Memory Card (MMC) copy protection

Your SIMATIC Micro Memory Card has an internal serial number that implements an MMC
copy protection. You can read this serial number from the SSL partial list 011CH index 8
using SFC 51 "RDSYSST." If the reference and actual serial number of your SIMATIC Micro
Memory Card are not the same, program a STOP command in a know-how-protected
module, for example.
Reference
Further information
• on SZL parts list refer to the Instruction list or the System and Standard functions manual.
• on resetting the CPU, refer to the Operating instructions CPU 31xC and CPU31x,
Selector Switch
Useful life of a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card (MMC)

The life of an SIMATIC Micro Memory Card depends mainly on the following factors:
1. The number of delete or programming operations,
2. External influences such as ambient temperature.
At ambient temperatures up to 60 °C, a maximum of 1000,000 delete/write operations can
be performed on a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card.
Caution
To prevent loss of data, always make sure that you do not exceed the maximum number of
delete/write operations.
See also
Operating and display elements: CPU 31xC (Page 2-1)
Operating and display elements: CPU 312, 314, 315-2 DP: (Page 2-5)
Operating and display elements: CPU 317-2 DP (Page 2-7)
Operating and display elements: CPU 31x-2 PN/DP (Page 2-9)
Operating and display elements: CPU 319-3 PN/DP (Page 2-11)

Memory concept
4.2 Memory functions
4.2 4.2 Memory functions
4.2.1 General: Memory functions
Memory functions
Memory functions are used to generate, modify or delete entire user programs or specific
blocks. You can also ensure that your project data are retained by archiving these. If you
created a new user program, use a PG/PC to download the complete program to the
SIMATIC Micro Memory Card.
4.2.2 Loading user program from SIMATIC Micro Memory Card (MMC) to the CPU
User program download

The entire user program data are downloaded from your PG/PC to the SIMATIC Micro
Memory Card (MMC). The previous content of the MMC is deleted in the process. Blocks
use the load memory area as specified under "Load memory requirements" in "General block
properties".
The figure shows the load and work memory of the CPU
3URJUDPPLQJGHYLFH 00&
6WRUHGRQWKHKDUG /RDGPRPRU\ :RUNLQJPHPRU\

GLVN
&RGHEORFNV &RGHEORFNV
5XQWLPHUHOHYDQW
SDUWVRIWKHFRGH
'DWDEORFNV 'DWDEORFNV DQGGDWDEORFNV
DVZHOODV
FRQILJXUDWLRQ
GDWD
6\VWHPGDWDEORFNV 6\VWHPGDWDEORFNV
&RPPHQWV
6\PEROV
1:If not all of the work memory area is retentive, the retentive area is indicated in STEP 7
module status as retentive memory (same as on CPU 317). You cannot run the program
until all the blocks are downloaded.

Memory concept
Note
This function is only permitted when the CPU is in STOP mode. Load memory is cleared if
the load operation could not be completed due to power loss or illegal block data.
4.2.3 Handling with modules
4.2.3.1 Download of new blocks or delta downloads
There are two ways to download additional user blocks or download deltas:
• Download of blocks: You already created a user program and downloaded it to the CPU
via the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card. You then want to add new blocks to the user
program. In this case you do not need to reload the entire user program to the MCC.
Instead you only need to download the new blocks to the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card
(this reduces the download times for highly complex programs.)
• Delta download: In this case, you only download the deltas in the blocks of your user
program. In the next step, perform a delta download of the user program, or only of the
changed blocks to the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card, using the PG/PC.
Warning
The delta down of block / user programs overwrites all data stored under the same name
on the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card.
The data of dynamic blocks are transferred to RAM and activated after the block is
downloaded.
4.2.3.2 Uploading blocks
Uploading blocks
Unlike download operations, an upload operation is the transfer of specific blocks or a
complete user program from the CPU to the PG/PC. The block content is here identical with
that of the last download to the CPU. Dynamic DBs form the exception, because their actual
values are transferred. An upload of blocks or of the user program from the CPU in STEP 7
does not influence CPU memory.

Memory concept
4.2.3.3 Deleting blocks
Deleting blocks
When you delete a block, it is deleted from load memory. In STEP 7, you can also delete
blocks with the user program (DBs also with SFC 23 "DEL_DB"). RAM used by this block is
released.
4.2.3.4 Compressing blocks
Compressing blocks
When data are compressed, gaps which have developed between memory objects in load
memory/RAM as a result of load/delete operations will be eliminated. This releases free
memory in a continuous block. Data compression is possible when the CPU is in RUN or in
STOP.
4.2.3.5 Promming (RAM to ROM)
Promming (RAM to ROM)

When writing the RAM content to ROM, the actual values of the DBs are transferred from
RAM to load memory to form the start values for the DBs.
Note
This function is only permitted when the CPU is in STOP mode. Load memory is cleared if
the function could not be completed due to power loss.

Memory concept
4.2.4 CPU memory reset and restart
CPU memory reset

After the insertion/removal of a Micro Memory Card, a CPU memory reset restores defined
conditions for CPU restart (warm start). A CPU memory reset rebuilds the CPU's memory
management. Blocks in load memory are retained. All dynamic runtime blocks are
transferred once again from load memory to RAM, in particular to initialize the data blocks in
RAM (restore initial values).
Restart (warm start)

• All retentive DBs retain their actual value (non-retentive DBs are also supported by CPUs
with Firmware >= V2.1.0. Non-retentive DBs receive their initial values).
• The values of all retentive M, C, T are retained.
• All non-retentive user data are initialized:
– M, C, T, I, O with "0"
• All run levels are initialized.
• The process images are deleted.
Reference
Also refer to CPU memory reset by means mode selector switch in the section
Commissioning in the CPU 31xC and CPU 31x Operating Instructions.

Memory concept
4.2.5 Recipes
Introduction
A recipe represents a collection of user data. You can implement a simple recipe concept
using static DBs. In this case, the recipes should have the same structure (length). One DB
should exist per recipe.
Processing sequence
Recipe is written to load memory:
• The various data records of recipes are created as static DBs in STEP 7 and then
downloaded to the CPU. Therefore, recipes only use load memory, rather than RAM.
Working with recipe data:
• SFC83 "READ_DBL" is called in the user program to copy the data record of a current
recipe from the DB in load memory to a static DB that is located in work memory. As a
result, the RAM only has to accommodate the data of one record. The user program can
now access data of the current recipe. The figure below shows how to handle recipe
data:
/RDGLQJPHPRU\
00&
&38
5HFLSH 6)&5($'B'%/
&XUUHQW
5HFLSH UHFLSH
6)&:5,7B'%/
5HFLSHQ
Saving a modified recipe:

• The data of new or modified recipe data records generated during program execution can
be written to load memory. To do this, call SFC 84 "WRIT_DBL" in the user program.
These data written to load memory are portable and also retentive on memory reset. You
can backup modified records (recipes) by uploading and saving these in a single block to
the PG/PC.
Note
Active system functions SFC82 to 84 (active access to the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card)
have a distinct influence on PG functions (for example, block status, variable status,
download block, upload, open.) This typically reduces performance (compared to passive
system functions) by the factor 10.

Memory concept
Note
As a precaution against loss of data, always make sure that you do not exceed the
maximum number of delete/write operations. Also refer to the SIMATIC Micro Memory
Card (MMC) section in the "Structure and Communication Connections of a CPU"
chapter.
Caution
Data on a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card can be corrupted if you remove the card while it
is being accessed by a write operation. In this case, you may have to delete the SIMATIC
Micro Memory Card on your PG, or format the card in the CPU. Never remove a
SIMATIC Micro Memory Card in RUN mode. Always remove it when power is off, or
when the CPU is in STOP state, and when the PG is not writing to the card. When the
CPU is in STOP mode and you cannot not determine whether or not a PG is writing to
the card (e.g. load/delete block), disconnect the communication lines.

Memory concept
4.2.6 Measured value log files
Introduction
Measured values are generated when the CPU executes the user program. These values
are to be logged and analyzed.
Processing sequence
Acquisition of measured values:
• The CPU writes all measured values to a DB (for alternating backup mode in several
DBs) which is located in RAM.
Measured value logging:
• Before the data volume can exceed work memory capacity, you should call
SFC 84 "WRIT_DBL" in the user program to swap measured values from the DB to load
memory. The figure below shows how to handle measured value log files:
/RDGLQJPHPRU\
00&
:RUNLQJPHPRU\
0HDVXUHGYDOXHV 6)&&5($B'%/ &38
0HDVXUHGYDOXHV &XUUHQWPHDVXUHG
YDOXHV
6)&:5,7B'%/

0HDVXUHGYDOXHVQ
• You can call SFC 82 "CREA_DBL" in the user program to generate new (additional) static
DBs in load memory which do not require RAM space.
Reference
For detailed information on SFC 82, refer to the System Software for S7-300/400, System
and Standard Functions Reference Manual, or directly to the STEP 7 Online Help.
Note
SFC 82 is terminated and an error message is generated if a DB already exists under the
same number in load memory and/or RAM.
The data written to load memory are portable and retentive on CPU memory reset.
Evaluation of measured values:
• Measured value DBs saved to load memory can be uploaded and evaluated by other
communication partners (PG, PC, for example).

Memory concept
Note
Active system functions SFC82 to 84 (active access to the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card)
have a distinct influence on PG functions (for example, block status, variable status,
download block, upload, open.) This typically reduces performance (compared to passive
system functions) by the factor 10.
Note
For CPUs with firmware V2.1.0 or higher, you can also generate non-retentive DBs using
SFC 82 (parameter ATTRIB -> NON_RETAIN bit.)
Note
To prevent data losses, do not exceed this maximum of delete/write operations. For
further information, refer to the Technical Data of the SIMATIC Micro Memory in the
General Technical Data of your CPU.
Caution
Data on a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card can be corrupted if you remove the card while it
is being accessed by a write operation. In this case, you may have to delete the SIMATIC
Micro Memory Card on your PG, or format the card in the CPU. Never remove a
SIMATIC Micro Memory Card in RUN mode. Always remove it when power is off, or
when the CPU is in STOP state, and when the PG is not writing to the card. When the
CPU is in STOP mode and you cannot not determine whether or not a PG is writing to
the card (e.g. load/delete block), disconnect the communication lines.

Memory concept
4.2.7 Backup of project data to SIMATIC Micro Memory Card (MMC)
Function principle
Using the Save project to Memory Card and Fetch project from Memory Card functions, you
can save all project data to a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card, and retrieve these at a later
time. For this operation, the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card can be located in a CPU or in the
MMC adapter of a PG or PC.
Project data are compressed before they are saved to a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card, and
uncompressed when fetched.
Note
In addition to project data, you may also have to store your user data on the MMC. You
should therefore first verify SIMATIC Micro Memory Card memory space.
A message warns you if the memory capacity on your SIMATIC Micro Memory Card is
insufficient
The volume of project data to be saved corresponds with the size of the project's archive file.
Note
For technical reasons, you can only transfer the entire contents (user program and project
data) using the Save project to memory card action.

Cycle and reaction times 5
5.1 5.1 Overview
Overview
This section contains detailed information about the following topics:
• Cycle time
• Reaction time
• Interrupt response time
• Sample calculations
Reference: Cycle time

You can view the cycle time of your user program on the PG. For further information, refer to
the STEP 7 Online Help, or to the Configuring Hardware and Connections in STEP 7 Manual
Reference: Execution time

can be found in the S7-300 Instruction List for CPUs 31xC and 31x. This tabular list contains
the execution times for all
• STEP 7 instructions the relevant CPU can execute,
• the SFCs / SFBs integrated in the CPUs,
• the IEC functions which can be called in STEP 7.
5.2 5.2 Cycle time
5.2.1 Overview
Introduction
This section explains what we mean by the term "cycle time", what it consists of, and how
you can calculate it.

5.2 Cycle time
Meaning of the term cycle time

The cycle time represents the time that an operating system needs to execute a program,
that is, one OB 1 cycle, including all program sections and system activities interrupting this
cycle. This time is monitored.
Time slice model

Cyclic program processing, and therefore user program execution, is based on time shares.
To clarify these processes, let us assume that every time share has a length of precisely
1 ms.
Process image
During cyclic program processing, the CPU requires a consistent image of the process
signals. To ensure this, the process signals are read/written prior to program execution.
Subsequently, the CPU does not address input (I) and output (Q) address areas directly at
the signal modules, but rather accesses the system memory area containing the I/O process
image.
Sequence of cyclic program processing

The table and figure below show the phases in cyclic program processing.
Table 5-1 Cyclic program processing
Step Sequence
1 The operating system initiates cycle time monitoring.
2 The CPU copies the values of the process image of outputs to the output modules.
3 The CPU reads the status at the inputs of the input modules and then updates the
process image of inputs.
4 The CPU processes the user program in time shares and executes program instructions.
5 At the end of a cycle, the operating system executes queued tasks, for example, loading
and deleting blocks.
6 The CPU then returns to the start of the cycle, and restarts cycle time monitoring.

5.2 Cycle time
3URFHVVLPDJHRIRXWSXWV 2
3,2
7LPHVOLFHVPVHDFK
3URFHVVLPDJHRILQSXWV 3
&\FOHWLPH
3,,
4
8VHUSURJUDP
&\FOHFRQWUROSRLQW&&3 5
2SHUDWLQJV\VWHP26
7LPHVOLFHPV

2SHUDWLQJV\VWHP
8VHUSURJUDP
&RPPXQLFDWLRQV
In contrast to S7-400 CPUs, the S7-300 CPUs data only allow data access from an OP / TP
(monitor and modify functions) at the scan cycle check point (Data consistency, see the
Technical Data). Processing of the user program is not interrupted by the monitor and modify
functions.
Extending the cycle time

Always make allowances for the extension of the cycle time of a user program due to:
• Time-based interrupt processing
• Process interrupt processing
• Diagnostics and error processing
• Communication with PGs, Operator Panels (OPs) and connected CPs (for example,
Ethernet, PROFIBUS DP)
• Testing and commissioning such as, e.g. status/controlling of variables or block status
functions.
• Transfer and deletion of blocks, compressing user program memory
• Write/read access to the MMC, using SFC 82 to 84 in the user program
• Ethernet communication via integrated PROFINET interface
• PROFINET CBA communication by means of the PROFINET interface (system load,
SFC call, updating on the cycle control point)
• PROFINET IO communication via PROFINET interface (system load)

5.2 Cycle time
5.2.2 Calculating the cycle time
Introduction
The cycle time is derived from the sum of the following influencing factors.
Process image update

The table below shows the time a CPU requires to update the process image (process
image transfer time). The times specified might be prolonged as a result of interrupts or CPU
communication. The process image transfer time is calculated as follows:
Table 5-2 Formula for calculating the process image (PI) transfer time
The transfer time of the process image is calculated as follows:

Base load K + number of bytes in PI in module rack 0 x (A)
+ number of bytes in PO in module rack 1 to 3 x (B)
+ number of words in PO via DP x (D)
+ number of words in PO via PROFINET x (P)
= Transfer time for the process image
Table 5-3 CPU 31xC: Data for calculating the process image (PI) transfer time
Const. Components CPU 312C CPU 313C CPU 313C-2 DP CPU 313C-2 PtP CPU 314C-2 DP CPU 314C-2 PtP
C Base load 150 μs 100 μs 100 μs 100 μs
A Per byte in 37 μs 35 μs 37 μs 37 μs
the rack 0
B per byte in - 43 μs 47 μs 47 μs
module
racks 1 to 3 *
D Per word in - - 1 μs - 1 μs -
(DP the DP area
only) for the
integrated
DP interface
* + 60 μs per rack

5.2 Cycle time
Table 5-4 CPU 31x: Data for calculating the process image (PI) transfer time
Const. Components CPU 312 CPU 314 CPU 315 CPU 317 CPU 319
C Base load 150 μs 100 μs 100 μs 50 μs 2 μs
A Per byte in the 37 μs 35 μs 37 μs 15 μs 15 μs
rack 0
B per byte in module - 43 μs* 47 μs* 25 μs* 22 μs**
racks 1 to 3 *
D Per word in the DP - - 2,5 μs 2,5 μs 2,5 μs
(DP only) area for the
integrated DP
interface
P per WORD in the - - 46 μs 46 μs 2,5 μs
(PROFIN PROFINET area
ET only) for the integrated
PROFINET
interface
* + 60 μs per rack
** + 21 μs per rack
Extending the user program processing time

In addition to actually working through the user program, your CPU's operating system also
runs a number of processes in parallel
(such as timer management for the core operating system). These processes extend the
processing time of the user program. The table below lists the multiplication factors required
to calculate your user program processing time.
Table 5-5 Extending the user program processing time
CPU Factor
312C 1,06
313C 1,10
313C-2DP 1,10
313C-PtP 1,06
314C-2DP 1,10
314C-2PtP 1,09
312 1,06
314 1,10
315 1,10
317 1,07
319 1,05

5.2 Cycle time
Operating system processing time at the scan cycle check point

The table below shows the operating system processing time at the scan cycle checkpoint of
the CPUs. These times are calculated without taking into consideration times for:
• Testing and commissioning routines, e.g. status/controlling of variables or block status
functions
• Transfer and deletion of blocks, compressing user program memory
• Communication
• Writing, reading of the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card with SFC 82 to 84
Table 5-6 Operating system processing time at the scan cycle check point
CPU Cycle control at the scan cycle check point (CCP)

312C 500 μs
313C 500 μs
313C-2 500 μs
314C-2 500 μs
312 500 μs
314 500 μs
315 500 μs
317 150 μs
319 77 μs
Extension of the cycle time as a result of nested interrupts

Enabled interrupts also extend cycle time. Details are found in the table below.
Table 5-7 Extended cycle time due to nested interrupts
Interrupt type Process Diagnostic Time-of-day Delay interrupt Watchdog

interrupt Interrupt interrupt interrupt
312C 700 μs 700 μs 600 μs 400 μs 250 μs
313C 500 μs 600 μs 400 μs 300 μs 150 μs
313C-2 500 μs 600 μs 400 μs 300 μs 150 μs
314C-2 500 μs 600 μs 400 μs 300 μs 150 μs
312 700 μs 700 μs 600 μs 400 μs 250 μs
314 500 μs 600 μs 400 μs 300 μs 150 μs
315 500 μs 600 μs 400 μs 300 μs 150 μs
317 190 μs 240 μs 200 μs 150 μs 90 μs
319 72 μs 87 μs 39 μs 26 μs 10 μs
The program runtime at interrupt level must be added to this time extension.

5.2 Cycle time
Extension of the cycle time due to error
Table 5-8 Cycle time extension as a result of errors
Type of error Programming errors I/O access errors

312C 600 μs 600 μs
313C 400 μs 400 μs
313C2 400 μs 400 μs
314C-2 400 μs 400 μs
312 600 μs 600 μs
314 400 μs 400 μs
315 400 μs 400 μs
317 100 μs 100 μs
319 19 μs 23 μs
The interrupt OB processing time must be added to this extended time. The times required
for multiple nested interrupt/error OBs are added accordingly.
5.2.3 Different cycle times
Overview
The cycle time (Tcyc) length is not the same in every cycle. The figure below shows different
cycle times Tcyc1 and Tcyc2. Tcyc2 is longer than Tcyc1, because the cyclically executed OB1 is
interrupted by a time-of-day interrupt OB (here: OB 10).
&XUUHQWF\FOH 1H[WF\FOH &\FOHDIWHUQH[W

7F\F 7F\F
2%
8SGD 8SGD 8SGD 8SGD 8SGD 8SGD

WLQJ WLQJ 2% &&3 WLQJ WLQJ 2% 2% &&3 WLQJ WLQJ
3,2 3,, 3,2 3,, 3,2 3,,

5.2 Cycle time
Block processing times may fluctuate

Fluctuation of the block processing time (e.g. OB 1) may also be a factor causing cycle time
fluctuation, due to:
• conditional instructions,
• conditional block calls,
• different program paths,
• loops etc.
Maximum cycle time

In STEP 7 you can modify the default maximum cycle time. OB80 is called on when this time
expires. In this block you can specify the CPUs response to this timeout error. The CPU
switches to STOP mode if OB80 does not exist in its memory.
5.2.4 Communication load
Configured communication load for PG/OP communication, S7 communication and PROFINET CBA
The CPU operating system continuously provides a specified percentage of total CPU
processing performance (time-sharing technology) for communication tasks. Processing
performance not required for communication is made available to other processes. In HW
Config, you can specify a communication load value between 5% and 50%. Default value is
20%.
You can use the following formula for calculating the cycle time extension factor:
100 / (100 – configured communication load in %)
7LPHVOLFHPV
,QWHUUXSWLRQ
2SHUDWLQJV\VWHP RIXVHUSURJUDP
8VHUSURJUDP
6KDUHFDQEHFRQILJXUHG
EHWZHHQDQG
&RPPXQLFDWLRQV
Example: 20 % communication load

In your hardware configuration, you have specified a communication load of 20 %. The
calculated cycle time is 10 ms. Using the above formula, the cycle time is extended by the
factor 1.25.

5.2 Cycle time
Example: 50 % communication load

In your hardware configuration, you have specified a communication load of 50%. The
calculated cycle time is 10 ms. Using the above formula, the cycle time is extended by the
factor 2.
Physical cycle time depending on communication load

The figure below describes the non-linear dependency of the physical cycle time on
communication load. In our sample we have chosen a cycle time of 10 ms.
&\FOHWLPH
PV
7KHFRPPXQLFDWLRQORDGFDQ
EHGHILQHGLQWKLVDUHD
PV
PV
PV
PV
PV

&RPPXQLFDWLRQORDG
Influence on the physical cycle time

From the statistical viewpoint, asynchronous events—such as interrupts—occur more
frequently within the OB1 cycle when the cycle time is extended as a result of
communication load. This further extends the OB1 cycle. This extension depends on the
number of events that occur per OB1 cycle and the time required to process these events.
Note
Change the value of the "communication load" parameter to check the effects on the cycle
time at system runtime. You must consider the communication load when you set the
maximum cycle time, otherwise timing errors may occur.

5.2 Cycle time
Tips
• Use the default setting wherever possible.
• Increase this value only if the CPU is used primarily for communications and if the user
program is not time critical.
• In all other situations you should only reduce this value.
5.2.5 Cycle time extension as a result of testing and commissioning functions
Runtimes
The runtimes of the testing and commissioning functions are operating system runtimes, so
they are the same for every CPU. Initially, there is no difference between process mode and
testing mode. How the cycle time is extended as a result of active testing and commissioning
functions is shown in the table below.
Table 5-9 Cycle time extension as a result of testing and commissioning functions
Function CPU 31xC/ CPU 31x

Status variable 50 μs for each variable
Control variable 50 μs for each variable
Block status 200 μs for each monitored line
Configuration during parameter assignment

For process operation, the maximum permissible cycle load by communication is not
specified in "Cycle load by communication", but rather in "Maximum permitted increase of
cycle time as a result of testing functions during process operation". Thus, the configured
time is monitored absolutely in process mode and data acquisition is stopped if a timeout
occurs. This is how STEP 7 stops data requests in loops before a loop ends, for example.
When running in Testing mode, the complete loop is executed in every cycle. This can
significantly increase cycle time.
5.2.6 Cycle extension through Component Based Automation (CBA)

By default, the operating system of your CPU updates the PROFINET interface as well as
the DP interconnections at the cycle control point. However, if you deactivated these
automatic updates during configuration (e.g. to obtain improved capabilities of influencing the
time behavior of the CPU), you must perform the update manually. This is done by calling
SFCs 112 to 114 at the appropriate times.
Reference
Information about SFC 112 to 114 is available in the STEP 7 Online Help.

5.2 Cycle time
Extending the OB1 cycle time

The OB1 cycle is extended by
• Increasing the number of PROFINET interconnections,
• Increasing the number of remote partners,
• Increasing the data volume and
• Incrasing the transfer frequency
Note
The use of CBA with cyclical PROFINET interconnections requires the use of switches to
maintain the performance data. 100-Mbit full-duplex operation is mandatory with cyclical
PROFINET interconnections.
The following graphic shows the configuration that was used for the measurements.
+0,23&
,QGXVWULDO(WKHUQHW
1XPEHURIREVHUYHG
LQWHUFRQQHFWLRQV
LQ6,0$7,&L0$3 352),1(7 352),1(7
RU23& UHPRWH UHPRWH 4XDQWLW\
QRGH QRGH
352),1(7GHYLFHZLWK
SUR[\IXQFWLRQDOLW\
&38[31'3
352),%86
352),%86GHYLFH 352),%86GHYLFH

DV'3VODYH DV'3VODYH 4XDQWLW\

5.2 Cycle time
The upper graphic displays Quantity for CPU 315 and CPU 317 Quantity for CPU 319
Incoming/outgoing remote connections
Cyclical interconnection via Ethernet 200, scan cycle rate: Intervals of 10 300, scan cycle rate: Intervals of 10
ms ms
Acyclic interconnection via Ethernet 100, scan cycle rate: Intervals of 100, scan cycle rate: Intervals of 200
500 ms ms
Interconnections from the PROFINET device 16 x 4 16 x 4
with proxy functionality to the PROFIBUS
devices
Interconnections of PROFIBUS devices 16 x 6 16 x 6
among each other
Additional marginal conditions

The maximum cycle load through communication in the measurement is 20 %.
The lower graphic shows that the OB1 cycle is influenced by increasing the cyclical
PROFINET interconnections to remote partners at PROFINET:
'HSHQGHQF\RIWKH2%F\FOHRQWKHXPEHURILQWHUFRQQHFWLRQV
&\FOHWLPHLQ˩V
&382%F\FOHZLWKUHPRWH352),1(7SDUWQHUV



1XPEHURIF\FOLFDO&%$LQWHUFRQQHFWLRQV
Base load through PROFIBUS devices

The 16 PROFIBUS devices with their interconnections among each other generate an
additional base load of up to 1,0 ms.

5.3 Response time
Tips and notes

The upper graphic already includes the use of uniform values for the transfer frequency of all
interconnections to a partner.
• The performance can drop by up to 50 % if the values are distributed to different
frequency levels.
• The use of data structures and arrays in an interconnection instead of many single
interconnections with simple data structures increases the performance.
5.3 5.3 Response time
5.3.1 Overview
Definition of response time

The response time is the time between the detection of an input signal and the change of a
linked output signal.
Fluctuation width
The physical response time lies between the shortest and the longest response time. You
must always reckon with the longest response time when configuring your system.
The shortest and longest response times are shown below, to give you an idea of the
fluctuation width of the response time.
Factors
The response time depends on the cycle time and following factors:
• Delay of the inputs and outputs of signal modules or integrated I/O.
• Additional update times for PROFINET IO
• additional DP cycle times on PROFIBUS DP
• Execution in the user program
Reference
• The delay times are located in the specifications of the signal modules (Module data
Reference Manual).
Update times for PROFINET IO

If you configured your PROFINET IO system in STEP 7, STEP 7 calculates the update time
for PROFINET IO. You can then view the PROFINET IO update times on your PG.

5.3 Response time
DP cycle times in the PROFIBUS DP network

If you have configured your PROFIBUS DP master system in STEP 7, STEP 7 calculates the
typical DP cycle time to be expected. You can then view the DP cycle time of your
configuration on the PG.
The figure below gives you an overview of the DP cycle time. In this example, let us assume
that the data of each DP slave has an average length of 4 bytes.
%XVUXQWLPH
PV
PV
7UDQVPLVVLRQUDWH0ELWV
PV
PV
PV
PV
PV
7UDQVPLVVLRQUDWH0%LWV
PV
0LQLPXP
VODYHLQWHUYDO 1XPEHURI'3VODYHVPD[LPXP
QXPEHULVGHSHQGHQWRQ&38
With multi-master operation on a PROFIBUS-DP network, you must make allowances for the
DP cycle time at each master. That is, you will have to calculate the times for each master
separately and then add up the results.

5.3 Response time
5.3.2 Shortest response time
Conditions for the shortest response time

The figure below shows the conditions under which the shortest response time is reached.
&&326
'HOD\RILQSXWV
3,2
,PPHGLDWHO\EHIRUHUHDGLQJLQWKH3,,WKHVWDWXVRI
WKHPRQLWRUHGLQSXWFKDQJHV7KLVFKDQJHRIWKHLQSXW
3,, VLJQDOLVVWLOOLQFOXGHGLQWKH3,,
5HVSRQVHWLPH
8VHUSURJUDP
7KHFKDQJHRIWKHLQSXWVLJQDOLVSURFHVVHGE\
WKHDSSOLFDWLRQSURJUDP
&&326
7KHUHVSRQVHRIWKHXVHUSURJUDPWRWKHFKDQJH
RIWKHLQSXWVLJQDOLVLVVXHGWRWKHRXWSXWV
3,2
'HOD\RIRXWSXWV
Calculation
The (shortest) response time is the sum of:
Table 5-10 Formula: Shortest response time
1 x process image transfer time for the inputs

+ 1 x process image transfer time for the outputs
+ 1 x program processing time
+ 1 × operating system processing time at the SCC
+ I/O delay
= Shortest response time
The result is equivalent to the sum of the cycle time plus the I/O delay times.
See also
Overview (Page 5-13)

5.3 Response time
5.3.3 Longest response time
Conditions for the longest response time

The figure below shows the conditions under which the longest response time is reached.
'HOD\RILQSXWV
&&326 7ZLFHWKHXSGDWHWLPHIRU352),1(7,2RU
WZLFHWKH'3F\FOHWLPHRQWKH352),%86'3
GHSHQGLQJRQZKHWKHU352),1(7,2RU
352),%86'3LVEHLQJXVHG
3,2
:KLOHUHDGLQJLQWKH3,,WKHVWDWXVRIWKHPRQLWRUHG
3,, LQSXWFKDQJHV7KLVFKDQJHRIWKHLQSXWVLJQDOLVQRW
LQFOXGHGLQWKH3,,DQ\ORQJHU
8VHUSURJUDP
&&326
5HVSRQVHWLPH
3,2
7KHFKDQJHRIWKHLQSXWVLJQDOLVLQFOXGHGLQWKH3,,
3,,
7KHFKDQJHRIWKHLQSXWVLJQDOLVSURFHVVHGE\WKH
8VHUSURJUDP DSSOLFDWLRQSURJUDP
&&326
7KHUHVSRQVHRIWKHXVHUSURJUDPWRWKHFKDQJH
3,2 RIWKHLQSXWVLJQDOLVLVVXHGWRWKHRXWSXWV
'HOD\RILQSXWV
7ZLFHWKHXSGDWHWLPHIRU352),1(7,2RU
WZLFHWKH'3F\FOHWLPHRQWKH352),%86'3
GHSHQGLQJRQZKHWKHU352),1(7,2RU
352),%86'3LVEHLQJXVHG

5.3 Response time
Calculation
The (longest) response time is the sum of:
Table 5-11 Formula: Longest response time
2 x process image transfer time for the inputs

+ 2 x process image transfer time for the outputs
+ 2 × operating system processing time
+ 4 x PROFINET IO update time (only if PROFINET IO is used.)
+ 4 x DP cycle time on PROFIBUS DP (only if PROFIBUS DP is used.)
+ I/O delay
= Longest response time
Equivalent to the sum of 2 x the cycle time + I/O delay time + 4 x times the PROFINET IO
update time or 4 x times the DP cycle time on PROFIBUS DP
See also
Overview (Page 5-13)
5.3.4 Reducing the response time with direct I/O access
Reducing the response time

You can reach faster response times with direct access to the I/O in your user program, e.g.
with
• L PIB or
• T PQW
you can partially avoid the response times described above.
Note
You can also achieve fast response times by using process interrupts.
See also
Shortest response time (Page 5-15)
Longest response time (Page 5-16)

5.4 Calculating method for calculating the cycle/response time
5.4 5.4 Calculating method for calculating the cycle/response time
Introduction
This section gives you an overview of how to calculate the cycle/response time.
Cycle time
1. Determine the user program runtime with the help of the Instruction list.
2. Multiply the calculated value by the CPU-specific factor from the table Extension of user
program processing time.
3. Calculate and add the process image transfer time. Corresponding guide values are
found in table Data for calculating process image transfer time.
4. Add the processing time at the scan cycle checkpoint. Corresponding guide values are
found in the table Operating system processing time at the scan cycle checkpoint.
5. Include the extensions as a result of testing and commissioning functions as well as
cyclical PROFINET interconnections in your calculation. These values are found in the
table Cycle time extension due to testing and commissioning functions. The final result is
the cycle time.
Extension of the cycle time as a result of interrupts and communication load

100 / (100 – configured communication load in %)
1. Multiply the cycle time by the factor as in the formula above.
2. Calculate the runtime of interrupt processing program sections with the help of the
instruction list. Add the corresponding value from the table below.
3. Multiply both values by the CPU-specific extension factor of the user program processing
time.
4. Add the value of the interrupt-processing program sequences to the theoretical cycle
time, multiplied by the number of triggering (or expected) interrupt events within the cycle
time. The result is an approximation of the physical cycle time. Note down the result.
See also
Cycle extension through Component Based Automation (CBA) (Page 5-10)

5.4 Calculating method for calculating the cycle/response time
Response time
Table 5-12 Calculating the response time
Shortest response time Longest response time

- Multiply the physical cycle time by factor 2.
Now add I/O delay. Now add the I/O delay plus the DP cycle times on
PROFIBUS-DP or the PROFINET IO update
times.
The result is the shortest response time. The result is the longest response time.
See also
Longest response time (Page 5-16)
Shortest response time (Page 5-15)
Calculating the cycle time (Page 5-4)
Cycle extension through Component Based Automation (CBA) (Page 5-10)

5.5 Interrupt response time
5.5 5.5 Interrupt response time
5.5.1 Overview
Definition of interrupt response time

The interrupt response time is the time that expires between the first occurrence of an
interrupt signal and the call of the first interrupt OB instruction. Generally valid: Higher-
priority interrupts take priority. This means that the interrupt response time is increased by
the program processing time of the higher-priority interrupt OBs and the interrupt OBs of
equal priority which have not yet been executed (queued).
Process/diagnostic interrupt response times of the CPUs
Table 5-13 Process and diagnostic interrupt response times
Process interrupt response times Diagnostic interrupt response

times
CPU External External Integrated I/O Min. Max.
min. Max. Max.
CPU 312 0.5 ms 0,8 ms - 0.5 ms 1,0 ms
CPU 312C 0.5 ms 0,8 ms 0,6 ms 0.5 ms 1,0 ms
CPU 313C 0,4 ms 0,6 ms 0.5 ms 0,4 ms 1,0 ms
CPU 313C-2 0,4 ms 0,7 ms 0.5 ms 0,4 ms 1,0 ms
CPU 314 0,4 ms 0,7 ms - 0,4 ms 1,0 ms
CPU 314C-2 0,4 ms 0,7 ms 0.5 ms 0,4 ms 1,0 ms
CPU 315-2 DP 0,4 ms 0,7 ms - 0,4 ms 1,0 ms
CPU 315-2 PN/DP
CPU 317-2 DP 0,2 ms 0,3 ms - 0,2 ms 0,3 ms
CPU 317-2 PN/DP
CPU 319-3 PN/DP 0.06 ms 0.10 ms - 0.09 ms 0.12 ms

5.5 Interrupt response time
Calculation
The formula below show how you can calculate the minimum and maximum interrupt
response times.
Table 5-14 Process and diagnostic interrupt response times
Calculation of the minimum and maximum interrupt reaction time

Minimum interrupt reaction time of the CPU Maximum interrupt reaction time of the CPU
+ Minimum interrupt reaction time of the + Maximum interrupt reaction time of the signal
signal modules modules
+ PROFINET IO update time (only if + 2 x PROFINET IO update time (only if PROFINET
PROFINET IO is used.) IO is used.)
+ DP cycle time on PROFIBUS DP (only if + 2 x DP cycle time on PROFIBUS DP (only if
PROFIBUS DP is used.) PROFIBUS DP is used.)
= Quickest interrupt reaction time The maximum interrupt reaction time is longer when
the communication functions are active. The extra
time is calculated using the following formula:
tv: 200 μs + 1000 μs x n%
n = Setting of the cycle load as a result of
communication
Signal modules
The process interrupt response time of signal modules is determined by the following factors:
• Digital input modules
Process interrupt response time = internal interrupt preparation time + input delay
You will find these times in the data sheet for the respective digital input module.
• Analog input modules
Process interrupt response time = internal interrupt preparation time + input delay
The internal interrupt preparation time for analog input modules can be neglected. The
conversion times can be found in the data sheet for the individual analog input modules.
The diagnostic interrupt response time of signal modules is equivalent to the period that
expires between the time a signal module detects a diagnostic event and the time this signal
module triggers the diagnostic interrupt. This short time can be neglected.
Process interrupt processing

Process interrupt processing begins after process interrupt OB40 is called. Higher-priority
interrupts stop process interrupt processing. Direct I/O access is executed during runtime of
the instruction. After process interrupt processing has terminated, cyclic program execution
continues or further interrupt OBs of equal or lower priority are called and processed.
See also
Overview (Page 5-1)

5.6 Sample calculations
5.5.2 Reproducibility of Time-Delay and Watchdog Interrupts
Definition of "Reproducibility"
Delay interrupt:
The period that expires between the call of the first instruction in the interrupt OB and the
programmed time of interrupt.
Watchdog interrupt:
The fluctuation width of the interval between two successive calls, measured between the
respective initial instructions of the interrupt OBs.
Reproducibility
The following times apply for the CPUs described in this manual, with the exception of
CPU 319
• Delay interrupt: +/- 200 μs
• Watchdog interrupt: +/- 200 μs
The following times apply in the case of CPU 319:
• Delay interrupt: +/- 140 μs
• Watchdog interrupt: +/- 88 μs
These times only apply if the interrupt can actually be executed at this time and if not
interrupted, for example, by higher-priority interrupts or queued interrupts of equal priority.
5.6 5.6 Sample calculations
5.6.1 Example of cycle time calculation
Design
You have configured an S7300 and equipped it with following modules in rack "0":
• a CPU 314C-2
• 2 digital input modules SM 321; DI 32 x 24 VDC (4 bytes each in the PI)
• 2 digital output modules SM 322; DO 32 x 24 VDC/0.5 A (4 bytes each in the PI)
User Program
According to the Instruction List, the user program runtime is 5 ms. There is no active
communication.

Calculating the cycle time

The cycle time for the example results from the following times:
• User program execution time:
approx. 5 ms x CPU-specific factor 1.10 = approx. 5.5 ms
• Process image transfer time
Process image of inputs: 100 μs + 8 Byte x 37 μs = approx. 0.4 ms
Process image of outputs: 100 μs + 8 Byte x 37 μs = approx. 0.4 ms
• Operating system runtime at scan cycle checkpoint:
Approx. 0.5 ms
Cycle time = 5.5 ms + 0.4 ms + 0.4 ms + 0.5 ms = 6.8 ms.
Calculation of the actual cycle time

• There is no active communication.
• There is no interrupt handling.
Hence, the physical cycle time is 6 ms.
Calculating the longest response time

Longest response time:
6.8 ms x 2 = 13.6 ms.
• I/O delay can be neglected.
• Neither PROFIBUS DP, nor PROFINET IO are being used, so you do not have to make
allowances for any DP cycle times on PROFIBUS DP or for PROFINET IO update times.
• There is no interrupt handling.
5.6.2 Sample of response time calculation
Design
You have configured an S7300 and equipped it with the following modules in two racks:
• a CPU 314C-2
Configuring the cycle load as a result of communication: 40 %
• 4 digital input modules SM 321; DI 32 x 24 VDC (4 bytes each in the PI)
• 3 digital output modules SM 322; DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A (2 bytes each in the PI)
• 2 analog input modules SM 331; AI 8 x 12-bit (not in the PI)
• 2 analog output modules SM 332; AO 4 x 12 bit (not in the PI)

User Program
According to the instruction list, the user program runtime is 10.0 ms.
Calculating the cycle time

The cycle time for the example results from the following times:
• User program execution time:
approx. 10 ms x CPU-specific factor 1.10 = approx. 11 ms
• Process image transfer time
Process image of inputs: 100 μs + 16 bytes x 37 μs = approx. 0.7 ms
Process image of outputs: 100 μs + 6 bytes x 37 μs = approx. 0.3 ms
• Operating system runtime at scan cycle checkpoint:
Approx. 0.5 ms
The sum of the listed times is equivalent to the cycle time:
Cycle time = 11.0 ms + 0.7 ms + 0.3 ms + 0.5 ms = 12.5 ms.
Calculation of the actual cycle time

Under consideration of communication load:
12.5 ms x 100 / (100-40) = 20.8 ms.
Thus, under consideration of time-sharing factors, the actual cycle time is 21 ms.
Calculation of the longest response time

• Longest response time = 21 ms x 2 = 42 ms.
• I/O delay
– The maximum delay of the input digital module SM 321; DI 32 x 24 VDC is 4.8 ms per
channel.
– The output delay of the digital output module SM 322; DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A can be
neglected.
– The analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bit was configured for an interference
suppression at 50 Hz. The result is a conversion time of 22 ms per channel. With the
eight active channels, the result is a cycle time of 176 ms for the analog input module.
– The analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 12-bit was programmed for the measuring
range of 0 ...10 Hz. This gives a conversion time of 0.8 ms per channel. Since 4
channels are active, the result is a cycle time of 3.2 ms. A settling time of 0.1 ms for a
resistive load must be added to this value. The result is a response time of 3.3 ms for
an analog output.

• Response times plus I/O delay:

– Case 1: An output channel of the digital output module is set when a signal is received
at the digital input. The result is a response time of:
Response time = 42 ms + 4.8 ms = 46.8 ms.
– Case 2: An analog value is fetched, and an analog value is output. The result is a
response time of:
Longest response time = 42 ms + 176 ms + 3.3 ms = 221.3 ms.
5.6.3 Example of interrupt response time calculation
Design
You have assembled an S7-300, consisting of one CPU 314C-2 and four digital modules in
the CPU rack. One of the digital input modules is an SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC; with
process/diagnostic interrupt function.
You have enabled only the process interrupt in your CPU and SM parameter configuration.
You decided not to use time-controlled processing, diagnostics or error handling. You have
configured a 20% communication load on the cycle.
You have configured a delay of 0.5 ms for the inputs of the DI module.
No activities are required at the scan cycle checkpoint.
Calculation
In this example, the process interrupt response time is based on following time factors:
• Process interrupt response time of CPU 314C-2: approx. 0,7 ms
• Extension by communication according to the formula:
200 μs + 1000 μs x 20 % = 400 μs = 0.4 ms
• Process interrupt response time of SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC:
– Internal interrupt preparation time: 0.25 ms
– Input delay: 0.5 ms
The process interrupt response time is equivalent to the sum of the listed time factors:
Process interrupt response time = 0.7 ms + 0.4 ms + 0.25 ms + 0.5 ms = approx. 1.85 ms.
This calculated process interrupt response time expires between the time a signal is
received at the digital input and the call of the first instruction in OB40.


Technical data of CPU 31xC 6
6.1 6.1 General technical data
6.1.1 Dimensions of CPU 31xC

Each CPU features the same height and depth, only the width dimensions differ.
• Height: 125 mm
• Depth: 115 mm, or 180 mm with opened front cover.
Width of CPU
CPU Width
CPU 312C 80 mm
CPU 313C 120 mm
CPU 313C-2 PtP 120 mm
CPU 313C-2 DP 120 mm
CPU 314C-2 PtP 120 mm
CPU 314C-2 DP 120 mm

6.1 General technical data
6.1.2 Technical specifications of the Micro Memory Card (MMC)
Plug-in SIMATIC Micro Memory Card (MMC)

The following memory modules are available:
Table 6-1 Available SIMATIC Micro Memory Cards
Type Order number Required for a firmware update via

SIMATIC Micro Memory Card
MMC 64k 6ES7 953-8LFxx-0AA0 –
MMC 128k 6ES7 953-8LGxx-0AA0 –
MMC 512k 6ES7 953-8LJxx-0AA0 –
MMC 2M 6ES7 953-8LLxx-0AA0 Minimum requirement for CPUs without DP interface
MMC 4M 6ES7 953-8LMxx-0AA0 Minimum requirement for CPUs without DP interface
(except CPU 319)
MMC 8M 1 6ES7 953-8LPxx-0AA0 Minimum requirements for the CPU 319
1 If you plug in the CPU 312C or CPU 312, you cannot use this SIMATIC Micro Memory
Card.
Maximum number of loadable blocks on the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card

Number of blocks that can be stored on the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card depends on the
capacity of the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card being used The maximum number of blocks
that can be loaded is therefore limited by the capacity of your MMC (including blocks
generated with the "CREATE DB" SFC)
Table 6-2 Maximum number of loadable blocks on the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card
Size of SIMATIC Micro Memory Maximum number of blocks that can be loaded
Card
64 KB 768
128 KB 1024
512 KB Here the maximum number of blocks that can be loaded for
2 MB the specific CPU is less than the number of blocks that can be
stored on the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card.
4 MB
Refer to the corresponding specifications of a specific CPU to
8 MB determine the maximum number of blocks that can be loaded.

6.2 CPU 312C
6.2 6.2 CPU 312C
Technical data
Table 6-3 Technical data of CPU 312C
Technical data
CPU and version
Order number 6ES7 312-5BD01-0AB0
• Hardware version 01
• Firmware version V2.0
• Associated programming package STEP 7 as of V 5.2 + SP 1
(please use previous CPU for STEP 7 V 5.1 + SP
3 or later)
Memory
RAM
• Integrated 16 KB
• Expandable No
Load memory Plugged in with MMC (Max. 4 MB)
Data storage life on the MMC At least 10 years
(following final programming)
Buffering Guaranteed by MMC (maintenance-free)
Execution times
Processing times of
• Bit operations Min. 0.2 μs
• Word instructions Min. 0.4 μs
• Fixed-point arithmetic Min. 5 μs
• Floating-point arithmetic Min. 6 μs
Timers/counters and their retentivity
S7 counters 128
• Retentive address areas Configurable
• Default from C0 to C7
• Counting range 0 to 999
IEC Counters Yes
• Type SFB
• Number unlimited (limited only by RAM size)
S7 timers 128
• Default Not retentive
• Timer range 10 ms to 9990 s
IEC Timers Yes
• Type SFB

6.2 CPU 312C
Technical data
Data areas and their retentivity
Flag bits 128 bytes
• Default retentivity MB0 to MB15
Clock flag bits 8 (1 byte per flag bit)
Data blocks Max. 511
(in the 1 to 511 range of numbers)
• Size Max. 16 KB
Local data per priority class Max. 256 bytes
Blocks
Total 1024 (DBs, FCs, FBs)
The maximum number of blocks that can be
loaded may be reduced if you are using another
MMC.
OBs see the Instruction List
• Size Max. 16 KB
Nesting depth
• Per priority class 8
• additional within an error OB 4
FBs
• Number, Max. 1024
• Size Max. 16 KB
FCs
• Size Max. 16 KB
Address areas (I/O)
Total I/O address area Max. 1024 bytes/1024 bytes
(can be freely addressed)
I/O process image 128 bytes/128 bytes
Digital channels Max. 256
• Of those central Max. 256
• Integrated channels 10 DI / 6 DO
Analog channels Max. 64
• Of those central Max. 64
• Integrated channels None
Assembly
Racks Max. 1
Modules per rack Max. 8
Number of DP masters
• Integrated None
• Via CP 4

6.2 CPU 312C
Technical data
Number of function modules and communication
processors you can operate
• FM Max. 8
• CP (PtP) Max. 8
• CP (LAN) Max. 4
Time-of-day
Real-time clock Yes (SW clock)
• Buffered No
• Accuracy Deviation per day < 10 s
• Behavior of the realtime clock after POWER The clock keeps running, continuing at the time-
OFF of-day it had when power was switched off.
Operating hours counter 1
• Number 0
• Value range 2 31 hours
(if SFC 101 is used)
• Granularity 1 hour
• Retentive Yes; must be manually restarted after every
restart
Clock synchronization Yes
• In the PLC Master
• On MPI Master/slave
S7 signaling functions
Number of stations that can be logged on for Max. 6
signaling functions (depends on the number of connections
configured for PG / OP and S7 basic
communication)
Process diagnostics messages Yes
• Simultaneously enabled interrupt S blocks Max. 20
Testing and commissioning functions
Status/control variables Yes
• Variables Inputs, outputs, memory bits, DBs, timers,
counters
• Number of variables Max. 30
– Of those as status variable Max. 30
– Of those as control variable Max. 14
Forcing Yes
• Variables Inputs, outputs
Block status Yes
Single step Yes
Breakpoints 2
Diagnostic buffer Yes
• Number of entries (not configurable) Max. 100

6.2 CPU 312C
Technical data
Communication functions
PG/OP communication Yes
Global data communication Yes
• Number of GD circuits 4
• Number of GD packets Max. 4
– Sending stations Max. 4
– Receiving stations Max. 4
• Length of GD packets Max. 22 bytes
– Consistent data 22 bytes
S7 basic communication Yes
• User data per job Max. 76 bytes
• Consistent data 76 bytes (for X_SEND or X_RCV)
64 bytes (for X_PUT or X_GET as the server)
S7 communication
• As server Yes
• User data per job Max. 180 bytes (with PUT/GET)
S5-compatible communication Yes (via CP and loadable FCs)
Number of connections Max. 6
can be used for
• PG communication Max. 5
– Reserved (default) 1
– Configurable From 1 to 5
• OP communication Max. 5
• S7-based communication Max. 2
– Configurable from 0 to 2
Routing No
Interfaces
1st interface
Type of interface Integrated RS485 interface
Physics RS 485
electrically isolated No
Interface power supply Max. 200 mA
(15 to 30 VDC)
Functionality
• MPI Yes
• PROFIBUS DP No
• Point-to-point communication No

6.2 CPU 312C
Technical data
MPI
Services
• PG/OP communication Yes
• Routing No
• Global data communication Yes
• S7 basic communication Yes
• S7 communication
– As server Yes
– As client No
• Transmission rates Max. 187.5 kbps
Programming
Programming language LAD/FBD/STL
Available instructions see the Instruction List
Nesting levels 8
System functions (SFCs) see the Instruction List
System function blocks (SFBs) see the Instruction List
User program security Yes
Integrated I/O
• Default addresses of the integrated
– Digital inputs 124.0 to 125.1
– Digital outputs 124.0 to 124.5
Integrated functions
Counters 2 channels (see the Manual Technological
Functions)
Frequency counters 2 channels, Max. 10 kHz (see the Manual
Technological Functions)
Pulse outputs 2 channels for pulse width modulation, Max. 2.5
kHz (see the Manual Technological Functions)
Controlled positioning No
Integrated "Controlling" SFB No
Dimensions
Mounting dimensions W x H x D (mm) 80 x 125 x 130
Weight 409 g
Voltages and currents
Power supply (rated value) 24 VDC
• Permitted range 20.4 V to 28.8 V
Current consumption (no-load operation) Typically 60 mA
Inrush current Typically 11 A
Power consumption (nominal value) 500 mA
I2t 0.7 A2s
External fusing of power supply lines LS switch Type C min. 2 A,
(recommended) LS switch Type B min. 4 A
Power loss Typically 6 W

6.3 CPU 313C
Reference
In Chapter Specifications of the integrated I/O you can find
• the specifications of integrated I/Os under Digital inputs of CPUs 31xC and Digital outputs
of CPUs 31xC.
• the block diagrams of the integrated I/Os under Arrangement and usage of integrated
I/Os.
6.3 6.3 CPU 313C
Technical data
Table 6-4 Technical data of CPU 313C
Technical data
CPU and version
Order no. [MLFB] 6ES7 313-5BE01-0AB0
• Firmware version V2.0.0
(please use previous CPU for STEP 7 V 5.1 + SP
3 or later)
Memory
Work memory
• Integrated 32KB
• Expandable No
Execution times
Processing times of
• Fixed-point arithmatic Min. 2 μs
• Floating-point arithmatic Min. 3 μs
Timers/counters and their retentive address areas
S7 counters 256
• Default From C 0 to C 7

6.3 CPU 313C
Technical data
IEC Counters Yes
• Type SFB
S7 timers 256
IEC timers Yes
• Type SFB
Data areas and their retentive address areas
Bit memory 256 bytes
• Default retentive address areas MB0 to MB15
Clock memory 8 (1 memory byte)
• Size Max. 16 KB
Blocks
MMC.
• Size Max. 16 KB
Nesting depth
• Additional within an error OB 4
FBs
• Size Max. 16 KB
FCs
• Size Max. 16 KB
Address areas (I/O)
Total I/O address area Max. 1024 bytes/1024 bytes
I/O process image 128 bytes / 128 bytes

6.3 CPU 313C
Technical data
• Centralized Max. 992
• Integrated channels 24 DI / 16 DO
• Centralized Max. 248
• Integrated channels 4 + 1 AI / 2 AO
Removal
Module rack Max. 4
Modules per rack Max. 8; Max. 7 in rack 3
• Integrated None
• Via CP 4
Operable function modules and communication
processors
• FM Max. 8
• CP (PtP) Max. 8
• CP (LAN) Max. 6
Time
Clock Yes (hardware clock)
• Buffered Yes
• Buffered period Typically 6 weeks (at an ambient temperature of
40 °C)
• Behavior of the clock on expiration of the The clock keeps running, continuing at the time-
buffered period of-day it had when power was switched off.
• Number 0
restart
Time synchronization Yes
S7 message functions
Number of stations that can be logged on for Max. 8
communication)

6.3 CPU 313C
Technical data
Test and startup functions
• Variables Inputs, outputs, memories, DBs, timers, counters
– of those as status variable Max. 30
– of those as control variable Max. 14
Force Yes
Block status Yes
Single-step Yes
Breakpoints 2
– Sender Max. 4
– Receiver Max. 4
• Size of GD packets Max. 22 bytes
– Consistent data 76 bytes (for X_SEND or X_RCV)
S7 communication
• As server Yes
• As client Yes (via CP and loadable FBs)
S5compatible communication Yes (via CP and loadable FCs)
Can be used for

6.3 CPU 313C
Technical data
• S7 basic communication Max. 4
Routing No
interfaces
1st interface
Physics RS 485
(15 to 30 VDC)
Functionality
• MPI Yes
• PROFIBUS DP No
• PtP communication No
MPI
Services
• Routing No
– As server Yes
– As client No (but with CP and loadable FB)
Programming
Instruction set see the Instruction List
Nesting levels 8
System functions (SFC) see the Instruction List
System function blocks (SFB) see the Instruction List
User program protection Yes
Integrated I/O
– Analog inputs 752 to 761
– Analog outputs 752 to 755
Counters 3 channels (see manual Technological Functions)
Frequency counter 3 channels up to Max. 30 kHz (see the
Technological Functions manual)
Pulse outputs 3 channels pulse-width modulation up to Max.
2,5 kHz (see Technological Functions manual)

6.3 CPU 313C
Technical data
Integrated "Controlling" SFB PID controller (see the Technological Functions
manual)
Dimensions
Weight 660 g
Voltages, currents
Power supply (rated value) DC 24 V
Making current typ. 11 A
Power consumption (nominal value) 700 mA
I2t 0,7 A2s
External fusing of power supply lines LS switch Type C min. 2 A,
(recommended) LS switch Type B min. 4 A,
Reference
In Chapter Specifications of the integrated I/O you can find
• the specifications of integrated I/O under Digital inputs of CPUs 31xC, Digital outputs of
CPUs 31xC, Analog inputs of CPUs 31xC and Analog outputs of CPUs 31xC.
I/Os.

6.4 CPU 313C-2 PtP and CPU 313C-2 DP
6.4 6.4 CPU 313C-2 PtP and CPU 313C-2 DP
Technical Data
Table 6-5 Technical data for CPU 313C-2 PtP/ CPU 313C-2 DP
Technical data
CPU 313C-2 PtP CPU 313C-2 DP
CPU and version CPU 313C-2 PtP CPU 313C-2 DP
Order no. [MLFB] 6ES7 313-6BE01-0AB0 6ES7 313-6CE01-0AB0
• Hardware version 01 01
• Firmware version V2.0.0 V2.0.0
Associated programming package STEP 7 as of V 5.2 + SP 1 STEP 7 as of V 5.2 + SP 1
(please use previous CPU for STEP (please use previous CPU for STEP 7
7 V 5.1 + SP 3 or later) V 5.1 + SP 3 or later)
Memory CPU 313C-2 PtP CPU 313C-2 DP
Work memory
• Integrated 32KB
• Expandable No
Execution times CPU 313C-2 PtP CPU 313C-2 DP
Processing times of
• Fixed-point arithmatic Min. 2 μs
• Floating-point arithmatic Min. 3 μs
Timers/counters and their retentive CPU 313C-2 PtP CPU 313C-2 DP
address areas
S7 counters 256
• Preset From C 0 to C 7
IEC Counters Yes
• Type SFB
S7 timers 256
• Preset Not retentive

Technical data
IEC timers Yes
• Type SFB
Data areas and their retentive address CPU 313C-2 PtP CPU 313C-2 DP
areas
• Preset retentive address areas MB0 to MB15
• Size Max. 16 KB
Blocks CPU 313C-2 PtP CPU 313C-2 DP
The maximum number of blocks that can be loaded may be reduced if you are
using another MMC.
• Size Max. 16 KB
Nesting depth
FBs
• Size Max. 16 KB
FCs
• Size Max. 16 KB
Address areas (I/O) CPU 313C-2 PtP CPU 313C-2 DP
Total I/O address area Max. 1024 bytes/1024 bytes Max. 1024 bytes/1024 bytes
(can be freely addressed) (can be freely addressed)
• Distributed None Max. 1008 bytes
I/O process image 128 bytes / 128 bytes 128 bytes / 128 bytes
Digital channels Max. 1008 Max. 8192
• Centralized Max. 992 Max. 992
• Integrated channels 16 DI / 16 DO 16 DI / 16 DO
Analog channels Max. 248 Max. 512
• Integrated channels None None

Technical data
Removal CPU 313C-2 PtP CPU 313C-2 DP
Module rack Max. 4
• Integrated No 1
• Via CP 4 4
Operable function modules and
communication processors
• FM Max. 8
• CP (PtP) Max. 8
• CP (LAN) Max. 6
Time CPU 313C-2 PtP CPU 313C-2 DP
• Buffered Yes
• Buffered period Typically 6 weeks (at an ambient temperature of 40 °C)
• Behavior of the clock on expiration of The clock keeps running, continuing at the time-of-day it had when power was
the buffered period switched off.
• Number 0
• Retentive Yes; must be manually restarted after every restart
S7 message functions CPU 313C-2 PtP CPU 313C-2 DP
Number of stations that can log in for Max. 8
signaling functions (e.g. OS) (depends on the number of connections configured for PG / OP and S7 basic
communication)
• Simultaneously enabled interrupt S Max. 20
blocks
Test and startup functions CPU 313C-2 PtP CPU 313C-2 DP
• Variables Inputs, outputs, bit memories, DBs, timers, counters
Force Yes

Technical data
Block status Yes
Single-step Yes
Breakpoints 2
Communication functions CPU 313C-2 PtP CPU 313C-2 DP
– Sender Max. 4
– Receiver Max. 4
S7 basic communication Yes (server)
S7 communication
• As server Yes
Can be used for
Routing No Max. 4
interfaces CPU 313C-2 PtP CPU 313C-2 DP
1st interface
Physics RS 485
Interface power supply (15 to 30 VDC) Max. 200 mA

Technical data
Functionality
• MPI Yes
• PROFIBUS DP No
• Point-to-point connection No
MPI
Services
• Routing No Yes
• S7 communication •
– As server • Yes
– As client • No (but via CP and loadable FBs)
2nd interface
Type of interface Integrated RS422/RS485 interface Integrated RS485 interface
Physics RS 422/485 RS 485
electrically isolated Yes Yes
Interface power supply (15 to 30 VDC) No Max. 200 mA
Number of connections None 8
Functionality
• MPI No No
• PROFIBUS DP No Yes
• Point-to-point connection Yes No
DP master
Number of connections – 8
Services
• PG/OP communication – Yes
• Routing – Yes
• Global data communication – No
• S7 basic communication – No
• S7 communication – No
• Constant bus cycle time – Yes
• SYNC/FREEZE – Yes
• Enable/disable DP slaves – Yes
• DPV1 – Yes
• Transmission rates – Up to 12 Mbaud
• Number of DP slaves per station – Max. 32
• Address area – Max. 1 KB I / 1 KB O
• User data per DP slave – Max. 244 bytes I / 244 bytes O

Technical data
DP slave
Services
• Routing – Yes (only if interface is active)
• Direct data exchange – Yes
• Automatic baud rate search – Yes (only if interface is passive)
• Intermediate memory – 244 bytes I / 244 bytes O
• Address areas – Max. 32, with Max. 32 bytes each
• DPV1 – No
GSD file – The latest GSD file is available at:
http://www.automation.siemens.com/
csi/gsd
Point-to-point connection
• Transmission rates 38.4 Kbaud half duplex –
19.2 Kbaud full duplex
• Cable length Max. 1200 m –
• User program can control the interface Yes –
• The interface can trigger a break or an Yes (message with break ID) –
interrupt in the user program
• Protocol driver 3964(R); ASCII –
Programming CPU 313C-2 PtP CPU 313C-2 DP
Instruction set see the Instruction List
Nesting levels 8
System functions (SFC) see the Instruction List
System function blocks (SFB) see the Instruction List
Integrated I/O CPU 313C-2 PtP CPU 313C-2 DP
Counters 3 channels (see the Technological Functions manual)
Frequency counter 3 channels up to Max. 30 kHz (see the Technological Functions manual)
Pulse outputs 3 channels pulse-width modulation up to Max. 2,5 kHz (see Technological
Functions manual)

Technical data
Integrated "Controlling" SFB PID controller (see the Technological Functions manual)
Dimensions CPU 313C-2 PtP CPU 313C-2 DP
Weight approx. 566 g
Voltages, currents CPU 313C-2 PtP CPU 313C-2 DP
Making current typ. 11 A
Power consumption (nominal value) 700 mA 900 mA
I2t 0,7 A2s
External fusing of power supply lines LS switch type B: min. 4 A, type C: min. 2 A
(recommended)
Reference
In Chapter Specifications of the integrated I/O are found
• under Digital inputs of CPUs 31xC and Digital outputs of CPUs 31xC the technical data of
integrated I/Os.
I/Os.

6.5 6.5 CPU 314C-2 PtP and CPU 314C-2 DP
Technical Data
Table 6-6 Technical data of CPU 314C-2 PtP and CPU 314C-2 DP
Technical data
CPU and version CPU 314C-2 PtP CPU 314C-2 DP
Order number 6ES7 314-6BF02-0AB0 6ES7 314-6CF02-0AB0
• Hardware version 01 01
• Firmware version V2.0.0 V2.0.0
Associated programming package STEP 7 as of V 5.2 + SP 1 STEP 7 as of V 5.2 + SP 1
(please use previous CPU for STEP 7 (please use previous CPU for STEP 7
V 5.1 + SP 3 or later) V 5.1 + SP 3 or later)
Memory CPU 314C-2 PtP CPU 314C-2 DP
RAM
• Integrated 64 Kbytes
• Expandable No
Load memory Pluggable by means of SIMATIC Micro Memory Card (Max. 8 Mbytes)
Execution times CPU 314C-2 PtP CPU 314C-2 DP
Processing times of
• Floating-point arithmetic Min. 3 μs
Timers/counters and their retentivity CPU 314C-2 PtP CPU 314C-2 DP
S7 counters 256
IEC Counters Yes
• Type SFB
S7 timers 256

Technical data
IEC Timers Yes
• Type SFB
Data areas and their retentivity CPU 314C-2 PtP CPU 314C-2 DP
Flag bits 256 bytes
• Default retentivity MB0 to MB15
• Size Max. 16 Kbytes
Blocks CPU 314C-2 PtP CPU 314C-2 DP
The maximum number of blocks that can be loaded may be reduced if you are
using another MMC.
OBs See the Instruction List
• Size Max. 16 KB
Nesting depth
FBs
• Size Max. 16 KB
FCs
• Size Max. 16 KB
Address areas (I/O) CPU 314C-2 PtP CPU 314C-2 DP
Total I/O address area Max. 1024 bytes / 1024 bytes Max. 1024 bytes / 1024 bytes
(can be freely addressed) (can be freely addressed)
• Distributed None Max. 1000 bytes
I/O process image 128 bytes / 128 bytes 128 bytes / 128 bytes
Digital channels Max. 1016 Max. 8192
• Integrated channels 24 DI / 16 DO 24 DI / 16 DO
Analog channels Max. 253 Max. 512
• Integrated channels 4 + 1 AI / 2 AO 4 + 1 AI / 2 AO

Technical data
Assembly CPU 314C-2 PtP CPU 314C-2 DP
Racks Max. 4
• Integrated No 1
• via CP 4 4
Number of function modules and
communication processors you can
operate
• FM Max. 8
• CP (PtP) Max. 8
• CP (LAN) Max. 10
Time-of-day CPU 314C-2 PtP CPU 314C-2 DP
Real-time clock Yes (HW clock)
• Buffered Yes
• Buffered period Typically 6 weeks (at an ambient temperature of 40 °C)
• Behavior of the clock on expiration The clock keeps running, continuing at the time-of-day it had when power was
of the buffered period switched off.
• Number 0
• Retentive Yes; must be manually restarted after every restart
S7 signaling functions CPU 314C-2 PtP CPU 314C-2 DP
Number of stations that can log in for Max. 12
signaling functions (e.g. OS) (depends on the number of connections configured for PG / OP and S7 basic
communication)
• Simultaneously enabled interrupt S Max. 40
blocks
Testing and commissioning functions CPU 314C-2 PtP CPU 314C-2 DP
• Variables Inputs, outputs, memory bits, DBs, timers, counters
– of those as status variable Max. 30
– of those as control variable Max. 14

Technical data
Forcing Yes
Block status Yes
Single step Yes
Breakpoints 2
Communication functions CPU 314C-2 PtP CPU 314C-2 DP
– Sending stations Max. 4
– Receiving stations Max. 4
S7 communication
• As server Yes
• as client Yes (via CP and loadable FBs)
can be used for
Routing No Max. 4

Technical data
Interfaces CPU 314C-2 PtP CPU 314C-2 DP
1st interface
Physics RS 485
Functionality
• MPI Yes
• PROFIBUS DP No
MPI
Number of connections 12
Services
• Routing No Yes
– As server Yes
– As client No (but via CP and loadable FBs)
2nd interface CPU 314C-2 PtP CPU 314C-2 DP
Type of interface Integrated RS422/RS485 interface Integrated RS485 interface
Physics RS 422/485 RS 485
electrically isolated Yes Yes
Interface power supply (15 to 30 VDC) No Max. 200 mA
Number of connections None 12
Functionality
• MPI No No
• PROFIBUS DP No Yes
• Point-to-point connection Yes No
DP master
Services
• Routing – Yes
• Constant bus cycle time – Yes
• SYNC/FREEZE – Yes

Technical data
• Enable/disable DP slaves – Yes
• DPV1 – Yes
• Number of DP slaves per station – Max. 32
• Address area – Max. 1 KB I / 1 KB O
• User data per DP slave – Max. 244 bytes I / 244 bytes O
DP slave
Services
• Routing – Yes (only if interface is active)
• Direct data exchange – Yes
• Intermediate memory – 244 bytes I / 244 bytes O
• Automatic baud rate search – Yes (only if interface is passive)
• Address areas Max. 32, with Max. 32 bytes each
• DPV1 – No
GSD file – The latest GSD file is available at:
http://www.automation.siemens.com/csi/
gsd
Point-to-point connection
• Transmission rates 38.4 Kbaud half duplex –
19.2 Kbaud full duplex
• Cable length Max. 1200 m –
• User program can control the Yes –
interface
• The interface can trigger a break or Yes (message with break ID) –
an interrupt in the user program
• Protocol driver 3964 (R); ASCII and RK512 –
Programming CPU 314C-2 PtP CPU 314C-2 DP
Available instructions see the Instruction List
Nesting levels 8
System functions (SFCs) see the Instruction List
System function blocks (SFBs) see the Instruction List

Technical data
Integrated I/O CPU 314C-2 PtP CPU 314C-2 DP
– Analog inputs 752 to 761
– Analog outputs 752 to 755
Counters 4 channels (see the Manual Technological Functions)
Frequency counters 4 channels, Max. 60 kHz (see the Manual Technological Functions)
Pulse outputs 4 channels for pulse width modulation, Max. 2.5 kHz (see the Manual
Technological Functions)
Controlled positioning 1 channel (see the Manual Technological Functions)
Integrated "Controlling" SFB PID controller (see the Manual Technological Functions)
Dimensions CPU 314C-2 PtP CPU 314C-2 DP
Weight approx. 676 g
Voltages and currents CPU 314C-2 PtP CPU 314C-2 DP
Current consumption (no-load Typically 150 mA
operation)
Inrush current Typically 11 A
Power consumption (nominal value) 800 mA 1000 mA
I2t 0.7 A2s
External fusing of power supply lines LS switch type C min. 2 A,
(recommended) LS switch type B min. 4 A

6.6 Technical data of the integrated I/O
6.6 6.6 Technical data of the integrated I/O
6.6.1 Arrangement and usage of integrated I/Os
Introduction
Integrated I/Os of CPUs 31xC can be used for technological functions or as standard I/O.
The figures below illustrate possible usage of I/Os integrated in the CPUs.
Reference
Further information on integrated I/O is found in the Manual Technical Functions.
CPU 312C: Pin-out of the integrated DI/DO (connector X11)
X11
6WDQGDUG ,QWHUUXSW &RXQW
LQSXW 1
DI X Z0 (A) 2 DI+0.0
DI X Z0 (B) 3 DI+0.1
DI X Z0 (HW-Tor) 4 DI+0.2
DI X Z1 (A) 5 DI+0.3
DI X Z1 (B) 6 DI+0.4
DI X Z1 (HW-Tor) 7 DI+0.5
DI X Latch 0 8 DI+0.6
DI X Latch 1 9 DI+0.7
DI X 10 DI+1. 0
DI X 11 DI+1.1
12 2M
13 1L+
DO V0 14 DO+0.0
DO V1 15 DO+0.1
DO 16 DO+0.2
DO 17 DO+0.3
DO 18 DO+0.4
DO 19 DO+0.5
20 1M
=Q &RXQWHUQ
$% (QFRGHUVLJQDV
9Q &RPSDUDWRUQ
; 3LQXVDEOHLIQRWDVVLJQHGWRWHFKQRORJ\IXQFWLRQV
+:7RU *DWHFRQWURO
/DWFK 6WRUHFRXQWHUGLVWDQFH

Block diagram of the integrated digital I/O

&38LQWHUIDFH

0
/

0

CPU 313C, CPU 313C-2 DP/PtP, CPU 314C-2 DP/PtP: DI/DO (connectors X11 and X12)
;RI&38&3W3'3
;RI&38&3W3'3
6WDQGDUG ,QWHUUXSW &RXQW 3RVLWLR1) 3RVLWLRQLQJ 1) &RXQW 6WDQGDUG

', LQSXW QLQJ 'LJLWDO $QDORJ '2
1 1L+ 2L+ 21
X X Z0 (A) A0 2 DI+0.0 DO+0.0 22 V0 X
X X Z0 (B) B0 3 DI+0.1 DO+0.1 23 V1 X
X X Z0(HW-gate) N 0 4 DI+0.2 DO+0.2 24 V2 X
X X Z1 (A) Tast 0 5 DI+0.3 DO+0.3 25 V3 1) X
X X Z1(B) Bero 0 6 DI+0.4 DO+0.4 26 X
X X Z1(HW-gate) 7 DI+0.5 DO+0.5 27 X
X X Z2 (A) 8 DI+0.6 DO+0.6 28 CONV_EN X
X X Z2 (B) 9 DI+0.7 DO+0.7 29 CONV_DIR X
10 2M 30
11 3L+ 31
X X Z2 (HW gate) 12 DI+1. 0 DO+1. 0 32 R+ X
X X Z3 (A) 13 DI+1.1 DO+1.1 33 R- X
X X Z3 (B) 1) 14 DI+1.2 DO+1.2 34 Rapid X
X X Z3 (HW gate) 15 DI+1.3 DO+1.3 35 Creep X
X X Z0 (Latch) 16 DI+1.4 DO+1.4 36 X
X X Z1 (Latch) 17 DI+1.5 DO+1.5 37 X
X X Z2 (Latch) 18 DI+1.6 DO+1.6 38 X
X X Z3 (Latch) 1) 19 DI+1.7 DO+1.7 39 X
20 1M 3M 40
=Q &RXQWHUQ
$% (QFRGHUVLJQDOV
+:JDWH *DWHFRQWURO
/DWFK 6WRUHFRXQWHUGLVWDQFH
9Q &RPSDUDWRUQ
3URE 0HDVXULQJSUREH
%HUR 5HIHUHQFHSRLQWVZLWFK
55 'LUHFWLRQDOVLJQDO
5DSLG 5DSLGWUDYHUVH
&UHHS &UHHSVSHHG
&219B(1 3RZHUVHFWLRQHQDEOH
&219B',5 'LUHFWLRQDOVLJQDORQO\ZLWKFRQWUROW\SHYROWDJHWR9RUFXUUHQWIURPWRP$DQG
GLUHFWLRQDOVLJQDO
; 3LQXVDEOHLIQRWDVVLJQHGWRWHFKQRORJ\IXQFWLRQV
&38&RQO\
Reference
Details are found in the Manual Technical Functions under Counting, Frequency
Measurement and Pulse Width Modulation

Block diagram of integrated digital I/O of CPUs 313C/313C-2/314C-2

/ /

&38LQWHUIDFH
0

/

0 0

CPU 313C/314C-2: Pin-out of the integrated AI/AO and DI (connector X11)
;
6WDQGDUG 3RVLWLRQLQJ 6WDQGDUG', ,QWHUUXSWLQSXW

9 ', ; ;
$,&K , 3(:[ ', ; ;
& ', ; ;
9 ', ; ;
$,&K , 3(:[ ', ; ;
& ', ; ;
9 ', ; ;
$,&K , 3(:[ ', ; ;
& 0
9
$,&K , 3(:[
&

37&K 3(:[

9 &RQWURO 3(:[
$2&K RXWSXW
$
9
$2&K 3(:[
$
0$1$
&38&RQO\

Block diagram of integrated digital/analog I/O of CPUs 313C/314C-2

$,$ ',

9 $,

$
&+
$,
9 $,

&38LQWHUIDFH
$
&+
$,
9
$,
$
&+
$, 0

9
$,
$
&+
$,
5 $,
&RQWUROOHU
37
$,
9 8 $
$2
, &+
$

9 8 $
$2
, &+
$
0$1$
Simultaneous usage of technological functions and standard I/O

Technological functions and standard I/O can be used simultaneously with appropriate
hardware. For example, you can use all digital inputs not used for counting functions as
standard DI.
Read access to inputs used by technological functions is possible. Write access to outputs
used by technological functions is not possible.
See also
CPU 312C (Page 6-3)
CPU 313C (Page 6-8)
CPU 313C-2 PtP and CPU 313C-2 DP (Page 6-14)
CPU 314C-2 PtP and CPU 314C-2 DP (Page 6-21)

6.6.2 Analog I/O
Wiring of the current/voltage inputs

The figure below shows the wiring diagram of the current/voltage inputs operated with 2-/4-
wire measuring transducers.
$, 3LQWR

$, 3LQWR
ZLUH
VLJQDOFRQYHUWHU
$, 3LQWR

$, X 9
$, 3LQWR
$, ,

$, F

0 $1$ 0
:HUHFRPPHQGFRQQHFWLQJ$,[&ZLWK0$1$XVLQJDEULGJH
Figure 6-1 Connection of a 2-wire measuring transducer to an analog current/voltage input of

CPU 313C/314C-2
/ 0 $, 3LQWR
$, 3LQWR
$, X

$, , ZLUH $, 3LQWR

$, F VLJQDOFRQYHUWHU
$, 3LQWR
$, X

$, , 0

$, F
6KRUWFLUFXLWQRQZLUHGLQSXWFKDQQHOV
DQGFRQQHFW$O[&ZLWK0$1$
0 $1$ :HUHFRPPHQGFRQQHFWLQJ$O[&ZLWK0$1$
ZKHQXVLQJWKHZLUHVLJQDOFRQYHUWHU
Figure 6-2 Connection of a 4-wire measuring transducer to an analog current/voltage input of

CPU 313C/314C-2
Measurement principle
31xC CPUs use the measurement principle of actual value encoding. Here, they operate
with a sampling rate of 1 kHz. That is, a new value is available at the peripheral input word
register once every millisecond. This value can then be read via user program (e.g. L PEW).
The "previous" value is read again if access times are shorter than 1 ms.

Integrated hardware low-pass filter

An integrated low-pass filter attenuates analog input signals of channel 0 to 3. They are
attenuated according to the trend in the figure below.
$WWHQXDWLRQ

,QWHUQDO $WWHQXDWLRQ
VLJQDOOHYHO VWURQJ
DWWHQXDWLRQ

,QDGPLVVLEOH
LQSXWIUHTXHQF\
+] +] +] ,QSXWIUHTXHQF\
Figure 6-3 Low-pass characteristics of the integrated filter
Note
The maximum frequency of the input signal is 400 Hz.
Input filters (software filter)

The current / voltage inputs have a software filter for the input signals which can be
programmed with STEP 7. It filters the configured interference frequency (50/60 Hz) and
multiples thereof.
The selected interference suppression also determines the integration time.
At an interference suppression of 50 Hz the software filter forms the average based on the
last 20 measurements and saves the result as a measurement value.
You can suppress interference frequencies (50 Hz or 60 Hz) according to the parameters set
in STEP 7. A setting of 400 Hz will not suppress interference.
An integrated low-pass filter attenuates analog input signals of channel 0 to 3.

6HOHFWLRQLQ67(3
6RIWZDUHILOWHU
+]FRQILJXUDWLRQ
PHDQYDOXHILOWHU
+]FRQILJXUDWLRQ
PHDQYDOXHILOWHU
+]FRQILJXUDWLRQ
$'FRQYHUWHU
$,[
+DUGZDUHORZSDVVILOWHU
5&FLUFXLW
Figure 6-4 Principle of interference suppression with STEP 7
In the two graphics below we illustrate how the 50 Hz and 60 Hz interference suppression
work
([DPSOHRID+]SDUDVLWLFIUHTXHQF\VXSSUHVVLRQLQWHJUDWLRQWLPHFRUUHVSRQGVWRPV
PV PV PV PV PV
&\FOH
9DOXH 9DOXH 9DOXH 9DOXH 9DOXH

DYHUDJHGPHDVXUHGYDOXH
PV PV PV PV PV

&\FOH

Figure 6-5 50 Hz interference suppression

([DPSOHRID+]SDUDVLWLFIUHTXHQF\VXSSUHVVLRQLQWHJUDWLRQWLPHFRUUHVSRQGVWRPV
PV PV PV PV PV
&\FOH

PV PV PV PV PV

&\FOH

Figure 6-6 60 Hz interference suppression
Note
If the interference frequency is not 50/60 Hz or a multiple thereof, the input signal must be
filtered externally,
In this case, 400 Hz frequency suppression must be configured for the respective input. This
is equivalent to a "Deactivation" of the software filter.
Inputs not connected

The three inputs of a current/voltage analog output channel that is not connected should be
bypasses and connected to MANA (pin 20 of the front connector). This ensures maximum
interference resistance for these analog inputs.
Outputs not connected

In order to disconnect unused analog outputs from power, you must disable and leave them
open during parameter assignment with STEP 7.
Reference
Details (visualization and processing of analog values, for example) are found in chapter 4 of
the Module Data Reference Manual.

6.6.3 Parameterization
Introduction
You configure the integrated I/O of CPU 31xC with STEP 7. Always make these settings
when the CPU is in STOP. The generated parameters are downloaded from the PG to the
S7-300 and written to CPU memory .
You can also choose to change the parameters at SFC 55 in the user program (see the
Reference Manual System and Standard Functions). Refer to the structure of record 1 for
the respective parameters.
Parameters of standard DI
The table below gives you an overview of the parameters for standard digital inputs.
Table 6-7 Parameters of standard DI
Parameters Value range Default Range of efficiency

Input delay (ms) 0,1/0,5/3/15 3 Channel group
The table below gives you an overview of the parameters when using digital inputs as
interrupt inputs.
Table 6-8 Parameters of the interrupt inputs

Interrupt input Disabled / De-activated digital input
positive edge
Interrupt input Disabled/ De-activated digital input
negative edge
%\WH %LW1U
,QWHUUXSWLQSXW',
,QWHUUXSWLQSXW',
,QWHUUXSWLQSXW',
%\WH %LW1U
,QWHUUXSWLQSXW',
,QWHUUXSWLQSXW',
,QWHUUXSWLQSXW',
%\WH %LW1U
,QWHUUXSWLQSXW',
,QWHUUXSWLQSXW',
GHDFWLYDWHG
,QWHUUXSWLQSXW',
ULVLQJHGJH
'HIDXOWVHWWLQJ
%\WHUHVHUYHUG

%\WH %LW1U
,QWHUUXSWLQSXW',
,QWHUUXSWLQSXW',
,QWHUUXSWLQSXW',
%\WH %LW1U
,QWHUUXSWLQSXW',
,QWHUUXSWLQSXW',
,QWHUUXSWLQSXW',
%\WH %LW1U
,QWHUUXSWLQSXW',
,QWHUUXSWLQSXW',
GHDFWLYDWHG
,QWHUUXSWLQSXW',
ULVLQJHGJH
'HIDXOWVHWWLQJ
%\WHUHVHUYHUG
%\WH %LW1U
,QSXWGHOD\',WR',
,QSXWGHOD\',WR',
,QSXWGHOD\',WR',
,QSXWGHOD\',WR',
%\WH %LW1U
,QSXWGHOD\',WR',
,QSXWGHOD\',WR',
UHVHUYHG
%PV
%PV
%PV
%PV
'HIDXOWVHWWLQJ%
Figure 6-7 Structure of record 1 for standard DI and interrupt inputs (length of 10 bytes)
Parameters of standard DO
There are no parameters for standard digital outputs.

Parameters of standard AI
The table below gives you an overview of the parameters for standard analog inputs.
Table 6-9 Parameters of standard AI

Integration time (ms) 2,5/16,6/20 20 Channel
Interference suppression 400/60/50 50 Channel
(Hz)
(channel 0 to 3)
Measurement range deactivated/ +/- 10 V Channel
(channel 0 to 3) +/- 20 mA/
0 ... 20 mA/
4 ... 20 mA/
+/- 10 V/
0 ... 10 V
Type of measurement deactivated/ U voltage Channel
(channel 0 to 3) U voltage/
I current
Unit of measurement Celsius/Fahrenheit/ Celsius Channel
(channel 4) Kelvin
Measurement range deactivated/ 600 Ω Channel
(Pt 100 input; channel 4) Pt 100/600 Ω
Type of measurement deactivated/ Resistance Channel
(Pt 100 input; channel 4) Resistance/
Thermal resistance
Reference
See also Chapter 4.3 in the Module Data Reference Manual.
Parameters of standard AO
The table below gives you an overview of standard analog output parameters (see also
Chapter 4.3 in the Module Data Reference Manual).
Table 6-10 Parameters of standard AO

Output range deactivated/ +/- 10 V Channel
(channel 0 to 1) +/- 20 mA/
0 ... 20 mA/
4 ... 20 mA/
+/- 10 V/
0 ... 10 V
Type of output deactivated/ U voltage Channel
(channel 0 to 1) U voltage/
I current

%\WH
%LW
UHVHUYHG
8QLWRIPHDVXUH
%&HOVLXV
%)DKUHQKHLW
%.HOYLQ
UHVHUYHG 'HIDXOWVHWWLQJ %
%\WH %LW
3DUDVLWLFIUHTXHQF\VXSSUHVVLRQLQWHJUDWLRQWLPHRIFKDQQHO$,
%PV+]
%PV+]
%PV+]
'HIDXOWVHWWLQJ %
%\WH UHVHUYHG
%\WH %LW
0HDVXULQJUDQJHRIFKDQQHO$,VHWWLQJVVHHE\WH
0HDVXUHPHQWW\SHRIFKDQQHO$,VHWWLQJVVHHE\WH
%\WH %LW

%\WH %LW
%\WH %LW
0HDVXULQJUDQJHRIFKDQQHO$,
+GHDFWLYH
0HDVXUHPHQWW\SHRIFKDQQHO$, +P$
+GHDFWLYDWH +P$
+8WHQVLRQ +P$
+,FRXUDQW +9
+,FRXUDQW +9
'HIDXOWVHWWLQJ 'HIDXOWVHWWLQJ +
+
%\WH %LW
0HDVXULQJUDQJHRIFKDQQHO$,
+GHDFWLYH
0HDVXUHPHQWW\SHRIFKDQQHO$,
+2KP
+GHDFWLYH +3W
+UHVLVWDQFH 'HIDXOWVHWWLQJ+
+WKHUPDOUHVLVWDQFH
'HIDXOWVHWWLQJ +
%\WHWR UHVHUYHG
%\WH %LW1U
2XWSXWUDQJHRIFKDQQHO$2
VHWWLQJVHHE\WH
VHWWLQJVHHE\WH
%\WH %LW1U
+GHDFWLYDWHG
+P$
+GHDFWLYDWHG +P$
+9YROWDJH +P$
+,FXUUHQW +9
'HIDXOWVHWWLQJ+ +9
'HIDXOWVHWWLQJ +
Figure 6-8 Structure of record 1 for standard AI/AO (length of 13 bytes)
Parameter for technological functions

The parameters for the respective function are found in the Manual Technological Functions.

6.6.4 Interrupts
Interrupt inputs
All digital inputs of the on-board I/O of CPUs 31xC can be used as interrupt inputs.
You can specify interrupt behavior for each individual input in your parameter declaration.
Options are:
• no interrupt
• Interrupt at the positive edge
• Interrupt at the negative edge
• Interrupt at the positive and negative edge
Note
Every channel will hold one event if the rate of incoming interrupts exceeds the handling
capacity of OB40. Further events (interrupts) will be lost, without diagnostics or explicit
message.

Start information for OB40

The table below shows the relevant temporary variables (TEMP) of OB40 for the interrupt
inputs of 31xC CPUs. A description of process interrupt OB 40 is found in the Reference
Manual System and Standard Functions.
Table 6-11 Start information for OB40, relating to the interrupt inputs of the integrated I/O
Byte Variables Data type Description

6/7 OB40_MDL_ADDR WORD B#16#7C Address of the interrupt-
triggering module (here: default
addresses of the digital inputs)
8 on OB40_POINT_ADDR DWORD see the figure Displaying the interrupt-
below triggering integrated inputs
ಹ ಹ %LWQR
UHVHUYHG
35$/IURP(
35$/IURP(
35$/IURP(
35$/IURP(
35$/IURP(
35$/IURP(
PRAL: process interrupt

Inputs are designated with default addresses.
Figure 6-9 Displaying the statuses of CPU 31xC interrupt inputs
PRAL: process interrupt

The inputs are assigned default addresses.
6.6.5 Diagnostics
Standard I/O
Diagnostic data is not available for integrated I/O which is operated as standard I/O (see also
the Reference Manual Module Data).
Technological functions
Diagnostics options for the respective technological function are found in the Manual
Technological Functions.

6.6.6 Digital inputs
Introduction
This section provides the specifications for the digital inputs of CPUs 31xC.
The table includes the following CPUs:
• under CPU 313C-2, the CPU 313C-2 DP and CPU 313C-2 PtP
Technical data
Table 6-12 Technical data of digital inputs
Technical data
CPU 312C CPU 313C CPU 313C-2 CPU 314C-2
Module-specific data CPU 312C CPU 313C CPU 313C-2 CPU 314C-2
Number of inputs 10 24 16 24
• Number of these inputs which can be used 8 12 12 16
for technological functions
Cable length
• Unshielded For standard DI: Max. 600 m
For technological functions: No
• Shielded For standard DI: Max. 1000 m
For technological function at Max. counting frequency
100 m 100 m 100 m 50 m
Voltage, currents, potentials CPU 312C CPU 313C CPU 313C-2 CPU 314C-2
Rated load voltage L+ DC 24 V
• Polarity reversal protection Yes
Number of inputs which can be controlled
simultaneously
• Horizontal assembly
– Up to 40 °C 10 24 16 24
– up to 60 °C 5 12 8 12
• Vertical assembly
– Up to 40 °C 5 12 8 12
Electrical isolation
• Between channels and the backplane bus Yes
• Between the channels No
Permitted potential difference
• Between different circuits 75 VDC / 60 VAC
Insulation test voltage 500 VDC
Current consumption
• On load voltage L+ (no-load) – Max. 70 mA Max. 70 mA Max. 70 mA

Technical data
Status, interrupts, diagnostics CPU 312C CPU 313C CPU 313C-2 CPU 314C-2
Status display green LED per channel
Interrupts • Yes, if the corresponding channel is configured as interrupt input
• For using technological functions, please refer to the Technological
Functions Manual.
Diagnostics functions • no diagnostics when operated as standard I/O
Functions Manual.
Data for the selection of an encoder for CPU 312C CPU 313C CPU 313C-2 CPU 314C-2
standard DI
Input voltage
• Rated value DC 24 V
• For signal "1" 15 V to 30 V
• For signal "0" -3 V to 5 V
Input current
• For signal "1" Typically 9 mA
Delay of standard inputs
• Configurable Yes (0.1 / 0.5 / 3 / 15 ms)
You can reconfigure the input delay of the standard inputs during program
runtime. Please note that your newly set filter time may only take effect
after the previously set filter time has expired.
• Rated value 3 ms
For using technological functions: 48 μs 16 μs 16 μs 8 μs
"Minimum pulse width/ minimum pause
between pulses at maximum counting
frequency"
Input characteristics curve to IEC 1131, type 1
Connection of 2wire BEROs Possible
• Permitted quiescent current Max. 1,5 mA

6.6.7 Digital outputs
Introduction
This chapter contains the specifications for the digital outputs of CPUs 31xC.
Fast digital outputs

Technological functions use fast digital outputs.
Technical data
Table 6-13 Technical data of digital outputs
Technical data
Module-specific data CPU 312C CPU 313C CPU 313C-2 CPU 314C-2
Number of outputs 6 16 16 16
• Of those are fast outputs 2 4 4 4
Caution:
You cannot connect the high-speed outputs of your CPU in parallel.
Cable length
• Unshielded Max. 600 m
• Shielded Max. 1000 m
Voltage, currents, potentials CPU 312C CPU 313C CPU 313C-2 CPU 314C-2
Rated load voltage L+ 24 VDC
• Polarity reversal protection No
Total current of outputs (per group)
• Horizontal assembly
– Up to 40° C Max. 2,0 A Max. 3,0 A Max. 3,0 A Max. 3,0 A
– up to 60 °C Max. 1,5 A Max. 2,0 A Max. 2,0 A Max. 2,0 A
• Vertical assembly
– Up to 40° C Max. 1,5 A Max. 2,0 A Max. 2,0 A Max. 2,0 A
• Between the channels No Yes Yes Yes
– In groups of – 8 8 8
• Between different circuits 75 VDC / 60 VAC

Technical data
Current consumption
• with load voltage L+ Max. 50 mA Max. 100 mA Max. 100 mA Max. 100 mA
Status, interrupts, diagnostics CPU 312C CPU 313C CPU 313C-2 CPU 314C-2
Status display green LED per channel
Interrupts • no interrupts when operated as standard I/O
Functions Manual.
Diagnostics functions • no diagnostics when operated as standard I/O
Functions Manual.
Data for the selection of an actuator for CPU 312C CPU 313C CPU 313C-2 CPU 314C-2
standard DI
Output voltage
• For signal "1" Min. L+ (-0.8 V)
Output current
• For signal "1" 0,5 A
– Rated value 5 mA to 600 mA
– Permitted range
• For signal "0" (residual current) Max. 0.5 mA
Load impedance range 48 Ω to 4 kΩ
Lamp load Max. 5 W
Parallel connection of 2 outputs
• for redundant load control Supported
• for performance increase Not possible
Controlling of digital inputs Supported
Switching frequency
• under resistive load Max. 100 Hz
• For inductive load to IEC 947-5, DC13 Max. 0.5 Hz
• under lamp load Max. 100 Hz
• fast outputs under resistive load Max. 2.5 kHz
Inductive breaking voltage limited internally to Typically (L+) - 48 V
Short-circuit protection of the output Yes, electronic
• Response threshold Typically 1 A

6.6.8 Analog inputs
Introduction
This chapter contains the specifications for analog outputs of CPUs 31xC.
• CPU 313C
• CPU 314C-2 DP
• CPU 314C-2 PtP
Technical data
Table 6-14 Technical data of analog inputs
Technical data
Module-specific data
Number of inputs 4 channels with current/voltage input
1 channel with resistance input
Cable length
Voltage, currents, potentials
Resistance input
• No-load voltage Typically 2.5 V
• Measurement current Typically 1.8 mA to 3.3 mA
• Between inputs (AIC) and MANA (UCM) 8.0 VDC
• between MANA and Minternal (UISO) 75 VDC / 60 VAC
Analog value generation
Measurement principle Actual value encoding (successive
approximation)
Integration time/conversion time/resolution (per channel)
• Configurable Yes
• Integration time in ms 2,5 / 16,6 / 20
• Permitted input frequency Max. 400 Hz
• Resolution (including overdrive) 11 bits + signed bit
• Suppression of interference frequency f1 400 / 60 / 50 Hz
Time constant of the input filter 0,38 ms
Basic processing time 1 ms

Technical data
Interference suppression, error limits
Interference voltage suppression for f = nx (f1 ± 1 %), (f1 = interference
frequency), n = 1, 2
• Commonmode interference (UCM < 1.0 V) > 40 dB
• Feedback interference (peak value of the interference < rated value of > 30 dB
the input range)
Crosstalk between the inputs > 60 dB
Operational error limits (across the temperature range, in relation to input
range)
• Voltage/current <1%
• Resistance <5%
Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 °C, in relation to input range)
• Voltage/current < 0,7 %
– Linearity error during measurement of current and voltage ± 0,06 %
(related to input range)
• Existence <3%
– Linearity error during resistance measurement ± 0,2 %
(related to input range)
Temperature error (in relation to input range) ± 0,006 %/K
Repeat accuracy (in transient state at 25 °C, in relation to input range) ± 0,06 %
Status, interrupts, diagnostics
Interrupts • no interrupts when operated as standard
I/O
Diagnostics functions • no diagnostics when operated as
standard I/O
• For using technological functions, please
refer to the Technological Functions
Manual.
Encoder selection data
Input ranges (rated value)/input resistance
• Voltage ± 10 V/100 kΩ
0 V to 10 V/100 kΩ
• Current ± 20 mA/50 Ω
0 mA to 20 mA/50 Ω
4 mA to 20 mA/50 Ω
• Existence 0 Ω to 600 Ω/10 MΩ
• Resistance thermometer Pt 100/10 MΩ
Permitted continuous input voltage (destruction limit)
• For voltage inputs Max. 30 V
• For current inputs Max. 2.5 V
Permitted continuous input current (destruction limit)
• For voltage inputs Max. 0,5 mA;
• For current inputs Max. 50 mA;

Technical data
Connection of signal generators
• For voltage measurement possible
• For current measurement
– as 2-wire measuring transducer Possible, with external power supply
– as 4-wire measuring transducer possible
• for measuring resistance
– with 2-conductor terminal Possible, without compensation of
cable resistance
– with 3-wire connection Not possible
– with 4-wire connection Not possible
Linearization of the characteristics trend By software
• For resistance thermometers Pt 100
Temperature compensation No
Technical unit for temperature measurement Degrees Celsius/Fahrenheit/Kelvin
6.6.9 Analog outputs
Introduction
This chapter contains the specifications for digital outputs of CPUs 31xC.
• CPU 313C
• CPU 314C-2 DP
• CPU 314C-2 PtP
Technical data
Table 6-15 Technical data of analog outputs
Technical data
Module-specific data
Number of outputs 2
Cable length
Voltage, currents, potentials
Rated load voltage L+ 24 VDC
• Polarity reversal protection Yes

Technical data
• between MANA and Minternal (UISO) 75 VDC / 60 VAC
Analog value generation
Resolution (including overdrive) 11 bits + signed bit
Conversion time (per channel) 1 ms
Settling time
• with resistive load 0,6 ms
• With capacitive load 1,0 ms
• With inductive load 0.5 ms
Interference suppression, error limits
Crosstalk between the outputs > 60 dB
Operational error limits (across the temperature range, in relation to output
range)
• Voltage/current ±1%
Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 °C, in relation to output range)
• Voltage/current ± 0,7 %
Temperature error (in relation to output range) ± 0.01 %/K
Linearity error (in relation to output range) ± 0,15 %
Repeat accuracy (in transient state at 25 °C, in relation to output range) ± 0,06 %
Output ripple; bandwidth 0 to 50 kHz (in relation to output range) ± 0,1 %
Status, interrupts, diagnostics
Interrupts • no interrupts when operated as standard
I/O
Manual.
Diagnostics functions • no diagnostics when operated as
standard I/O
Manual.
Actuator selection data
Output range (rated values)
• Voltage ± 10 V
0 V to 10 V
• Current ± 20 mA
0 mA to 20 mA
4 mA to 20 mA
Load resistance (within output rating)
• For voltage outputs Min. 1 kΩ
– Capacitive load Max. 0.1 μF
• For current outputs Max. 300 Ω
– Inductive load 0.1 mH

Technical data
Voltage output
• Short-circuit protection Yes
• Short-circuit current Typically 55 mA
Current output
• No-load voltage Typically 17 V
Destruction limit for externally applied voltages/currents
• Voltage measured between the outputs and MANA Max. 16 V
• Current Max. 50 mA;
Connection of actuators
• For voltage outputs
– wire connection Possible, without compensation of
cable resistance
– wire connection (test lead) Not possible
• For current outputs
– wire connection Possible


Technical data of CPU 31x 7
7.1 7.1 General technical data
7.1.1 Dimensions of CPU 31x
Each CPU features the same height and depth, only the width dimensions differ.
• Height: 125 mm
• Depth: 115 mm, or 180 mm with opened front cover.

Figure 7-1 Dimensions of CPU 31x

7.1 General technical data
Width of CPU
CPU Width
CPU 312 40 mm
CPU 314 40 mm
CPU 315-2 DP 40 mm
CPU 315-2 PN/DP 80 mm
CPU 317-2 DP 80 mm
CPU 317-2 PN/DP 80 mm
CPU 319 120 mm
7.1.2 Technical specifications of the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card (MMC)
Plug-in SIMATIC Micro Memory Card (MMC)

The following memory modules are available:
Table 7-1 Available SIMATIC Micro Memory Cards
Type Order number Required for a firmware update via

MMC 64k 6ES7 953-8LFxx-0AA0 –
MMC 128k 6ES7 953-8LGxx-0AA0 –
MMC 512k 6ES7 953-8LJxx-0AA0 –
MMC 2M 6ES7 953-8LLxx-0AA0 Minimum requirement for CPUs without DP interface
MMC 4M 6ES7 953-8LMxx-0AA0 Minimum requirement for CPUs without DP interface
(except CPU 319)
MMC 8M 1 6ES7 953-8LPxx-0AA0 Minimum requirements for the CPU 319
1If you plug in the CPU 312C or CPU 312, you cannot use this SIMATIC Micro Memory
Card.
Maximum number of loadable blocks on the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card

Number of blocks that can be stored on the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card depends on the
capacity of the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card being used The maximum number of blocks
that can be loaded is therefore limited by the capacity of your MMC (including blocks
generated with the "CREATE DB" SFC)

7.2 CPU 312
Table 7-2 Maximum number of loadable blocks on the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card
Size of SIMATIC Micro Memory Maximum number of blocks that can be loaded
Card
64 KB 768
128 KB 1024
512 KB Here the maximum number of blocks that can be loaded for
2 MB the specific CPU is less than the number of blocks that can be
stored on the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card.
4 MB
Refer to the corresponding specifications of a specific CPU to
8 MB determine the maximum number of blocks that can be loaded.
7.2 7.2 CPU 312
Technical data
Table 7-3 Technical data for the CPU 312
Technical data
CPU and version
Order no. [MLFB] 6ES7312-1AD10-0AB0
• Firmware version V2.0.0
Memory
Work memory
• Expandable No
Execution times
Processing times of
• Bit instructions Min. 0.2 μs
• Floating-point maths Min. 6 μs
S7 counters 128
• Default From C0 to C7

7.2 CPU 312
Technical data
IEC Counters Yes
• Type SFB
S7 timers 128
IEC timers Yes
• Type SFB
• Retentive address areas Yes
Data blocks 511
• Size 16 Kbytes
Blocks
MMC.
• Size Max. 16 KB
Nesting depth
FBs
• Size Max. 16 KB
FCs
• Size Max. 16 KB
Address areas (I/O)
Total I/O address area 1024 bytes /1024 bytes
Of those central Max. 256

7.2 CPU 312
Technical data
Removal
Module rack Max. 1
Modules per rack Max. 8
• Integrated None
• Via CP 4
processors
• FM Max. 8
• CP (PtP) Max. 8
• CP (LAN) Max. 4
Time
Clock Yes (SW clock)
• Buffered No
• Behavior of the realtime clock after POWER The clock keeps running, continuing at the time-
ON of-day it had when power was switched off.
• Number 0
• Value range 2 31
restart
Number of stations that can be logged on for 6
communication)
counters
• Number of variables 30
– Of those as status variable 30
– Of those as control variable 14

7.2 CPU 312
Technical data
Force Yes
Block status Yes
Single-step Yes
Breakpoints 2
– Sender Max. 4
– Receiver Max. 4
S7 communication
• As server Yes
Can be used for
Routing No
interfaces
1st interface
Physics RS 485

7.2 CPU 312
Technical data
(15 to 30 VDC)
Functionality
• MPI Yes
• PROFIBUS DP No
MPI
Services
• Routing No
– As server Yes
– As client No
• Transmission rates 187.5 Kbaud
Programming
Instruction set See the Instruction List
Nesting levels 8
System functions (SFC) See the Instruction List
System function blocks (SFB) See the Instruction List
Dimensions
Weight 270 g
Voltages, currents
• Permissible range 20.4 V to 28.8 V
Making current Typically 2.5 A
Power consumption (nominal value) 0.6 A
I2t 0.5 A2s
External fusing of power supply lines Min. 2 A
(recommended)
Power loss Typically 2.5 W

7.3 CPU 314
7.3 7.3 CPU 314
Technical data for the CPU 314
Table 7-4 Technical data for the CPU 314
Technical data
CPU and version
Order no. [MLFB] 6ES7314-1AF11-0AB0
• Firmware version V 2.0.0
Memory
Work memory
• Expandable No
Execution times
Processing times of
• Bit insructions Min. 0.1 μs
• Fixed-point arithmetic Min. 2.0 μs
S7 counters 256
IEC Counters Yes
• Type SFB
S7 timers 256
IEC timers Yes
• Type SFB

7.3 CPU 314
Technical data
Data blocks
• Number 511
• Size 16 Kbytes
Local data per priority class Max. 510
Blocks
MMC.
• Size 16 Kbytes
Nesting depth
FBs See the Instruction List
• Size 16 Kbytes
FCs See the Instruction List
• Size 16 Kbytes
Address areas (I/O)
Total I/O address area Max. 1024 bytes/1024 bytes (can be freely
addressed)
Removal
Module rack Max. 4
Modules per rack 8
• Integrated None
• via CP 4

7.3 CPU 314
Technical data
processors
• FM Max. 8
• CP (PtP) Max. 8
Time
Clock Yes (HW clock)
• Buffered Yes
104 °F)
• Accuracy Deviation per day: < 10 s
• Number 0
• Retentive yes; must be manually restarted after every
restart
Number of stations that can log in for signaling 12
functions (e.g. OS) (depends on the number of connections
communication)
counters
Force Yes
• Variables Inputs/Outputs
Block status Yes
Single-step Yes
Breakpoints 2

7.3 CPU 314
Technical data
– Sender Max. 4
– Receiver Max. 4
S7 communication Yes
• As server Yes
• User data per job Max. 180 (for PUT/GET)
Can be used for
– Configurable 1 to 11
Routing No
interfaces
1st interface
Physics RS 485
(15 to 30 VDC)

7.3 CPU 314
Technical data
Functionality
• MPI Yes
• PROFIBUS DP No
MPI
Services
• Routing No
• S7 communication Yes
– As server Yes
• Transmission rates 187.5 Kbaud
Programming
Nesting levels 8
Dimensions
Weight 280 g
Voltages, currents
I2t 0.5 A2s
(recommended)

7.4 CPU 315-2 DP
7.4 7.4 CPU 315-2 DP
Technical data
Table 7-5 Technical data for the CPU 315-2 DP
Technical data
CPU and version
Order no. [MLFB] 6ES7315-2AG10-0AB0
Memory
Work memory
• Expandable No
Execution times
Processing times of
• Bit instructions Min. 0.1 μs
• Integer maths Min. 2.0 μs
S7 counters 256
IEC Counters Yes
• Type SFB
S7 timers 256
IEC timers Yes
• Type SFB

7.4 CPU 315-2 DP
Technical data
Data blocks
• Number 1023
• Size 16 Kbytes
Local data capacity Max. 1024 bytes per task/510 per block
Blocks
MMC.
• Size 16 Kbytes
Nesting depth
• Size 16 Kbytes
• Size 16 Kbytes
Address areas (I/O)
Total I/O address area Max. 2048 bytes / 2048 bytes
Distributed Max. 2000
I/O process image 128/128
Removal
Module rack Max. 4
Modules per rack 8
• Integrated 1
• Via CP 4

7.4 CPU 315-2 DP
Technical data
processors
• FM Max. 8
• CP (PtP) Max. 8
Time
Clock Yes (HW clock)
• Buffered Yes
40 °C)
• Number 0
restart
Number of stations that can log in for signaling 16
functions (e.g. OS) (depends on the number of connections
communication)
• Simultaneously enabled interrupt S blocks 40
counters
Force
• Variables Inputs/outputs
Block status Yes
Single-step Yes
Breakpoints 2

7.4 CPU 315-2 DP
Technical data
– Sender Max. 8
– Receiver Max. 8
• As server Yes
– Consistent data 64 byte (as the server)
Can be used for
Routing Yes (Max. 4)
interfaces
1st interface
Physics RS 485
(15 to 30 VDC)

7.4 CPU 315-2 DP
Technical data
Functionality
• MPI Yes
• PROFIBUS DP No
MPI
Services
• Routing Yes
– As server Yes
• Transmission rates 187.5 kbps
2nd interface
Physics RS 485
electrically isolated Yes
Functionality
MPI No
PROFIBUS DP Yes
Point-to-point connection No
DP master
Services
• Routing Yes
• Global data communication No
• S7 basic communication No
• S7 communication No
• Constant bus cycle time Yes
• SYNC/FREEZE Yes
• DPV1 Yes
Transmission rate Up to 12 Mbaud
Number of DP slaves per station 124
Address area Max. 244 bytes

7.4 CPU 315-2 DP
Technical data
DP slave
Services
• Routing Yes (only if interface is active)
• Direct data exchange Yes
• Transmission rates Up to 12 Mbaud
• Automatic baud rate search Yes (only if interface is passive)
• Intermediate memory 244 bytes I / 244 bytes O
• Address areas Max. 32 with Max. 32 bytes each
• DPV1 No
GSD file The latest GSD file is available at:
http://www.automation.siemens.com/csi/gsd
Programming
Nesting levels 8
Dimensions
Weight 290 g
Voltages, currents
I2t 0.5 A2s
(recommended)

7.5 CPU 315-2 PN/DP
7.5 7.5 CPU 315-2 PN/DP
Technical data
Table 7-6 Technical data for the CPU 315-2 PN/DP
Technical data
CPU and version
Order no. [MLFB] 6ES7315-2EG10-0AB0
Memory
Work memory
• Work memory 128 Kbytes
• Expandable No
Capacity of the retentive memory for retentive 128 Kbytes
data blocks
Execution times
Processing times of
• Bit instructions 0.1 μs
• Word instructions 0.2 μs
• Integer maths 2 μs
• Floating-point maths 3 μs
S7 counters 256
IEC Counters Yes
• Type SFB
• Number Unlimited
(limited only by work memory)
S7 timers 256

7.5 CPU 315-2 PN/DP
Technical data
IEC timers Yes
• Type SFB
• Preset retentive address areas From MB0 to MB15
Data blocks
• Number 1023
• Size 16 Kbytes
• Non-Retain support (configured retention) Yes
Local data per priority class Max. 1024 bytes per run level / 510 bytes per
block
Blocks
MMC.
• Size 16 Kbytes
Nesting depth
• Size 16 Kbytes
• Size 16 Kbytes
Address areas (I/O)
Distributed Max. 2000 bytes
Digital channels 16384/16384
Analog channels 1024/1024

7.5 CPU 315-2 PN/DP
Technical data
Removal
Module rack Max. 4
Modules per rack 8
• Integrated 1
• Via CP 4
Operable function modules and communication processors
• FM Max. 8
• CP (PtP) Max. 8
Time
• Factory setting DT#1994-01-01-00:00:00
• Buffered Yes
40 °C)
• Behavior of the realtime clock after POWER The clock continues running after POWER OFF.
ON
• Number 0
restart
• In the AS Master/slave
communication)

7.5 CPU 315-2 PN/DP
Technical data
counters
Force
• Variables Inputs/outputs
Block status Yes
Single-step Yes
Breakpoints 2
Open IE communication via TCP/IP Yes (via integrated PROFINET interface and
loadable FBs, Max. 8 connections)
– Sender Max. 8
– Receiver Max. 8
• As server Yes
• As client Yes (via integrated PN interface and loadable
FBs, or even via CP and loadable FBs)
• User data per job See the STEP 7 Online Help, Common
– Consistent data parameters of SFBs/FBs and SFC/FC of the S7
communication)
Can be used for

7.5 CPU 315-2 PN/DP
Technical data
– Configurable
1 to 15
Routing Yes
• Interface X1 configured as
– MPI Max. 10
– DP master Max. 24
– DP slave (active) Max. 14
• Interface X2 configured as PROFINET Max. 24
CBA (at 50 % communication load)
• Maximum data length for arrays and
structures between two partners
– Acyclic PROFINET interconnections 1400 bytes
– Cyclic PROFINET interconnections 450 bytes
– Local interconnections Slave-dependent
• Number of coupled PROFIBUS devices 16
• Total of all master/slave connections 1000
• Number of device-internal and PROFIBUS 500
interconnections
• Number of remote interconnecting partners 32
Remote interconnections with acyclical transmission
Scan rate: Minimum scan interval 500 ms
Number of incoming interconnections 100
Number of outgoing interconnections 100
Remote interconnections with cyclical transmission
HMI interconnections via PROFINET (acyclic)
HMI interconnections 500 ms
Number of HMI variables 200
Sum of all interconnections 4000 bytes input/4000 bytes output
interfaces
1st interface
Physics RS 485
(15 to 30 VDC)

7.5 CPU 315-2 PN/DP
Technical data
Functionality
• MPI Yes
• PROFIBUS DP Yes
• PROFINET No
MPI
Services
• Routing Yes
– As server Yes
• Transmission rates Max. 12 Mbps
DP master
Services
• Routing Yes
• SYNC/FREEZE Yes
• DPV1 Yes
Number of DP slaves 124
DP slave
Services
• DPV1 No

7.5 CPU 315-2 PN/DP
Technical data
2nd interface
Type of interface PROFINET
Physics Ethernet
Autosensing (10/100 Mbps) Yes
Functionality
• PROFINET Yes
• MPI No
• PROFIBUS DP No
Services
• PG communication Yes
• OP communication Yes
• S7 communication Yes (with loadable FBs)
– Max. configurable interconnections 14
– Maximum number of instances 32
• Routing Yes
• PROFINET IO Yes
• PROFINET CBA Yes
PROFINET IO
Number of integrated PROFINET IO controllers 1
Number of connectable PROFINET IO devices 128
Max. user data consistency with PROFINET IO 256 bytes
Update Time 1 ms to 512 ms
The minimum value is determined by the set
communication portion for PROFINET IO, the
number of IO devices and the amount of
configured user data.
Routing Yes
S7 protocol functions
• PG functions Yes
• OP functions Yes
• Open IE communication via TCP/IP Yes
Programming
Nesting levels 8
Dimensions

7.6 CPU 317-2 DP
Technical data
Weight 460 g
Voltages, currents
Current consumption (no-load operation) 100 mA
I2t Min. 1 A2s
(recommended)
7.6 7.6 CPU 317-2 DP
Technical Data
Table 7-7 Technical data for the CPU 317-2 DP
Technical Data
CPU and version
Order number 6ES7317-2AJ10-0AB0
Memory
RAM
• Integrated 512 KB
• Expandable No
Capacity of the retentive memory for retentive Max. 256 KB
data blocks
Execution times
Processing times of
• Bit operations 0.05 μs
• Fixed-point arithmetic 0.2 μs
• Floating-point arithmetic 1.0 μs
S7 counters 512

7.6 CPU 317-2 DP
Technical Data
• Retentive memory Configurable
IEC Counters Yes
• Type SFB
S7 timers 512
IEC Timers Yes
• Type SFB
Flag bits 4096 bytes
• Default retentivity From MB0 to MB15
Data blocks
• Number 2047
• Size 64 KB
Blocks
MMC.
• Size 64 KB
Nesting depth
• Size 64 KB

7.6 CPU 317-2 DP
Technical Data
• Number 2048
• Size 64 KB
Address areas (I/O)
Of those central 256/256
Assembly
Racks Max. 4
Modules per rack 8
• Integrated 2
• via CP 4
Number of function modules and communication processors you can operate
• FM Maximum 8
• CP (PtP) Maximum 8
• CP (LAN) Maximum 10
Time-of-day
Real-time clock Yes (HW clock)
• Buffered Yes
104 °F)
• Number 0 to 3
restart
• In the PLC Master/slave

7.6 CPU 317-2 DP
Technical Data
communication)
counters
– Of those as status variable Maximum 30
Forcing
• Number of variables Maximum 10
Block status Yes
Single step Yes
Breakpoints 2
• Number of GD packets Maximum 8
– Sending stations Maximum 8
– Receiving stations Maximum 8
• As server Yes
– Consistent data 160 byte (as the server)

7.6 CPU 317-2 DP
Technical Data
can be used for
• PG communication Maximum 31
• OP communication Maximum 31
• S7-based communication Maximum 30
Routing Yes (Max. 8)
Interfaces
1st interface
Type of interface Integrated RS 485 interface
Physics RS 485
(15 to 30 VDC)
Functionality
• MPI Yes
• PROFIBUS DP Yes
MPI
Services
• Routing Yes
– As server Yes
DP master
Services
• Routing Yes
• SYNC/FREEZE Yes
• DPV1 Yes
Transmission rates Up to 12 Mbaud

7.6 CPU 317-2 DP
Technical Data
Address range per DP slave Max. 244 bytes
DP master
(except for DP slave at both interfaces)
Services
• Transfer memory 244 bytes I / 244 bytes O
• DPV1 No
2nd interface
Physics RS 485
Functionality
MPI No
PROFIBUS DP Yes
DP master
Services
• Routing Yes
• SYNC/FREEZE Yes
• DPV1 Yes
Transmission rates Up to 12 Mbaud

7.6 CPU 317-2 DP
Technical Data
DP master
(except for DP slave at both interfaces)
Services
• Transfer memory 244 bytes I / 244 bytes O
• DPV1 No
Programming
Available instructions See the Instruction List
Nesting levels 8
System functions (SFCs) See the Instruction List
System function blocks (SFBs) See the Instruction List
Dimensions
Weight 460 g
Inrush current Typically 2.5 A
I2t 1 A2 s
(recommended)

7.7 CPU 317-2 PN/DP
7.7 7.7 CPU 317-2 PN/DP
Technical Data
Technical Data
CPU and version
Order number 6ES7317-2EJ10-0AB0
Memory
Work memory
• Work memory 512 KB
• Expandable No
Capacity of the retentive memory for retentive 256 KB
data blocks
Execution times
Processing times of
• Bit operations 0.05 μs
• Fixed-point arithmetic 0.2 μs
• Floating-point arithmetic 1.0 μs
S7 counters 512
IEC Counters Yes
• Type SFB
S7 timers 512

7.7 CPU 317-2 PN/DP
Technical Data
IEC Timers Yes
• Type SFB
Flag bits 4096 bytes
• Default retentivity From MB0 to MB15
Data blocks
• Number 2047
• Size 64 KB
Blocks
MMC.
• Size 64 KB
Nesting depth
• Size 64 KB
• Size 64 KB
Address areas (I/O)
I/O process image
• Configurable 2048/2048
• Default 256/256

7.7 CPU 317-2 PN/DP
Technical Data
Of those central 256/256
Assembly
Racks Max. 4
Modules per rack 8
• Integrated 1
• via CP 4
Number of function modules and communication processors you can operate
• FM Maximum 8
• CP (PtP) Maximum 8
• CP (LAN) Maximum 10
Time-of-day
Real-time clock Yes (hardware clock)
• Factory setting DT#1994-01-01-00:00:00
• Buffered Yes
104 °F)
ON
• Number 0 to 3
restart
• In the PLC Master/slave
communication)

7.7 CPU 317-2 PN/DP
Technical Data
counters
– Of those as status variable Maximum 30
– Of those as control variable Maximum 14
Forcing
• Number of variables Maximum 10
Block status Yes
Single step Yes
Breakpoints 2
Open IE communication via TCP/IP Yes (via integrated PROFINET interface and
loadable FBs, Max. 8 connections)
PG/OP communication
• Number of GD packets Maximum 8
– Sending stations Maximum 8
– Receiving stations Maximum 8
• As server Yes
• as client Yes (via integrated PN interface and loadable
• User data per job See the STEP 7 Online Help, Common
– Consistent data parameters of SFBs/FBs and SFC/FC of the S7
communication)
can be used for
• PG communication Maximum 31

7.7 CPU 317-2 PN/DP
Technical Data
• OP communication Maximum 31
• S7-based communication Maximum 30
Routing
• Interface X1 configured as Yes
– MPI Maximum 10
– DP master Maximum 24
– DP slave (active) Maximum 14
• Interface X2 configured as
– PROFINET Maximum 24
CBA (at 50 % communication load)
• Maximum data length for arrays and
structures between two partners
– Acyclic PROFINET interconnections
1400 bytes
– Cyclic PROFINET interconnections
450 bytes
– Local interconnections
Slave-dependent
• Total of all master/slave connections 1000
• Number of device-internal and PROFIBUS 500
interconnections
• Number of remote interconnecting partners 32
Remote interconnections with acyclical transmission
Remote interconnections with cyclical transmission
HMI interconnections via PROFINET (acyclic)
HMI interconnections 500 ms
Number of HMI variables 200
Sum of all interconnections 4000 bytes input/4000 bytes output
Interfaces
1st interface
Physics RS 485
(15 to 30 VDC)

7.7 CPU 317-2 PN/DP
Technical Data
Functionality
• MPI Yes
• PROFIBUS DP Yes
• PROFINET No
MPI
Services
• Routing Yes
– As server Yes
DP master
Services
• Routing Yes
• SYNC/FREEZE Yes
• DPV1 Yes
Transmission speed Up to 12 Mbps
DP master
Services
• DPV1 No

7.7 CPU 317-2 PN/DP
Technical Data
2nd interface
Physics Ethernet
Autosensing (10/100 Mbps) Yes
Functionality
• PROFINET Yes
• MPI No
• PROFIBUS DP No
Services
• PG communication Yes
• OP communication Yes
– Max. configurable connections 16
• Routing Yes
• PROFINET IO Yes
PROFINET IO
Number of connectable PROFINET IO devices 128
Update Time 1 ms to 512 ms
S7 protocol functions
• PG functions Yes
• OP functions Yes
• Open IE communication via TCP/IP Yes
Programming
Available instructions See the Instruction List
Nesting levels 8
System functions (SFCs) See the Instruction List
System function blocks (SFBs) See the Instruction List

7.8 CPU 319-3 PN/DP
Technical Data
Dimensions
Weight 460 g
Current consumption (no-load operation) 100 mA
Inrush current Typically 2.5 A
I2t Min. 1 A2s
(recommended)
7.8 7.8 CPU 319-3 PN/DP
Technical data
Technical data
CPU and version
Order no. [MLFB] 6ES7318-3EL00-0AB0
• Associated programming package STEP 7, V 5.3 + SP3 + HSP or later
Memory/Backup
work memory
• Work memory, integrated 1.4 Mbyte
• Work memory, expandable No
Capacity of the retentive memory for retentive 700 Kbytes
data blocks
Buffering Up to 700 Kbytes (maintenance-free)
Execution times
Processing times of
• Bit instructions, min. 0.01 μs
• Word instructions, min. 0.02 μs
• Fixed-point arithmetic, min. 0.02 μs
• Floating-point arithmetic, min. 0.04 μs

7.8 CPU 319-3 PN/DP
Technical data
S7 counters
• Number 2048
• Retentive address areas, configurable Yes
• Retentive address areas, preset From C0 to C7
IEC Counters
• Available Yes
• Type SFB
(limited only by working memory)
S7 timers
• Number 2048
• Retentive address areas, configurable Yes
• Retentive address areas, preset Not retentive
IEC timers Yes
• Type SFB
Bit memory
• Number 8192 bytes
• Retentive address areas, configurable MB 0 to MB 8191
• Preset retentive address areas MB 0 to MB15
• Number of clock memories 8 (1 memory byte)
Data blocks
• Number 4095
(in 1 to 4095 range of numbers)
• Size 64 Kbytes
• Non-retain support (configurable retentive Yes
address areas)
Local data per priority class, Max. 1024 bytes
Blocks
Total number of blocks 4096 (DBs, FCs, FBs)
MMC.
Size, Max. 64 Kbytes

7.8 CPU 319-3 PN/DP
Technical data
• Size, Max. 64 Kbytes
• Number of free cycle OBs 1 (OB 1)
• Number of time-of-day-interrupt OBs 1 (OB 10)
• Number of delay interrupt OBs 2 (OB 20, 21)
• Number of cyclic interrupt OBs 4 (OB 32, 33, 34, 35)
• Number of process interrupt OBs 1 (OB 40)
• Number of DPV1-interrupt OBs (only DP- 3 (OB 55, 56, 57)
CPUs)
• Number of synchrononous cycle interrupt OBs 1 (OB 61)
• Number of asynchronous error interrupts 6 (OB 80, 82, 83, 85, 86, 87)
(OB83 only for PN IO)
• Number of startup OBs 1 (OB 100)
• Number of synchronous error interrupt OBs 2 (OB 121, 122)
Nesting depth
• Size 64 Kbytes
• Size 64 Kbytes
Address areas (I/O)
Total I/O address area
• Inputs 8 Kbytes
• Outputs 8 Kbytes
• Distributed
– Inputs 8 KB
– Outputs 8 KB
Number of sub-process diagrams 1

I/O process image
• Inputs, configurable 2048 bytes
• Outputs, configurable 2048 bytes
• Inputs, default 256 bytes
• Outputs, default 256 bytes
Digital channels
• Inputs 65536
• Outputs 65536
• Inputs, central 1024
• Outputs, central 1024

7.8 CPU 319-3 PN/DP
Technical data
Analog channels
• Inputs 4096
• Outputs 4096
• Inputs, central 256
• Outputs, central 256
Removal
Racks, Max. 4
Modules per rack, Max. 8
• Integrated 2
• Via CP 4
processors
• FM 8
• CP (PtP) 8
• CP (LAN) 10
Time
Clock
• Hardware clock Yes
• Buffered Yes
104 °F)
ON
Operating hours counter
• Number 4
• Number 0 to 3
• Value range 0 to 2 31 hours
(using the SFC 101)
restart
Time synchronization
• supported Yes
• In the AS Master/slave
• on Ethernet via NTP Yes (as client)
communication)

7.8 CPU 319-3 PN/DP
Technical data
Status/control variables
• Status/control variables Yes
counters
• Maximum number of variables 30
• Number of variables
status variables, Max. 30
• Number of variables
control variables, Max. 14
Force
• Force Yes
• Force, variables Inputs/outputs
• Force, maximum number of variables 10
Block status Yes
Single-step Yes
Number of breakpoints 2
Diagnostic buffer
• Available Yes
• Maximum number of entries 100
Open IE communication
Number of connections / access points, total 8
TCP/IP Yes (via integrated PROFINET interface and
loadable FBs)
• Maximum number of connections 8
• Data length for connection type 01H, Max. 1460 bytes
• Data length for connection type 11H, Max. 8192 bytes
ISO on TCP Yes (via integrated PROFINET interface and
loadable FBs)
• Data length, Max. 8192 bytes
UDP Yes (via integrated PROFINET interface and
loadable FBs)
• Data length, Max. 1472 bytes
Routing Yes
• supported Yes
• Number of GD circuits, Max. 8
• Number of GD packets, Max. 8

7.8 CPU 319-3 PN/DP
Technical data
• Number of GD packets, sender, Max. 8
• Number of GD packets, receiver, Max. 8
• Size of GD packets, Max. 22 bytes
• Size of GD packets, consistent, Max. 22 bytes
S7 basic communication
• supported Yes
• User data per job, Max. 76 bytes
• User data per job, consistent, Max. 64 bytes (for X_SEND or X_RCV), 64 bytes (for
X_PUT or X_GET as the server)
S7 communication
• supported Yes
• As server Yes
• As client Yes (via integrated PN interface and loadable
• User data per job Refer to Step 7 Online Help, Parameters of
– Consistent data SFBs/FBs and SFC/FC of the S7 communication)
S5compatible communication
• supported Yes (via CP and loadable FCs)
Number of connections
• Total 32
usable for PG communication 31
• PG communication, reserved 1
• PG communication, configurable, Max. 31
usable for OP communication 31
• OP communication, reserved 1
• OP communication, configurable, Max. 31
usable for S7 basic communication 30
• S7 basic communication, reserved 0
• S7 basic communication, configurable, Max. 30
PROFINET CBA
Reference setting for the CPU communication 20%
load
Number of remote interconnecting partners 32
Number of master/slave functions 50
Total of all master/slave connections 3000
Data length of all incoming master/slave 24000 bytes
connections, Max.
Data length of all outgoing master/slave 24000 bytes
connections, Max.
Number of device-internal and PROFIBUS 1000
interconnections
Data length of the device-internal and PROFIBUS 8000 bytes
interconnections, Max.

7.8 CPU 319-3 PN/DP
Technical data
Data length per connection, Max. 1400 bytes
Remote interconnections with acyclical
transmission
• Scan rate: Scan interval, min. 200 ms
• Number of incoming interconnections 100
• Number of outgoing interconnections 100
• Data length of all incoming interconnections, 3200 bytes
Max.
• Data length of all outgoing interconnections, 3200 bytes
Max.
• Data length per connection, (acyclic 1400 bytes
interconnections), Max.
Remote interconnections with cyclic transmission
• Transmission frequency: Minimium 10 ms
transmission interval
• Number of incoming interconnections 300
• Number of outgoing interconnections 300
• Data length of all incoming interconnections, 4800 bytes
Max.
• Data length of all outgoing interconnections 4800 bytes
• Data length per connection, (acyclic 250 bytes
interconnections), Max.
HMI variables via PROFINET (acyclic)
• Update HMI variables 500 ms
• Number of stations that can be logged on for 2xPN OPC / 1x iMap
HMI variables (PN OPC/iMap)
• Number of HMI variables 600
• Data length of all HMI variables, Max. 9600 bytes
PROFIBUS proxy functionality
• supported Yes
• Data length per connection, Max. 240 bytes (slave dependent)
interfaces
1st interface
Physics RS 485
(15 to 30 VDC)
Functionality
• MPI Yes
• DP master Yes
• DP slave Yes

7.8 CPU 319-3 PN/DP
Technical data
MPI
Services
• Routing Yes
• S7 communication, as server Yes
• S7 communication, as client No (but via CP and loadable FBs)
• Transmission rates Max. 12 Mbits/s
DP master
Services
• Routing Yes
• Constant bus cycle time support Yes
• SYNC/FREEZE Yes
• DPV1 Yes
Transmission rate Max. 12 Mbits/s
Number of DP slaves Max. 124
Address area
• Inputs, Max. 244 Kbytes
• Outputs, Max. 244 Kbytes
DP slave (except for DP slave at both DP interfaces)
Services
• DPV1 No
Transmission rates Up to 12 Mbits/s
Automatic baud rate search Yes (only if interface is passive)
Intermediate memory
• Inputs 244 bytes
• Outputs 244 bytes
Address areas Max. 32
User data per addresss area Max. 32 bytes

7.8 CPU 319-3 PN/DP
Technical data
2nd interface
Physics RS 485
Functionality
MPI No
DP master Yes
DP master Yes
DP master
Services
• Routing Yes
• Isochronous mode Yes
• SYNC/FREEZE Yes
• DPV1 Yes
DP slave (except for DP slave at both DP interfaces)
Services
• DPV1 No
Transmission rates Up to 12 Mbps
Automatic baud rate search Yes (only if interface is passive)
Intermediate memory 244 bytes I / 244 bytes O
Address areas Max. 32 with max. 32 bytes each
3rd. interface
Physics Ethernet

7.8 CPU 319-3 PN/DP
Technical data
Autosensing (10/100 Mbaud) Yes
Functionality
• PROFINET Yes
• MPI No
• PROFIBUS DP No
Services
– Max. configurable interconnections 16
• Routing Yes
• PROFINET IO Yes
• Open IE communication
– via TCP/IP Yes
– ISO on TCP Yes
Yes
– UDP
PROFINET IO
Number of PROFINET IO devices that can be 256
connected
Update Rate 1 ms to 512 ms
PROFINET CBA
Acyclic transfer Yes
Cyclic transfer Yes
CPU/Programming
Programming language STEP 7 as of V5.3
LAD Yes
FBD Yes
STL Yes
SCL Yes
CFC Yes
GRAPH Yes
HiGraph Yes

7.8 CPU 319-3 PN/DP
Technical data
Nesting levels 8
Dimensions
Weight 1250 g
Supply voltage
• Lower limit of admissible range (DC) 20.4 V
• Upper limit of admissible range (DC) 28.8 V
• External fusing of power supply lines Min. 2 A
(recommended)
Current consumption
• Making current, typically 4A
• I2t 1.2 A2s
• Current consumption (no-load operation), 0.4 A
typically
• Power consumption (nominal value), typically 1.05 A
• Power loss, typically 14 W

A Appendix A
A.1 A.1 Information about upgrading to a CPU 31xC or CPU 31x
A.1.1 Scope
Who should read this information?

You are already using a CPU from the SIEMENS S7-300 series and now want to upgrade to
a new device.
Please note that problems may occur while downloading your user program to the "new"
CPU.
If you have used one of the following CPUs in the past ...
CPU Order number As of version

Firmware Hardware
CPU 312 IFM 6ES7 312-5AC02-0AB0 V1.0.0 01
6ES7 312-5AC82-0AB0
CPU 313 6ES7 313-1AD03-0AB0 V1.0.0 01
CPU 314 6ES7 314-1AE04-0AB0 V1.0.0 01
6ES7 314-1AE84-0AB0
CPU 314 IFM 6ES7 314-5AE03-0AB0 V1.0.0 01
CPU 314 IFM 6ES7 314-5AE83-0AB0 V1.0.0 01
CPU 315 6ES7 315-1AF03-0AB0 V1.0.0 01
CPU 315-2 DP 6ES7 315-2AF03-0AB0 V1.0.0 01
6ES7 315-2AF83-0AB0
CPU 316-2 DP 6ES7 316-2AG00-0AB0 V1.0.0 01
CPU 318-2 DP 6ES7 318-2AJ00-0AB0 V3.0.0 03

Manual, 01/2006 Edition, A5E00105475-06 A-1
Appendix
A.1 Information about upgrading to a CPU 31xC or CPU 31x
... then please note if you upgrade to one of the following CPUs
CPU Order number As of version Hereafter called

Firmware Hardware
312 6ES7312-1AD10-0AB0 V2.0.0 01 CPU 31xC/31x
312C 6ES7312-5BD01-0AB0 V2.0.0 01
313C 6ES7313-5BE01-0AB0 V2.0.0 01
313C-2 PtP 6ES7313-6BE01-0AB0 V2.0.0 01
313C-2 DP 6ES7313-6CE01-0AB0 V2.0.0 01
314 6ES7314-1AF10-0AB0 V2.0.0 01
314C-2 PtP 6ES7314-6BF01-0AB0 V2.0.0 01
314C-2 DP 6ES7314-6CF01-0AB0 V2.0.0 01
315-2 DP 6ES7315-2AG10-0AB0 V2.0.0 01
315-2 PN/DP 6ES7315-2EG10-0AB0 V2.3.0 01
317-2 DP 6ES7317-2AJ10-0AB0 V2.1.0 01
317-2 PN/DP 6ES7317-2EJ10-0AB0 V2.3.0 01
319-3 PN/DP 6ES7318-3EL00-0AB0 V2.4.0 01
Reference
If you intend to migrate from PROFIBUS DP to PROFINET, we also recommend the
following manual: Programming manual From PROFIBUS DP to PROFINET IO
See also
DPV1 (Page 3-33)
A.1.2 Changed behavior of certain SFCs
SFC 56, SFC 57 and SFC 13 which work asynchronously

Some of the SFCs that work asynchronously, when used on CPUs 312IFM – 318-2 DP, were
always, or under certain conditions, processed after the first call ("quasi-synchronous").
On the 31xC/31x CPUs these SFCs actually run asynchronously. Asynchronous processing
may cover multiple OB1 cycles. As a result, a wait loop may turn into an endless loop within
an OB.
The following SFCs are affected:
• SFC 56 "WR_DPARM"; SFC 57 "PARM_MOD"
On CPUs 312 IFM to 318-2 DP, these SFCs always work "quasi-synchronously" during
communication with centralized I/O modules and always work synchronously during
communication with distributed I/O modules.

A-2 Manual, 01/2006 Edition, A5E00105475-06
Appendix
Note
If you are using SFC 56 "WR_DPARM" or SFC 57 "PARM_MOD", you should always
evaluate the SFC's BUSY bit.
• SFC 13 "DPNRM_DG"
On CPUs 312 IFM to 318-2 DP, this SFC always works "quasi synchronously" when it is
called in OB82. On CPUs 31xC/31x it generally works asynchronously.
Note
In the user program, the job should merely be started in OB 82. The data should be
evaluated in the cyclical program, taking account of the BUSY bits and the value returned
in RET_VAL.
Hint
If you are using a CPU 31xC/31x, we recommend that you use SFB 54, rather than SFC
13 "DPNRM_DG".
SFC 20 "BLKMOV"
In the past, this SFC could be used with CPUs 312 IFM to 318-2 DP to copy data from a non
runtime-related DB.
SFC 20 no longer has this functionality with CPUs 31xC/31x. SFC83 "READ_DBL" is now
used instead.
SFC 54 "RD_DPARM"
This SFC is no longer available on CPUs 31xC/31x. Use SFC 102 "RD_DPARA" instead,
which works asynchronously.
SFCs that may return other results

You can ignore the following points if you only use logical addressing in your user program.
When using address conversion in your user program (SFC 5 "GADR_LGC",
SFC 49 "LGC_GADR"), you must check the assignment of the slot and logical start address
for your DP slaves.
• In the past, the diagnostic address of a DP slave was assigned to the slave's virtual slot
2. Since DPV1 was standardized, this diagnostic address has been assigned to virtual
slot 0 (station proxy) for CPUs 31xC/31x.
• If the slave has modeled a separate slot for the interface module (e.g. CPU31x-2 DP as
an intelligent slave or IM 153), then its address is assigned to slot 2.

Appendix
Activating / deactivating DP slaves via SFC 12

With CPUs 31xC/31x, slaves that were deactivated via SFC 12 are no longer automatically
activated at the RUN to STOP transition. Now they are not activated until they are restarted
(STOP to RUN transition).
A.1.3 Interrupt events from distributed I/Os while the CPU status is in STOP
Interrupt events from distributed I/Os while the CPU status is in STOP
With the new DPV1 functionality (IEC 61158/ EN 50170, volume 2, PROFIBUS), the
handling of incoming interrupt events from the distributed I/Os while the CPU status is in
STOP has also changed.
Previous response by the CPU with STOP status

With CPUs 312IFM – 318-2 DP, initially an interrupt event was noticed while the CPU was in
STOP mode. When the CPU status subsequently returned to RUN, the interrupt was then
fetched by an appropriate OB (e.g. OB 82).
New response by the CPU

With CPUs 31xC/31x, an interrupt event (process or diagnostic interrupt, new DPV1
interrupts) is acknowledged by the distributed I/O while the CPU is still in STOP status, and
is entered in the diagnostic buffer if necessary (diagnostic interrupts only). When the CPU
status subsequently returns to RUN, the interrupt is no longer fetched by the OB. Possible
slave faults can be read using suitable SSL queries (e.g. read SSL 0x692 via SFC51).
A.1.4 Runtimes that change while the program is running
Runtimes that change while the program is running

If you have created a user program that has been fine-tuned in relation to certain processing
times, please note the following points if you are using a CPU 31xC/31x:
• the program will run much faster on the CPU 31xC/31x.
• Functions that require MMC access (e.g. system start-up time, program download in
RUN, return of DP station, etc), may sometimes run slower on the CPU 31xC/31x.

Appendix
A.1.5 Converting the diagnostic addresses of DP slaves
Converting the diagnostic addresses of DP slaves

If you are using a CPU 31xC/31x with DP interface as the master, please note that you may
have to reassign the diagnostic addresses for the slaves since the changes to the DPV1
standard sometimes require two diagnostic addresses per slave.
• The virtual slot 0 has its own address (diagnostic address of the station proxy). The
module status data for this slot (read SSL 0xD91 with SFC 51 "RDSYSST") contains IDs
that relate to the entire slave/station, e.g. the station error ID. Failure and restoration of
the station are also signaled in OB86 on the master via the diagnostic address of the
virtual slot 0.
• At some of the slaves the interface module is also modeled as a separate virtual slot (for
example, CPU as an intelligent slave or IM153), and a suitable separate address is
assigned to virtual slot 2.
The change of operating status is signaled in the master's diagnostic interrupt OB 82 via
this address for CPU 31xC-2DP acting as an intelligent slave.
Note
Reading diagnostics data with SFC 13 "DPNRM_DG":
The originally assigned diagnostics address still works. Internally, STEP 7 assigns this
address to slot 0.
When using SFC51 "RDSYSST", for example, to read module status information or module
rack/station status information, you must also consider the change in slot significance as well
as the additional slot 0.
A.1.6 Reusing existing hardware configurations
Reusing existing hardware configurations

If you reuse the configuration of a CPU 312 IFM to 318-2 DP for a CPU 31xC/31x, the CPU
31xC/31x may not run correctly.
If this is the case, you will have to replace the CPU in the STEP 7 hardware configuration
editor. When you replace the CPU, STEP 7 will automatically accept all the settings (if
appropriate and possible).

Appendix
A.1.7 Replacing a CPU 31xC/31x
Replacing a CPU 31xC/31x

When supplied, the CPU 31xC/31x adds a connecting plug to the power supply connector.
You no longer need to disconnect the cables of the CPU when you replace a 31xC / 31x
CPU. Insert a screwdriver with 3.5 mm blade into the right side of the connector to open the
interlock mechanism, then unplug it from the CPU. Once you have replaced the CPU, simply
plug the connecting plug back into the power supply connector.
A.1.8 Using consistent data areas in the process image of a DP slave system
Consistent data
The table below illustrates the points to consider with respect to communication in a DP
master system if you want to transfer I/O areas with "Total length" consistency. You can
transfer a maximum of 128 bytes of consistent data.
Table A-1 Consistent data
CPU 315-2 DP CPU 315-2 DP CPU 318-2 DP

(as of firmware 2.0.0), (as of firmware 1.0.0), (firmware >= 3.0)
CPU 317, CPU 319 CPU 316-2 DP,
CPU 31xC CPU 318-2 DP (firmware < 3.0)
The address area of consistent Even if they exist in the process You can choose whether or not
data in the process image is image, consistent data is not to update the address area of
automatically updated. automatically updated. consistent data in the process
image.
In order to read and write To read and write consistent data, To read and write consistent
consistent data you must use SFC14 and 15. data, you can also use SFC 14
you can also use the SFCs 14 and SFC 15.
and 15 If the address area of
If the address area of consistent consistent data is not in the
data is outside the process process image, you must use
image, SFC 14 and SFC 15 to read
you have to use the SFCs 14 and write consistent data.
and 15 to read and write Direct access to consistent
consistent data. areas is also possible (for
Direct access to consistent example, L PEW or T PAW).
areas is also possible (e.g.
L PEW or T PAW).

Appendix
A.1.9 Load memory concept for the CPU 31xC/31x
Load memory concept for the CPU 31xC/31x

On CPUs 312 IFM to 318-2 DP, the load memory is integrated into the CPU and may be
extended with a memory card,
The load memory of the CPU 31xC/31x is located on the micro memory card (MMC), and is
retentive. When blocks are downloaded to the CPU, they are stored on the MMC and cannot
be lost even in the event of a power failure or memory reset.
Reference
See also the Memory concept chapter in the CPU Data 31xC and 31x manual.
Note
User programs can only be downloaded and thus the CPU can only be used if the MMC is
inserted.
A.1.10 PG/OP functions
PG/OP functions
With CPUs 315-2 DP (6ES7315-2AFx3-0AB0), 316-2DP and 318-2 DP, PG/OP functions at
the DP interface were only possible if the interface was set to active. With CPUs 31xC/31x,
these functions are possible at both active and passive interfaces. The performance of the
passive interface is considerably lower, however.
A.1.11 Routing for the CPU 31xC/31x as an intelligent slave
Routing for the CPU 31xC/31x as an intelligent slave

If you use the CPU 31xC/31x as an intelligent slave, the routing function can only be used
with an actively-configured DP interface.
In the properties of the DP interface in STEP 7, select the "Test, Commissioning, Routing"
check box of the "DP-Slave" option.

Appendix
A.1.12 Changed retentive behavior for CPUs with firmware >= V2.1.0
Changed retentive behavior for CPUs with firmware >= V2.1.0

For data blocks for these CPUs
• you can set the retentive response in the block properties of the DB.
• Using SFC 82 "CREA_DBL" -> Parameter ATTRIB, NON_RETAIN bit, you can specify if
the actual values of a DB should be maintained at POWER OFF/ON or STOP-RUN
(retentive DB) or if the start values should be read from the load memory (non-retentive
DB).
A.1.13 FMs/CPs with separate MPI address in the central rack of a CPU 315-2 PN/DP, a
CPU 317 or a CPU 319-3 PN/DP
FMs/CPs with separate MPI address in the central rack of a CPU 315-2 PN/DP / CPU 317 /
CPU 319-3 PN/DP
All CPUs except CPU 315-2 PN/DP, CPU 317, CPU 315-2 PN/DP, CPU 317 ,CPU 318-2 DP and
CPU 318-2 DP and CPU 319-3 PN/DP CPU 319-3 PN/DP
If there are FM/CPs with their own MPI address in the If there are FM/CPs with their own MPI address in the
central rack of an S7-300, then they are in the exact same central rack of an S7-300, then the CPU forms its own
CPU subnet as the CPU MPI station. communication bus via the backplane bus with these
FM/CPs, which are separated from the other subnets.
The MPI address of such an FM/CP is no longer relevant for
the stations on other subnets. The communication to the
FM/CP is made via the MPI address of the CPU.
When exchanging your existing CPU with a CPU 315-2 PN/DP / CPU 317 /
CPU 319-3 PN/DP, you therefore need to
• replace the CPU in your STEP 7 project with the CPU 315-2 PN/DP / CPU 317 /
CPU 319-3 PN/DP
• Reconfigure the OPs. The control and the destination address must be reassigned (= the
MPI address of the CPU 315-2 PN/DP / CPU 317
CPU 319-3 PN/DP and the slot of the respective FM)
• Reconfigure the project data for FM/CP to be loaded to the CPU.
This is required for the FM/CP in this rack to remain "available" to the OP/PG.

Appendix
A.1.14 Using loadable blocks for S7 communication for the integrated PROFINET
interface
If you have already used S7 communication via CP with loadable FBs (FB 8, FB 9, FB 12 –
FB 15 and FC 62 with version V1.0) from the SIMATIC_NET_CP STEP 7 library (these
blocks all feature the family type CP300 PBK) and now want to use the integrated
PROFINET interface for S7 communication, you must use the corresponding blocks from the
Standard Library\Communication Blocks STEP 7 library in your program (the corresponding
blocks FB 8, FB 9, FB 12 – FB 15 and FC 62 have at least version V1.1 and family type
CPU_300).
Procedure
1. Download and overwrite the old FBs/FCs in your program container with the
corresponding blocks from the standard library.
2. Update the corresponding block calls, including updating the instance DBs, in your user
program.

Appendix

Glossary
Application
→ User program
Component-Based automation
→ PROFINET CBA
CP
→ Communication processor
CPU
→ CPU
Cyclic interrupt
→ Interrupt, cyclic interrupt
Determinism
→ Real Time
Device
→ PROFIBUS Device
→ PROFINET Device
Diagnostics
→ System diagnostics
ERTEC
→ ASIC

Manual, 01/2006 Edition, A5E00105475-06 Glossary-1
Glossary
FB
→ Function block
FC
→ Function
Hub
→ Switch
Industrial Ethernet
→ Fast Ethernet
Interface, MPI-capable
→ MPI
Interrupt, delay
→ Interrupt, delay
Interrupt, diagnostic
→ Diagnostic Interrupt
Interrupt, process
→ Process interrupt
IO controller
→ PROFINET IO Controller
→ PROFINET IO Device
→ PROFINET IO Supervisor
→ PROFINET IO System
IO device

Glossary-2 Manual, 01/2006 Edition, A5E00105475-06
Glossary
IO supervisor
IO system
Local data
→ Data, temporary
Master
→ Slave
MPI address
→ MPI
NCM PC
→ SIMATIC NCM PC
OB
→ Organization blocks
Operating system
→ CPU
PC station
→ SIMATIC PC Station
PG
→ Programming device
PLC
→ CPU

Glossary
PLC
→ PLC
PNO
→ PROFIBUS International
Process-Related Function
→ PROFINET Component
PROFIBUS
→ PROFIBUS DP
PROFIBUS
PROFIBUS Device
→ Device
PROFIBUS DP
→ PROFIBUS
PROFINET
Within the framework of Totally Integrated Automation (TIA), PROFINET represents a
consequent enhancement of:
• PROFIBUS DP, the established fieldbus and
• Industrial Ethernet, the communication bus for the cell level
Experience gained from both systems was and is being integrated into PROFINET.
PROFINET is an Ethernet-based automation standard of PROFIBUS International
(previously PROFIBUS Users Organization e.V.), and defines a multi-vendor communication,
automation, and engineering model.
PROFINET ASIC
→ ASIC

Glossary
PROFINET CBA
Within the framework of PROFINET, PROFINET CBA is an automation concept for the
implementation of applications with distributed intelligence.
PROFINET CBA lets you create distributed automation solutions, based on default
components and partial solutions.
Component-based Automation allows you to use complete technological modules as
standardized components in large systems.
The components are also created in an engineering tool which may differ from vendor to
vendor. Components of SIMATIC devices are created, for example, with STEP 7.
PROFINET Device
→ Device
PROFINET IO
Within the framework of PROFINET, PROFINET IO is a communication concept for the
implementation of modular, distributed applications.
PROFINET IO allows you to create automation solutions, which are familiar to you from
PROFIBUS.
That is, you have the same application view in STEP 7, regardless of whether you configure
PROFINET or PROFIBUS devices.
PROFINET IO Controller
PROFINET IO Device
PROFINET IO Supervisor
PROFINET IO System

Glossary
Proxy
→ PROFINET Device
Real Time
→ Real Time
Reference ground
→ Ground
Repeater
→ Hub
Router
→ Default Router
→ Switch
RT
→ Real Time
Segment
→ Bus segment
SFB
→ System function block
SFC
→ System function
Slave
→ Master
Substitute
→ Proxy
Timer
→ Timers

Glossary
TOD interrupt
→ Interrupt, time-of-day
User program
→ Operating system
User program
→ STEP 7

Glossary

Index
Compression, 4-12
Configuration
( Interrupt inputs, 6-38
Standard AI, 6-40
(Simple Network Management Protocol), 3-27
Standard DI, 6-38
Standard DO, 6-39
Technological functions, 6-42
A Consistent data, A-6
Aim of this Documentation, iii CPU 312C
Analog inputs Technical data, 6-3, 7-3, 7-8, 7-13, 7-26
Configuration, 6-40 Technical Data, 6-9, 7-33, 7-40, 7-49
Not connected, 6-37 Usage of integrated I/Os, 6-28
Technical data, 6-49 CPU 313C
Analog outputs Technical data, 6-8
Not connected, 6-37 Usage of integrated I/Os, 6-30
Technical data, 6-51 CPU 313C-2 DP
Applicability of this manual, A-2 Technical data, 6-14
Application area covered by this manual, iii Usage of integrated I/Os, 6-30
Application View, 3-17 CPU 313C-2 PtP
Automation concept, 3-17 Technical Data, 6-14
Usage of integrated I/Os, 6-30
CPU 314C-2 DP
B Technical data, 6-21
Blocks, 3-20
CPU 314C-2 PtP
compatibility, 3-20
Technical Data, 6-21
Download, 4-10
Upload, 4-11, 4-12
CPU memory reset, 4-13
CPUs 31xC
Differences, 2-4
C Cycle time
Communication Calculation, 5-4
Communication protocols, 3-24 Definition, 5-2
CPU services, 3-6 Extension, 5-3
Data consistency, 3-15 Maximum cycle time, 5-8
Global data communication, 3-9 Process image, 5-2
Open IE communication, 3-24 Sample calculation, 5-23
S7 basic communication, 3-8 Sequence of cyclic program processing, 5-2
S7 communication, 3-8 Time slice model, 5-2
Communication load
configured, 5-8
Dependency of physical cycle time, 5-9
Influence on the physical cycle time, 5-9
Communications concept, 3-17
Component-Based automation, 3-17

Manual, 01/2006 Edition, A5E00105475-06 Index-1
Index
D M
Data consistency, 3-15 Maximum cycle time, 5-8
Diagnostics Memory
Standard I/O, 6-44 Compression, 4-12
Technological functions, 6-44 Memory areas
Differences between the CPUs, 2-4 Load memory, 4-1
Digital inputs RAM, 4-2
Configuration, 6-38 System memory, 4-2
Technical data, 6-45 Memory functions
Digital outputs Compression, 4-12
Configuration, 6-39 CPU memory reset, 4-13
Fast, 6-47 Download of blocks, 4-10
Technical data, 6-47 Promming, 4-12
Download RAM to ROM, 4-12
of blocks, 4-10 Restart, 4-13
Uploading blocks, 4-11, 4-12
Warm start, 4-13
E MMC - Useful life, 4-9
Error displays, 2-13 Mode selector switch, 2-3, 2-6, 2-8, 2-10, 2-12
MPI, 3-1
G
Global data communication, 3-9 N
Network node, 3-11
I
I/O process image, 4-5
Industrial Ethernet, 3-16
O
Integrated I/Os OB 83, 3-22
Usage, 6-28, 6-33 OB86, 3-22
Interfaces
MPI, 3-1
PtP interface, 3-3, 3-5 P
Which devices can I connect to which interface?,
Power supply
3-2
Connection, 2-3, 2-6, 2-8, 2-10, 2-12
Interrupt inputs, 6-43
Process interrupt processing, 5-21
Configuration, 6-38
PROFIBUS, 3-16
Interrupt response time
PROFIBUS International, 3-17
Calculation, 5-21
PROFINET
Definition, 5-20
Implementation, 3-17
of signal modules, 5-21
PROFINET, 3-3, 3-16
of the CPUs, 5-20
interface, 3-3
Process interrupt processing, 5-21
Objectives, 3-16
Sample calculation, 5-25
PROFINET CBA, 3-17
Interrupt, delay, 5-22
PROFINET IO, 3-17
PROFINET IO, 3-18
L PtP interface, 3-3, 3-5
Load memory, 4-1
Local data, 4-7
Longest response time
Calculation, 5-17
Conditions, 5-16

Index-2 Manual, 01/2006 Edition, A5E00105475-06
Index
R SFC102, 3-21
SFC13, 3-20
RAM, 4-2
SFC5, 3-21
RAM to ROM, 4-12
Shortest response time
Required basic knowledge, iii
Calculation, 5-15
Response time
Conditions, 5-15
Calculating the longest, 5-17
Calculating the shortest, 5-15
Plug-in MMCs, 6-2, 7-2
Conditions for the longest, 5-16
Properties, 4-8
Conditions for the shortest, 5-15
Slot, 2-3, 2-6, 2-8, 2-10, 2-12
Definition, 5-13
SNMP, 3-27
DP cycle times, 5-13, 5-14
SSL, 3-23
Factors, 5-13
W#16#0696, 3-23
Fluctuation width, 5-13
W#16#0A91, 3-23
Reduction with direct I/O access, 5-17
W#16#0C91, 3-23
Sample calculation, 5-24
W#16#0C96, 3-23
Restart, 4-13
W#16#0x94, 3-23
Retentive memory, 4-2
W#16#4C91, 3-23
Load memory, 4-2
W#16#xy92, 3-23
Retentive behavior of memory objects, 4-3
Status displays, 2-13
Retentive behavior of the memory objects, 5-6
System and Standard Functions, 3-20
System memory, 4-2
System memory, 4-2, 4-4
Routing
I/O process image, 4-5
Access to stations on other subnets, 3-11
Local data, 4-7
Example of an application, 3-14
Network node, 3-11
Requirements, 3-13 T
Technical data
S Analog inputs, 6-49
Analog outputs, 6-51
S7 basic communication, 3-8
CPU 312C, 6-3, 7-3, 7-8, 7-13, 7-26, A-2
S7 communication, 3-8
CPU 313C, 6-8
S7 connections
CPU 313C-2 DP, 6-26
Distribution, 3-30
CPU 313C-2 PtP, 6-14
End point, 3-28
CPU 314C-2 DP, 6-21
of CPUs 31xC, 3-31
CPU 314C-2 PtP, 6-21
Time sequence for allocation, 3-29
Digital inputs, 6-45
Transition point, 3-28
Digital outputs, 6-47
Sample calculation
Technical Data
of the cycle time, 5-23
CPU 312C, 7-33, 7-40
Sample calculation
CPU 313C-2 DP, 6-14
of interrupt response time, 5-25
of the response time, 5-24
Scope of this documentation, v U
Scope of this manual, A-1
Upload, 4-11, 4-12
SFB 52, 3-21
Useful life of an MMC, 4-9
SFB 53, 3-21
User program
SFB 54, 3-21
Upload, 4-11, 4-12
SFB 81, 3-21
SFC 49, 3-21
SFC 58, 3-20
SFC 59, 3-20
W
SFC 70, 3-21 Warm start, 4-13
SFC 71, 3-21 Watchdog interrupt, 5-22

Manual, 01/2006 Edition, A5E00105475-06 Index-3
Index

Index-4 Manual, 01/2006 Edition, A5E00105475-06
Product Information on
CPU319-3 PN/DP, 6ES7318-3EL00-0AB0
Einleitung
Diese Produktinformation beschreibt Ergänzungen zum Gerätehandbuch CPU31xC
und CPU31x, Technische Daten, A5E00105474-06, Ausgabe 01/2006.
Sie finden dieses Handbuch im Internet unter:
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/de/12996906
Introduction
This product information describes additions to the device manual CPU31xC and
CPU31x, Technical Data, A5E00105475-06, issue 01/2006.
You can find this manual on the Internet at:
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/12996906
Introduction
Cette Information Produit décrit les compléments apportés au manuel d’utilisation des
CPU31xC et CPU31x, Caractéristiques techniques, A5E00105474-06, édition
01/2006.
Ce manuel se trouve sur Internet à l’adresse :
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/fr/12996906
Introducción
La presente información de producto describe las ampliaciones realizadas en el
manual de producto CPU31xC y CPU31x, Datos técnicos, A5E00105474-06, edición
01/2006.
Encontrará este manual en la siguiente dirección de Internet:
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/es/12996906
Introduzione
Le presenti informazioni sul prodotto hanno lo scopo di integrare il manuale del pro-
dotto CPU31xC e CPU31x, Dati tecnici, A5E00105474-06, edizione 01/2006.
Il manuale può essere scaricato da Internet all’indirizzo:
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/it/12996906
Copyright 2006 by Siemens AG

A5E00688649-02
Deutsch
Offene Kommunikation über Industrial Ethernet
Die offene Kommunikation über Industrial Ethernet, wird für die CPU 319-3 PN/DP
ab der Firmware-Version 2.4.0 um folgende Protokollvarianten erweitert:
S Verbindungsorientiertes Protokoll: ISO on TCP gemäß RFC 1006
S Verbindungsloses Protokoll: UDP gemäß RFC 768
Download der Bausteine für die Protokollvariante UDP gemäß RFC 768
Um mit anderen Kommunikationspartnern per Anwenderprogramm Daten austau-
schen zu können, stellen wir Ihnen die benötigten Bausteine im Internet zur Verfü-
gung.
Sie finden diese Datei inklusive der Beschreibung im Internet unter:
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/de/22146612.
Zyklisches Senden auf mehreren OUC-Instanzen

Beim zyklischen Senden auf mehreren OUC-Instanzen mit Sendezyklen < 2,2 ms,
kann es zu einer Beeinträchtigung der Kommunikation an der Ethernet-Schnitt-
stelle kommen.
Sollte dies der Fall sein, müssen Sie Ihren Sendezyklus durch untersetzten Aufruf
des Sendebausteins verlängern:
S FB63 ”TSEND” für TCP-Senden bzw.
S FB67 ”TUSEND” für UDP-Senden.
Bei weiteren Fragen wenden Sie sich bitte an den Service & Support:
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW
Einsatz der CPU 319-3 PN/DP mit SINAMICS S120
Beim Einsatz der CPU 319-3 PN/DP mit dem PROFINET-Modul

SINAMICS S120 CBE 20 (6SL3055-0AA00-2EB0) benötigen Sie Step 7 V5.4.
Erst mit dieser STEP7-Version ist die volle Funktionalität der PROFINET GSDML
Version V2 (Multi-API, Physical Device und Multiple Subslots pro Slot) nutzbar.
2 Product Information on CPU319-3 PN/DP, 6ES7318-3EL00-0AB0

A5E00688649-02
Word und DWord Zugriffe auf die letzten gültigen Adressen eines Operanden-
bereichs
Word und DWord Zugriffe auf die letzten gültigen Adressen eines Operandenbe-
reichs verursachen keinen Bereichslängenfehler. Liegt die Anfangsadresse des
Zugriffs innerhalb des zulässigen Adressbereichs (E, A, M, L, D), die Endadresse
jedoch nicht, so wird in der aktuellen Baugruppenversion kein Bereichslängenfehler
(kein Synchronfehler-OB-Aufruf bzw. CPU-Stop) generiert.
Bei Word und DWORD Zugriffen kann somit ein Teil der adressierten Bytes außer-
halb des zulässigen Bereichs liegen. Sobald der Zugriff komplett außerhalb des
zulässigen Bereichs liegt, wird ein entsprechender Synchronfehler generiert.
Beispiel:
Zugriff auf einen DB mit 100 Byte Länge (DBB0..DBB99)
”T DBD 98” verwendet die Adresse 98...101
Da die Anfangsadresse innerhalb des Operandenbereichs liegt wird kein Bereichs-
längenfehler erzeugt.
Es erfolgt jedoch auch ein Zugriff auf die nicht vorhandenen Speicheradressen 100
und 101.
Der Inhalt des nicht vorhanden Speicherbereichs ist nach dem Zugriff undefiniert,
und darf vom Anwenderprogramm nicht verwendet werden.
Es ist jedoch sichergestellt, dass bei dem Zugriff keine Daten in anderen Operan-
denbereichen überschrieben werden.
Product Information on CPU319-3 PN/DP, 6ES7318-3EL00-0AB0 3

A5E00688649-02
English
Open communication over Industrial Ethernet

The open communication over Industrial Ethernet is upgraded for the
CPU 319-3 PN/DP after firmware-version 2.4.0 by the following product variants:
S Connection-oriented log: ISO on TCP according to RFC 1006
S Connectionless log: UDP according to RFC 768
Download of the components for the log variants UDP according to RFC 768
In order to exchange data with other communication partners via application
program, we are making the necessary components available to you on the
Internet:
You can find these files on the Internet at:
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/22146612
Cyclic transmission to multiple OUC entities

Cyclic transmission to multiple OUC entities with transmission cycles < 2.2 ms can
affect communication via the Ethernet interface.
In this case, you must extend your transmission cycle by scaling the calls of the
send block:
S FB63 ”TSEND” for TCP transmission or
S FB67 ”TUSEND” for UDP transmission.
For additional information, contact Service & Support via:
Using CPU 319-3 PN/DP with SINAMICS S120
Use of CPU 319-3 PN/DP in combination with the PROFINET module SINAMICS
S120 CBE 20 (6SL3055-0AA00-2EB0) requires STEP 7 V5.4.
This STEP 7 version is required to enable full functionality of the PROFINET
GSDML version V2 (multi-API, physical device and multiple subslots per slot).

A5E00688649-02
Word and DWord access to the last valid addresses in an operand range
Word and DWord access to the last valid addresses in an operand range does not
result in a length-of-range error. If the initial address lies within the allowable ad-
dress range (E, A, M, L, D) but the final address lies outside this range, no length-
of-range error is generated in the module version (no synchronization error OB call
or CPU stop).
For access by Word and DWord, part of the addressed bytes can lie outside the
permissible range. Once access is completely outside the permissible range, a cor-
responding synchronization error is generated.
Example:
Access to a DB with 100 byte length (DBB0 to DBB99)
”T DBD 98” uses the addresses 98 to 101
Since the initial address is within the operand range, no length-of-range error is
generated.
However, the non-existent memory addresses 100 and 101 are also accessed.
The content of the non-existent memory area is undefined after access, and may
not be used by the user program.
This ensures data in other operand ranges is not overwritten during access.

A5E00688649-02
Francais
Communication ouverte via Industrial Ethernet

La communication ouverte via Industrial Ethernet est étendue pour la CPU 319-3
PN/DP à partir du microprogramme-version 2.4.0 aux variantes de protocoles
suivantes :
S Protocole orienté liaison : ISO on TCP selon RFC 1006
S Protocole sans liaison : UDP selon RFC 768
Téléchargement des blocs pour la variante de protocole UDP selon RFC 768
Pour permettre l’échange de données avec les autres partenaires de la
communication par programme utilisateur, nous vous mettons les blocs nécessaires à
disposition sur Internet.
Vous trouverez ce fichier ainsi que la description sur Internet, à l’adresse :
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/fr/22146612
Emission cyclique sur plusieurs instances OUC

En cas d’émission cyclique sur plusieurs instances OUC avec des cycles
d’émission < 2,2 ms, il se peut que la communication à l’interface Ethernet soit
entravée.
Si tel est le cas, vous devez augmenter votre cycle d’émission à l’aide d’un appel
du bloc d’émission tous les nièmes cycles :
S FB63 ”TSEND” pour émission TCP ou
S FB67 ”TUSEND” pour émission UDP
Veuillez contacter le Service & Support en cas de question :
Utilisation de la CPU 319-3 PN/DP avec SINAMICS S120
En cas d’utilisation de la CPU 319-3 PN/DP avec le module PROFINET

SINAMICS S120 CBE 20 (6SL3055-0AA00-2EB0), vous avez besoin de STEP7
V5.4.
Ce n’est qu’à partir de cette version de STEP7 que vous pourrez utiliser l’entière
fonctionnalité du PROFINET GSDML Version V2 (Multi-API, Physical Device et
Multiple Subslots pro Slot).

A5E00688649-02
Accès en Word et DWord à la dernière adresse valable d’une plage
d’opérandes
Des accès en Word et DWord à la dernièr adresse valable d’une plage

d’opérandes ne provoquent pas d’erreur de longueur de plage. Si l’adresse de
début est située au sein de la plage d’adresses autorisée (E, A, M, L, D) mais pas
l’adresse de fin, aucune erreur de longueur de plage n’est générée dans la version
de module en cours (pas d’appel d’OB d’erreur de synchronisation ou d’arrêt de la
CPU).
En cas d’accès en Word et DWORD, une partie des octets adressés peuvent être
situés en dehors de la plage autorisée. Dès que l’accès est entièrement situé en
dehors de la plage autorisée, une erreur de synchronisation correspondante est
générée.
Exemple :
Accès à un DB d’une longueur de 100 octets (DBB0..DBB99)
”T DBD 98” utilise l’adresse 98...101
Comme l’adresse de début est située dans la plage d’opérandes, aucune erreur de
longueur de plage n’est générée.
Un accès aux adresses non disponibles 100 et 101 est cependant également
effectué.
Le contenu de la plage de mémoire non disponible est indéfini après l’accès et ne
doit pas être utilisé par le programme utilisateur.
Il est cependant garanti qu’aucune donnée d’autres plages d’opérandes n’est
écrasée lors de l’accès.

A5E00688649-02
Espanol
Comunicación abierta vía Industrial Ethernet

La comunicación abierta vía Industrial Ethernet se amplía para la CPU 319-3 PN/DP
con versión de firmware 2.4.0 y superiores con las siguientes variantes de protocolo:
S Protocolo orientado a la conexión: ISO on TCP según RFC 1006
S Protocolo orientado a la no-conexión: UDP según RFC 768
Descarga de bloques para la variante de protocolo UDP según RFC 768

Para poder intercambiar datos con otros interlocutores a través del programa de
usuario, ponemos bloques a su disposición en internet.
Encontrará el archivo correspondiente, incluida su descripción en la siguiente
dirección de internet:
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/es/22146612.
Envío cíclico a varias instancias OUC

El envío cíclico a varias instancias OUC en ciclos de envío < 2,2 ms pueden perju-
dicar la comunicación en la interfaz Ethernet.
En tal caso, es necesario prolongar el ciclo de emisión llamando al bloque de emi-
sión cada ciclo x:
S FB63 ”TSEND” para envío TCP o bien
S FB67 ”TUSEND” para envío UDP.
Para más información, consulte el Service & Support:
Uso de la CPU 319-3 PN/DP con SINAMICS S120
Para utilizar la CPU 319-3 PN/DP con el módulo PROFINET

SINAMICS S120 CBE 20 (6SL3055-0AA00-2EB0) se requiere haber instalado
STEP 7 V5.4.
Para aprovechar de una funcionalidad completa de PROFINET GSDML Version
V2 (Multi-API, Physical Device und Multiple Subslots pro Slot), debe haberse insta-
lado la presente versión de STEP 7.

A5E00688649-02
Accesos de palabra y de palabra doble a las últimas direcciones válidas de
áreas de operando
Accesos de palabra y de palabra doble a las últimas direcciones válidas del área
de operandos no provocan ningún error de longitud de área. Si la dirección de in-
icio del acceso se encuentra comprendida en el área de direccionamiento permi-
tido (E, A, M, L, D), pero la dirección de fin no lo está, no se generará ningún error
de longitud de área en la versión de módulo actual (ninguna llamada de OB de
errores síncronos o bien STOP de ls CPU).
De este modo, en los accesos de palabra y DWORD, una parte de los bytes direc-
cionados puede encontrarse fuera del área permitida. Tan pronto como el acceso
completo se encuentre fuera del área permitida, se genera el error síncrono cor-
respondiente.
Ejemplo:
Acceso a DBs con una longitud de 100 bytes (DBB0..DBB99)
”T DBD 98” utiliza la dirección 98...101
Dado que la dirección de inicio se encuentra comprendida en el área de operan-
dos, no se notifica ningún error de longitud de área.
No obstante tiene lugar el acceso a las direcciones de almacenamiento no disponi-
bles100 y 101.
El contenido del área de almacenamiento no disponible no está definido tras el
acceso, y no debe ser utilizado por el usuario.
No obstante se asegura que durante el acceso no se sobrescriban los datos en
otras áreas de operandos.

A5E00688649-02
Italiano
Comunicazione aperta tramite Industrial Ethernet

Per la CPU 319-3 PN/DP con versione firmware 2.4.0 o successiva, la comunicazione
aperta tramite Industrial Ethernet è stata ampliata con le seguenti varianti di protocol-
lo:
S protocollo orientato al collegamento: ISO on TCP secondo RFC 1006
S protocollo non orientato al collegamento: UDP secondo RFC 768
Download dei blocchi per la variante di protocollo UDP secondo RFC 768
I blocchi che consentono di effettuare lo scambio dei dati con gli altri partner della
comunicazione mediante il programma utente sono disponibili in Internet.
I file, completi di descrizione, possono essere scaricati all’indirizzo:
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/de/22146612.
Trasmissione ciclica di più istanze OUC

Durante una trasmissione ciclica di più istanze OUC con cicli di trasmissione < 2,2
ms può verificarsi un disturbo della comunicazione nell’interfaccia Ethernet.
In questo caso è necessario prolungare il ciclo di trasmissione richiamando un
blocco di trasmissione con una frequenza di cicli determinabile:
S FB63 ”TSEND” per trasmissione TCP o
S FB67 ”TUSEND” per dati UDP.
Per ulteriori informazioni rivolgersi al Service & Support:
Utilizzo della CPU 319-3 PN/DP con SINAMICS S120
Per utilizzare la CPU 319-3 PN/DP con il modulo PROFINET

SINAMICS S120 CBE 20 (6SL3055-0AA00-2EB0) è necessario disporre della
versione V5.4 di Step 7.
Solo con questa versione di STEP7 è possibile usufruire completamente della
funzionalità della versione V2 di PROFINET GSDML (Multi-API, Physical Device e
Multiple Subslots per ogni Slot).

A5E00688649-02
Accessi Word e DWord agli ultimi indirizzi validi di un’area operando
Gli accessi Word e DWord agli ultimi indirizzi validi di un’area operando non
causano alcun errore di lunghezza dell’area. Se l’indirizzo iniziale dell’accesso si
trova all’interno dell’area di indirizzo consentita (E, A, M, L, D), ma l’indirizzo finale
no, non viene generato alcun errore di lunghezza dell’area nella presente versione
dei blocchi (nessun richiamo di OB di errore sincrono o Stop CPU).
In questo modo, con gli accessi Word e DWORD, una parte dei byte indirizzati può
trovarsi fuori dell’area consentita. Appena l’accesso si trova completamente fuori
dell’area consentita, viene generato un rispettivo errore sincrono.
Esempio:
Accesso ad un DB con lunghezza di 100 Byte (DBB0..DBB99)
”T DBD 98” utilizza l’indirizzo 98...101
Poiché l’indirizzo iniziale si trova all’interno dell’area operando non viene causato
alcun errore di lunghezza dell’area.
Tuttavia avviene un accesso anche agli indirizzi di memoria 100 e 101 non
presenti.
Il contenuto dell’area di memoria non presente non è difinita dopo l’accesso e non
può essere utilizzato dal programma utente.
È comunque sicuro che durante l’accesso non vengano sovrascritti alcuni dati in
altre arree operandi.

A5E00688649-02
A5E00688649-02
Product Information
CPU 31xC and 31x, Technical Data Manual, Edition 01/2006
CPU 31xC and 31x, Installation, Operating Instructions, Edition 01/2006
S7-300 Instruction List, Edition 01/2006
S7-300 Getting Started Collection, Edition 01/2006
PROFINET Getting Started Collection, Edition 01/2006
This product information contains important information about the documentation mentioned
above. It is to be regarded as a separate component. Its specifications and information have a
higher binding nature than those of other manuals, instruction lists and Getting Starteds.
New CPUs with larger working memory

The working memory of the following CPUs was extended. The CPUs can now execute
larger user programs.
Due to these improvements, the order number of the CPUs were changed.
With the CPUs with firmware V2.1.10, V2.3.4 and V2.4.0 the functionalities remain un-
changed compared to the previous CPUs.
The new CPUs are:
• contained in STEP7 V5.4 Service Pack 1
• configurable with the older STEP7 versions:
The CPUs with the new order number can be downloaded from the Internet as a
hardware update (0103 to 0105).
Requirement is STEP7 V5.2, Service Pack1.
• configurable with the corresponding previous CPUs
• compatible with the previous CPUs
Non–retentive data blocks

In opposition to the data in the S7-300, CPU 31xC and CPU 31x manual, Technical
data”, chapter 4.1.2, the CPUs with frimware V2.0.12 are no longer supported by re-
tentive data blocks. Non–retentive data blocks and code blocks can be loaded to the
maximum limit of the working memory. Retentive data blocks can be loaded to the
maximum retentive limit of the working memory (see the following table).
Copyright 2006 by Siemens AG

A5E00830174-01
2
Product Previous order nr. Firmware Previous Previous New order nr. Firmware Working Working Hard-
description y Working Working y memory memory ware
memory memory new retentive ** update
retentive ** new
CPU312C 6ES7312–5BD01–0AB0 V2.0.12 16 KB 16 KB 6ES7312–5BE03–0AB0 V2.0.12 32 KB 32 KB 0103
CPU313C 6ES7313–5BE01–0AB0 V2.0.12 32 KB 32 KB 6ES7313–5BF03–0AB0 V2.0.12 64 KB 64 KB 0103
CPU313C-2 PtP 6ES7313–6BE01–0AB0 V2.0.12 32 KB 32 KB 6ES7313–6BF03–0AB0 V2.0.12 64 KB 64 KB 0103
CPU313C-2 DP 6ES7313–6CE01–0AB0 V2.0.12 32 KB 32 KB 6ES7313–6CF03–0AB0 V2.0.12 64 KB 64 KB 0103
CPU314C-2 PtP 6ES7314–6BF02–0AB0 V2.0.12 64 KB 64 KB 6ES7314–6BG03–0AB0 V2.0.12 96 KB 64 KB 0103
CPU 314C-2 DP 6ES7314–6CF02–0AB0 V2.0.12 64 KB 64 KB 6ES7314–6CG03–0AB0 V2.0.12 96 KB 64 KB 0103
CPU312 6ES7312–1AD10–0AB00 V2.0.12 16 KB 16 KB 6ES7312–1AE13–0AB0 V2.0.12 32 KB 32 KB 0104
CPU314 6ES7314–1AF11–0AB0 V2.0.12 64 KB 64 KB 6ES7314–1AG13–0AB0 V2.0.12 96 KB 64 KB 0104
CPU315-2 DP* 6ES7315–2AG10–0AB V2.0.12 128 KB 128 KB 6ES7315–2AG10–0AB0 V2.0.12 128 KB 128 KB ----
CPU317-2 DP* 6ES7317–2AJ10–0AB0 V2.1.10 512 KB 256 KB 6ES7317–2AJ10–0AB0 V2.1.10 512 KB 256 KB ----
CPU315-2 PN/DP 6ES7315–2EG10–0AB0 V2.3.4 128 KB 128 KB 6ES7315–2EH13–0AB0 V2.3.4 256 KB 128 KB 0105
CPU317-2 PN/DP 6ES7317–2EJ10–0AB0 V2.3.4 512 KB 256 KB 6ES7317–2EK13–0AB0 V2.3.4 1024 KB 256 KB 0105
CPU 319-3 PN/DP* 6ES7318–3EL00–0AB0 V2.4.0 1400 KB 700 KB 6ES7318–3EL00–0AB0 V2.4.0 1400 KB 700 KB ----
* not affected by the extension of the memory

** Maximum size for retentive working memory for retentive data blocks
A5E00830174-01
Product Information
List 4 Safety Relay F121
E-Stop Relay and Safety Gate Monitor
Characteristics
Stop category 0
Safety category 4
3 Safety contacts
1 Auxiliary contact
1 Semiconductor output
with short circuit protection
Crossfault monitoring
Monitored or automatic
reset
Tested for light curtain
applications (24 V)
DIN EN 60204 Section 1/ VDE 0113

Section 1 (11/98) prescribes that power
circuits with a safety function must be
specified as per Section 9.4.
In such safety circuits auxiliary contactors
must intervene to guarantee redundancy
so that, despite the occurrence of a fault
in one of the auxiliary contactors, the
safety circuit remains operative.
In every on - off cycle of the machine,
the auxiliary contactors must be checked
automatically at least once to ensure
correct opening and closing of the con- (e.g. safety gates) channel 2 has to be Models and Ordering Data
tacts. activated before channel 1.
Emergency-stop relay F121 fulfils this re- If the inputs will be activated with 3 N/O Safety contacts
quirement – EN 954-1 – to the highest external 24VDC , the negative pole has Contacts 1 N/C Auxiliary contact ,
1Semiconductor output
safety grade 4. to be connected to A2 (Light curtain
The F121 can be used as a safety guard application). Type F121 Order No.
monitor or as an E-stop relay in single or The open collector semiconductor out- 230 VAC 074 00041*
dualchannel applications. put may transfer the status of the F121 115 VAC 074 00042*
via the terminals Y31-Y32 direct to a 42 VAC 074 00043
PLC.
24 VAC/DC 074 00044*
Mode of Operation To control NC contacts from external *
contactors the feedback loop has to be *Do not connect PE to this version
* = Approval for U.S. / Canada
The dual channel operation shown in wired in series between the start button
wiring example 1 includes crossfault respectively X5 and S33 (Autostart).
monitoring between both E-stop circuits. LISTED
That means in case of shorts between

the two E-stop channels the F121 will
Circuit Diagram
deactivate the outputs. This is achieved
by an electronic protection circuit in the
safety relay. After elimination of the mal- A1
(+) S11 S52 S12 Y31 Y32 13 23 33 41
function, the F121 is ready for operation
again. 13 23 33 41
The application with monitored start
checks the start circuit (S33/S34) and will K1
only activate the F121 if there is a
leading edge in this circuit.
If wired for autostartfunction the F121 K2
will be activated automatically by the
supply voltage if the E-stop circuits and F121 14 24 34 42
the feedback loop (X5/S33) are closed. S21 A2
In applications, where both E-stop (PE) S22 X5 S33 S34 14 24 34 42 (–)
circuits are not closed simultaneously,
Automation Control Components

The right to make
Safety Relay F121 – Safety Gate Monitor and Emergency Stop Relay changes is reserved
Wiring Example 1 Wiring Example 2
L1 L1(+)
E-Stop Single channel E-stop circuit,
Dual channel crossfault monitored
E-Stop monitored reset,
E-stop circuit,
link monitoring on the reset button A1 S11 S52 S12 Y31 Y32 13 23 33 extension of contacts
F121 (single or dual channel) in
S21 combination with module F122
A1 S11 S52 S12 Y31 Y32 13 23 33 (PE) S22 X5 S33 S34 14 24 A2
F121 A1 A3 13 23 33 43 53 63 81 91
S21
(PE) S22 X5 S33 S34 14 24 A2 Reset F122
A2 A4 14 24 34 44 54 64 82 92
N
Reset N(-)
Wiring Example 3 Wiring Example 4
L1 L1
Light curtain application via
+24V e.g. Light curtain PLC-reply signal Single channel
24VDC outputs > 30mA
0V E-stop circuit
0V OUT1 OUT2 extension of contacts
+24V E1.0 (Input) (linked between
via external Stop E-Stop S12-S52 and
contactors,
A1 S11 S52 S12 Y31 Y32 13 23 monitored
S21-S22) and
reset A1 S11 S52 S12 Y31 Y32 13 23 automatic reset
F121 (X5-S33 linked)
S21 F121 PLC-indication
(PE) S22 X5 S33 S34 14 24 A2 via semiconductor
S21 S22 X5 S33 S34
(PE) 14 24 A2 output
K' K''
K' K''
N N
Technical Data Contact De-Rating: Temperature F121
200
Rated voltage 230 / 115 / 42VAC ; 24VAC/DC
180
Voltage range 0.8 (0.9 at 24 VDC) to 1.1 x rated voltage
Power consumption Approx. 4W
current2 x number of contactpaths / A2
160
Rated insulation voltage 250V 140

Creep distance and gaps Overvoltage category III 120
Pollution level 2 to DIN VDE 0110-1 (04/97)
100
Test voltage 2.5 kV
Ambient temperature - 5°C to +55°C 80
Mode of protection Terminals IP 20, IP 40 casing 60

to DIN VDE 0470- 1 (11/92) current over 3 contacts
40
Switching capacity 250VAC; 1500 VA / 24VDC; 144W, current over 2 contacts
20
preferably with spark arrest
Thermic current Ith According to current summary limit curve (right) 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
(max. 10 A in one current path) Ambient temperature / °C
Utilisation categorie AC-15 250V 6A; DC-13 24V 3 A
Response time Via reset button : <60ms; Autostart: <600ms
Release time Via E-stop button: <20ms; loss of supply: <250ms
Release time at 24VDC Via E-stop button or light curtain: <15ms Dimensional Diagram
Recovery time With monitored reset: >5s / with autoreset: > 2s
Recovery time at 24VDC >0.1s after E-stop or light curtain operation
Output contacts 3 N/O (safety contacts) / 1 N/C (auxiliary contact)
Semiconductor output 24VDC / 20mA, PNP, short circuit protection
Mechanical lifetime 107 switching cycles
109.5
Switch material Ag SN O2+ 0.5µ Au

87
Terminals Terminal box with wire protection

Line cross section Rigid 4mm2, flexible 2.5mm2
Connecting lead to be stripped up to max. 4mm
Control circuit Approx. 24 VDC
4.5
55 75
Contact protection Screwed-type fuse max.6A slow blow DIN rail mounting to EN 50022-35x7.5
Auto.circuit breaker max. C10 A quick break Screw mounting possible by reversal of snap bracket
Weight 370g; Typ 24VAC/DC : 290g
TESCH GmbH Automatic Graefrather Straße 124 Phone +49-2 02-73 91-0 http://www.tesch.de
Control Components D-42329 Wuppertal Fax +49-2 02-73 91-115 eMail: vertrieb-ak@tesch.de Germany
Modular I/O-System
PROFIBUS DP/V1
Field Bus Coupler

750-333
Manual
Technical description,
installation and
configuration
Version 1.0.0
ii • General
Copyright © 2008 by WAGO Kontakttechnik GmbH & Co. KG

All rights reserved.
WAGO Kontakttechnik GmbH & Co. KG

Hansastraße 27
D-32423 Minden
Phone: +49 (0) 571/8 87 – 0
Fax: +49 (0) 571/8 87 – 1 69
E-Mail: info@wago.com
Web: http://www.wago.com
Technical Support
Phone: +49 (0) 571/8 87 – 5 55
Fax: +49 (0) 571/8 87 – 85 55
E-Mail: support@wago.com
Every conceivable measure has been taken to ensure the correctness and
completeness of this documentation. However, as errors can never be fully
excluded we would appreciate any information or ideas at any time.
E-Mail: documentation@wago.com
We wish to point out that the software and hardware terms as well as the
trademarks of companies used and/or mentioned in the present manual are
generally trademark or patent protected.
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
Table of Contents • iii
Table of Contents
1 Important Notes .......................................................................................... 9

1.1 Legal Principles........................................................................................ 9
1.1.1 Copyright ............................................................................................. 9
1.1.2 Personnel Qualification ....................................................................... 9
1.1.3 Conforming Use of Series 750 .......................................................... 10
1.1.4 Technical Condition of the Devices .................................................. 10
1.2 Standards and Regulations for Operating the 750 Series ....................... 11
1.3 Symbols .................................................................................................. 12
1.4 Safety Information.................................................................................. 13
1.5 Font Conventions ................................................................................... 14
1.6 Number Notation.................................................................................... 14
1.7 Scope ...................................................................................................... 15
1.8 Abbreviation........................................................................................... 15
2 The WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 ................................................................ 16

2.1 System Description................................................................................. 16
2.2 Technical Data........................................................................................ 17
2.3 Manufacturing Number .......................................................................... 23
2.4 Component Update................................................................................. 24
2.5 Storage, Assembly and Transport .......................................................... 24
2.6 Mechanical Setup ................................................................................... 25
2.6.1 Installation Position ........................................................................... 25
2.6.2 Total Expansion................................................................................. 25
2.6.3 Assembly onto Carrier Rail ............................................................... 26
2.6.3.1 Carrier Rail Properties .................................................................. 26
2.6.3.2 WAGO DIN Rail .......................................................................... 27
2.6.4 Spacing .............................................................................................. 27
2.6.5 Plugging and Removal of the Components ....................................... 28
2.6.6 Assembly Sequence ........................................................................... 29
2.6.7 Internal Bus/Data Contacts................................................................ 30
2.6.8 Power Contacts .................................................................................. 31
2.6.9 Wire Connection................................................................................ 32
2.7 Power Supply ......................................................................................... 33
2.7.1 Isolation ............................................................................................. 33
2.7.2 System Supply ................................................................................... 34
2.7.2.1 Connection .................................................................................... 34
2.7.2.2 Alignment ..................................................................................... 35
2.7.3 Field Supply....................................................................................... 37
2.7.3.1 Connection .................................................................................... 37
2.7.3.2 Fusing............................................................................................ 38
2.7.4 Supplementary Power Supply Regulations ....................................... 41
2.7.5 Supply Example................................................................................. 42
2.7.6 Power Supply Unit............................................................................. 43
2.8 Grounding............................................................................................... 44
2.8.1 Grounding the DIN Rail .................................................................... 44
2.8.1.1 Framework Assembly ................................................................... 44
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
iv • Table of Contents
2.8.1.2 Insulated Assembly....................................................................... 44

2.8.2 Grounding Function........................................................................... 45
2.8.3 Grounding Protection ........................................................................ 46
2.9 Shielding (Screening) ............................................................................. 47
2.9.1 General............................................................................................... 47
2.9.2 Bus Conductors.................................................................................. 47
2.9.3 Signal Conductors.............................................................................. 47
2.9.4 WAGO Shield (Screen) Connecting System..................................... 48
2.10 Assembly Guidelines/Standards............................................................. 48
3 Field Bus Coupler 750-333 ....................................................................... 49

3.1 Description ............................................................................................. 49
3.2 Hardware ................................................................................................ 50
3.2.1 View................................................................................................... 50
3.2.2 Device Supply.................................................................................... 51
3.2.3 Fieldbus Connection .......................................................................... 52
3.2.4 Display Elements ............................................................................... 53
3.2.5 Station Address.................................................................................. 54
3.2.6 Configuration Interface...................................................................... 55
3.3 Operating System ................................................................................... 56
3.4 Process Image......................................................................................... 57
3.4.1 Local Process Image .......................................................................... 57
3.4.2 Allocation of the Input and Output Data ........................................... 58
3.4.3 Process Data Structure for PROFIBUS-DP....................................... 59
3.5 Configuration.......................................................................................... 60
3.5.1 Configuration of the I/O Modules ..................................................... 60
3.5.2 GSD Files........................................................................................... 61
3.5.3 Identification Bytes............................................................................ 62
3.5.3.1 Bus Coupler Modules ................................................................... 66
3.5.3.2 I/O-Modules.................................................................................. 66
3.5.4 Example ............................................................................................. 67
3.6 Parameterizing the Coupler .................................................................... 69
3.7 Configuration and Parameterization of I/O Modules ............................. 72
3.7.1 Process Data Channel of Bus coupler................................................ 72
3.7.2 Parameterization of I/O Modules ...................................................... 73
3.8 Diagnostics ............................................................................................. 74
3.8.1 Station Status 1 to 3 ........................................................................... 75
3.8.2 PROFIBUS DP Master Address........................................................ 75
3.8.3 Manufacturer‘s Identification ............................................................ 75
3.8.4 Identification Based Diagnostics ....................................................... 75
3.8.5 Device Status ..................................................................................... 76
3.8.5.1 Internal Status Messages and Arguments ..................................... 77
3.8.5.2 Internal Bus Status Messages and Arguments .............................. 77
3.8.5.3 PROFIBUS DP Status Messages and Arguments ........................ 78
3.8.6 Channel Based Diagnostics ............................................................... 79
3.8.6.1 Fault Types of I/O Modules with Diagnostics Capability ............ 81
3.8.6.2 I/O Modules Fault Cases............................................................... 82
3.8.7 Parameterization Status PROFIsafe................................................... 84
3.8.7.1 PROFIsafe Parameterization Fault ............................................... 84
3.9 Acyclic Communication According to DP/V1....................................... 85
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
Table of Contents • v
3.9.1 Data Areas ......................................................................................... 87

3.9.1.1 Fieldbus Coupler, Slots 0 and 1 .................................................... 88
3.9.1.2 Complex I/O Modules, Slots 1 ... 63............................................. 88
3.9.1.3 Binary I/O Modules, Slots 1 ... 63 ................................................ 89
3.10 LED Signaling........................................................................................ 93
3.10.1 Blink Code ......................................................................................... 93
3.10.2 Fieldbus Status................................................................................... 94
3.10.3 Fault Message via Blink Code of the BUS LED ............................... 95
3.10.4 Node Status........................................................................................ 96
3.10.5 Fault Message via the Blink Code of the I/O LED............................ 98
3.10.6 Supply Voltage Status ..................................................................... 102
3.11 Fault Behavior ...................................................................................... 103
3.11.1 Fieldbus Failure ............................................................................... 103
3.11.2 Internal Bus Fault ............................................................................ 103
3.12 Technical Data...................................................................................... 104
4 Field Bus Communication ...................................................................... 106

4.1 PROFIBUS ........................................................................................... 106
4.1.1 Description....................................................................................... 106
4.1.2 Wiring .............................................................................................. 107
5 I/O Modules ............................................................................................. 110

5.1 Overview .............................................................................................. 110
5.1.1 Digital Input Modules...................................................................... 110
5.1.2 Digital Output Modules ................................................................... 112
5.1.3 Analog Input Modules ..................................................................... 113
5.1.4 Analog Output Modules .................................................................. 115
5.1.5 Special Modules .............................................................................. 116
5.1.6 System Modules .............................................................................. 118
5.2 Design of the Process Data for PROFIBUS-DP .................................. 119
5.2.1 2 DI I/O Modules............................................................................. 119
5.2.2 2 DI I/O Modules with Diagnostics................................................. 119
5.2.3 4 DI I/O Modules............................................................................. 120
5.2.4 8 DI I/O Modules............................................................................. 120
5.2.5 16 DI I/O Modules........................................................................... 120
5.2.6 2 DO I/O Modules ........................................................................... 120
5.2.7 2 DO I/O Modules with Diagnostics ............................................... 121
5.2.8 4 DO I/O Modules ........................................................................... 121
5.2.9 4 DO I/O Module with Diagnostics................................................. 121
5.2.10 8 DO I/O Modules ........................................................................... 122
5.2.11 8 DO I/O Module with Diagnostics................................................. 122
5.2.12 16 DO I/O Modules ......................................................................... 122
5.2.13 Power Supply Modules.................................................................... 122
5.2.14 2 AI I/O Modules............................................................................. 123
5.2.15 4 AI I/O Modules............................................................................. 124
5.2.16 2 AO I/O Modules ........................................................................... 125
5.2.17 4 AO I/O Modules ........................................................................... 126
5.2.18 Counter Modules ............................................................................. 127
5.2.19 PWM Module .................................................................................. 128
5.2.20 Stepper Controller............................................................................ 128
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
vi • Table of Contents
5.2.21 SSI Encoder Interface ...................................................................... 129

5.2.22 Incremental Encoder Interface Modules.......................................... 130
5.2.23 Digital Impulse Interface Module.................................................... 130
5.2.24 Serial Interface Modules.................................................................. 131
5.2.25 Data Exchange Module.................................................................... 132
5.2.26 DALI/DSI-Master............................................................................ 133
5.2.27 AS Interface Master......................................................................... 133
5.2.28 PROFIsafe I/O Modules .................................................................. 134
5.3 PROFIBUS Identification Bytes of I/O Modules................................. 135
5.3.1 Binary Input Modules ...................................................................... 135
5.3.2 Binary Output Modules ................................................................... 136
5.3.3 Supply Modules ............................................................................... 137
5.3.4 Analog Input Modules ..................................................................... 137
5.3.5 Analog Output Modules .................................................................. 138
5.3.6 Special Modules .............................................................................. 138
5.4 Configuration and Parameterization of I/O Modules ........................... 139
5.4.1 Digital I/O Modules......................................................................... 139
5.4.1.1 2 DI I/O Modules ........................................................................ 139
5.4.1.2 2 DI I/O Modules with 1 Bit Diagnostics per Channel............... 140
5.4.1.3 4 DI I/O Modules ........................................................................ 142
5.4.1.4 8 DI I/O Modules ........................................................................ 143
5.4.1.5 16 DI I/O Modules ...................................................................... 144
5.4.1.6 2 DO I/O Modules ...................................................................... 145
5.4.1.7 2 (1) DO I/O Modules with 1 Bit Diagnostics per Channel ....... 146
5.4.1.8 2 DO I/O Modules with 2 Bit Diagnostics per Channel ............. 148
5.4.1.9 4 DO I/O Modules ...................................................................... 150
5.4.1.10 4 DO I/O Module with 1 Bit Diagnostics per Channel............... 151
5.4.1.11 8 DO I/O Modules ...................................................................... 153
5.4.1.12 8 DO I/O Modules with 1 Bit Diagnostics per Channel ............. 155
5.4.1.13 16 DO I/O Modules .................................................................... 157
5.4.1.14 2 DI/DO I/O Modules with 1 Bit Diagnostics per Channel........ 158
5.4.1.15 Power Supply Modules with Diagnostics ................................... 160
5.4.2 Analog I/O Modules ........................................................................ 162
5.4.2.1 2 AI I/O Modules ........................................................................ 162
5.4.2.2 4 AI I/O Modules ........................................................................ 164
5.4.2.3 2 AO I/O Modules ...................................................................... 165
5.4.2.4 4 AO I/O Modules ...................................................................... 167
5.4.3 Digital Special Modules .................................................................. 169
5.4.3.1 Counter Modules......................................................................... 169
5.4.3.2 PWM Module.............................................................................. 170
5.4.3.3 Stepper Controller....................................................................... 171
5.4.4 Distance and Angle Measurement Modules .................................... 172
5.4.4.1 SSI Encoder Interface ................................................................. 172
5.4.4.2 Incremental Encoder Interface.................................................... 173
5.4.4.3 Digital Impulse Interface ............................................................ 174
5.4.5 Serial Interfaces ............................................................................... 175
5.4.6 Data Exchange Module.................................................................... 176
5.4.7 ENOCEAN Receiver Module.......................................................... 177
5.4.8 DALI/DSI-Master............................................................................ 178
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
Table of Contents • vii

5.5 Acyclic communication according to DP/V1....................................... 183
5.5.1 2 DI I/O Modules............................................................................. 183
5.5.2 2 DI I/O Modules with 1 Bit Diagnostics per Channel ................... 183
5.5.3 4 DI I/O Modules............................................................................. 183
5.5.4 8 DI I/O Modules............................................................................. 184
5.5.5 16 DI I/O Modules........................................................................... 184
5.5.6 2 DO I/O Modules ........................................................................... 185
5.5.7 2 DO I/O Modules with 1 or 2 Bit Diagnostics per Channel .......... 185
5.5.8 4 DO I/O Modules ........................................................................... 185
5.5.9 4 DO I/O Modules with 1 Bit Diagnostics per Channel.................. 186
5.5.10 8 DO I/O Modules ........................................................................... 187
5.5.11 8 DO I/O Modules with 1 Bit Diagnostics per Channel.................. 188
5.5.12 16 DO I/O Modules ......................................................................... 189
5.5.13 2 DI/DO I/O Modules with 1 Bit Diagnostics per Channel ............ 190
5.5.14 Supply Module with Diagnostics .................................................... 190
5.5.15 2 AI I/O Modules............................................................................. 191
5.5.16 4 AI I/O Modules............................................................................. 192
5.5.17 2 AO I/O Modules ........................................................................... 194
5.5.18 4 AO I/O Modules ........................................................................... 195
5.5.19 Counter Module 750-404................................................................. 197
5.5.20 Counter Module 750-638 and PWM Module 750-511 ................... 198
5.5.21 SSI Interface .................................................................................... 199
5.5.22 Incremental Encoder Interfaces and Serial Interfaces ..................... 199
5.5.23 Digital Impulse Interface ................................................................. 200
5.5.24 Serial Interfaces and Data Exchange Module.................................. 200
5.5.25 DALI/DSI Master ............................................................................ 201
6 Use in Hazardous Environments ........................................................... 203

6.1 Foreword .............................................................................................. 203
6.2 Protective Measures ............................................................................. 203
6.3 Classification Meeting CENELEC and IEC ........................................ 203
6.3.1 Divisions .......................................................................................... 203
6.3.2 Explosion Protection Group ............................................................ 205
6.3.3 Unit Categories ................................................................................ 206
6.3.4 Temperature Classes........................................................................ 207
6.3.5 Types of Ignition Protection ............................................................ 208
6.4 Classifications Meeting the NEC 500 .................................................. 209
6.4.1 Divisions .......................................................................................... 209
6.4.2 Explosion Protection Groups........................................................... 209
6.4.3 Temperature Classes........................................................................ 210
6.5 Identification ........................................................................................ 211
6.5.1 For Europe ....................................................................................... 211
6.5.2 For America ..................................................................................... 212
6.6 Installation Regulations........................................................................ 213
7 Index ......................................................................................................... 215
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
viii • Table of Contents
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
Important Notes • 9
Legal Principles
1 Important Notes
This section provides only a summary of the most important safety require-
ments and notes which will be mentioned in the individual sections. To protect
your health and prevent damage to the devices, it is essential to read and care-
fully follow the safety guidelines.
1.1 Legal Principles

1.1.1 Copyright
This manual including all figures and illustrations contained therein is subject
to copyright. Any use of this manual which infringes the copyright provisions
stipulated herein, is not permitted. Reproduction, translation and electronic
and phototechnical archiving and amendments require the written consent of
WAGO Kontakttechnik GmbH & Co. KG, Minden. Non-observance will en-
tail the right of claims for damages.
WAGO Kontakttechnik GmbH & Co. KG reserves the right of changes serv-
ing technical progress.
All rights developing from the issue of a patent or the legal protection of util-
ity patents are reserved to WAGO Kontakttechnik GmbH & Co. KG. Third-
party products are always indicated without any notes concerning patent
rights. Thus, the existence of such rights must not be excluded.
1.1.2 Personnel Qualification

The use of the product described in this manual requires special qualifications,
as shown in the following table:
Specialists**) having
Instructed person-
Activity Electrical specialist qualifications in PLC
nel*)
programming
Assembly X X
Commissioning X X
Programming X
Maintenance X X
Troubleshooting X
Disassembly X X
*) Instructed persons have been trained by qualified personnel or electrical specialists.
**) A specialist is someone who, through technical training, knowledge and experience,
demonstrates the ability to meet the relevant specifications and identify potential dangers in
the mentioned field of activity.
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
10 • Important Notes
Legal Principles
All personnel must be familiar with the applicable standards.

WAGO Kontakttechnik GmbH & Co. KG declines any liability resulting from
improper action and damage to WAGO products and third party products due to
non-observance of the information contained in this manual.
1.1.3 Conforming Use of Series 750

The couplers and controllers of the modular I/O System 750 receive digital
and analog signals from the I/O modules and sensors and transmit them to the
actuators or higher level control systems. Using the WAGO controllers, the
signals can also be (pre-)processed.
The device is designed for IP20 protection class. It is protected against finger
touch and solid impurities up to 12.5mm diameter, but not against water pene-
tration. Unless otherwise specified, the device must not be operated in wet and
dusty environments.
1.1.4 Technical Condition of the Devices

For each individual application, the components are supplied from the factory
with a dedicated hardware and software configuration. Changes in hardware,
software and firmware are only admitted within the framework of the possi-
bilities documented in the manuals. All changes to the hardware or software
and the non-conforming use of the components entail the exclusion of liability
on the part of WAGO Kontakttechnik GmbH & Co. KG.
Please direct any requirements pertaining to a modified and/or new hardware
or software configuration directly to WAGO Kontakttechnik GmbH & Co.
KG.
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
Standards and Regulations for Operating the 750 Series
1.2 Standards and Regulations for Operating the 750 Series

Please observe the standards and regulations that are relevant to your installa-
tion:
• The data and power lines must be connected and installed in compliance
with the standards to avoid failures on your installation and eliminate any
danger to personnel.
• For installation, startup, maintenance and repair, please observe the acci-
dent prevention regulations of your machine (e.g. BGV A 3, "Electrical In-
stallations and Equipment").
• Emergency stop functions and equipment must not be made ineffective.
See relevant standards (e.g. DIN EN 418).
• Your installation must be equipped in accordance to the EMC guidelines
so that electromagnetic interferences can be eliminated.
• Operating 750 Series components in home applications without further
measures is only permitted if they meet the emission limits (emissions of
interference) according to EN 61000-6-3. You will find the relevant in-
formation in the section on "WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750" ! "System De-
scription" ! "Technical Data".
• Please observe the safety measures against electrostatic discharge accord-
ing to DIN EN 61340-5-1/-3. When handling the modules, ensure that the
environment (persons, workplace and packing) is well grounded.
• The relevant valid and applicable standards and guidelines concerning the
installation of switch cabinets are to be observed.
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
Symbols
1.3 Symbols
Danger
Always observe this information to protect persons from injury.
Warning
Always observe this information to prevent damage to the device.
Attention
Marginal conditions that must always be observed to ensure smooth and effi-
cient operation.
ESD (Electrostatic Discharge)

Warning of damage to the components through electrostatic discharge. Ob-
serve the precautionary measure for handling components at risk of electro-
static discharge.
Note
Make important notes that are to be complied with so that a trouble-free and
efficient device operation can be guaranteed.
Additional Information
References to additional literature, manuals, data sheets and internet pages.
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
Safety Information
1.4 Safety Information

When connecting the device to your installation and during operation, the fol-
lowing safety notes must be observed:
Danger
The WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 and its components are an open system. It
must only be assembled in housings, cabinets or in electrical operation
rooms. Access is only permitted via a key or tool to authorized qualified per-
sonnel.
Danger
All power sources to the device must always be switched off before carrying
out any installation, repair or maintenance work.
Warning
Replace defective or damaged device/module (e.g. in the event of deformed
contacts), as the functionality of field bus station in question can no longer be
ensured on a long-term basis.
Warning
The components are not resistant against materials having seeping and insu-
lating properties. Belonging to this group of materials is: e.g. aerosols, sili-
cones, triglycerides (found in some hand creams). If it cannot be ruled out
that these materials appear in the component environment, then the compo-
nents must be installed in an enclosure that is resistant against the above men-
tioned materials. Clean tools and materials are generally required to operate
the device/module.
Warning
Soiled contacts must be cleaned using oil-free compressed air or with ethyl
alcohol and leather cloths.
Warning
Do not use contact sprays, which could possibly impair the functioning of the
contact area.
Warning
Avoid reverse polarity of data and power lines, as this may damage the de-
vices.

The devices are equipped with electronic components that may be destroyed
by electrostatic discharge when touched.
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
Font Conventions
1.5 Font Conventions

italic Names of paths and files are marked in italic.
e.g.: C:\Programs\WAGO-IO-CHECK
italic Menu items are marked in bold italic.

e.g.: Save
\ A backslash between two names characterizes the selec-

tion of a menu point from a menu.
e.g.: File \ New
END Press buttons are marked as bold with small capitals

e.g.: ENTER
<> Keys are marked bold within angle brackets

e.g.: <F5>
Courier The print font for program codes is Courier.

e.g.: END_VAR
1.6 Number Notation

Number code Example Note
Decimal 100 Normal notation
Hexadecimal 0x64 C notation
Binary '100' Within inverted commas,
'0110.0100' Nibble separated with dots
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
Scope
1.7 Scope
This manual describes the following components of the field bus independent
WAGO I/O SYSTEM 750:
Item_No. Description
750-333 Field Bus Coppler PROFIBUS DP/V1 12 MBd
1.8 Abbreviation
AI Analog Input
Analog Input Module
AO Analog Output
Analog Output Module
CPU In this case the Run Time System for the eradication of the user
program in the PFC
DI Digital Input
Digital Input Module
DO Digital Output
Digital Output Module
FBD Function Block Diagram
HB High Byte
I/O Input/Output
IL Instruction List
ID Identifier
LB Low Byte
LD Ladder Diagram
PFC Programmalbe Field Bus Controller
PLC Programmable Logic Controller
SFC Sequential Function Chart
ST Structured Text
SW Software Version
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
16 • The WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
System Description
2 The WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750

2.1 System Description
The WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 is a modular, field bus independent I/O sys-
tem. It is comprised of a field bus coupler/controller (1) and connected field
bus modules (2) for any type of signal. Together, these make up the field bus
node. The end module (3) completes the node.
Fig. 2-1: Field bus node g0xxx00x
Couplers/controllers for field bus systems such as PROFIBUS, INTERBUS,

ETHERNET TCP/IP, CAN (CANopen, DeviceNet, CAL), MODBUS, LON
and others are available.
The coupler/controller contains the field bus interface, electronics and a power
supply terminal. The field bus interface forms the physical interface to the
relevant field bus. The electronics process the data of the bus modules and
make it available for the field bus communication. The 24 V system supply
and the 24 V field supply are fed in via the integrated power supply terminal.
The field bus coupler communicates via the relevant field bus. The program-
mable field bus controller (PFC) enables the implementation of additional
PLC functions. Programming is done with the WAGO-I/O-PRO in accor-
dance with IEC 61131-3.
Bus modules for diverse digital and analog I/O functions as well as special
functions can be connected to the coupler/controller. The communication be-
tween the coupler/controller and the bus modules is carried out via an internal
bus.
The WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 has a clear port level with LEDs for status in-
dication, insertable mini WSB markers and pullout group marker carriers. The
3-wire technology supplemented by a ground wire connection allows for di-
rect sensor/actuator wiring.
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
The WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 • 17
Technical Data
2.2 Technical Data

Mechanic
Material Polycarbonate, Polyamide 6.6
Dimensions W x H* x L
* from upper edge of DIN 35 rail
- Coupler/Controller (Standard) - 51 mm x 65 mm x 100 mm
- Coupler/Controller (ECO) - 50 mm x 65 mm x 100 mm
- Coupler/Controller (FireWire) - 62 mm x 65 mm x 100 mm
- I/O module, single - 12 mm x 64 mm x 100 mm
- I/O module, double - 24 mm x 64 mm x 100 mm
- I/O module, fourfold - 48 mm x 64 mm x 100 mm
Installation on DIN 35 with interlock
Modular by double featherkey-dovetail
Mounting position any position
Marking standard marking label type
group marking label 8 x 47 mm
Connection
Connection type CAGE CLAMP®
Wire range 0.08 mm² ... 2.5 mm², AWG 28-14
Stripped length 8 … 9 mm,
9 … 10 mm for components with pluggable wiring
(753-xxx)
Contacts
Power jumpers contacts blade/spring contact
self-cleaning
Current via power contacts max 10 A
Voltage drop at I max < 1 V/64 modules
Data contacts slide contact, hard gold plated
1.5 µm, self-cleaning
Climatic environmental conditions
Operating temperature 0 °C ... 55 °C,
-20 °C … +60 °C for components with extended
temperature range (750-xxx/025-xxx)
Storage temperature -20 °C ... +85 °C
Relative humidity 5 % … 95 % without condensation
Resistance to harmful substances acc. to IEC 60068-2-42 and IEC 60068-2-43
Maximum pollutant concentration at SO2 ≤ 25 ppm
relative humidity < 75% H2S ≤ 10 ppm
Special conditions Ensure that additional measures for components are
taken, which are used in an environment involving:
– dust, caustic vapors or gases
– ionization radiation
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
Technical Data
Safe electrical isolation

Air and creepage distance acc. to IEC 60664-1
Degree of pollution 2
acc. To IEC 61131-2
Degree of protection
Degree of protection IP 20
Electromagnetic compatibility
Immunity to interference for industrial areas acc. to EN 61000-6-2 (2001)
Test specification Test values Strength Evaluation
class criteria
EN 61000-4-2 ESD 4 kV/8 kV (contact/air) 2/3 B
EN 61000-4-3 10 V/m 80 MHz ... 1 GHz 3 A
electromagnetic fields
EN 61000-4-4 burst 1 kV/2 kV (data/supply) 2/3 B
EN 61000-4-5 surge Data: -/- (line/line) B
1 kV (line/earth) 2
DC sup- 0.5 kV (line/line) 1 B
ply:
0.5 kV (line/earth) 1
AC sup- 1 kV (line/line) 2 B
ply:
2 kV (line/earth) 3
EN 61000-4-6 10 V/m 80 % AM 3 A
RF disturbances (0.15 ... 80 MHz)
Emission of interference for industrial areas acc. to EN 61000-6-4 (2001)
Test specification Limit values/[QP]*) Frequency range Distance
EN 55011 (AC supply, 79 dB (µV) 150 kHz ... 500 kHz
conducted)
73 dB (µV) 500 kHz ... 30 MHz
EN 55011 (radiated) 40 dB (µV/m) 30 MHz ... 230 MHz 10 m
47 dB (µV/m) 230 MHz ... 1 GHz 10 m
Emission of interference for residential areas acc. to EN 61000-6-3 (2001)
Test specification Limit values/[QP]*) Frequency range Distance
EN 55022 (AC supply, 66 ... 56 dB (µV) 150 kHz ... 500 kHz
conducted)
56 dB (µV) 500 kHz ... 5 MHz
60 dB (µV) 5 MHz ... 30 MHz
EN 55022 (DC supply/data, 40 ... 30 dB (µA) 150 kHz ... 500 kHz
conducted)
30 dB (µA) 500 kHz ... 30 MHz
EN 55022 (radiated) 30 dB (µV/m) 30 MHz ... 230 MHz 10 m
37 dB (µV/m) 230 MHz ... 1 GHz 10 m
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
Technical Data
Mechanical strength acc. to IEC 61131-2

Test specification Frequency range Limit value
IEC 60068-2-6 vibration 5 Hz ≤ f < 9 Hz 1.75 mm amplitude (permanent)
3.5 mm amplitude (short term)
9 Hz ≤ f < 150 Hz 0.5 g (permanent)
1 g (short term)
Note on vibration test:
a) Frequency change: max. 1 octave/minute
b) Vibration direction: 3 axes
IEC 60068-2-27 shock 15 g
Note on shock test:
a) Type of shock: half sine
b) Shock duration: 11 ms
c) Shock direction: 3x in positive and 3x in negative direc-
tion for each of the three mutually perpendicular axes of the
test specimen
IEC 60068-2-32 free fall 1m
(module in original packing)
*) QP: Quasi Peak
Note
If the technical data of components differ from the values described here, the
technical data shown in the manuals of the respective components shall be
valid.
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
Technical Data
For Products of the WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 with ship specific approvals

supplementary guidelines are valid:
Electromagnetic compatibility
Immunity to interference acc. to Germanischer Lloyd (2003)
Test specification Test values Strength Evaluation
class criteria
IEC 61000-4-2 ESD 6 kV/8 kV (contact/air) 3/3 B
IEC 61000-4-3 10 V/m 80 MHz ... 2 GHz 3 A
electromagnetic fields
IEC 61000-4-4 burst 1 kV/2 kV (data/supply) 2/3 A
IEC 61000-4-5 surge AC/DC 0.5 kV (line/line) 1 A
Supply:
1 kV (line/earth) 2
IEC 61000-4-6 10 V/m 80 % AM 3 A
RF disturbances (0.15 ... 80 MHz)
Type test AF disturbances 3 V, 2 W - A
(harmonic waves)
Type test high voltage 755 V DC - -
1500 V AC
Emission of interference acc. to Germanischer Lloyd (2003)
Test specification Limit values Frequency range Distance
Type test 96 ... 50 dB (µV) 10 kHz ... 150 kHz
(EMC1, conducted)
allows for ship bridge control 60 ... 50 dB (µV) 150 kHz ... 350 kHz
applications
50 dB (µV) 350 kHz ... 30 MHz
Type test 80 ... 52 dB (µV/m) 150 kHz ... 300 kHz 3m

(EMC1, radiated)
52 ... 34 dB (µV/m) 300 kHz ... 30 MHz 3m
allows for ship bridge control
applications 54 dB (µV/m) 30 MHz ... 2 GHz 3m
except: 24 dB (µV/m) 156 MHz ... 165 MHz 3m
Mechanical strength acc. to Germanischer Lloyd (2003)
Test specification Frequency range Limit value
IEC 60068-2-6 vibration 2 Hz ≤ f < 25 Hz ± 1.6 mm amplitude (permanent)
(category A – D)
25 Hz ≤ f < 100 Hz 4 g (permanent)
Note on vibration test:
a) Frequency change: max. 1 octave/minute
b) Vibration direction: 3 axes
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
Technical Data
Range of Required specification Required specification

application emission of interference immunity to interference
Industrial areas EN 61000-6-4 (2001) EN 61000-6-2 (2001)
Residential areas EN 61000-6-3 (2001)*) EN 61000-6-1 (2001)
*) The system meets the requirements on emission of interference in residential areas with
the field bus coupler/controller for:
ETHERNET 750-342/-841/-842/-860
LonWorks 750-319/-819
CANopen 750-337/-837
DeviceNet 750-306/-806
MODBUS 750-312/-314/ -315/ -316
750-812/-814/ -815/ -816
With a special permit, the system can also be implemented with other field bus cou-
plers/controllers in residential areas (housing, commercial and business areas, small-scale
enterprises). The special permit can be obtained from an authority or inspection office. In
Germany, the Federal Office for Post and Telecommunications and its branch offices
issues the permit.
It is possible to use other field bus couplers/controllers under certain boundary condi-
tions. Please contact WAGO Kontakttechnik GmbH & Co. KG.
Maximum power dissipation of the components

Bus modules 0.8 W / bus terminal (total power dissipation, sys-
tem/field)
Field bus coupler/controller 2.0 W / coupler/controller
Warning
The power dissipation of all installed components must not exceed the maxi-
mum conductible power of the housing (cabinet).
When dimensioning the housing, care is to be taken that even under high ex-
ternal temperatures, the temperature inside the housing does not exceed the
permissible ambient temperature of 55 °C.
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
Technical Data
Dimensions
01 02
A A A A A
C C C C C
B B B B B
D D D D D
24V 0V
+ +
100
- -
35
51 12 24
65
64
Side view Dimensions in mm
Fig. 2-2: Dimensions g01xx05e
Note
The illustration shows a standard coupler. For detailed dimensions, please
refer to the technical data of the respective coupler/controller.
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
Manufacturing Number
2.3 Manufacturing Number

The manufacturing number indicates the delivery status directly after produc-
tion.
This number is part of the lateral marking on the component.
In addition, starting from calendar week 43/2000 the manufacturing number is
also printed on the cover of the configuration and programming interface of
the field bus coupler or controller.
PROFIBUS
ITEM-NO.:750-333
PROFIBUS DP 12 MBd /DPV1
55°C max ambient

GL Hansastr. 27
D-32423 Minden
0 1 0 3 0 0 0 2 0 3 - B 0 60 0 60 0 60
AWG 28-14
24V DC
LISTED 22ZA AND 22XM
72072
- 24 V
+ 0V
Power Supply Power Supply
Field Electronic
WAGO - I/O - SYSTEM
FWL
HW
SW
NO
DS
PATENTS PENDING
II 3 GD
DEMKO 02 ATEX132273 X
750-333
EEx nA II T4
Manufacturing Number
01030002 0 1 0 3 0 0 0 2 0 3 - B 0 6 0 6 0 6
03-B
060606
72072
Calendar Year Software Hardware Firmware Loader Internal

week version version version Number
Fig. 2-3: Example: Manufacturing Number of a PROFIBUS field bus coupler 750-333
g01xx15e
The manufacturing number consists of the production week and year, the soft-
ware version (if available), the hardware version of the component, the firm-
ware loader (if available) and further internal information for
WAGO Kontakttechnik GmbH & Co. KG.
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
Component Update
2.4 Component Update

For the case of an Update of one component, the lateral marking on each com-
ponent contains a prepared matrix .
This matrix makes columns available for altogether three updates to the entry
of the current update data, like production order number (NO; starting from
calendar week 13/2004), update date (DS), software version (SW), hardware
version (HW) and the firmware loader version (FWL, if available).
Update Matrix
Current Version data for: 1. Update 2. Update 3. Update

Production Order NO " only starting from
Number calendar week 13/2004
Datestamp DS
Software index SW
Hardware index HW
Firmware loader index FWL " only for coupler/ con-
troller
If the update of a component took place, the current version data are registered
into the columns of the matrix.
Additionally with the update of a field bus coupler or controller also the cover
of the configuration and programming interface of the coupler or controller is
printed on with the current manufacturing and production order number.
The original manufacturing data on the housing of the component remain
thereby.
2.5 Storage, Assembly and Transport

Wherever possible, the components are to be stored in their original packag-
ing. Likewise, the original packaging provides optimal protection during
transport.
When assembling or repacking the components, the contacts must not be

soiled or damaged. The components must be stored and transported in appro-
priate containers/packaging. Thereby, the ESD information is to be regarded.
Statically shielded transport bags with metal coatings are to be used for the
transport of open components for which soiling with amine, amide and sili-
cone has been ruled out, e.g. 3M 1900E.
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
Mechanical Setup
2.6 Mechanical Setup

2.6.1 Installation Position
Along with horizontal and vertical installation, all other installation positions
are allowed.
Attention
In the case of vertical assembly, an end stop has to be mounted as an addi-
tional safeguard against slipping.
WAGO item 249-116 End stop for DIN 35 rail, 6 mm wide
WAGO item 249-117 End stop for DIN 35 rail, 10 mm wide
2.6.2 Total Expansion

The length of the module assembly (including one end module of 12mm
width) that can be connected to the coupler/controller is 780 mm. When as-
sembled, the I/O modules have a maximum length of 768 mm.
Examples:
• 64 I/O modules of 12 mm width can be connected to one cou-

pler/controller.
• 32 I/O modules of 24 mm width can be connected to one cou-

pler/controller.
Exception:
The number of connected I/O modules also depends on which type of cou-
pler/controller is used. For example, the maximum number of I/O modules
that can be connected to a PROFIBUS coupler/controller is 63 without end
module. The maximum total expansion of a node is calculated as follows:
Warning
The maximum total length of a node without coupler/controller must not ex-
ceed 780 mm. Furthermore, restrictions made on certain types of cou-
plers/controllers must be observed (e.g. for PROFIBUS).
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
Mechanical Setup
2.6.3 Assembly onto Carrier Rail

2.6.3.1 Carrier Rail Properties
All system components can be snapped directly onto a carrier rail in accor-
dance with the European standard EN 50022 (DIN 35).
Warning
WAGO Kontakttechnik GmbH & Co. KG supplies standardized carrier rails
that are optimal for use with the I/O system. If other carrier rails are used,
then a technical inspection and approval of the rail by WAGO Kontakttech-
nik GmbH & Co. KG should take place.
Carrier rails have different mechanical and electrical properties. For the opti-
mal system setup on a carrier rail, certain guidelines must be observed:
• The material must be non-corrosive.
• Most components have a contact to the carrier rail to ground electro-

magnetic disturbances. In order to avoid corrosion, this tin-plated carrier
rail contact must not form a galvanic cell with the material of the carrier
rail which generates a differential voltage above 0.5 V (saline solution of
0.3% at 20°C) .
• The carrier rail must optimally support the EMC measures integrated into
the system and the shielding of the bus module connections.
• A sufficiently stable carrier rail should be selected and, if necessary, sev-

eral mounting points (every 20 cm) should be used in order to prevent
bending and twisting (torsion).
• The geometry of the carrier rail must not be altered in order to secure the
safe hold of the components. In particular, when shortening or mounting
the carrier rail, it must not be crushed or bent.
• The base of the I/O components extends into the profile of the carrier rail.
For carrier rails with a height of 7.5 mm, mounting points are to be riveted
under the node in the carrier rail (slotted head captive screws or blind riv-
ets).
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
Mechanical Setup
2.6.3.2 WAGO DIN Rail
WAGO carrier rails meet the electrical and mechanical requirements.
Item Number Description

210-113 /-112 35 x 7.5; 1 mm; steel yellow chromated; slotted/unslotted
210-114 /-197 35 x 15; 1.5 mm; steel yellow chromated; slotted/unslotted
210-118 35 x 15; 2.3 mm; steel yellow chromated; unslotted
210-198 35 x 15; 2.3 mm; copper; unslotted
210-196 35 x 7.5; 1 mm; aluminum; unslotted
2.6.4 Spacing
The spacing between adjacent components, cable conduits, casing and frame
sides must be maintained for the complete field bus node.
Fig. 2-4: Spacing g01xx13x
The spacing creates room for heat transfer, installation or wiring. The spacing
to cable conduits also prevents conducted electromagnetic interferences from
influencing the operation.
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
Mechanical Setup
2.6.5 Plugging and Removal of the Components

Warning
Before work is done on the components, the voltage supply must be turned
off.
In order to safeguard the coupler/controller from jamming, it should be fixed

onto the carrier rail with the locking disc To do so, push on the upper groove
of the locking disc using a screwdriver.
To pull out the field bus coupler/controller, release the locking disc by press-
ing on the bottom groove with a screwdriver and then pulling the orange col-
ored unlocking lug .
Fig. 2-5: Coupler/Controller and unlocking lug g01xx12e
It is also possible to release an individual I/O module from the unit by pulling
an unlocking lug.
Fig. 2-6: removing bus terminal p0xxx01x
Danger
Ensure that an interruption of the PE will not result in a condition which
could endanger a person or equipment!
For planning the ring feeding of the ground wire, please see chapter 2.6.3.
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
Mechanical Setup
2.6.6 Assembly Sequence

All system components can be snapped directly on a carrier rail in accordance
with the European standard EN 50022 (DIN 35).
The reliable positioning and connection is made using a tongue and groove
system. Due to the automatic locking, the individual components are securely
seated on the rail after installing.
Starting with the coupler/controller, the bus modules are assembled adjacent
to each other according to the project planning. Errors in the planning of the
node in terms of the potential groups (connection via the power contacts) are
recognized, as the bus modules with power contacts (male contacts) cannot be
linked to bus modules with fewer power contacts.
Attention
Always link the bus modules with the coupler/controller, and always plug
from above.
Warning
Never plug bus modules from the direction of the end terminal. A ground
wire power contact, which is inserted into a terminal without contacts, e.g. a
4-channel digital input module, has a decreased air and creepage distance to
the neighboring contact in the example DI4.
Always terminate the field bus node with an end module (750-600).
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
Mechanical Setup
2.6.7 Internal Bus/Data Contacts

Communication between the coupler/controller and the bus modules as well as
the system supply of the bus modules is carried out via the internal bus. It is
comprised of 6 data contacts, which are available as self-cleaning gold spring
contacts.
Fig. 2-7: Data contacts p0xxx07x
Warning
Do not touch the gold spring contacts on the I/O modules in order to avoid
soiling or scratching!

The modules are equipped with electronic components that may be destroyed
by electrostatic discharge. When handling the modules, ensure that the envi-
ronment (persons, workplace and packing) is well grounded. Avoid touching
conductive components, e.g. data contacts.
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
Mechanical Setup
2.6.8 Power Contacts

Self-cleaning power contacts , are situated on the side of the components
which further conduct the supply voltage for the field side. These contacts
come as touchproof spring contacts on the right side of the coupler/controller
and the bus module. As fitting counterparts the module has male contacts on
the left side.
Danger
The power contacts are sharp-edged. Handle the module carefully to prevent
injury.
Attention
Please take into consideration that some bus modules have no or only a few
power jumper contacts. The design of some modules does not allow them to
be physically assembled in rows, as the grooves for the male contacts are
closed at the top.
Fig. 2-8: Example for the arrangement of power contacts g0xxx05e
Recommendation
With the WAGO ProServe® Software smartDESIGNER, the structure of a
field bus node can be configured. The configuration can be tested via the in-
tegrated accuracy check.
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
Mechanical Setup
2.6.9 Wire Connection

All components have CAGE CLAMP® connections.
The WAGO CAGE CLAMP® connection is appropriate for solid, stranded

and finely stranded conductors. Each clamping unit accommodates one con-
ductor.
Fig. 2-9: CAGE CLAMP® Connection g0xxx08x
The operating tool is inserted into the opening above the connection. This
opens the CAGE CLAMP®. Subsequently the conductor can be inserted into
the opening. After removing the operating tool, the conductor is safely
clamped.
More than one conductor per connection is not permissible. If several conduc-
tors have to be made at one connection point, then they should be made away
from the connection point using WAGO Terminal Blocks. The terminal blocks
may be jumpered together and a single wire brought back to the I/O module
connection point.
Attention
If it is unavoidable to jointly connect 2 conductors, then a ferrule must be
used to join the wires together.
Ferrule:
Length 8 mm
Nominal cross section max. 1 mm2 for 2 conductors with 0.5 mm2
each
WAGO Product 216-103
or products with comparable properties
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
Power Supply
2.7 Power Supply

2.7.1 Isolation
Within the field bus node, there are three electrically isolated potentials.
• Operational voltage for the field bus interface.
• Electronics of the couplers/controllers and the bus modules (internal bus).
• All bus modules have an electrical isolation between the electronics (inter-
nal bus, logic) and the field electronics. Some digital and analog input
modules have each channel electrically isolated, please see catalog.
Fig. 2-10: Isolation g0xxx01e
Attention
The ground wire connection must be present in each group. In order that all
protective conductor functions are maintained under all circumstances, it is
recommended that a ground wire be connected at the beginning and end of a
potential group. (ring format, please see chapter 2.8.3). Thus, if a bus module
comes loose from a composite during servicing, then the protective conductor
connection is still guaranteed for all connected field devices.
When using a joint power supply unit for the 24 V system supply and the
24 V field supply, the electrical isolation between the internal bus and the
field level is eliminated for the potential group.
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
Power Supply
2.7.2 System Supply

2.7.2.1 Connection
The WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 requires a 24 V direct current system supply

(-15 % or +20 %). The power supply is provided via the coupler/controller
and, if necessary, in addition via the internal system supply modules
(750-613). The voltage supply is reverse voltage protected.
Attention
The use of an incorrect supply voltage or frequency can cause severe damage
to the component.
Fig. 2-11: System Supply g0xxx02e
The direct current supplies all internal system components, e.g. cou-
pler/controller electronics, field bus interface and bus modules via the internal
bus (5 V system voltage). The 5 V system voltage is electrically connected to
the 24 V system supply.
Fig. 2-12: System Voltage g0xxx06e
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
Power Supply
Attention
Resetting the system by switching on and off the system supply, must take
place simultaneously for all supply modules (coupler/controller and
750-613).
2.7.2.2 Alignment
Recommendation
A stable network supply cannot be taken for granted always and everywhere.
Therefore, regulated power supply units should be used in order to guarantee
the quality of the supply voltage.
The supply capacity of the coupler/controller or the internal system supply

module (750-613) can be taken from the technical data of the components.
Internal current consumption*) Current consumption via system voltage:

5 V for electronics of the bus modules and cou-
pler/controller
Residual current for bus termi- Available current for the bus modules. Provided by
nals*) the bus power supply unit. See coupler/controller
and internal system supply module (750-613)
*)
cf. catalogue W4 Volume 3, manuals or internet
Example Coupler 750-301:
internal current consumption:350 mA at 5 V
residual current for
bus modules: 1650 mA at 5 V
sum I(5V) total : 2000 mA at 5 V
The internal current consumption is indicated in the technical data for each
bus terminal. In order to determine the overall requirement, add together the
values of all bus modules in the node.
Attention
If the sum of the internal current consumption exceeds the residual current
for bus modules, then an internal system supply module (750-613) must be
placed before the module where the permissible residual current was ex-
ceeded.
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
Power Supply
Example: A node with a PROFIBUS Coupler 750-333 consists of 20 relay mod-

ules (750-517) and 10 digital input modules (750-405).
Current consumption:
20* 90 mA = 1800 mA
10* 2 mA = 20 mA
Sum 1820 mA
The coupler can provide 1650 mA for the bus modules. Consequently,
an internal system supply module (750-613), e.g. in the middle of the
node, should be added.
Recommendation
With the WAGO ProServe® Software smartDESIGNER, the assembly of a
field bus node can be configured. The configuration can be tested via the in-
tegrated accuracy check.
The maximum input current of the 24 V system supply is 500 mA. The exact
electrical consumption (I(24 V)) can be determined with the following formulas:
Coupler/Controller
I(5 V) total = Sum of all the internal current consumption of the connected
bus modules
+ internal current consumption coupler/controller
750-613
I(5 V) total = Sum of all the internal current consumption of the connected
bus modules
Input current I(24 V) = 5 V / 24 V * I(5 V) total / η

η = 0.87 (at nominal load)
Attention
If the electrical consumption of the power supply point for the 24 V-system
supply exceeds 500 mA, then the cause may be an improperly aligned node
or a defect.
During the test, all outputs, in particular those of the relay modules, must be
active.
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
Power Supply
2.7.3 Field Supply

2.7.3.1 Connection
Sensors and actuators can be directly connected to the relevant channel of the
bus module in 1/4 conductor connection technology. The bus module supplies
power to the sensors and actuators. The input and output drivers of some bus
modules require the field side supply voltage.
The coupler/controller provides field side power (DC 24V). In this case it is a
passive power supply without protection equipment.
Power supply modules are available for other potentials, e. g. AC 230 V. Like-
wise, with the aid of the power supply modules, various potentials can be set
up. The connections are linked in pairs with a power contact.
Fig. 2-13: Field Supply (Sensor/Actuator) g0xxx03e
The supply voltage for the field side is automatically passed to the next mod-
ule via the power jumper contacts when assembling the bus modules .
The current load of the power contacts must not exceed 10 A on a continual
basis. The current load capacity between two connection terminals is identical
to the load capacity of the connection wires.
By inserting an additional power supply module, the field supply via the
power contacts is disrupted. From there a new power supply occurs which
may also contain a new voltage potential.
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
Power Supply
Attention
Some bus modules have no or very few power contacts (depending on the I/O
function). Due to this, the passing through of the relevant potential is dis-
rupted. If a field supply is required for subsequent bus modules, then a power
supply module must be used.
Note the data sheets of the bus modules.
In the case of a node setup with different potentials, e.g. the alteration from
DC 24 V to AC 230V, a spacer module should be used. The optical separa-
tion of the potentials acts as a warning to heed caution in the case of wiring
and maintenance works. Thus, the results of wiring errors can be prevented.
2.7.3.2 Fusing
Internal fusing of the field supply is possible for various field voltages via an
appropriate power supply module.
750-601 24 V DC, Supply/Fuse

750-609 230 V AC, Supply/Fuse
750-615 120 V AC, Supply/Fuse
750-610 24 V DC, Supply/Fuse/Diagnosis
750-611 230 V AC, Supply/Fuse/Diagnosis
Fig. 2-14: Supply module with fuse carrier (Example 750-610) g0xxx09x
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
Power Supply
Warning
In the case of power supply modules with fuse holders, only fuses with a
maximum dissipation of 1.6 W (IEC 127) must be used.
For UL approved systems only use UL approved fuses.
In order to insert or change a fuse, or to switch off the voltage in succeeding

bus modules, the fuse holder may be pulled out. In order to do this, use a
screwdriver for example, to reach into one of the slits (one on both sides) and
pull out the holder.
Fig. 2-15: Removing the fuse carrier p0xxx05x
Lifting the cover to the side opens the fuse carrier.
Fig. 2-16: Opening the fuse carrier p0xxx03x
Fig. 2-17: Change fuse p0xxx04x
After changing the fuse, the fuse carrier is pushed back into its original posi-
tion.
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
Power Supply
Alternatively, fusing can be done externally. The fuse modules of the WAGO
series 281 and 282 are suitable for this purpose.
Fig. 2-18: Fuse modules for automotive fuses, series 282 pf66800x
Fig. 2-19: Fuse modules with pivotable fuse carrier, series 281 pe61100x
Fig. 2-20: Fuse modules, series 282 pf12400x
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
Power Supply
2.7.4 Supplementary Power Supply Regulations

The WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 can also be used in shipbuilding or offshore
and onshore areas of work (e. g. working platforms, loading plants). This is
demonstrated by complying with the standards of influential classification
companies such as Germanischer Lloyd and Lloyds Register.
Filter modules for 24-volt supply are required for the certified operation of the
system.
Item No. Name Description

750-626 Supply filter Filter module for system supply and field supply (24 V,
0 V), i.e. for field bus coupler/controller and bus power
supply (750-613)
750-624 Supply filter Filter module for the 24 V- field supply
(750-602, 750-601, 750-610)
Therefore, the following power supply concept must be absolutely complied

with.
Fig. 2-21: Power supply concept g01xx11e
Note
Another potential power terminal 750-601/602/610 must only be used behind
the filter terminal 750-626 if the protective earth conductor is needed on the
lower power contact or if a fuse protection is required.
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
Power Supply
2.7.5 Supply Example

Attention
The system supply and the field supply should be separated in order to ensure
bus operation in the event of a short-circuit on the actuator side.
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
a) b) 1) 1) d)
c)
750-400 750-410 750-401 750-613 750-616 750-612 750-512 750-512 750-513 750-616 750-610 750-552 750-630 750-600
2) 2)
Shield (screen) bus
Main ground bus

10 A
System
Supply
230V
24V
Field
Supply
230V
24V
Field
Supply 1) Separation module
recommended
2) Ring-feeding
10 A recommended
a) Power Supply
on coupler / controller
via external Supply
Module
b) Internal System
Supply Module
c) Supply Module
passive
d) Supply Module
with fuse carrier/
diagnostics
Fig. 2-22: Supply example g0xxx04e
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
Power Supply
2.7.6 Power Supply Unit

The WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 requires a 24 V direct current system supply
with a maximum deviation of -15 % or +20 %.
Recommendation
A stable network supply cannot be taken for granted always and everywhere.
Therefore, regulated power supply units should be used in order to guarantee
the quality of the supply voltage.
A buffer (200 µF per 1 A current load) should be provided for brief voltage
dips. The I/O system buffers for approx 1 ms.
The electrical requirement for the field supply is to be determined individually

for each power supply point. Thereby all loads through the field devices and
bus modules should be considered. The field supply as well influences the bus
modules, as the inputs and outputs of some bus modules require the voltage of
the field supply.
Attention
The system supply and the field supply should be isolated from the power
supplies in order to ensure bus operation in the event of short circuits on the
actuator side.
WAGO products Description

Item No.
787-903 Primary switched-mode, DC 24 V, 5 A
wide input voltage range AC 85-264 V
PFC (Power Factor Correction)
PFC (Power Factor Correction)
Rail-mounted modules with universal mounting carrier
288-809 AC 115 V / DC 24 V; 0,5 A
288-810 AC 230 V / DC 24 V; 0,5 A
288-812 AC 230 V / DC 24 V; 2 A
288-813 AC 115 V / DC 24 V; 2 A
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
Grounding
2.8 Grounding
2.8.1 Grounding the DIN Rail
2.8.1.1 Framework Assembly
When setting up the framework, the carrier rail must be screwed together with
the electrically conducting cabinet or housing frame. The framework or the
housing must be grounded. The electronic connection is established via the
screw. Thus, the carrier rail is grounded.
Attention
Care must be taken to ensure the flawless electrical connection between the
carrier rail and the frame or housing in order to guarantee sufficient ground-
ing.
2.8.1.2 Insulated Assembly
Insulated assembly has been achieved when there is constructively no direct

conduction connection between the cabinet frame or machine parts and the
carrier rail. Here the earth must be set up via an electrical conductor.
The connected grounding conductor should have a cross section of at least

4 mm2.
Recommendation
The optimal insulated setup is a metallic assembly plate with grounding con-
nection with an electrical conductive link with the carrier rail.
The separate grounding of the carrier rail can be easily set up with the aid of
the WAGO ground wire terminals.
Item No. Description

283-609 1-conductor ground (earth) terminal block make an automatic contact to
the carrier rail; conductor cross section: 0.2 -16 mm2
Note: Also order the end and intermediate plate (283-320).
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
Grounding
2.8.2 Grounding Function

The grounding function increases the resistance against disturbances from
electro-magnetic interferences. Some components in the I/O system have a
carrier rail contact that dissipates electro-magnetic disturbances to the carrier
rail.
Fig. 2-23: Carrier rail contact g0xxx10e
Attention
Care must be taken to ensure the direct electrical connection between the
carrier rail contact and the carrier rail.
The carrier rail must be grounded.
For information on carrier rail properties, please see chapter 2.6.3.2.
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
Grounding
2.8.3 Grounding Protection

For the field side, the ground wire is connected to the lowest connection ter-
minals of the power supply module. The ground connection is then connected
to the next module via the Power Jumper Contact (PJC). If the bus module has
the lower power jumper contact, then the ground wire connection of the field
devices can be directly connected to the lower connection terminals of the bus
module.
Attention
Should the ground conductor connection of the power jumper contacts within
the node become disrupted, e. g. due to a 4-channel bus terminal, the ground
connection will need to be re-established.
The ring feeding of the grounding potential will increase the system safety.
When one bus module is removed from the group, the grounding connection
will remain intact.
The ring feeding method has the grounding conductor connected to the begin-
ning and end of each potential group.
Fig. 2-24: Ring-feeding g0xxx07e
Attention
The regulations relating to the place of assembly as well as the national regu-
lations for maintenance and inspection of the grounding protection must be
observed.
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
Shielding (Screening)
2.9 Shielding (Screening)

2.9.1 General
The shielding of the data and signal conductors reduces electromagnetic inter-
ferences thereby increasing the signal quality. Measurement errors, data trans-
mission errors and even disturbances caused by overvoltage can be avoided.
Attention
Constant shielding is absolutely required in order to ensure the technical
specifications in terms of the measurement accuracy.
The data and signal conductors should be separated from all high-voltage
cables.
The cable shield should be potential. With this, incoming disturbances can be
easily diverted.
The shielding should be placed over the entrance of the cabinet or housing in
order to already repel disturbances at the entrance.
2.9.2 Bus Conductors

The shielding of the bus conductor is described in the relevant assembly
guidelines and standards of the bus system.
2.9.3 Signal Conductors

Bus modules for most analog signals along with many of the interface bus
modules include a connection for the shield.
Note
For a better shield performance, the shield should have previously been
placed over a large area. The WAGO shield connection system is suggested
for such an application.
This suggestion is especially applicable if the equipment can have even cur-
rent or high impulse formed currents running through (for example initiated
by atmospheric discharge).
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
Assembly Guidelines/Standards
2.9.4 WAGO Shield (Screen) Connecting System

The WAGO Shield Connecting system includes a shield clamping saddle, a
collection of rails and a variety of mounting feet. Together these allow many
different possibilities. See catalog W4 volume 3 chapter 10.
Fig. 2-25: WAGO Shield (Screen) Connecting System p0xxx08x, p0xxx09x, and p0xxx10x
Fig. 2-26: Application of the WAGO Shield (Screen) Connecting System p0xxx11x
2.10 Assembly Guidelines/Standards

DIN 60204, Electrical equipping of machines
DIN EN 50178 Equipping of high-voltage systems with electronic

components (replacement for VDE 0160)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
Field Bus Coupler 750-333 • 49
Description
3 Field Bus Coupler 750-333

3.1 Description
The Fieldbus Coupler 750-333 displays the peripheral data of all I/O modules
in the WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 on PROFIBUS DP.
In the initialization phase the fieldbus coupler determines the physical struc-
ture of the node and creates a process image from this with all inputs and out-
puts. I/O modules with a bit width smaller than 8 can be combined to form one
byte in order to optimize the address space.
In addition the possibility exists to deactivate projected I/O modules. In this

manner the physical structure of the node can be individually designed with
regard to the peripheral signals, without undertaking any changes to an already
existing control application. This is done by correspondingly parametering the
modules with the aid of the planning environment (for instance, WAGO
NETCON, COM PROFIBUS, STEP7, ProfiMap, etc.)
The diagnostics concept is based on an identification and channel based diag-

nostics in accordance with EN 50170-2 (PROFIBUS). Thus it is not necessary
to program modules for the evaluation of manufacturer specific diagnostics in-
formation.
• Process data length

Max. 244 byte input process image (128 byte up to SW 02)
Max. 244 byte output process image (128 byte up to SW 02)
• Automatic recognition of transmission speed on the PROFIBUS from

9.6 kBd to 12 MBd
• All I/O modules from the WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 are supported
• Configuration modules can be parameterized as wildcards.
• Parameterizable substitute value for each channel
• D-Sub 9 pole bus connection
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
50 • Field Bus Coupler 750-333
Hardware
3.2 Hardware
3.2.1 View
Fig. 3.2.1-1: Fieldbus Coupler 750-333 PROFIBUS DP/V1 g033300e
The fieldbus coupler comprises of:
• Supply module with internal system supply module for the system supply
as well as power jumper contacts for the field supply via I/O module as-
semblies.
• Fieldbus interface with D-Sub 9 socket
• 2 rotary switches for the station address (decimal)
• Display elements (LED) for status display of the operation, the bus com-
munication, the operating voltages as well as for fault messages and diag-
nostics
• Configuration interface
• Electronics for communication with the I/O modules (internal bus) and the
fieldbus interface
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
Hardware
3.2.2 Device Supply

The supply is made via terminal blocks with CAGE CLAMP® connection.
The device supply is intended both for the system and the field units.
Interface
Fieldbus
I/O Modules
24 V
1 5 24 V
24 V / 0 V 10 nF 5V Electronic
5V
0V
2 6
24 V
24 V
Electronic
3 7
Fieldbus
0V Interface
0V 10 nF
4 8
750-333
Fig. 3.2.2-2: Device supply g033301e
The integrated internal system supply module generates the necessary voltage
to supply the electronics and the connected I/O modules.
The fieldbus interface is supplied with electrically isolated voltage from the
internal system supply module.
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
Hardware
3.2.3 Fieldbus Connection

The PROFIBUS interface is designed as a Sub-D connection in accordance
with the US Standard EIA RS 485 for cable linked data transmission.
Fig. 3.2.3-3: Bus connection, Sub-D female connector g012102x
Pin Signal Description

3 RxD(TxD)-P Transmit (receive) signal
4 RTS Ready To Send
5 GND Supply ground (earth)
6 Vcc Voltage supply
8 RxD(TxD) N Transmit (receive) signal
The galvanic isolation between the fieldbus system and the electronics is
achieved by means of DC/DC converters and optocouplers in the fieldbus in-
terface.
The connection point is mechanically lowered permitting fitting in an 80 mm

high switch box once connected.
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
Hardware
3.2.4 Display Elements

The operating condition of the fieldbus coupler or node is signaled via light
diodes (LED).
Fig. 3.2.4-4: Display elements 750-333 g012106x
LED Color Meaning

RUN green The RUN-LED indicates to the operator if the fieldbus coupler is
correctly initialized.
BF red The BF-LED indicates whether the communication functions via
the PROFIBUS.
DIA red The DIA-LED indicates an external diagnostics. The signaling is
not supported by all devices or must be explicitly enabled for each
channel.
BUS red The BUS-LED signals a projecting fault with the PROFIBUS DP
projecting of the station.
IO red / green / The I/O-LED indicates the internal bus communication and sig-
orange nals faults encountered.
A green Status of the operating voltage system
C or B*) green Status of the operating voltage – power jumper contacts
*)
LED-position depends on manufacturing
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
Hardware
3.2.5 Station Address

The station address (decimal) is determined using two rotary switches on the
electronic module.
ADDRESS
x1
901
78
23
456
x10
901
78
23
456
Fig. 3.2.5-5: Setting the station address g012108x
The switch „x1“ determines the units position of the address. The switch
„x10“ determines the tens position of the address. Valid station addresses are
between 1 and 99. The coupler also permits the station address 0.
The station address is taken over by the fieldbus coupler after switching on the
device (initialization phase). Adjustments of the switch have no effect during
operation.
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
Hardware
3.2.6 Configuration Interface

The configuration interface used for the communication with
WAGO-I/O-CHECK or for firmware upload is located behind the cover flap.
open
flap
Configuration
interface
Fig. 3.2.6-6: Configuration interface g01xx06e
The communication cable (750-920) is connected to the 4 pole header.
Warning
The communication cable 750-920 must not be connected or disconnected
while the coupler/controller is powered on!
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
Operating System
3.3 Operating System

Following the configuration of the master activation and the electrical installa-
tion if the fieldbus station can start up the system.
After switching on the supply voltage the coupler performs a self test of all
functions of its devices, the I/O module and the fieldbus interface. Following
this the I/O modules and the present configuration is determined, whereby an
external not visible list is generated. This list includes an input and an output
area on which is represented the fieldbus RAM of the protocol chip.
In the event of a fault the coupler changes to the "Stop" condition. The
I/O-LED flashes red. After a fault free start up the coupler changes to the
"Fieldbus start" status. The internal data bus cycles are activated once the data
transmission rate used on the PROFIBUS (auto detect) is detected and the
I/O-LED lights up green.
Fig. 3.2.6-7: Operating system 750-333 g012113e
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
Process Image
3.4 Process Image

3.4.1 Local Process Image
After switching on, the coupler recognizes all I/O modules plugged into the
node, which supply or wait for data (data width/bit width > 0). In nodes analog
and digital I/O modules can be mixed.
Attention
For the number of input and output bits or bytes of the individually activated
on I/O modules please refer to the corresponding I/O module description.
The coupler produces an internal process image from the data width and the
type of type of I/O module as well as the position of the I/O modules in the
node. It is divided into an input and an output data area.
The data of the I/O modules is separated for the local input and output process
image in the sequence of their position after the coupler in the individual proc-
ess image.
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
Process Image
3.4.2 Allocation of the Input and Output Data

The process data is exchanged via the PROFIBUS with the higher ranking
controls (master). A maximum of 244 bytes (128 bytes up to SW 02) of data is
transmitted from the master to the node. The coupler responds by returning a
maximum of 244 bytes (128 bytes up to SW 02) input data to the master.
Modules are configured according to their physical arrangement when project-

ing the node, which can be taken over from a hardware catalogue of the con-
figuration programs. The information covering the possible modules is con-
tained in the GSD files.
Fig. 3.4.2-8: Allocation of the input and output data g012117e
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
Process Image
3.4.3 Process Data Structure for PROFIBUS-DP

With some I/O modules, the structure of the process data is fieldbus specific.
Depending on how the coupler is parameterized, the status bytes (S), control
bytes (C) and data bytes (D0...Dn) of the byte or word orientated modules are
transmitted via PROFIBUS in Motorola or Intel format.
More Information
You can find the fieldbus specific process data structure for all I/O Modules
of the WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 and 753 in the chapter 5.2, “Design of the
Process Data for PROFIBUS-DP”.
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
Configuration
3.5 Configuration
3.5.1 Configuration of the I/O Modules
The configuration of the node is performed in accordance with the physical
requirements of the fieldbus coupler and I/O modules.
The fieldbus coupler or the process data channel is to be configured on the

first slot.
The other slots are configured in accordance with the physical requirements of
the I/O modules. Here only I/O modules with process data are relevant. The
supply modules without diagnostics, bus internal system supply module, the
field side connection module, the distance and the termination module are to
be ignored for the configuration because they do not provide any process data.
One or two modules are entered in the hardware catalogue for each I/O mod-
ule.
The module appear as 750-xyz ..., for example 750-400 2 DI/24 V DC/3.0 ms.
For all binary modules an addition is made to the entry *750-xyz .... When us-
ing these denominations the coupler adds the binary information to the current
module in a byte which was previously opened with 750-xyz .... The use of a
„*“ module is only permitted when the number of channels is less than or
equal to the remaining bits in the previously opened byte. The binary I/O mod-
ules combined in a byte can be arranged at separate locations, i.e. binary I/O
modules with a different signal type or also byte orientated I/O modules can
be connected between.
In order to be able to individually arrange the scope of connected periphery

units independent of the control program, it is possible to parameterize I/O
modules in the configuration table as „not connected“. In this manner process
data still present is filtered for the individual module and not transferred on
the PROFIBUS DP to and read by the periphery units.
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
Configuration
3.5.2 GSD Files

Under PROFIBUS DP the features of the modules are defined by the manufac-
turers in the form of a GSD file (unit basic data).
Structure, content and coding of this unit main data are standardized and made
available to the user allowing to project optional DP slaves using the project
units of various manufacturers.
More information
The PNO provides information about the GSD files of all listed manufactur-
ers.
GSD and symbol files for the configuration of the I/O modules are available
on the CD ROM ELECTRONICC Tools and Docs (Item-No.: 0888-0412)
or in the internet under: www.wago.com
GSD file for I/O-Module 750-333 WAGOB754.GSD
The GSD file is read by the configuration software and the corresponding set-
tings transmitted. For the necessary inputs and handling steps please refer to
the software user manuals.
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
Configuration
3.5.3 Identification Bytes

The identification bytes contain information about the design and structure of
the unit inputs and outputs. For projecting each I/O module, or each channel is
allocated an identification (module).
Bit Meaning
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Data length
0 0 0 0 1 byte or word
0 0 0 1 2 bytes or words
... ... ... ... ...
Input and output
0 0 Spec. identification formats
0 1 Input
1 0 Output
1 1 Input and output
Format
0 0 = Byte structure
1 1 = Word structure
Consistence over
0 Byte or word
1 Total length
For the special identification format (bit 4 and 5 = 00) is defined:
Bit Meaning
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Manufacturer specific data length
0 0 0 0 0 = No manufacturer specific data
0 0 0 1
... ... ... ...
1 ... 14 = Manufacturer specific data length
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
15 = No manufacturer specific data are following
Input and output
Input and output
0 0 Blank position
0 1 a length byte for inputs follows
1 0 a length byte for outputs follows
1 1 a length byte for inputs and outputs follows
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
Configuration
The length bytes are structured as follows:
Bit Meaning
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Data length
0 0 0 0 1 0 1 byte or word
... ... ... ... ... ... ...
1 1 1 1 1 1 63 bytes or 63 words
Format
0 0 = Byte structure
1 1 = Word structure
Consistence over
0 Byte or word
1 Total length
Since the adoption of the DP/V1 specification, it is possible to add data type
information to the process data that is described via the special identification
byte. This is done using the manufacturer specific data.
The identification is structured as follows:
Octet 1
Bit Meaning
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Manufacturer specific data length
0 0 0 0 0 = No manufacturer specific data
0 0 0 1
... ... ... ...
1 ... 14 = Manufacturer specific data length
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
15 = No manufacturer specific data is following
Input and output
Input and output
0 0 Blank position
0 1 a length byte for inputs follows
1 0 a length byte for outputs follows
1 1 a length byte for inputs and outputs follows
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
Configuration
The length bytes are structured as follows:
Octet 2 / 3
Bit Meaning
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Data length
0 0 0 0 1 0 1 byte or word
... ... ... ... ... ... ...
1 1 1 1 1 1 63 byte or 63 words
Format
0 Byte structure
Consistence over
1 Total length
This is how the data type is coded in the following octets:
Octet 3or 4 to 16 or 17
Bit Meaning
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Data type
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 Boolean
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 2 Integer8
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 3 Integer16
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 4 Integer32
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 5 Unsigned8
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 6 Unsigned16
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 7 Unsigned32
0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 8 Floating Point
0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 9 Visible String
0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 10 Octet String
0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 11 Date
0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 12 Time Of Day
0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 13 Time Difference
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 14 Time Of Day
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 15 Time Difference
0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 16
- - - - - - - - – reserved
0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 31
0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 32 Array Of Boolean
0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 33 Array Of Integer8
0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 34 Array Of Integer16
0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 35 Array Of Integer32
0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 36 Array Of Unsigned8
0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 39 Array Of Floating Point
This information is saved in the GSD file. During configuring the I/O module
is selected in accordance with the article number using the configuration soft-
ware in the hardware catalogue.
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
Configuration
Modules are compiled in the table to make things simpler.
Module Description Example

Module Configuring digital I/O modules: 750-400 2 DI/24 V DC/3.0 ms
A new byte is generated in the respective
process image. The binary information of
the I/O modules is mapped on the least
significant bit of the byte.
Configuring analog I/O modules: 750-461 2 AI/RTD
Only the user data required for operating 750-550 2 AO/0-10 V
the I/O module are mapped in the appro-
priate process image area (input and/or
output process image).
*-Module Configuring digital I/O modules: *750-400 2 DI/24 V DC/3.0 ms
A byte that as previously been generated
by the module is filled with the binary
information of the I/O module.
RA-Module Configuration of complex, especially 750-461 2 AI/RTD RA
analog I/O modules: 750-550 2 AO/0-10 V RA
Input and output information, including
CONTROL and STATUS byte, are
mapped in the respective process image
area. This way, the register structure of
the respective I/O modules can be ac-
cessed when parameterization is done via
cyclic process data exchange.
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
Configuration
3.5.3.1 Bus Coupler Modules
Order No. Description Module

750-333 No process data channel 0x00
750-333 2 byte process data channel 0xB1
3.5.3.2 I/O-Modules
Note
You can find a list of all I/O modules with all possible identification bytes in
chapter 5.3, “PROFIBUS Identification Bytes of I/O Modules”.
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
Configuration
3.5.4 Example
The allocation should become clear by way of a fieldbus node with a coupler
and 17 I/O modules.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
DI DI DI DI DI DI AI AI DO DO DO DO DO DO DO DO AO AO AI AI AO AO AI AI DO DO
750-333
402 402 402 452 602 504 504 504 504 602 550 452 550 452 602 504 600
PROFIBUS
Fig. 3.5.4-9: Example application g012115x
No. I/O Module Module PI Master *

Identification
Inputs Outputs
1 Digital input 750-402 4 DI/24 V DC/3.0 ms EB12.0
Digital input 0x10 EB12.1
Digital input EB12.2
2 Digital input *750-402 4 DI/24 V DC/3.0 ms EB12.4
3 Digital input 750-402 4 DI/24 V DC/3.0 ms EB13.0
4 Analog input 750-452 2 AI/0-20 mA/diff. EW0
Analog input 0x51 EW2
5 Potential supply Potential supply --- ---
6 Digital output 750-504 4 DO/24 V DC/0.5 A AB8.0
Digital output 0x20 AB8.1
Digital output AB8.2
7 Digital output *750-504 4 DO/24 V DC/0.5 A AB8.4
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
Configuration
No. I/O Module Module PI Master *

Identification
Inputs Outputs
9 Digital output *750-504 4 DO/24 V DC/0.5 A AB9.4
11 Analog output 750-550 2 AO/0-10 V AW0
Analog output 0x61 AW2
13 Analog output 750-550 2 AO/0-10 V AW4
Analog output 0x61 AW6
17 End module End module --- ---
* The master addresses listed in the table correspond to the allocation of the process data
given in the master configuration.
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
Parameterizing the Coupler
3.6 Parameterizing the Coupler

Before a data exchange is possible between the master and slaves a parame-
terization is necessary in addition to the configuration.
The extended parameters (Extended User_Prm_Data) is available as a select-

able text in the configuration programs using the GSD files.
Description Value Meaning

Restart the internal bus after a Restart of the internal bus following a fault,
fault such as missing termination module,
POWER ON RESET*) after interruption of the I/O module supply
AUTORESET immediately after overcoming I/O module fault
I/O module diagnostics The diagnostics information about all diagnos-
tics capable I/O modules, with which the diag-
nostics is released are
released*) transferred to PROFIBUS DP master
locked not transferred to PROFIBUS DP master
Internal bus extension The internal data bus extension operates accord-
EEPROM-Allocation*) ing to the setting made in EEPROM using the
"WAGO Extension Settings" tool.
is not used is excluded
is used is possible
Process value display Word or double word orientated process data is
transferred to the PROFIBUS DP master in:
INTEL „Little Endian Format“
MOTOROLA*) „Big Endian Format“
Behavior in case of a In the case of a fault with the PROFIBUS DP
PROFIBUS DP fault communication the status of the inserted output
periphery can be influenced in various manners:
Stop internal bus transmis- the process data exchange of the internal bus is
sion stopped, all outputs drop out after a module
specific monitoring time of 100 ms
Set start image to zero all outputs are reset immediately
Freeze starting image all outputs contain the last status before the fault
Write substitute values*) all outputs switch a parameter substitute value
Reaction to internal bus faults In the case of a fault with the internal communi-
cation between the fieldbus coupler and I/O
modules, such as, e. g. no termination module,
Stop PROFIBUS data the data exchange with the PROFIBUS master is
exchange*) stopped.
Set start image to zero the input information is set to zero
Freeze starting image the input information before the fault is main-
tained
Starting via DPV1-Channel The cyclic data exchange
locked *) is performed after successful parameterization
and configuration
released is performed after enabling via the acyclic C1 or
C2 channel
Module slot allocation Assigning the slots for acyclic read and write is
performed
DPV1-compatible*) according to the DPV1 format
S7-compatible according to the S7 format
*)
Default settings
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
The complete parameter record encompasses 26 parameterization bytes. The

first 10 bytes are laid down by the DP and DPV1 standard. The others contain
manufacturer specific parameters.
Byte No. Bit No. Value Meaning

Standard Parameters
0 0-7 Stations status (see EN 50170)
1 0-7 2-255 Watchdog factor 1
2 0-7 2-255 Watchdog factor 2
Watchdog:
The reaction monitoring is determined in accordance with the
Watchdog_Factor_1 x Watchdog_Factor_2 x 10 ms (1 ms)
3 0-7 11-255 Min TSDR,
Earliest time in TBit after which the slave may answer
4 0-7 183, 0xB7 Manufacturer code (high byte)
5 0-7 84, 0x54 Manufacturer code (low byte)
6 0-7 Group allocation,
Broad and multicast telegrams (SYNC, FREEZE)
7 0-7 DPV1 status 1 (see EN 50170)
Manufacturer Parameters
10 0-7 0 Table 0, register 0 LB, reserved
11 0-7 0 Table 0, register 0 HB, reserved
12 0-7 0 Table 0, register 1 LB, reserved
14 Table 0, register 2 LB
0 0 Module diagnostics locked
1*) Module diagnostics released
1 0 Internal bus restart after fault: POWER-ON-RESET
1*) Internal bus restart after fault: AUTORESET
2-7 0 reserved
16 Table 0, register 3 LB
0-2 '011' reserved
3 0 Data format byte orientated I/O modules: INTEL
1*) Data format byte orientated I/O modules: MOTOROLA
4-7 '1100' reserved
17 Table 0, register 3 HB
0-2 Reaction to fieldbus fault:
'000' - Internal bus transmission stopped
'001' - Set output image to zero
'010' - Freeze output image
'011' *) - Write substitute values
'100' - '111' - not possible
3-5 Reaction to internal bus fault:
'000' *) - Leave data exchange
'001' - Set input image to zero
'010' - Freeze input image
'011' - '111' - not possible
6-7 '00' reserved
18 0-7 '1100.0011' Table 0, register 4 LB, reserved
19 0-7 '0111.1111' Table 0, register 4 HB, reserved
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
Byte No. Bit No. Value Meaning

21 Table 100, register 0 HB, reserved
0-3 '0001' reserved
4 Starting via DPV1-Channel
0 - released
1 - locked
5 Module slot allocation
0 - DPV1-compatible
1 - S7-compatible
6-7 '00' reserved
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
Configuration and Parameterization of I/O Modules
3.7 Configuration and Parameterization of I/O Modules

3.7.1 Process Data Channel of Bus coupler
The process data channel serves for the communication between the coupler
and the higher ranking systems (Master or projecting and diagnostics PC).
This channel is allocated to the coupler and can not be used. When designing
the node, this position should therefore always show “750-333 No process
data channel”.
Module Identification Identification

hex dec.
750-333 No process data channel 0x00 0
750-333 2 byte process data channel 0xB1 177
Process Image Input Image Output Image

in [Byte] in [Byte]
Internal bus 0 0
PROFIBUS DP 2 2
Parameter Value Meaning

- - -
*)
Default settings
Parameter
Offset Information
0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1
2 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 Reg 0
Intf
RegIntf1 0 Register Interface switched off (750-333 No process data channel)

1 Register Interface switched on (750-333 2 byte process data channel)
italic Cannot be changed
Attention
One of these configuration modules has to be planned for the first module
slot of the configuration table. Otherwise, the bus coupler signals a configura-
tion error on the BUS-LED and in the status signal of the PROFIBUS diag-
nostics if it was released when parametering the bus coupler.
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
3.7.2 Parameterization of I/O Modules
Note
You can find a list of all I/O modules with all possible parameters in chapter
5.4, “Configuration and Parameterization of I/O Modules”.
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
Diagnostics
3.8 Diagnostics
The slave diagnostics of the bus coupler comprises of a 6 byte standard diag-
nostics, a 9 byte identification diagnostics, a 7 byte device status and an up to
42 byte channel based diagnostics.
In the reply telegram of the diagnostics selection the identification based diag-
nostics and the device status are transmitted together with the standard diag-
nostics. This can be followed by up to 14 channel based diagnostics messages
(3 byte per message).
Byte
0 Station status 1
1 Station status 2
2 Station status 3
3 DP-Master-Address
4 Manufacturer’s identifi-
5 cation
6
7 Diagnostics
based on module
: : (8 byte)
14 :
15
16
Device status
: :
21 :
22
Diagnostics
23 based on channel
Status
(3 byte per channel)
24 Parameterization
(5 byte per module)
:
:
: :
63 :
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
Diagnostics
3.8.1 Station Status 1 to 3

see EN 50170
3.8.2 PROFIBUS DP Master Address

The PROFIBUS DP master address is located in byte 3 of the slave diagnos-
tics and includes the address of the master which has parameterized the station
and which has read and write access.
3.8.3 Manufacturer‘s Identification

The manufacturer’s identification is located in byte 4 and 5 and includes a 16
bit code, which serves for the identification of the device or the device class.
3.8.4 Identification Based Diagnostics

The identification based diagnostics comprises of a bit field, which contains
one bit of information for each connected module. The individual bit provides
evidence about the current operating status. A 0 means no fault, a 1 indicates a
faulty module condition. The bus coupler can be equipped with up to 63 mod-
ules, so that the identification based diagnostics including the header covers 9
bytes from byte 6 to byte 14.
Byte Information Meaning

6 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 Header byte
(9 byte module based diagnostics
incl. header)
7 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Module diagnostics allocation:
8 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 Bus coupler (bit 20)
9 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 I/O module (bit 2n, n ∈ {1, 2, ... 64 })
10 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25
11 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33
12 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41
13 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49
14 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
Diagnostics
3.8.5 Device Status

The device status encompasses 7 bytes including the required overhead and
transmits status information of an internal nature and relating to the internal
bus, PROFIBUS DP and the PFC-RTS to the master or the higher ranking
controls.
Byte Information Meaning

15 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 Header byte
(7 byte status information
incl. Header)
16 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 Status type
(manufacturer specific device status)
17 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Slot number 0
18 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Status differentiation
(none)
19 q q n n n n n n Status message
q – Status source
'00' Internal status
'01' Internal bus status
'10' PROFIBUS DP status
n – Status number
20 x x x x x x x x Status argument
21 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Reserved
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
Diagnostics
3.8.5.1 Internal Status Messages and Arguments
Status Status Description

Message Argument
0x00 0x00 No fault
0x01 0x00 EEPROM check sum fault / check sum fault in the parameter
area of the flash
0x01 0x01 Overflow inline code buffer
0x01 0x02 Unknown data type
0x01 0x03 Module type of the flash program memory could not be de-
termined / is incorrect
0x01 0x04 Fault when writing in the FLASH memory
0x01 0x05 Fault when deleting the FLASH memory
0x01 0x06 Changed I/O modules configuration determined following
AUTORESET
0x01 0x07 Fault when writing in the serial EEPROM
0x01 0x08 Invalid firmware
0x02 0x00 Incorrect table entry
0x07 n Non-supported modules at position n (n = 1...63)
3.8.5.2 Internal Bus Status Messages and Arguments

Message Argument
0x43 0xFF At least one module cannot interpret an internal bus com-
mand
0x44 0x00 A data fault or an internal bus interruption exists behind the
coupler
0x44 n An internal bus interruption exists behind the module n
0x45 n Fault in the register communication with module n
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
Diagnostics
3.8.5.3 PROFIBUS DP Status Messages and Arguments

Message Argument
0x81 0x01 Insufficient parameterization data configuration data
0x81 0x02 Too much parameterization data
0x82 n n. parameter byte faulty
0x83 0x01 Insufficient configuration data
0x83 0x02 Too much configuration data
0x84 n n. configuration byte (module) faulty
0x85 0x01 Maximum input data length exceeded
0x85 0x02 Maximum output data length exceeded
0x86 0x01 Compilation buffer overflow for DP process image
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
Diagnostics
3.8.6 Channel Based Diagnostics

The channel based diagnostics is intended for detailing the identification based
diagnostics. A structure is appended to each device status per faulty slot,
which comprises of a header byte, a byte, the channel type supplying the chan-
nel number and a third byte, which describes the fault type and the channel
organization.
Information
Byte Meaning
27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
22 + n
1 0 Slot
Slot 2 ... 64
1 Slot 2
2 Slot 3
...
63 Slot 64
Channel based header diagnostics
23 + n Type of
Signal channel
signal
Signal channel 1 ... 8
0 Signal channel 1
1 Signal channel 2
...
7 Signal channel 8
Type of signal
0 0
0 1 Input
1 0 Output
1 1 Input / output
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
Diagnostics
Information
Byte Meaning
27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
24 + n Type of
Fault number
channel
Fault number 0 ... 31
0 0 0 No allocation
0 0 1 1 bit
0 1 0 2 bit
0 1 1 4 bit
1 0 0 1 byte
1 0 1 1 word
1 1 0 2 words
n : Offset of the diagnostics message in the diagnostics buffer
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
Diagnostics
3.8.6.1 Fault Types of I/O Modules with Diagnostics Capability
Fault Meaning
Number
0 Not specified
1 Short circuit
2 Undervoltage
3 Overvoltage
STANDARDIZED
4 Overload
5 Overtemperature
6 Line break
7 Upper limit value exceeded
8 Lower limit value gone below
9 Fault
10
... Reserved
15
16 Reserved
17 Field voltage fault
18 Fuse fault
19 Buffer overflow
20 Reserved
21 Reserved
WAGO SPECIFIC
22 Reserved
23 Reserved
The register of the I/O module, which is referenced by the
24 type of signal and the signal channel, contains a diagnostic
message.
25 Reserved
26 Input fault
27 Frame fault
28 Cycle time fault
29 Bus fault
31 I/O module fault
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
Diagnostics
3.8.6.2 I/O Modules Fault Cases
Article Number Channel Fault Meaning

Type Type
750-418, 750-419, '001 0.1001' Fault (broken wire, overload or short
750-425, 750-507, circuit, manual mode)
750-522, 750-523,
750-532, 750-537
750-506 '001 0.0001' Short circuit
0.0010' Undervoltage
0.0110' Broken wire
0.1001' Fault
750-460, 750-461, '101 0.0110' Broken wire
750-463, 750-469 0.1000' Lower limit value gone below
1.1111' I/O module fault
750-452, 750-465, '101 0.0111' Upper limit value exceeded
750-467, 750-468, 1.1111' I/O module fault
750-472, 750-475,
750-477
750-453, 750-454, '101 0.0111' Upper limit value exceeded
750-455, 750-456, 0.1000' Lower limit value gone below
750-457, 750-459, 1.1111' I/O module fault
750-466, 750-474,
750-476, 750-478,
750-479, 750-480,
750-483, 750-485,
750-492
750-491 '101 0.0011' Overvoltage
0.0111' Upper limit value exceeded
750-553, 750-555, '101 0.1001' Fault (Short circuit, I/O module fault)
750-557, 750-559,
750-560
750-610, 750-611 '001 1.0001' Field voltage fault
1.0010' Fuse fault
750-630 '110 1.1010' Input fault
1.1011' Frame fault
750-635 '110 0.1001' Fault
750-637 '000 0.1001' Fault
750-639 '110 0.0111' Upper limit value exceeded
0.1000' Lower limit value gone below
750-641 '000 0.1001' Fault
1.1011' Frame fault
750-642, 750-650, '110 1.0011' Buffer overflow
750-651, 750-653 ('000) 1.1111' I/O module fault
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
Diagnostics
Article Number Channel Fault Meaning

Type Type
750-655 '000 1.0001' Field voltage fault
0.1001' Fault
1.1101' Bus error (AS-interface flags give more
information)
750-660, 750-665, '001 1.1000' The register of the I/O module, which is
750-666 ('000) referenced by the type of signal and the
signal channel, contains a diagnostic mes-
sage
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
Diagnostics
3.8.7 Parameterization Status PROFIsafe

During start up of the DP Master, the PROFIsafe I/O modules receive the F
parameter data that is saved by a 16-bit CRC and is used to initialize the F
profile driver. If the parameterization failed, the F profile driver will not be
started in the F I/O modules. The fieldbus coupler indicates the cause of the
error via a status message (parameterization status).
The parameterization status is structured as follows:
Information
Byte Meaning
27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
22 Header byte
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1
(5 byte status information incl. header)
23 Status type = Status message
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
24 PROFIsafe module slot

Slot
(range of values 2 ... 64)
25 Status differentiation = none
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
26 PROFIsafe status message

Fault number
(range of values 64 ... 71)
3.8.7.1 PROFIsafe Parameterization Fault
PROFIsafe Parameterization Fault

Fault Number Meaning
Set PROFIsafe address does not agree with the parameterized
64dec (0x40)
F_DESTINATION_ADDR.
Invalid parameterization of the F_DESTINATION_ADDR. The ad-
65dec (0x41)
dresses 0x0000 and 0xFFFF are invalid.
Invalid parameterization of the F_SOURCE_ADDR. The addresses
66dec (0x42)
0x0000 and 0xFFFF are invalid.
Invalid parameterization of the F_WDG_TIME. A monitoring time of
67dec (0x43)
0 ms is invalid.
Invalid parameterization of the F_SIL. The required SIL class cannot
68dec (0x44)
be supported by the F-Module.
Invalid parameterization of the F_CRC_LENGTH. The required CRC
69dec (0x45)
length does not correspond to the generated one of the F-Module.
Invalid F-Parameter set version. The requested version does not corre-
70dec (0x46)
spond to the status of the F-Module.
The CRC, which was determined by the F module via the PROFIsafe
71dec (0x47) parameters (CRC1), varies from the CRC1 transmitted in the parame-
terization telegram.
72dec (0x48) Reserved fault numbers, which are not allowed to be used or evalu-
73dec (0x49) ated.
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
Acyclic Communication According to DP/V1
3.9 Acyclic Communication According to DP/V1

In addition to cyclic data communication (PROFIBUS-DP standard in compli-
ance with IEC 61158), PROFIBUS-DP also offers acyclic communication ser-
vices as an option. These acyclic services can be performed parallel to cyclic
data transfer. In process engineering applications, the optional services allow
industrial devices to be operated using PROFIBUS-DP. Standard field devices
and devices that require these optional extensions can be operated on the same
bus. The data blocks are addressed via the slot number and the data block
number (index) of the module. The meaning of the slots and indices can be set
according to the device specifications. This way, the user can either access the
data or the parameter sets within a field device. To distinguish between a stan-
dard DP and an acyclic DPV1 device, some keywords have been added to the
GSD file.
Via GSD entries, a master can identify the services supported by the field de-
vice. In the parameter telegram, the K1 master activates the acyclic communi-
cation services of the device. In Data_Exchange mode, the K1 master can use
the acyclic services of the slave that has been parameterized and configured by
the master. Acyclic communication is no longer possible once cyclic data ex-
change has been interrupted.
The extended services are divided into master class 1/ slave functions
(MSAC1) and master class 2/ slave functions (MSAC2).
Both initiating and aborting the communication channel is required so that the
MSAC2 connection can be monitored. Monitoring a MSAC1 connection is
done via the MSCY0 connection, which is always required.
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
The bus coupler supports the following acyclic services according to

IEC61158-3:
MSAC1 Service Requester Responder

MSAC1_Read X
MSAC1_Write x
MSAC2 Service Requester Responder

MSAC2_Initiate x
MSAC2_Abort X x
MSAC2_Read x
MSAC2_Write x
The MSAC1 services are released when the DP/V1 operation has been acti-
vated in the parameter data and the cyclic MSCY0 connection is established.
The MSAC1 connection is closed when the DP data exchange is finished. In
the event of cyclic or acyclic connection failures, both communication chan-
nels will be closed.
The MSAC2_Initiate service is used to open an acyclic MSAC2 connection.

Once the connection has been established, it will be monitored by the C2 mas-
ter. When failures occur, both the master and the slave can close the connec-
tion via MSAC2_Abort. The bus coupler is able to manage a MSAC2 connec-
tion.
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
3.9.1 Data Areas

Addressing the data areas, which can be written with MSAC1/2_Write or read
with MSAC1/2_Read, is done via an index and the module number
(Slot_Number) included in the configuration table. The modules begin at 0,
i.e. the data areas of the bus coupler (basic device unit) can be accessed via
slot number 0.
The range of indices is 0 to 254. The availability of individual data blocks (in-
dices) depends on the module. The user data length of a MSAC1/2_Read and
MSAC1/2_Write telegram cannot exceed 240 bytes. However, the actual
lengths of the individual data areas depend on the modules.
Warning
All indices related to the register contents of complex I/O modules are read-
only by default. Writing the register data when parameterizing the I/O mod-
ule, e.g. setting the baud rate of serial interfaces 750-650, 750-651 and 750-
653, is only possible for modules with the item number extension 750-
???/003-000. In this case, the user specific registers R32 to R47 are activated
for password-protected write access. Write protection to registers R32 – R47
are disabled by writing word 0x1235 into register R31. Write protection is
restored by writing any other value into register R31.
Acyclic writing of process data from binary or analog output modules, for
example, requires access only via MSAC2 connection. When supporting a
MSAC1 connection, output information is overwritten by the cyclic DP data
exchange or the PFC runtime system.
Note that valid write requests to the register structure can be positively ac-
knowledged, even if the write protection has not been activated. In this case,
however, the data to be written will not be transferred to the complex I/O
module. The transfer only occurs if the write protection is reset.
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
3.9.1.1 Fieldbus Coupler, Slots 0 and 1
Index Meaning Service Primitives / Data Length

[Byte]
00D ... 07D Reserved for expansions
08D Projected module arrangement MSAC1/2_Read / 2 … 65
09D Physical module arrangement MSAC1/2_Read / 2 … 65
128D Reserved
129D Reserved for expansions
130D Fieldbus input image MSAC1/2_Read / 1 ... 240
131D Fieldbus input image MSAC1/2_Read / 1 ... (244 –240)
132D Fieldbus output image MSAC1/2_Read / 1 ... 240
MSAC1/2_Write / 1 ... 240
133D Fieldbus output image MSAC1/2_Read / 1 ... (244-240)
MSAC1/2_Write / 1 ... (244-240)
134D ... 139D Reserved
3.9.1.2 Complex I/O Modules, Slots 1 ... 63
Index Meaning
'xx00.0000' Table register 0
... ...
'xx11.1010' Table register 58
'xx11.1011' All table registers
'xx11.1100' Diagnostics data of the channel
'xx11.1101' Input data of the channel
'xx11.1110' Output data of the channel
'00xx.xxxx' Table 0 / channel 1
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
3.9.1.3 Binary I/O Modules, Slots 1 ... 63
Index Meaning
'xxx0.0000' Channel 1
... ...
'xxx0.1111' Channel 16
'000x.xxxx' Diagnostics of the channel
'001x.xxxx' Input information of the channel
'010x.xxxx' Output information of the channel
'101x.xxxx' Input information of the module
'1010.0000'
'110x.xxxx' Output information of the module
'1100.0000'
The error message ”invalid index“ is returned when accessing data areas are
not available from the module.
Examples: Accessing indices of a module that is not physically connected.

Accessing the data areas of the third channel while using a 2-channel mod-
ule.
Requesting the input data of an output module.
Requesting the output data of an input module.
Requesting the diagnostics data of a module that has no diagnostics informa-
tion.
The error message “invalid slot“ is generated when addressing modules that
are neither physically nor virtually (projected as not being connected) avail-
able.
When reading from indices (MSAC1/2_Read), the maximum PDU length that
can be set is 240 bytes. The bus coupler/controller returns the actual amount of
information from the respective index.
When writing to indices (MSAC1/2_Write), the maximum possible length of

information to be written to the respective index must not be exceeded.
Otherwise, the error message “invalid length while writing!“ is reported by
the bus coupler/controller.
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
Coding of Error Messages
Octet 1
Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Service
Error_Frame
Octet 2
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Error_Decode
Octet 3
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Error_Code_1
Error_Class
Octet 4
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Error_Code_2
User specific
Abb. 3.9.1-10: Coding of error messages g012121e
Octet 2
Error Decode Meaning
0 ... 127 Reserved
128 PROFIBUS-DP/V1
129 ... 254 Reserved
255 PROFIBUS-FMS
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
Octet 3
Error_Class Meaning Error_Code_1 Meaning
0- 9 Reserved
10 Application errors 0 Error while reading
1 Error while writing
2 Module error
3 ... 7 Reserved
8 Version conflict
9 Feature not supported
10 ... 15 Application specific
11 Access errors 0 Invalid index
1 Incorrect length while writing
2 Invalid slot
3 Type conflict
4 Invalid area
5 Status conflict
6 Access denied
7 Invalid scaling
8 Invalid parameter
9 Invalid type
12 Resource errors 0 Read conflict
1 Write conflict
2 Resource busy
3 Resource not available
4 ... 7 Reserved
13 ... 15 Reserved
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
Octet 4
Error_Code_2 Meaning User specific Meaning
0 ... 15 Reserved 0 ... 15 Application specific
Error codes returned by the bus coupler are shown in bold italic.
Note
You can find a list of all I/O modules with all possible identification bytes in
chapter 5.5, “Acyclic communication according to DP/V1”.
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
LED Signaling
3.10 LED Signaling

The coupler possesses several LED's for on site signaling of the coupler oper-
ating status or the complete node
Fig. 3.9.1-11: Display elements 750-333 g012106x
The upper four LEDs (RUN, BF, DIA, BUS) display the state of the
PROFIBUS communication.
The lower LED (I/O) displays the internal state of the complete node.
The LEDs A and C or B display the status of the supply voltage.
3.10.1 Blink Code

Detailed fault messages are displayed with the aid of a blink code. A fault is
cyclically displayed with up to 3 blink sequences.
• The first blink sequence (approx. 10 Hz) starts the fault display.
• The second blink sequence (approx. 1 Hz) following a pause. The number
of blink pulses indicates the fault code.
• The third blink sequence (approx. 1 Hz) follows after a further pause. The
number of blink pulses indicates the fault argument.
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
LED Signaling
3.10.2 Fieldbus Status

The upper four LEDs signal the operating conditions of the PROFIBUS com-
munication.
LED Color Meaning

RUN green The RUN-LED indicates to the user if the fieldbus coupler is per-
fectly initialized.
BF red The BF-LED indicates that the communication functions via the
PROFIBUS.
DIA red The DIA-LED indicates an external diagnostics.
BUS red The BUS-LED signals a projecting fault.
RUN BF DIA BUS Meaning Remedy

off off off off No operating voltage to Check the voltage supply for
the coupler or a hard- the bus coupler and replace the
ware fault is present. bus coupler if necessary.
on on * off PROFIBUS interface Check to see whether the
started, baud rate was PROFIBUS is connected.
not yet recognized.
Check to see whether the baud
rate parameterized on the mas-
ter is supported by the coupler.
Replace the bus coupler be-
cause there is a hardware de-
fect.
on blinks * off Baud rate recognized, Check the configuration and
station not yet param- the slave addresses.
eterized and configured. Load the configuration and
start the coupler by switching
the supply voltage off and on
again.
on blinks on blink Slave was incorrectly Evaluate the blink code.
code projected.
on off * off The coupler is exchang- OK
ing data.
on * on * The coupler signals an The data exchange is function-
existing diagnostics. ing without any problems so
that you may obtain diagnostics
information, for instance on a
cable breakage in an analog
input terminal.
* Not relevant
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
LED Signaling
3.10.3 Fault Message via Blink Code of the BUS LED
Fault Argument Fault Description Remedy

Fault Code 1: Fault in Parameterization Telegram
1 Insufficient parameterization Get in contact with WAGO support.
data
The GSD file is defective or the
parameter data was entered im-
properly.
2 Excessive parameterization data Get in contact with WAGO support.
The GSD file is defective or the
parameter data was entered im-
properly.
Fault Code 2: Fault in Parameterization Telegram
n Faulty parameterized byte n Get in contact with WAGO support
The nth byte is defective.
Fault Code 3: Fault in Configuration Telegram
1 Insufficient configuration data. Check the configuration because a
terminal was probably forgotten in
the configuration. Load the configu-
ration and start the coupler by
switching the supply voltage off and
on again.
2 Excessive configuration data. Check the configuration because a
terminal was probably not plugged.
Load the configuration and start the
coupler by switching the supply
voltage off and on again.
Fault Code 4: Fault in Configuration Telegram
n Configuration byte (module) n is Check the nth module in the configu-
faulty. rator. Load the configuration and
start the coupler by switching the
supply voltage off and on again.
Fault Code 5: Fault in the Data Length
1 Maximum input data length Switch off the supply voltage of the
exceeded (more than 128 byte coupler. Remove some terminals
input data, more than 244 byte from the node and switch the supply
from SW 03). voltage on again.
2 Maximum output data length Switch off the supply voltage of the
exceeded (more than 128 byte coupler. Remove some terminals
output data, more than 244 byte from the node and switch the supply
from SW 03). voltage on again.
Fault Code 6: Compilate Buffer Overflow
1 Compilate buffer overflow for Get in contact with WAGO support.
DP process image.
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
LED Signaling
3.10.4 Node Status

The I/O-LED indicates the node operation and signals faults occurring.
I/O Meaning
green Data cycle on the internal bus
off No data cycle on the internal bus
red Coupler hardware defective
red When starting: internal bus is initialized
blinks During operation: general internal bus fault
red Fault message during internal bus reset and internal fault
blinks cyclically
orange FLASH access to coupler firmware
The coupler starts after switching on the supply voltage. The I/O-LED flashes
red. Following a fault free run up the I/O-LED changes to green steady light.
In the case of a fault the I/O-LED continues blinking red. The fault is cycli-
cally displayed with the blink code.
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
LED Signaling
Fig. 3.10.4-12: Signaling the node status g012111e
After overcoming a fault restart the coupler by switching off and on the supply
voltage.
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
LED Signaling
3.10.5 Fault Message via the Blink Code of the I/O LED
Fault Fault Description Remedy

Argu-
ment
Fault Code 1: Hardware and Configuration Fault
- Check sum fault in Switch off the supply voltage of the node. Replace
parameter area of the the coupler and switch on the supply voltage again.
flash memory.
1 Overflow of the internal Switch off the supply voltage of the node. Reduce
buffer memory for the the number of modules and switch on the supply
inline code. voltage again. In case that the fault still exists, re-
place the coupler.
2 Unknown data type. Detect faulty I/O module as follows: turn off the
power supply. Place the end module in the middle of
the fieldbus node. Turn the power supply on again.
- If the LED is still blinking, turn off the power
supply and place the end module in the middle of the
first half of the node (towards the coupler).
- If the LED doesn't blink, turn off the power supply
and place the end module in the middle of the sec-
ond half of the node (away from the coupler). Turn
the power supply on again. Repeat this procedure
until the faulty I/O module is detected. Replace the
faulty I/O module.
Ask about a firmware update for the fieldbus cou-
pler.
3 Module type of the flash Switch off the supply voltage of the node. Replace
program memory could the coupler and switch on the supply voltage again.
not be determined / is
incorrect.
4 Fault during writing in Switch off the supply voltage of the node. Replace
the flash memory. the coupler and switch on the supply voltage again.
5 Fault when deleting the Switch off the supply voltage of the node. Replace
FLASH memory. the coupler and switch on the supply voltage again.
6 Changed I/O module Restart the coupler by switching the supply voltage
configuration found off and on again.
after AUTORESET.
7 Fault when writing in Switch off the supply voltage of the node. Replace
the serial EEPROM. the coupler and switch on the supply voltage again.
8 Invalid hardware- Switch off the supply voltage of the node. Replace
firmware combination. the coupler and switch on the supply voltage again.
9 Invalid check sum in the Switch off the supply voltage of the node. Replace
serial EEPROM. the coupler and switch on the supply voltage again.
10 Fault when initializing Switch off the supply voltage of the node. Replace
the serial EEPROM. the coupler and switch on the supply voltage again.
11 Fault when reading the Switch off the supply voltage of the node. Replace
serial EEPROM. the coupler and switch on the supply voltage again.
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
LED Signaling
12 Exceeded time when Switch off the supply voltage of the node. Replace
accessing the serial the coupler and switch on the supply voltage again.
EEPROM.
14 Maximum number of Reduce the number of correspondent modules up to
gateway modules or a valid number.
mailbox modules ex-
ceeded.
Fault Code 2: not used
- - -
Fault Code 3: Internal Bus Protocol Fault
0 Internal bus communi- If the fieldbus node comprises internal system sup-
cation defective, incor- ply modules
rect module not identifi- (750-613), make sure first that the power supply of
able. these modules is functioning. This is indicated by
the status LEDs. If all I/O modules are connected
correctly or if the fieldbus node does not comprise
750-613 modules you can detect the faulty I/O mod-
ule as follows:
turn off the power supply of the node. Place the end
module in the middle of the fieldbus node. Turn the
power supply on again.
faulty I/O module.
If there is only one module on the coupler and the
LED is blinking, either this module or the coupler is
defective. Replace the defective component.
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
LED Signaling
Fault Fault Description Remedy

Argu-
ment
Fault Code 4: Internal Bus Data Fault
- Data fault on internal Switch off the supply voltage of the node. Place an
bus or I/O module with process data behind the coupler and
internal bus interruption note the error argument after the power supply is
on coupler. turned on. If no error argument is given by the I/O
LED, replace the coupler. Otherwise detect faulty
I/O module as follows: turn off the power supply.
Place the end module in the middle of the fieldbus
node. Turn the power supply on again.
faulty I/O module.
If there is only one module on the coupler and the
LED is blinking, either this module or the coupler is
defective. Replace the defective component.
n* Internal bus interrupted Switch off the supply voltage of the node. Replace
after I/O module n with the (n+1)th module with process data and switch on
process data. the supply voltage again.
Fault Code 5: Initialization Fault
n* Register communication Switch off the supply voltage of the node. Replace
fault during internal bus the nth module with process data and switch on the
initialization. supply voltage again.
- - -
- - -
- - -
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
LED Signaling
Fault Code 9: CPU Exception Fault

1 Invalid device instruc- A failure occurs in the program flow. Get in contact
tion with WAGO support.
2 Stack overflow A failure occurs in the program flow. Get in contact
with WAGO support.
3 Stack underflow A failure occurs in the program flow. Get in contact
with WAGO support.
4 Invalid event (NMI) A failure occurs in the program flow. Get in contact
with WAGO support.
* The number of blink pulses (n) indicates the position of the I/O module. I/O modules
without data are not counted (e.g. supply module without diagnostics).
Example: the 13th I/O Module is removed.

1. The I/O-LED generates a fault display with the first blink sequence (approx. 10 Hz).
2. The first pause is followed by the second blink sequence (approx. 1 Hz). The
I/O-LED blinks four times and thus signals the fault code 4 (internal bus data fault).
3. The third blink sequence follows the second pause. The I/O-LED blinks twelve times.
The fault argument 12 means that the internal bus is interrupted after the 12th I/O
module.
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
LED Signaling
3.10.6 Supply Voltage Status

There are two green LEDs in the coupler supply section. The left upper
LED (A) indicates the status of the system supply. The right upper LED (C) or
the left lower LED (B) signals the supply to the field side (the LED position
depends on manufacturer).
LED A Meaning Remedy

green System supply is ok.
off System supply failed. Check the power supply (24 V and 0 V)
LED C Meaning Remedy

or B
green Field supply is ok.
off Field supply failed. Check the power supply (24 V and 0 V)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
Fault Behavior
3.11 Fault Behavior

3.11.1 Fieldbus Failure
A fieldbus failure has occurred when the master is switched off or the bus ca-
ble is interrupted. A fault in the master can also lead to a fieldbus failure.
The red BF-LED lights up.
The failure of the fieldbus can activate the parameterizable substitute value of
the I/O modules. During projecting of the outputs a substitute value can be
laid down for each channel.
Substitute Value Value (Bit orientated) Value (Byte orientated)

Strategy Digital Output Modules Analog Output Modules
Minimum value 0 0 or 4 mA, -10 or 0 V
Maximum value 1 20 mA, 10 V
Substitute value 0 or 1 0/4 ... 20 mA, -10/0 ... +10 V
Stop internal bus Behavior determined by I/O module
The value is entered in the output process image by the coupler. With I/O mo-
dules with byte orientated data width, e.g. the pulse width module, the substi-
tute value is determined via the value area.
As soon as the fieldbus is active the process data is transmitted and the output
correspondingly set in the nodes.
3.11.2 Internal Bus Fault

An internal bus fault is created, for example, if an I/O module is removed. If
this fault occurs during operation the output modules behave in the same man-
ner as an I/O module stop. The input process image is set in accordance with
the projected strategy.
The I/O-LED blinks red. The slave generates a detailed fault message.
Once the internal bus fault has been overcome the coupler starts up automati-
cally in accordance with the parameterized restart routine. The process data
transfer is then restarted and the outputs reset in the nodes.
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
Technical Data
3.12 Technical Data

System Data
Number of I/O modules 96 with repeater
Number of I/O points approx. 6000 (master dependent)
Transmission medium Cu cable in accordance with EN 50170
Bus segment length 100 m ... 1200 m
(baud rate dependent / cable dependent)
Transmission rate 9.6 kbaud ... 12 Mbaud
Transmission time with 10 modules typ. 1 ms
each with 32 DI and 32 DO, 12 Mbaud max. 3.3 ms
Bus connection 1 x D-Sub 9; female
Technical Data
Number of I/O modules 63
Protocol DP / DPV1
Fieldbus
-Input process image max. 244 byte (128 byte up to SW02)
-Output process image max. 244 byte (128 byte up to SW02)
Configuration via PC or controls
Voltage supply DC 24 V (-15 % / + 20 %)
Input currentmax 500 mA at 24 V
Internal system supply module effi- 87 %
ciency
Internal power consumption 200 mA at 5 V
Total current for I/O modules 1800 mA at 5 V
Voltage via power jumper contacts DC 24 V (-15 % / + 20 %)
Current via power jumper contactmax DC 10 A
Dimensions (mm) W x H x L 51 x 65* x 100
* from upper edge of DIN 35 rail
Weight ca. 195 g
Standards and Regulations
PROFIBUS-Norm EN 50 170
EMV-Immunity to interference acc. EN 50082-2 (96)
EMV-Emission of interference acc. EN 50081-2 (94)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
Technical Data
Approvals
CULUS (UL508)
ABS (American Bureau of Shipping)
BV (Bureau Veritas)
DNV (Det Norske Veritas) Cl. B
GL (Germanischer Lloyd) Cat. A, B, C, D
KR (Korean Register of Shipping)
LR (Lloyd's Register) Env. 1, 2, 3, 4

NKK (Nippon Kaiji Kyokai)
RINA (Registro Italiano Navale)
CULUS (UL1604) Class I Div2 ABCD T4A
DEMKO II 3 G EEx nA II T4
Conformity Marking
Accessories
GSD-Data Download: : http://www.wago.com
Mini-WSB Quick marking system
More Information
Detailed references to the approvals are listed in the document "Overview
Approvals WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750", which you can find on the CD ROM
ELECTRONICC Tools and Docs (Item No.: 0888-0412) or at
http://www.wago.com under Documentation ! WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
! System Description.
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
106 • Field Bus Communication
PROFIBUS
4 Field Bus Communication

4.1 PROFIBUS
4.1.1 Description
PROFIBUS is an open field bus standard, laid down in the European Standard
EN 50 170, Vol. 2 (also IEC).
PROFIBUS DP has been designed for a fast and efficient data exchange be-
tween a control (PLC / PC) and decentralized peripheral equipment, for exam-
ple sensors and actuators, digital or analog input and output modules.
A DP System consists of a master and up to 124 slaves:
Master: A DP Master exchanges the data with the slaves via PROFIBUS DP
and controls the bus. It transfers the data between a supervisory control and
the decentralized peripheral equipment.
Slave: DP Slaves are the link to the field side. They edit the input data of the
peripheral equipment for the communication with the master and output the
Master data to the peripheral equipment.
PROFIBUS uses the master/slave method for data transmission. The master
cyclically reads the input data from the slaves and cyclically writes the output
data to the slaves. PROFIBUS DP V1 also supports an acyclic data exchange.
PROFIBUS DP has baud rates from 9.6 kbaud up to 12 Mbaud.
PROFIBUS DP features:
• fast system response times
• high immunity to interference
• master and slave diagnostic
• single slaves may fail or be turned off without the field bus operations be-
ing interrupted
• Every configuration is stored in the master.
• Every slave has a manufacturer-specific identifier that has been assigned

by the PNO (PROFIBUS Nutzerorganisation).
• The slaves are described in the GSD files. The GSD file is imported into
the configuration software which makes the configuration of the slave eas-
ier.
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
Field Bus Communication • 107
PROFIBUS
Further Information
The PNO provides further documentation for its members on internet:
- Technical descriptions
- Guidelines
http://www.profibus.com/
4.1.2 Wiring
On the PROFIBUS with RS 485 transmission technology all devices are con-
nected in a line structure. The bus line comprises of a twisted and screened
pair of wires.
The field bus line is specified in EN 50 170 as a line type A and must provide
certain line parameters. The line type B also described in the EN 50 170 is an
old type and should no longer be used.
Parameter Value
Wave resistance 135 ... 165 Ω
Operating capacity < 30 pF/m
Loop resistance 110 Ω/km
*)
Wire diameter > 0.64 mm
Wire cross section*) > 0.34 mm2
*)
The wire cross sections used must conform with connection possibilities on the bus plug.
Line type A allows maximum line lengths for a bus segment dependent upon
the transmission speed.
Transmission speed Max. bus segment length

9.6 / 19.2 / 45.45 / 93.75 kBaud 1200 m
187.5 kBaud 1000 m
500 kBaud 400 m
1500 kBaud 200 m
3000 / 6000 / 12000 kBaud 100 m
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
108 • Field Bus Communication
PROFIBUS
The plugs 750-960, 750-970 offered by WAGO provide the possibility that ar-
riving and departing data cables can be directly connected to the plug. In this
manner drop cables are avoided and the bus plug can be connected to or dis-
connected from the bus at any time without interrupting the data traffic. A cut-
in type bus connection is integrated in these plugs. Due to the capacitive load
of the subscribers and the resulting generated line reflection the connection
plugs used should have integrated length inductivity. This is indispensable for
transmission rates of > 1.5 MBaud.
9 pole D-SUB Further 9 pole D-SUB
Connector Fieldbus Nodes Connector with
Terminating Resistor
VP
6 6
390 W
2 2
RxD/TxD-P RxD/TxD-P
3 Pin 3 - B Line 3
RTS RTS
4 4
220 W
1 1
9 9
RxD/TxD-N Pin 8 - A Line RxD/TxD-N
8 8
390 W
7 7
DGND
5 5
Series inductance = 110 nH
Fig. 4-1: Bus connection g1xx302e
Note
When connecting the subscriber ensure that the data lines are not mixed up.
The bus termination at the start and end of the bus line must be installed. The
bus connection requires the supply voltage VP from the device. For this rea-
son ensure that the slave unit installed on the bus termination, is always sup-
plied with voltage.
Due to the integrated length inductivity in the connection plug ensure that the
plug is installed without connected field devices as the missing capacity of
the device could cause transmission faults.
In order to achieve a high disturbance resistance of the system against elec-

tromagnetic radiated interference ensure that a screened PROFIBUS cable is
used. Where possible connect the screen at both ends with good conduction
and using large surface area screen clips. In addition ensure that the cables are
laid separated from all power line cables if possible. With a data rate of
≥ 1.5 Mbit/s ensure that spur lines are avoided.
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
Field Bus Communication • 109
PROFIBUS
Further Information
The PNO provides further documentation for its members on internet. Cable
specification information can be obtained from, for example, the „Installation
Guideline for PROFIBUS-FMS/DP", 2.112.
http://www.profibus.com/
Note
WAGO Kontakttechnik GmbH & Co. KG offers this screen connection sys-
tem for the optimum connection between field bus screening and function
earth.
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
110 • I/O Modules
Overview
5 I/O Modules
5.1 Overview
All listed bus modules, in the overview below, are available for modular ap-
plications with the WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750.
For detailed information on the I/O modules and the module variations, please
refer to the manuals for the I/O modules.
You will find these manuals on CD ROM „ELECTRONICC Tools and Docs“
(Item No.: 0888-0412) or at http://www.wago.com under Documentation.
Current information on the modular WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM is available at
http://www.wago.com.
5.1.1 Digital Input Modules
Tab. 5-1: Digital input modules
DI DC 5 V
750-414 4 Channel, DC 5 V, 0.2 ms, 2- to 3-conductor connection,
high-side switching
DI DC 5(12) V
753-434 8 Channel, DC 5(12) V, 0.2 ms, 1-conductor connection,
high-side switching
DI DC 24 V
750-400, 753-400 2 Channel, DC 24 V, 3.0 ms, 2- to 4-conductor connection;
high-side switching
high-side switching
high-side switching
high-side switching
high-side switching; diagnostics and confirmation
750-419 2 Channel, DC 24 V, 3.0 ms, 2- to 3-conductor connection;
high-side switching; diagnostics
high-side switching; diagnostics
high-side switching
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
I/O Modules • 111
Overview
750-432, 753-432 4 Channel, DC 24 V, 3.0 ms, 2-conductor connection;

high-side switching
high-side switching
high-side switching
750-422, 753-422 4 Channel, DC 24 V, 2- to 3-conductor connection;
high-side switching; 10 ms pulse extension
low-side switching
low-side switching
high-side switching
high-side switching
750-436 8 Channel, DC 24 V, 3.0 ms, 1-conductor connection;
low-side switching
750-437 8 Channel, DC 24 V, 0.2 ms, 1-conductor connection;
low-side switching
DI AC/DC 24 V
750-415, 753-415 4 Channel, AC/DC 24 V, 2-conductor connection
750-423, 753-423 4 Channel, AC/DC 24 V, 2- to 3-conductor connection;
with power jumper contacts
DI AC/DC 42 V
750-428, 753-428 4 Channel, AC/DC 42 V, 2-conductor connection
DI DC 48 V
750-412, 753-412 2 Channel, DC 48 V, 3.0ms, 2- to 4-conductor connection;
high-side switching
DI DC 110 V
750-427, 753-427 2 Channel, DC 110 V, configurable high-side or low-side switching
DI AC 120 V
750-406, 753-406 2 Channel, AC 120 V, 2- to 4-conductor connection;
high-side switching
DI AC 120(230) V
753-440 4 Channel, AC 120(230) V, 2-conductor connection;
high-side switching
DI AC 230 V
750-405, 753-405 2 Channel, AC 230 V, 2- to 4-conductor connection;
high-side switching
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
112 • I/O Modules
Overview
DI NAMUR
750-435 1 Channel, NAMUR EEx i, proximity switch acc. to DIN EN 50227
750-425, 753-425 2 Channel, NAMUR, proximity switch acc. to DIN EN 50227
750-438 2 Channel, NAMUR EEx i, proximity switch acc. to DIN EN 50227
DI Intruder Detection
750-424, 753-424 2 Channel, DC 24 V, intruder detection
5.1.2 Digital Output Modules
Tab. 5-2: Digital output modules
DO DC 5 V
750-519 4 Channel, DC 5 V, 20mA, short-circuit-protected; high-side switching
DO DC 12(14) V
753-534 8 Channel, DC 12(14) V, 1A, short-circuit-protected; high-side switch-
ing
DO DC 24 V
750-501, 753-501 2 Channel, DC 24 V, 0.5 A, short-circuit-protected; high-side switching
750-506, 753-506 2 Channel, DC 24 V, 0.5 A, short-circuit-protected; high-side switching;
diagnostics
750-507, 753-507 2 Channel, DC 24 V, 2.0 A, short-circuit-protected; high-side switching;
diagnostics; no longer available, replaced by 750-508!
750-508 2 Channel, DC 24 V, 2.0 A, short-circuit-protected; high-side switching;
diagnostics; replacement for 750-507
750-535 2 Channel, DC 24 V, EEx i, short-circuit-protected; high-side switching
diagnostics
750-516, 753-516 4 Channel, DC 24 V, 0.5 A, short-circuit-protected; low-side switching
diagnostics
750-536 8 Channel, DC 24 V, 0.5 A, short-circuit-protected; low-side switching
DO AC 120(230) V
753-540 4 Channel, AC 120(230) V, 0.25 A, short-circuit-protected;
high-side switching
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
I/O Modules • 113
Overview
DO AC/DC 230 V
750-509, 753-509 2 Channel solid state relay, AC/DC 230 V, 300 mA
750-522 2 Channel solid state relay, AC/DC 230 V, 500 mA, 3 A (< 30 s)
DO Relay
750-523 1 Channel, AC 230 V, AC 16 A, potential-free, 1 make contact
750-514, 753-514 2 Channel, AC 125 V , AC 0.5 A , DC 30 V, DC 1 A,
potential-free, 2 changeover contacts
750-517, 753-517 2 Channel, AC 230 V, 1 A, potential-free, 2 changeover contacts
750-512, 753-512 2 Channel, AC 230 V, DC 30 V, AC/DC 2 A, non-floating, 2 make con-
tacts
750-513, 753-513 2 Channel, AC 230 V, DC 30 V, AC/DC 2 A, potential-free, 2 make
contacts
5.1.3 Analog Input Modules
Tab. 5-3: Analog input modules
AI 0 - 20 mA
750-452, 753-452 2 Channel, 0 - 20 mA, differential input
750-465, 753-465 2 Channel, 0 - 20 mA, single-ended
750-472, 753-472 2-Channel, 0 - 20 mA, 16 bit, single-ended
750-480 2-Channel, 0 - 20 mA , differential input
AI 4 - 20 mA
750-454, 753-454 2 Channel, 4 - 20 mA, differential input
750-474, 753-474 2 Channel, 4 - 20 mA, 16 bit, single-ended
750-466, 753-466 2 Channel, 4 - 20 mA, single ended
750-485 2 Channel, 4 - 20 mA, EEx i, single-ended
750-492, 753-492 2 Channel, 4 - 20 mA, isolated differential input
AI 0 - 1 A
750-475, 753-475 2-Channel, 0 - 1 A AC/DC, differential input
AI 0 - 5 A
750-475/020-000, 2-Channel, 0 - 5 A AC/DC, differential input
753-475/020-000
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
114 • I/O Modules
Overview
AI 0 - 10 V
750-467, 753-467 2 Channel, DC 0 - 10 V, single-ended
750-477, 753-477 2 Channel, AC/DC 0 - 10 V, differential input
750-468 4 Channel, DC 0 - 10 V, single-ended
AI DC ± 10 V
750-456, 753-456 2 Channel, DC ± 10 V, differential input
750-479, 753-479 2 Channel, DC ± 10 V, differential measurement input
750-476, 753-476 2 Channel, DC ± 10 V, single-ended
750-457, 753-457 4 Channel, DC ± 10 V, single-ended
AI DC 0 - 30 V
750-483, 753-483 2 Channel, DC 0 -30 V, differential measurement input
AI Resistance Sensors
750-461, 753-461 2 Channel, resistance sensors, PT100 / RTD
750-481/003-000 2 Channel, resistance sensors, PT100 / RTD, EEx i
750-460 4 Channel, resistance sensors, PT100 / RTD
AI Thermocouples
750-462 2 Channel, thermocouples, line break detection,
sensor types: J, K, B, E, N, R, S, T, U
750-469, 753-469 2 Channel, thermocouples, line break detection,
sensor types: J, K, B, E, N, R, S, T, U, L
AI Others
750-491 1 Channel for resistor bridges (strain gauge)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
I/O Modules • 115
Overview
5.1.4 Analog Output Modules
Tab. 5-4: Analog output modules
AO 0 - 20 mA
750-552, 753-552 2 Channel, 0 - 20 mA
750-585 2 Channel, 0 - 20 mA, EEx i
750-553, 753-553 4 Channel, 0 - 20 mA
AO 4 - 20 mA
750-554, 753-554 2 Channel, 4 - 20 mA
750-554, 753-554 4 Channel, 4 - 20 mA
AO DC 0 - 10 V
750-550, 753-550 2 Channel, DC 0 - 10 V
750-560 2 Channel, DC 0 - 10 V, 10 bit, 100 mW, 24 V
750-559, 753-559 4 Channel, DC 0 - 10 V
AO DC ± 10 V
750-556, 753-556 2 Channel, DC ± 10 V
750-557, 753-557 4 Channel, DC ± 10 V
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
116 • I/O Modules
Overview
5.1.5 Special Modules
Tab. 5-5: Special modules
Counter Modules
750-404, 753-404 Up / down counter, DC 24 V, 100 kHz
750-638, 753-638 2 Channel, up / down counter, DC 24 V/ 16 bit / 500 Hz
Frequency Measuring
750-404/000-003, Frequency measuring
753-404/000-003
Pulse Width Module
750-511 2-channel pulse width module, DC 24 V, short-circuit-protected,
high-side switching
Distance and Angle Measurement Modules
750-630 SSI transmitter interface
750-631 Incremental encor interface, differential inputs
750-634 Incremental encor interface, DC 24 V
750-637 Incremental encor interface RS 422, cam outputs
750-635, 753-635 Digital pulse interface, for magnetostrictive distance sensors
Serial Interfaces
750-650, 753 Serial interface RS 232 C
750-653, 753 Serial interface RS 485
750-651 TTY-Serial interface, 20 mA Current Loop
750-654 Data exchange module
DALI / DSI Master Module
750-641 DALI / DSI master module
AS interface Master Module
750-655 AS interface master module
Radio Receiver Module
750-642 Radio receiver EnOcean
MP Bus Master Module
750-643 MP bus (multi point bus) master module
Vibration Monitoring
750-645 2 Channel vibration velocity / bearing condition monitoring VIB I/O
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
I/O Modules • 117
Overview
PROFIsafe Modules
750-660/000-001 8FDI 24V DC PROFIsafe;
PROFIsafe 8 channel digital input module
750-665/000-001 4FDO 0.5A / 4FDI 24V DC PROFIsafe;
PROFIsafe 4 channel digital input and output module
750-666/000-001 1FDO 10A / 2FDO 0.5A / 2FDI 24V PROFIsafe;
PROFIsafe power switch module
RTC Module
750-640 RTC module
KNX / EIB TP1 Module
750-646 KNX / EIB /TP1 module – device mode / router mode
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
118 • I/O Modules
Overview
5.1.6 System Modules
Tab. 5-6: System modules
Module Bus Extension

750-627 Module bus extension, end module
750-628 Module bus extension, coupler module
DC 24 V Power Supply Modules
750-602 DC 24 V, passive
750-601 DC 24 V, max. 6.3 A, without diagnostics, with fuse-holder
750-610 DC 24 V, max. 6.3 A, with diagnostics, with fuse-holder
750-625 DC 24 V, EEx i, with fuse-holder
DC 24 V Power Supply Modules with bus power supply
750-613 Bus power supply, 24 V DC
AC 120 V Power Supply Modules
750-615 AC 120 V, max. 6.3 A without diagnostics, with fuse-holder
AC 230 V Power Supply Modules
750-612 AC/DC 230 V without diagnostics, passive
750-609 AC 230 V, max. 6.3 A without diagnostics, with fuse-holder
750-611 AC 230 V, max. 6.3 A with diagnostics, with fuse-holder
Filter Modules
750-624 Filter module, field side power supply
750-626 Filter module, system and field side power supply
Field Side Connection Module
750-603, 753-603 Field side connection module, DC 24 V
750-604, 753-604 Field side connection module, DC 0 V
750-614, 753-614 Field side connection module, AC/DC 0 ... 230 V
Separation Modules
750-616 Separation module
750-621 Separation module with power contacts
Binary Spacer Module
750-622 Binary spacer module
End Module
750-600 End module, to loop the internal bus
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
I/O Modules • 119
Design of the Process Data for PROFIBUS-DP
5.2 Design of the Process Data for PROFIBUS-DP

Depending on how the coupler is parameterized, the status bytes (S), control
bytes (C) and data bytes (D0...Dn) of the byte or word orientated modules are
transmitted via PROFIBUS in Motorola or Intel format.
Attention
For the meaning of input and output bits or bytes of the individual I/O mod-
ule please refer to the corresponding I/O module description.
5.2.1 2 DI I/O Modules

750-400, 750-401, 750-405, 750-406, 750-407, 750- 410, 750-411,
750-412, 750-413, 750-416, 750-427, 750-435, 750-438
Process Image [Bit]

Diagnostics information in the
Input Output
PROFIBUS Process Image
Yes (not possible) - -
No 2 0
5.2.2 2 DI I/O Modules with Diagnostics

750-419, 750-425 (1 bit diagnostics / channel)
Process Image [Bit]

Input Output
Yes 4 0
No 2 0
750-418 (1 bit diagnostics / channel, 1 bit acknowledge / channel)
Process Image [Bit]

Input Output
Yes 4 2
No 2 2
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
120 • I/O Modules

750-402, 750-403, 750-408, 750-409, 750-414, 750-415, 750-422,
750-423, 750-424, 750-428, 750-432, 750-433
Process Image [Bit]

Input Output
No 4 0

750-430, 750-431, 750-436, 750-437
Process Image [Bit]

Input Output
No 8 0

750-4xx
Process Image [Bit]

Input Output
No 16 0
5.2.6 2 DO I/O Modules

750-501, 750-502, 750-509, 750-512, 750-513, 750-514, 750-517,
750-535
Process Image [Bit]

Input Output
No 0 2
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
I/O Modules • 121
5.2.7 2 DO I/O Modules with Diagnostics

750-507, 750-522, 750-523 (1 bit diagnostics / channel)
Process Image [Bit]

Input Output
Yes 2 2
No 0 2
750-506 (2 bit diagnostics / channel)
Process Image [Bit]

Input Output
Yes 4 2
No 0 2

750-504, 750-516, 750-519, 750-531
Process Image [Bit]

Input Output
No 0 4
5.2.9 4 DO I/O Module with Diagnostics

Process Image [Bit]

Input Output
Yes 4 4
No 0 4
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
122 • I/O Modules

750-530, 750-536
Process Image [Bit]

Input Output
No 0 8
5.2.11 8 DO I/O Module with Diagnostics

Process Image [Bit]

Input Output
Yes 8 8
No 0 8

750-5xx
Process Image [Bit]

Input Output
No 0 16
5.2.13 Power Supply Modules

750-610, 750-611 (with diagnostics)
Process Image [Bit]

Input Output
Yes 2 0
No 0 0
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
I/O Modules • 123
5.2.14 2 AI I/O Modules

750-452, 750-454, 750-456, 750-461, 750-462, 750-465, 750-466,
750-467, 750-469, 750-472, 750-474, 750-475, 750-476, 750-477,
750-478, 750-479, 750-480, 750-483, 750-485, 750-491, 750-492
Process Image [Byte]

Register communication possible? Input Output
Yes 6 6
No 4 0
Mapping with Register Communication
Data type MOTOROLA INTEL
E/A-area Input Output Input Output
Channel 1 S0 C0 S0 C0
D1 D1 D0 D0
D0 D0 D1 D1
D3 D3 D2 D2
D2 D2 D3 D3
Mapping without Register Communication
Channel 1 D1 - D0 -
D0 - D1 -
Channel 2 D3 - D2 -
D2 - D3 -
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
124 • I/O Modules

750-453, 750-455, 750-457, 750-459, 750-460, 750-463, 750-468

Yes 12 12
No 8 0
D1 D1 D0 D0
D0 D0 D1 D1
D3 D3 D2 D2
D2 D2 D3 D3
D5 D5 D4 D4
D4 D4 D5 D5
D7 D7 D6 D6
D6 D6 D7 D7
Channel 1 D1 - D0 -
D0 - D1 -
Channel 2 D3 - D2 -
D2 - D3 -
Channel 3 D5 - D4 -
D4 - D5 -
Channel 4 D7 - D6 -
D6 - D7 -
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
I/O Modules • 125
5.2.16 2 AO I/O Modules

750-550, 750-552, 750-554, 750-556, 750-560, 750-585

Yes 6 6
No 0 4
D1 D1 D0 D0
D0 D0 D1 D1
D3 D3 D2 D2
D2 D2 D3 D3
Channel 1 - D1 - D0
- D0 - D1
Channel 2 - D3 - D2
- D2 - D3
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
126 • I/O Modules

750-551, 750-553, 750-555, 750-557, 750-559

Yes 12 12
No 0 8
D1 D1 D0 D0
D0 D0 D1 D1
D3 D3 D2 D2
D2 D2 D3 D3
D5 D5 D4 D4
D4 D4 D5 D5
D7 D7 D6 D6
D6 D6 D7 D7
Channel 1 - D1 - D0
- D0 - D1
Channel 2 - D3 - D2
- D2 - D3
Channel 3 - D5 - D4
- D4 - D5
Channel 4 - D7 - D6
- D6 - D7
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
I/O Modules • 127
5.2.18 Counter Modules

750-404

Yes 6 6
No (not possible) - -
Mapping
Channel 1 S C S C
- - - -
D3 D3 D0 D0
D2 D2 D1 D1
D1 D1 D2 D2
D0 D0 D3 D3
750-638

Yes 6 6
Mapping
D1 D1 D0 D0
D0 D0 D1 D1
D3 D3 D2 D2
D2 D2 D3 D3
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
128 • I/O Modules
5.2.19 PWM Module

750-511

Yes 6 6
Mapping
D1 D1 D0 D0
D0 D0 D1 D1
D3 D3 D2 D2
D2 D2 D3 D3
5.2.20 Stepper Controller

750-639

Yes 4 4
Mapping
- - - -
D1 D1 D0 D0
D0 D0 D1 D1
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
I/O Modules • 129
5.2.21 SSI Encoder Interface

750-630

Yes 6 6
No 4 0
Mapping with Register Communication (Alternative Format, Factory Setting)
D1 D1 D0 D0
D0 D0 D1 D1
- - - -
D3 D3 D2 D2
D2 D2 D3 D3
Mapping with Register Communication (Standard Format)
- - - -
D3 D3 D0 D0
D2 D2 D1 D1
D1 D1 D2 D2
D0 D0 D3 D3
Channel 1 D3 - D0 -
D2 - D1 -
D1 - D2 -
D0 - D3 -
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
130 • I/O Modules
5.2.22 Incremental Encoder Interface Modules

750-631, 750-634, 750-637

Yes 6 6
Mapping
D1 D1 D0 D0
D0 D0 D1 D1
S1* C1* S1* C1*
D3 D3 D2 D2
D2 D2 D3 D3
*
The 2. CONTROL- or STATUS-Byte is just available at 750-637.
5.2.23 Digital Impulse Interface Module

750-635

Yes 4 4
Mapping
D0 D0 D0 D0
D1 D1 D1 D1
D2 D2 D2 D2
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
I/O Modules • 131
5.2.24 Serial Interface Modules

750-650, 750-651, 750-653 (factory setting)

No 4 4
Mapping
Channel 1 S C S C
D0 D0 D0 D0
D1 D1 D1 D1
D2 D2 D2 D2
D3 (6) D3 (6) D3 (6) D3 (6)
D4 (6) D4 (6) D4 (6) D4 (6)
750-650/003-0??, 750-651/003-0??, 750-653/003-0?? (parameterizable)

Yes 4/6 4/6
Mapping
Channe1 S0 C0 S0 C0
D0 D0 D0 D0
D1 D1 D1 D1
*2) *2) *2)
D2 (4, 6) D2 (4, 6) D2 (4, 6) D2 (4, 6) *2)
D3 (6) *2) D3 (6) *2) D3 (6) *2) D3 (6) *2)
D4 (6) *2) D4 (6) *2) D4 (6) *2) D4 (6) *2)
*2)
The numbers in brackets stand for the projected data length.
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
132 • I/O Modules
5.2.25 Data Exchange Module

750-654

Yes 6 6
No 4 4
D0 D0 D1 D1
D1 D1 D0 D0
D2 D2 D2 D2
D3 D3 D4 D4
D4 D4 D3 D3
Channel 1 D0 D0 D1 D1
D1 D1 D0 D0
D3 D3 D4 D4
D4 D4 D3 D3
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
I/O Modules • 133
5.2.26 DALI/DSI-Master
750-641

Yes 6 6
Mapping
Data type MOTOROLA / INTEL
D0 D0 D0 D0
D1 D1 D1 D1
D2 D2 D2 D2
D3 D3 D3 D3
D4 D4 D4 D4
5.2.27 AS Interface Master

750-655

Yes 12, 20, 24, 32, 40, 48 12, 20, 24, 32, 40, 48
Mapping
E/A-area Input Output
Channel 1 S0 C0
- -
D0 D0
D1 D1
… …
D(n-1) D(n-1)
Dn Dn
n = 9, 17, 21, 29, 37, 45
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
134 • I/O Modules
5.2.28 PROFIsafe I/O Modules

750-660, 750-665, 750-666

No 5 5
Mapping
E/A-area Input Output
Channel 1 D0 D0
STATUS (PROFIsafe) CONTROL (PROFIsafe)
Consecutive number F-Module Consecutive number F-Host
CRC F-Module High Byte CRC F-Host High Byte
CRC F-Module Low Byte CRC F-Host Low Byte
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
I/O Modules • 135
PROFIBUS Identification Bytes of I/O Modules
5.3 PROFIBUS Identification Bytes of I/O Modules

5.3.1 Binary Input Modules
Order No. Description Module *-Module
750-400 2 DI/24 V DC/3.0 ms 0x10 0x00
750-401 2 DI/24 V DC/0.2 ms 0x10 0x00
750-402 4 DI/24 V DC/3.0 ms 0x10 0x00
750-403 4 DI/24 V DC/0.2 ms 0x10 0x00
750-405 2 DI/230 V AC/10 ms 0x10 0x00
750-406 2 DI/120 V AC/10 ms 0x10 0x00
750-407 2 DI/230 V AC/10 ms 0x10 0x00
750-408 4 DI/24 V DC/3.0 ms 0x10 0x00
750-409 4 DI/24 V DC/0.2 ms 0x10 0x00
750-410 2 DI/24 V DC/3.0 ms 0x10 0x00
750-411 2 DI/24 V DC/0.2 ms 0x10 0x00
750-412 2 DI/48 V DC/3.0 ms 0x10 0x00
750-413 2 DI/48 V DC/0.2 ms 0x10 0x00
750-414 4 DI/5 V DC/0.2 ms 0x10 0x00
750-415 4 DI/24 V AC/DC/20 ms 0x10 0x00
750-416 2 DI/120-230 V AC 0x10 0x00
750-418 2 DI/24 V DC DIA ACK 0x30 0x00
750-419 2 DI/24 V DC DIA 0x10 0x00
750-422 4 DI/24 V DC 0x10 0x00
750-423 4 DI/24 V AC/DC/50ms 0x10 0x00
750-424 4 DI/24 V DC 0x10 0x00
750-425 2 DI/24 V DC NAMUR 0x10 0x00
750-427 2 DI/110 V DC 0x10 0x00
750-428 4 DI/42 V AC/DC 0x10 0x00
750-430 8 DI/24 V DC/3.0 ms 0x10 -
750-431 8 DI/24 V DC/0.2 ms 0x10 -
750-432 4 DI/24 V DC/3.0 ms 0x10 0x00
750-433 4 DI/24 V DC/0.2 ms 0x10 0x00
750-435 1 DI/24 V DC EEx i 0x10 0x00
750-436 8 DI/24 V DC/3.0 ms 0x10 -
750-437 8 DI/24 V DC/0.2 ms 0x10 -
750-438 2 DI/24 V DC EEx i 0x10 0x00
750-4dd 2 DI 0x10 0x00
750-4dd 2 DI/DIA 0x10 0x00
750-4dd 4 DI 0x10 0x00
750-4dd 8 DI 0x10 -
750-4dd 16 DI 0x11 -
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
136 • I/O Modules
5.3.2 Binary Output Modules

750-501 2 DO/24 V DC/0.5 A 0x20 0x00
750-502 2 DO/24 V DC/2.0 A 0x20 0x00
750-504 4 DO/24 V DC/0.5 A 0x20 0x00
750-506 2 DO/4 DIA-DI/DIA 0x30 -
750-506 2 DO/24 V DC/0.5 A DIA 0x20 0x00
750-507 2 DO/2 DIA-DI/DIA 0x30 -
750-507 2 DO/24 V DC/2.0 A DIA 0x20 0x00
750-509 2 DO/230 V AC/0.3 A 0x20 0x00
750-512 2 DO Relay/250 V AC 0x20 0x00
750-513 2 DO Relay/250 V AC 0x20 0x00
750-514 2 DO Relay/125 V AC 0x20 0x00
750-516 4 DO/24 V DC/0.5 A 0x20 0x00
750-517 2 DO Relay/230 V AC 0x20 0x00
750-519 4 DO/5 V DC/20 mA 0x20 0x00
750-522 2 DO/2 DIA-DI/DIA 0x30 -
750-522 2 DO/230V AC/0.5 A DIA 0x20 0x00
750-523 1 DO/230V AC/16 A DIA 0x30 0x00
750-523 1 DO/230V AC/16 A DIA 0x20 0x00
750-530 8 DO/24 V DC/0.5 A 0x20 -
750-531 4 DO/24 V DC/0.5 A 0x20 0x00
750-532 4 DO/4 DIA-DI/DIA 0x30 -
750-532 4 DO/24 V DC/0.5 A DIA 0x20 0x00
750-535 2 DO/24V DC/0.5A EEx i 0x20 0x00
750-536 8 DO/24 V DC/0.5 A 0x20 -
750-537 8 DO/8 DIA-DI/DIA 0x30 -
750-537 8 DO/24 V DC/0.5 A DIA 0x20 -
750-5dd 2 DO 0x20 0x00
750-5dd 2 DO/2 DIA-DI/2 DIA 0x30 -
750-5dd 2 DO/2 DIA 0x20 0x00
750-5dd 2 DO/4DIA-DI/4 DIA 0x30 -
750-5dd 2 DO/4 DIA 0x20 0x00
750-5dd 4 DO 0x20 0x00
750-5dd 8 DO 0x20 -
750-5dd 8 DO/8DIA-DI/8 DIA 0x30 -
750-5dd 8 DO/8 DIA 0x20 -
750-5dd 16 DO 0x21 -
Buerkert
8644 2 DO 0x20 0x00
monost.
Buerkert
8644 3 DO 0x20 0x00
monost.
Buerkert
8644 4 DO 0x20 0x00
monost.
Buerkert
8644 4 DO 0x20 0x00
bistab.
Buerkert
0x20,0x00,
8644 8 DO V1 -
0x00,0x00
monost.
Buerkert
8644 8 DO V2 0x20 -
monost.
Buerkert
8644 16 DO 0x21 -
monost.
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
I/O Modules • 137
5.3.3 Supply Modules

750-610 P-Supply 24 V DC/DIA 0x00 -
750-610 Dia. Im PA 0x10 0x00
750-611 P-Supply 230 V AC/DIA 0x00 -
750-611 Dia. Im PA 0x10 0x00
5.3.4 Analog Input Modules

Order No. Description Module RA-Module
750-452 2 AI/0-20 mA/diff. 0x51 0xF2
750-453 4 AI/0-20 mA/SE 0x53 0xF5
750-454 2 AI/4-20 mA/diff. 0x51 0xF2
750-455 4 AI/4-20 mA/SE 0x53 0xF5
750-456 2 AI/+/-10 V/diff. 0x51 0xF2
750-457 4 AI/+/-10 V/SE 0x53 0xF5
750-459 4 AI/0-10 V/SE 0x53 0xF5
750-460 4 AI/RTD 0x53 0xF5
750-461 2 AI/RTD 0x51 0xF2
750-462 2 AI/TC 0x51 0xF2
750-463 4 AI/TC 0x53 0xF5
750-465 2 AI/0-20 mA/SE 0x51 0xF2
750-466 2 AI/4-20 mA/SE 0x51 0xF2
750-467 2 AI/0-10 V/SE 0x51 0xF2
750-468 4 AI/0-10 V/SE 0x53 0xF5
750-469 2 AI/TC/OCM 0x51 0xF2
750-472 2 AI/0-20 mA/OVLP 0x51 0xF2
750-474 2 AI/4-20 mA/OVLP 0x51 0xF2
750-475 2 AI/0-1 A AC/DC 0x51 0xF2
750-476 2 AI/+/-10 V 0x51 0xF2
750-477 2 AI/0-10 V AC/DC 0x51 0xF2
750-478 2 AI/0-10 V 0x51 0xF2
750-479 2 AI/+/-10 V 0x51 0xF2
750-480 2 AI/0-20 mA 0x51 0xF2
750-481 2AI/RTD EEx i 0x51 0xF2
750-483 2 AI/0-30 V DC 0x51 0xF2
750-485 2 AI/4-20 mA EEx i 0x51 0xF2
750-491 1 AI/DMS-Bridge 0x51 0xF2
750-492 2 AI/4-20 mA 0x51 0xF2
750-4aa 2 AI 0x51 0xF2
750-4aa 4 AI 0x53 0xF5
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
138 • I/O Modules
5.3.5 Analog Output Modules

750-550 2 AO/0-10 V 0x61 0xF2
750-551 4 AO/0-10 V 0x63 0xF5
750-552 2 AO/0-20 mA 0x61 0xF2
750-553 4 AO/0-20 mA 0x63 0xF5
750-554 2 AO/4-20 mA 0x61 0xF5
750-555 4 AO/4-20 mA 0x63 0xF5
750-556 2 AO/+/-10 V 0x61 0xF2
750-557 4 AO/+/-10 V 0x63 0xF5
750-559 4 AO/0-10 V 0x63 0xF5
750-560 2 AO/0-10 V 100mW 0x61 0xF2
750-585 2 AO/4-20 mA EEx i 0x61 0xF2
750-5aa 2 AO 0x61 0xF2
750-5aa 4 AO 0x63 0xF5
5.3.6 Special Modules

750-404 V/R-Counter 0xF2
750-511 2 DO 24 V DC/PWM 0xF2
750-630 SSI-Interface 0x93 0xF2
750-631 Encoder-Interface 0xB5
750-634 Encoder-Interface 0xB5
750-635 Dig. Impuls-Interface 0xB3
750-637 Encoder-Interface 0xF2
750-638 V/R-Counter 0xF2
750-639 2 DO 24 V DC/FM/PT 0xF1
750-641 DALI/DSI-Master 0xB5
750-650 RS232C-Intf. 5 Byte 0xB5
750-642 ENOCEAN RF-Modul 0xB3
750-650 RS232C-Intf. 3 Byte 0xB3
750-651 TTY-Interface 5 Byte 0xB5
750-651 TTY-Interface 3 Byte 0xB3
750-653 RS485-Interface 5 Byte 0xB5
750-653 RS485-Interface 3 Byte 0xB3
750-654 Data exchange module 0xF1
750-654 Data exchange module RA 0xF2
750-655 ASI-Master 12 Byte PA 0xC2,0x8B,0x8B,0x0A,0x0A
750-655 ASI-Master 20 Byte PA 0xC2,0x93,0x93,0x0A,0x0A
750-655 ASI-Master 24 Byte PA 0xC2,0x97,0x97,0x0A,0x0A
750-655 ASI-Master 32 Byte PA 0xC2,0x9F,0x9F,0x0A,0x0A
750-655 ASI-Master 40 Byte PA 0xC2,0xA7,0xA7,0x0A,0x0A
750-655 ASI-Master 48 Byte PA 0xC2,0xAF,0xAF,0x0A,0x0A
750-660 8 FDI/24 V DC 0xC4,0x84,0x84, -
0x05,0x0A,0x05,0x0A
750-665 4 FDO 0.5A/4 FDI 24V DC 0xC4,0x84,0x84, -
0x05,0x0A,0x05,0x0A
750-666 1 FDO 10°/2 FDI/2 FDO 0xC4,0x84,0x84, -
0x05,0x0A,0x05,0x0A
750-6aa SF 0xF2
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
I/O Modules • 139
5.4 Configuration and Parameterization of I/O Modules

Note
For simplification the tables only show the article number for the module
designation. The module „750-400“ thus corresponds to the module „750-400
2 DI/24 V DC/3.0 ms“
5.4.1 Digital I/O Modules

All binary I/O modules contain parameterization information extended by 3
bytes, to serve, amongst others, for identification on the internal bus and the
structure of the mapping table. With diagnostics capable terminals the diag-
nostics message can be suppressed or released for a channel or module. Binary
outputs offer the alternative to switch to parametrizable substitute values in
the case of a master failure.
5.4.1.1 2 DI I/O Modules

hex dec
750-400, 750-401, 750-405, 750-406, 750-410,
750-411, 750-412, 750-413, 750-416, 750-427, 0x10 16
750-435, 750-438, 750-4dd 2 DI
*750-400, *750-401, *750-405, *750-406, *750-410,
*750-411, *750-412, *750-413, *750-416, *750-427, 0x00 0
*750-435, *750-438, *750-4dd 2 DI

in [Bit] in [Bit]
Internal bus 2 0
PROFIBUS DP 2 0

I/O module is physically The I/O module process data is:
plug fitted*) - supplied by the I/O module
not plug fitted - set to zero by the coupler
*)
Default settings
Parameter
Offset Information
0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 Plug 0 0 0 0 0
1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
2 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Plug5 0 Module is physically not present

1 Module is physically present (default)
Italic Cannot be changed
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
140 • I/O Modules
5.4.1.2 2 DI I/O Modules with 1 Bit Diagnostics per Channel

hex dec
750-419, 750-425, 750-4dd 2 DI/DIA
0x30 48
Diagnostics in the input process image
750-419, 750-425, 750-4dd 2 DI/DIA 0x10 16
*750-419, *750-425, *750-4dd 2 DI/DIA 0x00 0

in [Bit] in [Bit]
Internal bus 4 0
PROFIBUS DP Diagnostics in the input process image
Yes 4 0
No 2 0

Diagnostics is mapped into the The diagnostics information of the I/O module
Input-PAB is
(only for *-Modules) released - mapped into the input process image
locked*) - not mapped into the input process image
Diagnostics channel x The diagnostics information of the correspond-
ing channel is
released - transmitted to PROFIBUS DP master
locked*) - not transmitted to PROFIBUS DP master
*)
Default settings
Parameter (up to Firmware 06)

Offset Information
0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 Plug 0 Diag Diag 0 1
En1 En0
1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1
2 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Parameter (from Firmware 07)

Offset Information
0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 Plug PA- 0 0 0 1
Diag
1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1
2 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 Diag 0 Diag
En1 En0
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
I/O Modules • 141

1 Module is physically present (default setting)
PA-Diag4 Diagnostics is mapped into the Input-PAB
(only for 0 locked
*-Modules) 1 released
DiagEn13 Diagnostics idle run, short circuit on channel 2
0 locked
1 released
0 locked
1 released
Italic cannot be changed
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
142 • I/O Modules

hex dec
750-402, 750-403, 750-408, 750-409, 750-414,
750-415, 750-422, 750-423, 750-424, 750-428, 0x10 16
750-432, 750-433, 750-4dd 4 DI
*750-402, *750-403, *750-408, *750-409, *750-414,
0x00
*750-415, *750-422, *750-423, *750-424, *750-428, 0
*750-432, *750-433, *750-4dd 4 DI

in [Bit] in [Bit]
Internal bus 4 0
PROFIBUS DP 4 0

*)
Default settings
Parameter
Offset Information
0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 Plug 0 0 0 0 1
1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
2 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
I/O Modules • 143
Identification Identification
Module
hex dec
750-430, 750-431, 750-436, 750-437, 750-4dd 8 DI 0x10 16

in [Bit] in [Bit]
Internal bus 8 0
PROFIBUS DP 8 0

I/O Module is physically The I/O module process data is:
*)
Default settings
Parameter
Offset Information
0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 Plug 0 0 0 1 1
1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
2 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
144 • I/O Modules
Module
hex dec
750-4dd 16 DI 0x11 17

in [Bit] in [Bit]
Internal bus 16 0
PROFIBUS DP 16 0

*)
Default settings
Parameter
Offset Information
0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 Plug 0 0 0 1 0
1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
2 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
I/O Modules • 145
5.4.1.6 2 DO I/O Modules
Module
hex dec
750-501, 750-502, 750-509, 750-512, 750-513,
750-514, 750-517, 750-535, 750-5dd 2 DO, 0x20 32
Buerkert 8644 monost. 2 DO
*750-501, *750-502, *750-509, *750-512, *750-513,
*750-514, *750-517, *750-535, *750-5dd 2 DO, 0x00 0
*Buerkert 8644 monost. 2 DO

in [Bit] in [Bit]
Internal bus 0 2
PROFIBUS DP 0 2

plug fitted*) - supplied to the I/O module
not plug fitted - ignored by the coupler
Substitute channel x If, in the case of a PROFIBUS DP fault, the
0*) switching of substitute values is enabled by the
1 coupler parameterization, this data is transmitted
to the periphery in the case of a fault.
*)
Default settings
Parameter
Offset Information
0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 Plug 0 0 0 0 0
1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
2 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 SV1 SV0

SV00 Substitute channel 1
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
146 • I/O Modules
5.4.1.7 2 (1) DO I/O Modules with 1 Bit Diagnostics per Channel
Module
hex dec
750-507, 750-522, 750-523 (1 DO),
750-5dd 2 DO/2 DIA-DI/2 DIA, 0x30 48
750-507, 750-522, 750-523 (1 DO),
0x20 32
750-5dd 2 DO/2 DIA
*750-507, *750-522, 750-523 (1 DO),
0x00 0
*750-5dd 2 DO/2 DIA

in [Bit] in [Bit]
Internal bus 2 2
Yes 2 (1) 2 (1)
No 0 2 (1)

Input-PAB is
(only for *-Modules) released*) - mapped into the input process image
locked - not mapped into the input process image
ing channel is
released*) - transmitted to PROFIBUS DP master
locked - not transmitted to PROFIBUS DP master
*)
Default settings

Offset Information
0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
En1 En0
1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
2 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 SV1 SV0

Offset Information
0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 Plug PA- 0 0 0 0
Diag
1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1
2 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 SV1 Diag SV0 Diag
En1 En0
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
I/O Modules • 147

(only for 0 locked
DiagEn02 Diagnostics (broken wire, overload or short circuit) on channel 1
0 locked
1 released
DiagEn13 Diagnostics (broken wire, overload or short circuit) on channel 2
0 locked
1 released
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
148 • I/O Modules
5.4.1.8 2 DO I/O Modules with 2 Bit Diagnostics per Channel

hex dec
750-506, 750-5dd 2 DO/4DIA-DI/4 DIA,
0x30 48
750-506, 750-5dd 2 DO/4 DIA 0x20 32
*750-506, *750-5dd 2 DO/4 DIA 0x00 0

in [Bit] in [Bit]
Internal bus 4 4
Yes 4 2
No 0 2

Input-PAB is
(only for*-Modules) released*) - mapped into the input process image
locked - not mapped into the input process image
ing channel is
released*) - transmitted to PROFIBUS DP master
locked - not transmitted to PROFIBUS DP master
*)
Default settings

Offset Information
0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
En1 En0
1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
2 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 SV1 SV0

Offset Information
0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 Plug PA- 0 0 0 1
Diag
1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1
2 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 SV1 Diag SV0 Diag
En1 En0
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
I/O Modules • 149

PA-Diag4 Diagnostics is mapped into Input-PAB
(only for 0 locked
DiagEn02 Diagnostics short circuit, undervoltage, broken wire, error on channel 1
0 locked
1 released
DiagEn13 Diagnostics short circuit, undervoltage, broken wire, error on channel 2
0 locked
1 released
SV00 Substitute value for channel 1
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
150 • I/O Modules
Module
hex dec
750-504, 750-516, 750-519, 750-5dd 4 DO,
Buerkert 8644 monost. 3 DO, Buerkert 8644 monost. 4 DO, 0x20 32
Buerkert 8644 bistab. 4 DO
*750-504, *750-516, *750-519, *750-5dd 4 DO,
*Buerkert 8644 monost. 3 DO, *Buerkert 8644 monost. 4 DO, 0x00 0
*Buerkert 8644 bistab. 4 DO

in [Bit] in [Bit]
Internal bus 0 4
PROFIBUS DP 0 4

*)
Default settings
Parameter
Offset Information
0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 Plug 0 0 0 0 1
1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
2 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 SV3 SV2 SV1 SV0

WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
I/O Modules • 151
5.4.1.10 4 DO I/O Module with 1 Bit Diagnostics per Channel

hex dec
750-532, 750-5dd 4 DO/4 DIA-DI/DIA,
0x30 48
750-532, 750-5dd 4 DO/4 DIA 0x20 32
*750-532, *750-5dd 4 DO/4 DIA 0x00 0

in [Bit] in [Bit]
Internal bus 4 4
Yes 4 4
No 0 4

Input-PAB is
(only for *-Modules) released - mapped into the input process image
ing channel is
*)
Default settings
Parameter
Offset Information
0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
PA-
0 0 Plug 0 0 0 1
Diag
1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1
2 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Diag Diag Diag Diag
SV3 SV2 SV1 SV0
En3 En2 En1 En0
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
152 • I/O Modules

(only for *- 0 locked
Module) 1 released
DiagEn04 Diagnostics error on channel 1
0 locked
1 released
0 locked
1 released
0 locked
1 released
0 locked
1 released
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
I/O Modules • 153

hex dec
750-530, 750-536, 750-5dd 8 DO,
0x20 32
Buerkert 8644 monost. 8 DO V2
Buerkert 8644 monost. 8 DO V1 0x20, 0x00,
32, 0, 0, 0
0x00, 0x00

in [Bit] in [Bit]
Internal bus 0 8
PROFIBUS DP 0 8

*)
Default settings
Parameter (750-530, 750-536, 750-5dd 8 DO ,

Buerkert 8644 monost. 8 DO V2)
Offset Information
0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 Plug 0 0 0 1 1
1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
2 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
SV7 SV6 SV5 SV4 SV3 SV2 SV1 SV0
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
154 • I/O Modules
Parameter (Buerkert 8644 monost. 8 DO V1)

Offset Information
0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
2 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 SV1 SV0
0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
2 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 SV3 SV2
0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
2 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 SV5 SV4
0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
2 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 SV7 SV6

WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
I/O Modules • 155
5.4.1.12 8 DO I/O Modules with 1 Bit Diagnostics per Channel

hex dec
750-537, 750-5dd 8 DO/8 DIA-DI/8 DIA,
0x30 48
750-537, 750-5dd 8 DO/8 DIA 0x20 32

in [Bit] in [Bit]
Internal bus 8 8
Yes 8 8
No 0 8

ing channel is
*)
Default settings
Parameter
Offset Information
0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
PA-
0 0 Plug 0 0 1 1
Diag
1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1
2 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Diag Diag Diag Diag
SV3 SV2 SV1 SV0
En3 En2 En1 En0
3 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Diag Diag Diag Diag
SV7 SV6 SV5 SV4
En7 En6 En5 En4
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
156 • I/O Modules

0 locked
1 released
0 locked
1 released
0 locked
1 released
0 locked
1 released
0 locked
1 released
0 locked
1 released
0 locked
1 released
0 locked
1 released
0 locked
1 released
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
I/O Modules • 157
Module
hex dec
750-5dd 16 DO, Buerkert 8644 monost. 16 DO 0x21 33

in [Bit] in [Bit]
Internal bus 0 16
PROFIBUS DP 0 16

*)
Default settings
Parameter
Offset Information
0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 Plug 0 0 0 1 0
1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0
2 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
2 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
158 • I/O Modules
5.4.1.14 2 DI/DO I/O Modules with 1 Bit Diagnostics per Channel

hex dec
750-418 0x30 48
*750-418 0x00 0

in [Bit] in [Bit]
Internal bus 4 4
Yes 4 2
No 2 2

Input-PAB is
released - mapped into the input process image
ing channel is
*)
Default settings

Offset Information
0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
En1 En0
1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1
2 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Offset Information
0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 Plug PA- 0 0 0 1
Diag
1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1
2 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 Diag 0 Diag
En1 En0
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
I/O Modules • 159

0 locked
1 released
0 locked
1 released
0 locked
1 released
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
160 • I/O Modules
5.4.1.15 Power Supply Modules with Diagnostics
Module Diagnostics Analysis Identification Identification

hex dec
Via PROFIBUS-DP- 0x00 0
Diagnostics telegram
750-610, 750-611
Via PROFIBUS-DP- 0x10 16
Process image 0x00 0

in [Bit] in [Bit]
Internal bus 2 0
PROFIBUS DP 0 (2) 0

Diagnostics field voltage failure The diagnostics information of the correspond-
Diagnostics fuse failure ing channel is
*)
Default settings

Offset Information
0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 Plug 0 Diag Diag 0 0 Diagnostics analysis via PROFIBUS-

En1 En0 DP-Diagnostics
1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Diagnostics analysis via PROFIBUS-
0 0 Plug 0 0 0 0 0 DP-Process image
1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
2 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Offset Information
0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 Plug 0 0 Diag 0 0 Diagnostics analysis via PROFIBUS-

En0 DP-Diagnostics
1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Diagnostics analysis via PROFIBUS-
0 0 Plug 0 0 0 0 0 DP-Process image
1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
2 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
I/O Modules • 161

DiagEn13 0 Diagnostics fuse breakage locked
1 Diagnostics fuse breakage released
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
162 • I/O Modules
5.4.2 Analog I/O Modules

All analog I/O modules have 2 bytes of extendable parameterization informa-
tion, which serves for identification on internal bus and the formation of a
mapping table.
Analog inputs are followed by 2 bytes reserved for future options. The diag-
nostics message can be suppressed or released for each individual channel by
means of modules capable of diagnostics.
Analog outputs have 2 byte parameterization data per channel. These are used
to save the substitute values for the related channel.
5.4.2.1 2 AI I/O Modules
Module Register Communication Identification Identification

possible? hex dec
750-452, 750-454, 750-456,
750-461, 750-462, 750-465, Yes 0xF2 242
750-466, 750-467, 750-469,
750-472, 750-474, 750-475,
750-476, 750-477, 750-478,
750-479, 750-480, 750-483, No 0x51 81
750-485, 750-491, 750-492,
750-4aa 2 AI

in [Byte] in [Byte]
Internal bus 6 6
PROFIBUS DP Register communication possible?
Yes 6 6
No 4 0

ing channel is
*)
Default settings
Parameter
Offset Information
0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
En1 En0
1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 1 ID5 ID4 ID3 ID2 ID1 ID0
2 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
reserved
3 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
reserved
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
I/O Modules • 163

DiagEn02 0 Diagnostics channel 1 locked
1 Diagnostics channel 1 released
ID5 .. ID0 Order number less 450 (e.g. 750-461 would be coded as (461-450) = 11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
164 • I/O Modules
5.4.2.2 4 AI I/O Modules

possible? hex dec
750-453, 750-455, 750-457, Yes 0xF5 245
750-459, 750-460, 750-463,
No 0x53 83
750-468, 750-4aa 4 AI

in [Byte] in [Byte]
Internal bus 12 12
Yes 12 12
No 8 0

ing channel is
*)
Default settings
Parameter
Offset Information
0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 Plug 0 Diag Diag Diag Diag
En1 En0 En3 En2
1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
2 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
reserved
3 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
reserved

WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
I/O Modules • 165
5.4.2.3 2 AO I/O Modules

possible? hex dec
750-550, 750-552, 750-554, Yes 0xF2 242
750-556, 750-560, 750-585,
No 0x61 97
750-5aa 2 AO

in [Byte] in [Bit]
Internal bus 6 6
Yes 6 6
No 0 4

ing channel is
0x0000 or 0x8000 switching of substitute values is enabled by the
0 or -32767 coupler parameterization, this data is transmitted
... 0x7FFF to the periphery in the case of a fault.
... 32767
*)
Default settings
Parameter
Offset Information
0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
En1 En0
1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
2 15 14 13 12 11 9 8 7
SubVal_Ch1_HB
3 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
SubVal_Ch1_LB
4 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
SubVal_Ch2_HB
5 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
SubVal_Ch2_LB
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
166 • I/O Modules

SubVal_Ch1 0x0000 Substitute value for channel 1
:
0x7FFF
or
0xFFFF
:
0x7FFF
or
0xFFFF
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
I/O Modules • 167
5.4.2.4 4 AO I/O Modules

possible? hex dec
750-551, 750-553, 750-557, Yes 0xF5 245
750-559, 750-5aa 4 AO No 0x63 99

in [Byte] in [Bit]
Internal bus 12 12
Yes 12 12
No 0 8

ing channel is
0x0000 or 0x8000 switching of substitute values is enabled by the
0 or -32767 coupler parameterization, this data is transmitted
... 0x7FFF to the periphery in the case of a fault.
... 32767
*)
Default settings
Parameter
Offset Information
0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 Plug 0 Diag Diag Diag Diag
En1 En0 En3 En2
1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
2 15 14 13 12 11 9 8 7
SubVal_Ch1_HB
3 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
SubVal_Ch1_LB
4 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
SubVal_Ch2_HB
5 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
SubVal_Ch2_LB
6 15 14 13 12 11 9 8 7
SubVal_Ch3_HB
7 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
SubVal_Ch3_LB
8 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
SubVal_Ch4_HB
9 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
SubVal_Ch4_LB
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
168 • I/O Modules

:
0x7FFF
or
0xFFFF
:
0x7FFF
or
0xFFFF
:
0x7FFF
or
0xFFFF
:
0x7FFF
or
0xFFFF
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
I/O Modules • 169
5.4.3 Digital Special Modules

All digital special modules have 2 byte of extended parameterization informa-
tion, used for the identification on the internal bus and the creation of a map-
ping table.
With input modules (counter), 2 bytes follow which are reserved for future op-
tions.
For output modules (PWM output) 6 byte parameterization data follow, used
amongst others for saving the substitute values for a maximum of 2 channels
(2 words).
5.4.3.1 Counter Modules

hex dec
750-404, 750-638 0xF2 242

in [Byte] in [Bit]
Internal bus 6 6
PROFIBUS DP Register communication
possible?
Yes 6 6
No - -

*)
Default settings
Parameter
Offset Information
0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 Plug 0 0 0 0 0
1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 ID 750-404
1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 ID 750-638
2 15 14 13 12 11 9 8 7
reserved
3 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
reserved

WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
170 • I/O Modules
5.4.3.2 PWM Module

hex dec
750-511 0xF2 242

in [Byte] in [Bit]
Internal bus 6 6
possible?
Yes 6 6
No - -

plug fitted*) - supplied by the I/O module or
supplied to the I/O module
not plug fitted - set to zero by the coupler or
ignored by the coupler
0x0000 *) switching of substitute values is enabled by the
... 0x7FFF coupler parameterization, this data is transmitted
*)
Default settings
Parameter
Offset Information
0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 Plug 0 0 0 0 0
1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1
2 15 14 13 12 11 9 8 7
reserved
3 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
reserved
4 15 14 13 12 11 9 8 7
SubVal_Ch1_HB
5 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
SubVal_Ch1_LB
6 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
SubVal_Ch2_HB
7 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
SubVal_Ch2_LB
SubVal_Ch1 0x0000 Substitute channel 1

:
0x7FFF
SubVal_Ch2 0x0000 Substitute channel 2
:
0x7FFF
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
I/O Modules • 171
5.4.3.3 Stepper Controller

hex dec
750-639 0xF1 241

in [Byte] in [Bit]
Internal bus 3 3
possible?
Yes 4 4
No - -

Plug fitted*) - supplied by the I/O module or
Diagnostic channel x The diagnostics information of the correspond-
ing channel is
*)
Default settings
Parameter
Offset Information
0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 Plug 0 0 Diag 0 0
En0
1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1
2 15 14 13 12 11 9 8 7
reserved
3 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
reserved

1 Module is physically present (default)
DiagEn02 0 Diagnostic channel 1 locked
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
172 • I/O Modules
5.4.4 Distance and Angle Measurement Modules

All interface modules for distance and angle measurement have 2 bytes of ex-
tended parameterization information used for the identification on internal bus
and the creation of the mapping table. 2 additional bytes follow which are re-
served for future options.
5.4.4.1 SSI Encoder Interface

possible? hex dec
Yes 0xF2 242
750-630
No 0x93 147

in [Byte] in [Bit]
Internal bus 6 6
possible?
Yes 6 6
No 4 -

ing channel is
*)
Default settings
Parameter
Offset Information
0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 Plug 0 0 Diag 0 0
En0
1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
2 15 14 13 12 11 9 8 7
reserved
3 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
reserved

DiagEn02 0 Diagnostics locked (default setting)
1 Diagnostics released
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
I/O Modules • 173
5.4.4.2 Incremental Encoder Interface

possible? hex dec
Yes 0xB5 181
750-631, 750-634, 750-637
No, not possible. - -

in [Byte] in [Bit]
Internal bus 6 6
possible?
Yes 6 6
No, not possible. - -

ing channel is
*)
Default settings
Parameter
Offset Information
0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 Plug 0 0 Diag 0 0
En0
1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
2 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
reserved
3 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
reserved

WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
174 • I/O Modules
5.4.4.3 Digital Impulse Interface

possible? hex dec
Yes 0xB3 179
750-635

in [Byte] in [Bit]
Internal bus 6 6
possible?
Yes 4 4

ing channel is
*)
Default settings
Parameter
Offset Information
0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 Plug 0 0 Diag 0 0
En0
1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1
2 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
reserved
3 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
reserved

WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
I/O Modules • 175
5.4.5 Serial Interfaces

All serial interface modules have 2 bytes of extended parameterization infor-
mation used for the identification on internal bus and the creation of the map-
ping table. 2 additional bytes follow which are reserved for future options.

possible? hex dec
750-650, 750-651, 750-653, Yes 0xB3 179
750-654 (3 byte data) No (not possible) - -
750-650, 750-651, 750-653, Yes 0xB5 181
750-654 (5 byte data) No (not possible) - -

in [Byte] in [Bit]
Internal bus 6 6
possible?
Yes 4 (6) 4 (6)

ing channel is
*)
Default settings
Parameter
Offset Information
0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 Plug 0 0 Diag 0 0
En0
1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
2 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
reserved
3 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
reserved

WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
176 • I/O Modules
5.4.6 Data Exchange Module

possible? hex dec
Yes 0xF2 242
750-654
No 0xF1 241

in [Byte] in [Bit]
Internal bus 6 6
possible?
Yes 6 6
No 4 4

ing channel is
*)
Default settings
Parameter
Offset Information
0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 Plug 0 0 Diag 0 0
En0
1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0
2 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
reserved
3 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
reserved

WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
I/O Modules • 177
5.4.7 ENOCEAN Receiver Module

possible? hex dec
Yes 0xB3 179
750-642

in [Byte] in [Bit]
Internal bus 6 6
possible?
Yes 4 4

ing channel is
*)
Default settings
Parameter
Offset Information
0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 Plug 0 0 Diag 0 0
En0
1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0
2 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
reserved
3 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
reserved

WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
178 • I/O Modules
5.4.8 DALI/DSI-Master
possible? hex dec
Yes 0xB5 181
750-641

in [Byte] in [Bit]
Internal bus 6 6
possible?
Yes 6 6

ing channel is
*)
Default settings
Parameter
Offset Information
0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 Plug 0 0 Diag 0 0
En0
1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
2 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
reserved
3 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
reserved

WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
I/O Modules • 179

possible? hex dec
750-655 (12 Byte) 0xC2, 0x8B, 0x8B, 0x0A, 0x0A 194, 139, 139, 10, 10
750-655 (20 Byte) 0xC2, 0x93, 0x93, 0x0A,0x0A 194, 147, 147, 10, 10
750-655 (24 Byte) 0xC2, 0x97, 0x97, 0x0A, 0x0A 194, 151, 151, 10, 10
Yes
750-655 (32 Byte) 0xC2, 0x9F, 0x9F, 0x0A, 0x0A 194, 159, 159, 10, 10
750-655 (40 Byte) 0xC2, 0xA7, 0xA7, 0x0A, 0x0A 194, 167, 167, 10, 10
750-655 (48 Byte) 0xC2, 0xAF, 0xAF, 0x0A, 0x0A 194, 175, 175, 10, 10
750-655 ( n Byte) No (not possible) - -

in [Byte] in [Bit]
Internal bus 12, 20, 24, 32, 40, 48 12, 20, 24, 32, 40, 48
possible?
Yes 12, 20, 24, 32, 40, 48 12, 20, 24, 32, 40, 48

Mailbox length The length of the acyclic channel (mailbox) is
no acyclic channel 0 byte
6 byte*) 6 byte
10 byte 10 byte
12 byte 12 byte (from 20 byte data length)
18 byte 18 byte (from 20 byte data length)
Cross-fading mailbox The process data is by the acyclic channel
(mailbox)
locked*) - not superposed
released - superposed
ing channel is
*)
Default settings
Parameter
Offset Information
0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 Plug 0 0 Diag 0 0
En0
1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
2 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Process image length in byte
3 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
OVL Acyclic channel length in byte
4 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
5 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
180 • I/O Modules

OVL7 0 The acyclic channel cannot interfere with the process data
1 The acyclic channel can interfere with the process data
Acyclic chan- 0 No acyclic channel
nel length 6 6 byte acyclic channel
10 10 byte acyclic channel l
12 12 byte acyclic channel (from 20 byte data length)
18 18 byte acyclic channel (from 20 Byte data length)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
I/O Modules • 181

Register Communication Identification Identification
Module
possible? hex dec
0xC4, 0x84, 0x84, 196, 132, 132,
No
750-660, 750-665, 750-666 0x05, 0x0A, 0x05, 0x0A 5, 10, 5, 10
Input Image Output Image

Process Image
in [Byte] in [Bit]
Internal bus 8 8
possible?
No 5 5

ing channel is
*)
Default settings
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
182 • I/O Modules
Parameter
Offset Information
0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 Plug 0 0 Diag 0 0
En0
1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
2 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Block length in byte
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0
4 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
Block module PROFIsafe
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1
5 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
PROFIsafe module slot
F_Slot
6 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Specifier
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 F_Chk F_Chk F_Prm_Flag1

F_CRC_Len F_SIL _iPar SeqNo
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
F_Prm_Flag2
F_Par_Ver F_Block_ID 0 0 0
9 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
F_Src_Addr_High
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
F_Source_Address (1...65534)
10
F_Src_Addr_Low
11 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
F_Dst_Addr_High
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
F_Destination_Address (1...65534)
12
F_Dst_Addr_Low
13 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
F_WD_Time_High
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
F_Watchdog_Time in ms (1…65535)
14
F_WD_Time_Low
15 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
F_CRC_High
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
F_Parameter_CRC (CRC1)
16
F_CRC_Low

F_Slot 2..63 PROFIsafe module slot
F_ChkSeqNo 0 The consecutive number is not considered in the CRC2 calculation
1 The consecutive number is considered in the CRC2 calculation
F_Chk_iPar 0 no i-Parameter
F_SIL 0..3 SIL-Class
0 SIL1
1 SIL2
2 SIL3
3 none
F_CRC_Len 1 2-Byte CRC because of a user data length of less than 12 byte
F_Block_ID 0 F-Host/F-Slave-Communication-Connection
F_Par_Ver7..6 0 Valid for PROFIsafe profile versions 1.00 – 1.99
F_Src_Addr 1..65534 PROFIsafe-Address of the F-Host
F_Dst_Addr 1..65534 PROFIsafe-Address of the F-Slave
F_WD_Time 150..10000 PROFIsafe-Watchdog-Time in ms
F_CRC any PROFIsafe-CRC
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
I/O Modules • 183
Acyclic communication according to DP/V1
5.5 Acyclic communication according to DP/V1


'0010.0000' Input data channel 1 MSAC1/2_Read / 1 bit (byte)
'1010.0000' Input data module MSAC1/2_Read / 1 byte
5.5.2 2 DI I/O Modules with 1 Bit Diagnostics per Channel

'0000.0000' Diagnostics data channel 1 MSAC1/2_Read / 2 byte

WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
184 • I/O Modules


WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
I/O Modules • 185

'0100.0000' Output data channel 1 MSAC1/2_Read,
MSAC2_Write / 1 bit (byte)
'1100.0000' Output data module MSAC1/2_Read,
MSAC2_Write / 1 byte
5.5.7 2 DO I/O Modules with 1 or 2 Bit Diagnostics per Channel
Index Meaning Service Primitives / Data length

'0000.0000' Diagnostics data channel 1 MSAC1/2_Read / 2 bytes
'0000.0001' Diagnostics data channel 2 MSAC1/2_Read / 2 bytes
'0010.0000' *) Input data channel 1 MSAC1/2_Read / 1 bit (byte)
'1010.0000' *) Input data module MSAC1/2_Read / 1 byte
*) These indices are only available when the mapping of diagnostics data into the input
process image is enabled

WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
186 • I/O Modules
5.5.9 4 DO I/O Modules with 1 Bit Diagnostics per Channel

WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
I/O Modules • 187

WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
188 • I/O Modules
5.5.11 8 DO I/O Modules with 1 Bit Diagnostics per Channel

WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
I/O Modules • 189

WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
190 • I/O Modules
5.5.13 2 DI/DO I/O Modules with 1 Bit Diagnostics per Channel

MSAC1/2_Write / 1 bit (byte)
MSAC1/2_Write / 1 bit (byte)
MSAC1/2_Write / 1 byte
5.5.14 Supply Module with Diagnostics

'0000.0000' Diagnostics data MSAC1/2_Read / 2 byte
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
I/O Modules • 191

'0000.0000' Table 0 / register 0 MSAC1/2_Read,
... ... ...
'0011.1011' Table 0 / register 0…58 MSAC1/2_Read,
'0011.1101' Input data channel 1 MSAC1/2_Read / 2 byte
'0011.1110' *) Output data channel 1 MSAC1/2_Read,
... ... ...
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
192 • I/O Modules

... ... ...
... ... ...
... ... ...
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
I/O Modules • 193

... ... ...
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
194 • I/O Modules

... ... ...
'0011.1101' *) Input data channel 1 MSAC1/2_Read
... ... ...
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
I/O Modules • 195

... ... ...
... ... ...
... ... ...
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
196 • I/O Modules

... ... ...
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
I/O Modules • 197
5.5.19 Counter Module 750-404

... ... ...
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
198 • I/O Modules
5.5.20 Counter Module 750-638 and PWM Module 750-511

... ... ...
... ... ...
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
I/O Modules • 199
5.5.21 SSI Interface

... ... ...
5.5.22 Incremental Encoder Interfaces and Serial Interfaces

... ... ...
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
200 • I/O Modules
5.5.23 Digital Impulse Interface

... ... ...
5.5.24 Serial Interfaces and Data Exchange Module

... ... ...
'0011.1101' Input data channel 1 MSAC1/2_Read / 4 or 6 byte
MSAC2_Write / 4 or 6 byte
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
I/O Modules • 201
5.5.25 DALI/DSI Master

... ... ...

... ... ...
'0011.1101' Input data channel 1 MSAC1/2_Read / n byte
(n ∈ {12, 20, 24, 32, 40, 48})
MSAC2_Write / n byte
(n ∈ {12, 20, 24, 32, 40, 48})
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
202 • I/O Modules

... ... ...
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
Use in Hazardous Environments • 203
Foreword
6 Use in Hazardous Environments

6.1 Foreword
Today’s development shows that many chemical and petrochemical
companies have production plants, production, and process automation
machines in operation which use gas-air, vapor-air and dust-air mixtures
which can be explosive. For this reason, the electrical components used in
such plants and systems must not pose a risk of explosion resulting in injury to
persons or damage to property. This is backed by law, directives or regulations
on a national and international scale. WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 (electrical
components) is designed for use in zone 2 explosive environments. The
following basic explosion protection related terms have been defined.
6.2 Protective Measures

Primarily, explosion protection describes how to prevent the formation of an
explosive atmosphere. For instance by avoiding the use of combustible
liquids, reducing the concentration levels, ventilation measures, to name but a
few. But there are a large number of applications, which do not allow the
implementation of primary protection measures. In such cases, the secondary
explosion protection comes into play. Following is a detailed description of
such secondary measures.
6.3 Classification Meeting CENELEC and IEC

The specifications outlined here are valid for use in Europe and are based on
the following standards: EN50... of CENELEC (European Committee for
Electrotechnical Standardization). On an international scale, these are
reflected by the IEC 60079-... standards of the IEC (International
Electrotechnical Commission).
6.3.1 Divisions
Explosive environments are areas in which the atmosphere can potentially
become explosive. The term explosive means a special mixture of ignitable
substances existing in the form of air-borne gases, fumes, mist or dust under
atmospheric conditions which, when heated beyond a tolerable temperature or
subjected to an electric arc or sparks, can produce explosions. Explosive zones
have been created to describe the concentrations level of an explosive
atmosphere. This division, based on the probability of an explosion occurring,
is of great importance both for technical safety and feasibility reasons.
Knowing that the demands placed on electrical components permanently
employed in an explosive environment have to be much more stringent than
those placed on electrical components that are only rarely and, if at all, for
short periods, subject to a dangerous explosive environment.
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
204 • Use in Hazardous Environments
Classification Meeting CENELEC and IEC
Explosive areas resulting from gases, fumes or mist:
• Zone 0 areas are subject to an explosive atmosphere

(> 1000 h /year) continuously or for extended periods.
• Zone 1 areas can expect the occasional occurrence of an explosive
atmosphere (> 10 h ≤ 1000 h /year).
• Zone 2 areas can expect the rare or short-term occurrence of an explosive
Explosive areas subject to air-borne dust:
• Zone 20 areas are subject to an explosive atmosphere

(> 1000 h /year) continuously or for extended periods.
• Zone 21 areas can expect the occasional occurrence of an explosive
• Zone 22 areas can expect the rare or short-term occurrence of an explosive
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
6.3.2 Explosion Protection Group

In addition, the electrical components for explosive areas are subdivided into
two groups:
Group I: Group I includes electrical components for use in fire-damp

endangered mine structures.
Group II: Group II includes electrical components for use in all other
explosive environments. This group is further subdivided by
pertinent combustible gases in the environment.
Subdivision IIA, IIB and IIC takes into account that
different materials/substances/gases have various ignition
energy characteristic values. For this reason the three sub-
groups are assigned representative types of gases:
IIA – Propane
IIB – Ethylene
IIC – Hydrogen
Tab. 6-1: Minimal ignition energy of representative types of gases
Minimal Ignition Energy of Representative Types of Gases

Explosion group I IIA IIB IIC
Gases Methane Propane Ethylene Hydrogen
Ignition energy (µJ) 280 250 82 16
Hydrogen being commonly encountered in chemical plants, frequently the

explosion group IIC is requested for maximum safety.
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
6.3.3 Unit Categories

Moreover, the areas of use (zones) and the conditions of use (explosion
groups) are subdivided into categories for the electrical operating means:
Tab. 6-2: Unit categories
Unit Explosion Area of use

category group
M1 I Fire-damp protection
M2 I Fire-damp protection
1G II Zone 0 Explosive environment by gas, fumes or mist
1D II Zone 20 Explosive environment by dust
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
6.3.4 Temperature Classes

The maximum surface temperature for electrical components of explosion
protection group I is 150 °C (danger due to coal dust deposits) or 450 °C (if
there is no danger of coal dust deposit).
In line with the maximum surface temperature for all ignition protection types,
the electrical components are subdivided into temperature classes, as far as
electrical components of explosion protection group II are concerned. Here the
temperatures refer to a surrounding temperature of 40 °C for operation and
testing of the electrical components. The lowest ignition temperature of the
existing explosive atmosphere must be higher than the maximum surface
temperature.
Tab. 6-3: Temperature classes
Temperature Classes Maximum Surface Ignition Temperature

Temperature of the Combustible Materials
T1 450 °C > 450 °C
T2 300 °C > 300 °C to 450 °C
T3 200 °C > 200 °C to 300 °C
T4 135 °C > 135 °C to 200 °C
T5 100 °C >100 °C to 135 °C
T6 85°C > 85 °C to 100 °C
The following table represents the division and attributes of the materials to
the temperature classes and material groups in percent:
Tab. 6-4: Material groups in percent
Temperature classes
T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 Total*
26.6 % 42.8 % 25.5 %
94.9 % 4.9 % 0% 0.2 % 432
Explosion group
IIA IIB IIC Total*
85.2 % 13.8 % 1.0 % 501
*
Number of classified materials
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
6.3.5 Types of Ignition Protection

Ignition protection defines the special measures to be taken for electrical
components in order to prevent the ignition of surrounding explosive
atmospheres. For this reason a differentiation is made between the following
types of ignition protection:
Tab. 6-5: Types of Ignition Protection
Identifi- CENELEC IEC Explanation Application

cation standard standard
EEx o EN 50 015 IEC 79-6 Oil encapsulation Zone 1 + 2
EEx p EN 50 016 IEC 79-2 Overpressure Zone 1 + 2
encapsulation
EEx q EN 50 017 IEC 79-5 Sand encapsulation Zone 1 + 2
EEx d EN 50 018 IEC 79-1 Pressure resistant Zone 1 + 2
encapsulation
EEx e EN 50 019 IEC 79-7 Increased safety Zone 1 + 2
EEx m EN 50 028 IEC 79-18 Cast encapsulation Zone 1 + 2
EEx i EN 50 020 (unit) IEC 79-11 Intrinsic safety Zone 0 + 1 + 2
EN 50 039 (system)
EEx n EN 50 021 IEC 79-15 Electrical components Zone 2
for zone 2 (see below)
Ignition protection “n" describes exclusively the use of explosion protected

electrical components in zone 2. This zone encompasses areas where
explosive atmospheres can only be expected to occur rarely or short-term. It
represents the transition between the area of zone 1, which requires an
explosion protection and safe area in which for instance welding is allowed at
any time.
Regulations covering these electrical components are being prepared on a

world-wide scale. The standard EN 50 021 allows electrical component
manufacturers to obtain certificates from the corresponding authorities for
instance KEMA in the Netherlands or the PTB in Germany, certifying that the
tested components meet the above mentioned standards draft.
Type “n” ignition protection additionally requires electrical components to be

marked with the following extended identification:
• A – non spark generating (function modules without relay /without

switches)
• AC – spark generating, contacts protected by seals (function

modules with relays / without switches)
• L – limited energy (function modules with switch)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
Classifications Meeting the NEC 500
For more detailed information please refer to the national and/or international
standards, directives and regulations!
6.4 Classifications Meeting the NEC 500

The following classifications according to NEC 500 (National Electric Code)
are valid for North America.
6.4.1 Divisions
The "Divisions" describe the degree of probability of whatever type of
dangerous situation occurring. Here the following assignments apply:
Explosion endangered areas due to combustible gases, fumes, mist and dust:
Division 1 Encompasses areas in which explosive atmospheres are to be expected
occasionally (> 10 h ≤ 1000 h /year) as well as continuously and long-term
(> 1000 h /year).
Division 2 Encompasses areas in which explosive atmospheres can be expected rarely
and short-term (>0 h ≤ 10 h /year).
6.4.2 Explosion Protection Groups

Electrical components for explosion endangered areas are subdivided in three
danger categories:
Class I (gases and fumes): Group A (Acetylene)

Group B (Hydrogen)
Group C (Ethylene)
Group D (Methane)
Class II (dust): Group E (Metal dust)
Group F (Coal dust)
Group G (Flour, starch and cereal dust)
Class III (fibers): No sub-groups
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
Classifications Meeting the NEC 500
6.4.3 Temperature Classes

Electrical components for explosive areas are differentiated by temperature
classes:
Temperature classes Maximum Ignition temperature

surface temperature of the combustible materials
T1 450 °C > 450 °C
T2 300 °C > 300 °C to 450 °C
T2A 280 °C > 280 °C to 300 °C
T2B 260 °C > 260 °C to 280 °C
T2C 230 °C >230 °C to 260 °C
T2D 215 °C >215 °C to 230 °C
T3 200 °C >200 °C to 215 °C
T3A 180 °C >180 °C to 200 °C
T3B 165 °C >165 °C to 180 °C
T3C 160 °C >160 °C to 165 °C
T4 135 °C >135 °C to 160 °C
T4A 120 °C >120 °C to 135 °C
T5 100 °C >100 °C to 120 °C
T6 85 °C > 85 °C to 100 °C
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
Identification
6.5 Identification
6.5.1 For Europe
According to CENELEC and IEC
Explosion protection group Unit category
Community symbol for

explosion protected
electrical components
II 3 G
KEMA 01ATEX1024 X
EEx nA II T4 Temperature class
Approval body and/or number of

the examination certificate
Explosion protection group

E = conforming with European standards
Ex = explosion protected component
n = Type of ignition Extended identification
ITEM-NO.:750-400
2DI 24V DC 3.0ms
55°C max ambient
Hansastr. 27
2
D-32423 Minden 0.08-2.5mm
AWG 28-14
24V DC
2101--02----03
0V 24V DI1
24246
Di2
PATENTS PENDING
op temp code T4A
II 3 G
KEMA 01ATEX1024 X
Grp. A B C D
CL I DIV 2
EEx nA II T4
Fig. 6-1: Example for lateral labeling of bus modules

(750-400, 2 channel digital input module 24 V DC) g01xx03e
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
Identification
6.5.2 For America

According to NEC 500
Explosion protection group Area of application (zone)

(condition of use category)
Explosion group CL I DIV 2

(gas group) Grp. ABCD
optemp code T4A Temperature class
ITEM-NO.:750-400
2DI 24V DC 3.0ms
55°C max ambient
Hansastr. 27
2
D-32423 Minden 0.08-2.5mm
AWG 28-14
24V DC
4100--02----03
0V 24V DI1
24246
Di2
PATENTS PENDING
op temp code T4A
II 3 G
KEMA 01ATEX1024 X
Grp. A B C D
CL I DIV 2
EEx nA II T4
Fig. 6.5.2-1: Example for lateral labeling of bus modules

(750-400, 2 channel digital input module 24 V DC) g01xx04e
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
Installation Regulations
6.6 Installation Regulations

In the Federal Republic of Germany, various national regulations for the
installation in explosive areas must be taken into consideration. The basis
being the ElexV complemented by the installation regulation DIN VDE
0165/2.91. The following are excerpts from additional VDE regulations:
DIN VDE 0100 Installation in power plants with rated voltages up to

1000 V
DIN VDE 0101 Installation in power plants with rated voltages above
1 kV
DIN VDE 0800 Installation and operation in telecommunication plants

including information processing equipment
DIN VDE 0185 lightning protection systems
The USA and Canada have their own regulations. The following are excerpts
from these regulations:
NFPA 70 National Electrical Code Art. 500 Hazardous Locations
ANSI/ISA-RP Recommended Practice

12.6-1987
C22.1 Canadian Electrical Code
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
Installation Regulations
Danger
When using the WAGO-I/O SYSTEM 750 (electrical operation) with Ex
approval, the following points are mandatory:
The field bus independent I/O System Modules Type 750-xxx are to be
installed in enclosures that provide for the degree of ingress protection of at
least IP54.
For use in the presence of combustible dust, the above mentioned modules
are to be installed in enclosures that provide for the degree of ingress
protection of at least IP64.
The field bus independent I/O system may only be installed in hazardous
areas (Europe: Group II, Zone 2 or America: Class I, Division 2, Group A, B,
C, D) or in non-hazardous areas!
Installation, connection, addition, removal or replacement of modules, field

bus connectors or fuses may only take place when the system supply and the
field supply are switched off, or when the area is known to be non-hazardous.
Ensure that only approved modules of the electrical operating type will be
used. The Substitution or Replacement of modules can jeopardize the
suitability of the system in hazardous environments!
Operation of intrinsically safe EEx i modules with direct connection to

sensors/actuators in hazardous areas of Zone 0 + 1 and Division 1 type
requires the use of a 24 V DC Power Supply EEx i module!
DIP switches and potentiometers are only to be adjusted when the area is
known to be non-hazardous.
Proof of certification is available on request.
Also take note of the information given on the module technical information
sheet.
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus Sytem
Index • 215
7 Index
Labeling · 211, 212
C Internal Bus Fault · 103
Carrier Rail · 26, 29 L

Contacts
Data · 30 Locking Disc · 28
Power · 37
M
D
Manufacturing Number · 23
Data Contacts · 30
P
E
Power Contacts · 31, 37
Example Application · 67 not carried out · 38
Process data channel configuration · 72
F
U
Fieldbus Failure · 103
Unlocking Lug · 28
I Update-Matrix · 24
I/O Modules · 110
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Bus System
WAGO Kontakttechnik GmbH & Co. KG
Postfach 2880 • D-32385 Minden
Hansastraße 27 • D-32423 Minden
Phone: 05 71/8 87 – 0
Fax: 05 71/8 87 – 1 69
E-Mail: info@wago.com
Web: http://www.wago.com

4 30345 03 Unidades Extrangeiras Da Construcao

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

4 30345 03 Unidades Extrangeiras Da Construcao

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

03.

Unidades extrangeiras da construção

Flow sensor in robust

stainless steel housing.

Simple, fast and flexible mounting.

Fluid sensors and diagnostic systems

M12 connector · output function

Dimensions Further technical data

Pressure resistance [bar] 30

Power-on delay time [s] 15

Operating temperature [°C] -25...80

Switch point setting

Adapter, M18 x M1.5 - G1/2 E40096 Socket, M12,

Flow adapter (for low

For further technical data please go to: www.ifm-electronic.com

1: LED display 2: setting pushbutton

Operating voltage [V] 19...36 DC

Max. temperature gradient of

Remarks *) for water; 5...100 cm/s; 25°C (factory setting)

• Steigt die Strömungsgeschwindigkeit, ändert sich der Schaltzustand

S Low Flow High

Adernfarben bei ifm-Kabeldosen:

LED = grün LED = orange LED = rot

Low Flow High Low Flow High

Sie können die Werkseinstellung jederzeit wieder herstellen (→ Seite 9).

Führen Sie folgende Schritte aus:

High Flow-Abgleich (optional)

Führen Sie folgende Schritte aus:

Führen Sie folgende Schritte aus:

Fehler beim Abgleich

LED 0 blinkt: Aktuelle Strömung weit unterhalb

LED = grün LED = orange LED = rot

Das Gerät entspricht der Norm EN 61000-6-2

S Low Flow High

D = pipe diameter; S = sources of interference

Disconnect power before connecting the unit :

Core colours of ifm sockets:

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Short circuit at the switching output

LED = green LED = orange LED = red

The unit is delivered with the following factory setting: monitoring

Low Flow High Low Flow High

High flow adjustment (optional)

LED 9 lights, after approx. 5 s it flashes.

Error during adjustment

LED 0 flashes: current flow much below the

Display OFF Operating voltage too low (<19 V) or

Ensure a correct voltage supply.

LED = green LED = orange LED = red

The sensor conforms to the standard EN 61000-6-2

Remarques sur la sécurité

• Si le débit augmente, l'état de commutation change quand le seuil

Le temps de réponse typique de l’appareil est de 1...10 s. Il peut être

Possible dans certaines applications

S Low Flow High

D = diamètre du tuyau ; S = parasites

Mettre l'installation hors tension avant le raccordement de l'appareil :

couleurs des connecteurs femelles ifm :

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Court-circuit sur la sortie de commutation.

LED = verte LED = orange LED = rouge

L’appareil est fourni avec les valeurs suivantes réglées en usine :

Low Flow High Low Flow High

Procéder comme suit :

Réglage du débit maximum (option)